Musicians Guide

(For PC3LE6, PC3LE7, and PC3LE8)

KurzweilisaregisteredtrademarkofYoungChangCo.,Ltd.2011Allrightsreserved.YoungChang,Kurzweil,V.A.S.T.,PC3LE, PC3, XPro, PC3K, KDFX, Pitcher, and LaserVerb, KSP8 , K2661, K2600, K2500, and K2000 are trademarks of Young Chang Co., Ltd. All other products and brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Product featuresandspecificationsaresubjecttochangewithoutnotice. Youmaylegallyprintuptotwo(2)copiesofthisdocumentforpersonaluse.Commercialuseofanycopiesofthisdocument isprohibited.YoungChangCo.retainsownershipofallintellectualpropertyrepresentedbythisdocument.

910520-004 V2 May 2011

CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL

The lightning flash with the arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.

IMPORTANT SAFETY & INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS
WARNING: When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following: 1. Read all of the Safety and Installation Instructions and Explanation of Graphic Symbols before using the product. 2. This product must be grounded. If it should malfunction or break down, grounding provides a path of least resistance for electric current to reduce the risk of electric shock. This product is equipped with a power supply cord having an equipment-grounding conductor and a grounding plug. The plug must be plugged into an appropriate outlet which is properly installed and grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordinances. DANGER: Improper connection of the equipment-grounding conductor can result in a risk of electric shock. Do not modify the plug provided with the product - if it will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician. Do not use an adaptor which defeats the function of the equipment-grounding conductor. If you are in doubt as to whether the product is properly grounded, check with a qualified serviceman or electrician. 3. WARNING: This product is equipped with an AC input voltage selector. The voltage selector has been factory set for the mains supply voltage in the country where this unit was sold. Changing the voltage selector may require the use of a different power supply cord or attachment plug, or both. To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, refer servicing to qualified maintenance personnel. 4. Do not use this product near water - for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, or the like. 5. This product should only be used with a stand or cart that is recommended by the manufacturer. 6. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and speakers or headphones, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. 7. 8. 9. 10. The product should be located so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. The product should be located away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, or other products that produce heat. The product should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on the product. This product may be equipped with a polarized line plug (one blade wider than the other). This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the plug. The power supply cord of the product should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time. When unplugging the power supply cord, do not pull on the cord, but grasp it by the plug. Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through openings. The product should be serviced by qualified service personnel when: A. The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the product; C. The product has been exposed to rain; D. The product does not appear to be operating normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; E. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged. Do not attempt to service the product beyond that described in the user maintenance instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. WARNING: Do not place objects on the products power supply cord, or place the product in a position where anyone could trip over, walk on, or roll anything over cords of any type. Do not allow the product to rest on or be installed over cords of any type. Improper installations of this type create the possibility of a fire hazard and/or personal injury.

11.

12. 13.

14.

15.

RADIO AND TELEVISION INTERFERENCE

WARNING: Changes or modifications to this instrument not expressly approved by Young Chang could void your authority to operate the instrument. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or other equipment use only high quality shielded cables. NOTE: This instrument has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This instrument generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this instrument does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the instrument off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the instrument and the receiver. Connect the instrument into an outlet on a circuit other than the one to which the receiver is connected. If necessary consult your dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. NOTICE This apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. AVIS Le present appareil numerique nemet pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de la class B prescrites dans le Reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des Communications du Canada.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

ii

Important Safety Instructions

Readtheseinstructions Keeptheseinstructions. Heedallwarnings. Followallinstructions. Donotusethisapparatusnearwater. Cleanonlywithdrycloth. Donotblockanyoftheventilationopenings.Installinaccordancewiththemanufacturers instructions. 8) Donotinstallnearanyheatsourcessuchasradiators,heatregisters,stoves,orotherappara tus(includingamplifiers)thatproduceheat. 9) Donotdefeatthesafetypurposeofthepolarizedorgroundingtypeplug.Apolarizedplug hastwobladeswithonewiderthantheother.Agroundingtypeplughastwobladesanda thirdgroundingprong.Thewidebladeorthethirdprongareprovidedforyoursafety.Ifthe providedplugdoesnotfitintoyouroutlet,consultanelectricianforreplacementoftheobso leteoutlet. 10) Protectthepowercordfrombeingwalkedonorpinched,particularlyatplugs,convenience receptacles,andthepointwheretheyexitfromtheapparatus. 11) Onlyuseattachments/accessoriesspecifiedbythemanufacturer. 12) Useonlywithacart,stand,tripod,bracket,ortablespecifiedbytheman ufacturer,orsoldwiththeapparatus.Whenacartisused,usecaution whenmovingthecart/apparatuscombinationtoavoidinjuryfromtip over. 13) Unplugthisapparatusduringlightningstormsorwhenunusedforlong periodsoftime. 14) Referallservicingtoqualifiedservicepersonnel.Servicingisrequiredwhentheapparatus hasbeendamagedinanyway,suchaspowersupplycordorplugisdamaged,liquidhas beenspilledorobjectshavefallenintotheapparatus,theapparatushasbeenexposedtorain ormoisture,doesnotoperatenormally,orhasbeendropped. Warning:Toreducetheriskoffireorelectricshock,donotexposethisapparatustorainormois ture.Donotexposethisequipmenttodrippingorsplashingandensurethatnoobjectsfilledwith liquids,suchasvases,areplacedontheequipment. TocompletelydisconnectthisequipmentfromtheACMains,disconnectthepowersupplycord plugfromtheACreceptacle. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)

iii

Kurzweil International Contacts

ContacttheKurzweilofficelistedbelowtolocateyourlocalKurzweilrepresentative. AmericanMusic&Sound 5304DerryAvenue#C AgouraHills California91301USA telephone:(800)9944984 fax:(818)5970411 Email:Info@AmericanMusicAndSound.com

KurzweilCo.,LTD iParkBuilding#102,Floor9 JeongjaDong9,BundangGu SoungnamShi,GyeonggiDo463859 SouthKorea www.ycpiano.co.kr www.youngchang.com www.kurzweil.com

TECHNICALSUPPORT Email:support@Kurzweil.com

iv

Table Of Contents
KurzweilInternationalContacts......................................................................................................................................iv

Chapter 1

Introduction

SoundsandFeatures .......................................................................................................................................................11 KeepingCurrent ..............................................................................................................................................................12 OverviewofthePC3LE...................................................................................................................................................12 HowthePC3LEWorks ...................................................................................................................................................12 V.A.S.T.Synthesis.............................................................................................................................................................12 KB3ToneWheelEmulation ...........................................................................................................................................13 KVAPrograms..................................................................................................................................................................13 HowtoUseThisManual ................................................................................................................................................13 DoIHaveEverything?....................................................................................................................................................13 BootLoader.......................................................................................................................................................................13 Options ..............................................................................................................................................................................14 Pedals..........................................................................................................................................................................14 USBStorageDevice ..................................................................................................................................................14

Chapter 2

Startup

MakeConnections ...........................................................................................................................................................21 MakeMusic.......................................................................................................................................................................21 StartuptheDetails ........................................................................................................................................................22 BeforeYouStart... .....................................................................................................................................................22 ConnectingthePowerCable(LineCord) .............................................................................................................22 ConnectingAudioCables........................................................................................................................................22 ConnectingMIDI ......................................................................................................................................................23 Pedals..........................................................................................................................................................................23 SwitchingOnthePower ..........................................................................................................................................24 USBStoragePort.......................................................................................................................................................24 USBComputerPort ..................................................................................................................................................25 PC3LEPrograms ..............................................................................................................................................................26 SelectingPrograms ...................................................................................................................................................26 EasyAudition............................................................................................................................................................26 ProgramModeDisplay ...........................................................................................................................................26 V.A.S.T.Programs .....................................................................................................................................................27 KB3Programs............................................................................................................................................................27 Setups ................................................................................................................................................................................28 QuickAccess.....................................................................................................................................................................28 TheOtherModes .............................................................................................................................................................29 SoftwareUpgrades ..........................................................................................................................................................29

Chapter 3

User Interface Basics

ModeSelection .................................................................................................................................................................31 ModeButtons ...................................................................................................................................................................32 AssignableControls ........................................................................................................................................................32 Pads....................................................................................................................................................................................33

AssignableSwitches ........................................................................................................................................................33 TheSaveButton ...............................................................................................................................................................33 CategoryButtons .............................................................................................................................................................34 PickingFavorites.......................................................................................................................................................34 PitchWheelandModWheel .........................................................................................................................................35 Navigation ........................................................................................................................................................................36 TheDisplay................................................................................................................................................................36 Pages ...........................................................................................................................................................................36 TheTopLine..............................................................................................................................................................36 TheBottomLine........................................................................................................................................................36 TheSoftButtons........................................................................................................................................................37 TheCursorButtons ..................................................................................................................................................37 TheChan/ZoneButtons...........................................................................................................................................38 TheEditButton .........................................................................................................................................................38 TheExitButton .........................................................................................................................................................38 DataEntry .........................................................................................................................................................................39 TheAlphaWheel ......................................................................................................................................................39 The/+Buttons .........................................................................................................................................................39 TheAlphanumericPad ............................................................................................................................................39 DoubleButtonPresses ...........................................................................................................................................311 IntuitiveControllerSelection/DataEntry...................................................................................................................312 Search...............................................................................................................................................................................312 QuickSongRecordingandPlayback..........................................................................................................................313

Chapter 4

The Operating Modes

WhattheModesAre .......................................................................................................................................................41 SelectingModes ...............................................................................................................................................................41 FindingSquareOne..................................................................................................................................................42 UsingtheModes ..............................................................................................................................................................42 ProgramMode ..........................................................................................................................................................42 SetupMode................................................................................................................................................................42 QuickAccessMode ..................................................................................................................................................43 MasterMode .............................................................................................................................................................43 SongMode .................................................................................................................................................................43 StorageMode ............................................................................................................................................................43

Chapter 5

Editing Conventions

IntroductiontoEditing ...................................................................................................................................................51 WhatsanObject?......................................................................................................................................................51 ObjectTypeandID ..........................................................................................................................................................52 SavingandNaming.........................................................................................................................................................53 ROMObjects .............................................................................................................................................................54 MemoryObjects ........................................................................................................................................................54 KeyboardNaming ....................................................................................................................................................55 DeletingObjects ...............................................................................................................................................................56 DependentObjects ...................................................................................................................................................56 SavingandLoadingFilesStorageMode...................................................................................................................56

ii

Chapter 6

Program Mode

TheProgramModePage ................................................................................................................................................62 SelectingPrograms ...................................................................................................................................................62 EasyAudition............................................................................................................................................................62 PickingFavoritePrograms ......................................................................................................................................62 TheSoftButtonsinProgramMode .......................................................................................................................63 SavingControllerSettings.......................................................................................................................................63 ArpeggiatorSettings(ArpSettingsButton)..........................................................................................................64 Split/LayerButton.....................................................................................................................................................64 TapTempoButton ....................................................................................................................................................64 V.A.S.T.andKB3Programs ............................................................................................................................................65 KB3EffectsAndRealtimeControls......................................................................................................................66 TheProgramEditor .........................................................................................................................................................69 ThePARAMETERSPage .........................................................................................................................................69 TheBASICPage ......................................................................................................................................................611 ThePADSPage .......................................................................................................................................................612 TheEFFECTS(FX)Page.........................................................................................................................................613 TheARPEGGIATOR1&2Pages(ARP1,ARP2) .............................................................................................615 TheProgramEditorUtilitySoftButtons.............................................................................................................615 TheV.A.S.T.SoftButton.........................................................................................................................................616

Chapter 7

Setup Mode

Split/LayerButton............................................................................................................................................................72 AddingaSplitZone .................................................................................................................................................72 AddingaLayerZone ...............................................................................................................................................74 TapTempoButton............................................................................................................................................................74 TheSetupEditor ..............................................................................................................................................................75 TheChannel/Program(CH/PROG)Page76 Program......................................................................................................................................................................76 Destination.................................................................................................................................................................76 Channel ......................................................................................................................................................................77 MidiBank....................................................................................................................................................................77 MIDIProgram(MidiProg) ......................................................................................................................................77 Status ..........................................................................................................................................................................78 InputChannel ...........................................................................................................................................................78 MIDIBankMode(BankMode) ...............................................................................................................................79 EntryProgramChange(EntryProgChg)...............................................................................................................79 Arpeggiator ...............................................................................................................................................................79 Controllers(CTRLS)Page710 Knobs,CCPedal,Modwheel,Pitchbendup/dn(PitchWheel,)Pressure ......................................................711 SWPedal1&2,Arp.switch,Arp.latchsw,Switch110..................................................................................714 Pads...........................................................................................................................................................................716 TheControllerDestinationList ............................................................................................................................718 ShiftKeyNumber,ShiftKey(ShKeyNum,ShiftKey) .......................................................................................723 ThePan/Volume(PAN/VOL)Page726 EntryVolume,ExitVolume...................................................................................................................................726 EntryPan,ExitPan .................................................................................................................................................726 TheKey/Velocity(KEYVEL)Page727 LowKey(LoKey),HighKey(HiKey) .................................................................................................................727 Transpose .................................................................................................................................................................728

iii

NoteMap .................................................................................................................................................................728 VelocityScale(VelScale) ........................................................................................................................................729 VelocityOffset(VelOffset) .....................................................................................................................................730 VelocityCurve(VelCurve).....................................................................................................................................732 LowVelocity(LoVel),HighVelocity(HiVel).......................................................................................................734 TheARPEGGIATOR&ARPEGGIATOR2(ARP1,ARP2)Pages735 TheARPEGGIATORPage.....................................................................................................................................735 TheARPEGGIATOR2Page..................................................................................................................................742 RealtimeControlofArpeggiatorParameters ...................................................................................................746 Riffs748 TheRIFF1Page .......................................................................................................................................................748 TheRIFF2Page .......................................................................................................................................................751 RealtimeControlofRiffParameters...................................................................................................................756 TheBENDPage757 BendRange(Semitones)andBendRange(Cents):UpandDown .................................................................757 TheFXPages:FX,AUXFX1,AUXFX2759 EffectsOverview.....................................................................................................................................................759 TheFXPage .............................................................................................................................................................761 TheAUXFX1andAUXFX2Pages ........................................................................................................................762 TheCOMMONPage763 Tempo.......................................................................................................................................................................763 ClockSource ............................................................................................................................................................764 ArpeggiatorGlobal(ArpGlobal) ..........................................................................................................................764 AuxFXChannel......................................................................................................................................................764 KB3Channel............................................................................................................................................................764 TRIGGERKEYS(KEYTRG)764 TheSetupEditorUtilitySoftButtons765 Name ........................................................................................................................................................................765 Save...........................................................................................................................................................................765 Delete........................................................................................................................................................................765 NewZone(NewZn) ...............................................................................................................................................765 DuplicateZone(DupZn) .......................................................................................................................................765 ImportZone(ImpZn).............................................................................................................................................765 DeleteZone(DelZn)...............................................................................................................................................766 SetControlsKB3(KB3CTL) ..................................................................................................................................766 SetControlsZoneMutes(MUTES)......................................................................................................................766 RecordingASetupToSongMode ..............................................................................................................................767 TheControlSetup..........................................................................................................................................................769

Chapter 8

Quick Access Mode

SoftButtonsInQuickAccessMode.......................................................................................................................82 TheQAEditor ..................................................................................................................................................................82

Chapter 9

Master Mode

MasterModePage1(MAST1) ......................................................................................................................................91 Tune ............................................................................................................................................................................92 Transpose ...................................................................................................................................................................92 Tempo.........................................................................................................................................................................92 VelocityMap(VelMap)(Master) ...........................................................................................................................93

iv

PadsVelocityMap(PadVelMap)............................................................................................................................94 PressureMap(PressMap)(Master).......................................................................................................................95 Intonation...................................................................................................................................................................96 IntonationKey(Int.Key)..........................................................................................................................................97 MasterModePage2(MAST2) ......................................................................................................................................98 ClockSource ..............................................................................................................................................................98 DigitalOutputVolume(Dig.OutVol) ...................................................................................................................98 FXMode.....................................................................................................................................................................98 OS/ObjectVer(OperatingSystem/ObjectVersion)..............................................................................................99 DefaultSong ..............................................................................................................................................................99 OutputClock .............................................................................................................................................................99 DrumRemap .............................................................................................................................................................99 GeneralMIDI.............................................................................................................................................................99 DemoButton ...........................................................................................................................................................910 ButtonsMode ..........................................................................................................................................................911 MIDITransmit(XMIT) ..................................................................................................................................................912 Destination...............................................................................................................................................................912 Channel ....................................................................................................................................................................913 Transpose .................................................................................................................................................................913 VelocityMap(Transmit) ........................................................................................................................................914 PressureMap(Transmit) .......................................................................................................................................915 ProgramChange(ProgChange) ...........................................................................................................................916 ChangeSetups(ChgSetups)..................................................................................................................................916 MIDIReceive(RECV)....................................................................................................................................................917 BasicChannel ..........................................................................................................................................................917 MIDIReceiveMode(MIDIMode) .......................................................................................................................917 VelocityMap(Receive) ..........................................................................................................................................918 PressureMap(Receive) .........................................................................................................................................919 AllNotesOff ...........................................................................................................................................................920 ProgramChangeMode(PrgChgMode) ..............................................................................................................920 SystemExclusiveID(SysExID) ............................................................................................................................920 BankSelect ...............................................................................................................................................................920 LocalKeyboardChannel(LocalKbdCh) .............................................................................................................921 ProgramChangeFormats.............................................................................................................................................925 ExtendedProgramChanges .................................................................................................................................925 SoftButtonsInMasterMode .......................................................................................................................................926 Reset..........................................................................................................................................................................926 Delete........................................................................................................................................................................926 UTILITIES .......................................................................................................................................................................926 MIDI..........................................................................................................................................................................927 VOICES ....................................................................................................................................................................927 About........................................................................................................................................................................927 OBJECT ....................................................................................................................................................................928 Loader.......................................................................................................................................................................929

Chapter 10 Song Mode and the Song Editor

GettingStartedwiththeSequencer ............................................................................................................................101 WhatisaSequencer?..............................................................................................................................................101 SongMode:TheMAINPage .......................................................................................................................................101 CurrentSong(CurSong) ........................................................................................................................................102

Tempo.......................................................................................................................................................................102 RecordingTrack(RecTrk) ......................................................................................................................................103 Program(Prog) .......................................................................................................................................................103 TrackNumber(Trk:#).............................................................................................................................................103 Volume(Vol)............................................................................................................................................................104 Pan ............................................................................................................................................................................105 Mode.........................................................................................................................................................................106 Location(Locat) ......................................................................................................................................................106 ModeIndicators(+andx): ....................................................................................................................................106 ActivityIndicators ..................................................................................................................................................106 TrackStatusIndicators...........................................................................................................................................107 TrackChannels........................................................................................................................................................107 SoftButtonsontheMAINPage ........................................................................................................................... 107 TheSaveChangesDialog ......................................................................................................................................109 SongMode:TheBIGPage ..........................................................................................................................................1010 TimeIn ...................................................................................................................................................................1011 TimeOut ................................................................................................................................................................1011 SongEnd ................................................................................................................................................................1011 Loop........................................................................................................................................................................1011 RecMode ................................................................................................................................................................1011 Metron ....................................................................................................................................................................1011 SongMode:TheFXPages ..........................................................................................................................................1012 SongMode:TheMIXERPage ....................................................................................................................................1012 TheRec,Play,andStopSoftButtons .................................................................................................................1012 TheKeepSoftButton ...........................................................................................................................................1013 TheDoneSoftButton ...........................................................................................................................................1013 SongMode:TheMETRONOMEPage......................................................................................................................1013 Metronome ............................................................................................................................................................1013 CountOff ................................................................................................................................................................1013 Program..................................................................................................................................................................1014 Channel ..................................................................................................................................................................1014 StrongNote............................................................................................................................................................1014 StrongVel...............................................................................................................................................................1014 SoftNote ................................................................................................................................................................1014 SoftVel ...................................................................................................................................................................1014 TheRec,Play,andStopSoftButtons .................................................................................................................1014 TheDoneSoftButton ...........................................................................................................................................1014 SongMode:TheFilterPages(RECFLTandPLYFLT).............................................................................................1015 Notes.......................................................................................................................................................................1015 LoKey .....................................................................................................................................................................1015 Hi.............................................................................................................................................................................1015 LoVel.......................................................................................................................................................................1016 Hi.............................................................................................................................................................................1016 Controllers .............................................................................................................................................................1016 Controller...............................................................................................................................................................1016 LoVal.......................................................................................................................................................................1016 Hi.............................................................................................................................................................................1016 PitchBend ...............................................................................................................................................................1016 ProgChange ...........................................................................................................................................................1016 MonoPress .............................................................................................................................................................1016 PolyPress ................................................................................................................................................................1016

vi

TheRec,Play,andStopSoftButtons .................................................................................................................1016 TheDoneSoftButton ...........................................................................................................................................1017 SongMode:TheMISCPage .......................................................................................................................................1017 ControlChase........................................................................................................................................................1017 Quant ......................................................................................................................................................................1017 Grid.........................................................................................................................................................................1018 Swing ......................................................................................................................................................................1018 Release....................................................................................................................................................................1018 KeyWait.................................................................................................................................................................1018 SongMode:TheSTATSPage .....................................................................................................................................1018 TheSongEditor............................................................................................................................................................1019 SongEditor:TheCOMMONPage ............................................................................................................................1019 Tempo.....................................................................................................................................................................1020 TimeSig...................................................................................................................................................................1020 FXTrack .................................................................................................................................................................1020 DrumTrack(DrumTrk) ........................................................................................................................................1020 MIDIDestination(MidiDst)................................................................................................................................1020 SoftButtonsontheCOMMONPage .................................................................................................................1021 SongEditor:TheTRACKPage ..................................................................................................................................1021 CommonParametersforEditSong:TrackFunctions .....................................................................................1022 Region/CriteriaBoxParameters .........................................................................................................................1022 SoftButtonsontheTRACKPage .......................................................................................................................1023 SongEditor:TrackFunctions .....................................................................................................................................1024 Erase .......................................................................................................................................................................1024 Copy .......................................................................................................................................................................1024 Bounce ....................................................................................................................................................................1025 Insert .......................................................................................................................................................................1026 Delete......................................................................................................................................................................1026 Quantize.................................................................................................................................................................1027 Shift.........................................................................................................................................................................1028 Transpose ...............................................................................................................................................................1028 Grab ........................................................................................................................................................................1029 Change ...................................................................................................................................................................1030 Remap.....................................................................................................................................................................1031 SongEditor:TheEVENTPage...................................................................................................................................1031 InitialProgram,Volume,Pan..............................................................................................................................1032 Location..................................................................................................................................................................1032 Bar,Beat,andTick ................................................................................................................................................1032 EventTypeandValue ..........................................................................................................................................1032 SoftButtonsontheEVENTPage .......................................................................................................................1033 TempoTrack ..........................................................................................................................................................1033

Chapter 11 Storage Mode

StorageModePage ........................................................................................................................................................111 UsingUSBDevices .................................................................................................................................................112 StorageModeCommonFeatures ................................................................................................................................114 Directories................................................................................................................................................................114 Path ...........................................................................................................................................................................114 CommonDialogs ....................................................................................................................................................115 TheSTOREPage ............................................................................................................................................................116

vii

TheStoreAdvancedPage......................................................................................................................................116 TheLOADPage .............................................................................................................................................................118 LoadingIndividualObjects...................................................................................................................................119 LoadingMethods..................................................................................................................................................1110 TheUtilities(UTILS)Page ..........................................................................................................................................1110 SoftButtonsontheUtilitiesPage .......................................................................................................................1110 Export ............................................................................................................................................................................1111 Format ...........................................................................................................................................................................1111

Chapter 12 Keymap and Sample Editing

TheKeymapEditor .......................................................................................................................................................121 KeymapEditorParameters ...................................................................................................................................123 TheSoftButtonsintheKeymapEditor...............................................................................................................125 SpecialDoubleButtonPressesintheKeymapEditor.......................................................................................126 BuildingaKeymap ........................................................................................................................................................127 EditingSamples .............................................................................................................................................................129 TheMiscellaneous(MISC)Page ........................................................................................................................... 129 TheTRIMPage......................................................................................................................................................1212

Chapter 13 Tutorial: Song Mode

Part1:AssignInstrumentsToTracks ..................................................................................................................132 Part2:SetTheTempo.............................................................................................................................................133 Part3:RecordYourFirstTrack,SaveTheSong .................................................................................................134 Part4:RecordAdditionalTracks..........................................................................................................................137 Part5:FixingMistakes ...........................................................................................................................................138 Part6:AdjustingTheVolumeOfEachInstrument .........................................................................................1310 Part7:LearningMoreAboutSongMode .........................................................................................................1315

Chapter 14 Tutorials: Setup Mode

TheSetupEditor ............................................................................................................................................................143 UsingAndEditingASplitProgramSetup ................................................................................................................144 UsingSetupModeToPlayLayersOfInstruments ..................................................................................................148 AdjustingTheVolumeAndPanOfZones ..............................................................................................................1410 AssigningMultipleKnobsToControlVolumeInDifferentZones......................................................................1412 AssigningASingleKnobToControlRelativeVolumeInDifferentZones ........................................................1416 OffsetMethod .......................................................................................................................................................1416 ScaleMethod .........................................................................................................................................................1420 AssigningASingleKnobtoCrossfadeBetweenTheVolumeOfDifferentZones............................................1424 SwitchBetweenZonesBasedOnPlayedKeyboardVelocity................................................................................1429 CreatingANewSetup ................................................................................................................................................1432 BasicsOfUsingRiffs ...................................................................................................................................................1435 AddingARiff,SyncRiffs ....................................................................................................................................1435 TransposingARiffAsItIsTriggered ................................................................................................................1442 UsingASingleSongForMultipleRiffs ............................................................................................................1446

Chapter 15 Power User Tips

GeneralTips....................................................................................................................................................................152 SetTheStartupProgramAndMIDIChannel...................................................................................................152

viii

PickingFavoriteProgramsForEachCategory ..................................................................................................152 EasyAudition(PlayADemoSongForEachProgram) ...................................................................................153 ProgramModeGeneralTips.................................................................................................................................153 AdvancedTips ...............................................................................................................................................................154 IntuitiveControllerSelection/DataEntry ...........................................................................................................154 SearchFunction(FindAProgramOrSetupByName) ....................................................................................154 QuickSongRecordingAndPlayback(RecordAnIdeaFromAnyMode) ...................................................155 ProgramMode ........................................................................................................................................................156 SetupMode..............................................................................................................................................................158

Appendix A Specifications
MIDIImplementationChart .........................................................................................................................................A1 Specifications ...................................................................................................................................................................A2

Appendix B PC3LE Bootloader

UsingtheBootloaderMenu ................................................................................................................................... B1 UpdatingPC3LESoftwareandObjects................................................................................................................ B2 RunDiags ................................................................................................................................................................. B3 SystemReset............................................................................................................................................................. B3 FileUtilities............................................................................................................................................................... B3

Appendix C PC3LE Legacy File Conversion

ObjectTypesandConversionDetails .......................................................................................................................... C1 KeymapObjects ....................................................................................................................................................... C1 ProgramObjects....................................................................................................................................................... C1 SetupObjects ............................................................................................................................................................ C2

Index

ix

Introduction Sounds and Features

Chapter 1 Introduction
ThankyouforpurchasingthePC3LE.ThePC3LEisaperformanceinstrumentdesignedforfun andfastoperationonstage,inthestudio,andathome.ThePC3LEisavailablein61,76,and88 keymodelsknownasthePC3LE6,PC3LE7,andPC3LE8respectively.Thisguidecanbeusedfor foranyofthesemodels,andreferstoallmodelsasthePC3LE. ThePC3LEgivesyouaccesstomanyofthesamerealisticsoundsandusefulfeaturesthatare foundinKurzweilspowerfulPC3,withthebenefitofastreamlinedinterface.WiththePC3LE youcanquicklyselectsounds,customizethemwiththeturnofaknob,andsavetheresultwith twobuttonpresses.WehopethatthePC3LEwillbecomeavaluablemusicaltoolthatyouwill useforyearstocome. ReadthisguidetolearnhowtogetthemostoutofyourPC3LE.Thischapterwillgiveyouan overviewofthePC3LEscapabilities.Readchapters2and3,StartupandUserInterfaceBasicsto startusingthePC3LErightaway.Experiencedusersmaywishtobrowsethetopicsin Chapter 15,PowerUserTips.OnceyougetfamiliarwithusingthePC3LEyouwillbeabletotake controlofyoursoundandquicklytransitionfrominspirationtoperformance.

Sounds and Features

Over1000presetsounds(playrealsampledinstrumentssounds,simulatedtonewheel organs,orvirtualanalogsynthesissounds.) 8assignablepads(velocitysensitive,usethesetoplaydrumsorothersounds,triggernote sequenceswithriffs,orcontrolotherfunctions.) Assignableknobs(usetheshiftbuttontoaccess3differentfunctionsforeachknobto controlupto15parameters.) Convenientknobpresets(eachpresethasitsownknobassignmentsforeffectsandother parameterssoyoucaneasilyadjustthesettingsofanysound.Viewtheassignmentofthe lastmovedknobontheleftoftheprogramwindow,orpresstheInfosoftbuttontosee destinationsforallcontrolsthatareassigned.) Assignableswitches(usetheshiftbuttontoaccess2differentfunctionsforthe5assignable switchestocontrolupto10parameters,(plustwomoreparameterscanbecontrolledusing theassignableArpEnableandArpLatchbuttons.)Usethesetoenableordisableeffects, mutelayersofsound,orcontrolotherfunctions.) Easycontrollerassignment(inProgrammodepresstheEditbutton,thenthePARAMSsoft button.OntheParameterspage,selectaparametertocontrolfromthelist,highlightthe controlsourcecolumn,thenassignacontrolbyholdingtheEnterbuttonandtouchingthe drumpad,knob,switch,orothercontrolthatyouwishtoassign.) Easilysetfavoritesounds(foreachcategoryofsounds,makeyourfavoriteprogramget selectedfirstwhenyoupressitscategorybutton.Justselectyourfavoriteprogramina categoryandholditscategorybuttonforafewseconds.) Split/Layerbutton(pressthisbuttontoquicklycreatesetupsthatsplitthekeyboardinto rangesofdifferentinstrumentsounds,orlayerinstrumentsoundsonthesamekeys.) ArpSettingsbutton(easilyaccessthearpeggiatorsettingsforacompletesetof arpeggiatorparameters.) Savebutton(saveyoursettingswithtwoeasybuttonpresses.)

1-1

Introduction Keeping Current

ThePC3LEcontainsmanyofthesamesoundsasthePC3.Thisincludesdetailedacousticand electricpianos,richorchestralsounds,andmanyotherinstrumentsfromKurzweilsextensive samplecollections.ThePC3LEcomeswithover1000instrumentprograms,allofwhichcanbe editedorcopiedtoauserprogramtocustomizeyoursound.Inadditiontosamplebased programs,thePC3LEincludesKurzweilsKB3organsimulatorforrealistictonewheelorgan soundsaswellasKVAoscillatorsforvirtualanalogsynthesis. ThePC3LEincludesmanyhardwarefeaturesdesignedforliveperformance.Therearefive knobs,eachofwhichcanbeassignedto3separateparameters(eachparameteraccessed throughuseofashiftbutton,)allowingforthecontrolofatotalof15parameters.Thereareeight drumpadswhichareassignabletonotesorcontrolfunctions.ThePC3LEalsoincludes12 assignableswitches,modandpitchwheels,aswellasinputsforfootswitchesandanexpression pedal.

Keeping Current
Checkfornewdocumentationandoperatingsystemupgradesbeforeyoustartusingyour instrument.WhennewsoftwareisavailableforthePC3LE,itwillbepostedat www.kurzweil.com.YoucanusethePC3LEsBootLoader(describedinthismanual)toeasily upgradeyourinstrumentwithnewsoftwareandsounds,whichwillbereleasedperiodicallyby Kurzweil.

Overview of the PC3LE

ThePC3LEs1000+programsincludesamplesfromourPC2sBaseROM,OrchestralROM, ClassicKeysROM,andanewStringSectionsROM,aswellassupportforGeneralMIDI.Multi zoneperformancesetupsarealsoprovided;manyofthesesetupsusenotetriggerstoplay factoryrecordedriffsandarpeggiationsthatprovideinstantgroovesandbackingparts.Anon boardsequencer(Songmode)withfrontpaneltransportbuttonsletsyourecordyourmusical ideasanytimeinspirationstrikes. ThePC3LEhas64voicepolyphonywith16multitimbralchannels,sothatdifferentprograms canbeplayedoneachMIDIchannel.ThePC3LEfeaturesaworldclasseffectsprocessorwhich providesmultiplesimultaneouseffects,alongwithrealtimeeffectscontrolviathefrontpanel controlsorMIDI. Forbackup,storage,andmovingfiles,thePC3LEfeaturestwoUSBportsontherearpanel.A USBstorageportallowsyoutoconnectaUSBdevicesuchasathumbdrive,andasecondUSB ComputerportletsyouconnectthePC3LEtoacomputerforfiletransferandMIDIconnectivity.

How the PC3LE Works

ThePC3LEintegratesakeyboard,highqualitysamples,apowerfulsynthesisengineandahigh endeffectsprocessor.MIDIeventsgeneratedbyplayingthekeyboardcausethesoundengineto triggersamplesoroscillatorswhicharethenprocessedbyKurzweilspowerfulV.A.S.T.digital signalprocessing.TheresultingsoundisthenroutedthroughthePC3LEseffectsandtothe audiooutputs.

V.A.S.T. Synthesis
ThePC3LEsusesKurzweilsVariableArchitectureSynthesisTechnology(V.A.S.T.)toprocess samplesandoscillatorswithavarietyofpowerfuldigitalsignalprocessing(DSP)toolsand functions.Allofthishappensunderthehood,soyoudonthavetoworryabouthowthe soundyouareusingisconstructedinordertomodifyit.ThePC3LEgivesyoueasyaccesstoa Programsrelevantparametersviathefrontpanelknobsandbuttons,allowingyoutoeasily modifyaprogramwithouthavingtonavigatethroughaseriesofmenus.ForfurtherProgram modification,thePC3LEfeaturesasimplifiedProgramEditor.Forthosewhoneedmoreediting options,usethesimplifiedProgramEditortoentertheV.A.S.T.ProgramEditor,whichallows youtoaccessmostofthesameV.A.S.T.parametersthatareavailableinthePC3.

1-2

Introduction KB3 Tone Wheel Emulation

KB3 Tone Wheel Emulation

InadditiontosampleplaybackandV.A.S.T.synthesis,thePC3LEfeaturesKurzweilsKB3organ simulator,whichisdesignedtoemulatethesignaturesoundofclassictonewheelorganslike theHammondB3.Thefiveknobs(whichcancontrol15parameterswiththeShiftbutton)onthe PC3LEsfrontpanelproviderealtimecontrolfor9virtualdrawbars.ThePC3LEsassignable switchescontrolrotaryspeakerspeed,percussionvolumeanddurationandchorus/vibrato settings,allofwhicharesilkscreenedonthefrontpanel. YoucanfindKB3programsbypressingtheOrgancategorybuttonwhileinProgrammode.The programsthatuseKB3modewilllighttheKB3LEDtotheleftoftheknobs,indicatingthatthe PC3LEsknobsandswitchesarenowdedicatedtotheorgancontrolsthatarelabeledonthe frontpanel.

KVA Programs
TheKVA(KurzweilVirtualAnalog)programsincludedwiththePC3LEofferrealistic emulationsofclassicanalogsynthesizers,builtfromKurzweilsuniqueantialiasedDSP generatedoscillators(calledKVAoscillators.)Theseoscillators,combinedwiththePC3LEs arrayoffiltersandDSPtools,canproducestunninglyrealisticanalogemulationsaswellas neverbeforeheardsyntheticsoundscapes.

How to Use This Manual

ThismanualdescribeshowtoconnectandpowerupyourPC3LE,gettingaroundthefront panel,andadescriptionoftheoperatingmodes,aswellasstepbysteptutorialsforcommonly performedfunctions. ThebestwaytoreadthismanualiswithyourPC3LEinfrontofyou.Bytryingtheexamples provided,whichillustratevariousfunctions,youcangetaquickunderstandingofthebasics, thenmoveontothemoreadvancedfeatures. YoullfindlistsofthePC3LEsobjectsprograms,setups,andsoforthatthe www.kurzweil.comwebsite.

Do I Have Everything?
YourPC3LEshippingcartonshouldincludethefollowinginadditiontoyourinstrument: Powercable USBcable MusiciansGuide(thisbook) Sustain(switch)pedal 4stickonrubberfeet

Ifyoudonthaveallofthesecomponents,contactyourKurzweil/YoungChangdealer. YoumayalsowanttopurchaseaUSBthumbdriveforportablebackupsandstorage(seeUSB StorageDevicebelowfordetails.)

Boot Loader
WhenyouneedtoupdatethePC3LEssoftwareorrundiagnostictests,youllusetheBoot Loader.TobringuptheBootLoader,holddowntheExitbutton(directlytotherightofthe display)whilepoweringonyourPC3LE.RefertoAppendix BfordetailsontheBootLoader.

1-3

Introduction Options

Options
Pedals
ThePC3LEhastwostereojacks(labeledSW1&SW2)forswitchpedals(assignabletoon/off functions,thesepedalscontrolsustainandsostenutobydefault.)ThePC3LEalsohasonejack foracontinuouspedal(assignabletocontinuouscontrollerfunctions,thispedalcontrols volumebydefault.)AskyourKurzweildealeraboutthefollowingoptionalpedals: FS1 KFP1 KFP2M CC1 Standardboxshapedswitchpedal Singlepianostyleswitchpedal Doublepianostyleswitchpedalunit Continuouspedal

USB Storage Device

YoucanplugaUSBmassstoragedevicesuchasathumbdriveintothePC3LEforbackingup, archiving,sharingyourwork,andupdatingyoursoftware.AnysizeUSBmassstoragedevice willwork,thoughthumbdrivesarerecommendedfortheirportability,durability,andlow price. Note:MostUSBthumbdrivesarecompatiblewiththePC3LE,butsomeolderUSBthumbdrivesand largerUSBbuspowereddriveswillnotworkwiththePC3LEiftheyrequiremorethan500mAof current.WhenattemptingtouseanincompatibleUSBdevice,thePC3LEwilldisplaythemessageUSB devicerequirestoomuchpower.Powerrequirementspecificationsforthumbdrivesarenotalwaysmade clearlyavailablebythemanufacturer,butanewlypurchasedthumbdrivewillmostlikelybecompatible. Ifpossible,checkthepowerrequirementspecificationsofyourUSBdevicebeforepurchase.

1-4

Startup Make Connections

Chapter 2 Startup
Ifhookingupnewgearisfamiliartoyou,andyoujustwanttogetgoing,heresaquick descriptionofwhatyouneedtogetstartedwithyourPC3LE.Ifyouneedmoreinformation, thoroughdescriptionsofeachstepfollow.

Make Connections
1. Setthekeyboardonahard,flat,levelsurface.Makesuretoleaveplentyofroomfor ventilation. 2. FouradhesivebackedrubberfeetareprovidedwithyourPC3LE.Ifyouwanttoattach themtothebottomofthePC3LE(recommendedtopreventscratchingyourtabletop), carefullyturnthekeyboardover,removethepaperbackingfromtherubberfeetand attachthemnow,neareachcorner,allonthesamelevel. 3. Connectthepowercable. 4. Makesureyoursoundsystemisatasafevolumelevel.AlsomakesurethatthePC3LEs MASTERVOLUMEslider(onthefarleftsideofthefrontpanel)isallthewaydown. 5. Pluginapairofstereoheadphonesorrunstandard(1/4inch)audiocablesfromyour amplifierormixertotheBalancedAnalogOutputsonthePC3LE.(UsetheBalanced AnalogOutputsLeftoutformono.)Balanced(TRSorStereo)cablesare recommended.

Make Music
1. PowerupyourPC3LE,raisetheleveloftheMASTERVOLUMEslider,andcheckout someoftheprograms.ThePC3LEstartsupinProgrammodebydefault. 2. ScrollthroughtheprogramlistwiththeAlphaWheel,/+buttons,orusethecategory buttonstoselectprogramsandtrythePC3LEsmanysounds.

2-1

Startup Startupthe Details

Startupthe Details
ThissectionwalksyouthroughthehookupofyourPC3LE.Welltakealookattherearpanel, thendescribethepower,audio,andothercableconnections.

Before You Start...

DontconnectanythinguntilyoumakesureyourPC3LEisproperlyandsafelysituated.Also,if yourPC3LEhasbeenoutinthecold,giveittimetowarmuptoroomtemperaturebefore startingit,sincecondensationmayhaveformedinsidethePC3LE.Itisnormalfortherearpanel neartheMIDIjackstobecomewarmafterawhile.

Connecting the Power Cable (Line Cord)

ThePC3LErunsonACpowerandworkswithvoltagesfrom90260voltsat5060Hz.The voltagelevelisdetectedandsetautomaticallybythePC3LE. AsyoufacethebackofthePC3LE,thepowerconnectionisattheleft.Firstconnectthepower cabletothePC3LE,thenplugthepowercableintoagroundedoutlet.Ifyourpowersourcedoes nothavethestandardthreeholeoutlet,youshouldtakethetimetoinstallapropergrounding system.Thiswillreducetheriskofashock.

Connecting Audio Cables

Analog Afteryouveturneddownthelevelonyoursoundsystem,connectthePC3LEsanalogaudio outputstoyoursoundsystemusingapairofstereoormonoaudiocables.Monocableswill alwayswork,butifyouregoingintobalancedinputs,usestereocablesforabettersignalto noiseratioandabitmorevolume.ThePC3LEsanalogoutputsarebalanced,andgeneratea hottersignalthansomepreviousKurzweilinstruments. ConnectoneendofeachaudiocabletoyourmixingboardorPAsysteminputs,andconnectthe otherendtothejacksmarkedMainLeftandRightontherearpanelofthePC3LE.Ifyouhave onlyoneinputavailable,usethePC3LEsMainLeftoutputtogetthefullsignalinmono. Alternatively,connectapairofheadphonestotheheadphoneoutforprivatelistening. Digital FordigitalaudiooutputfromthePC3LE,connecta75OhmcoaxialcablefromthePC3LEsRCA DigitalOutjacktotheAESorS/PDIFinputofthereceivingdevice.YoumayneedanRCAto XLRadaptertoconnectwiththereceivingdevice.Ifthereceivingdevicereceivesonlyoptical signals,youllneedaconverteraswell.ThePC3LEsS/PDIFoutputsendsdigitalaudioata48 kHzfixedsamplerate.

2-2

Startup Startupthe Details

Connecting MIDI
ThesimplestMIDIconfigurationusesasingle5pinMIDIcable:eitherfromtheMIDIOutport ofyourPC3LEtotheMIDIInportofanotherinstrument,orfromtheMIDIOutportofanother MIDIcontrollertotheMIDIInportofthePC3LE.Thereareallsortsofpossibleconfigurations, includingadditionalsynths,personalcomputers,MIDIeffectsprocessors,andMIDIpatchbays. Dependingonyoursystem,youmaywanttousethePC3LEsMIDIThruporttopassMIDI informationfromaMIDIcontrollertothePC3LEandontothenextdeviceinyoursystem.You canalsoconnectMIDIdevicestothePC3LEsMIDIOutport,whichcansendchannelizedMIDI informationfromthekeyboardorthroughthePC3LEfromyourMIDIcontroller.

YoucanalsousethePC3LEsUSBComputerporttosendandreceiveMIDI.Bydefaultthe PC3LEwillshowupasaUSBMIDIdevice.IfyouchooseUSBTemporaryDrivefromStorage mode,thePC3LEwilltemporarily(whileonthatStoragemodepage)becomeavirtualstorage deviceandUSBMIDIwillbedisabled.Differenthostprogramsonyourcomputermay indicatevariouserrorsastheUSBMIDIdeviceisnolongerpresent.LeavingStoragemodewill restoreUSBMIDIfunctionality. USBMIDIand5pinMIDIcanbeusedatthesametime;theMIDIsignalswillbecombinedinto asingle16channelMIDIstream.

Pedals
PlugyourswitchorcontinuouspedalsintothecorrespondingjacksonthePC3LEsrearpanel. WerecommendusingtheKurzweilpedalsdescribedonpagepage 14,butyoucanusealmost anyswitchorcontinuouspedal,aslongasitadherestothefollowingspecifications(asmost pedalsdo): Switchpedals Continuouspedals
1

/4inchtipsleeveplug

10kOhmlineartaperpotentiometer,1/4inchtipringsleeveplug withthewiperconnectedtothetip.

Ifyouuseathirdparty(nonKurzweil)switchpedal,makesureitsconnectedbeforeyouturn onyourPC3LE.Thisensuresthatthepedalwillworkproperly(itmightfunctionbackwardoff whenitsdownandonwhenitsupifyouturnonyourPC3LEbeforeplugginginthepedal). Similarly,dontpressanyofyourswitchpedalswhilepoweringup,becausethePC3LEverifies eachpedalsorientationduringpowerup.Ifyourepressingapedal,youmightcauseittowork backward. Thepedalsareindependentlyassignablewithineachzoneofeverysetup.Herearethedefault settingsforthethreepedalsyoucanusewiththePC3LE: SwitchPedal1 SwitchPedal2 ContinuousControlPedal1 Controller64(Sustain) Controller66(Sostenuto) Controller11(Expression/Volume)

2-3

Startup Startupthe Details

Switching On the Power

ThePC3LEspowerswitchisontherearpanel,adjacenttothepowercableconnection. Whenyoupowerup,thedisplaybrieflyshowssomestartupinformation.TheProgrammode displaythenappears.Itlookslikethediagrambelow,thoughyourPC3LEmaybedifferentfrom theexample.

Thefirsttimeyoupowerup(orafterareset),yourinstrumentwillbesettooperateonMIDI Channel1(asshownatthefarrightofthetoplineabove). Setthevolumeatacomfortablelevel.Youllgetthebestsignaltonoiseratioifyoukeepthe PC3LEatfullvolume,andadjustthelevelfromyourmixingboard.Youmayalsowanttoadjust thedisplaycontrastbyusingthesmallcontrastknobontherearpanelofthePC3LE.

USB Storage Port

YoucanplugaUSBmassstoragedevicesuchasathumbdriveintothePC3LEforbackingup, archiving,sharingyourwork,andupdatingyoursoftware.AnysizeUSBmassstoragedevice willwork,thoughthumbdrivesarerecommendedfortheirportability,durability,andlow price.TheUSBStorageportisonthebackpanelofthePC3LE,butitiseasilyaccessiblefromthe frontoftheinstrument.AUSBconnectorwillonlyfitintotheportiforientedproperly,sodont forceitintotheport,asthismaydamageyourPC3LEorUSBdevice.Ifyouarehavingtrouble insertingyourUSBconnectorintotheport,tryflippingtheconnectorover. Caution:DonotremoveaUSBdevicewhilethedisplaysaysLoading...orSaving....RemovingaUSB deviceduringafiletransfercancausedatacorruption.

Note:MostUSBthumbdrivesarecompatiblewiththePC3LE,butsomeolderUSBthumbdrivesand largerUSBbuspowereddriveswillnotworkwiththePC3LEiftheyrequiremorethan500mAof current.WhenattemptingtouseanincompatibleUSBdevice,thePC3LEwilldisplaythemessageUSB devicerequirestoomuchpower.Powerrequirementspecificationsforthumbdrivesarenotalwaysmade clearlyavailablebythemanufacturer,butanewlypurchasedthumbdrivewillmostlikelybecompatible. Ifpossible,checkthepowerrequirementspecificationsofyourUSBdevicebeforepurchase.

2-4

Startup Startupthe Details

USB Computer Port

NexttotheUSBStorageportonthebackpanelofthePC3LEisaUSBComputerport.TheUSB ComputerportworksforMIDI(transmitandreceive)ortoconnectyourPC3LEtoacomputer forfiletransfer.Bydefault,theUSBportissettoMIDImode.WhenselectingUSBPC connectioninStoragemode,USBMIDIwilltemporarilybedisabled. WerecommendthatyouusetheUSBcableprovidedwithyourPC3LEanddonotuseextension USBcables.ThePC3LEsUSBComputerportisonlyintendedforconnectiontoaUSBTypeA port.

InUSBStoragemode,aPC3LEvirtualdrivewillappearonyourcomputerdesktop.One importantthingtoknowhereisthatthisisavirtualdrive.Youcansavetothisdrivefromthe PC3LE,butyoumustimmediatelytransferthatfiletoyourdesktop(orotherfolder).Youmust copydatafromthePC3LEvirtualdrivetoyourcomputersdriveorelsethedatawillbelost. WhenyouleaveStorageMode,therewillbeaprompttellingyouthatthePC3LEisturningback intoaUSBMIDIdevicewhichyouhavetoacknowledge.Ifyouhaventcopiedthefile(s)to yourdesktop(orotherplaceonthecomputer)itwontbeonthevirtualdiskwhenyouleave storagemode. Dependingonyourcomputersoperatingsystem,youmaysometimesseeascarydevice removalwarningonyourdesktop(forexample,whenthePC3LEleavestheBootLoader).You maydisregardsuchamessagewithoutworriesofdamagetoyourPC3LEorcomputer.

2-5

Startup PC3LE Programs

PC3LE Programs
ThePC3LEpowersupinProgrammode,whereyoucanselectandplayprograms(called patches,presets,orvoicesonotherinstruments).Programsarepresetsoundscomposedofupto 32layersofsamples,waveforms,oroscillators.IfyouveleftProgrammode,justpressthe ProgrammodebuttonorExitbuttontoreturn.

Selecting Programs
WhenyouareinProgrammode,therearetwobasicwaystoselectaPC3LEprogram: PressaCategorybuttontolistallprogramsinthatcategory,thenusetheAlphaWheel,/+ buttons,orcursorup/downbuttonstoscrollthroughthelist.TheCategorybuttonsareon thefrontpanel,totherightofthedisplay.PresstheAllcategorytolistprogramsinall categories. PresstheShiftcategorybuttonandusethenumberedcategorybuttonstoenteraspecific programIDnumber,thenpresstheEntercategorybutton.PresstheShiftcategorybutton againtoreturnthecategorybuttonstotheirprimaryfunction.

ThePC3LEhasvarioussettingsforrespondingtoMIDIProgramChangecommandsfrom externalsources.TheseareexplainedinChapter 9,sowewontgointothemhere.Youshould beabletochangeprogramsbysendingProgramChangecommandsfromyourMIDIcontroller.

Easy Audition
Anytimeyouwanttohearwhataprogramsoundslike,highlighttheprogramsname(whilein Programmode)thenpressthePlay/Pausebuttontoplayabriefsample.TheDemoButton parameterontheMasterMode2pagemustbeonforEasyAuditiontowork;theparameteris onbydefault.MastermodeisdescribedinChapter 9.

Program Mode Display

TakeaminutetofamiliarizeyourselfwiththeProgrammodedisplay.Thetoplineshowsyou theMIDItransposition,thecurrentprogramscategory,andwhatMIDIchannelyoureon.The currentlyselectedprogramishighlightedinthelistontherightsideofthescreen.

Info Box Theresaninfoboxattheleftsideofthedisplay.Changingthevalueofacontrol(movingaknob orpressingaswitch)willdisplaythenameofthelastmovedcontrolleralongwithitsparameter assignment(theresalsoaninfoboxforSetupmode.)

2-6

Startup PC3LE Programs

Soft buttons OnmostPC3LEscreens,thebottomlineofthedisplayidentifiesthefunctionofeachofthe buttonsbeneaththedisplay.Wecallthesebuttonssoftbuttons,becausetheydodifferentthings dependingonwhatscurrentlyshowinginthedisplay. InProgramandQuickAccessmodes,youcanchangeoctaveswiththeOctavandOctav+ buttonsunderthedisplay.TheInfosoftbuttonshowsyourelevantdetailsaboutthecurrent item.TheXpose/Xpose+buttonsareashortcutforquicktranspositioninsemitone(halfstep) increments.YoucanusethemtotransposetheentirePC3LEasmuchasthreeoctavesupor down.Thetoplineofthedisplayshowsthecurrentamountoftransposition(Xpose).Pressboth Xposebuttonssimultaneouslytoreturntranspositiontozero. ThePanicbutton(oradoublepressofShiftandEnteratthebottomofthealphanumeric keypad)sendsanAllNotesOffmessageandanAllControllersOffmessagebothtothe PC3LEandoverall16MIDIchannels.Youwontneeditoften,butitsnicetohave.

V.A.S.T. Programs
MostoftheincludedfactoryprogramsuseV.A.S.T.synthesis,whichplayupto32layersof samples,routedthroughdigitalsignalprocessing.

KB3 Programs
KB3(organ)programsdifferfromV.A.S.T.programsinthattheydontplaysamples.Instead theyrelyonoscillatorsthatmimicthetonewheelsusedinmanypopularorgans.Becauseof theirarchitecture,KB3programsrequiredifferentprocessingwithinthePC3LE.KB3programs canplayonlyonasinglechannelatatime,whichyoudesignate(V.A.S.T.programswillwork fineonthatchannel,too). Whenyourereadytolearnabouteditingprograms,checkoutChapter 6.

2-7

Startup Setups

Setups
Setupsallowyoutoplayacombinationofprograms,aswellasgivingyouadvanced performanceandcontroloptions.Setupscanhaveupto16zones,eachofwhichcanbeassigned toanyrangeofthekeyboard(overlappingorsplit).Eachzonecanhaveitsownprogram,MIDI channel,andMIDIcontrolassignments,aswellasriffandarpeggiatorsettings. PresstheSetupmodebuttontotheleftofthedisplay.ItsLEDwilllight,tellingyouthatyoure inSetupmode.NoticethattheSetupmodedisplayissimilartotheProgrammodedisplay. PresstheInfosoftbuttontowhichprogramsandassignmentsaresetforeachzone.See page 71foramoredetaileddescription.

Manysetupsincludearpeggiationandnotetriggeredsongstocreategroovesthatyoucanuse asis,orastemplatesforyourownmaterial.Asyouplaywiththesesetups,experimentwiththe knobsandothercontrollersforawiderangeofeffects.Someofthesegrooveskeepplayingafter youvereleasedthecontrolsthatgotthemgoing.Whenyouwanttostopthem,selectanother setup,presstheSetupmodebutton,orpresstheStopbutton.

Quick Access
AconvenientwaytoselectprogramsandsetupsistouseQuickAccessmode,whereyouselect aQuickAccessbankfromalistoffactorypresetoruserprogrammedbanks.Eachbankcontains tenmemoryslots,orentries,whereyoucanstoreanycombinationofprogramsorsetups.While youreinQuickAccessmode,youcanselectanyprogramorsetupinthebankwithbuttons0 through9orthecursorkeys. ThePC3LEcomeswithafewQuickAccessbanksalreadyprogrammedsoyoucangetanidea ofhowtheywork.CreateyourownQuickAccessbankstohelpyouselectprogramsandsetups withaminimumofsearching.PresstheQuickAccessmodebuttontotheleftofthedisplay.Its LEDlights,totellyouyoureinQuickAccessmode. ThetoplineofthedisplaytellsyouwhichQuickAccessbankisselected.UsetheChan/Zone buttons(totheleftofthedisplay)toscrollthroughthebanks.Thenamesofeachoftheten entriesinthebankarelistedinthecenterofthedisplay.Longernameswillbeabbreviated.The currentlyselectedentrysfullnameisshownnearthebottomofthedisplay.Theamountof transpositionisdisplayedtotheleftoftheentryname.Ifthecurrententryisaprogram,youll seethecurrentkeyboard(MIDI)channeldisplayedtotherightoftheentrysname.Ifitsasetup, youllseethewordSetup. TheentriesontheQuickAccesspagearearrangedtocorrespondtothelayoutofthenumeric buttonsonthealphanumericpad(exceptforthe0button.) WhenyourereadytocreateyourownQuickAccessbanks,turntoChapter 8tolearnaboutthe QuickAccessEditor.

2-8

Startup The Other Modes

The Other Modes

Therearethreeothermodebuttonsonthefrontpanel.SeeChapters3and4formoredetailed descriptionsofthemodes. Mastermode Songmode Storagemode Defineperformanceandcontrolsettings,ConfigurethePC3LEfor sendingandreceivingMIDIinformation. Recordandeditsequences(songs);playType0andType1MIDI sequences. Loadandsaveprograms,setups,sequences,andotherobjectsviaUSB.

Software Upgrades
ItseasytoupgradethePC3LEsoperatingsystemandobjects(programs,setup,etc.)usingthe bootloadertoinstallupgradesintoflashROM.Whenupgradesareavailableyoucandownload themfromwww.kurzweil.com andinstallthemviaoneofthePC3LEstwoUSBports. Whenyouvedownloadedanupgrade,youcaninstallityourselfinamatterofminutes.Follow theinstructionsincludedwiththeupgradefiles.

2-9

Startup Software Upgrades

2-10

User Interface Basics Mode Selection

Chapter 3 User Interface Basics

ThischapterwillshowyouhowtogetaroundthefrontpanelofyourPC3LE.Yourinteractions canbedividedintothreeprimaryoperations:modeselection,navigation,anddataentry.There isalsoanassignablecontrolsection.

ASSIGNABLE SWITCHES Program

Shift MASTER VOLUME

MODE Setup Song

CATEGORY Chan/Zone Piano

1

E Piano
2

Clavier
3

Organ
Clear

SW1
Slow / Fast

SW2
Brake

SW3
On / Off

SW4
Chor / Vib

SW5
Depth

Save

Leads
4

Pads
5

Synth
6

Syn Bass
+/-

Rotary

Vibrato

Q Access SW10
On / Off

Master
FX Bypass

Storage
Compare

SW6
On / Off

SW7
Loud / Soft

SW8
Decay F/S

SW9
Pitch H/L

Strings
7

Brass
8

Winds
9

Ensemble
0

Percussion

Click

KB3

ASSIGNABLE CONTROLS Arp Settings

Shift

Edit Split / Layer Tap Tempo

Exit

Guitar
ABC

Bass
DEF

Drums
GHI

Percussion
JKL

Voices
MNO

Mallets
PQR

Hybrid
STU

Misc
VWX

Timbre
16'

Mod
5 1/3'

Envelope
8'

Effect
4'

Reverb
2 2/3'

Record

Play/Pause

Stop

Jump

User
YZ

All
Space Shift Enter

CTL6
2'

CTL7
1 3/5'

CTL8
1 1/3'

CTL9
1'

CTL10
Swell

Panic

CTL11

CTL12

CTL13

CTL14

CTL15

Arp Enable

Arp Latch

Mode Selection
ThePC3LEisalwaysinoneofsixprimaryoperatingmodes.Selectamodebypressingoneof themodebuttonstheyretotheleftofthedisplay.EachmodebuttonhasanLEDthatlightsto indicatethecurrentmode.Onlyonemodecanbeselectedatatime. Programmode Setupmode Selectandplayprograms,andmodifythemwiththeProgramEditor. Selectandplaysetups(16keyboardzoneswithindependentMIDI channel,programandcontrolassignments),andmodifythemwiththe SetupEditor.

QuickAccessmode Selectfromalistofpresetbanks,eachcontainingalistoftenprograms and/orsetupsthatcanbeviewedinthedisplayforeasyselection.Modify thepresetbanksandcreateyourownwiththeQuickAccessEditor. Mastermode Songmode DefineperformanceandcontrolcharacteristicsfortheentirePC3LE,and howyourPC3LEsendsandreceivesMIDIinformation. UsethePC3LEssequencertorecordandplaybackyourkeyboard performance,playType0andType1MIDIsequences,andrecordmulti timbralsequencesreceivedviaMIDI. InterfacewiththePC3LEsUSBportstoloadandsaveprograms,setups, andtransfersoftwareupdates.

Storagemode

3-1

User Interface Basics Mode Buttons

ThePC3LEstonewheelorganemulationiscalledKB3mode.Youautomaticallyenterthis modewhenyouselectaKB3program.YoucanfindKB3programsbypressingtheOrgan categorybuttonwhileinProgrammode.TheprogramsthatuseKB3modewilllighttheKB3 LEDtotheleftoftheknobs,indicatingthatthePC3LEsknobsandswitchesarenowdedicated totheorgancontrolsthatarelabeledonthefrontpanel.

Mode Buttons
MODE Program Setup Song

Q Access

Master
FX Bypass

Storage
Compare

Whenyoupressamodebutton,itsLEDlightsuptoindicatethatthemodehasbeenselected.If pressingamodebuttondoesnotlightitsLED,presstheExitbuttononeormoretimes,thentry again.

Assignable Controls
KB3

ASSIGNABLE CONTROLS

Shift

Timbre
16'

Mod
5 1/3'

Envelope
8'

Effect
4'

Reverb
2 2/3'

CTL6
2'

CTL7
1 3/5'

CTL8
1 1/3'

CTL9
1'

CTL10
Swell

CTL11

CTL12

CTL13

CTL14

CTL15

ThePC3LEsAssignableControls(seeabove)arethefiveknobsontheleftofthefrontpanel. EachofthefiveAssignableControlscancontrolthreeseparatefunctionsindependently,giving youaccesstoknobcontrolof15parameters.UsetheShiftbuttontotheleftoftheseknob controlstotogglebetweenaccessingcontrols15(TimbreReverb,)CTL610,orCTL1115. PressingthisShiftbuttonwilllightoneoftheLEDsofthethreerowsoflabelsbelowthe AssignableControls.Thisletsyouknowwhichsetofcontrolsyouareusing(eithercontrols15 (TimbreReverb,)CTL610,orCTL1115.)Eachknobcanbeusedtocontrolaprogramspecific parameter,ortosendMIDIcontinuouscontrollervaluestoexternalequipment.PresstheInfo softbuttonfromtheProgram,SetuporQAmodemainpagestoseetheassignmentssetforeach control.

3-2

User Interface Basics Pads

WhenusingaKB3organprogram,theblueKB3LEDwilllight(abovetheShiftbuttonattheleft oftheAssignableControls,)andtheAssignableControlswillcontroltheKB3organfunctions labeledbelowthecontrolnames.Forexample,thecontrollabeledTimbreemulatesanorgans 16drawbar(asislabeledbelowTimbre.)UsetheAssignableControlsShiftbuttontoaccess moreorgancontrols.

Pads
ThePC3LEseightpadsarelocatedbelowthedisplay.Thepadscanbeassignedtotriggernotes orcontrolotherfunctions.WhenyouselectaPC3LEprograminProgrammode,thePC3LEwill alsoselectanassociatedDrumprogramtobetriggeredbythePads.TheprogramforthePadsis assignedtoMIDIchannel10.

Assignable Switches
TheAssignableSwitches(seebelow)arelocatedintheupperleftofthepanel.Usetheseto switchFXonandoff,mutelayersofsound,orcontrolotherfunctions.Eachofthe5switchescan controltwoseparatefunctionsindependently,effectivelygivingyouaccessto10switches.Use theShiftbuttontotheleftoftheseswitchestotogglebetweenaccessingswitches15or610. PressingthisShiftbuttonwilllightoneoftheLEDsofthetworowsoflabelsbelowthe AssignableSwitches.Thisletsyouknowwhichsetofswitchesyouareusing(eitherSW1SW5 orSW6SW10.)WhenusingaKB3program,theblueKB3LEDwilllight(belowtheLEDforthe tworowsoflabels,)andtheAssignableSwitcheswillcontroltheKB3organfunctionslabeled belowtheswitchnames.

ASSIGNABLE SWITCHES

Shift

SW1
Slow / Fast

SW2
Brake

SW3
On / Off

SW4
Chor / Vib

SW5
Depth

Rotary

Vibrato

SW6
On / Off

SW7
Loud / Soft

SW8
Decay F/S

SW9
Pitch H/L

SW10
On / Off

Percussion

Click

The Save Button

TheSavebuttonislocatedtotherightofthedisplay.WhileontheProgrammodemainpage, theLEDontheSavebuttonwilllightwhenyouhavechangedanyofthecontrolstatesofthe assignableknobs,switches,orothercontrolsources(forexampleturningaswitchonoroff, changingaknobposition,etc.)WhentheLEDontheSavebuttonislit,presstheSavebutton twicetoquicklysaveyourtweakedversionofthecurrentprogram.Ifyouhaventpreviously editedtheprogram,thiswillsaveanewcopyoftheprogramunderanewID#.Ifyouhave previouslyeditedtheprogram,thiswillreplacethecurrentprogrambysavingunderthesame ID#.

3-3

User Interface Basics Category Buttons

Category Buttons
UsetheCategorybuttonstoselectagroupingofPC3LEprogramsbyinstrumenttype.Pressthe AllCategorybuttontolistallprogramsregardlessoftype.TheCategorybuttonsalsodoubleas analphanumericpad(SeeDataEntry,below.)

CATEGORY Piano
1

E Piano
2

Clavier
3

Organ
Clear

Leads
4

Pads
5

Synth
6

Syn Bass
+/-

Strings
7

Brass
8

Winds
9

Ensemble
0

Guitar
ABC

Bass
DEF

Drums
GHI

Percussion
JKL

Voices
MNO

Mallets
PQR

Hybrid
STU

Misc
VWX

User
YZ

All
Space Shift Enter

Panic

Picking Favorites
Youcanselectafavoriteprogramwithineachcategorythatwillbeautomaticallyrecalledwhen youchoosethatcategory.Todothis,firstselectacategorybypressingoneoftheCategory buttonswhileinProgrammode(makesurethecategoryShiftbuttonisnotlit.)Next,findyour favoriteprograminthatcategorybyusingtheAlphawheel,/+buttons,orup/downcursor buttons.(Alternatively,youcanfindtheprogrambypressingthecategoryShiftbuttonand usingthenumberedcategorybuttonstoentertheprogramsIDnumber,thenpressthecategory Enterbutton.Ifyouusethismethod,makesuretounlightthecategoryshiftbuttonbypressing itagainaftermakingyourselection.)Lastly,holdthecategorybuttonthatyouwishtosavea favoriteforforafewseconds.Thenexttimeyouchoosethatcategory,yourfavoritewillbe selected.

3-4

User Interface Basics Pitch Wheel and Mod Wheel

Pitch Wheel and Mod Wheel

Arp Enable

Arp Latch

Pitch

Mod

TotheleftofthePC3LEskeyboardarethePitchWheelandtheModWheel,aswellastheArp EnableandArpLatchbuttons. PushthePitchWheelawayfromyoutoraisethepitchofthenote(s)youareplaying.Pullit towardsyoutolowerthepitch.Mostprogramsaresetsothatthepitchwheelwillraiseand lowerpitchbyawholestep,althoughsomeprogramsusethepitchwheeltolowerpitchbyas muchasanoctave.ThePitchWheelhasaspringsothatitwillsnapbacktoplace(i.e.,backto theoriginalpitch)whenyoureleaseit. TheModWheelperformsavarietyoffunctions.Differentprogramsmayuseitforfiltersweeps, tremolo/vibrato,wah,orzonevolume. TheArpEnablebuttonissetbydefaulttoturnonandoffthePC3LEsArpeggiator.Itcanalso beassignedtocontrolotherparameters. TheArpLatchbuttonissetbydefaulttotriggertheArpLatchfunction.Itcanalsobeassigned tocontrolotherparameters.

3-5

User Interface Basics Navigation

Navigation
Thenavigationsectionofthefrontpanelconsistsofthedisplayandthebuttonssurroundingit. ThesenavigationbuttonswilltakeyoutoeveryoneofthePC3LEsprogrammingparameters.

The Display
YourprimaryinterfacewiththePC3LEisitsbacklitgraphicdisplay.Asyoupressvarious buttons,thisfluorescentdisplayreflectsthecommandsyouenterandtheeditingchangesyou make.

Pages
Withineachmode,thefunctionsandparametersareorganizedintosmaller,relatedgroupsthat appeartogetherinthedisplay.Eachoneofthesegroupsofparametersiscalledapage.Each modehaswhatwecallanentrylevelpage;itsthepagethatappearswhenyouselectthatmode withoneofthemodebuttons.Withineachmodeanditseditor(s),thevariouspagesareselected withthenavigationbuttons.Therearemanypages,butthereareafewfeaturescommontoeach page. ThisistheentrylevelpageforProgrammode:

The Top Line

Onthetoplineofmostpages,theresareminderofwhichmodeyoureinandwhichpage youreon.Manypagesdisplayadditionalinformationinthetopline,aswell.TheProgram modepageabove,forexample,showsyouthecurrentamountofMIDItransposition,the currentprogramscategory,andthecurrentlyselectedMIDIchannel.Thetoplineisalmost alwaysreversedthatis,ithasawhitebackgroundwithbluecharacters.

The Bottom Line

Thebottomlineisdividedintosix(sometimesfewer)setsofreversedcharactersthatserveas labelsforthesixbuttonsdirectlybeneaththedisplay.Theselabelsandthefunctionsofthe buttonschangedependingonthecurrentlyselectedpage.Consequentlythebuttonsthat selectthesefunctionsarecalledsoftbuttons.

3-6

User Interface Basics Navigation

The Soft Buttons

Thesoftbuttonsarelocateddirectlyunderthedisplay(seebelow.)Thesoftbuttonsarecalled softbecausetheirfunctionschangedependingonthecurrentlyselectedmodeandpage. Sometimestheyperformspecificfunctions,likechangingMIDItransposition.IntheProgram Editorandothereditors,theyrealsousedtomovetodifferentpagesofprogramming parameters.Ifasoftbuttonslabelisinallcapitalletters(ARP1,forexample),pressingthe correspondingsoftbuttontakesyoutoapageofparameters.Ifthesoftbuttonislabeledin lowercaseormixedcaseletters(Save,forexample),thesoftbuttonperformssomekindof function.

The Cursor Buttons

TotherightofthedisplayarefourbuttonsarrangedaroundtheAlphaWheel(seebelow.)These arecalledthecursorbuttons.Theymovethecursoraroundthecurrentlyselectedpage,inthe directionindicatedbytheirlabels.Thecursorisahighlighted(reversed)rectangle(sometimes itsanunderscore).Itmarksthevalueofthecurrentlyselectedparameter.

ProgrammingthePC3LEinvolvesselectingvariousparametersandchangingtheirvalues. Selectparametersbyhighlightingtheirvalueswiththecursor.Youcanchangethehighlighted valuewithanyofthedataentrymethodsdescribedinthedataentrysectionbelow.

3-7

User Interface Basics Navigation

The Chan/Zone Buttons

TotheleftofthedisplayaretwobuttonslabeledChan/Zone.Theirfunctiondependsonthe currentmode.InProgrammode,forexample,theyshiftthroughtheMIDIchannels,showing theprogramassignedtoeachchannel.ThischangestheMIDIchannelthePC3LEuses internally,aswellasthechannelyoureusingtosendinformationtoothersynthsconnectedto thePC3LEsMIDIOutorUSBport(MIDIslaves).ChangingthecurrentMIDIchannelalso changesthecorrespondingsettingontheMasterModeMIDITransmitpage.Whenyoupress bothChan/ZonebuttonsatthesametimeontheProgrammodemainpageyouwillbereturned toChannel1.Checkoutthechartonpage 311formoreshortcutsyoucanmakewithdouble buttonpresses. IntheSetupEditor,theChan/Zonebuttonsscrollthroughthezonesinthecurrentsetup.In QuickAccessmode,theyscrollthroughtheQuickAccessbanks,andinSongmodetheyscroll throughrecordingtracks. Wellletyouknow,whenapplicable,whattheChan/Zonebuttonsdo.

The Edit Button

TheEditbutton(locatedtotheleftofthedisplay)activateseachofthePC3LEseditors.Pressing theEditbuttontellsthePC3LEthatyouwanttochangesomeaspectoftheobjectmarkedbythe cursor.Forexample,whenaprogramisselectedandyoupressEdit,youentertheProgram Editor.Ifasetupisselected,youentertheSetupEditor. ThereareeditorsaccessiblefromeverymodeexceptMasterandStoragemode.Toenteran editor,chooseoneofthemodes(modeselection),andpressEdit.Aneditingpageforthatmode willappear.Youcanthenselectparameters(navigation)andchangetheirvalues(dataentry).If thevalueoftheselectedparameterhasitsowneditingpage(likewhenselectingprogramsin Setupmode,)pressingtheEditbuttonwilltakeyoutothatpage.

The Exit Button

PressExit(locatedtotherightofthedisplay)toleavethecurrenteditor.Ifyouvechangedthe valueofanyparameterwhileinthateditor,thePC3LEwillaskyouwhetheryouwanttosave yourchangesbeforeyoucanleavetheeditor.SeeChapter5forinformationonsavingand naming.TheExitbuttonalsotakesyoutoProgrammodeifyoureontheentrylevelpageofone oftheothermodes.Ifatsomepointyoucantseemtogetwhereyouwanttogo,pressExitone ormoretimestoreturntoProgrammode,thentryagain.

3-8

User Interface Basics Data Entry

Data Entry
ThedataentrysectionofthefrontpanelincludestheAlphawheel,the/+buttons,andthe alphanumericpad(theShiftfunctionsoftheCategorybuttons.)

The Alpha Wheel

TheAlphaWheel(seebelow)islocatedtotherightofthedisplay.Itisusefultoquicklyenter largeorsmallchangesinvalue.IfyouturntheAlphaWheeloneclicktotheright,youll increasethevalueofthecurrentlyselectedparameterbyoneincrement.Oneclicktotheleft decreasesthevaluebyoneincrement.Ifyouturnitrapidly,youlljumpbyseveralincrements. YoucanalsousetheAlphaWheeltoenternameswhenyouresavingobjects.

Jump

The -/ + Buttons
The/+buttonsarelocatedjustundertheAlphaWheel(seeabove.)The+(plus)button increasesthevalueofthecurrentlyselectedparameterbyone,andthe(minus)button decreasesitbyone.Thesebuttonsaremostusefulwhenyourescrollingthroughashortlistof values,orwhenyouwanttobesureyourechangingthevaluebyoneincrementatatime.One pressoftheplusorminusbuttoncorrespondstooneclicktotherightorleftwiththeAlpha Wheel.Thesebuttonswillrepeatifpressedandheld. Pressingtheplusandminusbuttonssimultaneouslywillmoveyouthroughthecurrentlistof valuesinlargechunksinsteadofonebyone.Dontconfusethesebuttonswiththe+/buttonin thecategorybuttons.Thatcategorybuttonisusedprimarilyforenteringnegativenumeric valuesandswitchingfromuppercasetolowercaseletters(andviceversa).

The Alphanumeric Pad

WhenyoupresstheShiftbuttononthebottomrowoftheCategorybuttons,youcanusethe Categorybuttonsasanalphanumericpadtoenternumericvalues,andenternamesoneletterat atime.PressingtheShiftbuttonlightsitsLED,indicatingthatthecategorybuttonswill correspondtothenumbers,letters,andotherfunctionsprintedonthebuttons.Onthemain pageforProgrammode,thecategorybuttonschoosetheprogramcategory,andyoumustpress theCategoryShiftbuttontoenternumbers.OntheQuickAccessmodemainpage,the numberedcategorybuttonsselectQuickAccessprogramsbasedonhowprogramsarelaidout onthedisplay,withnoneedtopresstheShiftbutton.InMasterandStoragemodes,aswellas

3-9

User Interface Basics Data Entry

theeditorsforProgram,Setup,Song,andQuickAccessmodes,theCategorybuttonswill automaticallyenterlettersornumbersintoparameterfieldswhenappropriate. Whenyoureenteringnumericvalues,pressthecorrespondingnumericbuttons,ignoring decimalplacesifany(toenter1.16,forexample,press1,1,6,Enter).Thedisplaywillreflect yourentries,butthevaluewontactuallychangeuntilyoupressEnter.BeforepressingEnter, youcanreturntotheoriginalvaluebypressingCancel.PressingClearisthesameaspressing0 withoutpressingEnter. Whenenteringnames,youcanusetheLeft/Rightcursorbuttonsorthe<<</>>>softbuttonsto movethecursortothecharacteryouwanttochange.UsethelabelsontheCategorybuttonsasa guidetocharacterentry.Pressthecorrespondingbuttononeormoretimestoinsertthedesired characterabovethecursor.TheEnterbuttonisequivalenttoOK.TheClearbuttonreplacesthe currentlyselectedcharacterwithaspace.The+/buttontogglesbetweenuppercaseand lowercaseletters. Theresalsoaconvenientfeaturecalledkeyboardnaming,whichletsyouusethekeyboardto entercharactersinnames.Seepage 55.

3-10

User Interface Basics Data Entry

Double Button Presses

Pressingtwoormorerelatedbuttonssimultaneouslyexecutesanumberofspecialfunctions dependingonthecurrentlyselectedmode.Makesuretopressthematexactlythesametime.

In this mode or editor

pressing these buttons simultaneously

Octav-, Octav+ Chan/Zone

does this:
Reset MIDI transposition to 0 semitones. Double-press again to go to previous transposition. Set current MIDI channel to 1. Step to next Program bank (increments of 128). Starts playback of demo song for current Program. Stop with Stop transport button. Brings up Tap Tempo page. Moves through list of Setups in increments of 128. Set zone 1. Brings up Tap Tempo page. Toggle between Play and Stop. Select all tracks on any TRACK page in Song Editor. Brings up Tap Tempo page. Select all items in a list. Move cursor to end of name in naming dialog. Clear all selections in a list. Move cursor to beginning of name in naming dialog. Scroll through the currently selected parameters list of values in regular or logical increments (varies with each parameter). Display Tap Tempo page. Toggle between Play and Stop of current song. Panic (sends all notes/controllers off message on all 16 channels). Toggle between next free ID and original ID. Moves cursor to the end of the name. Moves cursor to the end of the name.

Program mode

Plus/Minus Up/Down cursor buttons Left/Right cursor buttons Plus/Minus

Setup mode

Chan/Zone Left/Right cursor buttons Up/Down cursor buttons

Song mode

Chan/Zone Left/Right cursor buttons Left/Right cursor buttons

Storage mode

up/down cursor buttons Plus/Minus

Any Editor

Left/Right cursor buttons Up/Down cursor buttons Shift/Enter

Save Dialog Rename Dialog

Plus/Minus buttons Plus/Minus buttons Left/Right cursor buttons

3-11

User Interface Basics Intuitive Controller Selection/Data Entry

Intuitive Controller Selection/Data Entry

Forcertainparametersyoucanselectvaluesintuitively,ratherthanhavingtoscrollthrougha list.Dothisbyselectingthedesiredparameter,thenholdingtheEnterbuttonwhilemovingthe desiredphysicalcontrol. Forexample,ontheProgramModePARAMETERSpage(seepage 611)youcanassigna physicalcontrollerforaparameterbyselectingtheControlSourcecolumnforaparameter, holdingtheEnterbuttonandmovingthedesiredcontroller. OntheSetupModeControllerspage(seepage 710,)youcanchoosethecontrollerthatyou wishtomakeanassignmentforbyselectingtheControllerfield,holdingtheEnterbuttonand movingthedesiredcontroller. Asimilartechniquecanbeusedwhensettingkeyranges.Forexample,ontheKEYVELpagein theSetupEditor,youcansettherangeofthecurrentlyselectedzoneasfollows:usethecursor buttonstomovethecursortothevaluefortheLoKeyparameter,press(andhold)theEnter button,thenpressthenoteyouwishtobethelowestnoteforthecurrentlydisplayedzone.The noteyoutriggeredwillappearasthevaluefortheLoKeyparameter.Repeattheprocessforthe HiKeyparameter.

Search
YoucanfindprogramsorsetupsbysearchingforastringofcharactersfromtheProgramor Setupmodemainpages(orwhenselectingprogramsfromwiththeSetupEditor.)Onthese pages,holdtheEnterbuttonandpressanyofthenumericCategorybuttonstodisplaythe Searchdialog. Typeinthestringofcharactersyouwanttofindusingthealphanumericpad.Forexample,if yourelookingattheprogramlistandyouwanttofindallprogramscontainingtheword Horn,youwouldtypehorn.Thisfunctionisnotcasesensitive;itwillfindupperandlower casecharactersregardlessofwhatyoutype. Whenyouvetypedthestringofcharactersyouwanttofind,pressEnter.ThePC3LEsearches throughthecurrentlistofobjectsorvalues,findsallitemsthatmatchthestringofcharacters youtyped,anddisplaysthefirstoneitfinds.HoldEnterandpressoneofthePlus/Minus buttonstomovetothenexthigherorlowernumberedobjectthatcontainsthestringof characters. Thestringyousearchforremainsinmemory.Youcanstoreandselectastringofcharacterswith eachofthenumericbuttons.HoldEnterandpressoneofthenumericbuttonsatanytimeto selectthatstringforasearch.Whenthestringappears,youcanchangeit,orjustpressEnterto findthatstring.

3-12

User Interface Basics Quick Song Recording and Playback

Quick Song Recording and Playback

TherearethreebuttonslabeledRecord,Play/Pause,andStopbelowthemodeselection buttons.Theycontroltherecordingandplaybackofsongsfromanymode;youdonthavetobe inSongmodetorecordorplayback.However,youllneedtomakesurethattheDemoButton parameteronMasterModePage2issettoOff.OtherwisethesebuttonsareusedforEasy Audition(seepage 26).MasterModeisdescribedinChapter 9.

Record

Play/Pause

Stop

Usingthesebuttonsaffectsthecurrenttrackofthecurrentsongthatis,thesongandtrackthat wereselectedthelasttimeyouwereinSongmode.Whenyourecord,therecordingtrackand recordingmodearedeterminedbythecurrentsettingsinSongmode;likewisefortheplayback modewhenyoureplayingasong. WhenthesequencerstatusisSTOPPED(neithertheRecordbuttonLEDnorthePlay/Pause buttonLEDislitorflashing),pressRecordtoputthesequencerinRECREADYstatus.The RecordbuttonLEDlights(red).ThenpressPlay/Pausetostartrecording.ThePlay/Pause buttonflashes(green)toindicatethetempo.AnycountoffisdeterminedbythecurrentSong modesettingfortheCountOffparameter.PressPlay/PauseorStoptoendrecordingandgoto theSavedialog,whereyoucansavethesong,ordiscardit. WhenthesequencerstatusisSTOPPED,pressPlay/Pausetobeginplayingthecurrentsong. PressPlay/Pauseagaintopauseplayback,andagaintoresume.PressStoptoendplayback. SeeChapter12formoreinformationonSongMode.

3-13

User Interface Basics Quick Song Recording and Playback

3-14

The Operating Modes What the Modes Are

Chapter 4 The Operating Modes

Inthischapterwelldiscussthetheorybehindthemodeconcept,andwelldescribethebasic operatingfeaturesofeachmode.

What the Modes Are

ThemodesexisttomakethePC3LElogicaltoworkwith.Withasmanyperformanceand programmingfeaturesasthePC3LEhas,itshelpfultobreakthemintogroups.Thesegroups arecalledmodes.Therearesixprimarymodes;theyredescribedbrieflyinthesectioncalled UsingtheModes on page 42,thentherestofthemanualisdedicatedtoexplainingeachprimary modeinturn. Eachmodeisnamedforthekindofoperationsyouperformwhileinthatmode,andeach modeseditor(ifany)containsalloftheparametersrelatedtoeditingthetypeofobjectfoundin thatmode.InSetupmode,forexample,youselectsetups(andonlysetups)forperformanceor editing.AllofthesetupeditingparametersaregroupedtogetherontheSetupEditorpage, whichisaccessiblethroughSetupmode.

Selecting Modes
WhenthePC3LEison,itsalwaysoperatinginoneofthesixprimarymodesrepresentedbythe LEDhighlightedbuttonstotheleftofthedisplayorinoneoftheeditorscorrespondingtothe currentoperatingmode.Pressingoneofthemodebuttonsselectsthecorrespondingmode.This isthemodesentrylevel.Attheentrylevel,theLEDoftheselectedmodeislit.Onlyonemode canbeselectedatatime. Fromanyprimarymode,youcangettoanyotherprimarymodesimplybypressingoneofthe modebuttons.Ifyoureinaneditor,however,youmustpressExittoreturntothemodesentry levelbeforeselectinganothermode. AllofthemodesexceptMasterandStoragemodegiveyouaccesstooneormoreeditorsfor changingthevaluesoftheparameterswithinthatmode.PresstheEditbuttontoentertheeditor ofthecurrentlyselectedmode.Whenyoudothis,themodeLEDgoesout. Itspossibletoenteranothermodeseditorwithoutleavingthecurrentlyselectedmode.For example,ifyoupressEditwhileinSetupmode,youllentertheSetupEditor.TheSetupEditor pagewillappear,andtheProgramparameterwillbehighlightedbythecursor.IfyoupressEdit again,youllentertheProgramEditor,whereyoucaneditthecurrentlyselectedprogram. Whileyoucaneditandsaveprogramsasyounormallywould,yourestillinSetupmode,and youcantselectanothermodeatthispoint.WhenyouexittheProgramEditor,youllreturnto theSetupEditorpage(andbepromptedtosaveanychangesmadetotheprogram.)PressExit again,andyoullleavetheSetupEditor,returningtotheSetupmodepage.

4-1

The Operating Modes Using the Modes

Thefollowingtableliststheproceduresformovingbetweenmodesandeditors.Notethatthe Exitbuttonwontalwaystakeyouwherethetablesaysitwill;itoftendependsonhowyougot whereyouare.Thetableassumesthatyouveenteredagiveneditorviaitscorrespondingmode. YoullalwaysreturntoProgrammodeeventuallyifyoupressExitrepeatedly.

Current Mode/ Editor Status Any mode Program mode Program Editor Setup mode Setup Editor Quick Access mode Quick Access Editor Song mode Most editors

Available Modes/ Editors All other modes Program Editor Program mode Setup Editor Setup mode Program Editor Quick Access Editor Quick Access mode Song Editor Program Editor Previous mode or editor

How to Get There Press corresponding mode button Press Edit Press Exit Press Edit Press Exit On CH/PRG page: select Program parameter; press Edit Press Edit Press Exit Select CurSong parameter; press Edit Select Program parameter; press Edit Press Exit

Finding Square One

Ifatanytimeyoudontknowwhereyouare,andthemodeLEDsareallunlit,pressExitoneor moretimes.Thiswillreturnyoutotheentrylevelofwhatevermodeyouwerein,andifyou pressExitenoughtimes,youwillalwaysreturntoProgrammode,thestartupmode.Ifyouve madeanychanges,youllbeaskedwhetheryouwanttosavebeforeleavinganyeditor.Pressthe NosoftbuttonortheExitbuttonifyoudontwanttosave.Ifyouwanttosave,pressthe RenameorYessoftbutton,andyoullseetheSavedialog,whichisdescribedinSavingand Naming on page 53.

Using the Modes

YoucanplayyourPC3LEregardlessofthemodeyourein.ThePC3LEsMIDIresponseis almostalwaysactive.Evensotherearethreemodesthataremoreperformanceorientedthan theothers.TheseareProgram,Setup,andQuickAccessmodes.Welldescribeeachofthesix modesbrieflyinthissection.

Program Mode
ThePC3LEstartsupinProgrammode,whereyoucanselect,play,andeditprograms.The Programmodeentrylevelpageshowsthecurrentlyselectedprogram,aswellasasmall segmentoftheprogramlist. TheProgramEditortakesyoutothecoreofthePC3LEssoundeditingparameters.

Setup Mode
Setupmodeletsyouselect,play,andeditsetups.Setupsconsistofupto16separatezones,split oroverlapping,eachhavingitsownprogram,MIDIchannel,andcontrolparameters.Setupsare greatforperformancesituations,whetheryoureplayingmultiplePC3LEprogramsor controllingadditionalsynthsconnectedtothePC3LEsMIDIOutport.Chapter7describes Setupmode.

4-2

The Operating Modes Using the Modes

IfyoureusingadifferentMIDIcontroller,youcanmakeuseofSetupmodeevenifyourMIDI controllercantransmitononlyoneMIDIchannelatatime.Todothis,gototheMIDIReceive pageinMastermode(bypressingtheRECVsoftbuttonwhileinMastermode),andsetthe LocalKeyboardChannelparametertoavaluethatmatchesthetransmitchannelofyourMIDI controller.WhenyouselectSetupmode,thePC3LEwillinterpretincomingMIDIinformation accordingtothesettingsforthecurrentlyselectedsetup.SeethediscussionoftheLocal KeyboardChannelparameterinChapter10fordetails.

Quick Access Mode

Anotherfeatureforliveperformance,QuickAccessmodeenablesyoutocombineprograms andsetupsintobanksoftenentries.Eachoftheseprogramsorsetupscanbeselectedwitha singlealphanumericbutton.DifferentbanksareselectedwiththeChan/Zonebuttons.Theresa selectionoffactorypresetbanks,andyoucanusetheQuickAccessEditortocreateyourown banksandstoretheminthePC3LEsmemory.TheresafulldescriptioninChapter8. YoucanalsouseQuickAccessbanksasawaytoremapincomingoroutgoingProgramChange commands.

Master Mode
Mastermode,describedinChapter 9,containstheparametersthatcontroltheentirePC3LE. Globalsettingsfortuning,transposition,velocityandaftertouchsensitivity,andother preferencesareadjustedhere.YoucanalsogettoGeneralMIDIModefromhere.

Song Mode
Songmodeenablesyoutoplaysequences(songs)storedinthePC3LEsmemory,andprovidesa fullyfeaturedsequencerthatyoucanusetorecordsongs.Youcanalsorecordmultitimbrally viaMIDI,orloadstandardMIDIfiles(Type0or1).TheSongEditoralsoenablesyoutomodify existingsequencesstoredinmemory.SeeChapter 10.

Storage Mode
StoragemodeletsyouloadandsaveprogramsandotherobjectsusingaUSBdevice.See Chapter 11.

4-3

The Operating Modes Using the Modes

4-4

Editing Conventions Introduction to Editing

Chapter 5 Editing Conventions

Introduction to Editing
Editingprograms,setupsandsongsonthePC3LEalwaysinvolvesthreebasicoperations:mode selection,navigation,anddataentry. First,selectthemodethatrelatestotheobjectyouwanttoeditaprogram,asetup,etc.Then selecttheobjectyouwanttoedit,andpresstheEditbuttontoentertheeditorwithinthatmode. Forprograms,setups,songs,andquickaccessbanks,theseobjectsareselectedwhenyouare onthemainpageoftheircorrespondingmode.InthesecasesyoucanpresstheEditbuttonwith anythingselectedontheirmainpagetoaccesstheireditor.Oftentheirwillbemoreobjects insideofthesemainpageeditors,suchasshiftpatternsandvelocitypatterns,andtheycanbe editedbyselectingtheirparameterwiththecursorandpressingtheEditbutton.Aneditor containsalltheparametersthatdefinetheobjectyoureprogramming. Next,navigatearoundtheeditorspage(s)withthesoftbuttonsandselectparameterswiththe cursor(arrow)buttons.Whenyouveselectedaparameter(itsvalueishighlightedbythe cursor),youcanchangeitsvaluewithoneofthedataentrymethods.Whenyouchangeavalue, youllnormallyhearitseffectontheobjectyoureediting.ThePC3LEdoesntactuallywrite youreditingchangestomemoryuntilyousavetheobjectyoureworkingon.Itthenallowsyou tochoosebetweenwritingovertheoriginalobject,orstoringthenewlyeditedversioninanew memorylocation.

Whats an Object?
Ifyouvebeenwonderingwhatwemeanbythetermobject,itsanexpressionweusefor anythingthatcanbenamed,saved,deleted,oredited.AcompletelistofthelatestPC3LE factoryobjectscanbefoundatkurzweil.com.Heresalistofallthetypesofobjects: Programs FactorypresetoruserprogrammedsoundsstoredinROMorflash memory.A programisoneormorelayersofsoundgeneratedbysamples oroscillators,whichisthenroutedthroughdigitalsignalprocessing. FactorypresetoruserprogrammedMIDIperformancepresetsconsisting ofupto16zones,eachwithitsownprogram,MIDIchannel,and controllerassignments,and(optionally)arpeggiationand/orriff specifications. Sequencefilesloadedintomemory,orMIDIdatarecordedinSongmode.

Setups

Songs

QuickAccessbanks Factorypresetoruserprogrammedbanksoftenentrieseach,thatstore programsandsetupsforsinglebuttonaccessinQuickAccessmode. Shiftpatterns Factorypresetoruserprogrammedsequencesofnoteshiftinformation, usedbythearpeggiatorfordetailedarpeggiations,orbytheShiftKey Numbercontrollerdestination. Factorypresetoruserprogrammedsequencesofnotevelocityshift information,usedbythearpeggiatorfordetailedvelocitytriggeringin arpeggiation.

Velocitypatterns

5-1

Editing Conventions Object Type and ID

Algorithms Mastertables

Factorypresetoruserprogrammedrouting(virtualwiring)forV.A.S.T. DSPFunctions. ThevaluesthataresetfortheglobalcontrolparametersontheMaster modepage,aswellasthesettingsfortheparametersontheTransmit, Receive,andChannelspagesinMIDImode,andtheprogramscurrently assignedtoeachMIDIchannel.

Object Type and ID

ThePC3LEstoresitsobjectsinmemoryusingasystemofIDnumbers.Eachobjectisidentified byitsobjecttypeandobjectID.Anobjectstypeissimplythekindofobjectitis,whetheritsa program,setup,song,etc.TheobjectIDisanumberthatdistinguisheseachobjectfromother objectsofthesametype.Forexampleyoucanhaveasetup,aprogram,andaneffect,allwithID 4becausetheyaredifferentobjecttypes.Youcant,however,havetwoprogramswithID4. Object Type
Program Setup Velocity Map 4 4 4

Object ID

Object Name
Horowitz Grand Acoustic Split Light 3

Whenyousaveobjectsthatyouveedited,thePC3LEwillaskyoutoassignanID.Iftheoriginal objectwasaROMobject(factorypreset,)thePC3LEwillsuggestthefirstavailableIDinthe Usercategory(startingat1025).Iftheoriginalobjectwasamemoryobject(usercreated,)youll havetheoptionofsavingtoanunusedID,orreplacingtheoriginalobject.Doublepressthe and+buttons(beneaththeAlphaWheel)toselectthenextavailableuserlocation. ObjectsofdifferenttypescanhavethesameID,butobjectsofthesametypemusthavedifferent IDstobekeptseparate.Whenyouresavinganobjectthatyouveedited,youcanreplacean existingobjectofthesametypebygivingitthesameID.Theobjectyouarereplacingwillbe deletedpermanently.Thereisoneexceptiontothis:IfyouwriteoveraROMobject(factory preset,)youcanalwaysreverttotheoriginalfactoryROMobjectbydeletingyounewobjectthat usestheID.TheobjectthatyouhadreplacedtheROMobjectwithwillbepermanentlydeleted, andtheoriginalROMobjectwillappearinitsplace. ManyparametershaveobjectsastheirvaluestheShiftPattrnparameteronthe ARPEGGIATORpage,forexample.Inthiscase,theobjectsIDappearsinthevaluefieldalong withtheobjectsname.YoucanenterobjectsasvaluesbyenteringtheirIDswiththe alphanumericpad.Thisisespeciallyconvenientforprograms,sincetheirIDnumbersare usuallythesameastheirMIDIprogramchangenumbers. TheobjecttypeandIDenableyoutostorehundredsofobjectswithoutlosingtrackofthem,and alsotoloadfilesfromstoragewithouthavingtoreplacefilesyouvealreadyloaded.

5-2

Editing Conventions Saving and Naming

Saving and Naming

Whenyouveeditedanobjecttoyoursatisfaction,youllwanttostoreitinmemory.Theresa standardprocedureforsavingandnaming,whichappliestoallobjects.Inanymodeoreditor, theLEDontheSavebuttontotherightofthedisplaywilllightifyouhavemadeanychanges whichcanbesavedfortheobjectassociatedwiththecurrentmodeoreditorthatyouareusing. WhentheSavebuttonislit,presstheSavebuttontobringupasavedialog.PressingtheSave buttonagainwhileviewingthissavedialogwillsavetheobjecttothedisplayedID#.Ifyouhave editedtheobjectbefore,pressingsaveasecondtimewilloverwritetheobjectatitspreviousID#. Ifyouhaventeditedtheobjectbefore,pressingsaveasecondtimewillsavetheobjectatanew ID#. Also,ifyouhavechangedsomethinginaneditorthatcanbesaved,asavedialogwillappear whenyoupresstheExitbutton.Ifyouhaventactuallychangedanythingwhileintheeditor, youllsimplyexittothemodeyoustartedfrom.Ifyouhavemadechanges,however,thePC3LE willaskyouifyouwanttosavethosechanges.ThefirstSavedialoggivesyouoptionsviasoft buttons:PressCanceltoresumeediting,Notoexittheeditorwithoutsaving,orYestosave youreditsandmovetotheSavepage. TheRenamesoftbuttonontheSavepagetakesyouimmediatelytothenamingdialog,where youassignanametotheobjectyouresaving.Youhaventsavedyet,butyoullbeabletoafter youvenamedtheprogram. Thecursorunderlinesthecurrentlyselectedcharacter.Pressthe<<<or>>>softbuttonstomove thecursorwithoutchangingcharacters.Pressanalphanumericbuttononeormoretimesto enteracharacterabovethecursor.Thecharactersthatcorrespondtothealphanumericbuttons arelabeledundereachbutton.Ifthecharacterthatappearsisnottheoneyouwant,pressthe buttonagain.Pressthe+/buttononthealphanumericpadtoswitchbetweenupperandlower casecharacters. Usethenumberedbuttonstoenterthenumerals0through9.PressClear(onthealphanumeric pad)toerasetheselectedcharacterwithoutmovinganyothercharacters.PresstheDeletesoft buttontoerasetheselectedcharacter.Allcharacterstotherightofthecursorwillmoveone spaceleft.PresstheInsertsoftbuttontoinsertaspaceabovethecursor,movingallcharactersto therightofthecursoronespacetotheright. PresstheCancelsoftbuttonifyoudecidenottonametheobject.PressOKwhenthenameisset thewayyouwanttosaveit. Inadditiontothelettersandnumerals,therearethreesetsofpunctuationcharacters.Theeasiest waytogettothemistopressoneofthealphanumericbuttonstoselectacharacterclosetothe oneyouwant,thenscrolltoitwiththeAlphaWheel.Heresthewholelist: !#$%&()*+,./0123456789 :;<=>?@AthroughZ [\]^_`athroughz.(space). Pressingthe/+buttonssimultaneouslyisashortcuttothefollowingcharacters: 0,A,aand(space). Ifyourewonderinghowwecameupwiththissequenceofcharacters,itscomposedofASCII characters33through122. WhenyoupressOK,thefinalSavedialogappears,whereyouassignanIDtotheeditedobject. Ifyouchangeyourmindaboutthename,presstheRenamesoftbuttonforanothertry. Note:Foranadditionalnamingmethod,seeKeyboardNamingbelow.

5-3

Editing Conventions Saving and Naming

ROM Objects
IftheobjectyoueditedwasaROM(factorypreset)object,thePC3LEwillautomaticallysuggest thenextavailable(unused)IDastheIDfortheeditedobjectuponsaving.IfthatstheIDyou want,presstheSavesoftbutton,andtheobjectwillbestoredinmemorywiththatID. Otherwise,youcanselectanyIDfrom1tothemaximum.Thispagealsogivesyouthe opportunitytoreturntothenamingdialog(asdescribedintheprevioussection.) IfyouselectanIDthatsalreadyinuse,thePC3LEwilltellyouthatyouregoingtoreplacethe ROMobjectthatsalreadybeenassignedthatID.Ifyoudontwanttodothat,youcanselecta differentID.Youcanalsopressthe/+buttonssimultaneouslytotogglebetweentheIDthatthe PC3LEsuggestedandtheoriginalID.OrpresstheCancelsoftbuttontocanceltheoperation. IfyoudecidenottocancelorchangetheID,andyoupresstheReplacesoftbutton,thePC3LE willwriteyournewlyeditedobjectovertheexistingROMobject.Actually,itonlyappearsthat way,sinceyoucanttrulywritetoROM.TheROMobjectwillreappearifyoudeletethenewly editedobject(therearesoftbuttonsineacheditorfordeletingobjects).

Memory Objects
Iftheoriginalobjectwasamemoryobject,thePC3LEwillassumeyouwanttoreplaceit,and willsuggestthesameIDastheoriginalobject.(InallmodesotherthanSongmode,adiamond iconprecedinganitemsIDindicatesamemoryobject).AswithROMobjects,youcancancel, replace,orchangetheIDandsavetoanunusedID.Ifyoureplaceamemoryobject,however,its definitelygone!

5-4

Editing Conventions Saving and Naming

Keyboard Naming
Thekeyboardnamingfeature makesnamingobjects convenient,bylettingyouuse thekeyboard(oryourMIDI controller)toenterthenameof theobjectyouremodifying. WhenyoureinaRename dialog,useeitheroftheChan/ Zonebuttonstochangebetween thekeyboardnamingstates:Off (disabled),On,andAdv (Advance). WhensettoOnorAdv,thekeys (MIDInotenumbers,actually) correspondtoallthecharacters shownonpage 53.Thereare alsoequivalentstothecursor movement,insertion,deletion, andOK(Enter)buttons. Onrequiresyoutomovethe cursortoentereachletter,justas youhavetodowhenusingthe normaldataentrymethodsfor naming.Advautomatically movesthecursoronespaceto therighteachtimeyoustrikea key,justlikeatypewriteror computerkeyboard.Thisisthe mostconvenientsetting.
A0 to C8 (Standard 88-note Keyboard)
A0

Move cursor to start of name Move cursor left one space Move cursor right one space (Shift) (Space) a A b B c C d D e E f F g G h H i I j J k K l L m M n N o O p P q Q r R s S t T u U v V w W x X y Y z Z (Space) (Shift) Move cursor left one space Move cursor right one space Move cursor to end of name

C2

Delete; move characters left one space Insert; move characters right one space 1 Wheel ! tch Absolute Value 2 @ 3 #

C3

4 $ 5 % 6 ^ 7 & 8 *

C4

9 ( 0 (zero) ) - (Hyphen) = (Equals) (Backspace) _ (Underscore) +

C5

; (Semicolon) ' (Apostrophe) , (Comma) . (Period) / (Slash) > ? <

: (Colon) '' (Quote)

C6

[ (Left bracket) ` (Back quote) ] (Right bracket) \ (Backslash) (OK, Enter) Delete; move characters left one space Insert; move characters right one space

C7

Use the (Shift) keys or Sustain pedal to enter upper-case and special characters

C8

5-5

Editing Conventions Deleting Objects

Deleting Objects
Withinmosteditors,therearesoftbuttonsfordeletingobjects.Whenyouwanttodeletean object,presstheDeletesoftbutton,andthePC3LEwillaskyouifyouwanttodeletetheobject. (Atthispointinthedialog,youcanselectanotherobjectwithanyofthedataentrymethods.) PressOKifyouwanttodeleteit,orpressCancelifyoudont.ThePC3LEwontletyoudelete ROMobjects(alsoknownasfactoryobjects). Memoryobjects,ontheotherhand,aregonewhenyoudeletethem!IfyouvereplacedaROM objectbysavingamemoryobjectwiththesameID,theROMobjectisinvisible,butstillthere. DeletingthememoryobjectstoredatthesameIDwillrestoretheROMobject. Youlloftendeleteobjectstogainmemoryspace,ortoorganizethememorybanksbeforesaving objectstostorage.

Dependent Objects
Adependentobjectisanobjectthatslinkedinmemorywithatleastoneotherobject.For example,ifyoucreateasetupthatusesaprogramthatyoualsocreated,thatprogramisa dependentobjectofthesetup. Whenyoustarttodeleteanobjectthathasdependentobjects,theDeletedialoggivesyoua choice:Deletedependentobjects?IfyoupressYes,thePC3LEwilldeletetheobjectandallits dependentobjectswhenyouexecutetheDeletefunction.Continuingwiththeexamplefrom above,ifyouweredeletingthesetupyoucreated,andyouchosetodeletedependentobjects, thedependentprogramwouldgetdeletedaswell.IfyoupressNoattheDeletedependent objects?prompt,thePC3LEdeletesonlytheobject,butkeepsthedependentobjects.Inthis example,thesetupwouldgetdeleted,butthedependentprogramwouldremain. Whendeletingobjectsandtheirdependents,thePC3LEdeletesonlythosedependentobjects thatarentdependentonotherobjectsthatyourenotdeleting.Forexample,supposeyouhave twosetupsthatcontainthesameprogram.Ifyoudeleteoneofthesetups,anddeletedependent objectswithit,thesetupgetsdeleted,buttheprogramthatscontainedintheothersetup remainsinmemory.

Saving and Loading FilesStorage Mode

Savingafilesimplyinvolvesselectingsingleobjectsoralluserobjectstobestoredasasingle file.Whenyouloadafile,thePC3LEasksyouifyouwanttomaintaintheID#sthatweresaved withtheoriginalobjects(whichwillreplaceanyobjectsonthePC3LEthatsharethoseID#s)orif youwouldliketoaddthemtothePC3LEsexistingobjects(thiswillnotreplaceanyobjects,the PC3LEwillinsteadautomaticallyreassigntheobjectID#siftheyarealreadybeingused.) SeeChapter 11formoreinformationonloadingandsavingfiles.

5-6

Program Mode

Chapter 6 Program Mode

ProgramsarethePC3LEsperformancelevelsoundobjects.Theyrepresetsoundsequivalentto thepatches,presets,voices,ormultisthatyoufindonothersynths. ProgrammodeistheheartofthePC3LE,whereyouselectprogramsforperformanceand editing.ThePC3LEispackedwithgreatsoundspoweredbythesamepowerfulsynthesisas usedinKurzweilsPC3.ThePC3LEgivesyoueasyaccesstothissynthesis.Foreachfactory ROMProgramtherearesynthesisparametersassignedtothePC3LEsassignablecontrols.You canstarttweakingsoundsrightawayfromtheProgrammodemainpagebymovingtheknobs andusingtheassignableswitches.Thesesynthesisparametersarealsoavailabletoeditinthe simplifiedPC3LEProgramEditor,alongwiththeabilitytochangeFXchainsandarpeggiator settings.FormoreindepthProgrameditingcapabilities,presstheV.A.S.T.softbuttoninthe ProgramEditortoentertheV.A.S.T.ProgramEditor,whichallowsyoutoeditprogramsusing almostallofthesameparametersthatareavailableonthePC3. Pads WhenyouselectaPC3LEprogram,thePC3LEwillalsoselectanassociatedDrumprogramto betriggeredbythePads.TheprogramforthePadsisassignedtoMIDIchannel10.Also,any factoryprogramintheDrumscategoryisplayablefromthepads.SeeThePADS Page on page 612fordetailsonchangingthedrumkitforeachprogram. Assignable Knobs, Switches, Pedals, and Wheels InProgrammode,eachofthePC3LEsassignableknobs,switches,pedalsandwheelscanbe usedtocontrolaprogramspecificparameter,ortosendMIDIcontinuouscontrollervaluesto externalequipment.Eachfactoryprogramhassomeofthesecontrollersassignedtoprogram parameters(forexample,filterfrequency,attacktime,distortiondrive,etc.)PresstheInfosoft buttonfromtheProgrammodemainpagetoseealisttheassignmentssetforeachcontrol.To edittheseassignments,seeThePARAMETERSPage on page 69. ThePC3LEsfiveknobscancontrolupto15parametersperprogram,actingas15virtualknobs. Eachofthefiveknobscancontrol3differentparameters,andyoucanaccessthreegroupsoffive parametersatatime(oneforeachknobatatime.)PresstheShiftbuttontotheleftoftheknobs toswitchbetweenlightingoneoftheLEDsforthethreerowsbelowtheknobs.Whenarows LEDislititindicatesthatoneofthe3setsoffiveparameters(ifassigned)cancurrentlybe controlledfromtheknobs. Eachknobrowrepresents5ofthe15virtualknobparameters.Thetoprow(labeledTimbre Reverb)representsknobs15,themiddlerow(labeledCTL610)representsknobs610,andthe bottomrow(labeledCTL1115)representsknobs1115.Thetopknobrowhasgeneral parameternames,indicatingtheparametertypegenerallyassignedforeachfactoryprogram. PresstheInfosoftbuttonfromtheProgrammodemainpagetoseeexactlywhatparametersare beingcontrolled.Knob5(labeledReverb)almostalwayscontrolstheauxsendleveltoareverb effect(sometimesitsadelayeffect.)KB3organprogramsconformtoadifferentsetofcontroller assignments,seeKB3EffectsAndRealtimeControls on page 66.

6-1

Program Mode The Program Mode Page

The Program Mode Page

ThetoplineoftheProgrammodemainpageshowsyourmodelocation,thepresentMIDI transposition,andthecurrentMIDIchannel. TheinfoboxattheleftoftheProgrammodepagegivesyouinformationaboutthecurrent programscontrollerassignments.Changingthevalueofacontrol(movingaknoborpressinga switch)willdisplaythenameofthelastmovedcontrolleralongwithitsparameterassignment.

Selecting Programs
WhenyouareinProgrammode,therearetwobasicwaystoselectaPC3LEprogram: PressaCategorybuttontolistallprogramsinthatcategory,thenusetheAlphaWheel,/+ buttons,orcursorup/downbuttonstoscrollthroughthelist.TheCategorybuttonsareon thefrontpanel,totherightofthedisplay.PresstheAllcategorytolistprogramsinall categories. PresstheShiftcategorybuttonandusethenumberedcategorybuttonstoenteraspecific programIDnumber,thenpresstheEntercategorybutton.PresstheShiftcategorybutton againtoreturnthecategorybuttonstotheirprimaryfunction.

AlistofPC3LEfactoryprogramsandotherobjects(aswellastheirID#s)canbefoundat kurzweil.com.WhennotinGeneralMIDImode,defaultprogramsusedforGMmodecanbe accessedstartingatID#4096(seeGeneralMIDI on page 99fordetails.) ThePC3LEhasvarioussettingsforrespondingtoMIDIProgramChangecommandsfrom externalsources.TheseareexplainedinChapter 9,sowewontgointothemhere.Youshould beabletochangeprogramsbysendingProgramChangecommandsfromyourMIDIcontroller.

Easy Audition
Anytimeyouwanttohearwhataprogramsoundslike,highlighttheprogramsname(whilein Programmode)thenpressthePlay/Pausebuttontoplayabriefsample.TheDemoButton parameterontheMasterMode2pagemustbeonforEasyAuditiontowork;theparameteris onbydefault.MastermodeisdescribedinChapter 9.

Picking Favorite Programs

Youcanselectafavoriteprogramwithineachcategorythatwillbeautomaticallyrecalledwhen youchoosethatcategory.Todothis,firstselectacategorybypressingoneoftheCategory buttonswhileinProgrammode(makesurethecategoryShiftbuttonisnotlit.)Next,findyour favoriteprograminthatcategorybyusingtheAlphawheel,/+buttons,orup/downcursor buttons.(Alternatively,youcanfindtheprogrambypressingthecategoryShiftbuttonand usingthenumberedcategorybuttonstoentertheprogramsIDnumber,thenpressthecategory

6-2

Program Mode The Program Mode Page

Enterbutton.Ifyouusethismethod,makesuretounlightthecategoryshiftbuttonbypressing itagainaftermakingyourselection.)Lastly,holdthecategorybuttonthatyouwishtosavea favoriteforforafewseconds.Thenexttimeyouchoosethatcategory,yourfavoritewillbe selected. Startup Program Youcansavethecurrentsettingsforprogrammode(selectedchannel,selectedprogramoneach channel)byenteringandthenexitingmastermode.Thissavesamastertable(seeChapter 9, MasterModefordetails.)Bydoingthis,yourselectedchannelandprogramwillloadthenext timeyoupoweronthePC3LE.

The Soft Buttons in Program Mode

UsetheOctavandOctav+softbuttonstotransposeupordownbyafulloctave.Pressingboth Octavbuttonssimultaneouslyreturnsthetranspositiontoitsoriginalsetting. PressingthePanicsoftbuttonsendsanAllNotesOffmessageandanAllControllersOff messageonall16MIDIchannels. PresstheInfosoftbuttontoseeallofthecontrollerassignmentsofthecurrentprogram.Scroll downthepageusingtheAlphaWheelorthe/+buttons.Infotextisautomaticallycreatedwhen assigningacontrollertoaparameterwithintheProgramEditor(seeAutomaticInfo Creation on page 651fordetails.) TheXpose/Xpose+buttonsareashortcutforquicktranspositioninsemitone(halfstep) increments.YoucanusethemtotransposetheentirePC3LEasmuchasthreeoctavesupor down.Thetoplineofthedisplayshowsthecurrentamountoftransposition(Xpose).Pressing bothXposebuttonssimultaneouslyreturnsthetranspositiontozero.TheXposebuttons transposethePC3LE,aswellasanyMIDIdevicesconnectedtothePC3LEsMIDIOutport. Changingthetranspositionwiththesoftbuttonsalsochangesthecorrespondingsettingonthe MastermodeMIDITransmitpage.

Saving Controller Settings

Saving On Program Mode Main Page Vs. The Program Editor ItisimportanttokeepinmindhowprogramsaresavedwhenontheProgrammodemainpage vs.whenusingtheProgramEditor. OntheProgrammodemainpage,ifyouchangethesettingsofanycontrols(knobposition, assignableswitchon/off,ModWheelposition,aswellasArpSettings,)theLEDontheSave buttonwilllight.PresstheSavebuttontobringupthesavedialogandsaveyouredited program.Ifyouswitchtoadifferentprogram,thealterationsthatyoumadetotheprevious programwillbelostwithoutwarning. WhenusingtheProgramEditor,theLEDontheSavebuttonwilllightwhenyouhavealtered thecurrentprogram,andthePC3LEwillaskifyouwouldliketosavethecurrentprogramif youexittheProgramEditor. Saving A Newly Edited Program Ifyouaresavingchangestoaprogramthatyouhavenotpreviouslyedited,thesavedialogwill choosethefirstavailableuserID#asasavelocation(sothatyoudontreplacetheoriginal program.)YoucanalsochooseadifferentID#tosavetheprogramtoandrenametheprogramif desired.IfyouhaveeditedafactoryROMprogramandwishtosaveovertheoriginalprogram

6-3

Program Mode The Program Mode Page

attheoriginalID#,simultaneouslypressthe+/buttonstojumpbetweenselectingtheprograms originalID#andthefirstavailableUsercategoryID#.Savingattheprogramsoriginalfactory ID#willreplacethefactoryprogram,butyoucanalwaysreturnafactoryROMprogramtoits originalsettingsbydeletingtheprogramatthatID#(seeDelete on page 615.) Updating A Previously Edited Program Ifyouaresavingchangestoaprogramthatyouhavepreviouslyedited,thesameID#thatthe editedprogramwassavedwithwillautomaticallybeselected,andyoucansimultaneously pressthe+/buttonstojumpbetweenselectingtheprogramssameID#andthefirstavailable UsercategoryID#.Ifyouwishtomakeanupdatededittoapreviouslyeditedprogramand replacetheoldversionatthesameID#,pressingtheSavebuttontwicewillhavethesameresult aspressingtheSavebuttonandthenthesavesoftbutton.

Arpeggiator Settings (Arp Settings Button)

Eachprogramhasitsownarpeggiatorsettings.PresstheArpSettingsbuttononthefrontpanel (belowthemodebuttons.)ThiswillbringyoutotheArpeggiator1pagewhereyoucanaccess thearpeggiatorsettingsforthecurrentlyselectedprogram.SeeChapter 7,TheARPEGGIATOR Pageformoreonthesesettings.ThearpeggiatorinProgrammodeactsthesameasasingle arpeggiatordoesinSetupmode,butinProgrammodetheArpeggiator2pagehasnoSyncTo, SyncType,orNumBeatsparametersasitdoesinSetupmode.

Split/Layer Button
PresstheSplit/Layerbuttontocreateasplitorlayeredsetupusingthecurrentlyselected program,whichyoucanthenplayinSetupmode.YouwillbebroughttotheSplit/Layerpage. SeeChapter 7,Split/LayerButtonfordetailsonhowtousethispage. Note:WhenenteringtheSplit/LayerpagefromProgrammode,itactsthesameasitdoesin Setupmode,exceptthatyourresultwillbeanewsetup,insteadofaddinganewsplitorlayer zonetoanexistingsetupasyouwouldwithwhenenteringtheSplit/LayerpagefromSetup mode.Also,whenenteringtheSplit/LayerpagefromProgrammodethecurrentlyselected programwillbeassignedtozone1ofanewsetup,andthePC3LEsphysicalcontrollerswillbe assignedtozone1sprogrambydefault(thoughyoucaneditthislaterinsetupEditmode.)

Tap Tempo Button

YoucanusetheTapTempobuttontosetthetempooftheArpeggiatorwhileinProgrammode (ortosettheSystemorSongtempoinothermodes.)TaptheTapTempobuttononquarternotebeats forameasureortwoatthedesiredtempotosetatempo.Youneedtotapatleasttwicefora tempotobecalculated,thoughtappingseveraltimes(likeoneachbeatofoneormore measures)worksbest.ThisalsobringsuptheTapTempopagewhichgivesyoumoreTap Tempooptions.Thenewlytappedtempoisdisplayedinthetempofield,andLEDontheTap Tempobuttonblinksatthattempo.PresstheExitbuttonortheDonesoftbuttontoreturntothe Programmodemainpage.

6-4

Program Mode V.A.S.T. and KB3 Programs

Alternatively,atemporarycontrollercanbesetforuseintheTemporaryTAPcontrollerfield,or youcantaptheTapsoftbutton.TheTemporaryTAPcontrollerworksonlywhileontheTap TemposcreenandwillremainselectedwhenaccessingtheTapTemposcreenfromothermodes, buttheselectionwillreturntoOFFthenexttimethePC3LEisturnedon. Youcanalsoassignacontroller(suchasafootswitch)tocontrollerdestination168,TapTempo, tobeusedasataptempobuttonwhennotviewingtheTapTempopage.Thiscanbedoneinthe ControlSetup(seeTheControlSetup on page 769.)AnyMIDIvaluesreceivedbydestination168 sendatapsignaltothetaptempofunction.Thiswouldbebestusedwithaassignableswitch(or footswitch.)ConfiguretheselectedswitchsothatitisToggled,hasitsOnandOffControlsset todestination168(TapTempo,)andsettheOnandOffValuestoanyvalueotherthanNone. EntryandExitStateshouldbesettoNone.

V.A.S.T. and KB3 Programs

ItisimportanttounderstandthedifferencebetweenV.A.S.T.programsandKB3programs. V.A.S.T.programscontainupto32layers.Eachlayercontainseithersamples(mostoftenused torecreateconventionalinstrumentsounds,)orKVAoscillators(usedforvirtualanalog synthesis.)Eachlayerispresettobetriggeredbythekeyboardinspecificrangesandvelocity levels.Theabilitytotriggersomanylayersresultsindetailedandmorerealisticprograms.Each layerisalsoroutedthroughsophisticateddigitalsignalprocessing(DSP)algorithmswhich shapethetoneandotherbehaviorsofthesounds. KB3programsuseamuchdifferentarchitecture.Therearenolayersoralgorithms,justasetof oscillators(designedtoemulatethetonewheelsinaHammondOrgan)thatstartrunningas soonasyouselectaKB3program.Wevedoneextensivetestingandanalysiswithseveraltone wheelorgans,andcreatedourownmodelstoemulatetheuniquetonewheelsound.Each oscillatoroperatesindependently,andhasitsownpitchandamplitudesettings.The oscillatorswellcallthemtonewheelsfromhereonaredividedintoanupperandlower group.TheuppertonewheelsusethesamplesinthePC3LEskeymapstogeneratesound,while thelowertonewheelsusesinewaves. KB3programsaredifferentenoughfromV.A.S.T.programsthatweusethetermKB3modeto describewhatsgoingonwhenyouplayaKB3program.WheneveryouplayaKB3program, youareinKB3mode.YoucanfindKB3programsbypressingtheOrgancategorybuttonwhile inProgrammode.TheprogramsthatuseKB3modewilllighttheKB3LEDtotheleftofthe knobs,indicatingthatthePC3LEsknobsandswitchesarenowdedicatedtotheorgancontrols thatarelabeledonthefrontpanel.KB3programwillalsobedisplayedintheprogrammode infobox.
Note: YoucanplayKB3programsonlyonasinglechannelatatime.Whenachannelotherthan

thecurrentlyselectedchannelisusingaKB3program,theinfoboxontheprogrammodemain pagewillindicatewhichMIDIchannelisusingaKB3program.

6-5

Program Mode V.A.S.T. and KB3 Programs

KB3 Effects And Real-time Controls

YouhaverealtimecontrolovermanycomponentsofKB3programsdirectlyfromthefront panel.Theknobsemulatethedrawbarsthataresoessentialtothetonewheelsound,whilethe assignableswitchesabovethemcancontroltheKB3effects:Leslie,vibrato,chorus,and percussion.UsetheShiftbuttonnexttoeachsetofcontrolsinordertoaccessalloftheavailable parameters. WhenusingaKB3programinProgrammode,theassignableknobsandswitchesalways controlKB3effects.InSetupmodetheassignableswitchesmuteandunmutezonesbydefault. IfyouwanttheassignableswitchestocontrolthefunctionsofaKB3programinasetup,youcan editthesetupandautomaticallyassigntheKB3controlsusingtheKB3CTLsoftbuttoninthe SetupEditor.SeeSetControlsKB3(KB3CTL) on page 766. Drawbars In KB3 Mode Oneofthestandardperformancefeaturesofmanytonewheelorgansisthesetofdrawbarsfor emulatingthestopsonapipeorgan.Movingthedrawbarscontrolstheamplitudeofeitherthe fundamentalsortheharmonicsofthenotes(outtoincreaseamplitude,intodecreaseit.) ThePC3LEsknobsserveastheninedrawbarsfoundonmosttonewheelorgans.Turningthe knobsdownistheequivalentofpushingthedrawbarsin(removingfundamentalsor harmonics.)ThetablebelowshowshowthePC3LEsknobsrelatetostandarddrawbar functions.
Subharmonics 16' Knob 1 5 1/3' Knob 2 Fundamental 8' Knob 3 Harmonics 4' Knob 4 2 2/3' Knob 5 2' Knob 6 Row 2 1 3/5' Knob 7 Row 2 1 1/3' Knob 8 Row 2 1' Knob 9 Row 2

Table 6-1

Standard Drawbar Settings for the Hammond B3

KB3 Mode Effects Buttons (Assignable Switches) WhenusingaKB3program,thePC3LEsassignableswitchescontrolKB3effects.TheLEDsof theassignableswitchesindicatethestatusofthevariouseffectsforthecurrentKB3program. ThisstatusissavedaspartofeachKB3program.Youcanchangetheeffectsinrealtimeby pressingthebuttons(orbysendingtheappropriateMIDIControllervaluesfromanexternal MIDIcontroller,seeTable 63 on page 68fordetails.) On/offsettingsoftheassignableswitchesforaKB3programarenotautomaticallysaved;the switchesreturntotheirprogrammedonoroffstatethenexttimeyouselecttheprogram.If youvemadechangestotheirstatethatdifferfromthosesavedwiththeprogram,theSave buttonwilllight.PresstheSavebuttontosavechangestothecurrentprogram,ortorenamethe programandsaveitunderanewID#.WhenchoosinganID#,presstheand+buttons simultaneously(belowtheAlphaWheel)tojumptotheoriginalID#ifyouwouldliketoreplace theoriginalprogram.IfyouchangethestateoftheassignableswitcheswhileintheProgram Editor,thePC3LEwillpromptyoutosavethechangeswhenexitingtheProgramEditor.Ifyou dontlikethechanges,youcanexitwithoutsaving,andtheprogramwillreverttoitsprevious settings. InKB3modetheassignableswitchesalsorespondtoandsendMIDIControllermessages.See Table 63onpage 68fordetails.

6-6

Program Mode V.A.S.T. and KB3 Programs

YoucanalsochangetheprogrammedsettingsfortheKB3modebuttonstoperformnonKB3 functions,suchascontrollinganAuxeffect,bychangingthesettingsontheProgramEditor Parameterspage.

Switch # 1 2 3 4 5 6 (row 2) 7 (row 2) 8 (row 2) 9 (row 2) 10 (row 2) Click Percussion Vibrato Effect Category Rotary Button Name Slow/Fast Brake On / Off Chorus / Vibrato Depth 1 / 3 On / Off Volume Loud / Soft Decay Fast / Slow Pitch High / Low On / Off Corresponding Parameter Rotary Slow/Fast Rotary Brake Chorus/Vibrato On/Off Chorus/Vibrato Select Chorus/Vibrato Depth Percussion On/Off Percussion Level Percussion Decay Percussion Pitch KeyClick On/Off Disabled if Switch 6 is off Disabled if Switch 6 is off Disabled if Switch 6 is off Disabled if Switch 3 is off Disabled if Switch 3 is off Comments

Table 6-2

KB3 Mode Effects Buttons and Corresponding Parameters

Additional Controller Assignments In KB3 Mode OtherdefaultassignmentsforfactoryKB3programsinclude: Knob10andCCPedal1controltheSwell(volumepedal)parameter. Knob11controlstheLeakageparameter,whichcontrolsthelevelofsimulatedsignalbleedof adjacenttonewheels.Generally,turninguptheleakageparametercreatesadirtierorgan sound.Thiscanbeusedforemulatingdifferentagedorgans,asanolderorganwillhavemore leakageasitagesanditscapacitorsbegintoleak. TheModWheelcontrolsDistortionDrive. SwitchPedal1(thesustainpedal)controlstheRotaryFootSwparameter,whichtogglesthe Rotaryspeedbetweensloworfast.

6-7

Program Mode V.A.S.T. and KB3 Programs

MIDI Control of KB3 Programs

Controller Numbers

Table 63liststheMIDIControllernumbersthatcontrolKB3features.Sendthelistedcontroller numberandappropriatecontrollervaluetocontroleachKB3featureviaMIDI.ThePC3LEalso sendstheseControllernumberstoitsMIDIOutportwhenusingeachoftheseKB3features. MIDI Controller Number

1

KB3 Program Feature

Dist Drive (Mod Wheel)

Values
0 = Minimum Distortion Drive. 127 = Maximum Distortion Drive. Values between 0 and 127 scale between minimum and maximum Distortion Drive. 0 = Minimum Swell. 127 = Maximum Swell. Values between 0 and 127 scale between minimum and maximum Swell. With Steps parameter set to (0-8) (See Steps on page 6-61 for details) 115-127 = volume 8 101-114 = volume 7 87-100 = volume 6 73-86 = volume 5 58-72 = volume 4 44-57 = volume 3 30-43 = volume 2 16-29 = volume 1 0-15 = volume 0 With Steps parameter set to (0-127) (See Steps on page 6-61 for details) 0 = minimum volume. 127 = maximum volume. Values between 0 and 127 scale between minimum and maximum volume.

Swell (CC/Volume/Expression Pedal)

11

Drawbar1 (Knob 1) Drawbar2 (Knob 2) Drawbar3 (Knob 3) Drawbar4 (Knob 4) Drawbar5 (Knob 5) Drawbar6 (Knob 6) Drawbar7 (Knob 7) Drawbar8 (Knob 8) Drawbar9 (Knob 9)

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

Swell Ctl (Knob 10)

23

0 = Minimum Swell. 127 = Maximum Swell. Values between 0 and 127 scale between minimum and maximum Swell. 0 = Minimum Leak Level. 127 = Maximum Leak Level. Values between 0 and 127 scale between minimum and maximum Leak Level. 0-63 = Slow, 64-127 = Fast 0-63 = Brake Off, 64-127 = Brake On 64-127 = On, 0-63 = Off 0-63 = Vibrato, 64-127 = Chorus 0-42 = Depth 1, 43-85 Depth 2, 86-127 Depth 3 64-127 = On, 0-63 = Off 64-127 = Loud, 0-63 = Soft 64-127 = Fast, 0-63 = Slow 64-127 = High, 0-63 = Low 64-127 = On, 0-63 = Off

Leak Level (Knob 11)

24

Rotary Slow/Fast (Switch 1) Rotary Brake (Switch 2) Chorus/Vibrato On/Off (Switch 3) Chorus/Vibrato Select (Switch 4) Chorus/Vibrato Depth (Switch 5) Percussion On/Off (Switch 6) Percussion Level Loud/Soft (Switch 7) Percussion Decay Fast/Slow (Switch 8) Percussion Pitch High/Low (Switch 9) KeyClick On/Off (Switch 10)

80 81 82 83 85 86 87 88 89 90

Table 6-3

KB3 MIDI Controller Assignments

6-8

Program Mode The Program Editor

The Program Editor

YoucanusetheProgramEditortofurthermodifythePC3LEsfactorypresetROMsounds.To entertheProgramEditor,startinProgrammodebypressingtheProgrammodebuttononthe frontpanel,thenpresstheEditbuttononthefrontpanel.TheEditProg:PARAMETERSpage willappear(seebelow,)alongwithsoftbuttonsforotherbasicProgramEditorpages.Formore advancededitingparameters,seeTheV.A.S.T.SoftButton on page 616.

Parameter

MIDI Value

Control Source

The PARAMETERS Page

PressthePARAMSsoftbuttontodisplaythePARAMETERSpage(seeabove.)The PARAMETERSpageallowsyoutoaccessallofthecontrolableparametersforthecurrent program.Allprogramshaveatleastthesefivebasicparameters:Pan,Expression(program volume,)AuxFX1Wet/Dry,Sustain,andSostenuto.Theparameterspagewillalsodisplayany availableV.A.S.T.synthesisparametersforthecurrentprogramandparametersforthecurrent programsinsertandauxeffects(ifeffectsareinuse.)Allavailableparametersarelisted (additionalV.A.S.T.parameterscanbeaddedbymakingparametercontrolassignmentsintheV.A.S.T ProgramEditor,seepage 616fordetails.)ForeachparameteryoucansetaMIDIvalueaswellasa controlsource. Theleftcolumnliststheavailableparameters,thecentercolumnshowstheMIDIvalueforeach parameter,andtherightcolumnshowsthecontrolsource(eitheraphysicalcontrollerorMIDI CCnumber)whichthatparameteriscontrolledby.Foreachparameterselected,therighttop lineofthepagedisplayswhattypeofparameteritis.ThethreeparametertypesareProg(either oneofthe5basicparameters,oraparameterspecifictotheprogram,)FXAux1(aparameterfor theprogramscurrentAuxFXchain,)orFXInsert1(aparameterfortheprogramscurrentInsert FXchain.Drumprogramsmayhavemorethan1inserteffectschain.) IfyoustophearingsoundfromprogramsononeMIDIchannel,orifprogramsonlyplay fromtheleftorrightspeakerforaMIDIchannel,itmaybebecauseofchangesyouvemade ontheParameterspage,evenifyouhaventsavedaprogram.Seethenotesbelowfor explanationsandsolutions. Parameters Usethecursorbuttonstoselectaparameterintheleftcolumn,andusetheAlphaWheel,/+ buttons,orcursorup/downbuttonstoscrollthroughparametersinthatcolumn.Allprograms haveatleastthesefivebasicparameters:Pan,Expression(programvolume,)AuxFX1Wet/Dry, Sustain,andSostenuto.TheparameterscolumnwillalsodisplayanyavailableVASTsynthesis parametersforthecurrentprogramandparametersforthecurrentprogramsinsertandaux effects(ifeffectsareinuse.).Allavailableparametersarelisted(additionalV.A.S.T.parameterscan beaddedbymakingparametercontrolassignmentsintheV.A.S.TProgramEditor,seeTheV.A.S.T.Soft Button on page 616fordetails.)SeeANoteAboutProcessorPowerAllocation on page 613for detailsonparameterslabeledNotAvailable.

6-9

Program Mode The Program Editor

MIDI Values TochangetheMIDIvalueorcontrollerforaparameter,presstherightcursorbuttonto highlightthecenterorrightcolumn.IntheMIDIvalue(center)column,usetheAlphaWheelor the/+buttonstoenteraMIDIvaluefrom0127,oravalueofNonebyscrollingbelow0.You canalsousethealphanumericpadfollowedbytheEnterbuttontoenteraMIDIvalue.For parametersthatareusingaSwitchorFootswitchasacontrolsource,theavailableMIDIvalues areNone,Off,andOn.Youcanenterthesevalueswiththealphanumericpad.Foravalueof None,enter1(negative1)followedbytheEnterbutton.ForavalueofOff,enter0(orany numberlessthan64)followedbytheEnterbutton.ForavalueofOn,enter127(oranynumber greaterthan63)followedbytheEnterbutton.
Important Note About Values of None

ForallfactoryROMprograms,fourofthestandardparameters(Pan,Expression(program volume,)Sustain,andSostenuto)arealwayssettoNonebydefault.Ifyouchangeoneofthese values,eitherontheParameterspageintheProgramEditor,orwithaphysicalcontrollerfrom ProgramMode(ortheProgramEditor,)thesamevaluewillbeusedforanyotherprogramyou select,ifyouselectanotherprogramthatusesavalueofNoneforthesameparameter.These valuesremainsetevenifyoudontsavetheprogram.Thiscanbeuseful,forexample,when usinganexpressionpedaltocontrolprogramvolume.Bydefault,allfactoryROMprograms havetheirExpressionparametersettoavalueofNone,andExpression(programvolume)by defaultcanbecontrolledbyanexpressionpedalpluggedintotheCCPedaljack(seeTheControl Setup section on page 769formoreaboutdefaultcontrollersettings.)Withanexpressionpedal pluggedintotheCCPedaljack,youcancontrolthevolumeofanyfactoryROMprogram,but whenyouselectanotherfactoryROMprogram,itwillhavethesamevolumethatyousetwith theexpressionpedalinthelastprogram.Thisway,thevolumeofyourprogramswillstay consistent,andcanalwaysbechangedbytheexpressionpedal.Ifyouwantaprogramtohavea defaultvolume,youmustsetaMIDIValueotherthanNonefortheExpressionparameter.For allparameterswithaMIDIValueofNone,anyvaluessetwithaphysicalcontrolwillnotbe savedwhensavingtheprogram.YoumustsettheMIDIValuecolumnforthatparameterto somethingotherthanNoneinordertosetandsaveavalue. NoteAboutKB3Programs:ForKB3Programs,theDrawbarparametersonlyacceptMIDI valuesfrom08(representingthesettingsforDrawbarstops,)aswellasvaluesofNone. Control Source IntheControlSource(right)column,setoneofthePC3LEsphysicalcontrollersasacontrol sourcebyholdingtheEnterbuttononthealphanumericpadandmovingthedesiredcontroller. YoucanalsousetheAlphaWheelorthe/+buttonstochooseoneofthePC3LEsphysical controllersasacontrolsource,orchooseavalueofNoneifyoudontwanttouseaphysical controllerforthisparameter.YoucanalsochooseavalueofNonebyentering1withthe alphanumericpadfollowedbytheEnterbutton. TochooseanexternalMIDICCnumberasacontrolsource,youmustenterthenumberofthe controllerwiththealphanumericpadfollowedbytheEnterbutton.UsingtheAlphaWheelor the/+buttonswillbringyoubacktothelistofthePC3LEsphysicalcontrollers.Also,the PC3LEsphysicalcontrollerseachuseoneoftheavailableMIDICCnumbers,soyoumust chooseoneoftheotheravailableCCnumberswhenusinganexternalMIDIcontrolsource.See page 770foralistofthedefaultCCnumbersthatareusedbythePC3LEsphysicalcontrollers.
Important Note About Selecting A Control Source:

Whenyouchangethecontrolsourceforaparameter,thenewcontrolsourceimmediatelysets itscurrentvaluefortheMIDIvalueofthecurrentparameter.IftheMIDIvalueoftheparameter issettoNone,thenewvaluewillbeset,buttheMIDIValuecolumnfortheparameterwillstill displayNone(seeaboveforanImportantNoteAboutValuesofNone.)Thiscanbetroublesome,for example,ifyouweretochangetheControlSourcefortheExpressionparameter,youmay

6-10

Program Mode The Program Editor

accidentallysettheMIDIValueto0,butwouldntknowitbecauseNonewouldstillbe displayed.Ifyouedittheparametersofaprogramandsuddenlycantproduceanysound fromtheprogram,thismaybethecause.Inthiscase,eithersettheMIDIValueforExpression tosomethingotherthanNone,orusetheControlSourcethatyousetforExpressiontoincrease theMIDIValue.

The BASIC Page

OntheBASICpageyoucanadjustbasicsettingsforthecurrentlyselectedprogram(seebelow.)

OutGain Adjusttheoutputlevelofthecurrentlyselectedprogrambyupto96dBor+20dB. Bend Up, Bend Down UsetheseparameterstodefinehowmuchthepitchwillchangewhenyoumoveyourPitch Wheel.YoucanseteitherBendparametertobendbyupto72halfstepsupordown.Pitch valuesaresetincents,where100cents=1halfstep.ForbothBendparameters,positivevalues willcausethepitchtobendup,whilenegativevalueswillcausethepitchtobenddown.Large positivevaluescancausesamplestobendtotheirmaximumupwardpitchshiftbeforethePitch Wheelisfullyup(ordown).Thiswillnothappenwhenbendingpitchdown. Category Thisparametersetsthecategorythattheprogramwillbeprogramwillbegroupedwithwhen youpressoneoftheCategorybuttonsfromtheProgrammodemainpage.Forexample,ifyou weretoeditaprogramintheLeadscategorythatyouwanttouseprimarilyasaSynthBass,you couldmakeitappearintheSynBasscategorybychangingthisparametertoSynBass.While thisparameterisselected,youcanchooseacategorybypressingthecorrespondingCategory buttononthefrontpanel.YoucanalsosetacategorybyusingtheAlphaWheelor/+buttons.In additiontothecategorysethere,alleditedprogramscanbeviewedbypressingtheUser Categorybutton.

6-11

Program Mode The Program Editor

The PADS Page

UsethePADSpagetoassignnotestothePC3LEseightpads(seebelow.)Whenyouselecta PC3LEprogram,thePC3LEwillalsoselectanassociatedDrumprogramtobetriggeredbythe pads.TheprogramforthepadsisassignedtoMIDIchannel10.Also,anyfactoryprograminthe Drumscategoryisplayablefromthepads.PadscanbeusedforadditionalfunctionsinSetup mode,seePads on page 716fordetails.

Drum Pad Program UsethisfieldtoselectthePC3LEprogramthatwillbeplayedbythepads.Toselectaprogram, pressoneoftheCategorybuttons,thenscrollthroughthelistofprogramsbyusingtheAlpha Wheelor/+buttons.YoucanalsoenteraprogramID#numberbypressingtheShiftcategory buttonsothatitsLEDislit,andusingthealphanumericpadtoenterandID#andpressing Enter.YoucanalsosetthisparametertoSelfbyentering1onthealphanumericpadand pressingEnterorscrollingtothebottomoftheprogramlist.SettingthisparametertoSelf assignsthepadstotriggernotesonthecurrentMIDIchannel.Thisisrecommendedover choosingthesameprogramfortheDrumPadProgram,becausethatusestwochannelsworthof effectsresources(thecurrentchannel,andchannel10,thepadschannel.)AvalueofSelfusesthe sameeffectsresourcesasthecurrentchannel,savingeffectsresourcesforothertracks.Toturn thepadsoff,setthisparametertoNonebyentering0.
Note: Channel10canonlyuseitscurrentprogramastheDrumPadProgram,despitewhatis

selectedonthePADSpage.Also,allfactoryprogramsintheDrumscategoryhaveSelfselected astheDrumPadProgrambydefault. Pad Assignments OnthePadspage,eightboxesrepresenttheeightpads,andeachboxdisplaysthenotewhich thatpadtriggers.Tochangeapadsnoteassignment,firstselectthepadwiththecursorbuttons, thenselectthenote.Toselectanote,holdtheEnterbuttonandplaythedesirednoteonthe keyboard,orusetheAlphaWheelor/+buttonstoscrollthroughthelistofnotes.Youcanalso selectanotebyMIDInotenumber.Todothis,enterthenumberonthealphanumericpadand thenpresstheEnterbutton. Aux Send Level Offset UsethisfieldtooffsettheamountofsignalsentfromthepadsprogramonMIDIchannel10to theAuxeffectsoftheprogramonthecurrentlyselectedMIDIchannel.Eachprogramthatis selectedforMIDIchannel10(aswellasprogramsforallotherchannels)isstoredwithasend levelwhichdetermineshowmuchsignalissenttotheAuxeffects.UsingtheAuxSendLevel OffsetparameteronthePADSpageallowsyoutoquicklychangetheAuxsendlevelofthe programonMIDIchannel10withouteditingthatprogram.

6-12

Program Mode The Program Editor

The EFFECTS (FX) Page

PresstheFXsoftbuttontocalluptheEFFECTSpage.Usethispagetoapplyaudioeffectstoa program.YoucanchooseaneffectsChainforinserteffectsandaneffectsChainforauxeffects. Somedrumprogramsusemultipleinserteffectschains. ThePC3LEschainscontainavarietyofeffectsincludingdifferenttypesofreverb,chorus,delay, flanger,phaser,tremolo,panner,leslie,distortion,EQ,compression,filter,envelopefollowing filter,frequencystimulator,ringmodulator,frequencyoffset,pitchLFO,andstereoizer.Chains 1through81containmanyconfigurationsoftheseeffects,whichareusefulforquicklyfindinga suitableeffect.TheremainingchainsareusedbythePC3LEsfactoryprograms,setups,and songs,thoughtheycanbeusedforanyuserprogram,setup,orsongaswell.Ifyoudiscovera factoryprogram,setup,orsongthatusesaneffectthatyoulike,lookatthechainnumberinthe program,setuporsongeditorsothatyoucanuseitlaterinyourownprogram,setup,orsong. AcompletelistofthePC3LEseffectschainscanbefoundatwww.kurzweil.com.

OnthePC3LE,aprogramcanhaveaChainofupto8inserteffectsandaChainof8auxeffects (seenotebelowfordetailsonchainsizelimitations.)Inserteffectsareappliedonlytothecurrent program,whileauxeffectsreceivesignalfromallactiveprogramsauxsends. ANoteAboutProcessorPowerAllocation EacheffectsChainiscomposedofaneffectboxoraseriesofeffectboxes.Eacheffectboxusesa certainamountofthePC3LEseffectsprocessingpower.Theamountofprocessingpowerused byaChainreflectshowcomplextheeffectsalgorithmismorecomplexeffectsrequiremore processingpower.Theprocessing(DSP)powerneededforeachChainisrepresentedbya numberofDSPunits.Allinsertandauxeffectsforthecurrentlyselectedmodesharethe PC3LEs10availableDSPunits. AtthetoprightoftheEFFECTSpage,youcanseehowmanyDSPunitsarebeingusedbythe selectedChain.ThelefthandnumberistheDSPunitsizeoftheselectedChain,andtheright handnumberisthetotalnumberofDSPunitsbeingusedbytheprogram.Ifyouexceed10 DSPunitswhenaddingeffects,noeffectswillbeappliedtotheprogram.Thetoprightofthe EFFECTSpagewilldisplay(Max10)whenyouhaveexceededthemaximumnumberof10 availableDSPunits. ThePC3LEs10availableDSPunitsaremostoftenenoughprocessingpowerforsingleprogram, butifyouusemanyprogramswithinserteffectsatonce,youmayhavetoremoveeffectsonone programinordertoallocatemoreDSPunitsforotherprograms.Ifachainisselectedforthe Insertand/orAuxeffect,buttherearenotenoughDSPunitsavailabletoloadthechain(s),the parametersforthatchainorchainswillbedisplayedasNotavailableonthePARAMETERS page(seepage 69fordetailsonthePARAMETERSpage.)

6-13

Program Mode The Program Editor

InProgrammode,sinceyoucanplayupto16programs(oneoneachof16MIDIchannels,)the PC3LEattemptstoloadasmanyeffectsasispossibleforallchannelsuntilitusesalloftheDSP units.TheprogramofthecurrentlyselectedchannelwillhavepriorityforusingDSPunitsand loadingeffects,followedbythepadprogramoftheprogramonthecurrentlyselectedchannel (whichreplacestheprogramonchannel10,ifthecurrentchannelsprogramhasapadprogram, seeDrumPadProgram on page 612,)followedbythelowesttohighestremainingMIDI channels. ParametersOnTheEFFECTSPage: Insert ChooseaneffectsChainthatwillbeappliedtothecurrentprogram.Ifyouonlyneedtouseone effectatatimeononeMIDIchannel,Inserteffectsmaybeallyouneed.Ifyouplantouse multipletypesofeffectsormultipleprogramsondifferentMIDIchannels,itisbesttouseboth InsertandAuxeffects(seeAuxbelow.)Auxeffectshavetheadvantageofbeingavailabletoall programsoneachMIDIchannelatthesametime.
Insert Effects Chains For Drum Programs

Somedrumprogramsusemultipleinserteffectschainssothatdifferenteffectscanbeappliedto differentpartsofthedrumkit.Oneinsertchainmayonlyapplytoagroupoftheprogramskick drumsamples,anothermayonlyapplytocertainsnaredrumsamples,andonemayapplyto thewholeprogram.Thenumberofinsertchainsandtheirconfigurationdependsonthe program.Whenmorethanoneinsertisbeingused,thetotalnumberofinsertsbeingusedwill bedisplayedonthetoplineoftheEFFECTSpage(foranexampleseeprogram373 EpicRemixDrums.)Tovieworchangetheadditionalinserteffectschains,usethecursor buttonstoselectthe1fieldtotheleftofthecurrentinsertchainname.Withthisfieldselected usetheAlphaWheelor/+buttonstoseetheotherinserteffectschains,whosenameswill appearinthefieldtotheright.YoucanalsousetheChan/Zonebuttonstotheleftofthedisplay tochangetheinsertnumberbeingviewed.Theinsertschainnamewillusuallygiveyouaclue aboutwhichsamplesitappliesto(forexample,aninsertchainwithsnareinthenamewill usuallyapplytosomeofthesnaresamples.)Tocheckwhichsamplesthecurrentinsertchain appliesto,youcouldplayakeyorgroupofkeyswhilechangingtheinsertchain.Whenthe currentinsertchainappliestoasample,youshouldbeabletohearthesoundofthesample changingasyouchangetheinsertchain. Aux ChooseanAuxeffectthatwillbeappliedtotheauxiliaryaudiobus.Theauxbusisanaudio channelwithasharedeffectsChainthatcanbeusedbyprogramsonanyofthePC3LEs16 MIDIchannels.Theauxeffectisusefulwhenyouwanttousethesametypeofeffectfor multiplechannels.YouapplytheauxeffecttotheprogramonaMIDIchannelbysendingthe audiofromthatchanneltotheauxbus. Everychannelisconnectedtotheauxbus,buttheauxbusdoesntreceivethesignaluntilyou turnuptheauxsendlevelforthatchannel,whichcontrolsachannelsinputleveltotheaux bus.OneachMIDIchannelyoucancontroltheauxsendlevelforthatchannelsprogram,in turncontrollinghowloudlyyoucanheartheauxeffectappliedtothatchannelsprogram.The auxsendlevelissetbytheAuxFXWet/DryparameteronthePARAMETERSpageforeach program(seeThePARAMETERSPage on page 69.)Foreachfactoryprogram,bydefaultthe AuxFXWet/Dryparameterisassignedtobecontrolledbyknob5(labeledReverb,locatedtothe leftofthedisplay.)AsyouturnupanAuxsend,thePC3LEautomaticallyturnsdownthat channelsunprocessedsignal(thisdoesnothappenforAuxEffectsinSetupandSongmode.) WithanAuxsendturnedhalfwayup(aMIDIvalueof64,)youhearanequalamountof processedandunprocessedsignal(calledwetanddry,respectively.)WithanAuxsendturned allthewayup(aMIDIvalueof127,)youhearonlytheprocessed(wet)signalandnoneofthe originalunprocessed(dry)signal.

6-14

Program Mode The Program Editor Note: ThoughauxeffectsChainsarestoredforeachprogram,onlyonechannelatatime(the

currentlyselectedchannel)canuseitsauxeffectsChainontheauxbus.AuxeffectsChainson otherchannelsaremadeinactive.

The ARPEGGIATOR 1 & 2 Pages (ARP 1, ARP 2)

Eachprogramhasitsownarpeggiatorsettings.PresstheARP1orARP2softbuttontogoto oneofthetwopagesofarpeggiatorsettingsforthecurrentprogram.(Youcanalsoviewandedit thesesettingsfromtheProgrammodemainpagebypressingtheArpSettingsbuttononthefrontpanel, belowthemodebuttons.) SeeChapter 7,TheARPEGGIATORPageformoreonthesesettings.ThearpeggiatorinProgram modeactsthesameasasinglearpeggiatordoesinSetupmode,butinProgrammodethe Arpeggiator2pagehasnoSyncTo,SyncType,orNumBeatsparametersasitdoesinSetup mode.

The Program Editor Utility Soft Buttons

Import Arpeggiator Settings (ImpArp) TheImpArpbuttonallowsyoutoimportarpeggiatorsettingsfromotherprograms.Pressing theImpArpbuttonbringsyoutotheImportArppage.OntheImportArppage,selectaprogram fromthelistandpresstheImportsoftbuttontoimportthearpeggiatorsettingsfromthe selectedprogramtothecurrentprogram. Delete Thiserasesaprogramfrommemory,freeingupspacetostoreprogramsinotherlocations.(You cancheckthefreememoryinthePC3LEatanytime,onthetoplineoftheMastermodepage.) PressDelete,andyouwillbegivenachoicetoDeleteorCancel.PressDeleteagain,andanAre YouSure?messagewillappear.PressYestodeletethesetup,orNotocancel. Ifyoudeleteausereditedprogram,thereisnowaytorecoverit.Ifyoudeleteanedited programthathasbeensavedoverafactoryROMID#,theoriginalfactoryROMprogramwillre appear.FactoryROMprogramscannotbedeleted.

6-15

Program Mode The Program Editor

The V.A.S.T. Soft Button

PressingtheV.A.S.T.softbuttonenterstheV.A.S.T.ProgramEditor(ortheKB3ProgramEditor forKB3Programs,)whichprovidesmuchdeepereditingparametersthanareavailableonthe PC3LEsmainProgramEditorpages.

Adding Parameters To The PARAMETERS Page

ToaddparameterstothePARAMETERSpageinthePC3LEsmainProgramEditor,make assignmentstothesourcefieldforthedesiredparameterintheV.A.S.T.Editor.(Seepage 69for detailsonthePARAMETERSpage.) FordetailsoncontrollableparametersofVASTprograms,seethefollowingsections:TheDSP Modulation(DSPMOD)Page on page 635,TheLFOPage on page 642,TheASR Page on page 643,TheFunction(FUN)Page on page 645,andTheEnvelopeControl(ENVCTL) Page on page 649.ForKB3programs,seethefollowingsections:KB3Editor:ThePITCH Page on page 662,KB3Editor:TheAMPPage on page 662,andKB3Editor:TheLFO,ASR,and FUNPages on page 670. Foreachprogram,theProgramEditorcanbeusedtoassignthePC3LEsphysicalcontrollersor externalMIDIcontrollerCCnumberstocontrolparameters.Controllableparameterseachhave asourcefield.Sourcefieldsarenameddifferentlydependingontheirpage:Src1,Src2,RateCt, Trigger,Inputa,Inputb,andSource.ToassignaPC3LEphysicalcontroller,selectthesource fieldfortheparameter,holdtheEnterbuttonandmovethecontroller.ToassignaCCnumberto asourcefield,enterthenumberwiththealphanumericpad,thenpressEnter.ACCnumberfor anexternalcontrollercanalsobesetbyselectingthesourcefieldfortheparameter,holdingthe Enterbutton,andsendingaCCvaluefromtheexternalMIDIcontroller.WhenassigningaCC numbertoasourcefield,thenumbermaybedisplayedinthesourcefieldasthenameofthat CCsdefaultuse.

VAST Program Structure

ThediagrambelowdepictsthehierarchyofaV.A.S.T.Program,fromindividualsamplesallthe wayuptoSetups,whichcancontainupto16Programs. EveryV.A.S.T.Programcontainsatleastonelayer.Alayerconsistsofakeymapandan algorithmforprocessingthesamplescontainedinthekeymap.Eachsampleisaseparatedigital recordingofsomekindofsound:musical,vocal,industrial,anysoundatall.Individualsamples areassignedtospecifickeyranges(fromA2toD3,forexample),andarealsoassignedtobe triggeredatspecificattackvelocities.Theseassignmentsconstitutethekeymap. Whenyoutriggeranote,thePC3LElookstothekeymapofeachlayerofthecurrentlyactive V.A.S.T.Program(s)todeterminewhichsamplestoplay.Thesoundenginethenfetchesthe requestedsamplesandgeneratesadigitalsignalrepresentingthesoundofthesamples.This signalfirstpassesthroughthefiveDSPfunctionsthatmakeupthealgorithm.Itthenpasses throughthePC3LEseffectsprocessor,andfinallyappearswithsomelevelofeffectsappliedto itatoneormoreoftheaudiooutputs. ThelayeristheV.A.S.T.Programsbasicunitofpolyphony,thatis,eachlayerconstitutesoneof the64voicechannelsthePC3LEcanactivateatanytime.IfyouhaveaProgramthatconsistsof twolayerscoveringthenoterangefromA0toC8,eachkeyyoustriketriggerstwovoice channels. Note:OneexceptiontothisstructureiswhenusingaKVAoscillator,thesoundsourceforthatlayeris notderivedfromakeymap,butisgeneratedatthealgorithmstage(thoughkeymapinformationisstill usedtosetkeyrangeandmaximumamplitude.)Afterthis,thestructureisthesameasdescribedabove. SeeEditingVASTProgramsWithKVAOscillators on page 653formoredetails.

6-16

Program Mode The Program Editor

Zone 1

Zone 2

Zone 3

Zone 4

Zone 5

Zone 6

Zone 7

Zone 8

16 keyboard zones each with independent program, MIDI channel, and control assignments

Selected for performance and editing in Program mode; up to 32 layers per program

A keymap processed through an algorithm, modulated by control sources

Up to 128 sample roots, assigned to play at programmable key and velocity ranges

Individual digital sound recordings stored in ROM; stereo samples use two voices of polyphony

6-17

Program Mode The Program Editor

Editing V.A.S.T. Programs

Note:ThissectiondescribestheV.A.S.T.ProgramEditor.SeeEditingKB3Programs on page 659for informationaboutadvancededitingofKB3programs. TheV.A.S.T.ProgramEditorisallowsyoutomodifythePC3LEsresidentsounds,andtobuild yourownsoundsaroundsamplekeymapsorKVAoscillators(seeEditingVASTProgramsWith KVAOscillators on page 653forsomedifferences.)Theresvirtuallynolimittothesoundsyou cancreateusingthetoolsintheProgramEditor.

Thetoplineofthedisplaygivesyoutheusualreminderofyourlocation.Italsotellsyouwhich layeryoureviewing,andhowmanylayersthereareintheprogram.Youcanusethe Chan/Layerbuttonstoscrollthroughthelayers,iftheprogramhasmorethanone. Heresamethodforjumpingquicklytoaspecificlayerinaprogramitsespeciallyusefulin multilayereddrumprograms.HoldtheEnterbuttonandstrikeakey.Thedisplaywillshowthe layer(s)assignedtothatkey.Ifmorethanonelayerisassignedtothesamekey,repeatedly strikingthekey(whilecontinuingtoholdtheEnterbutton)willcyclethroughalllayers assignedtothatkey.ThismethodwillworkinmostplaceswithintheProgramEditor,butthere isanexception:iftheparameteryouhavehighlightedhasanotenumberorcontrolsourceasits value,thenholdingEnterandstrikinganotewillcallupthatnoteorcontrolsource.Forall otherparameters,however,thismethodwillswitchbetweenlayers.

The Soft Buttons in the Program Editor

TheProgramEditorssoftbuttonsarelabeledbythewordsthatappearinthebottomlineofthe display.ThesebuttonshavetwoimportantjobsintheProgramEditor:selectingpages,and selectingspecificfunctions.Ifasoftbuttonislabeledinalluppercaseletters,pressingitwilltake youtothepageitdescribes.Ifthebuttonislabeledinmixeduppercaseandlowercaseletters, pressingitwillexecutethesoftwarefunctiondescribedbythelabel.PressingtheLAYERsoft button,forexample,willtakeyoutotheLayerpage,whilepressingtheNewLyrsoftbuttonwill createanewlayerfortheprogram. TherearemorepagesandfunctionsintheProgramEditorthantherearesoftbuttons.Therefore, twoofthesoftbuttonsarededicatedtoscrollingthroughthelistofpagesandfunctions.Ifyou dontseethebuttonforthepageorfunctionyouwanttoselect,pressoneofthesoftbuttons labeledmore,andthelabelswillchange.Thisdoesntchangethecurrentlyselectedpage,it merelychangestheselectionofavailablesoftbuttons. TwoofthesoftbuttonsintheProgramEditorarespecialcases.Theyrethesoftbuttonsthat selecttheeditingpagesforthefirstandlastDSPfunctions(PitchandLevel,respectively)ofthe currentprogramsalgorithm.OneofthesesoftbuttonsislabeledPITCH,andpressingitwill takeyoutotheDSPCTL(DSPControl)pagewiththePitchparameterhighlighted.Theother oneofthesesoftbuttonsislabeledAMP,andpressingitwilltakeyoutotheDSPCTLpagewith theLevelparameterhighlighted.Additionally,pressingtheDSPCTLsoftbuttonwilltakeyou totheDSPCTLpage.

6-18

Program Mode The Program Editor

The MODE Buttons in the Program Editor

WhenintheV.A.S.T.Programeditor,theMODEselectbuttonshavedifferentfunctions. Mute Layer 1, 3 PressingtheProgrambuttonmuteslayer1,pressingtheSetupbuttonmuteslayer3. Solo Current Layer PressingtheQAccessbuttonsolosthecurrentlayer. Mute Current Layer PressingtheSongbuttonmutesthecurrentlayer. Compare PressingtheStoragebuttoncallsuptheCompareEditor,whichrecallstheprogrampreedit settings,allowingyoutocompareyoureditedprogramwiththeoriginalprogram.Pressingthe StoragebuttonagainreturnsyoutotheProgrameditor. UsingtheCompareEditormakesnochangestothecurrentprogram. FX Bypass PresstheMasterbuttontobypassorenabletheprogramsFXwhileediting.

The KEYMAP Page

PresstheKEYMAPsoftbuttontocalluptheKEYMAPpage.Theparametersonthispageaffect samplerootselection,i.e.,whichsamplesareplayedonwhichkeys.

Parameter Keymap Transpose Key Tracking Velocity Tracking Alt Method Stereo Timbre Shift Playback Mode Alt Control

Range of Values Keymap List -128 to 127 semitones 2400 cents per key 7200 cents Switched, Continuous Off, On 60 semitones Norm, Rvrs, Bidirectional, Noise Control Source List

Default 1 Piano f Left 0 100 0 Switched Off 0 Normal Off

6-19

Program Mode The Program Editor

Keymap AssignakeymapfromROMtothecurrentlayer.Keymapsarecollectionsofsamplesassigned tonoteandvelocityranges. Transpose (Xpose) Transposethecurrentkeymapupasmuchas127semitones(tenoctavesandaperfectfifth)or downasmuchas128semitones(tenoctavesandaminorsixth). Key Tracking (KeyTrk) ThisisoneofthesixcommonDSPcontrolparameters.OntheKEYMAPpage,keytracking affectstheintervalbetweennotes.Thedefaultvalueof100cents(acentisahundredthofa semitone)givesyouthenormalsemitoneintervalbetweeneachnote.Highervaluesincreasethe interval;lowervaluesdecreaseit.Negativevalueswillcausethepitchtodecreaseasyouplay highernotes. Whenyoumakechangestothisparameter,youllneedtokeepinmindthatKeyTrkonthe KEYMAPpageworksinconjunctionwithKeyTrkonthePITCHpage.Therefore,youllneedto checktheKeyTrkvalueonbothpagestoseehowkeytrackingworkswithinaprogram.Unless yourelookingfornonstandardnoteintervals,thevaluesoftheKeyTrkparametersonthe PITCHandKEYMAPpagesshouldaddupto100cents. Velocity Tracking (VelTrk) ThisisanothercommonDSPcontrolparameter.AswiththeotherparametersontheKEYMAP page,thisshiftsthepositionofthekeymap.Differentattackvelocitieswillplaydifferentpitch shiftsofthesamplerootassignedtothatnoterange.Iftheshiftisgreatenough,thenexthigher orlowersamplerootwillbeplayed,whichinsomecases(manydrumprograms,forexample) willplayanentirelydifferentsound.Positivevalueswillplayhigherpitchesofthesampleroot whenyouusehardattackvelocities(theyshiftthekeymapdownward),whilenegativevalues willplaylowerpitches. Method (AltMethod) SeeAlternativeSwitch(AltControlandAltMethod)below. Stereo Youllusethisparameterwhenyoureworkingwithstereosamples. WhenyousetthisparametertoOn,theKEYMAPpagechangesslightly:

6-20

Program Mode The Program Editor

AnadditionalKeymapparameterappears.Thetwokeymapparametersaredistinguishedas Keymap1andKeymap2.TheKEYMAPpageparameterswillaffectbothkeymaps.Whenthe StereoparameterissettoOn,theOUTPUTpageforthecurrentlayerwillshowanadditional pairofPanparameters. ThePC3LEcontainsbothstereoandmonosamples.Keymapsdesignedforstereouseare labeledwithnamesbeginningwithStereoorendinginLeft,Right,L,orR.Forstereo keymapplayback,setStereoOnandassigncorrespondingLeftandRightkeymapsto Keymap1andKeymap2respectively.ForkeymapsbeginningwithStereo,assignthesame keymaptobothKeymap1andKeymap2.IfyouselectthesamekeymapforKeymap1and Keymap2,thePC3LEautomaticallyusestheleftsideforKeymap1andtherightsidefor Keymap2. Onceyouhavethekeymapsassigned,gototheOUTPUTpageandsetthepanningforeach sampleasdesired.Keepinmindthatusingstereokeymapsreducesthepolyphonyofthe program.Forexample,ifyouhadatwolayerprogramwithstereokeymapsineachlayer,each noteyouplaywoulduse4ofyour128voices,allowingatotalof32notesbeforeallthevoices havebeenused. Ifyourenotusingstereosamples,youshouldsetthisparametersvaluetoOff. Timbre Shift Thisparameterworksonlyonmultisamplekeymaps,andchangestherootselectionforeach keyyouplay.Withthisparameteryoucanradicallyalterthecurrentlayerstimbre(basicsound characteristics).Thenatureofthechangedependsonthetimbreitself,sothisparametercallsfor experimentation.Basically,timbreshiftingchangesanotestimbrebyimposingdifferent harmonicqualitiesontothenote.Atimbreshiftednoteretainsitsoriginalpitch,butits harmonicsarethoseofthesametimbreatahigherorlowerpitch.Positivevaluesforthis parametertendtobrightenasound,whilenegativevaluesdarken. Heresanexample.Ifyoushiftthetimbreup4semitones,thenplayingC4willresultinthepitch C4,butwillactuallyplaythesamplenormallyassignedtoG#3,andshiftitspitchupfour semitones.Thiswillincreasetheplaybackrateofthesample,soalthoughthepitchremains normal,thetimbreisbrighter.YoudgetthesameeffectbysettingtheXposeparameteronthe KEYMAPpageto4semitones,thensettingtheAdjustonthePITCHpageto+4semitones.For multisamplelayerswithnarrowkeyranges,largeamountsoftimbreshiftingwillcause differentsamplerootstobeplayedback. Playback Mode Thisgivesyounumerousoptionsformanipulatingthesamplesinthecurrentlayerasyou triggerthem.Normalleavesthesamplesunaffected,whileReverseplaystheminreverse.Ata valueofReverse,thesampleswillcontinuetoloopaslongasnotesaresustained.Toplaythem justonceinreverse,youwouldadjustthelengthofthelayersamplitudeenvelope(explained laterinthischapter).BiDirect(bidirectional)causesthesamplestoloopinfinitely,alternating betweennormalandreversedplayback.Noisereplacesthesampleswithawhitenoise generator. Alternative Controller (AltControl) SeeAlternativeSwitch(AltControlandAltMethod)below.

6-21

Program Mode The Program Editor

Alternative Switch (AltControl and AltMethod) Many,butnotall,PC3LEsamplerootshavebeenpreassignedacarefullychosenalternate samplestartpointthatcanbeselectedusingtheAlternateSwitchfeature(AltControland AltMethodparameters).Thisfeatureallowsyoutocontrolthesampleplaybackstart/endtime triggeredbyanycontrolsource.(Thealternatesamplestartpointcanbeadjustedbyeditinga sample,seeEditingSamples on page 129andTheTRIMPage on page 1212fordetails.) UsetheAltControlparametertospecifyacontrolsourcethatwillcausethesampletobeginor endattheAltpoint.ThenusetheAltMethodparametertochoosebetweenswitchedand continuouscalculationoftheAltpoint.IfthevalueofAltMethodisSwitched,thePC3LEwill usetheAltpointwhentherelevantcontrolsourceisatavaluegreaterthan64atNoteStart.If AltMethodisContinuous,theAltpointwillvarydependingonthevalueoftherelevantcontrol sourceatNoteStart. Asanexample,supposeyoureworkingwithaflutekeymapandwishtocontroltheamountof chiffheardatthebeginningofthesound.OntheKEYMAPpageintheProgramEditor,set AltControltoMWheel.NowtheModWheelcontrolshowmuchoftheinitialsampleattackis used.IfyousetAltMethodtoSwitchedandmovetheModWheelatleasthalfwayup,atNote Startthesamplewillbeginatthepresetalternatestartpoint(inthiscase,slightlypasttheinitial chiff).IfyousettheAltMethodtoContinuous,thePC3LEwillinterpolatethesamplesstarting pointbasedonthepositionoftheModWheel.IftheModWheelis75%ofthewayupatNote Start.thesamplewillbegin75%ofthewaybetweennormalandalternatestartpoints.
Emulating Legato Play

IfyouplacetheAltpointaftertheinitialattacktransientsofthesample,thenyoucanusetheAlt Switchtoemulatelegatoplayinginanacousticinstrument.Asanexample,setKeymapto 14 Flute.NowsettheAltControlparametertoChanSt(ChannelState).Nowifyouplaynotes separately,theinitialbreathychiffwillbeheard.Butifyouplaythenoteslegato(connecting themsmoothly),theAltpointisusedandyoudonothearthechiff.ThisisbecausetheChanSt isturnedonaslongasanynoteisbeingheld.MostofthePC3LEsROMsampleshavetheirAlt pointssetforpurposesoflegatoplay.Inmostcasesthedifferenceinattacksissubtle,butfor somesounds,likedrums,thedifferencecanbemorenoticeable.

The LAYER Page

PresstheLAYERsoftbuttontocalluptheLAYERpage.Hereyoullsetanumberofparameters thataffectthecurrentlayerskeyboardrange,attackandreleasecharacteristics,andresponseto variouscontrols.

Parameter Low Key High Key

Range of Values C -1 to G 9 C -1 to G 9

Default C0 C8

6-22

Program Mode The Program Editor

Parameter Low Velocity High Velocity Bend Trig Delay Control Minimum Delay Maximum Delay Layer Enable Enable Sense Enable Min Enable Max Opaque Layer Sustain Pedal Sostenuto Pedal Freeze Pedal Ignore Release Hold Through Attack Hold Until Sustain

Range of Values ppp to fff ppp to fff Off, Key, All Normal, Reversed Control Source list 0 to 25 seconds 0 to 25 seconds Control Source list Normal, Reversed 127 127 Off, On Off, On, On2 Off, On Off, On Off, On Off, On Off, On

Default ppp fff All Normal Off 0 0 On Normal 64 127 Off On On On Off Off Off

Low Key (LoKey) Thissetsthelowestactivenoteforthecurrentlayer.Thisparametersvaluecannotbesethigher thanthevalueforHiKey.ThestandardMIDIkeyrangeisC1G9(0127).MiddleCisC4. High Key (HiKey) Hereyousetthehighestactivenoteforthecurrentlayer.Thisparametersvaluecannotbeset lowerthanthevalueforLoKey. Low Velocity (LoVel) Withthisparameteryoudefinethelowestattackvelocityatwhichthelayerwillbeenabled (generateasound).Thevaluesforthisparameterandthenextareexpressedinthestandard musicaldynamicsmarkings,similartothevaluesavailableforthevelocitymaps.Attack velocitiesthatarebelowthisthresholdwillnottriggernotes.Ifyousetthisparametersvalue higherthantheHiVelvalue,thelayerwillnotplayatall. High Velocity (HiVel) Similarly,thiswillsetthehighestattackvelocityatwhichthelayerwillbeenabled.Attack velocitiesabovethisthresholdwillnottriggernotesinthislayer. UsingLoVelandHiVel,youcansetupvelocityswitchingbetweenuptoeightlayers.Ifyou needevenmore,youcandoitusingtheEnableandEnableSense(S)parameters(page 624).

6-23

Program Mode The Program Editor

Pitch Bend Mode (Bend) ThisdetermineshowPitchbendcontrolmessageswillaffectthecurrentlayer.AvalueofAll bendsallnotesthatareonwhenthePitchbendmessageisgenerated.AvalueofKeybends onlythosenoteswhosetriggersarephysicallyonwhenthePitchbendmessageisgenerated (notesheldwiththesustainpedal,forexample,wontbend).Thisisgreatforplayingguitar solosontopofchordsplayachord,holditwiththeSustainpedal,thenplayyourlicksand bendthemallyouwant;thechordwontbendwithit.AvalueofOffdisablesPitchbendforthe currentlayer. Trigger (Trig) SetTrigtoRvrstohavenotestriggeredonkeyup.Theinitialvelocitiesofnotestriggeredthis wayaredeterminedbythereleasevelocitiesofthekeysthattriggerthem.Thedefaultsettingis Norm. Delay Control (DlyCtl) Hereyouselect,fromtheControlSourcelist,acontrolsourcethatwilldelaythestartofallnotes inthecurrentlayer.ThelengthofthedelayisdeterminedbyMinDlyandMaxDly(described below).YoullassignacontinuouscontrollikeMWheelfortheDlyCtlparameterwhenyou wanttovarythedelaytime,andaswitchcontrolifyouwantthedelaytoeitherbeitsminimum value(switchoff),oritsmaximum(switchon).Thedelaycontrolwillaffectonlythosenotes triggeredafterthedelaycontrolsourceismoved;thedelaytimeiscalculatedateachnotestart, basedonthestatusofthedelaycontrolsourceatthattime. Minimum Delay (MinDly), Maximum Delay (MaxDly) WhenusingDelayControl(DlyCtl)(seeabove,)thelengthofthedelaybeforenotesaretriggered isdeterminedbythesetwoparameters.WhenthecontrolsourceassignedtoDlyCtlisatits minimum,thedelaywillbeequaltothevalueofMinDly.Thedelaywillbeequaltothevalueof MaxDlywhenthecontrolsourceisatitsmaximum.IfDlyCtlissettoOFF,yougettheminimum delay.IfitssettoON,yougetthemaximumdelay.Thisdoesntchangethenotesattacktime, justthetimeintervalbetweentheNoteOnmessageandthestartoftheattack.Thedelayis measuredinseconds. Enable Thisassignsacontrolsourcetoactivateordeactivatethelayer.Whenthevalueoftheassigned controlsourceisbetweentheminimumandmaximumthresholdssetbytheSense(S) parameter,thelayerisactive.Whenthevalueoftheassignedcontrolsourceisbelowthe minimumorabovethemaximum,thelayerisinactive.Bydefault,manylayershavetheEnable parametersettoON,sotheminimumandmaximumthresholdsdontmatter.Theyrerelevant onlywhenEnableissettoaspecificcontrolsource(likeMWheel). Somelocalcontrolsources(KeyNumandAttVel,forexample)arenotvalidfortheEnable parameter.Inthesecases,youshouldusetheglobalequivalent(GKeyNumandGAttVelinthis example). Enable Sense (S) Thisparameterdetermineshowandwhenalayerisenabledbythecontrolsourceassignedfor theEnableparameter.EnableSensehasthreevalues:orientation,minimum,andmaximum.

6-24

Program Mode The Program Editor

Supposeforamomentthatyoureeditingaprogram,andinthecurrentlayeryouvesetthe valueofEnabletoMWheel,whichcausestheModWheeltocontrolwhetherthelayerisactive. ThedefaultvaluesforEnableSenseareasfollows:orientationisNorm;minimumis64,and maximumis127.ThismeansthatwhentheModWheelislessthanhalfwayup,thelayeris disabled.ThelayerplaysonlywhentheModWheelismorethanhalfwayup. ChangetheorientationtoRvrs,andthelayerplaysonlywhentheModWheelislessthan halfwayup.ChangetheorientationbacktoNorm,andchangetheminimumto127.Nowthe layerplaysonlywhentheModWheelisallthewayup. YoucouldusethisparametertosetupatwolayerprogramthatwouldletyouuseaMIDI controltoswitchbetweenlayers,sayaguitarsoundandadistortedguitar.Bothlayerswould havetheirEnableparameterssettothesamecontrolsource,sayMWheel.Onelayerwouldhave itsEnableSenseorientationsettoNorm,andtheotherwouldhaveitsettoRvrs.Bothlayers wouldhavetheirEnableSenseminimumssetto64,andtheirmaximumsto127.Thefirstlayer wouldplaywhenyourModWheelwasaboveitsmidpoint,andthesecondlayerwouldplay whentheModWheelwasbelowitsmidpoint.(Youcouldachievethesameeffectbyhavingthe EnableSenseorientationinbothlayerssettoNorm,andtheminimumandmaximumvaluesset asfollows:minimum0andmaximum63foronelayer;minimum64andmaximum127forthe other.) UsingthisparameterinconjunctionwiththeEnableparameter,youcaneasilycreatevelocity switchingforasmanylayersasyouhaveinyourprogram.Thisisusefulfordrumprograms, sinceyoucandefineadifferentvelocitytriggerlevelforeachofthe32layersavailableindrum programs. First,settheEnableparameterfortheLayer1toavalueofGAttVel(globalattackvelocity).This causesthelayertoplaybasedontheattackvelocityofyourkeystrokes.ThensettheEnable Sense(S)parametertoavalueofNorm,andadjustitsminimumandmaximumvalues(thetwo numeralstotherightofNorm)toanarrowrange.Dontusenegativevalues,sincetheydont applywhenyoureusingGAttVelasthelayerenabler. Repeatthisforeachlayerintheprogram.Bearinmindthatifyouwanttosetup32different velocitylevelsforaprogram,withequalintervalsbetweeneachlayer,thenyouhavearangeof 4foreachlevel(Layer1is03,Layer2is47,andsoon).Itwontbeeasytoplayprecisely enoughtotriggerthelayeryouwant.Ontheotherhand,ifyoureusingSongmodeoran externalsequencer,youcaneditattackvelocitylevels,andgetexactlytheresultsyouwant. Opaque Anopaquelayerblocksallhighernumberedlayersinitsrange,allowingonlytheopaquelayer toplay.Thisisaneasywaytochangeasmallrangeofnotesinaprogram,leavingtheoriginal soundplayingaboveandbelowthenewsound. Startwithaonelayerprogram,andcreateanewlayer(Layer2)withtheNewLyrsoftbutton. OntheKEYMAPpageforLayer2,selectthekeymapyouwanttouse,thenontheLAYERpage, setLayer2srange(say,C3toD3),andsetitsOpaqueparametertoOn.ThengotoLayer 1,and duplicateit(withtheDupLyrsoftbutton);theduplicatelayerbecomesLayer 3.Younowhavea threelayerprogram.DeleteLayer1(theoriginallayer);Layer2(thenewlayeryoucreated) becomesLayer1,andLayer 3becomesLayer 2.NowLayer 2blocksoutLayer 3(theduplicate oftheoriginallayer)atthenotesC 3D 3.

6-25

Program Mode The Program Editor

Sustain Pedal (SusPdl) Whenthisparameterison,thelayerwillrespondtoallsustainmessages(Controllerdestination 64,Sustain).Whenoff,thecurrentlayerwillignoresustainmessages.On2meansthatthe sustainpedalwillnotcatchthereleaseofanotethatisstillsoundingwhenthesustainmessage isreceived;thiscanbeveryusefulinaprogramthatusesamplitudeenvelopeswithalong releasetime. Sostenuto Pedal (SosPdl) WhenSostenutoison,thelayerwillrespondtoallsostenutomessages(Controllerdestination 66,Sostenuto).Whenoff,thelayerignoressostenutomessages.Sostenuto,asyoumayknow,isa featurefoundonpianosthathavethreepedals.PressingtheSostenutopedalonapiano(usually themiddlepedal)sustainsthenoteswhosekeysyouwereholdingdownwhenyoupressedthe pedal.Notesplayedafterthepedalisalreadydowndonotgetsustained. Freeze Pedal (FrzPdl) ThisparameteractivatesordeactivatesthelayersresponsetoFreezepedalmessages (Controllerdestination69,Freeze).TheFreezepedalcontrolcausesallnotesthatareonto sustainwithoutdecayuntiltheFreezepedalcontrolgoesoff.Ifanoteisalreadydecaying,itwill freezeatthatlevel. Ignore Release (IgnRel) WhenIgnRelisoff,thelayerrespondsnormallytoNoteOffmessages.Whenon,thelayerwill ignoreallNoteOffmessagesthatitreceives.Thisshouldbeusedonlywithsoundsthatdecayto silencewhenanoteisheld,otherwisethesoundswillsustainforever(presstheCanceland Enterbuttonssimultaneouslytostopsustainednotes.)Thisparametercancomeinhandywhen yourPC3LEisslavedtoadrummachineorsequencer,whichsometimesgeneratesNoteOns andNoteOffssoclosetogetherthattheenvelopedoesnthavetimetoplaybeforethenoteis released.IfusedincombinationwithThrAttorTilDec(seebelow,)IgnRelallowsyouplay staccato,yetstillheartheentirelengthoftheattackanddecaysectionsoftheamplitude envelope. Hold Through Attack (ThrAtt) Whenon,thisparametercausesallnotesinthelayertosustainthroughtheentirefirstattack segmentoftheiramplitudeenvelopes,evenifthenoteshavebeenreleased.Ifyouhaveasound withaslowattack,oranattackthatsdelayedwiththedelaycontrol,settingthisparameterto Onwillmakesureyournotesreachfullamplitudeevenifyoureplayingfast.WhensettoOff, noteswillreleaseassoonasyoureleasethenote(generateaNoteOff).Ifthefirstattacksegment ofthelayersamplitudeenvelopeisveryshort,youprobablywontnoticeadifferencebetween valuesofOnandOff. Hold Until Decay (TilDec) Whenon,thisparametercausesallnotesinthelayertosustainthroughallthreeattack segmentsintheiramplitudeenvelopesevenifthenoteshavebeenreleased.Loopedamplitude envelopeswillnotloop,however,ifthenotesarereleasedbeforereachingtheendofthefinal attacksegment.Noteswillgointotheirnormalreleasesiftheyarereleasedaftertheenvelope haslooped.WhensettoOff,noteswillreleaseassoonasaNoteOffmessageisgenerated.

6-26

Program Mode The Program Editor

The PITCH Page

PressingthePITCHsoftbuttontakesyoutotheDSPCTLpagewiththePitchfunction highlighted.SeeTheDSPControl(DSPCTL)Page on page 633formoreinformationonthePitch function.

The AMP Page

PressingtheAMPsoftbuttontakesyoutotheDSPCTLpagewiththeAmpfunction(labeledas Level)highlighted.SeeTheDSPControl(DSPCTL)Page on page 633formoreinformationon theAmpfunction.

The Algorithm (ALG) Page

PresstheALGsoftbuttontocalluptheAlgorithm(ALG)page.Thetoplineofthedisplaygives youtheusualmodereminder,andtellsyouwhichlayeryourelookingat,aswellashowmany layersareinthecurrentprogram.YoucanviewtheALGpagesofanyotherlayersinthe programbyusingtheChan/Layerbuttons.

Thebasicdefinition:analgorithmisthewiring(signalpath)ofasampletotheaudiooutputs, throughaseriesofdigitalsignalprocessing(DSP)functionsthatyouselect.ThePC3LEs algorithmsarethecoreofVariableArchitectureSynthesisTechnology.TheDSPfunctionsare synthesistools(filters,oscillators,etc.)thatyouassigntothevariousstagesofthealgorithm.The DSPfunctionsyouchoosedeterminethetypeofsynthesisyouuse. Thecentralportionofthepageshowsthealgorithmforthecurrentlyselectedlayer.Youseethe numberofthealgorithm(from1to28,101to131,andtheIDsforanyuserdefinedalgorithms) andagraphicrepresentationofthesignalpath,aswellasthecurrentlyselectedDSPfunctions withinthesignalpath. Touseadifferentalgorithm,selecttheAlgorithmparameteranduseanydataentrymethodto selectadifferentone.TochangetheDSPfunctionwithinanalgorithm,movethecursortothe blockyouwanttochange,thenusetheAlphaWheelorPlus/Minusbuttons.Theresa staggeringnumberofcombinationsofalgorithmsandDSPfunctionsalone,nottomentionthe numerouscontrolsthatcanbeusedtomodifytheDSPfunctions. Note:Changingalayersalgorithmcanaffectthelayerssounddrastically.Itsagoodideatobringdown thevolumeofyourPC3LEoryoursoundsystembeforechangingalgorithms. SeeAlgorithmBasicsbelowforinformationoneditingalgorithms.

6-27

Program Mode The Program Editor

Algorithm Basics Eachofthe59availablealgorithmsrepresentsapresetsignalpath.WithournewDynamic V.A.S.T.feature,youcaneditanypresetsignalpathandmakeyourown,uniquealgorithms,but thatwillbeexplainedfurtheroninthissection.TakealookatAlgorithm1inthediagrambelow. Itsoneofthesimplestalgorithms.

TheDSPfunctionsarerepresentedbytherectangularblocks.Thelinesconnectingtheblocks togetherindicatestheflowofthedigitalsignalfromlefttoright;theyrepresentwhatwecallthe wireofthealgorithm:theactualphysicalpaththatthesignalfollowsthroughthealgorithm. SelectingdifferentalgorithmscanbecomparedtoconnectingdifferentDSPfunctionswith differentwiringdiagrams. Thinkoftheleftsideofeachblockasitsinput,andtherightsideasitsoutput.Dependingonthe algorithm,thesignalmaysplitintotwowires,enablingpartofthesignaltobypasscertain portionsofthealgorithm.Splitwiresmayrejoinwithinthealgorithm,ortheymaypassallthe waythroughassplitsignals.Ifthelastblockhastwowiresatitsoutput,wecallitadouble outputalgorithm.Ifithasonewire,itsasingleoutputalgorithm,eveniftherearetwowiresin earlierportionsofthealgorithm. Eachblockofthealgorithmrepresentsacertainfunctioninthesignalpath.Ineverynon cascadedalgorithm(seeAltInputforAlgorithms(CascadeMode)below),thesignalflowsfirst throughaonestageDSPfunctionthatcontrolsthepitchofthesamplesinthekeymap(this functionisrepresentedasablocklabeledPITCHintheupperrighthandcornerofthedisplay). Infact,thefirstDSPfunctionineachalgorithmalwayscontrolspitch,eventhoughitdoesnt applyineveryinstanceand,aswillbeexplainedlaterinthissection,itisbypassedincascaded algorithms.Similarly,thelastDSPfunctionalwayscontrolsthefinalamplitudeofthesignal (thisfunctionisrepresentedasablocklabeledAMPintheupperrighthandcornerofthe display). ThenumberoffunctionparametersaDSPfunctioncanhavedependsontherelativesizeofits functionblockontheAlgorithmpage(fourslotsisthelargestblocksize.)Forinstance,a functionblockthatisthreeslotslongcanhaveuptothreefunctionparameters,whereasa functionblockthatistwoslotslongcanhaveuptotwofunctionparameters.Foreachfunction parameter,theresacorrespondingsubpageonboththeDSPCTLandDSPMODpages.Onthe DSPCTLsubpages,therearefineadjustandhardwiredparameterswithwhichyoucanmakefixed adjustmentstothefunctionparameter.OntheDSPMODsubpages,thereareprogrammable parametersthatyoucanassigntoanycontrolsourceintheControllerListtomodulatethe functionparameter.TheaboveitalicizedparametertypesaredescribedinCommonDSPControl Parameters on page 629.MoreinformationonthesubpagescanbefoundinTheDSPControl (DSPCTL)Page on page 633andTheDSPModulation(DSPMOD)Page on page 635. HighlightinganyofthefunctionblocksontheALGpageandpressingtheEditbuttontakesyou totheDSPCTLpage.

6-28

Program Mode The Program Editor

Common DSP Control Parameters ThetypeofDSPfunctionavailableforanyfunctionblockdependsonthealgorithm.Someofthe specializedfunctionslikethePANNERarealwayslocatedjustbeforethefinalAMPfunction. Others,likethetwoinputfunctions,appearonlyinalgorithmsthatarestructuredfortwoinput functions. YoucanchangethenatureofeachlayerofaprogramsimplybyassigningdifferentDSP functionstothelayersalgorithm.Yourlevelofcontrolgoesmuchdeeperthanthat,however. EachDSPfunctionhasoneormoreparameterstowhichyoucanpatchavarietyofcontrol sourcestomodifythebehavioroftheDSPfunctionsthemselves. Theparametersonthevariouscontrolinputpagesareverysimilar;infact,therearesix parametersthatappearonalmosteverypage.Consequentlywerefertothemasthecommon DSPcontrolparameters.Althoughtheparametersonthecontrolinputpagesdifferslightly fromfunctiontofunction,youcanexpecttoseesomeorallofthecommonDSPcontrol parameterswheneveryouselectthecontrolinputpageforanyoftheDSPfunctions.

YoullrecognizethecommonDSPcontrolparameters,alongwithseveralotherparameters. KeepinmindthattheresasetofcommoncontrolparametersforeachoftheDSPfunctions;in thiscaseweredescribingthemonlyastheyapplytothepitchcontrolfunction.

Function-parameter

UnliketheotherfivecommonDSPparameters,thefunctionparametersareaccessibleonboth theDSPCTLpageandtheDSPMODpage.Theyarelistedalongthelefthandsideofeachpage; anychangesmadetothemononepagearereflectedintheother.Thelabelofeachfunction parameterdependsonitsfunctioninthecurrentprogramsalgorithm.Forexample,thePitch functionsfunctionparameterislabeledPitch;whereasthetwoblockLopassfunctions functionparametersarelabeledLPFrqandLPRes. Byadjustingthefunctionparameter,youcanaddafixedamountofadjustmenttoanyDSP function.ForthePitchfunction,adjustingthefunctionparameterwillchangethepitchin semitoneincrements.Usethisasastartingpointtosetthepitchwhereyouwantittobe normally.Thiswillshiftthepitchofthecurrentlyselectedlayer,andwillaffecttheplaybackrateof sampledsounds.Sampledsoundshaveanupperlimitonpitchadjustment(oneoctaveupfrom samplesoriginalpitch.)Itsnormalforthepitchesofsampledsoundstopin(stopgetting higher)whenyouadjustthepitchupwardinlargeamounts.Theoscillatorwaveformscanbe pitchedhigher.Anysoundcanbepitcheddownwardwithoutlimit. Theprimaryuseofadjustingthefunctionparameterorfineadjustparameter(whichwillbe explainedunderthenextheading)istooffsetthecumulativeeffectsoftheotherDSPfunction parameters.Forexample,youmightsetahighvalueforkeytracking(definedbelow)fora dramaticchangeineffectacrossthekeyboard.Theeffectmightbetoomuchatoneendofthe keyboard,however,soyoucoulduseoneoftheadjustparameterstoreducetheinitialamount ofthateffect.

6-29

Program Mode The Program Editor

ThePC3LEalwaysusesrealvaluesofmeasurement,ratherthanjustarbitrarynumbers,for adjustableparameters.Thismeansthatyouspecifypitchinsemitones(ST)andcents(ct),and amplitudeindecibels(dB). Rememberthattheparametersonthecontrolinputpagesarecumulativetheycanaddtoor subtractfromtheeffectsoftheotherparametersonthepage,dependingontheirvalues.For example,evenifyouveadjustedthepitchofasamplesohighthatitpins,theeffectsoftheother parametersmaybringthepitchbackdowntoaworkablerange.

Fine Adjust Parameter

Youcanaddslightdetuningtothepitchwiththefineadjustparameters.Noticethatthereare actuallytwofineadjustparametersforthePitchfunction:onethatchangesthepitchincents (100thsofasemitone),andonethatchangesitaccordingtoitsfrequency(inincrementsof Hertzcyclespersecond).Sincewerediscussingtheuniversalcontrolsourceshere,andnot specificallypitch,wellmoveonfornow,astheHzparameterappliesonlytopitchrelated functions.SeeThePITCHPage on page 627foramorethoroughdescriptionofHz. Hard-wired Parameters
Key Tracking

ThisisaquickwaytogetadditionalcontrolbasedontheMIDInotenumberofeachnoteyou trigger.Keytrackingappliesadifferentcontrolsignalvalueforeachnotenumber.Inthecaseof pitch,keytrackingenablesyoutochangethetuningofeachnoterelativetoitsnormalpitch. MiddleCisthezeropoint.Regardlessofthekeytrackingvalue,thereisnoeffectonMiddleC.If yousetanonzerovalueforkeytracking,theeffectincreasesforeachnoteaboveorbelow MiddleC.Inthecaseofpitch,forexample,sayyouassignavalueof5centsperkeyforthekey trackingparameter.TriggeringMiddleC(C4onthePC3LE)willplayanormalC4.Triggering C#4willplayanote5centshigherthanC#4.TriggeringD4willplayanote10centshigherthan D4,andsoon.NotesbelowMiddleCwillbetunedlowerthantheirnormalpitches.Ifyouseta negativevalueforkeytracking,notesaboveMiddleCwillbetunedlowerthantheirnormal pitches. KeepinmindthatkeytrackingonthePITCHpageworksinconjunctionwiththekeytracking parameterontheKEYMAPpage.ThisiswhyyoucansettheKeyTrkparameteronthePITCH pageto0ct/key,andnotesstillincreaseinpitchby100cents/keyasyougoupthekeyboard.Its becausetheKeyTrkparameterontheKEYMAPpageisalreadysetat100centsperkey.
Velocity Tracking

Apositivevalueforvelocitytrackingwillraisethepitchasyoutriggernoteswithhigherattack velocities.Thisisgreatforgettingatraceofdetuningbasedonyourattackvelocity,especiallyin drumprograms,whereyoucanmakethepitchofthedrumsamplesriseslightlywithhigher velocityNoteOns,justasdrumsdowhenyoustrikethemharder.Negativevalueswilllower thepitchasyouincreasetheattackvelocity. Programmable Parameters

Source 1 (Src1)

ThisparametertakesitsvaluefromalonglistofcontrolsourcesincludingeveryMIDIcontrol number,ahostofLFOs,ASRs,envelopesandotherprogrammablesources.

6-30

Program Mode The Program Editor

Src1worksintandemwiththeparameterbeneathitonthepage:Depth.Chooseacontrolsource fromthelistforSrc1,thensetavalueforDepth.WhenthecontrolsourceassignedtoSrc1isat itsmaximum,thepitchwillbealteredtothefulldepthyouset.Forexample,ifyousetSrc1to MWheel,andsetDepthto1200ct,thepitchwillriseasyoupushtheModWheeluponyour PC3LEorMIDIcontroller,reachingamaximumof1200ct(12semitones,oroneoctave).

Source 2 (Src2)

Thisonesevenmoreprogrammable.LikeSrc1,youchooseacontrolsourcefromthelist.But insteadofsettingafixeddepth,youcansetaminimumandmaximumdepth,thenassign anothercontrolsourcetodeterminehowmuchdepthyouget.Trythisexample.(MakesureSrc1 issettoOFFfirst,sothetwosourcesdontinteract.)StartwithProgram199,andpressEdit. PressthePITCHsoftbuttontoselectthePITCHpage.SettheSrc2parametertoavalueofLFO1, thensettheMinimumDepthparameterto100ct,andMaximumDepthto1200ct.Thensetthe DepthControlparametertoMWheel.ThisletsyouusetheModWheeltovarythedepthofthe oscillationinpitchgeneratedbytheLFO. Now,whentheModWheelisdown,thepitchwilloscillatebetweenasemitone(100ct)upanda semitonedown(thedefaultwaveformforLFO1isasinewave,whichgoespositiveand negative).WiththeModWheelup,thepitchwilloscillatebetweenanoctaveupandanoctave down. SincetheModWheelisacontinuouscontrol,youcanachieveanyamountofdepthcontrol betweentheminimumandmaximum.IfyouhadsettheDepthControltoSustain,forexample, thenyoudgetonlytwolevelsofdepthcontrol:themaximum(1200cents)withyourMIDI controllerssustainpedaldown,ortheminimum(100cents)withthesustainpedalup. Alt Input for Algorithms (Cascade Mode) CascademodeisaparticularlypowerfulfeatureofthePC3LEthatallowsyoutocreateunique algorithmsofpreviouslyunattainablelevelsofcomplexity.Thefollowingthreefiguresshowthe signalpathofaprogramconfiguredusingthePC3LEsnewCascademode:

6-31

Program Mode The Program Editor

OntheALG(Algorithm)pageofeverylayer,theAltInputparameterletsyouselectanyother layertogothroughthecurrentlayersDSP.Youcansetitupsothatlayer1goesintolayer2into 3(asshownabove).Ifyouturndownthevolumeonlayers1and2,thenyouarehearingtrue cascadingitslikeabigchainwitheachalgorithmfeedingintothenext,andwhatyouhearis layer3soutput.Youcanalsohavethevolumesofallthreelayersturnedup,whichwillmixthe signalofallthreelayers.Youcould,inthesameprogram,alsodecidetorunlayer4into5into6 into13into25ifyouwanted.Anyofthe32layerscangointoanyotherlayer. TheCascademodealgorithms(verymuchliketriplemodeonaK2600)startatID101.Notein theabovefigureshowalgorithm101looksverysimilartoalgorithm1.EachCascademode algorithmcorrespondstoitsnoncascadeequivalent,whichhasthesameIDnumberminus100. Forexample,algorithm105isacascademodeversionofalgorithm5.OntheAlgpage,select whichlayeryouwanttohaverunningthroughyourcascadelayerwiththeAltInputparameter. MakesuretoturndowntheAmpvolumeonyoursourcelayersifyouonlywanttohearwhats comingoutofthefinalcascadelayer. Dynamic VAST TheDynamicVASTeditorisyetanotherparticularlypowerfulfeatureofthePC3LEthatallows youtoeditthewiringofanalgorithm.WithDynamicVAST,literallythousandsofwiring schemesarepossible.UsingCascademodeinconjunctionwithDynamicVASTgivesyoualmost infinitecontroloveryourprogramssoundandbehaviorbyenablingyoutocreateyourown unique,complexalgorithms. ToentertheDynamicVASTeditor,selecttheALG(Algorithm)pagebypressingtheALGsoft button.HighlighttheAlgorithmparameter,selectanalgorithm,andpresstheEditbutton.This actioncallsuptheEditAlgorithm(EditAlg)pageinwhichyoucaneditthewiringofthe selectedalgorithm.

6-32

Program Mode The Program Editor

Parameter Inputs Outputs Number of Blocks Output Mode

Range of Values 1, 2 1, 2 1 to 4 Normal, Sep. L/R

Default 1 1 2 Normal

Inadditiontohavingaselectablefunction,eachfunctionblockhasthreeeditableparameters: numberofinputs,numberofoutputs,andblocksize(theOutputModeparameterisaneditable parameterofthealgorithmasawhole).WhenyoufirstentertheEditAlgpage,therewillbea cursorintheparameterfield,andthefirstblockofthealgorithmwillbehighlighted.Toselecta blockforediting,movethecursordownthedisplayuntilnoparameterfieldishighlighted; then,usingthe<and>buttons,highlighttheblockyouwishtoedit.Pressthe^buttontomove thecursorbackintotheparameterfields,andthenselecttheparameteryouwishtoedit. TheOutputModeparameterdeterminesthenumberofoutputsfromthealgorithm.With OutputModesettoNormal,thealgorithmhasoneoutput.WithOutputModesettoSep.L/R, thealgorithmhastwooutputs,eachofwhichissenttoaseparatestereochannel. Toeditthesignalpath,selecteitheraninputofablockoranoutputoftheentirealgorithm.By scrollingwithAlphaWheelortheand+buttons,youcanseeeverypossibleconfigurationfor thatselectedsignalpath.

The DSP Control (DSPCTL) Page

Beforereadingfurther,besuretoreadAlgorithmBasics on page 628andCommonDSPControl Parameters on page 629. PresstheDSPCTLsoftbuttontocalluptheDSPControl(DSPCTL)page,whichisdisplayed below:

6-33

Program Mode The Program Editor

Function

Parameter Pitch Fine Adjust

Range of Values -128 to 127 semitones 100 cents 10.00 Hertz 2400 cents/key 7200 cents (Depends on Function) (Depends on Function) (Depends on Function) (Depends on Function) -96 to 24 decibels 2.00 decibels/key 96 decibels

Default 0 0 0 0 0 (Depends on Function) (Depends on Function) (Depends on Function) (Depends on Function) -6 0 35

Pitch

Hertz Adjust Key Tracking Velocity Tracking

(Function) (Function) (Function) (Function) Level

(Function-Parameter) (Function-Parameter) (Function-Parameter) (Function-Parameter) Level Key Tracking Velocity Tracking

Eachfieldinthelefthandcolumnofthepageisafunctionparameterofthecurrentlayers algorithm.Youcancoarselyadjustthefunctionparameterintheselefthandfieldsasnotedin CommonDSPControlParameters,anyadjustmentsmadetothefunctionparametersonthe DSPCTLpagearereflectedinthecorrespondingfunctionparametersontheDSPMODpage. TherighthandsideoftheDSPCTLpageisthesubpageofthehighlightedfunctionparameter onthesubpagearethefineadjustparametersandhardwiredparameters.Toaccessthe parametersonthesubpage,highlightthefunctionparameteryouwishtoedit,andthenpress the>buttontomovethecursorintothesubpage. Thelabelofafunctionparameterdependsonitscorrespondingfunctionblockinthecurrent layersalgorithm.TheaboveDSPCTLpagecorrespondstothefollowingalgorithm:

6-34

Program Mode The Program Editor

The DSP Modulation (DSPMOD) Page

Beforereadingfurther,besuretoreadAlgorithmBasics on page 628andCommonDSPControl Parameters on page 629. PresstheDSPMODsoftbuttontocalluptheDSPModulation(DSPMOD)page,whichis displayedbelow:

Parameter Source 1 Depth Source 2 Depth Control Minimum Depth Maximum Depth

Range of Values Control Source List (Depends on Function) Control Source List Control Source List (Depends on Function) (Depends on Function)

Default Off 0 Off Off 0 0

Eachfieldinthelefthandcolumnofthepageisafunctionparameterofthecurrentlayers algorithm.Youcancoarselyadjustthefunctionparameterintheselefthandfieldsasnotedin CommonDSPControlParameters,anyadjustmentsmadetothefunctionparametersonthe DSPMODpagearereflectedinthecorrespondingfunctionparametersontheDSPCTLpage. TherighthandsideoftheDSPCTLpageisthesubpageofthehighlightedfunctionparameter onthesubpagearetheprogrammableparameters.Toaccesstheparametersonthesubpage, highlightthefunctionparameteryouwishtoedit,andthenpressthe>buttontomovethe cursorintothesubpage. Eachfunctionparameterssubpagecontainstheprogrammableparametersofthehighlighted functionparameter.Byassigningcontrolsourcestomodulateafunctionparameter,youcan enablerealtimecontrolofyourprogramssoundandbehavior.YoucanassignSrc1toany controlsource,andcanspecifyitsmaximumvaluewiththeDepthparameter.Src2isdifferent youcanassignittoanycontrolsource,butcanalsoassignacontrolsourcetoitsmaximum valuewiththeDptCtlparameter.YoucanthenspecifytherangeofSrc2sdepthwiththe MinDepthandMaxDepthparameters. Note:ThePC3LEfeaturesaneasyshortcutforquicklyassigninganyofthePC3LEsrealtimecontrollers (knobs,wheels,buttons,etc.)toacurrentlyselectedparameter(suchastheSrc1andSrc2parameters above.)Withasourceparameterfieldselected,simplyholdtheEnterbuttonandmovethedesired controllertoselectitasacontrolsource. Thelabelofafunctionparameterdependsonitscorrespondingfunctionblockinthecurrent layersalgorithm.TheaboveDSPMODpagecorrespondstothefollowingalgorithm:

6-35

Program Mode The Program Editor

The OUTPUT Page

PresstheOUTPUTsoftbuttontogettotheOUTPUTpage,whereyousetthelayerspreFX panning.OntheOutputpagethereareparametersforadjustingthepanposition,thepanmode, thepantable(ifany),thecrossfadecontrol,andthecrossfadesense.Layersthatusestereo keymapshavetwoPanparametersontheirOUTPUTpages.SomefactoryROMdrumprograms havelayerspecificeffects,inwhichcasetheOUTPUTpageforlayerswithlayerspecificeffects willhavetheadditionalparametersOutGain,OutPan,andOutMode.Thefollowingpageis foramonokeymapprogram:

Parameter Pan (or Pan 1) (Pan 2) Pan Mode (Output Pan) (Output Gain) (Output Pan Mode) Pan Table Crossfade Control Crossfade Sense Drum Remap Exclusive Zone Map

Range of Values 64 64 Fixed, +MIDI, Auto, Reverse 64 -96 to 48 decibels Fixed, +MIDI Pan Table List Control Source List Normal, Reversed Off, Kurz1, Kurz2 Zone Map List

Default 0 63 +MIDI 0 0 +MIDI 0 None Off Norm Off 0 None

6-36

Program Mode The Program Editor

Pan UsethisparametertopositionthecurrentlayerspreFXsignal.Negativevaluespanthesignal totheleftchannel,positivevaluespantotheright,andavalueofzeropanstothecenter.To adjustthepostFX,finalstagegainandpanningofthecurrentprogram,gototheCOMMON pageandadjusttheOutputparameters(seeTheCOMMONPage on page 639). Anadditionalpanparameter(Pan2)appearsifyouhavetheStereoparameterontheKEYMAP pagesettoavalueofOn.

Pan Mode WhenthemodeisFixedthepanpositionremainsasdefinedwiththePanparameter,ignoring MIDIpanmessages.Whenthemodeis+MIDI,MIDIpanmessages(MIDI10)willshiftthe soundtotheleftorrightofthePanparametersetting.Messagevaluesbelow64shiftitleft, whilethoseabove64shiftitright.AsettingofAutoassignsthepansettingofeachnotebased onitsMIDInotenumber.Inthiscase,MiddleC(MIDInotenumber60)isequivalenttothePan parameterssetting.Lowernotesshiftincreasinglyleft,whilehighernotesshiftincreasingly right.AsettingofReverseshiftslownotesright,andhighnotesleft.MIDIpanmessageswill alsoaffectthepanpositionwhenvaluesofAutoandReverseareselected. Output: Pan, Gain, and Mode SomefactoryROMdrumprogramshavelayerspecificeffects.Fortheseprogramsthree additionalparametersappearontheOUTPUTpage:OutPan,OutGain,andOutPanMode.

TheseparametersareanalogoustotheoutputparametersontheCOMMONpage,butarelayer specifictheCOMMONoutputparametersapplytoalllayers.Youcanusetheoutput parametersontheOUTPUTpagetoadjustthepanningandgainofthepostFXsignalofthe currentlayer.

6-37

Program Mode The Program Editor

Pan Table Thefactorypresetpantablesarekeyspecificpanningschemesbywhichthenotethateachkey producesisuniquelypanned.Thesetablesareparticularlyusefulforproducingthestereo imageofadrumsetwhencreatingpercussionprograms,orforproducingthestereoimageofa pianowhencreatingpianoprograms. Crossfade and Crossfade Sense (XFadeSense) TheCrossfadeparameterletsyouselectacontrolsourcetofadethecurrentlayersamplitude fromzerotomaximum.WhenXFadeSenseisNormal,thelayerisatfullamplitudewhenthe Crossfadecontrolisatminimum.WithXFadeSensesettoReverse,thelayerisatzeroamplitude whentheCrossfadecontrolisatminimum. ThisparameterissimilartotheSrc1andDepthparametersfortheAmpfunctiononthe DSPCTLandDSPMODpages,buttheattenuationcurvefortheCrossfadeparameteris optimizedspecificallyforcrossfades. Tocrossfadetwolayersinthesameprogram,assignthesamecontrolsourcefortheCrossFade parametersinbothlayers,thensetoneoftheirXFadeSenseparameterstoavalueofNorm,and theotherstoRvrs. Drum Remap TheDrumRemapparametershouldgenerallynotbechanged.ThisparameterletsthePC3LE knowhowdrumprogramsaremappedsothatdrumsoundscanbeproperlyremappedwhen usingtheGeneralMIDI(GM)drummap(seebelow.)Kurz1designatesthatthecurrentdrum programwasoriginallyaPC2program,andthatitusesthePC2drummap(programs113119 usethismap.)Kurz2designatesthatthecurrentdrumkitusesthenewPC3LEdrummap(all otherfactorydrumprogramsusethismap:120,241248,369376.)Thenewdrummapissimilar tothatofthePC2,excepttomtomsoundshavebeenmovedintooctaveC3C4,sotheyaremore easilyplayablewiththemainkickandsnaredrumsoundsinthatoctave.Wheneditingakit, makesuretofollowthelayoutofthedrummapbeingusedifyouwanttobeabletoproperly remapthekittotheGMdrummap.ProgramsthathavetheDrumRemapparametersettoOff willnotbeviewedbythePC3LEasdrumprogramsandwillnotbeaffectedwhenremappingto theGMdrummap. Inmostkeyboardsandsynthesizers,drumprogramsaremappedasdictatedbytheGeneral MIDI(GM)industrystandard.TheGMdrummapisntoptimallyintuitiveintermsof playability,sowedevelopedourownuniquekeymapthatismoreintuitiveandlendsbetterto performance.However,theGMdrummapissocommonplacethatmanyplayersfeelmost comfortableplayingdrumprogramswiththeGMdrummap.So,wedesignedthePC3LEsuch thatyoucanremapdrumprogramstotheGMdrummap.Youcansetdrumprogramstoremap totheGMdrummapinMasterMode.OntheMasterMode2screensetthedrumremap parametertoGM.Toreturndrumprogramstotheiroriginalmaps,setthisparametertoNone. SeeDrumRemap on page 99intheMasterModechapterformoreinformation. Exclusive Zone Map TheExclusiveZoneMapisanotherparameterthatappliesprincipallytodrumprograms.When usingadrumprogram,youmaywanttheclosedhihatsoundstocutoffopenhihatsounds. Sinceyoucanremapthekeymapsofdrumprograms,thisparameterremapscutoffkeys accordingly. LikeDrumRemap,youcanusethisparameteronanyprogram,butyouprobablywontwantto dothis.

6-38

Program Mode The Program Editor

The COMMON Page

TheCOMMONpageisreachedbypressingtheCOMMONsoftbuttonintheProgramEditor. Hereswhereyoufind12frequentlyusedparametersthataffecttheentirecurrentprogram,not justthecurrentlayer.

NoticethatwhentheMonophonicparameterissettoitsdefaultvalueofOff,thefive monophonicparametersdonotappearonthepage.
Parameter Pitch Bend Range Up Pitch Bend Range Down Monophonic (Legato Play) (Portamento) (Portamento Rate) (Attack Portamento) (Mono Sample XFade) Globals Output Gain Output Pan Output Pan Mode Demo Song Range of Values 7200 cents 7200 cents Off, On Off, On Off, On 1 to 3000 keys per second Off, On Off, On Off, On -96 to 24 decibels 64 Fixed, +MIDI Demo Song List Default 200 -200 Off Off Off 70 On Off Off 0 0 +MIDI 0 None

Pitch Bend Range Up and Down UsetheseparameterstodefinehowmuchthepitchwillchangewhenyoumoveyourPitch Wheel.ForbothPitchBendRangeparameters,positivevalueswillcausethepitchtobendup, whilenegativevalueswillcausethepitchtobenddown.Largepositivevaluescancause samplestobendtotheirmaximumupwardpitchshiftbeforethePitchWheelisfullyup(or down).Thiswillnothappenwhenbendingpitchdown. Monophonic Whenoff,theprogramispolyphonicitcanplayupto128notesatatime.Noticethatwhenthe Monophonicparameterisoff,theLegatoPlayparameterandthethreePortamentoparameters donotappearontheCOMMONpage.Thisisbecauseonlymonophonicprogramscanuse portamento.

6-39

Program Mode The Program Editor

WhenOn,theprogramwillplayonlyonenoteatatime.Thismakesitpossibletouseandto determinethebehavioroftheportamentofeature.DonotsetIgnoreReleaseOn(page 626) whenyouareusingMonophonicprograms,sincethelackofNoteOffmessageswillprevent youfromswitchingprogramsproperly.

Legato Play WhenLegatoPlayison,anotewillplayitsattackonlywhenallothernoteshavebeenreleased. Thisisusefulforrealisticinstrumentalsounds. Portamento Thisparameteriseitheronoroff.ThedefaultvalueofOffmeansthatportamentoisdisabled forthecurrentprogram. Portamentoisaglidebetweenpitches.Onactualacousticinstrumentslikeviolinandbass,its achievedbyslidingafingeralongavibratingstring.Onmostkeyboardsthatofferportamento, itsachievedbyholdingdownakeythattriggersthestartingnote,thenstrikingandreleasing otherkeys.Thepitchglidestowardthemostrecentlytriggerednote,andremainsatthatpitchas longasthenoteremainson.ThePC3LEgivesyoutwowaystogetportamento.SeetheAttack Portamentoparameterbelow. Whenapplyingportamentotomultisampledsounds(AcousticGuitar,forexample),thePC3LE willplaymorethanonesamplerootasthepitchglidesfromthestartingpitchtotheending pitch.Thismaycauseasmallclickateachsampleroottransition.Youcaneliminateclicksby usingtheMonoSampleXFadeparameter(seebelow.) Portamento Rate ThesettingforPortamentoratedetermineshowfastthecurrentnoteglidesfromstartingpitch toendingpitch.Thevalueofthisparametertellsyouhowmanysecondsthenotetakestoglide onesemitonetowardtheendingpitch.Atasettingof12keys/second,forexample,thepitch wouldglideanoctaveeverysecond.Thelistofvaluesisnonlinear;thatis,theincrementsget largerasyouscrolltohighervalues. Attack Portamento (AttPt) Thisparametertogglesbetweentwotypesofportamento.WhensettoOn,thePC3LE remembersthestartingpitchsoyoudonthavetoholdanoteontoachieveportamento.The pitchalwaysglidestoeachnewnotefromthepreviouslytriggerednote.WhensettoOff,the pitchwillglidetothemostrecentlytriggerednoteonlywhenthepreviousnoteisstillon(in otherwords,youmustuselegatofingering).

6-40

Program Mode The Program Editor

Mono Sample XFade Whenapplyingportamentotomultisampledsounds(AcousticGuitar,forexample),thePC3LE willplaymorethanonesamplerootasthepitchglidesfromthestartingpitchtotheending pitch.Thismaycauseasmallclickateachsampleroottransition.Youcaneliminateclicksby settingtheMonoSampleXFadeparametertoOn.WhentheMonoSampleXFadeparameteris settoOn,thePC3LEperformsacrossfadeateachsampleroottransitiontoeliminateclicks. Globals Thisisanothertoggle,whichaffectsLFO2,ASR2,FUNs2and4.Whenoff,thesethreecontrol sourcesarelocal;theyaffecteachindividualnoteinthelayersthatusethemasacontrolsource. Theybeginoperatingeachtimeanoteinthatlayeristriggered. WhentheGlobalsparameterissettoOn,thesecontrolsourcesbecomeglobal,thatistheyaffect everynoteineverylayerofthecurrentprogram,theyrenotspecifictoanyonelayer.When thesecontrolsourcesareglobal,theybeginoperatingassoonastheprogramisselected.When Globalsareon,LFO2,ASR2,andFUNs2and4willappearontheirrespectivepagespreceded bytheletterGtoindicatethattheyreglobal. Youlluseglobalcontrolsourceswhenyouwanttoaffectallnotesinaprogramuniformly,and localcontrolsourceswhenyouwanttoaffecteachnoteindependently.Forexample,youdusea globalLFOcontrollingpitchtocreateaLeslieeffectonanorgansound,sinceyouwanttheeffect appliedtoallthenotesyouplay.YoudusealocalLFOcontrollingpitchtocreateavibratofora soloviolin,sinceyouwanttobeabletovarytherateanddepthofthevibratoforeachnote. Output: Gain, Pan, and Pan Mode (OutGain, OutPan, OPanmode) TheOutputparametersontheCOMMONpageallowyoutoadjustthefinalstagegainand panningoftheentireprogramspostFXsignal.UsetheOutGainparametertocutorboostthe signal.UsetheOutPanparametertopanthesignal;negativevaluespantheaudiosignaltothe leftchannel,positivevaluestotheright,andavalueofzeropanstothecenter. WhentheOPanmodeparameterissettoFixedthepanpositionremainsasdefinedwiththe OutPanparameter,ignoringMIDIpanmessages.WhentheOPanModeissetto+MIDI,MIDI panmessages(MIDI10)willshiftthesoundtotheleftorrightofthePanparametersetting. Messagevaluesbelow64shiftitleft,whilethoseabove64shiftitright. Demo Song TheDemoSongparameterallowsyoutochoosethedemosongforthecurrentprogram.The demosongisashort,preprogrammedsongthatgivesyouademonstrationoftheprogramina musicalcontext.YoucanplayaprogramsdemosonginanypageintheProgrammodeby pressingthePlay/Pausebutton,andstopthesongbypressingtheStopbutton(bothbuttonsare locatedundertheMODEbuttonsonthefrontpanel). WhenintheProgrammodeentrylevelpage,youcanhearademosonginwhateverprogram youwantbypressingthePlay/Pausebuttonwithoneprogramselected,andthenselecting anotherprogram. Note:Youcanalsotriggerandstopdemosongswithasimultaneousdoublebuttonpressoftheupand downcursorbuttons.

6-41

Program Mode The Program Editor

The LFO Page

LFOsarelowfrequencyoscillators.LFOsareusedtoautomatethemodulationofaparameter basedontheshapeandfrequencyofanaudiowaveform.YoullusetheLFOpagetodefinethe behaviorofthetwoLFOsavailabletoeachlayer.LFOsareperiodic(repeating)controlsources. Thebasicelementsaretherate,whichdefineshowfrequentlytheLFOrepeats,andshape, whichdefinesthewaveformofthemodulationsignalitgenerates. WiththePC3LE,youcansetupperandlowerlimitsoneachLFOsrate,andassignacontrol sourcetochangetheLFOsrateinrealtime,ifyouwish. Becauseofitsperiodicnature,theLFOisperfectforcreatingeffectslikevibrato(cyclicvariation inpitch)andtremolo(cyclicvariationinamplitude).WhenyoureeditingLFOs,oranycontrol source,rememberthatitmustbeassignedtocontrolsomeparameterbeforeyoullhearthe effectsofyouredits. LFO1isalwayslocal,meaningthatitstriggeredwitheachNoteOnevent,andruns independentlyforeachnoteinthelayer.LFO2islocalbydefault,butcanbemadeglobal.Thisis doneontheCOMMONpage,bysettingtheGlobalsparametertoOn,whichcausesLFO2, ASR2,FUN2andFUN4alltobecomeglobal.Globalcontrolsuniformlyaffecteverynoteineach layer.

Parameter Group (Available for each of LFO1 and LFO2) Minimum Rate Maximum Rate Rate Control LFO Shape LFO Start Phase

Range of Values 1/4 note, 1/8 note, 1/8 triplet, 1/16 note, 0 to 24 Hz 0 to 24 Hz Control Source List LFO Shape List (Ref. Guide) 0, 90, 180, 270 Degrees

Default 0.00 0.00 Off Sine 0

Minimum Rate ThisistheslowestrateatwhichtheLFOruns.WhenitsRateControlissettoOFF,orwhenthe controlsourceassignedtoitisatitsminimum,theLFOrunsatitsminimumrate.Aspreviously mentioned,thevalues1/4note,1/8note,1/8triplet,and1/16notesynctheMinimumRatewith thePC3LEssystemtempo.Ofcourse,ifyouchoosetotemposyncyourLFO,thentheLFOrate isfixed,andyoucanspecifyneitherMaximumRatenorRateControl.Thedisplaychanges thusly:

6-42

Program Mode The Program Editor

Maximum Rate ThisisthefastestpossibleratefortheLFO.WhenitsRateControlissettoON,orwhenthe controlsourceassignedtoitisatitsmaximum,theLFOrunsatitsmaximumrate. Rate Control AssignanycontrolsourceinthelisttomodulatetheLFOsratebetweenitsminimumand maximum.AcontinuouscontrolliketheModWheelisanaturalchoice,enablingyoutogetjust aboutanyratebetweenminimumandmaximum.Butyoucanuseaswitchcontroltoo,toget justtheminimumormaximumwithnothinginbetween.AssigningMPress(aftertouch)asthe ratecontrolforanLFOvibratogivesyouaneasywaytoincreasethevibratorateinrealtime,as youcanonmanyacousticinstruments. LFO Shape TheshapeoftheLFOwaveformdeterminesthenatureofitseffectonthesignalitsmodulating. AneasywaytochecktheeffectsofthedifferentLFOshapesistosetLFO1asthevalueforthe Src1parameteronthePITCHpage,andsettheDepthforSrc1to400centsorso.Thengotothe LFOpage,settheMinandMaxratesforLFO1at0.00 Hzand4.00 Hzorso,andsettheRate controltoMWheel.NowplayyourMIDIcontrollerandyoullheartheLFOsratechangewhen youmoveitsModWheel.SelectdifferentLFOShapesandcheckouttheeffectonthepitch. LFO Phase UsethisparametertodeterminethestartingpointoftheLFOscycle.Onecompletecycleofthe LFOis360degrees.0degreesphasecorrespondstoacontrolsignalvalueof0,becoming positive.Each90degreeincrementinthephaserepresentsaquartercycleoftheLFO. WhenanLFOislocal,thephaseparametergivesyoucontroloverthestartingpointoftheLFO foreachnote(forexample,youcouldmakesureeveryvibratostartedbelowthepitchyou playedinsteadofatthepitchyouplayed).TheLFOsphasealsoaffectsglobalLFOs,although itsoftenindistinguishable,sinceglobalLFOsstartrunningassoonastheprogramcontaining themisselected,evenifyoudontplayanynotes.

The ASR Page

ASRsarethreesectionunipolarenvelopesattack,sustain,andrelease.ThePC3LEsASRscan betriggeredbyaprogrammablecontrolsource,andcanbedelayed.ASR1isalwaysalocal control.ASR2islocalbydefault,butbecomesglobaliftheGlobalsparameterontheCOMMON pageissettoOn.ASRsarefrequentlyusedtorampthedepthofpitchoramplitudeinavibrato ortremolo,enablingdelaysinthoseeffects.TheASRpageconsistsoftworowsoffive parameters,onerowforeachoftheASRs.

6-43

Program Mode The Program Editor

Parameter Trigger Mode Delay Attack Release

Range of Values Control Source List Normal, Hold, Repeat 0 to 30 seconds 0 to 30 seconds 0 to 30 seconds

Default Off Normal 0 seconds 0 seconds 0 seconds

Trigger ThisdefinesthecontrolsourcethatstartsthecurrentlayersASRs.TheASRstartswhenthe triggerswitchesfromofftoon.IftheTriggerparameterissettoON,aglobalASRstartsrunning immediatelywhenyouselectaprogramthatcontainsit.AlocalASRstartsrunningassoonas youtriggeranoteinthelayerthatcontainsit.SwitchcontrolsarebettersuitedforASRtriggers becauseoftheirbinary(on/off)nature.AcontinuouscontrolwilltriggertheASRswhenits signalvalueisaboveitsmidpoint. Mode ThisparametersetsthesustainsectionoftheASR.TheASRsmodedetermineswhattheASR doeswhenitfinishesitsattacksection.IftheModeparameterissettoNormal,theASRwillrun directlyfromitsattacksectiontoitsreleasesection(nosustain).AtasettingofRepeat,theASR willcyclethroughtheattackandreleasesections,thenloopforwardandcyclethroughagain untiltheASRstriggerswitchesoff.IfthemodeissettoHold,theASRmaintainsitspositionat theendoftheattacksectionuntiltheASRstriggerswitchesoff.TheASRthengoesintoits releasesection.IftheASRstriggerswitchesoffbeforetheattacksectioniscomplete,theASR goesdirectlytoitsreleasesection. Delay WhentheASRstriggerswitcheson,theASRwillstartimmediatelyifthisparameterissetto zero.NonzerovalueswillcauseacorrespondingdelaybetweentheASRtriggerandthestartof theASR. Attack ThisdefineshowlongtheASRtakestorampupfromminimumtomaximumeffecton whateveritsassignedto.

6-44

Program Mode The Program Editor

Release ThisdefineshowlongtheASRtakestofadetominimumfromitsmaximum.IftheASRstrigger switchesoffbeforetheASRhasreachedmaximum,theASRreleasesfromthatlevel.

The Function (FUN) Page

FUNisshortforfunction.ThePC3LEsfourFUNsgreatlyextendtheflexibilityofthecontrol sources.EachFUNacceptsinputfromanytwocontrolsources,performsaselectablefunction onthetwoinputsignals,andsendstheresultasitsoutput,whichcanbeassignedlikeanyother controlsource.UsingtheFUNsinvolvesdefiningthemontheFUNpage,thenassigningoneor moreofthemascontrolsources.TheFUNpagelookslikethis:

TherearethreeparametersforeachFUN.Inputsaandbcanbeanycontrolsourcefromthe ControlSourcelist.Thecontrolsourcesyouwanttocombinearetheonesyoullassignasthe valuesfortheseparameters. TheFunctionparameterdetermineswhatmathematicalfunctionisappliedtothetwoinputs. WhenaFUNhasbeenassignedasacontrolsource,thePC3LEreadsthevaluesofthetwo controlsourcesdefinedasInputsaandb.Itthenprocessesthemaccordingtothesettingforthe Functionparameter,andtheresultingvalueistheFUNsoutput.

6-45

Program Mode The Program Editor

The Amplitude Envelope (AMPENV) Page

Amplitudeenvelopeshavethreesections:attack,decay,andrelease.Theattacksection determineshowlongeachnotetakestoreachitsassignedamplitudelevelafteryoutriggera NoteOnevent.Thedecaysectiondetermineshowquicklyandhowmuchasustainedsound fadesbeforeaNoteOffistriggered.Thereleasesectiondetermineshowquicklyasoundfades tosilenceafteraNoteOffistriggered. PresstheAMPENVsoftbuttontoreachtheAmplitudeEnvelopepage.Formanyprograms,it willlooklikethediagrambelow,whichtellsyouthattheamplitudeenvelopeforthecurrent layeristhesamplesdefaultnaturalenvelope.ManyfactoryROMprogramsusethenatural envelope,whichiscustomdesignedforeachsampleandwaveformduringitsoriginal developmentprocess.Anaturalenvelopeusuallycontainsmoredetailthanauserenvelope, andmaymakesamplesofacousticinstrumentssoundmorerealistic.

Ifyouwanttobuildyourownamplitudeenvelope,justturntheAlphaWheelaclick.Thevalue NaturalwillchangetoUser,andasetofAMPENVparameterswillappear.Thesoundwill changewhenyoudothis,becausethedefaultsettingsfortheUserenvelope,asshowninthe diagrambelow,takeeffectassoonasyouleaveNaturalmode.ReturningtoNaturalmode appliestheoriginalamplitudeenvelopeonceagain.

YoulltweaktheparametersontheAMPENVpagewhenyouwanttoshapetheamplitude characteristicsofyoursounds.Agraphicviewoftheamplitudeenvelopewillappearonthe displaytogiveyouavisualsenseoftheenvelopescharacteristics.Thedotsalongtheenvelope graphicindicatethebreakpointsbetweentheenvelopesvarioussegments. TheAMPENVpagestoplinegivesyoutheusuallocationreminder,pointsoutthecurrently selectedlayer,andtellsyoutherelativescaleoftheenvelopesgraphicview.Theenvelope graphicshrinksinscaleasthesegmenttimesgetlonger.Thisautozoomfeaturemaximizesthe availabledisplayspace.Trylengtheningoneofthesegmenttimes.Theenvelopegraphicwill stretchtofillthedisplayfromlefttoright.Whenitfillsthedisplay,itwillshrinktohalfitssize, andthetoplinewillindicatethatthescalehaschanged(from[1/1]to[1/2],forexample).

6-46

Program Mode The Program Editor

Eachparameteronthispagehastwovalues,aslistedbelow.Fortheenvelopesegments,thefirst (upper)valueisthedurationofthesegment,andthesecondistheamplitudelevelatthe completionofthesegment.FortheLoopparameter,thevaluesdefinehowtheenvelopeloops, andhowmanytimestheloopcycles.

Parameter Group Attack Segment 1, 2, 3 Decay Segment Parameter Time Level Time Level Time Release Segment 1, 2, 3 Level Type # of loops Range of Values 0 to 60 seconds 0 to 100% 0 to 60 seconds 0 to 100% 0 to 60 seconds 0 to 150% (Release Segment 3 is always set to 0%) Off, Forward, Bidirectional Infinite, 1 to 31 times

Loop

Attack Segment Times Theseindicatehowlong(inseconds)ittakesforthecurrentlayersamplitudetoreachitsfinal levelfromitsstartinglevel. Attack Segment Levels Thesearethefinallevelsthateachsegmentachievesatcompletion.Thelevelsareexpressedas percentagesofthemaximumpossibleamplitudeforthecurrentlayer.(Themaximumpossible amplitudeforthecurrentlayercanbesetwiththeLevelparameterontheDSPCTLpagebypressingthe AMPsoftbutton.)Attacksegment1alwaysstartsatzeroamplitude,andmovestoitsassigned levelinthetimespecifiedbyitstimevalue.Sothedefaultsettingsof0secondsand100%mean thatthefirstsegmentoftheattacksectionmovesinstantlyfromzeroamplitudeto100% amplitude.IncreasethetimeofAttacksegment1ifyouwantthesoundtorampupmoreslowly. Attacksegments2and3affectthesoundonlywhenyousetanonzerovaluefortime.Theywill thenmovetotheirassignedlevelsinthetimespecified.Theirstartinglevelsareequaltothe finallevelsoftheprecedingsegment. Decay Segment Thedecaysectionhasonlyonesegment.Ithasvaluesfortimeandlevel,justasfortheattack section.Thedecaysectionbeginsassoonastheattacksectionhasbeencompleted.Itstartsatthe sameamplitudelevelastheattacksegmentprecedingit,andmovestoitsassignedlevelinthe timespecified.Youllhearanotesdecaysectiononlywhentheattacksectioniscompleted beforeaNoteOffmessageisgeneratedforthatnote. Tocreateasustainingenvelope,simplysettheDecaysegmentsleveltoanonzerovalue. Release Segments Liketheattackanddecaysections,eachofthethreesegmentsinthereleasesectionhasvalues fortimeandlevel.Eachsegmentreachesitsassignedlevelinthetimespecifiedforthatsegment. Releasesegment1startsattheNoteOffeventforeachnote,atthecurrentamplitudelevelof thatnotewhetheritsintheattacksectionorthedecaysection.Itthenmovestoitsassigned levelinthetimespecified.Releasesegments2and3startatthefinallevelsofthesegments

6-47

Program Mode The Program Editor

beforethem.Releasesegments1and2canbesettoanylevelfrom0to150%.Releasesegment3 alwayshasalevelof0%,soyoucantadjustitslevel.InplaceofitsLevelparameteryouseea parameterthatletsyoutogglebetweenUserenvelopesandthesoundspreprogrammednatural envelope. Loop Type TherearesevendifferentvaluesforLooptype. AvalueofOffdisablesloopingforthecurrentlayersamplitudeenvelope. Valuesofseg1F,seg2F,andseg3Fareforwardloops.Ineachcase,theamplitudeenvelopeplays throughtheattackanddecaysections,thenloopsbacktothebeginningofthefirst,second,or thirdattacksegments,respectively. Valuesofseg1B,seg2B,andseg3B,arebidirectionalloops.Theamplitudeenvelopeplays throughtheattackanddecaysections,thenreversesandplaysbackwardtothebeginningofthe first,second,orthirdattacksegment,respectively.Whenitreachesthebeginningoftheassigned attacksegment,itreversesagain,playingforwardtotheendofthedecaysection,andsoon. Number of Loops AvalueofInfmakestheamplitudeenvelopeloopuntilaNoteOffisgenerated.Valuesof1 through31indicatehowmanytimestheloopwillrepeataftertheamplitudeenvelopehas playedoncethroughitsnormalcycle. Regardlessofthelooptypeandthenumberofloops,eachnotegoesintoitsreleasesectionas soonasitsNoteStategoesoff(thatis,whenaNoteOffisgenerated).Theenvelopewill continuetoloopaslongasNoteStateremainson,whetheritsheldonbyapedal,bytheIgnRel parameter(describedinthesectionentitledTheLAYERPage on page 622),oranythingelse.

The Envelope 2 (ENV2) and Envelope 3 (ENV3) Pages

ThePC3LEofferstwoenvelopesinadditiontoAMPENV.LikeAMPENV,ENV2andENV3can beassignedlikeanyothercontrolsource.UnlikeAMPENV,however,ENV2andENV3canbe bipolar.Thismeansthatyoucansetnegativevaluesforthem.(Obviously,youcanthavean amplitudelessthanzero,soAMPENVisunipolarthevaluesrangefromeither0to 100%or0 to150%.)Abipolarenvelopecontrollingpitch,forexample,couldmodulatethepitchboth aboveandbelowitsoriginallevel. AnotherdifferenceisthatAMPENValwayscontrolstheamplitudeofthelayer,soevenifyou useitasacontrolsourceforotherfunctions,itwillstillaffectthelayersamplitude.ENV2and ENV3affectonlythoselayersthathavethemassignedasacontrolsource.Also,AMPENVuses anexponentialattack(theamplituderisesmuchfasterattheendoftheattacksegmentthanit doesatthebeginning),whileENV2andENV3uselinearattacks(theattacksegmentincreasesat thesameratefromstarttofinish).

6-48

Program Mode The Program Editor

ThepagesforEnvelopes2and3arereachedwiththesoftbuttonsENV2andENV3.Whenyou selectthesepages,youllfindadisplaythatlooksverymuchliketheAMPENVpage.Theonly differencesarethatyoucanprogramanamountforRel3;theRel1andRel2limits,whichare 100%;andintheenvelopegraphic,whichhasadottedlinerunninghorizontallyacrossthe display.Thisisthezerolevelline;negativelevelvaluesforthevariousenvelopesegmentswill causetheenvelopegraphictodipbelowthisline.

The Envelope Control (ENVCTL) Page

TheEnvelopeControlpagegivesyourealtimecontrolovertheratesofeachsectionofthe amplitudeenvelopeforbothnaturalanduserenvelopes(seeTheAmplitudeEnvelope(AMPENV) Page on page 646.)PresstheENVCTLsoftbuttontoreachtheENVCTLpage.

Thedisplaystoplineremindsyouofthecurrentlayer.Thecolumnontheleftliststhethree sectiontypesoftheamplitudeenvelope,andeachcorrespondinglineliststhevaluesforthefive DSPcontrolparametersthatareavailableforeachsectiontype.TheDSPcontrolparametersare: Adjust,Keytracking,Velocitytracking,andSource/Depth,whicharelistedatthetopofeach correspondingcolumn.WhenAMPENVissettoUsermode,theAttackandReleasesectionson thispageapplytotheattackandreleasesectionsontheAMPENVpage.Itsimportanttokeepin mindthatthevaluesforthevariousparametersarecumulative,meaningthatifforexampleyou setattacktobecontrolledbyKeytrkandVelTrk,theresultingchangeonAttackwouldbe affectedbythecombinationofthevaluesproducedbyKeyTrkandVelTrk.Alsonotethatunlike previousKurzweilmodels,ENVCTLdoesaffecttheattacksectionsofnaturalenvelopes. Additionally,thebottomlineofthispageletsyoumakeuseoftheImpactfeature,whichlets youboostorcuttheamplitudeofthefirst20millisecondsofanotesattack. Theparametersandvaluesinthefollowingparameterslist(seebelow)applytoeachofthethree envelopesectionsattack,decay,andrelease.Welldescribethemonlyonce,sincetheir functionsarelargelythesameforeachenvelopesection.Theonlydifferenceiswithvelocity tracking,whichisonlyavailableasaparametertocontrolattacksectionsoftheamplitude envelope(however,youcanassignattackvelocityasthevaluefortheSourceparameterineach ofthesections). Thevaluesofeachoftheseparametersmultiplytheratesoftheenvelopesectionstheycontrol. Valuesgreaterthan1.000xmaketheenvelopesectionsrunfaster(theyincreasetherate),while valueslessthan1.000xmaketheenvelopesectionsrunslower.Sayforexamplethatonthe currentlayersAMPENVpageyouhadsettheDecaysectionstimeat2.00seconds,anditslevel at0%.Thissetsthelayersamplitudetofadetosilencetwosecondsafterthecompletionofthe lastattacksegment.Thedecaytimeistwoseconds;thedecayrateis50%persecond.Nowifyou selecttheENVCTLpageandsettheDecayAdjustparametertoavalueof2.000x,youve increasedthedecayratebyafactoroftwo,makingittwiceasfast.Therateincreasesto100%per second,andthedecaytimeisnowonesecondinsteadoftwo.

6-49

Program Mode The Program Editor

Note:Since0multipliedbyanynumberequals0,theenvelopeparametersonthispagewillhavenoeffect onanyAMPENVsectionssetto0seconds.AwayaroundthisistochangeanyAMPENVsectionssetto 0to0.02seconds.

Parameter Group (Available for each of Att, Dec, Rel, Imp) Adjust Key Tracking Velocity Tracking Source Depth

Range of Values 0.018 to 50.000x (-24.0 to 24.0 dB for Imp) 0.018 to 50.000x (-2.00 to 2.00 dB for Imp) 0.018 to 50.000x (Not available for Dec or Rel; -24.0 to 24.0 dB for Imp) Control Source List 0.018 to 50.000x (-24.0 to 24.0 dB for Imp)

Adjust ThisisthefamiliarCoarseadjustfoundonmanyotherpages.Useitheretochangetherateof oneoftheenvelopesectionswithoutreprogrammingtheenvelopeitself.Thisparameterdoesnt giveyourealtimecontrolovertheenvelope.Itis,however,agoodwaytoadjustthenatural envelopeswithoutswitchingtoaUserenvelopeandtryingtoapproximatetheNatural envelope. Key Tracking ThisusestheMIDInotenumberofeachkeyasthecontrolinputforthecurrentlayers correspondingenvelopesection.Whenthevalueofthisparameterisgreaterthan1.000x,notes aboveC4willmaketheenvelopesectionrunfaster,whilenotesbelowC4willmakeitrun slower.Whenthevalueofthisparameterislessthan1.000x,notesaboveC4willmakethe envelopesectionrunslower,andnotesbelowC4willmakeitrunfaster.Thisgivesyourealtime envelopecontrolrightfromyourMIDIcontroller.Youmightuseit,forexample,tocausean acousticguitarsoundtodecayquickeratthehighendofthekeyboard(setthekeytrackingtoa positivevalue). Velocity Tracking Useyourattackvelocityasthecontrolinputforthecurrentlayersattacksection(thisparameter doesntapplytodecayorrelease).Whenthevalueofthisparameterisgreaterthan1.000x, attackvelocitiesgreaterthan64maketheattacksectionrunfaster,andattackvelocitiesbelow64 makeitrunslower.Thisgivesyourealtimeattackcontrolovertheenvelope. Source, Depth ThesetwoparametersworktogethertoletyouassignacontrolliketheModWheeltoaffectthe currentlayersamplitudeenvelopeinrealtime.ThevalueoftheSourceparameterdefineswhich controlaffectstheenvelopesection,andthevalueoftheDepthparameterdefineshowmuchthe rateismultipliedwhenthecontrolisatitsmaximumvalue,127.Noeffectishadwhenthe controlisatitsminimumvalue,0,andDepthvaluesarescaledforcontrollervaluesinbetween. Note:Foreachnotetriggered,youcanonlysetthecontrollervaluethatwillscaletheDepthparameterof anenvelopesectionbeforethatsectionoftheenvelopeistriggered.ForcontrollersassignedforAttack,the controllervalueusedwillbethelastreceivedbeforethenoteistriggered.Forcontrollersassignedfor Decay,thecontrollervalueusedwillbethelastreceivedbeforethefinalsectionoftheattackenvelope reachesitsmaximumamplitude.ForcontrollersassignedforRelease,thecontrollervalueusedwillbethe lastreceivedbeforethenoteisreleased.Toputitanotherway,foreachenvelopesection,youcannot changetherateofanotesenvelopeoncethatsectionoftheenvelopehasbeentriggered.

6-50

Program Mode The Program Editor

Impact Impactcanboostorcutnotevolumebyupto24dBduringthefirst20millisecondsoftheattack ofanenvelope.Thisfeatureisaneasywaytogetmorethumpfromyourbassanddrum sounds.

INFO
PresstheINFOsoftbuttontogototheINFOpagewhereyoucaneditthecontrollerassignment infoforthecurrentprogram.Eachinfoentryisadescriptionofaprogramparameterthatyou haveassignedtobecontrolledbyaphysicalcontrollerorMIDICCnumber.Infocanbeviewed fromtheProgrammodeorSetupmodemainpagebypressingtheInfosoftbutton.Controllers withinfotextwillalsoshowtheinfoontheleftsideoftheProgrammodeorSetupModemain pagewhenmoved. OntheINFOpage,usetheChan/Layerbuttonstoscrollthroughthecurrentprogramslistof controllerassignmentinfo.EachassignmentinfoentryhasaMIDIcontrollernumberandaText parametertodescribewhattheassignmentcontrols.OneinfoentrycanbemadeforeachMIDI CCnumber. Toeditthetextofacontrollerassignment,presstheTextsoftbutton.Tocreateanewcontroller assignmentinfoentry,presstheNewsoftbutton(youwillbepromptedforaMIDIcontroller number.)Tocreateanewcontrollerassignmentinfoentrywiththesametextasthecurrentinfo entry,presstheDupsoftbutton(youwillbepromptedforanewMIDIcontrollernumber,only oneinfoentrycanbemadeforeachMIDICCnumber.)Todeletethecurrentcontroller assignmentinfoentry,presstheDeletesoftbutton(youwillbepromptedtoconfirmorcancel.) ToreturntotheprogrameditorpresstheDonesoftbuttonortheExitbutton.See Export on page 1111fordetailsonexportingprograminfo. Automatic Info Creation WhenassigningacontrollertoaparameteronanyoftheProgramEditorpages,anInfotext entryisautomaticallycreated.AniappearsonthetoplineofthepagetoindicatethatInfotext hasbeencreated.IfyoureturnthecontrollerassignmenttoOFF,theidisappears,indicating thattheInfotexthasbeenremoved(unlessyouhavegonetotheINFOpage,seenotebelow.) TheautomaticallycreatedinfowillusetheparameternamefortheInfotext.TorenametheInfo text,presstheEditbuttonwhilethecontrollerassignmentfieldisstillselected.Thiswillbring youtotheInfoEditorpage(seeabove)andtheInfoentryfortheassignedcontroller.Fromthe InfoEditorpage,presstheExitbuttontoreturntothepagewhereyoumadethecontroller assignment. Note:Afterassigningacontrollertoparameter,ifyougototheINFOpage,theInfotext entriesforeachcontrollerassignmentwillremainsetunlessyouremovethemwiththe DeletesoftbuttonontheINFOpage.Ifyouchangethecontrollerassignmentforaparameter aftergoingtotheINFOpage,theparameterslastInfotextentrywillremaininadditionto thenewerInfotextentryautomaticallymadeforthecontrollerassignment.Thisisdoneato ensurethatuserrenamedInfotextdoesnotgetdeletedifacontrollerassignmentwas accidentallychangedwhileeditingtheprogram.ToremoveanunusedInfotextentry,locate theentryontheINFOpageandusetheDeletesoftbutton.

6-51

Program Mode The Program Editor

Function Soft Buttons

Thissectiondescribesthesoftbuttonsthatperformspecificfunctions,asopposedtoselecting programmingpages.Thedescriptionsbelowarearrangedintheorderinwhichyouwouldsee thesoftbuttonsifyoupressedthemore>buttonrepeatedly.Youcanalwaysgettothesebuttons, regardlessofwhichpageiscurrentlyselected. New Layer (NewLyr) Createanewlayer,numberedoneabovethehighestexistinglayer.Thenewlayersparameters arethoseofthesinglelayerinProgram999,calledDefaultProgram.Whenyoupressthis button,thePC3LEwilltellyouthatitiscreatinganewlayer,thenwillreturntothepageyou wereon.Thenewlayerbecomesthecurrentlayer,andisthehighestnumberedlayerinthe program.Ifthecurrentprogramalreadyhasitsmaximumnumberoflayers,thePC3LEwilltell youthatyoucantaddanymore. Program999makesagoodtemplateforprogramsthatyoubuildfromthealgorithmup.You mightwanttoeditProgram999toadjustoneormoreparameterstovaluesyouwanttousein yourtemplateprogram.Ifyoulikethesettingsofthedefaultlayerastheyare,however, remembernottomakeanypermanentchangestoProgram999. Duplicate Layer (DupLyr) Createacopyofthecurrentlayer,duplicatingthesettingsofallitsparameters.Thecopy becomesthecurrentlayer,andisthehighestnumberedlayerintheprogram. Import Layer (ImpLyr) Copyaspecificlayerfromanotherprogramintothecurrentprogram.Thisbuttonbringsupa dialogthatpromptsyoutoselectalayernumberandaprogramnumber.Thedialogtellsyou thecurrentlyselectedlayer,andthetotalnumberoflayersintheprogram.UsetheLayeror Layer+softbuttons(orthealphawheel)tochangethelayernumber.Ifthecurrentprogramhas onlyonelayer,pressingthesebuttonswillhavenoeffect.UseProgorProg+softbuttons(orthe alphawheel)tochangetheprogramnumber. Whileyouareinthisdialog,youcanlistentothelayeryouareselectingtoimport,alongwithall otherlayersinthecurrentprogram.Ifyouwanttohearthelayertobeimportedbyitself,you mustmutetheotherlayers. Whenyouhaveselectedthedesiredlayerfromthedesiredprogram,presstheImportsoft button,andtheselectedlayerwillbecopiedfromtheselectedprogram,becomingthecurrent layer.Importinglayersisaconvenientalternativetocreatinglayersfromscratch.Ifyouhavea favoritestringsound,forexample,andyouwanttouseitinotherprograms,justimportits layer(s)intotheprogramyourebuilding.Thiswillpreservetheenvelopesandallthecontrol settingssoyoudonthavetoreprogramthem. Delete Layer (DelLyr) Deletethecurrentlayer.Whenyoupressthisbutton,thePC3LEasksyouifyouwanttodelete thelayer;presstheYessoftbuttontostartthedeletionprocess,ortheNosoftbuttontocancelit. Thispromptpreventsyoufromaccidentallydeletingalayer.

6-52

Program Mode The Program Editor

Editing VAST Programs With KVA Oscillators

ThePC3LEusesKVAoscillatorsasanotherwaytogeneratesoundsinVASTprograms.Unlike keymaps,whichplaysamplesstoredinROM,KVAoscillatorscreateDSPgeneratedwaveforms everytimetheyaretriggered.TheKVAoscillatorscancreatearangeofwaveforms,fromhigh qualitysimplewaveformsfamiliartousersofclassicanalogsynths,tocomplexwaveforms whichtakeadvantageofthePC3LEsinternalprocessingpowerandcomplexsignalrouting capabilities.ThoughthePC3LEdoeshavekeymapscontainingsamplesofbasicsynth waveforms,theuseofKVAoscillatorsprovidesuserswithbetterportamento,moremodulation options,highersoundquality,andotheradvantageswhichwillbeexplainedinthissection. LearningtouseKVAoscillatorsinsteadofkeymaps(whereappropriate)issimpleandwill increasetheversatilityofyourVASTeditingcapabilities.VASTprogramsusinglayerswithKVA oscillatorscanalsobecombinedwithotherlayersusingkeymaps. Basic Use of KVA Oscillators TounderstandthebasicminimalsetupofaKVAbasedprogram,selecttheprogram1019 VA1NakedPWMPoly,presstheEditbutton,thenpresstheV.A.S.T.softbuttontoenterthe V.A.S.T.ProgramEditor.IfyouarefamiliarwitheditingVASTprograms,thefirstthingyoumay noticeisthatontheKEYMAPpage,Keymapissetto999Silence(MoreonthisinAdvancedUse OfKVAOscillators on page 655.)Next,lookattheAMPENVpage.TheAMPENVmodeissetto User,whichgivesyoucontrolovertheamplitudeenvelope(moreonusingNaturalmodelater.) Finally,lookattheALGpage.Inthecurrentalgorithmthe3blockKVAoscillatorPWMhasbeen selected,whichgeneratesthesoundforthislayeroftheprogram. Minimal Settings for Basic Use of KVA Oscillators: ThepatchdescribedabovecontainstheminimalsettingsthataKVAlayerneedsinorderto functioninthestyleofaclassicanalogsynth.Theseminimalsettingsare: 1.EditProg:KEYMAPPage:SettheKeymapparameterto999Silence. 2.EditProg:AMPENVPage:SettheEnvelopemodetoUser,andadjusttheamplitudeenvelope toyourliking(seeTheAmplitudeEnvelope(AMPENV)Page on page 646.). 3.EditProg:ALGPage:PickanAlgorithmandsetanOscillator(seeSettingKVAOscillatorType below.) FurtherbasicVASTsettingsthatyouwilllikelywanttoadjustare: MonophonicOn/Off(seeTheCOMMONPage on page 639.) LevelVelocityTracking(seeTheDSPControl(DSPCTL)Page on page 633.)

ReadtheSettingKVAOscillatorTypesectionbelowtolearnabouthowseteachtypeofoscillator. Afterdoingthis,youcanexperimentwithmakingKVAprogramsbyfollowingtheabove settings,andthensettingandlisteningtoeachtypeofoscillator.Onceyouunderstandhowto dothis,readontotheAdvancedUseOfKVAOscillators section on page 655(seebelow)tolearn howtomakeyourKVApatchesmoreexpressivethroughtheuseofDSPmodulation. Pitch Settings for KVA Oscillators Eachoscillator(exceptfornoisefunctions)hasitsownpitchparameters,andisunaffectedby pitchsettingsthatwouldnormallyaffectkeymaps(suchasthoseontheKeymappage.)Ona programlayer,thecoarsepitchparameterfortheoscillatorinusecanbefoundonboththe DSPCTLandDSPMODpages,intheparameterslistbelowthestandardPitchparameterfor

6-53

Program Mode The Program Editor

keymaps.Foreachoscillator,itscoarsepitchparameterisnamedbyanabbreviationofthe oscillatornamefollowedbyPch.Forexample,thecoarsepitchparameterforasawwave oscillatorwillbecalledSawPch.OntheDSPCTLsubpageforanyoscillatorPch.parameter, youcanadjustfinepitchbycentsandHertz,aswellasKeyTrkandVelTrksettingsforpitch. Note:Besuretodifferentiatebetweenthedifferentpitchparameters,eachusedeitheronlyforkeymapsor onlyforKVAoscillators.ThePitchparameteronthetopleftoftheDSPCTLandDSPMODpagesalways appearsinVASTprogramsbutonlyaffectsthepitchofkeymaps.IfaKVAoscillatorisbeingused,this Pitchparameterwillhavenoaffectonthelayerspitch,inwhichcasetheoscillatorPch.parameter describedabovemustbeusedtocontrolthepitchoftheoscillator. Setting KVA Oscillator Type ThePC3LEcomeswith22differentKVAoscillators.Thereare11highqualityantialiased oscillators(freeofdigitalartifacts,)and11oscillatorsthatexhibitsomealiasing(digitalartifacts) inthehigheroctaves.TheantialiasedoscillatorsuseupmoreDSPresourcesthantheoneswith aliasing,buttheimprovementinsoundqualityisquitenoticeable.Westronglyrecommend usingtheantialiasedoscillatorsformostapplications. ThetablesbelowlistKVAoscillatorsbytypeandfunctionblocksize.Beforesettinganoscillator, youmustchooseanalgorithmwhichincludesablockthatmatchestheblocksizeforthe oscillatorthatyouwishtouse.SeeTheAlgorithm(ALG)Page on page 627andAlgorithm Basics on page 628formoreonselectingalgorithms.Onceyouhavepickedanalgorithmwith thedesiredblocksize,highlighttheblockandusethealphawheeltoscrollthroughthe availablefunctionsuntilyoufindthedesiredoscillator. TheSYNCSQUAREoscillatorisan8blockoscillatorthatrequirestheuseoftwolayers(4 blockseach)andtheAltInputfeatureofcascademode.Seebelowfordetailsonsettingupthe SyncSquareoscillator. Note:Ifyouputmorethanoneoscillatorinanalgorithm,youwillonlyheartheoutputofthelast oscillatorinthealgorithm,unlessanalgorithmisusedtoroutetheearlieroscillatoraroundthelast oscillatorandintoaMIXfunctionblock,orifthelastoscillatorprocessesitsaudioinput. Anti-Aliased Oscillators Size
1 Block 2 Blocks SINE SINE+ SAW RES NOISE (noise + low pass filter with resonance) SQUARE 3 Blocks 4 Blocks PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) SYNC SAW SUPER SAW TRIPLE SAW 8 Blocks SYNC SQUARE (master) >>, >>SYNC SQUARE (slave) (4 blocks each) 2 Blocks

Aliased Oscillators Size

1 Block SINE SAW TRI SQUARE NOISE SINE+ SAW+ NOISE+ SW+SHP (Sawtooth + Shaper) SHAPED SAW PWM (Pulse Width Modulation)

Name/Type
LPNOIZ (noise + low pass filter)

Name/Type

6-54

Program Mode The Program Editor Setting Up The Sync Square Oscillator:

TheSyncSquareoscillatorisactuallycomprisedoftwooscillators,amasterandaslave,setup toemulatethewaysyncsquareoscillatorsworkedonclassicanalogsynthesizers.Tocreatea programusingSyncSquare,selectDefaultProgram,#999.Selectnoneonthekeymappage. SelectuserontheAmpenvpageforanampenvelope.OntheALGpage,selectAlgorithm5at thetopofthepage.Usethecursorbuttonstoselectthefunctionblockandusethealphawheel toselecttheSYNCSQUARE(master)>>function.Next,pressthe<<softbuttontochangesoft buttonpagesuntilyouseeDupLyr.PressDupLyrtoduplicatethelayer,creatinglayer2.In layer2,ontheALGpage,changethefunctionblockto>>SYNCSQUARE(slave),andsetthe AltInputparametertoLayer1.ThefinalstepistogotoLayer1sDSPCTLpageandturnthe Levelparameterallthewaydown,to96dB(thisensuresthatyouwillonlyheartheoutputof theslaveoscillatoronlayer2,whichistheintendedfunctionofSyncSquare.) NowtheSyncSquareoscillatorshouldbeworking.TheSyncoffparameter,SyncOffset,isthe mainparameterforshapingthetoneofthissound.Syncoffsetsthesyncoffsetbetweenthe masterandslavesquarewavesineachcorrespondingoscillator,whichchangestheshapeofthe waveformoutputbytheslaveoscillator.TheSyncSquareoscillatorismostexpressivewhenthe Syncoffparametermodulatedduringperformance.UsetheDSPMODpagetoassignan envelopeorcontinuouscontrollerliketheModWheelforthisparametertoheartheeffect(see TheDSPModulation(DSPMOD)Page on page 635,aswellasTheDSPControl(DSPCTL) Page on page 633andCommonDSPControlParametersinAlgorithmBasics on page 628,for detailsonsettingupmodulationandotherwaystocontrolparameters,andseeTheEnvelope2 (ENV2)andEnvelope3(ENV3)Pages on page 648fordetailsonusingenvelopesasmodulation sources.)SeeAdvancedUseOfKVAOscillatorsbelowforsomesimilarexamplesofhowtosetand controlmodulationforoscillatorspecificfunctionsandotherparameters. ToaddaDSPfunctiontotheSyncSquareoscillator,youllneedtousecascademode.For example,toaddafilter,duplicateoneofthelayerstocreatelayer3.Onlayer3,selecttheALG pageandchooseoneofthecascademodealgorithms,algorithms101131.Forthisexample,lets usealg105withthefilter4PoleMogueLPselectedforthefunctionblock.FortheAltInput parameter,selectLayer2.ThisroutesapreLevelparametercopyofLayer2soutputintoLayer 3.Gotolayer2sDSPCTLpageandturnitsleveldownto96dB(otherwisetheunfiltered soundfromlayer2willbeaudibleaswellasthefilteredsoundinlayer3.)Nowyoucanhearthe SyncSquarefromlayers1and2runningthroughthefilterinlayer3.SeeAdvancedUseOfKVA Oscillatorsbelowforexamplesofhowtosetandcontrolmodulationoffilterparameters. Advanced Use Of KVA Oscillators ReadtheKVAsectionsabovebeforemovingontothissection. IfyouhavetriedtheprogramdescribedaboveinBasicUseofKVAOscillators,youmayhave noticedthatthereisnovariationinthenotesplayedasidefrompitch.Layersandprograms createdwithKVAoscillatorscanbecomemuchmoreexpressivebyintroducingvariationwith DSPmodulation.ForaKVAoscillatorlayer,youcanuseDSPmodulationjustasyouwouldfor keymaplayers(seeCommonDSPControlParametersinAlgorithmBasics on page 628,TheDSP Control(DSPCTL)Page on page 633,andTheDSPModulation(DSPMOD)Page on page 635.) SeveralKVAoscillatorsalsohavetheirownmodulationparametersthatmustbeaccessedto controltheoscillatorsintendedfunction.Asidefromthesemethods,KVAlayerscanalsobe alteredbyusingkeymapswithnaturalamplitudeenvelopes.Seebelowfordetailsoneach method.
Examples of Simple DSP Control and Modulation:

Selecttheprogram1019VA1NakedPWMPoly,presstheEditbutton,thenpresstheV.A.S.T.soft buttontoentertheV.A.S.T.ProgramEditor.PresstheALGsoftbuttontoviewthealgorithmand functionblocksinuse.The3blockPWMoscillatorthatyouseeisgeneratingthesoundinthis program.SelecttheemptyfunctionblocktotherightofthePWMblock,andusethealpha wheeltoscrolltotheLOPASSfunction.Youshouldimmediatelyhearadifferenceinthesound

6-55

Program Mode The Program Editor

oftheprogram,becausetheLOPASSfunctionissetbydefaulttocutsomeofthehigh frequenciesfromanysignalthatpassesthroughit,inthiscasethePWMsignalispassing through.WiththeLOPASSfunctionstillselected,presstheEditbutton.Thisbringsyoutothe mainparameterfortheLOPASSobjectontheDSPCTLpage,whichisLPFrq(youcanalsoreach thispageusingtheDSPCTLsoftbutton.)Hereyoucanadjusttheinitialvalueofthefunction,in thiscaseitiscutofffrequencyforthelowpassfilter.Forthisexample,leavethisinitialvalueset toitsdefault.WiththeLPFrqparameterselected,pressrightonthecursorbuttontogettothis functionssubpage(therighthalfofthedisplay.)SelecttheVeltrkparameterandusethealpha wheeloralphanumericpadtoturnitallthewayupto10800ct.Nowkeyboardvelocitieswill affecttheLPFrqparameter.Avelocityof127willcausethefilterscutofffrequencytomoveup 10800centsfromitsinitialvalue,avelocityof0willhavenoeffectonthecutofffrequency,and valuesinbetweenwillincreasethecutofffrequencybyascalingbetween0and10800cents. Overall,thiswillcausehigherplayedvelocitiestoincreasethecutofffrequency,makingthe oscillatorsoundbrighter,andlowervelocitiestolowerthecutofffrequency,makingthe oscillatorsoundduller.ThismethodcanbeusedtocontrolanyDSPfunctionthatisloadedinto analgorithm.SeeCommonDSPControlParametersinAlgorithmBasics on page 628forother controlparametersavailableontheDSPCTLpage. Alternatively,youcouldassigncutofffrequencytobecontrolledbyanycontinuouscontroller, suchastheModWheel.Startagainwiththeuneditedpatch1019VA1NakedPWMPoly.Follow thesamestepsasabove,butinsteadofchanginganyparametersontheDSPCTLpage,pressthe DSPMODsoftbuttontoreachtheDSPModulationpage.Ontheleftsideofthescreen,choose theparameterforLPFrq,andthenpresstherightcursorbuttontoreachtheLPFrqsubpage. Onthissubpage,youcanassignanycontinuouscontrollertocontrolthecutofffrequencyof theLOPASSfunction(orthemainparameterforanyfunctionloadedinthecurrentalgorithm.) SelecttheSrc1parameter,holdtheEnterbuttonandmovetheModWheeltoquicklyselect MWheel(theModWheel)asyourcontrolsource.Next,pressthecursordownbuttontoselect theDepthparameter,thenusethealphawheeloralphanumericpadtoturnitallthewayupto 10800ct.NowtheModWheelwillaffecttheLPFrqparameter.MovingtheModWheelallthe wayup(avalueof127)willcausethefilterscutofffrequencytomoveup10800centsfromits initialvalue,movingtheModWheelallthewaydown(avalueof0)willhavenoeffectonthe cutofffrequency,andvaluesinbetweenwillincreasethecutofffrequencybyascalingbetween 0and10800cents.Nowyouhavethesamecontrolovercutofffrequencyasyoudidinthe previousexample,butnowitiscontrolledbytheModWheel.Overall,movingtheModWheel upwillincreasethecutofffrequency,makingtheoscillatorsoundbrighter,andmovingthe ModWheeldownwilllowerthecutofffrequency,makingtheoscillatorsoundduller.Thisis usefultocontrolaclassicfiltersweepsound.Theabovemethodcanbeusedtocontrolany DSPfunctionthatisloadedintoanalgorithm,andyoucanchooseanycontinuouscontrolleras acontrolsource. Note:WhenaddingprogramswithcontrollerassignmentstoasetupinSetupmode,yoursetupmust haveitscontrollersassignedtothesamedestinationsthatyouassignedascontrolsourcesinyour program.AneasywaytodothisisbyusingtheControlSetupthatyouusedwhenmakingyourprogram asatemplateforyournewsetup(seeTheControlSetup on page 769.)

6-56

Program Mode The Program Editor Oscillator Specific Control And Modulation Parameters:

SeveralKVAoscillatorsalsohavetheirownmodulationparametersthatmustbeaccessedto controltheoscillatorsintendedfunction.Belowisalistoftheseoscillatorsandtheirdistinctive parameters,groupedbyblocksize.Thoughthefollowingparameterscouldbeleftatone setting,utilizingoneoftheDSPCTLorDSPMODtechniquesdescribedintheaboveexamples willexposeawiderrangeofexpressionfromeachoscillator. 1 Block: LPNOIZ Anoisegeneratorcombinedwithalowpassfilter.UsetheNoizFrqparametertocontrolthecut offfrequencyofthefilter. NOISE Asimplenoisegenerator.UsetheNoiseparametertocontrolthenoiseinitialamplitude. SW+SHP(Sawtooth+Shaper) ThisoscillatoriscapableofbasicFMSynthesis.ItsdistinctiveparameterisPchCoar.This oscillatormustcomeafterthesoundsourceinanalgorithm(eitherkeymaporoscillator)in ordertoheartheeffectofPchCoar,whichcanradicallychangewhatevertheoscillatorreceives asaninput.WorkswellplacedafteraSinesource. SINE+[Aliased(notrecommended)] Sameas2blockversion,butwithouttheSine+Amparameter. SAW+[Aliased(notrecommended)] Asawoscillatorthatcanaddaninputsignaltoitsoutput. NOISE+[Aliased(notrecommended)] Anoiseoscillatorthatcanaddaninputsignaltoitsoutput. 2 Block: SINE+ Asineoscillatorthatcanaddaninputsignaltoitsoutput.TheSin+PchandSine+Am parametersaffectthepitchandamplitudeofthesinewaveformwithoutaffectingthepitchof theinputsource. RESNOISE Anoisegeneratorcombinedwithalowpassfilterwithresonancecontrol.UsetheNoizFrq parametertocontrolthecutofffrequencyofthefilter.UsetheNoizQparametertocontrolthe amplitudeoftheresonance(aboostorcutatthecutofffrequency.)Onetechniqueforuseofthis functionistosetahighvalueforNoizQ(sothatyouhearatheresonancecreateatone,)and thenontheDSPCTLpagesetC4asaninitialfrequencyforNoizFrq,andsetKeytrkto100ct/key ontheNoizFrqsubpage.Doingthiscausesthenoiseresonancefrequencytomatchthenoteof thekeyplayed. SHAPEDSAW TheShapedSawoscillatorisasawtoothoscillatorwiththeabilitytomorphitsoutputshape betweensawtoothandsinewave(withoutcrossfading.)Thisoscillatorsdistinctiveparameteris Shape,whichcontrolsthemorphing.WithShapesetto0,theoscillatorproducesapure sawtoothwave.WithShapesetto127,theoscillatorproducesapuresinewave.Valuesin betweenmorphbetweenthetwowaveshapes. PWM(PulseWidthModulation)[Aliased(notrecommended)] ThisoscillatorsdistinctiveparameterisPWMWid,whichadjustspulsewidthfromvaluesof1 99.WithPWMWidsettoavalueof50,PWMproducesasquarewave.ThefurtherthePWM Widparameterissetfrom50,thenarrowerthepulsewidthbecomes,changingtheshapeofthe outputwaveformandthusalteringtheoscillatorstonalquality.

6-57

Program Mode The Program Editor

3 Block: PWM(PulseWidthModulation)[AntiAliased(recommended)] Sameas2BlockPWM,Seeabove. 4 Block: SYNCSAW SyncSawconsistsoftwosawwaves,onethatyouhear(theslave)andonethatcontrolstheslave (themaster.)ThisoscillatorsdistinctiveparameterisSyncOff,whichcontrolstheoffsetofthe slaveandmasterwaves.WithSyncOffsetto0,themasterhasnoeffectontheslave.Whenan offsetisset,theslaverestartsitswavecycleeverytimethemasterwavecompletesacycle. Offsetscausetheslavetorestartitscycleinthemiddleofnormalsawtoothcycles,whichcauses theslaveswaveformshapeandsoundtobealtered. SUPERSAW TheSuperSawoscillatorconsistsoftwosawwaves.Thisoscillatorsdistinctiveparameteris Detune,whichhassettingsfrom050cents,allowingyoutodetunebothofthesawwavesbyup to50centsawayfromtherootpitchofthekeyplayed.Detuneaffectsbothsawwaves,oneis detunedabovetheoriginalrootpitch,andtheotherisdetunedbelowtheoriginalrootpitch. TRIPLESAW TheTripleSawoscillatorconsistsofthreesawwaves.Thisoscillatorsdistinctiveparameteris Detune,whichhassettingsfrom050cents,allowingyoutodetunetwoofthesawwavesbyup to50centsawayfromtherootpitchofthekeyplayed.Detuneaffectstwoofthesawwaves,one isdetunedabovetheoriginalrootpitch,andtheotherisdetunedbelowtheoriginalrootpitch. ThethirdsawwavealwaysplaystherootpitchandisnotaffectedbyDetune. 8 Block: SYNCSQUARE(master)>>,>>SYNCSQUARE(slave) Seeabove,SettingUpTheSyncSquareOscillator: on page 655.
Use Of Keymaps and Natural Amplitude Envelopes With KVA Oscillators:

KeymapsareimportantinlayersusingKVAoscillators,eventhoughtheirsamplesarenot usuallyheardintheselayers(seethenotebelowforexceptions.)Keymapselectionisimportant becausethemaximumamplitudesetforeachkeyinthekeymapisappliedtotheoscillator.For mostusesofKVAoscillators,userswillwanttousethe999Silencekeymapbecauseeachkeyin thekeymapissettothesamemaximumamplitude,unlikemanyinstrumentkeymaps.The999 Silencekeymapensuresuniformamplitudebehaviorofanoscillator,andwiththeamplitude envelopesettousermode,userscaneasilyshapeallaspectsofanoscillatorsamplitude.The PC3LEalsohastheabilitytoapplynaturalamplitudeenvelopestooscillators.Withan amplitudeenvelopesettonaturalmode,eachoscillatornotetakesontheamplitudequalitiesof eachsampleinakeymap(witheachnoterelativetosamplekeyplacement.)Eachsampleina keymaphasanaturalenvelopethatwascreatedduringitsoriginaldevelopmentprocess. Naturalenvelopeshavemuchmoredetailthanwhatispossibletocreatewiththeuser amplitudeenvelope,andtheyareusefulwhentryingtomimicspecificinstrumentamplitude envelopes.Whenusingthistechnique,rememberthatthemaximumamplitudeofeachkeyis setbythecurrentkeymap.Youcanstillcontroltheoverallparametersofanaturalenvelopeby usingtheENVCTLpage.Seetheprograms213Perc>Morph>Bass&315ElectroPercSynthfor examplesofKVAlayersthatusethistechnique.Eachprogramusespercussionkeymapswith naturalenvelopestoproduceafast,percussiveattack.AlsonotethatwhenusingaKVA oscillatorandakeymapotherthan999Silence,thelayerwillusethenameofthekeymapinthe infoboxonthemainProgrampage,eventhoughitisnotthetruesoundsourceofthelayer. Note:Thesamplesfromakeymaparenotheardwhenusinganoscillator,unlessanalgorithmisusedto routethekeymapsignalaroundtheoscillatorandintoaMIXfunctionblock,orunlessitisanoscillator thatprocessesitsaudioinput.

6-58

Program Mode The Program Editor

Editing KB3 Programs

YoucaneditawideassortmentofanyKB3programsparameters.Youcanalsocreateyourown KB3programs,thoughyoumuststartwithanexistingKB3programtodothis.AregularPC3LE programcannotbeturnedintoaKB3program.Ifyourenotsurewhetherthecurrentprogram isaKB3program,checktheKB3light(locatedaboveknobs).IftheblueKB3LEDison,thenthe currentprogramisaKB3program. EntertheKB3programeditorbypressingtheEditbuttonwhileaKB3programisselectedin programmode,thenpresstheV.A.S.T.softbuttontoentertheKB3editor.Youllquicklyseethat theKB3editordiffersfromthestandardVASTprogrameditor.

KB3 Editor: The Tone Wheels (TONEWL) Page

KB3ModeusesDSPgeneratedwaveformsforthelowerhalfofitstonewheelsandsamplesfor theupperhalfofitstonewheels.UsingtheparametersontheTONEWLpage,youcanspecify whichsampleyouwishtouse,thenumberoftonewheels(whichwillaffecthowmanyother voicesareavailabletoyou),andotherrelatedsettings.

Parameter Upper Tone Wheel Keymap Upper Volume Adjust Number of Tone Wheels Organ Map Wheel Volume Map Globals Lower Transposition Upper Transposition

Range of Values Sample List -96 to 96 dB 24 to 91 Equal, Pecks, Bobs, Erics Equal, Bright, Mellow, Junky On, Off -120 to 127 semitones -168 to 87 semitones

Upper Tone Wheel Keymap Usethisparametertoindicatethekeymap(andtherebythesamples)tousefortheuppertone wheels.YoucanuseanykeymapfromROM,thoughyoumustspecifyakeymapthatuses loopedsamplesforKB3Modetoworkcorrectly.WheninProgrammode,thekeymapassigned totheprogramappearsintheinfobox. Upper Volume Adjust Sincesamplevolumescanvary,whilethevolumeofDSPgeneratedwaveformswillremain consistent,youmayfinditnecessarytoadjustthelevelofthesamplebasedtonewheels.This parameterletsyouadjusttheamplitudeoftheupper(samplebased)tonewheelsrelativeto amplitudeofthewaveformgeneratedtonewheels.

6-59

Program Mode The Program Editor

Number of Tone Wheels ThisparameterletsyouspecifythenumberoftonewheelsusedbyaKB3program.Theclassic tonewheelorgansused91tonewheels,thoughthelowest12wereforthepedalsonly. Therefore,youmayfind79agoodnumberoftonewheelstospecifyforrealisticorgan emulations.Thiswouldleaveyou88voicesforotherprograms.Youcanspecifyupto91tone wheels.ThenumberofPC3LEvoicesusedbyaKB3programis(numberoftonewheels+1)/2, roundedtothenexthighestwholenumberiftheresultisafraction.So,forexample,with79 tonewheelsspecifiedyouwoulduse40voices.Keepinmindthatthesevoicesarepermanently allocatedandrunningwhiletheKB3programisselected,andcannotbestolen.Theadditional voiceusedbyKB3programsisforkeyclick. Organ Map Theorganmapcontrolstherelativeamplitudeofeachkey,perdrawbar.Likethewheelvolume maps,thesemapsarebasedonmeasurementswevemadeonactualorgans.Equalusesthe samevolumeforeachkeyanddrawbar,andisnotbasedonarealB3.Pecksisagoodnormal map,fromaB3ingoodcondition.Ericsisabitmoreidealized;itssmoothedout,butless realistic.Bobsismoreuneven,basedonanoldB3. Wheel Volume Map Thewheelvolumemapdeterminesthevolumelevelforeachtonewheel.Weveprovided severaltonewheelvolumemapshere,basedonmeasurementswevetakenondifferentorgans. Equalisamapwithalltonewheelsatthesamevolume.ItsnotbasedonarealB3.Brightisa goodnormalmap,basedonaB3ingoodcondition.JunkyisbasedonaB3withanuneven, rolledoffresponse.MellowissomewherebetweenBrightandJunky. YoucanalsoapplyEQtocontrolwheelvolumesbasedonthefrequenciesofeachtonewheel. SeeKB3Editor:TheEQPage on page 669. Globals Thisisanothertoggle,whichaffectsLFO2,ASR2,FUNs2and4.Whenoff,thesethreecontrol sourcesarelocal;theyaffecteachindividualnoteinthelayersthatusethemasacontrolsource. Theybeginoperatingeachtimeanoteinthatlayeristriggered. WhentheGlobalsparameterissettoOn,thesecontrolsourcesbecomeglobal,thatistheyaffect everynoteineverylayerofthecurrentprogram,notjusttheonetowhichtheyreapplied.When thesecontrolsourcesareglobal,theybeginoperatingassoonastheprogramisselected.When Globalsareon,LFO2,ASR2,andFUNs2and4willappearontheirrespectivepagespreceded bytheletterGtoindicatethattheyreglobal.Youlluseglobalcontrolsourceswhenyouwantto affecteachnoteinagivenlayeruniformly,andlocalcontrolsourceswhenyouwanttoaffect eachlayersnoteindependently. Lower Transpose / Upper Transpose Thesetwoparametersletyoutransposetheupperand/orlowertonewheelsinsemitonesteps awayfromtheirdefaulttunings.

6-60

Program Mode The Program Editor

KB3 Editor: The Drawbars (DRAWBR) Page

PresstheDrawbrsoftbuttontoviewtheDRAWBRPage.ThispageletsyoueditKB3s drawbars.

Mode WhenyousetModetoPreset,thepresetdrawbarsettingsonthispagewillbeinstalledat programselection.Thedrawbarvalueswillimmediatelychange,however,assoonasyoumove thecorrespondingdrawbar.SetModetoLiveifyouwantthedrawbarvolumesettingsat programselectiontobedeterminedbythepositionsofthedrawbarcontrollers(knobs).With eithersetting,anyengagementsofthedrawbarcontrollerssubsequenttoprogramselectionwill affectdrawbarvolumes. Steps Thisparameterletsyouspecifytheincrementsbywhichdrawbarvolumeswillchange.Choose either08,toapproximatethedrawbarsettingsonactualorgans,orchoose0127forafiner degreeofresolution. Volume ThisparameterappearsonlyifyouvesetMode(seeabove)toPreset.UsetheVolume parametertosetthepresetvolumeofeachoftheninedrawbars.Theavailablevalueswillbe 08or0127,dependingonthesettingoftheStepsparameter.SeeTable 63 on page 68for detailsontheMIDICCnumbersandvaluesthateachdrawbarsendsandreceives. Tune Thisparameterletsyoutuneeachoftheninedrawbarsupordowninsemitonesteps.The valuesfortheTuneparameterontheDRAWBRpageshownaboverepresentstandarddrawbar settingsonarealB3,asshowninthetablebelow.
Subharmonics 16' Knob 1 5 /3' Knob 2
1

Fundamental 8' Knob 3

Harmonics 4' Knob 4 2 2/3' Knob 5 2' Knob 6 Row 2 1 3/5' Knob 7 Row 2 1 1/3' Knob 8 Row 2 1' Knob 9 Row 2

Figure 6-1

Standard Drawbar Settings for the Hammond B3

6-61

Program Mode The Program Editor

KB3 Editor: The Set Drawbars (SetDBR) Soft Button

PresstheSetDBRsoftbuttontocapturethecurrentpositionofthedrawbars,andusethose positionsasthepresetdrawbarpositionsontheDRAWBRpage.

KB3 Editor: The PITCH Page

ThePITCHpageparametersforKB3programsismuchlikethePITCHpageparametersfor VASTprograms.TheonlydifferenceisthatforKB3programs,therearenoHz,KeyTrk,or VelTrkparameters.ForafulldescriptionofthePITCHpageparameters,seeCommonDSP ControlParameters on page 629,TheDSPControl(DSPCTL)Page on page 633,andTheDSP Modulation(DSPMOD)Page on page 635.

KB3 Editor: The AMP Page

TheAMPpageparametersforKB3programsismuchliketheAMPpageparametersforVAST programs.TheonlydifferenceisthatforKB3programs,therearenoKeyTrkorVelTrk parameters.ForafulldescriptionoftheAMPpageparameters,seeCommonDSPControl Parameters on page 629,TheDSPControl(DSPCTL)Page on page 633,andTheDSPModulation (DSPMOD)Page on page 635.

6-62

Program Mode The Program Editor

KB3 Editor: The PERC1 Page

Percussionisacharacteristicfeatureoftonewheelorgans.Itsespeciallyusefulwhilesoloing, sincepercussionaddsanextraplink(actuallyanextratoneatadefinedharmonic)tothe attack.YoucanreachthepercussionparametersbypressingthePerc1andPerc2softbuttons.

Parameter Percussion Volume Decay Harmonic Velocity Tracking Low Harmonic High Harmonic Steal Bar

Range of Values Off, On Soft, Loud Slow, Fast Low, High 0 to 100% Drawbar 1 to 9 Drawbar 1 to 9 Drawbar 1 to 9

Percussion Thisiswhereyouturnthepercussioneffectonoroff.Percussioniscreatedbyadecaying envelopeappliedtooneoftheninedrawbars.Thepercussioneffectissingletriggered,which meansthatonceitstriggered,itwonttriggeragainuntilallkeys(orwhateveryoureusingto triggernotes)goup.Soifnokeysaredown,andyouplayachord,percussiongetsappliedtoall notesinthechord(andinfact,toallnotesthataretriggeredduringtheshortdurationofthe percussionenvelope).Oncetheenveloperunsitscourse,anynotesyouplaywhileatleastone keyishelddowngetnopercussion.YoucanturnpercussiononoroffbypressingAssignable Switch6(SW6)(labeledPercussionOn/Off.)AssignableSwitch6alsosendsandrespondsto MIDICC86;values64127=On,values063=Off. Volume Thisparameterswitchesbetweenloudandsoftpercussionsettings.Theactualamplitudeisset onthePERC2page.YoucantogglebetweenloudandsoftbypressingAssignableSwitch7 (SW7)(labeledPercussionLoud/Soft.)AssignableSwitch7alsosendsandrespondstoMIDI CC87;values64127=Loud,values063=Soft. Decay Thisparameterswitchesbetweenfastandslowpercussionsettings.Theactualdecayrateisset onthePERC2page.YoucantogglebetweenslowandfastdecaybypressingAssignableSwitch 8(SW8)(labeledPercussionDecayF/S.)AssignableSwitch8alsosendsandrespondstoMIDI CC88;values64127=Fast,values063=Slow.

6-63

Program Mode The Program Editor

Harmonic Thisparameterswitchesbetweenhighandlowharmonicpercussionsettings.Theactualpitchis controlledbytheLowHarmandHighHarmparameters.Youcantogglebetweenlowandhigh harmonicsbypressingAssignableSwitch9(SW9)(labeledPercussionPitchH/L.)Assignable Switch9alsosendsandrespondstoMIDICC89;values64127=High,values063=Low. VelTrack Hereiswhereyouspecifythedegreetowhichkeyvelocitycontrolspercussionvolume.Avalue ofzerocorrespondstonovelocitytracking,whichislikearealtonewheelorgan.Othervalues addvelocitytracking,sothatincreasedvelocityresultsinlouderpercussion. LowHarm ControlswhichdrawbarisusedasthebasisforthepercussionwhenHarmonicissettoLow.On anactualtonewheelorgan,thisisDrawbar4(2ndharmonic).Theactualpitchobtained dependsonthedrawbartuning. HighHarm ControlswhichdrawbarisusedasthebasisforthepercussionwhenHarmonicissettoHigh. Onanactualtonewheelorgan,thisisDrawbar5(3rdharmonic).Theactualpitchobtained dependsonthedrawbartuning. StealBar Controlswhichdrawbarisdisabledwhenthepercussioneffectisturnedon.Onanunmodified tonewheelorgan,theninthdrawbaristheonedisabled.Anydrawbarcanbeselected.

KB3 Editor: The PERC2 Page

Parameter Group (Available for each combination of the Volume and Decay parameters on the PERC1 page) Percussion Level Decay Time Organ Volume Level

Range of Values 0 to 24.0 dB 0.01 to 5.10 seconds, in 0.02-second increments -12.0 to 12.0 dB

6-64

Program Mode The Program Editor

PercLevel, DecayTime, OrgLevel Withtheseparametersyoucancontroltheamplitudeanddecaytimeofthepercussioneffectfor allcombinationsoftheVolumeandDecayparameters(onthePERC1page).Youcanalsoadjust theleveloftheorganrelativetothepercussion,foraccurateemulationofclassicorgans.

KB3 Editor: The KEYCLK Page

TheKeyClickfeatureaddsadecayingburstofpitchednoisetotheattackofnotes.Unlikethe percussion,thekeyclickismultitriggered,whichmeansthateverynewnotewilltriggerit. Theparametersonthispageprimarilycontrolthedecay,volume,andpitchofthekeyclick.

Parameter Key Click Volume Decay VelTrk Pitch Random Retrig Thresh Note Attack Note Release

Range of Values Off, On -96.0 to 0.0 dB, in 0.5-dB increments 0.005 to 1.280 seconds, in 0.005-second increments 0 to 100% 1 to 120 0 to 100% -96.0 to 0.0 dB, in 0.5-dB increments Normal, Hard, PercHard Normal, Hard

KeyClick ThisiswhereyouturnKeyClickonoroff.WithKeyClicksettoOff,youmaystillhearaclick dependingonyourNoteAttackandNoteReleasesettings(seebelow.)Youcanturnkeyclick onoroffbypressingAssignableSwitch10(SW10)(labeledClickOn/Off.)AssignableSwitch10 alsosendsandrespondstoMIDICC90;values64127=On,values063=Off. Volume Thisparametersetsthelevelofthekeyclick;thenoisedecaysfromthelevelyousethere.This levelisscaledbythedrawbarlevels,aswellastheexpressionpedallevel. Decay Setsthebasicdecaytimeofthenoiseenvelope.Smallervaluesproduceashorterburst.

6-65

Program Mode The Program Editor

VelTrk Controlsthedegreetowhichkeyvelocityaffectsthekeyclickvolume.Avalueofzeromeans thatthekeyvelocityhasnoeffectonthekeyclickvolume(whichislikearealtonewheelorgan). Othervaluesaddvolumeasthevelocityincreases. Pitch Setsthebasicpitchofthekeyclicknoise,relativetothehighesttonewheelspitch.Thepitchis controlledbyasteeplowpassfilterappliedtowhitenoise.Thefilterscutofffrequencyis controlledrelativetokeynumber,higherkeysmovethecutofffrequencyup,lowerkeysmove thecutofffrequencydown. Random Controlsthedegreetowhicharandomamountofamplitudevariationisaddedtothekeyclick. ReTrigThresh Thisparameterletsyousetthevolumelevelbelowwhichkeyclickmustdecaybeforeitwillbe retriggered. Note Attack Controlstheattackcharacteristicofnotes.Normalprovidesasmoothedattack,whileasetting ofHardhasaninstantattackandwillproduceanaudibleclick,inadditiontoanyamountof keyclickspecifiedwiththeotherparametersonthispage(youmightprefernottospecifyany additionalkeyclickwhenyouusethissetting).PercHardsetsahardattacklevelforpercussion only;noteswithoutpercussionuseanormalattack. Note Release Controlsthereleasecharacteristicofnotes.AsettingofNormalhasasmoothedrelease,whilea settingofHardhasaninstantrelease.Hardwillproduceanaudibleclick.

KB3 Editor: The MISC Page

TheMISCpagecontainsanassortmentofcontrolparameters,includingLesliespeedcontrol andvibrato/chorusselection.

Parameter Preamp/Expression Response Leakage

Range of Values Off, On -96.0 to 0.0 dB, in 0.5-dB increments

6-66

Program Mode The Program Editor

Parameter Leak Mode Speed Control Vibrato/Chorus Control Vibrato/Chorus Type Selection Volume Adjust Bend Range Up Bend Range Down Sustain Sostenuto Leslie Pedal

Range of Values None, Type A, Type X, Type Y, Type Z, Type R Slow, Fast Off, On Vib1, Vib2, Vib3, Chor1, Chor2, Chor3 -96 to 96 dB 7200 cents 7200 cents Off, On Off, On None, Sustain, Sost, Soft

PreampResp SetthisparameterOnorOfftoenableordisablethepreamp+expressionpedalpartoftheKB3 model.TurningthisOn(thedefault)makesKB3programsfunctionlikestockorgans.The expressionpedalinthiscaseismorethanavolumepedal;itactuallyfunctionslikealoudness control,varyingthefrequencyresponsetocompensatefortheearssensitivityatdifferent volumes.Inaddition,thepreampprovidesadeemphasiscurvetocompensateforthebuiltin tonewheelvolumepreemphasis.TurningpreampresponseOffemulatesorgansthathave beenmodifiedtohaveadirectout(beforethepreampandexpressionpedal). Leakage Controlsthelevelofthesimulatedcrosstalkandsignalbleedofadjacenttonewheelsinthe model.Thisisprovidedtohelpdirtyupthesoundtomakeitabitmorerealistic.Asettingof 96dBgivesthepuresttones;othervaluesaddmoresimulatedleakage.Thislevelisscaledby thedrawbarlevels,aswellastheexpressionpedallevel.Theleakagelevelcanbecontrolled duringperformancewithknob11(labeledCTL11.)Theleakagelevelcanalsobecontrolledby MIDICC24;value0=96dB,value127=0dB,valuesbetween0and127scalebetween96dB and0dB.WhenusingCC24,thevaluedisplayedfortheLeakage parameterwillnotchange. LeakMode Selectsbetweendifferentleakagemodels,determiningwhichleakageharmonicsare emphasized.TypeAprovidesanoveralltonewheelleakage,withalltonewheelsleakingasmall amount.TypeX,TypeY,TypeZandTypeRemulatedifferentdegreesofdrawbarleakage,where theleakagecomponentscorrespondtotheninedrawbars,insteadofallthetonewheels. SpeedCtl SelecteitherFastorSlowtochoosethespeedoftherotaryspeakeremulation.Youcantoggle betweenfastandslowspeedusingAssignableSwitch1(SW1)(labeledRotarySlow/Fast.) AssignableSwitch1alsosendsandrespondstoMIDICC80;avalueof063=Slow,and64127= Fast. VibChorCtl ChooseOnorOfftoturnonoroffeithervibratoorchorus(asselectedwiththeVibChorSel parameter).YoucantogglebetweenonandoffusingAssignableSwitch3(SW3)(labeled VibratoOn/Off.)AssignableSwitch3alsosendsandrespondstoMIDICC82;avalueof64127 =On,and063=Off.

6-67

Program Mode The Program Editor

VibChorSel Choosethevibratoorchorusprogram(therearethreeofeach)youwishtousewiththisKB3 program.NotethatyoumustsetVibChorCtl(alsoontheMISCpage)toOntoheartheeffect. YoucanselectthevibratoorchorusyouwantusingAssignableSwitches4and5(SW4andSW5) (labeledVibratoChor/VibandVibratoDepth.) AssignableSwitches4and5alsosendandrespondtoMIDICCs.Switch4usesMIDICC83; values063=Vibrato,64127=Chorus.Switch5usesMIDICC85;values042=Depth1,4385 Depth2,86127Depth3. VolAdjust ProvidesanoverallvolumeadjustfortheKB3model.UsethisparametertonormalizeKB3 programswithotherprograms. BendRngUp, BendRngDn RespectivelycontroltheupwardanddownwardpitchbendrangesoftheKB3program. Sustain SetOnorOfftoenableordisableresponsetoMIDIsustain(MIDI64).BydefaultMIDIsustain (MIDI64)issentbySwitchPedal1. Sostenuto SetOnorOfftoenableordisableresponsetoMIDIsostenuto(MIDI66).BydefaultMIDI sostenuto(MIDI66)issentbySwitchPedal2. LesliePedal Setthepedalsource(Sustain=SwitchPedal1,CC64bydefault,Sost=SwitchPedal1,CC66by default)totogglebetweenFastandSlowfortheLesliespeakerrotationspeed.

6-68

Program Mode The Program Editor

KB3 Editor: The EQ Page

Thefourcolumnheadersonthispagerepresenttwoshelvingbandsofequalizationandtwo parametricbands.TheKB3EQofferedhere,though,isnotimplementedasatrueEQsection; instead,itadjuststhevolumeofthetonewheelsbasedonfrequency.Ifthetonewheelsare basedonsinewaves,thenthisactssimilarlytoarealEQ.

Parameter Group (Available for each EQ band) Gain Frequency Width

Range of Values -24.0 to 24.0 dB, in 0.2-dB increments 16 to 25088 Hz, in varying increments -128 to 128 Semitones, in 2-semitone increments

EachEQsectionhasGain(G),Frequency(F),andWidth(W)controls.Frequencycontrolsthe centerfrequencyoftheband.Widthcontrolsthebandwidth.Gaincontrolstheamountofboost orcut.

KB3 Editor: The OUTPUT Page

UsethispagetoroutethecurrentprogramspostFXsignals.ThetwoPanparameters correspondtothoseoftheVASTProgrameditorOUTPUTpage(Seepage 636).TheOutGain andDemoSongparameterscorrespondtothoseoftheVASTProgrameditorCOMMONpage (Seepage 639).

Exp Pedal UsethisparametertosetwhethertherearpanelCCPedalinputwillcontrolvolumeforthe currentKB3program.WithasettingofExpression,volumecanbecontrolledbyaCCpedal pluggedintotherearpanelinputlabeledCCPedal(volume).WithasettingofNone,volume controlfromtheCCpedalinputisdisabled.

6-69

Program Mode The Program Editor

KB3 Editor: The LFO, ASR, and FUN Pages

TherestofthepagesLFO,ASR,andFUNarethesameforKB3programsastheyarefor VASTprograms,sowewontdescribethemagainhere.Beginonpage 642tofinddescriptions ofthesepages.

KB3 Programming Tips

ThissectionprovidessomestartingpointsforcreatingyourownKB3programs.Rememberthat youllhavetostartwithoneoftheexistingKB3programs. Asdescribedbelow,themostprominentdifferencebetweenorganvintagesisthenumberof tonewheelsused.Keepinmind,however,thatthesoundofanactualtonewheelorganwill dependnotonlyonitsage,butalsoonhowwellithasbeenmaintained. Octavefolding,whereanoctave(orpartofanoctave)isrepeatedatthetoporbottomofthe keyboard,ishandledautomaticallybyKB3Mode,emulatingthefoldingdoneonactualtone wheelorgans. EarlyToneWheelOrgans.Instrumentsofthisperiodhad91tonewheels.Togetthissound,go totheTONEWLpage,select91tonewheels,andsetlowestpitchtoC1.StartwiththeJunky WheelVolumeMapandBobsOrganMap.YoumayalsowanttoincreasetheKeyClicklevel, sincethistendstobecomelouderonolderorgans. MiddlePeriodOrgans.Tomodeloneoftheseinstruments,set82tonewheelsandalownoteof A1.UsetheMellowWheelVolumeMapandEricsOrganMap.SetKeyClicktoamoderate level. TheClassicB3.Forthissound,choose79tonewheelsandsetthelownotetobeC2.Thebest settingsherearetheBrightWheelVolumeMapandPecksOrganMap.Youmayalsowantto reducetheKeyClicklevel.

6-70

Setup Mode

Chapter 7 Setup Mode

InSetupmode,thePC3LEcantakeontheidentityof16distinctinstrumentsand16distinct MIDItransmitters,eachofwhichcanusethesetupsphysicalcontrollerassignments(orany subsetofthosecontrollerassignments).Forexample,youcancreateasetupthatissplitinto16 differentkeyboardregions(calledzones).Eachzonecanplayitsownprogram,whilealso transmittingonitsownMIDIchannel.Eachzonecanalsohaveanindependentarpeggiatorand oneriff.YoucanalsorecordtheoutputofasetuptoSongmode. SelectingsetupsinSetupmodeismuchlikeselectingprogramsinProgrammodejustuseone ofthenormaldataentrymethodstoscrollthroughthelistofsetups.Thereare,however,some importantdifferencesbetweenaprogramandasetup.Aprogramplaysonasinglekeyboard zoneandonasingleMIDIchannel.Asetupenablesyoutouseupto16keyboard(orMIDI controller)zones,eachofwhichcanhaveitsownprogram,MIDIchannel,andcontrol assignments.Theparametersyoudefineforeachsetupaffectprogramsonlywhileyouarein Setupmode.Anexceptiontothisisthecontrolsetup,whichwediscussonpage 769. PresstheSetupmodebuttontoenterSetupmode,youllseealistofsetupswiththecurrently selectedsetuphighlightedinthemiddleofthelist.Selectasetupbyscrollingthroughthelist withtheAlphaWheel,cursorbuttons,or/+buttons,orenterasetupsID#withthe alphanumericpadandpresstheEnterbutton.

Whenyoumoveaphysicalcontroller(knob,switch,pad,etc.,)thathasbeenassignedtoa controldestination,theinfoboxonthelefthandsideofthemainSetupmodepagebriefly displaysthecorrespondingProgramandcontrollerassignmentforthelastmovedcontroller (seeControllers(CTRLS)Page on page 710tolearnmore.)PresstheInfosoftbuttontoseealist ofallofthecontrollerassignmentsforallzonesofthecurrentsetup.OntheInfopage,usethe AlphaWheel,cursorbuttons,or/+buttonstoscrollthroughthelist. YoucantransposetheentiresetupupordownbyoctaveswiththetwoOctavsoftbuttons. Whenyoutransposeasetup,thesplitpointsbetweenzonesremaininplace;eachprogramis transposedwithinitsrespectivezone.UsethetwoXposebuttonstotransposethesetupupor downbyhalfsteps. ThePanicsoftbuttonsendsAllNotesOffandResetAllControllersmessagestoallzones,and stopsallarpeggiatorsandriffs. WhenyouselectasetupinSetupmode,thePC3LEsendsanumberofMIDImessages,oneach oftheMIDIchannelsusedbythesetup.Someoftheseinclude:ProgramChangecommands,

7-1

Setup Mode Split/Layer Button

MIDIBankSelectmessages,PanandVolumemessages,andentryvaluesforphysicalcontrollers (entryvaluesarethevaluesthattakeeffectassoonasyouselectthesetup;therearealso controllerexitvalues,whicharethevaluesofthecontrollerswhenyouleavethesetupeither byselectinganothersetuporbyexitingSetupmode).Thevaluesofallthesemessagesdepend ontheparametersyoudefineintheSetupEditorforeachsetup. Inadditiontozonesplittingandlayering,Setupmodeisapowerfulwaytotakeadvantageof thePC3LEsassignableknobs,switches,pads,andothercontrollers.

Split/Layer Button
PresstheSplit/Layerbutton(onthefrontpanel,belowtheModebuttons)toaddasplitorlayer zonetothecurrentlyselectedsetup.YouwillbebroughttotheSplit/Layerpage:

PresstheLoSpltorUpSpltsoftbuttontoaddanewzonetothelowerorupperhalfofthe keyboard,orpresstheLayersoftbuttontoaddalayeredzone.UsingtheSplit/Layerbutton automaticallycreatesandeditsanewsetupforyou,whichisconvenientformakingbasicsplit andlayeredprograms.Formorecomplexsplitsandlayers,itmaybenecessarytousethesetup editor,seeTheSetupEditor on page 75,andChapter 14,Tutorials:SetupModefordetails.

Adding a Split Zone

OntheSplit/Layerpage,presstheLoSpltorUpSpltsoftbuttontoaddanewzonetothelower orupperhalfofthekeyboard,youwillbebroughttotheSplit/Layer:LOWERSPLITor UPPERSPLITpage.Bothpageshavethesameparameterstoset.Playthekeyboardasyouadjust theseparameterstofindtherightsettings.BelowistheSplit/Layer:LOWERSPLITpage:

7-2

Setup Mode Split/Layer Button

Parameters on the Split/Layer: LOWERSPLIT and UPPERSPLIT pages:

Lower Split Program/ Upper Split Program

Usethisfieldtoselectaprogramthatwillbecomethelowerorupperpartofyoursplitsetup. SelectaprogramfromtheprogramlistbyusingtheCategorybuttons,AlphaWheel,/+buttons. YoucanalsoenteraprogramsID#.Todothis,presstheShiftCategorybutton,entertheID# withthealphanumericpad,thenpresstheEnterbutton.

Transpose

UsetheTransposeparametertochangethepitchofthezoneyouarecreating,withoutchanging itspositiononthekeyboard.TransposechangestheMIDInotenumbersgeneratedbythekeys inthezone,withoutphysicallyshiftingthezone.Therangeis128to127semitones.Sincethere are12semitones(orhalfsteps)toanoctave,youcantransposeupordownovertenoctaves.If youtransposeoutoftherangeoftheactivevoice,however,nonoteswillsound,thoughMIDI notenumberswillstilltransmit.

Split High/Split Low

SelectthefieldfortheSplitHigh/SplitLowparameterandchooseyoursplitpointbyholding theEnterbuttononthealphanumericpadandplayingakey.YoucanalsousetheAlphaWheel or/+buttonstoenteranotenameandnumber. IfyouareontheSplit/Layer:LOWERSPLITpage,theSplitKeywillbecomethehighestkeythat playsinthatzone.TheSplitKeyandallbelowitwillplaythenewzoneyouarecreating,butno keysaboveitwilltriggerthiszone. IfyouareontheSplit/Layer:UPPERSPLITpage,theSplitKeywillbecomethelowestkeythat playsinthatzone.TheSplitKeyandallaboveitwillplaythenewzoneyouarecreating,butno keysbelowitwilltriggerthiszone.

Volume

UsetheVolumeparametertosettheMIDIvolumesettingforthenewzoneyouarecreating.A settingof127isthemaximumvolume,andasettingof0istheminimumvolume.
Pan

UsethePanparametertosettheMIDIpansettingforthenewzoneyouarecreating.ThePan parameterscalesthebalanceofvolumebetweenthePC3LEsleftandrightoutputs,inturn scalingthebalanceofvolumebetweenleftandrightspeakersinastereosetup(orheadphones.) AtaPanvalueof64thezoneyouarecreatingwillplayatequalvolumefrombothspeakers, makingthesoundforthatzoneappeartocomefromthecenterofthesoundfield.Values between0and64willincreasinglyturndowntherightspeakerasvaluesapproach0,making thesoundappeartobecomingfromincreasinglyfurthertowardstheleftsideofthesoundfield. APanvalueof0stopssoundfromthezoneyourecreatingfromgoingtotherightspeaker,and onlyoutputssoundfromtheleft.Valuesbetween64and127willincreasinglyturndowntheleft speakerasvaluesapproach0,makingthesoundappeartobecomingfromincreasinglyfurther towardstherightsideofthesoundfield.APanvalueof127stopssoundfromthezoneyoure creatingfromgoingtotheleftspeaker,andonlyoutputssoundfromtheright.

7-3

Setup Mode Tap Tempo Button

Adding a Layer Zone

OntheSplit/Layerpage,presstheLayersoftbuttontoaddanewzonetothecurrentlyselected setup.YouwillbebroughttotheSplit/Layer:LAYERpage(seebelow.)Playthekeyboardasyou adjusttheseparameterstofindtherightsettings.

Parameters on the Split/Layer: LAYER page:

Layer Program

Usethisfieldtoselectaprogramthatwillbecomealayerinyournewsetup.Selectaprogram fromtheprogramlistbyusingtheCategorybuttons,AlphaWheel,/+buttons.Youcanalso enteraprogramsID#.Todothis,presstheShiftCategorybutton,entertheID#withthe alphanumericpad,thenpresstheEnterbutton.

Transpose, Volume, Pan

TheseparametersfunctionthesameforLayerzonesastheydoforSplitzones.Seethe explanationsfortheseparametersintheParametersontheSplit/Layer:LOWERSPLITand UPPERSPLITpages:sectionabove.

LowKey

TheLowKeyparameterspecifiesthelowestkeythatwillplaythenewlayerzoneyouare creating.SelectthefieldfortheLowKeyparameterandchooseyourLowKeybyholdingthe Enterbuttononthealphanumericpadandplayingakey.YoucanalsousetheAlphaWheelor /+buttonstoenteranotenameandnumber.

HighKey

TheHighKeyparameterspecifiesthehighestkeythatwillplaythenewlayerzoneyouare creating.SelectthefieldfortheHighKeyparameterandchooseyourHighKeybyholdingthe Enterbuttononthealphanumericpadandplayingakey.YoucanalsousetheAlphaWheelor /+buttonstoenteranotenameandnumber.

Tap Tempo Button

TaptheTapTempobutton(locatedtotheleftofthedisplay,belowthemodebuttons)tosetthe tempoforthecurrentsetup.Thiscontrolsthetempoofanyarpeggiatorsusedinthecurrent setup,anyriffsthathavetheirBPMparametersettoSetup,anytempobasedeffects,andthe currentlyselectedsonginSongmode.Setupsreverttotheirsavedtempowhenselected(saved setuptempoissetintheSetupEditorwiththeTempoparameteronTheCOMMONPage,see page 763.YoucansetthisparameterusingtheTapTempobutton.)Formoreonoperatingthe TaptempobuttonandtheTapTempopage,seeTapTempoButton on page 64.)

7-4

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

The Setup Editor

FromSetupmode,presstheEditbuttontoentertheSetupEditor,whereyoucanmakechanges tothecurrentlyselectedsetup.UsethesoftbuttonstoselectthevariousSetupEditorpages.The upperlineofeachpagedisplaystheusualmodereminder,aswellasthecurrentSetupEditor page,andthecurrentzone.UsetheChan/Zonebuttonstoselectoneofuptosixteendifferent zones,eachhavingitsownsetofSetupEditorpages. TheparametersontheSetupEditorpagesdefinewhateachofasetupszonessendsbothto internalprogramsandtotheMIDIOutport.TheyalsodeterminehowthePC3LErespondsto MIDIsignalsreceivedfromaMIDIcontrollerconnectedtothePC3LEsMIDIInport(whenthe LocalKeyboardChannelmatchesthetransmitchannelofyourMIDIcontroller). The Control Setup TheSetupstoredatID#126:InternalVoiceshasaspecialfunctioninthePC3LE,andisreferred toastheControlSetup.DontedittheControlSetupunlessyouknowwhatyouredoing,(see TheControlSetup on page 769fordetails.) Compare PressingtheStoragebuttoncallsuptheCompareEditor,whichrecallsthesetuppreedit settings,allowingyoutocompareyoureditedsetupwiththeoriginalsetup.Pressingthe StoragebuttonagainreturnsyoutotheSetupeditor.UsingtheCompareEditormakesno changestothecurrentsetup. FX Bypass PresstheMasterbuttontobypassorenablethesetupsFXwhileediting. Soloing a Zone Tosoloazone,settheStatusparameterontheSetupEditorCH/PROGpage(seebelow)toSolo (orSolo+Muted).WhenazoneissettoSolo(orSolo+Muted,)theChan/Zonebuttonswill scrollthroughthezonesofthecurrentsetup,soloingeachzone.ChangetheStatusparameterof thecurrentzonebacktoActiveinordertostopsoloingzones. Additionally,youcanconfigureasetupsuchthatyoucansolozonesinrealtime(fromoutside oftheeditor)byassigningacontrolleronthedesiredzonetodestination162SoloZn.See Controllers(CTRLS)Page on page 710formoreinformationoncontrollerdestination assignmentsinSetupmode.SeeSetControlsZoneMutes(MUTES) on page 766forawayto automaticallysettheassignableswitchestomutezones. KB3 Programs In Setup Mode InSetupmodetheassignableswitchesmuteandunmutezonesbydefault.Ifyouwantthe assignableswitchestocontrolthefunctionsofaKB3programinasetup,youcaneditthesetup andautomaticallyassigntheKB3controlsusingtheKB3CTLsoftbuttonintheSetupEditor.See SetControlsKB3(KB3CTL) on page 766.

7-5

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

The Channel/Program (CH/PROG) Page

ThisisthefirstpageyouseewhenyouentertheSetupEditor.Here,youcanselectprograms, MIDIchannels,andMIDIBanknumbersforeachofthesetups16zones.Youcanalsosoloor muteeachzone.

Parameter Program Destination Channel MIDI Bank MIDI Program (MidiProg) Status InputChannel MIDI Bank Mode (BankMode) Entry Program Change (EntryProgChg) Arpeggiator

Range of Values Program List Destination List 1 to 16 0 to 127 (Depends on MIDI Bank Mode) Muted, Active, Solo, Solo+Muted None, 1-16 L+M, 1-16 M MIDI Bank Mode List On, Off On, Off

Default 1 Standard Grand USB_MIDI+MIDI+Local Same as Zone # 0 1 Active None Ctl 0/32 On On

Program
Thisselectsaninternalprogramtoplayoneachzone.AsyouchangethevalueofProgram, noticethatMIDIProgramandMIDIBankmatchthelocalprogramandbanknumbers (programs1127fallintoMIDIBank0,128255fallintoMIDIBank1,andsoonbothMIDI BanksandPC3LEbankscanhold128programs).Ifyouwanttotransmitdifferentprogramand banknumbersoverMIDI,highlighteitherMIDIProgramorMIDIBankandselectanewvalue. NotethatchangingtheProgramparameteragainwillresetboththeMIDIProgramandMIDI Bankparameterstomatchthelocalprogramandbanknumbers.YoucanentertheProgram EditorfortheprogramonthecurrentlyselectedzonebyselectingtheProgramfieldand pressingtheEditbuttontotheleftofthedisplay.ExittheProgramEditortoreturntotheSetup Editorofthecurrentsetup.

Destination
ThisparameterdetermineswhetherthecurrentlyselectedzonetransmitsonlytothePC3LE (Local),transmitsonlytotheMIDIport(MIDI),transmitsonlytotheUSBport(USB_MIDI), transmitstoapairofdestinations(MIDI+Local,USB_MIDI+Local,orUSB_MIDI+MIDI),or transmitstoalldestinations(USB_MIDI+MIDI+Local).

7-6

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Channel
TheChannelparameterdefinestheMIDItransmitchannelforthecurrentlyselectedzone.You cansetittoanyofthe16MIDIchannels.Normally,youwillwanteachzoneonaseparateMIDI channel.Thisisnecessaryifyouwanttocombinedifferentprogramsinthesetup. IftwozoneshavethesameMIDIchannel(anddestination),buttheyhavedifferentprogram settings,therewillbeconflicts:noMIDIdevice,includingthePC3LE,canrespondcorrectlyto twodifferentsimultaneousProgramChangecommandsononechannel.Theresultwillbethat onlyoneProgramChangewillberecognized,andeverynoteplayedwillsounddouble(ifNote Mapsareon).Thiscancreateoddandunpredictabletimingeffects,andwillreduceyour polyphonyby50%. Nevertheless,therewillbeoccasionswhenstackingzonesonthesameMIDIchannelmight comeinhandy.SupposeyouwantaphysicalcontrolleronthePC3LEtosenddatafortwo differentnumberedMIDIControllersonthesamechannel.Inthiscase,youmustcreatetwozones assignedtothesamechannel,butwithdifferentcontrollerassignments. Heresoneexample:ifareceivingsynthisusingController1formodulationdepthand Controller#13formodulationspeed,youcanincreaseboththedepthandthespeedwith Knob A.StartbyassigningKnob AinZone1toMWheelandinZone2toMIDI13;thenassign bothzonestothesameMIDIchannel.(Youmaywanttomakesureyouarentsendingdoubled notes.UsetheNoteMapparameterontheKEY/VELpagetosetonezonesNoteMaptoLinear andtheotherzonesNoteMaptoOff.) Anotherexample:createtwoormorezonesthatareidenticalexceptfortheirtransposition settings.Nowyoucanplayparallelintervals(orchords)withsinglekeystrikes.

MidiBank
ThePC3LEsprogramsaredividedinto17MIDIBanks,numbered016.Program46inMIDI Bank3forexample,is430LeadOboe.TheMIDIBankparameterdisplayswhichbankthe currentprogramisassignedto,andautomaticallychangestomatchtheProgramvalueyouset. YoucansendBankSelectmessagestoexternalMIDIdevicesaswell,bysettingtheDestination parametertoadestinationincludingMIDIorUSB_MIDI,thenchangingMidiBank.Some instrumentsmayhavemorebanksthanthePC3LE.BankswitchingviaMIDImakesiteasyfor thePC3LEusertoselectsoundsonexternalinstruments,nomatterhowmanybankstheymight have. WhenyouchangethevalueoftheProgramparameter,thevalueofMidiBankautomatically changescorrespondingly.IfyouwanttotransmitaMIDIBanknumberdifferentfromtheone correspondingtothelocalprogram,selectthelocalprogramfirst,thenchangetheMIDIbank. Ifyouselectanemptybank(likeBank53),thezonewillstillproducesoundonthePC3LE, providedthatDestinationissettoadestinationincludingLocal.TheProgramparameterwill displaywhateverinternalprogramyouset,butthebanknumbertransmittedovertheMIDIOut portwillbedifferentfromtheinternalprogramsbanknumber.

MIDI Program (MidiProg)

MidiProgdefineswhichprogramnumberistransmittedouttheMIDIOutportonthecurrent zonesMIDIchannel. WhenyouchangethevalueoftheProgramparameter,thevalueofMIDIProgautomatically changescorrespondingly.IfyouwanttotransmitaMIDIprogramchangenumberdifferent fromtheonecorrespondingtothelocalprogram,selectthelocalprogramfirst,thenchangethe MIDIprogram.

7-7

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

DifferentprogramsareaccessibledependingonthevalueoftheBankModeparameter: Value of BankMode

Ctl 0 or Ctl 32 Ctl 0/32 K2600 None

Available Programs
0 to 127 0 to 127 0 to 99 None

Status
ThisparameterdetermineswhatthecurrentzonedoeswhenyouselectthesetupinSetup mode.Mutedmeansthatthezonesendsandreceivesprogramchangesandentry/exitcontroller values,butdoesntplaynotes.IfthevalueisActive,thezonesendsandreceivesnormallyvia MIDI.Solocausesonlythecurrentzonetoplay,backgroundingallotherzones (backgroundedzonessendandreceiveprogramchangesandentry/exitcontrollervalues,but dontplaynotes).WithavalueofSolo+Muted,thecurrentzoneisbothsoloedandmuted;when thezoneisntsoloed,itwontproducesound.)SeeSetControlsZoneMutes (MUTES) on page 766forawaytoautomaticallysettheassignableswitchestomutezones.

Input Channel
InSetupmode,anexternalMIDIdevice(suchasakeyboardorsequencer)willplaynotesofa singleprogrambydefault(iftheLocalKeyboardChannelparameterissettooff,seepage 921 fordetails.)TheplayedprogramwillbeonaZonethathasaChannelparameter(ontheCH/ PROGpage)whichmatchesthechannelonwhichtheexternalMIDIdeviceistransmitting.(If noZonesChannelparametermatches,theexternaldevicewillplaynotesofthelastprogramthatwas usingthatchannelinProgramModeorfromapreviouslyloadedSongorSetup.) WhentheProgramofaSetupZoneisplayedfromanexternalMIDIdevice,SetupMIDI parameters(mostnoticeablykeyrangeandtransposition)willnotbeapplied.Ifyouwantthese parametersapplied,settheInputChannelparametertomatchthechannelonwhichthe externalMIDIdeviceistransmitting.SeetheInputChannelSettingssectionbelowfordetailson settinganInputChannel.(ToplaytheentireSetupfromanexternalMIDIdevice,seeLocalKeyboard Channel(LocalKbdCh) on page 921.)WhenLocalKeyboardChannelissettosomethingother thanOff,theInputChannelparameterhasnoeffectandwillappearinparentheses. InputChannelbasicallyhasthesameeffectasLocalKeyboardChannel,exceptyoucanchoose toplayonlyoneorsomeSetupZonesfromanexternaldevice,insteadofallZones.Toplay morethanoneZonefromanexternaldevice,seteachdesiredZonesInputChannelparameter tomatchthechannelonwhichtheexternalMIDIdeviceistransmitting.Itisalsopossibletouse theInputChannelparametertousemultipleexternaldeviceswhicheachplayaspecificZone orZones.FordetailsoncontrollingassignmentsmadetothePC3LEsphysicalcontrollers (sliders,switches,modwheel,etc.)fromanexternalMIDIdevicewhenusinganInputChannel, seeContinuousControllerMessagesFromExternalMIDIDevices on page 922. Input Channel Settings WhensettingaMIDIchannelnumberfortheInputChannelparameter,channel1forexample, youcanchoose1L+Mor1M(scrollpast16L+Mtoseeallthechoices.)Achannelnumberwith asettingofL+MindicatesthatthezonewillbeplayablefromthePC3LEkeyboard(LforLocal) andfromtheexternalMIDIcontroller(MforMIDI.)AchannelnumberwithasettingofM indicatesthatthezonewillbeplayableonlyfromtheexternalMIDIcontroller,andnotfromthe PC3LEkeyboard.YoucanalsochooseAnyL+MorAnyMfortheInputChannelsetting.Any L+MandAnyMwillmakethezonereceiveMIDIonanychannelthatanexternaldeviceis transmitting.ThisisusefulifyouareusingasingleexternalMIDIcontrollerandarenotsure whichchannelitistransmittingon.

7-8

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

MIDI Bank Mode (BankMode)

TheBankModeyouchoosedetermineshowbanknumberswillbesentoverMIDIwhenthe setupisselected,andinwhatformat.ItalsoaffectshowmanyMIDIbanksandprogramsyou canchoose. Nonemeansnobanknumberissent,justtheprogramnumber.Ctl0meansthatthebank numberissentasaMIDIController#0message.Ctl32meansitissentasMIDIController #32. Ctl0/32meansitissentasadualcontroller(twobyte)message,withthemostsignificantbyte (MSB)ofthebanknumbersentasController0andtheleastsignificantbyte(LSB)asController 32.BankSelectmessagesallowyoutospecifybanksnumbered0127. TheMIDISpecificationisalittleambiguouswhenitcomestoBankSelectmessages,asto whethertheyshouldbeonlyController0,onlyController32,orbothControllerssentasapair. Differentmanufacturersdesigntheirinstrumentstorespondtodifferentschemes,andifyou sendBankSelectinaformaninstrumentdoesntlike,itmayignoreitorinterpretitincorrectly. TheBankModeparameterisdesignedtoallowthegreatestflexibilityinaddressingotherMIDI instruments.UsuallyyoucanlookontheMIDIImplementationchartintheusersmanualofan instrumenttodeterminehowitsdesignedtoreceiveBankSelectmessages,andthenset BankModeforeachzonetosuittheinstrumentthatisreceivingdatafromit.Thedefaultsetting, whichworkswiththelargestnumberofotherinstruments,isCtl0/32. ABankModevalueofK2600isintendedforusewiththeKurzweilK2000,K2500,orK2600.The BankSelectmessageissentasController32,withavaluebetween0and127.TheK2000,K2500, andK2600supportonly10banks,with99programsperbank,soProgramChanges100or higheraresentasBankSelect1,followedbythelasttwodigitsasaProgramChange.For example,ifProgram124isassignedtothezone,thiswillbesentouttheMIDIOutportasBank Select(Controller32)1,andthenProgramChange24.

Entry Program Change (EntryProgChg)

Thisparameterenablesordisablesbankandprogramchangecommandssenttointernal programsortotheMIDIOutjackwhenyouselectsetups.IfitssettoOn,theprogramnumbers fortheprogramsinthe16zoneswillbesentviaMIDIwhenasetupisselected.Bysettingthis parametertoOff,youcanselectasetuponthePC3LEwithoutchangingtheinternalprograms orthoseonMIDIdevicesreceivingfromthePC3LE.Thisisusefulifyouwanttosendonly controllerdatatothePC3LEortoMIDIdevices,withoutchangingprogramassignments.

Arpeggiator
TheArpeggiatorparameterdeterminesifthecurrentZonecanbeplayedbyanarpeggiator. Normally,theArpeggiatorparametershouldbesettoOn,andthearpeggiatorforeachZone shouldbeturnedonoroffwiththeActiveparameterontheARPEGGIATORpageforeachZone (seeTheARPEGGIATORPage on page 735fordetails.)IftheArpeggiatorparameterissettoOff, thezonewillnotbearpeggiatedeveniftheActiveparameterontheARPEGGIATORpageisset toOn. Whenaglobalarpeggiatorisbeingused,theArpeggiatorparametercanbesettoOfftoexclude aZonefrombeingplayedbytheglobalarpeggiator.SeeArpeggiatorGlobal (ArpGlobal) on page 764fordetailsonsettingaglobalarpeggiator.

7-9

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Controllers (CTRLS) Page

PresstheCTRLSsoftbuttontodisplaytheControllerspage.TheControllerspageallowsyouto assignanyofthePC3LEsphysicalcontrollers(knobs,pads,switches,modandpitchwheels, footswitchesandexpressionpedal)tocontrolaprogramspecificparameterorMIDIcontroller numberforthecurrentlyselectedzone. First,usetheChan/Zonebuttonstotheleftofthedisplaytoselectthedesiredzonethatyou wishtoassignacontrollerfor.Next,ontheControllerspage,usethecursorbuttonstoselectthe Controlfield,holdtheEnterbuttononthealphanumericpadandthenmoveanyofthePC3LEs physicalcontrollers.Thiswillselectthatcontrolleranddisplayitsavailableparameters.(You canalsoscrollthroughthelistofcontrollersintheControlfieldbyselectingtheControlfield withthecursorbuttonsandusingtheAlphaWheelorthe/+buttonstoscrollthroughthelist.)

ASSIGNABLE SWITCHES

Shift

This is how each shift row for accessing different switches or knobs corresponds to the switch and knob names in the Setup KB3 Editor. Press the Shift button to the left of the switches or Shift knobs to access each row. The LED to the left of each row will light to show which row is being accessed.

Switch 1

Switch 2

Switch 3

Switch 4

Switch 5

Switch 6

Switch 7

Switch 8

Switch 9

Switch 10

ASSIGNABLE CONTROLS

Knob 1

Knob 2

Knob 3

Knob 4

Knob 5

Knob 6

Knob 7

Knob 8

Knob 9

Knob 10

Knob 11

Knob 12

Knob 13

Knob 14

Knob 15

OnceyouhaveselectedthedesiredcontrollerintheControlsfield,usethecursorbuttonstoset thecontrollerdestinationandotheravailableparameters.Seebelowforexplanationsofeach controllersparameters.

7-10

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Knobs, CC Pedal, Modwheel, Pitchbend up/dn (Pitch Wheel,) Pressure

TheparametersfortheKnobs,CCPedal,Modwheel,andPressurearethesame(seeanexample oftheKnob1page,below.)TheparametersforthePitchWheelarethesame,butthereisa separatepageofparametersformovingPitchWheelup(Pitchbendup)andmovingitdown (Pitchbenddn.) ThePC3LEfeaturesmonopressure,commonlycalledaftertouchonotherkeyboards.

Parameter Scale Curve Offset DestType (Destination Type) Destination (Dest) Entry Value Exit Value

Range of Values 300% Linear, Compress, Expand -128 to +127 Ctrl, Param Control Destination List None, 0 to 127 None, 0 to 127

Default 100% Linear 0 Dependent on controller Dependent on controller None None

Awordaboutpressure:KeyRangeinazonedoesnotdefinewhichnoteswillgeneratepressure inthatzone.Ifpressureisenabledinazone,playingwithaftertouchanywhereonthekeyboard willproducedata.Forexample,ifZone1sKeyRangeisC3C5andyouplayC2andpush downonthenote,pressuremessageswillbesentfromZone1.Aswithanyotherphysical controller,however,youcandisablepressureinanyzone,orscaleitoroffsetitdifferentlyinthe variouszones.Itmighthelptothinkofpressureasanextrawheelwheelsoperateinazone regardlessofKeyRange,andsodoespressure. Note:AsidefromthePressuresettingsontheControllerspage,MIDIpressurevaluescanbeaffectedby settingsyoumakeonotherpages:SeePressureMap(PressMap)(Master) on page 95foranoverall settingthataffectsallMIDIpressurevaluesinputtothePC3LE,andallMIDIpressurevaluessenttothe internalsoundengineandUSBorMIDIoutports(exceptforpressurevaluesoutputwheninSong Mode.)SeePressureMap(Transmit) on page 915forsettingsthataffectonlythoseMIDIpressure valuessenttotheUSBorMIDIoutports(exceptforpressurevaluesoutputwheninSongMode.)See PressureMap(Receive) on page 919forsettingsthataffectonlythoseMIDIpressurevaluesreceivedby theUSBorMIDIinports.Oneachofthepagesmentionedabove,lookattheMIDIsignalflowchartto seewhichpressuremapscanaffectyourvelocitiesdependingonwhichMIDISources,MIDIDestinations andoperatingmodethatyouareusing.

7-11

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Scale Afteryouveselectedacontinuousphysicalcontroller,youcanmodifythecontrollersresponse similarlytothewaysyoucanmodifyvelocityresponse.Refertothegraphsbeginningon page 729forillustrationsofthevelocityscalingparameters. Scaleletsyouamplifyordiminishtheactionofthecontroller.Fullscaleis100%.Highervalues willmakethecontrollermoresensitive,andlowervalueswillmakeitlessso.Settingthescaleto anegativenumbermakesthecontrolleractionworkinreverse.Aswithvelocity,youcanusea controllertocrossfadebetweentwozonesbysettingthescalingforonezonepositiveandthe othernegative.Maximumscalevaluesare+300%and300%. Curve Thisletsyoutaperthecontrollerresponse.ThedefaultsettingisLinear,whichmeansthatthe responsefollowsastraightlineasyoumovethecontroller. SettingCurvtoExpandproducesacurvethatislesssteepthanthelinearcurveatkeystrike velocitiesbelow64,andsteeperthanthelinearcurveatkeystrikevelocitiesabove64.Inother words,whenyoureplayingsoftly,youllnoticevelocitydifferenceslessthanwithalinear curve,whilewhenyoureplayinghard,youllnoticevelocitydifferencesmore. SettingCurvtoCompressproducesavelocitycurvethatistheoppositeoftheexpanded curvethatis,youllnoticevelocitydifferencesmorewhenyoureplayingsoftlythanwhen youreplayinghard. Youcanalsocreatereverseversionsofthethreedescribedcurves.First,selectyourdesired curve.ThensettheScaleparameterto100%,andsettheOffsetparameterto127.Thismakes theselectedcontrollersendavalueof127whenallthewaydownandavalueof0whenallthe wayup. Togetanideaofhowthesecurvesaffectcontrollerresponse,refertotheVelocityCurvecharts, whichbeginonpage 729. Offset Thisaddsorsubtractsaconstanttothecontroller,andatthesametimesetsminimumor maximumvalues(theresnoneedforseparateMaxandMinparameters).IfOffsetis25,the minimumvalueofthecontrollerwillbe25.Ifitis25(andscaleis100%)thefirstonefifthofthe controllersmovement(25/1271/5)willsendvalueof0,andthemaximumvalueofthe controllerwillbe102(=12725).Aswithvelocity,Scaleisaproportionalchangetothecontroller, whileOffsetisalinearchange.ThevaluesforOffsetrangefrom128to127. DestType ThisfielddetermineswhichtypeofcontroldestinationswillbelistedintheDestfield(see below.)ChooseParamifyouwouldliketocontroloneoftheparametersfortheprogramonthe currentsetupzone,suchaparameterforaneffectintheprogramseffectschain,oraparameter forasynthfunctionsuchasafilterorLFOusedbytheprogram.Theparameterslisteddepend onwhatparametersexistforthecurrentzonesprogramandeffectschain(seeDestbelowfor detailsonavailableparameters.)ChooseCtrlifyouwouldliketocontrolaMIDIcontinuous controllernumber(whenParamisselected,eachparametersendsaMIDICCvalueaswell,see thenoteunderDest,below,fordetails.)Bydefault,MIDIcontinuouscontrollervaluesaresent internallytotheprogramonthecontrollerszone,aswellastotheUSBandMIDIoutports.To changethisfromthedefault,seeDestination on page 76.

7-12

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Dest DependingontheDestTypefield(seeabove,)usethisparametertoselectadestinationeither fromtheParameterslistfortheprogramonthecurrentzone,orfromtheMIDIController Destinationlist(seepage 718.)TheParameterslistshowsallparametersfromtheprogram modePARAMETERSpageoftheprogramonthecurrentzone,includingsynth,insertandaux effectparameters(seepage 69fordetailsonthePARAMETERSpage.)WhenDestTypeissetto Param,theDestfieldwillprefixinserteffectparameterswithFXInsert1:,andauxeffect parameterswithFXAux1:.Programspecificsynthparameterswillhavenoprefix. Ifthesetuphasanaux1oraux2Overrideloaded(seepage 762,)theparametersfortheoverride auxeffectswillnotappearintheDestparameterslist.AuxOverrideeffectparameterscannotbe assignedtocontrollers.Onlyanonoverrideaux1effectcanbeassignedtocontrollers.Ifyou needtocontrolanaux1oraux2Overrideeffectparameter,editoneofthesetupsprogramsto usethedesiredchainastheprogramsauxeffect(seeTheEFFECTS(FX)Page on page 613.) Then,setthesetupsAuxFXchannel(seeAuxFXChannel on page 764)tothechannelofthe zonethatcontainsyournewlyeditedprogram.Nowyouwillbeusingthesameeffectschain thathadbeenyourauxOverride,butyoucanassigncontrollerstoitsparameterssinceitisnow aregular,nonoverrideaux. Note:WhenDestTypeissettoParam,theparametersintheDestfieldaresendingMIDI continuouscontrollervaluestocontroleachparameter.ItcanbeusefultoknowtheCCnumber ornameusedforeachparameter,becausethisishowthecontrollermovementswillbelabeled whenrecordedtothePC3LEsSongmode(seeSongEditor:TheEVENTPage on page 1031)orto anexternalsequencer.ToseetheCCnumberbeingusedforaparameter,youcantemporarily changetheDestTypeparametertoCtrltoseetheCCnumberintheDestfield.SomeCC numbersshowanameinsteadoftheirnumberonthePC3LE.YoucanfindaCCnames correspondingnumberinTheControllerDestinationList on page 718.Seepage 767fordetails onrecordingasetuptoSongmode. Entry and Exit Values Entryvalueallowsyoutospecifyaninitialvalueforacontrollerinasetupthatwillbesent wheneveryouselectthatsetup.Forexample,ifyouwanttomakesurethatallofthemodulation inazoneisturnedoffwhenyouselectasetup,assignaphysicalcontrollertoadestinationof MIDI01(MWheel)andsetEntryValueto0. Entryvaluesignorethecurrentpositionofthephysicalcontrollerwhenthesetupisselected.In fact,ifthephysicalcontrollerisaboveorbelowtheentryvaluewhenthesetupisselected (whichitoftenis),movingthecontrollerwillhavenoeffectuntilitispastitsentryvalue.Inthe modulationexampleabove,movingtheassignedcontrollerwontturnonanymodulationuntil itspushedallthewaydown,andthenupagain. AnentryvalueofNoneisquitedifferentfromavalueof0.Nonemeansthattherewillbeno initialcontrollercommandwhenthesetupisselected,andanysubsequentmovementofthe physicalcontrollerwillbeeffective. ExitValuetellsthePC3LEtosendavalueforthatcontrollerwheneveryouleavethesetup, eitherbyselectinganothersetuporbyselectingadifferentmodealtogether.Itcanbevery usefulwhenacontrollerisdoingsomethingtothesound,andyoudontwantthateffectto continueafteryouleavethesetup.Forexample,ifyouwanttomakesureazonespitchreturns tonormalwheneveryouleaveasetup,youwouldsetExitValueto64foranycontrollerwhose DestinationparameterissettoPitchUp.Again,Nonemeansnocommandissent.

7-13

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

SW Pedal 1 & 2, Arp. switch, Arp. latch sw, Switch 1-10

TheparametersforSWPedal1&2,Arp.switch,Arp.latchsw,andSwitch110arethesame.See andexampleoftheSwitch1pagebelow. UseSWPedal1&2toassignparametersforfootswitchpedalswhichcanbeconnectedtothe PC3LEviajacksinthepedalssectionontherearpanellabeledSW1andSW2.ThePC3LEcomes withonepianostylesustainswitchpedal,seePedals on page 14forinformationoncompatible pedals.SWPedal1&2areoftenusedtocontrolsustainandsostenuto,thoughtheycanbe assignedtoanyotheron/offswitchfunction. ThePC3LEhas12switchesthatyoucanassignfunctionsto.TheseswitchesincludetheArp. switchandArp.latchsw(locatedabovethePitchandModWheels,)aswellasthefivebuttons labeledAssignableSwitches,locatedabovetheassignableknobs.Eachofthefivebuttonsabove theknobscanperformthefunctionoftwoseparateswitches;accesseachfunctionbyusingthe shiftbutton(totheleftoftheseswitches.)WhenthetopswitchbuttonShiftLEDislit,the switchesaccessswitchfunctions15.WhenthebottomswitchbuttonShiftLEDislit,the switchesaccessswitchfunctions610.YoucanuseaswitchtocontrolMIDIorotherfunctions onthePC3LE. Forbothpedalsorswitches,youcanusetheTypefieldtoassignthecontroltoMomentaryor Toggled.IfyouchooseSW(Momentary)intheTypefield,thecontrolwillsendthevalueforits OnValueparameterwhenpressed,andthevalueforitsOffValueparameterwhenreleased.If youchooseSW(Toggled)intheTypefield,thecontrolwillalternatebetweensendingthevalue foritsOnValueparameterwhenpressedandreleased,andthevalueforitsOffValueparameter thenexttimeitispressedandreleased.TheparametersforSW(Momentary)andSW(Toggled) behavethesameasidefromthatdistinction. SW(Momentary)issuitedforusewithfunctionsthatneedtoturnonandoffquicklyforshort periodsoftime,likesustainorportamento.SW(Toggled)issuitedforusewithfunctionsthat youwillwanttoleaveonoroffforlongerperiodsoftime,suchasarpeggiatoron/off.Seebelow forparameterexplanationsofbothswitchtypes:

DestType

ThisfielddetermineswhichtypeofcontroldestinationswillbelistedintheOnControland OffControlfields(seebelow.)ChooseParamsifyouwouldliketocontroloneoftheparameters fortheprogramonthecurrentsetupzone,suchaparameterforaneffectintheprogramseffects chain,oraparameterforaDSPfunctionsuchasafilterorLFOusedbytheprogram.The parameterslisteddependonwhatparametersexistforthecurrentzonesprogramandeffects chain.ChooseCtrlifyouwouldliketocontrolaMIDIcontinuouscontrollernumber.Bydefault thisMIDIcontinuouscontrollervalueissentinternallytotheprogramonthecontrollerszone, aswellastotheUSBandMIDIoutports.Tochangethisfromthedefault,see Destination on page 76.

7-14

Setup Mode The Setup Editor On Control (OnControl)

OnControldetermineswhatparametercontrolorMIDIControlmessagewillbesentwhenthe switchisonthatis,eitherpressedandheldortoggledonfromtheoffposition.Thelistof availabledestinationsisdependentonthesettingfortheDestTypefield(seeabove.)Formore informationonMIDIcontrollers,seetheMIDIControllerDestinationlistonpage 718.

OnValue

TheOnValueparametersetstheparameterorMIDIcontrollervaluethatissentwhenthe switchsendsanonvalue.Inthecaseofconventionallyswitchedfunctions,suchassustain,the OnValueshouldbesetto127inordertohaveanaffect.

Off Control (OffControl)

OffControldetermineswhatparametercontrolorMIDIControlmessagewillbesentwhenthe switchisoffthatis,eitherreleasedortoggledofffromtheonposition.Thelistofavailable destinationsisdependentonthesettingfortheDestTypefield(seeabove.)Formore informationonMIDIcontrollers,seetheMIDIControllerDestinationlistonpage 718.

OffValue

TheOffValueparametersetstheparameterorMIDIcontrollervaluethatissentwhenthe switchsendsanoffvalue.Inthecaseofconventionallyswitchedfunctions,suchassustain,the OffValueshouldbesetto0inordertohaveanaffect.

EntryState and ExitState

EntryStatedetermineswhetheraninitialsettingfortheswitchwillbesentwhenthesetupis selected,andwhatthatinitialsettingwillbe.Therearethreechoices:None(nosettingissent whenthesetupisloaded),Off(theOffvalueissentwhenthesetupisloaded),andOn(theOn valueissentwhenthesetupisloaded). ExitStatedetermineswhetherasettingfortheswitchwillbesentwhenyouleavethesetup (eitherforanothersetuporforProgrammode,)andifso,whatthatsettingwillbe.Thereare threechoices:None(nosettingissentwhenyouleavethesetup,)Off(theOffValueissent whenyouleavethesetup,)andOn(theOnValueissentwhenyouleavethesetup.)

Common Uses for EntryState and ExitState

Forbasicuse,mostuserswillwanttosettheEntryStatetoOnorOffsothattheswitchisalways inthedesiredonoroffstatewhenthesetupisselected. AsetupthathasanEntryStatesettoNoneismoresuitedforaliveperformancesituation.For exampleifyouareusingaswitchtocontrolaparameterthatiscommonbetweenmultiple setupsyouareusing(likeaswitchsetinmultiplesetupstoturnreverbonandoff,)youcanset theEntryStatetoNone,sothatthestateofthereverb(onoroff)remainsthesamewhenyou switchtoanothersetup.Inthissituation,youwouldwantyoursetupsthatusethesameswitch forreverbtohaveanExitStatesettoNone.Forthesesetups,anExitStateofOnorOffcouldbe usedforspecialsituationsinwhichyouknowyouwillwanttoswitchthereverbonoroffwhen youchooseanothersetup.

7-15

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Pads
Youcanassigneachofthe8padstoadifferentnote,chord,MIDIcontrollerdestination, programparameterorRiff.First,usetheChan/Zonebuttonstotheleftofthedisplaytoselect thedesiredzonethatyouwishtoassignapadto.Next,usethecursorbuttonstoselectthe Controlfield,andselectapadbyholdingtheEnterbuttononthealphanumericpadand pressingthedesiredpad.WiththeControllerfieldselectedyoucanalsoselectthedesiredpad byusingtheAlphaWheelor/+buttons.Next,usethecursorbuttonstomovetotheTypefield andselectoneoftheoptionswiththeAlphaWheelor/+buttons.IntheTypefield,selectNote toassignanote,Chordtoassignachord,SwitchtoassignaMIDIcontinuouscontroller destinationorprogramparameter,orRifftoassignaRiff.Lastly,usetheZonefieldtosetthe desiredzonethatyouwishtocontrolwiththecurrentpad.Youcancontroleitherthecurrent zone,orallzones.SeebelowforparameterexplanationsofeachPadcontrolType: Note, Chord WithNoteorChordselectedintheTypefield,youcanassignthepadtoplayasinglenoteor chordofupto8notes.

Key Number (KeyNum)

UsetheKeyNumfieldtoselectthenotetobeplayed.ThenoteisdisplayedbyMIDInotename. Toselectanote,selecttheKeyNumfieldwiththecursorbuttons,holdtheEnterbuttononthe alphanumericpad,thenplaythedesirednoteonthekeyboard.Youcanalsochangethenotein thefieldbyusingtheAlphaWheelor/+buttons.

Zone

UsetheZonefieldtosetthedesiredzonethatyouwishtocontrolwiththecurrentpad.A settingofThisZonemakesthepadcontrolthecurrentlyselectedzone(youcanviewthe currentlyselectedzoneintheupperrightcornerofthescreen,)whileasettingofAllZones makesthepadcontrolallzones.

7-16

Setup Mode The Setup Editor Velocity

UsetheVelocityfieldtoselectaMIDIattackvelocity(0127)forthenote(s)designatedinthe KeyNumfield(s.)Alternatively,settheVelocityfieldtoAutoandthenotesvelocitywillchange eachtimeitistriggereddependentonhowhardthepadishiteachtime. MIDI Continuous Controller Destination or Program Parameter: Switch (SW (Momentary) or SW (Toggled)) WithSwitchselectedintheTypefield,theselectedpadwillfunctionjustlikethePC3LEs assignableswitches.Seeabove,SWPedal1&2,Arp.switch,Arp.latchsw,Switch1 10 on page 714forexplanationsoftheparametersonthispage.Whenapadisbeingusedasa switch,thepadwilllightupredwhentheswitchison. Riff SettheTypetoRifftousethepadasaswitchtostartorstoptheRiffforthecurrentzone(ifa Riffisassignedforthecurrentzone,seeRiffs on page 748tolearnhow.)Whenapadisassigned toplayaRiff,thepadwilllightupbluewhentheriffisstarted.

Trig. Mode (Trigger Mode)

WithTrig.ModesettoStart/Stop,thepadwillactasatoggledswitch,meaningitwillalternate betweenstartingtheRiffwhenpressedandreleased,andstoppingtheRiffthenexttimethepad ispressedandreleased.WithTrig.ModesettoOneShot,theriffwillrestarteachtimethepadis pressedandreleased.

EntryState and ExitState

EntryStatedetermineswhetherornotaninitialsettingfortheRiffwillbesentwhenthesetupis selected,andifso,whatthatinitialsettingwillbe.Therearethreechoices:None(nosettingis sentwhenthesetupisloaded),Off(theRiffisturnedoffwhenthesetupisloaded),andOn(the Riffisturnedonwhenthesetupisloaded). ExitStatedetermineswhetherornotasettingfortheRiffwillbesentwhenyouleavethesetup (eitherforanothersetuporforProgrammode,)andifso,whatthatsettingwillbe.Thereare threechoices:None(nosettingissentwhenyouleavethesetup),Off(theRiffisstoppedwhen youleavethesetup),andOn(theRiffisstartedwhenyouleavethesetup).

7-17

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

The Controller Destination List

ThetablebelowcontainstheavailablevaluesfortheMIDICC(continuouscontroller) destinations.PhysicalcontrollerscansendMIDIvaluestothesedestinationsinordertocontrol theparametersofPC3LEprogramsorexternalMIDIequipment.InSetupmode,these destinationscanbeassignedforeachcontrollerontheSetupEditorControllerspagewiththe Destparameter,iftheDestTypeparameterissettoCtrl.Bydefault,MIDICCssentfrom physicalcontrollersaresenttotheirzonesprograminternally,andtotheMIDIandUSBoutson theirzonesMIDIchannel(tochangethesesettingsseeDestination on page 76and Channel on page 77.) InthePC3LE,MIDICCdestinationsarebestusedtocontrolexternalMIDIequipment.Ifyou wanttocontrolaprogramparameter,settheDestTypeparametertoParamontheSetupEditor Controllerspage.ThishasthesameresultassendingaMIDICCtocontrolaprogram parameter,butsavesyoualotofsetupsteps(ParametersalsosendtheirownCCnumberstothe MIDIandUSBoutportsbydefault.)IfMIDICCmessagesfordestinations0127aresentto programsinternally,programswillonlyrespondtosomeoftheseCCdestinations. ForcontrollermessagessenttoexternalequipmentviatheMIDIorUSBoutports,destinations 0127willonlyperformtheirnamedfunctioniftheexternalequipmenthasthecapabilitytodo so.MostofthesenamedfunctionscorrespondtotheMIDIstandardforcontinuouscontroller destinations. ControllerDestinationnumberswhicharegreaterthan127aresentasaPC3LEspecific protocol,andarethusnotsentasMIDIdatathroughMIDIorUSBoutports.MostPC3LE programsrespondtothecontrollerdestinationsabove127,thoughsomelike163RiffOnor176 ShKeyNumrequireadditionalcircumstancesorsetup.

Controller Number
0

Corresponding Destination Name

OFF/Bank

Description
By default, when you enter 0 or Clear for the Destination parameter, the destination will be assigned to OFF. To select Bank as the destination, use the Alpha Wheel or -/+ buttons. Default assignment for Mod Wheel Default assignment for breath controller in compatible synths. MIDI Controller 3 Default assignment for continuous foot controller in compatible synths. Monophonic PC3LE programs respond to this Controller if portamento is turned on Almost all PC3LE programs have this Controller assigned to filter frequency or brightness MIDI Volume MIDI Balance MIDI Controller 9 MIDI Panprograms which use PANNER their effect chain will respond to real-time pan adjustments; all other programs will respond on the next note start, see The Pan/Volume (PAN/VOL) Page on page 7-26.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

MWheel Breath MIDI 03 Foot PortTim Data Volume Balance MIDI 09 Pan

Table 7-1

Controller Destination List

7-18

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Controller Number
11

Corresponding Destination Name

Express

Description
MIDI ExpressionDefault assignment for CC Pedal 1. In most programs it acts as an volume control. It scales between minimum (0) and the current value of Volume. MIDI Controller 12 Default destination for Knob 1 (Timbre) Default destination for Knob 2 (Mod) Default destination for Knob 3 (Envelope) Default destination for Knob 4 (Effect) Default destination for Knob 5 (Reverb) Default destination for Knob 6 (CTL6) Default destination for Knobs 7-15 (CTL7-CTL15) MIDI Controllers 29-31 MIDI Controllers 3363 Default destination for Footswitch 1(see SW Pedal 1 & 2, Arp. switch, Arp. latch sw, Switch 1-10 on page 7-14) Default destination for Footswitch 2holds notes that are currently down, but not notes played subsequently Lowers the volume by a preset amount and may soften the timbre as well (see SW Pedal 1 & 2, Arp. switch, Arp. latch sw, Switch 1-10 on page 7-14) Forces mono playback Envelopes freeze at current state MIDI Controllers 7079 MIDI Controllers 8083. Default destination for Switches 1-4 (SW1-SW4) Standard MIDI controller for setting Portamento starting note. MIDI Controllers 8590. Default destination for Switches 5-10 (SW5-SW10) With PC3LE in General MIDI mode, controls Reverb send level MIDI Controller 92 With PC3LE in General MIDI mode, controls Chorus send level MIDI Controllers 9495 Equivalent to pressing the plus button Equivalent to pressing the minus button Non-Registered Parameter Least Significant Byte

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20-28 29-31 32 3363 64 65 66 67

MIDI 12 MIDI 13 MIDI 14 MIDI 15 Ctl A Ctl B Ctl C Ctl D MIDI 20-28 MIDI 29-31 Bank MIDI 3363 Sustain MIDI 65 Sostenut Soft

68 69 7079 80-83 84 8590 91 92 93 94-95 96 97 98

Legato Freeze MIDI 7079 MIDI 80-83 Portamen MIDI 8590 GM Reverb MIDI 92 GM Chorus MIDI 94-95 Data Inc Data Dec NRegParL

Table 7-1

Controller Destination List (Continued)

7-19

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Controller Number
99 100 101 102-108 109 110-119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146

Corresponding Destination Name

NRegParM RegParL RegParM MIDI 102-108 MIDI 109 MIDI 110-119 Sound Off RstCtls Local Notes Off Poly Omni Mono On Mono Off Pitch PitchRev PitchUp PitchDwn Pressure Tempo KeyNum KeyVel ProgInc ProgDec ProgGoto SetupInc SetupDec SetpGoto Start Stop Continue TransUp TransDown

Description
Non-Registered Parameter Most Significant Byte Registered Parameter Least Significant Byte Registered Parameter Most Significant Byte MIDI Controllers 102108 MIDI Controller 109. Sets arpeggiator velocity when ARPEGGIATOR velocity is set to MIDI 109 mode MIDI Controllers 110119 Stops all sound in the corresponding channel Reset Controllers to defaults in the corresponding channel Sends Note Off Message to all playing notes in the corresponding channel

Pitchvalues above and below 64 bend the pitch up and down, respectively Pitchvalues above and below 64 bend the pitch down and up, respectively Pitchvalues above 0 bend the pitch up Pitchvalues above 0 bend the pitch down Pressure Tempo Triggers playback of notes by Key Numbere.g., C4 is 60. Send a velocity first with Destination135, KeyVel. Key Velocity Program Incrementincrements current program number Program Decrementdecrements current program number Go to Programselects program Setup Incrementincrements current setup number Setup Decrementincrements current setup number Go to Setupselects setup Sequencer function Sequencer function Sequencer function Transpose Up (ST) Transpose Down (ST)

Table 7-1

Controller Destination List (Continued)

7-20

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Controller Number
147 148 149 150

Corresponding Destination Name

ArpOn ArpOff MuteZn ArpOrder

Description
Any value turns Arpeggiator On. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-35) Any Value turns Arpeggiator Off. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-35) Mute Zone values above 64 will mute the zone, values below or equal to 64 will unmute the zone. Arpeggiator Order, each range of values selects one of nine options in order on parameters list: 0-14, 15-28, 29-42, 43-56, 57-70, 71-84, 85-98, 99-112, 113-127. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-35) Arpeggiator Beats, each range of values selects one of seven options in order on parameters list: 0-18, 19-36, 37-54, 55-72, 73-90, 91-108, 109-127. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-35) The 88 Arpeggiator Shift steps are scaled over the 128 MIDI controller values, so that 0 = 0 steps and 127 = 88 steps. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-35) The 60 Arpeggiator Shift Limit steps are scaled over the 128 MIDI controller values, so that 0 = 0 steps and 127 = 60 steps. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-35) Arpeggiator Shift Limit Option, each range of values selects one of seven options in order on parameters list: 0-18, 19-36, 37-54, 55-72, 73-90, 91-108, 109-127. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-35) Arpeggiator Velocity, each range of values selects one of twenty-three options in order on parameters list: 0-5, 6-10, 11-15...101-105, 106-110, 111-127. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-35) The Arpeggiator Duration% values are scaled over the 128 MIDI controller values, so that 0 = 1% and 127 = 100%. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-35) For Arpeggiator Latch Pedals mode, 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-35) For Arpeggiator Latch Pedals mode, 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-35) Arpeggiator Gliss, 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-35) For Arpeggiator Latch Pedals mode, 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-35) Panic Solo Zone Riff On (See Riffs on page 7-48) Riff Off (See Riffs on page 7-48) Riff Duration (See Riffs on page 7-48)

151

ArpBeats

152

ArpShift

153

ArpLimit

154

ArpLmtOp

155

ArpVel

156

ArpDur

157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165

Latch Latch2 ArpGliss SusLatch Panic SoloZn RiffOn RiffOff RiffDur

Table 7-1

Controller Destination List (Continued)

7-21

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Controller Number
166 167 168 169

Corresponding Destination Name

RiffVel RiffDly TapTempo KB3Mutes

Description
Riff Velocity (See Riffs on page 7-48) Riff Delay (See Riffs on page 7-48) Tap Tempo (See Tap Tempo Button on page 7-4) KB3 Mutesin Setup Mode, values of 63 and below set the switches to KB3 controls in that setup, and a values of 64 and above set switches to mute zones (see Set Controls KB3 (KB3CTL) on page 7-66.) Sets ARPEGGIATOR values for Shift to negative. 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-35) Selects one of the 128 patterns in the current ARPEGGIATOR ShiftPatt Bank. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-35) A controller value selects the corresponding ShiftPatt Bank for the ARPEGGIATOR page of a controllers zone. For example, controller value 2 selects bank 2, controller value 7 selects bank 7. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-35) Selects one of the 128 patterns in the current ARPEGGIATOR VelPatt Bank. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-35) A controller value selects the corresponding VelPatt Bank for the ARPEGGIATOR page of a controllers zone. For example, controller value 2 selects bank 2, controller value 7 selects bank 7. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-35) Sets arpeggiator velocity when ARPEGGIATOR velocity is set to Fixed. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-35) Shift Key Number (see below, Shift Key Number, Shift Key (ShKeyNum, ShiftKey) on page 7-23) Shift Key (see below, Shift Key Number, Shift Key (ShKeyNum, ShiftKey) on page 7-23) Same as 176 ShKeyNum, but the Shift Patterns velocity will be modified by the current velocity pattern of the zone.

170 171

-Arp Shift ShiftPatt

172

ShiftPBank

173

VelPatt

174

VelPBank

175 176 177 178

VelFixed ShKeyNum ShiftKey ShKeyNuV

Table 7-1

Controller Destination List (Continued)

7-22

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Shift Key Number, Shift Key (ShKeyNum, ShiftKey)

Thesecontrollerdestinationsallowyoutoplaymusicalscalesandsinglenotepatternsonany assignablecontinuouscontrollerinasetup,withouttheneedofplayingthephysicalkeysofthe keyboard.Thesedestinationscanbecontrolledbyanycontinuouscontroller,aknob,expression pedal,keypressure,etc.Thesefeaturesareespeciallyusefulforplayingfastarpeggiations. Thesedestinationsonlyworkwhencombinedwithotherdestinationsandfeatures,sobesureto readthiswholesectiontogainacompleteunderstanding. ShiftKeyNumber(ShKeyNum,controllerdestination176)worksinasimilarwaytoKey Number(KeyNum,controllerdestination134).Bothcontrollersbasicallygeneratea monophonicstreamofnotes.ThedifferenceisthatKeyNumberplaysthroughallnotes chromatically,whileShiftKeyNumberonlyplaysnotesrelativetoaShiftPattern. Forexample,whencontrollingShiftKeyNumberfromaknob,notesaretriggeredfromaShift Patterninforwardsorderasyouturntheknobup,andbackwardsorderasyouturntheknob down.IfinourzonewehaveselectedtheShiftPattern2:minor,thenotesbeingplayedbythe knobwillbeonlytheroot,theminorthirdandfifthinthechosenkey,triggeringnotesinany octaveupanddownthekeyboard.(SeeShiftKeybelowfordetailsonselectingtherootnoteand octave.) Selecting The Desired Notes: YoumustselectaShiftPatternforthedesiredzoneinorderforShiftKeyNumbertohavean effect.ToselectaShiftPatternforthecurrentzoneinasetup,enterthesetupeditorandgotothe ArpeggiatorpagebypressingtheARP1softbutton.SelectaShiftPatternfromtheShiftPatt field.Ifusingmultiplezones,adifferentpatterncanbeselectedforeach.TheShiftPattfieldis usuallyusedwiththearpeggiator,butcanalsobeusedincombinationwiththecontroller destinationsShiftKeyNote,ShiftKey,andKeyVelocity.Thesedestinationscanuseazones ShiftPatternwhetherthearpeggiatorisonoroffwithoutconflict.FormoreinformationonShift Patternssuchaseditingandsaving,seeShiftPattern(ShiftPatt) on page 741.(Notethatthe ShiftPattUporDownoptions,aswellasanyofthearpeggiatorparametersotherthanShiftPattdonot haveaneffectonShiftKeyNumber.)Youcanalsosetcontrollerstodestination171(ShiftPatt)to selectapatternfromthecurrentbankof128shiftpatterns,anddestination172(ShiftPBank)to selectabankfrombanksof128shiftpatternseach. Selecting The Desired Velocity: InordertohaveanotesoundwhenusingShiftKeyNumber,youfirstneedtosendaKey Velocitymessage(KeyVel,controllerdestination135)withanonzerovelocity.Youmustseta controllertothisdestination,itsusefultosetaknoborothercontinuouscontrollerinorderto controlvelocitywhileplaying.ThenextnotestobetriggeredbyShiftKeyNumberwillbe playedwiththelastreceivedKeyVelvelocity.Onenotetriggeredbythesecontrollerssounds untilanothernoteistriggeredoruntilaKeyVelmessagewithvelocity0issent.

7-23

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Selecting The Desired Key (Root Note): ShiftKey(ShiftKey,controllerdestination177)allowstheusertoselectthekey(rootnote)of theShiftPatterntriggeredbyShiftKeyNumber.AShiftPatternisarelativepatternbasedona rootnote.AllnotestriggeredbyaShiftPatternareshiftedfromtherootnotebythevalueof eachpatternstep(inhalfsteps.) Shift Key Settings Value
0-9 10-19 20-29 30-39 40-49 50-59 60-68 69-78 79-88 89-98 99-108 109-118 119-127 C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B Last Note Played

Key (root note)

WhenusingaShiftPatternwithShiftKeyNumberyoucanselectthekeywithoneormore controllerssettotheShiftKeydestination.Youcanuseacontinuouscontrollersuchasaknobto cyclethroughkeys,orswitchessettopredeterminedkeys.Forexample,ifyouareplayinga songthatmovesbetween2or3keys,acoupleofswitchescouldbeprogrammedinorderto sendtheappropriateShiftKeymessageforeachkeychange.Thatwayallthenotesyouare triggeringwithaShiftKeyNumbercontrollerwillbeintheappropriatescale.Youcouldalso createasetupforasongwithmultiplezones,eachwithitsownpresetkeyandappropriate shiftpattern.Thatway,foreachchordchangeyoucouldmoveadifferentcontrollerthatwould createthecorrectharmony. AnotherwaytochooseakeyistosetShiftKeytoLastNotePlayedmode,inwhichthelastnote playedinthezonewillsetthekey.Forexample,youcouldsetthezonebeingusedforShiftKey NumbertohaveaKeyRangethatcoversonlyafewofthekeyboardslowestoctaves.This wouldallowyoutoplayrootnotebasslinesthatchangethekeythatShiftKeyNumberplaysin, leavingtheupperoctavesofthekeyboardopenforusebyotherzones. IfShiftKeyissettoLastNotePlayedandnonoteisplayed,thedefaultkeyisC.Eachzonecan haveadifferentShiftKey,soyoucanhavezonespreprogrammedwiththekeysyouwantto use,orhavethemallinthesamekey,orjustchangethekeyinrealtimewhileyouareplaying. A Note About Octave Range: WhenusingShiftKeyNumber,shiftpatternswithmorethan12stepsbegintriggeringnotesin higheroctaves.Thisisdonebecauselongershiftpatternsuseupmoreofacontrollersrange, andlimitthenumberofoctavesthatasinglecontrollercantrigger.Sincethelowestoctaveofa programisoftentoolowtobemusicallyuseful,thePC3LEwillautomaticallystarttriggering notesfromlongershiftpatternsinhigheroctaves.Thissavesroominthecontrollersrangeof

7-24

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

valuesfortriggeringmoreusefuloctaves.SeethetablebelowforShiftPatternsteprangesand theircorrespondingstartingoctave. Default Octave Shifting Total # of Shift Pattern Steps

1-12 13-24 25-36 37-48

Starting Octave
C0-C1 C1-C2 C2-C3 C3-C4

Selecting The Desired Octave Range: Youadjustthestartingoctavemanually,usingtheOffsetparameteronthecorresponding controllerssetuppage.IntheOffsetfield,theadditionorsubtractionofthenumberofstepsin yourcurrentshiftpatternwillraiseorlowerthestartingoctaveinrelationshiptothedefault startingoctave.Forexample,inashiftpatternwith3steps,anOffsetvalueof9wouldcausea controllervalueof0tomakeShiftKeyNumbertriggernotesinoctaveC3C4,3octavesabove thedefaultC0C1.Offsetvaluesthatarenotmultiplesofthenumberofcurrentshiftpattern stepswillchangewhichstepthepatternbeginsonatcontrollervalue0,thusoffsettingthe relationshipbetweenallofthecontrollersvaluesandcurrentshiftpatternssteps. Adjusting Controller Range: WhenusingShiftKeyNumber,thenumberofstepsintheShiftPatternalsoaffectstherangeof valuesthatwillcauseacontrollertotriggerashiftpatternstep,andinturnaffecttheuseful rangeofthephysicalcontroller.Withashiftpatternof12notes,the128differentnotesthatthe PC3LEcantriggerareevenlyspacedovertherangeofthecontroller.Patternswithlessthan12 stepswilltriggernotesineveryoctaveoverashorterrangeofthecontroller.Forexample,ina shiftpatternwith3steps,bydefaultthecontrollervalues0to2willtriggernotesstartinginthe lowestpossibleoctave,andcontrollervalues27to30willtriggernotesinthehighestpossible fulloctave.Usingaknobforthiscontroller,onlyabout1/4thaturnoftheknobwouldbe triggeringnotes.Thisdecreasedusefulrangemakesthecontrollerhardertouseaccurately.To remedythis,youcanadjustacontrollersbehaviorbyusingtheScaleparameteronthe correspondingcontrollerssetuppage(seeScalebelow.)AdjusttheScalevaluetostretchthe usefulvaluesofthecontrolleracrossitswholephysicalrange.Ascalevalueoflessthan100% willbehelpfulforpatternswithfewerthan12steps.Experimentbyadjustingthescalevalue untilthehighestdesirednoteistriggeredatthetopofthecontrollersphysicalrange.SeeScale intheContinuousControllerParameterssectionofthischapterformoredetailsontheScale parameter.Forshiftpatternswithmorethan12steps,youwillrunoutofcontrollervalues beforeyourshiftpatterntriggersineveryoctave.Ifyouwanttobeabletoaccessallofthe availableoctaves,youcanachievethisbysettingmultiplecontrollerstoShiftKeyNumber. Next,usetheScaleandOffsetparametersforeachcontroller,adjustingeachtotriggerthe desiredrangeofoctaves.

7-25

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

The Pan/Volume (PAN/VOL) Page

Bychangingtheparametersonthispage,youcandefinehoweachzonesendsMIDIvolume andpanmessages.

Parameter Entry Volume Exit Volume Entry Pan Exit Pan

Range of Values None, 0-127 None, 0-127 None, 0-127 None, 0-127

Default None None None None

Entry Volume, Exit Volume

EntryVolumeenablesyoutocontroltheinitialMIDIvolumesettingforeachzoneofthecurrent setup.WhenyouselectasetupinSetupmode,MIDIchannelsforzonesthathaveanEntry VolumevalueotherthanNonewillreceivethatvalueasaMIDIvolumecontrolmessage(MIDI Controller07.)Thissetsthestartingvolumelevelforeachzone.SubsequentMIDIvolume controlsignalssenttothesetupsMIDIchannelsaffectthevolumenormally. Whenyouexitthecurrentsetup,eachzonesendsanothervolumecontrolmessage(MIDI Controller07)tosetthevolumesonthePC3LEsMIDIchannels,accordingtothevalueofthe ExitVolumeparameter(unlessExitVolumeissettoNone.)

Entry Pan, Exit Pan

EntryPanenablesyoutocontroltheinitialMIDIpansettingforeachzoneofthecurrentsetup. WhenyouselectasetupinSetupmode,MIDIchannelsforzonesthathaveanEntryPanvalue otherthanNonewillreceivethatvalueasaMIDIpancontrolmessage(MIDIController10.) Thissetsthestartingpanpositionforeachzone.SubsequentMIDIpancontrolsignalssentto thesetupsMIDIchannelsaffectthepannormally. Whenyouexitthecurrentsetup,eachzonesendsanotherpancontrolmessage(MIDIController 10)tosetthepanpositionsonthePC3LEsMIDIchannels,accordingtothevalueoftheExitPan parameter(unlessExitPanissettoNone.) Mostprogramsrespondtopanmessagesonthenextkeystrike.Thismeansthatifyouholda noteandchangethepan,thecurrentnotewillstayatitscurrentpositionuntilyoustrikeit again.However,aPC3LEprogramthatusesthePANNEReffectinaeffectsChainwillrespond torealtimepanadjustmentsaswell.

7-26

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

The Key/Velocity (KEY-VEL) Page

TheKey/Velocitypageallowsyoutosetkeyrange,velocityrange,transposition,andNote Mapsforeachzone. Note:Asidefromthesettingsonthispage,MIDIvelocitiescanbeaffectedbysettingsyoumakeonother pages:SeeVelocityMap(VelMap)(Master) on page 93foranoverallsettingthataffectsallMIDI velocitiesinputtothePC3LE,andallMIDIvelocitiessenttotheinternalsoundengineandUSBor MIDIoutports(exceptforvelocitiesoutputwheninSongMode.)SeeVelocityMap (Transmit) on page 914forsettingsthataffectonlythoseMIDIvelocitiessenttotheUSBorMIDIout ports(exceptforvelocitiesoutputwheninSongMode.)SeeVelocityMap(Receive) on page 918for settingsthataffectonlythoseMIDIvelocitiesreceivedbytheUSBorMIDIinports.Oneachofthepages mentionedabove,lookattheMIDIsignalflowcharttoseewhichvelocitymapscanaffectyourvelocities dependingonwhichMIDISources,MIDIDestinationsandoperatingmodethatyouareusing.

Parameter Low Key (LoKey) High Key (HiKey) Low Velocity (LoVel) High Velocity (HiVel) Transpose Note Map Velocity Scale (VelScale) Velocity Offset (VelOffset) Velocity Curve (VelCurve)

Range of Values C -1 to G9 C -1 to G9 1 to 127 1 to 127 -128 to +127 Semitones Note Map List 300% -128 to +127 Velocity Curve List (seeVelocity Curve (VelCurve) on page 7-32)

Default C -1 G9 1 127 0Linear 100% 0 Linear

Low Key (LoKey), High Key (HiKey)

TheLoKeyandHiKeyparametersdefinethenoterangeofthecurrentlyselectedzone.The easiestwaytochangethesevaluesistopressandholdtheEnterbuttononthealphanumeric padandpressthekeyofthenoteyouwishtoenter.Youcansetthesevalueswithnormaldata entrymethodsaswell. Youcancreatenegativerangesaswell.Todothis,selecttheHiKeyparameterandsetitslimit lowerthantheLoKeylimit.Thisresultsinthezonebeingactiveatthetopandbottomofthe keyboard,butbeingsilentintherangebetweenthetwolimits.Thisletsyoucreatealayerwitha holeinthemiddle,whichyoucanthenfillwithadifferentsoundonanotherzone. ThelimitsofMIDIareC1toG9.Theuntransposed88keyrangeisA0toC8.Theuntransposed 76keyrangeisE1toG7.

7-27

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Transpose
Thischangesthepitchofthezone,withoutchangingitspositiononthekeyboard.Itchangesthe MIDInotenumbersgeneratedbythekeysinthezone,withoutphysicallyshiftingthezone.The rangeis128to127semitones.Sincethereare12semitones(orhalfsteps)toanoctave,youcan transposeupordownovertenoctaves.Ifyoutransposeoutoftherangeoftheactivevoice, however,nonoteswillsound;MIDInotenumberswilltransmit,butnoteswillnot.

Note Map
NoteMapletsyouchangethewaynotesaresentfromthePC3LE.ThedefaultsettingisLinear: allnotesgooutasplayed.PressingtheMinusbuttontakesyoutoOff;nonotesaresent,but controllersandothernonnotedataare. SettingNoteMaptoInverseeffectivelyturnsthekeyboardupsidedown,withthehighestkey beingA0andthelowestC9.IfyousetNoteMaptoConstant,allofthekeysonthekeyboard willplaythesamenote.ThenotedefaultstoC4,butyoucanchangethiswiththeTranspose parameter.Thisworkswellwhenyouwantthesoundfromaparticularkeytoplaywithevery noteofanotherzoneforexample,playingaridecymbalwitheverynoteinabassline. Nextarethealternatingnotemaps,whichletyoudividethekeyboardinsomeuniqueways.If youareusingtwoormoreMIDIdevices(includingthePC3LE),youcanexpandpolyphonyby assigningeachzonetoadifferentalternatingnotemap.Forexample,ifyouhavetwoPC3LEs, youcanassigntwozonestoeachplaythesameprogramonadifferentPC3LE,thereby doublingpolyphony. Tosplitazoneintooneoftwoalternatingnotemaps,setNoteMapto1of2;nowthezoneplays oneverysecondkey,startingonC,butwontplayonanyotherkeys.Setanotherzoneto2of2, andthiszonewillplayoneverysecondkey,startingonC#,thuscoveringtheremainingkeys. Threeandfourzonealternatingnotemapsworkthesameway,butcauseeachzonetoplayonly oneverythirdandeveryfourthkey,respectively. Notemapsarealsousedtocreatedrumpatternswiththearpeggiator.Severaloftheincluded factorysetupsusethisfeature.

7-28

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Velocity Scale (VelScale)

Thisletsyouamplifyordiminishvelocityresponse.Normalresponseis100%.Highervalues makethekeyboardmoresensitive(youdontneedtoplayashardtogethigherMIDIvelocities) whilelowervaluesmakeitlesssensitive(playingharderdoesntchangeMIDIvelocityas much).Youcanalsosetthescaletoanegativenumber,inwhichcasethevelocityresponseis turnedupsidedown:playingharderproducesasoftersoundandviceversa.Thisisusefulfor creatingvelocitybasedcrossfadesbetweenzones.SeethefollowingsectiononVelocityOffset forideasaboutnegativescaling. ThefollowingillustrationshowswhathappenswhenyouchangeVelocityScale.Notethat VelocityScaleistheonlyparameterchangedinthisexample;theotherparametersaresetto theirdefaults(offset=0,curve=linear,min=1,max=127). 127

Velocity Scale: 100%

as you strike the keys harder (increase the velocity) MIDI velocity increases proportionally

MIDI Velocity

Velocity Scale: 200%

MIDI velocity reaches maximum on medium strike velocity

64

Velocity Scale: 50%

MIDI velocity never reaches maximum, even on maximum strike velocity

64 Strike Velocity

127

7-29

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Velocity Offset (VelOffset)

VelOffsetalsochangestheresponse,butinamoredirectway,byaddingorsubtractinga constanttothekeyvelocity.Forexample,ifthisissetto25(assumingascaleof100%),then25is addedtothevelocityofeverykeystroke,usuallymakingthesoundthatmuchlouder.The softestpossiblekeystrokewillhaveavalueof25,whileakeystrokewithvelocityof102will producethesamesoundasanotewithvelocity127(102+25=127).Negativevaluesdiminishthe response:asettingof25meanstheloudestvelocityavailablewillbe102,whileanykeystroke 25orbelowwillproduceavelocityof1(avelocityvalueofzerohasaspecialmeaninginMIDI andcannotbeusedforNoteOns). YoucanthinkofScaleasbeingaproportionalchangetothevelocity,whileOffsetisalinear change.ThemaximumvaluesforOffsetare127.Thefollowingillustrationshowstheeffectsof VelocityOffset.NotethatVelocityOffsetistheonlyparameterchangedinthisexample;the otherparametersaresettotheirdefaults(scale=100%,curve=linear,min=1,max=127).

127

MIDI Velocity

Velocity Offset: +64

low velocity keystrikes produce medium MIDI velocity and greater

64

Velocity Offset: -64

low velocity keystrikes result in MIDI velocity of 1; maximum MIDI velocity reduced

64 Strike Velocity

127

7-30

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

OffsetandScaleworktogether.Ifscalingtakesthevelocityoutoftheballparkforexample, youwanttosetitto300%butthatputsallofyournotesatmaximumvelocityusinga negativeoffset,sayaround60,canmakeitpossibletostillplayatdifferentvolumes,although yourcurvewillstillbealotsteeperthannormal.Ifyouuseanegativescaling,thenyoumust useanoffset:otherwiseallofyourvelocitieswillendupaszeroes(well,onesactually,sincea MIDInoteonwithvelocityzeroissomethingelse).Sotogettrueinversescaling(thatis,minus 100%),youmustsetanoffsetof127togetthefullrangeofvelocities.Settingtheoffsetto127 andthescaleto100%producesaslopelikethis(whichisthesameasthereverselinearcurve): 127

MIDI Velocity

64

64 Strike Velocity

127

NotethatOffsetandScaleaffectonlyMIDIvelocities;thatis,theseparametersdontchange VelocityTrackingintheprogramsthemselves.Therefore,someprograms(suchasorgan sounds,whichoftenhavelowVelTrkvalues)mayrespondonlysubtlytoOffsetandScale,or notatall.

7-31

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Velocity Curve (VelCurve)

VelCurveletsyoutaperthevelocityresponse.ThedefaultsettingisLinear,whichmeansthat theoutputvelocitychangesdirectlyproportionallytotheplayedvelocity. Expandproducesacurvethatislesssteepthanthelinearcurveatkeystrikevelocitiesbelow64, andsteeperthanthelinearcurveatkeystrikevelocitiesabove64.Inotherwords,whenyoure playingsoftly,youllnoticevelocitydifferenceslessthanwithalinearcurve,whilewhenyoure playinghard,youllnoticevelocitydifferencesmore. Compressproducesavelocitycurvethatistheoppositeoftheexpandedcurvethatis,youll noticevelocitydifferencesmorewhenyoureplayingsoftlythanwhenyoureplayinghard.

127

Velocity Curve: Linear

as you hit the keys harder (increase the velocity) MIDI velocity increases proportionally

MIDI Velocity

Velocity Curve: Compress

MIDI velocity is greater at medium strike velocity than with Linear curve

64

Velocity Curve: Expand

MIDI velocity is less at medium strike velocity than with Linear curve

64 Strike Velocity

127

7-32

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

CrossfadeisdesignedtobeusedintandemwiththeReverseCrossfadecurve,enablingyouto performsmoothcrossfadesbetweendifferentprograms. Bumptapersvelocityresponsetoresembleabellcurve,sothatnotesareloudestwhenyour keystrikevelocityis64.Notesgetsofterasthekeystrikevelocityapproaches0or127. 127 Velocity Curve: Linear

as you hit the keys harder (increase the velocity) MIDI velocity increases proportionally

MIDI Velocity

Velocity Curve: Bump

MIDI velocity is greatest at medium strike velocity

64

Velocity Curve: Crossfade

Below medium strike velocity, MIDI velocity is less than with Linear curve; above medium strike velocity, MIDI velocity is greater than with Linear curve

64 Strike Velocity

127

ThenextfourvelocitycurvesareReverseLinear(RvrsLinear),ReverseExpand(RvrsExpand), ReverseCompress(RvrsCompress),andReverseCrossfade(RvrsCrossfade).Thesetaper velocityinreverseofthefivecurveswejustcovered.Forexample,ReverseLinearsresponseis suchthatstrikingakeyharderwillproducealowervolume,strikingitsofterwillproducea highervolume,andsoon.Thisprovidesaconvenientwaytoachievenegativescaling,byletting yousetoneparameterinsteadoftwo.

127

Velocity Curve: Reverse Linear

as you hit the keys harder (increase the velocity) MIDI velocity decreases proportionally

MIDI Velocity

Velocity Curve: Reverse Compress

MIDI velocity is more at medium strike velocity than Reverse Linear curve

64

Velocity Curve: Reverse Expand

MIDI velocity is less at medium strike velocity than Reverse Linear curve

Velocity Curve: Reverse Crossfade

Below medium strike velocity, MIDI velocity is greater than with Reverse Linear curve; above medium strike velocity, MIDI velocity is less than with Reverse Linear curve

64 Strike Velocity

127

7-33

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Low Velocity (LoVel), HighVelocity (HiVel)

LoVelandHiVelsettheminimumandmaximumvelocitylimitsthatthecurrentzonetransmits. Akeystrokeinthecurrentzonewhosevelocityafterithasbeenscaledandoffsetisbelow theminimumdoesnotgenerateaNoteOn.Neitherdoesakeystrokewhosevelocityafter processingisabovethemaximum.Theseparametersareusefulforvelocityswitching havingakeyplaydifferentsoundsdependingonhowhardyoustrikeit. Thevaluescanbeanywherefrom1to127.Aswithotherparameters,zonescanoverlaporbe totallydiscrete,orbeidentical.Usually,LoVelwillhaveasmallervaluethanHiVel,butaswith LoKeyandHiKey,youmayalsocreateagapinvelocityresponse,bysettingnegativerangesfor velocity. 127

MIDI Velocity

Velocity Min: 1, Max: 64

No MIDI Note Ons are transmitted when you strike keys with medium velocity or greater

64

64 Strike Velocity

127

127

MIDI Velocity

Velocity Min: 64, Max: 127

No MIDI Note Ons are transmitted unless you strike keys with velocity of medium or greater

64

64 Strike Velocity

127

7-34

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

EachzoneinasetuphasitsownArpeggiator.Whenactivated,eachArpeggiatortakesMIDI noteinputfromthePC3LEkeyboard(orviaMIDI)andoutputsarhythmicpatternofMIDI notes.Youcancontrolthespeedandnatureofthepatterninrealtime.EachArpeggiatorcan affectboththePC3LEandexternalMIDIinstruments.ThenotesproducedbytheArpeggiator inagivenzonegotoallofthatzonesdestinations:local,MIDI,orboth.Youcanalsosetone zonesarpeggiatortooverridearpeggiatorsonotherzonesusingtheArpeggiatorGlobal (ArpGlobal)parameteronSetupModesCOMMONpage. TheconceptbehindthePC3LEsArpeggiatorsisfairlysimple,althoughtheoptionsare extensive.YoumightthinkofeachArpeggiatorasanoteprocessor,generatingcomplex outputfromrelativelymodestinput.Youcanselectanynumberofnotesfortheinput,andtell theArpeggiatortorecognizeandrememberthem.Thisiscalledlatchingthenotes.The Arpeggiatorthenprocessesthembyplayingthemrepeatedly,and/ortransposingthemupand downthekeyboard.Youhavecontroloverseveralprocessingparameters:velocity,order, duration,transposition,orchestration,whetherthenotesareplayedsimultaneously,and whethertheintervalsbetweennotesarefilledchromatically.YoucanalsotelltheArpeggiator howtodealwithnewinformationcomingfromthekeyboardwhentheArpeggiatorisalready processingnotes. Thearpeggiatoralsoincludesstepsequencersfornoteandvelocityshifting,allowingyouto morepreciselycontrolhowyourMIDInoteinputisprocessed.Setthearpeggiatorparameters ontheARPEGGIATORandARPEGGIATOR2pages:

The ARPEGGIATOR Page

Note:InProgramMode,pressingtheArpbuttonwillbringyoutoasimilarArpeggiatorscreenforthe currentprogram.

Parameter Active Beats Play Order Duration Velocity

Range of Values On/Off 1/1 (Whole Notes) to 1/384 (96 notes per beat) Played, Upwards, Downwards, UpDown, UpDown Repeat, Random, Shuffle, Walking, Simultaneous 1% to 100% First, Played, Last, Aftertouch, MIDI 109, Fixed, Pattern (174 factory patterns, user created patterns,) Human1-4, Chimp1-4, MissNotes1-9 88 Semitones 0-60 Stop, Reset, Unipolar, Bipolar, Float Res, Float Uni, Float Bip Off, (1-69 factory patterns, user created patterns)

Default Off 1/16 (16th Notes) Played 100% Played

ShiftAmount ShiftLimit Limit Option ShftPattrn (Shift Pattern)

0 24 Unipolar Off

7-35

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Active ThefirstparameterontheArpeggiatormenuisActive,whichspecifieswhetherornotthe Arpeggiatorisonforthecurrentzone.Thisparametercanbeswitchedfromthe ARPEGGIATORpage,orforrealtimecontrol,itcanbeswitchedonusingControllernumber 147(ArpOn)andswitchedoffusingControllernumber148(ArpOff );theseControllerscan,of course,beassignedasthedestinationofaPC3LEphysicalcontroller. TurningActiveonaffectszoneswhoseZoneArpegvaluesarealsosettoOn.Bysettingthe ZoneArpegparameter(ontheCH/PRGpage)toOfforOnintheindividualzonesofasetup, youcanchoosewhichzoneswillbecontrolledbytheArpeggiatorwhenitison. Beats TheBeatsparametersetsthenumberofnotesperbeat.Thetempoisbasedonquarternotes. Therefore,ifyousetitto1/4,youwillgetonenoteperbeatoftheclock.At1/16,youwillget 4 notesperbeat,andsoforth.Youcangoallthewayto96notesperbeat(1/384),butatmost tempos,divisionssmallerthan1/64willsoundprettymuchthesame.TofindaBeatsvalue, multiplythenotesyouwantperbeatby4.Forexample,4notesperbeat(16thnotes)wouldbe 4*4=16,aBeatsvalueof1/16.Threenotesperbeat(8thnotetriplets)wouldbe3*4=12,aBeats valueof1/12.Sixnotesperbeat(16thnotetriplets)wouldbe6*4=24,aBeatsvalueof1/24.Note thatwhenrecordingarpeggiationstoaPC3LEMIDItrack,youmustturnonrealtime quantizationandsetittothesameGridvalueinorderfortheselectedBeatsvaluetosync properlywiththetempogrid(seeQuantandGrid on page 1018.) Play Order ThisparameterdeterminestheorderinwhichthePC3LEplaysarpeggiatednotes.Played causesthemtoplaybackinthechronologicalorderinwhichyouplayedandlatchedthem. Upwardsmeansthatnotesplayinascendingpitchorder,regardlessoftheirchronological order.Downwardsmeansdescendingpitchorder.UpDowncausesnotestoplayfromlowest pitchtohighest,thenfromhighestpitchtolowest,repeatingthecycleuntilyoustopthe arpeggiation.Thenotesattheverytopandverybottomonlyplayonce.UpDownRepeatis similartoUpDown,exceptthatthenotesatthetopandbottomplaytwice(repeat)whenthe Arpeggiatorreversesdirection. Randomplaysthecurrentlylatchednotesincompletelyrandomorder.Shuffleplaysthemat random,butkeepstrackofthenotessothatnonoterepeatsuntilalloftheothershaveplayed. Walkisarandomwalkorder:eachsuccessivenoteiseitherthenextorpreviousnote(in chronologicalorder).Forexample,supposeyouvelatchedfournotesG 4,B 4,D 5,andF 5 inthatorder.ThefirstnotetheArpeggiatorplaysistheG 4.ThesecondnotewillbeeitherB 4 (thenextnotechronologically),orF 5(thepreviousnotechronologicallythatis,thelast latchednote).IfthesecondnoteisB 4,thethirdnotewillbeeitherD 5orG 4.Ifthesecondnote isF 5,thethirdnotewillbeeitherG 4orD 5. SimultaneousmakestheArpeggiatorlatcheachnoteyouplayandrepeatitintimewiththe Tempovalue,sortoflikeadigitaldelaywithnodecay.IfyouplayaCandholditwhileyouplay anEandaG,theArpeggiatorwillplayallthreenotesatthesametimeandatthesametempo. SimultaneousalsoworkswellwithShiftandLimit,allowingyoutoshiftmultiplenotes simultaneously. Duration Durationdetermineshowlongeacharpeggiatednoteplays.100%meansthatanotesustains untilthenextonesoundsverylegato.50%meansthatthenotefillshalfthespacebetween itselfandthenextnote.Thelowestvalueis1%stacattissimo.Thisparameterhasnoeffecton percussionsoundsorothersoundswhosedurationisfixed.

7-36

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Velocity Velocitysetstheattackvelocityoftheplayednotes.WithVelocitysettoFirst,allnotesplayat thevelocityofthefirstplayednote.WithVelocitysettoPlayed,eachnoterepeatswiththesame velocityyouplayeditat.WithVelocitysettoLast,allnotesplayatthevelocityofthemost recentlyplayednote.WithVelocitysettoAftertouch,thevelocitiesarecontrolledbykeyboard pressure:asyouholdandpushdownonanykey,thevelocitiesgethigher,andasyoueaseup theygetlower. WithVelocitysettoMIDI109,MIDIcontroller109continuallysetsthearpeggiatorvelocity.This workswellwhenMIDIcontroller109issettoaknoborexpressionpedal. WithVelocitysettoFixed,allnotesplaywiththesamevelocity.ThedefaultFixedvelocityis 100.LikeMIDI109,Youcancontrolthisvelocityamountinrealtimebyassigningacontroller toVelFixed,controllerdestinationnumberis175.Inputfromanyphysicalcontrollerassignedto sendVelFixed(oranyentryvalueforacontrollerassignedtosendVelFixed)overridesthe programmedvalueoftheVelocityparameter,disablingituntilyouselectadifferentsetup(orin Programmode,untilyouselectadifferentcontrolsetupontheMIDImodeTRANSMITpage). Patternengagesastepsequencerforarpeggiatorvelocitypatterns,whichshiftsthevelocityof eacharpeggiatednoteaccordingtoasequencedpattern.Thereare74preprogramedvelocity patternsthatyoucanchoosefromtheVelPattfield,someofwhichcreaterhythmsbyusing velocityvaluesof127ornonetoleaverestsinthearpeggiation.Thesequencerusesthe velocityreceivedfromthefirstnoteplayedasthecenterpositiontoshiftvelocitiesupordown from.Ifnootherkeysareplaying,patternswillstartovereachtimeakeyispressed(thereare someexceptionstothiswhenusingARPEGGIATORLatchparametersotherthanKeys,thougha newlytriggeredpatternwillalwaysstartatstep1.)Whentriggeringvelocitypatternsfrommore thanonekeyatatime,eachconsecutivestepofthepatternshiftsthevelocityfromadifferent inputtedkey,theorderofwhichisdecidedbytheorderparameterontheARPEGGIATORpage. Note:Forpatternswithnegativevelocityvalues,ifthevelocityofthefirstplayednoteislowenoughthat apatternstepcouldresultinavelocityofzero,somenotesmayhaveavelocityofzeroandtherefore producenosound. YoucanedittheincludedpatternsbypressingEditwithapatternhighlightedintheVelPatt field(seeeditscreenbelow.)

ThetoplineoftheEditVelocityPattpagedisplaysthepatternsnameandtotalnumberof steps.Thispagealsoshowsthefullnameforapatternwhosenamedoesnotfitonthe ARPEGGIATORpage.Eachpatterncanhaveupto48steps,andeachstepcanshiftvelocitiesby 127steps.Youcaninsertastepwithavalueofnonebyentering127andthenshiftingdown onemorestep.Astepwiththevaluenonecausesthearpeggiatortoplaynothingforthatstep, allowingyoutocreaterhythmicpatternsbyusingnonetoleavespaces.PressingStep removesthelaststepinthelist,pressingStep+insertsanewvelocitystepattheendofthelist (thepatterneditorremembersthevaluesofremovedstepsuntilyousaveorexit.)Usethecursor tomovebetweenpatternsteps,usethealphawheel,alphanumericpad,orplus/minusbuttons toenterthevelocityshiftamountforeachstep.PressMoretoseeasecondpageforpatterns withmorethan24steps.

7-37

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

PressDeletetodeletethepatternfrommemory.PressRenametorenamethepatternandsave. PressingSavegivesyoutheoptiontosavethepatternorrenameandsave.Tocreateanew VelPatt,editanexistingpatternandchooseRenamewhensaving.PressExittoreturntothe ARPEGGIATORpage.Whenexitingtheeditor,itwillautomaticallygiveyoutheoptiontosave thepatternifchangeshavebeenmade.Formoredetailedinstructionsonthesefunctions,see SavingandNaming on page 53. TheHuman1throughHuman4settingsrandomlychangeplayednotevelocitywithinarangein ordertomakearpeggiationsoundmorehumanlike,witheachnotevaryingslightlyinvelocity. TheHumansettingsusethevelocityreceivedfromthefirstnoteplayedasthecenterofthe randomizationrange.Eachnoteofthearpeggiatorwillrandomlychooseavelocitywithinthe givenrange.(Seethetablebelowforvelocityranges.) TheChimp1throughChimp4settingsfunctioninasimilarfashiontotheHumansettings(see above.)LiketheHumansettings,theChimpsettingsrandomlychangeplayednotevelocity withinarange,buttheChimpsettingshavelargerrandomizationranges.TheChimpsettings usethevelocityreceivedfromthefirstnoteplayedasthecenteroftherandomizationrange. Eachnoteofthearpeggiatorwillrandomlychooseavelocitywithinthegivenrange.(Seethe tablebelowforvelocityranges.) Note:ForHumanandChimpmodes,ifthevelocityofthefirstplayednoteislowenoughthattheselected randomizationrangecouldresultinavelocityofzero,somenotesmayhaveavelocityofzeroandtherefore producenosound. Velocity Randomization Range
3 6 10 15 25 35 50 64

Velocity Setting
Human1 Human2 Human3 Human4 Chimp1 Chimp2 Chimp3 Chimp4

7-38

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

MissNotes1throughMissNotes9makesthePC3LErandomlymissplayingapercentageof inputtednotes.Seethetablebelowforpercentagesandtheirequivalentsettings.Eachofthese settingsalsorandomlychangessomeoftheinputtedvelocitiesinarangeof5,withthe purposeofsimulatingamorehumanplayedsound. Note:MissedNotesareactuallyoutputasnoteswithavelocityofzero. Velocity Setting

MissNotes1 MissNotes2 MissNotes3 MissNotes4 MissNotes5 MissNotes6 MissNotes7 MissNotes8 MissNotes9

Approximate % of Notes Missed

% 10 % 20 % 30 % 40 % 50 % 60 % 70 % 80 % 90

Shift Amount YoucantelltheArpeggiatortotransposeallofthecurrentlylatchednoteseachtimeitplays throughthem.ShiftAmountdetermineshowmuchtranspositionwilloccurforeachcycleof notes.Forexample,ifyouhavelatchedC4andF4,andyouassignaShiftAmountof2,the ArpeggiatorwillplayC4,F4,D4,G4,E4,A4,andsoonuntilitreachestheLimitvalue.TheShift Amountvaluescanrangefrom88to88,with0(thedefault)beingnotransposition. Shift Limit LimitdetermineshowfarupordowntheArpeggiatorshiftsfromtheoriginalnote.The minimumvalueis0,andthemaximumis60.WhentheArpeggiatorreachesthelimit,the ArpeggiatorrespondsaccordingtothesettingfortheLimitOptionparameter. Limit Option ThisparameterdetermineswhattheArpeggiatordoeswhenithasshiftedthecurrentlylatched notesup(ordown)totheshiftlimit.StopcausestheArpeggiatortostopwhenitreachesthe shiftlimit.ResetcausestheArpeggiatortoreturntoitsoriginalpitchandrepeatthelatched cycleofnotes,transposingeachcycleaccordingtothesettingsforShiftAmountandShiftLimit. IfthelimitallowsthenotestogooutofMIDIrange(forexample,ifyousetShiftto12,setthe limitto60,andplayC6),thenthoseghostnotesdontsound,buttheytakeuprhythmicspace: theArpeggiatorwaitsforthecycletoplayitselfoutbeforestartingover.

7-39

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Unipolarmeansthatafterplayinguptotheshiftlimit,theArpeggiatorbeginsshiftingnotesin theoppositedirection,untilitreachestheoriginalpitch,whereitreversesagain.Todetermine thenextnotewhenitreachestheshiftlimit,theArpeggiatorcalculatestheintervalbetweenthe shiftlimitandwhatthenextnotewouldbeiftheshiftlimitwerentthere.Itthenplaysthenote thatisthecalculatedintervallowerthanthelastnotebeforetheshiftlimit.Thesamething happensinreversewhenthearpeggiatednotesgetbackdowntotheoriginalpitch.The followingtablemakesthiseasiertovisualizebyshowingtheresultofarpeggiatingonenote (C4)inUnipolarmode,withShiftAmountsetto3STandvariousvaluesforShiftLimit.

Resulting Arpeggiation (When LimitOption is Unipolar) Shift Limit Up 6 ST (F#4) C4, D#4, F#4, Down D#4, C4 Up D#4, Same notes play in both directions when Shift Limit is a multiple of Shift Amount Last upward note before shift limit is F#4, next upward note would be A4, which is 2 ST from shift limit (G4); therefore first downward note is E4 (2 ST below last upward note) A4 is 1 ST from shift limit, therefore first downward note is F4 (1 ST lower than last upward note) All symmetrical again; now A4 is within shift limit Next upward note would be C5, which is 2 ST from shift limit C5 is 1 ST from shift limit Symmetrical again, including C5 Comment

7 ST (G4)

C4, D#4, F#4,

E4, C#4,

D#4,

8 ST (G#4) 9 ST (A4) 10 ST (A#4) 11 ST (B4) 12 ST (C5)

C4, D#4, F#4, C4, D#4, F#4, A4 C4, D#4, F#4, A4, C4, D#4, F#4, A4, C4, D#4, F#4, A4, C5,

F4, D4, F#4, D#4, C4, G4, E4, C#4, G#4, F4, D4, A4, F#4, D#4, C4,

D#4, D#4, D#4, D#4, D#4,

BipolarstartsoutthesamewayasUnipolar,butduringdownwardnoteshifting,itcontinues pasttheoriginalpitchuntilithitstheshiftlimitintheoppositedirection,whereitreversesagain. FloatResaddsabitofapparentrandomnesstotheprocess.Floatmeansthatwhenthe Arpeggiatorreachestheshiftlimit,itresetsbutnottoitsoriginalpitchaswithplainReset. LikeUnipolarandBipolar,itlooksatthefirstnotethatwouldexceedtheshiftlimit,and calculatestheintervalbetweenthatnoteandtheshiftlimit.Itthenrestartsthecycleoflatched notes,transposingtheentirecyclebytheintervalitjustcalculated,thenshiftingeach subsequentcyclebythevalueofShiftAmount,untilitreachestheshiftlimitagain. Heresaverysimpleexample.SupposethattheonlynoteintheArpeggiatorcycleis C4,Shift Amountis 4(athird),andShiftLimitis 7(sonoteswontgetshiftedaboveG4).TheArpeggiator playsC4,thenE4.ThenextnoteshouldbeG#4,butthatsabovetheshiftlimitsothePC3LE calculatesthedifferencebetweenthatG#4andtheshiftlimit(G4):onesemitone.Itaddsthat differencetotheoriginalstartingnote(C4)andplaysthatnotenextC#4.Thenextnote(F4)is withintheshiftlimit,butthenextnote(A4)isnt,soitgetstranslatedintoD4andsoon. FloatUniusesthesameconceptandappliesittoUnipolarmode:whentheArpeggiatorreaches theshiftlimit,itcalculatesthedifferencebetweenthenextnoteandthelimit,andtransposesthe nextcycleofnotesdownbythatinterval,thenshiftseachsubsequentcycledownuntilitreaches theoriginalpitch.FloatBipissimilartoFloatUni,butthedownwardshiftlimitisntthe originalpitch,itsthenegativeoftheShiftLimitvalue.

7-40

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

TheArpeggiatorcanbealotoffun,evenifyoudontalwaysunderstandexactlywhatitsdoing. Keepinmindthatthestrangerthealgorithmyousetup,themoreunlikelythenoteswillstay closetoonekey,soifyouwanttocreatesomethingthatsgoingtosoundatalldiatonic,keepit simple. Shift Pattern (ShiftPatt) ShiftPattengagesastepsequencerforarpeggiatornotepatterns.Theinputtednotenumberof eachplayedkeyisshiftedaccordingtoasequencedpattern,thusShiftPattern.ThePC3LEhas preprogramedshiftpatternsincludingmanyusefulchords,intervals,andrhythms.Youcan alsocreateyourowncustomshiftpatterns(seebelowfordetails.)Eachpatterncanhaveupto48 steps,andeachstepcanshiftnotesby127halfstepsorplaynothing.Stepsareplayedbackat theratesetforBeatsontheARPEGGIATORpage.KeepinmindthatShiftPatternsareeffected byeveryparameterontheARPEGGIATORpage,whichcanbethecauseofunexpected variation,orawaytoaddinterestingvariationtoapattern. ShiftPatternsaremosteasilyusedandunderstoodwhentriggeredbyonlyonekeyatatime. OnewaytopreventtriggeringfrommultiplekeysistouseoneoftheLatchtypes1NoteAuto, 1NoteAutoLow,or1NoteAutoHiwhenusingashiftpattern(seeLatch on page 742,below.) Triggeringshiftpatternsfromonekeyallowsthepreprogramedpatternstosoundlikewhat youwouldexpectfromtheirnames.Ifnootherkeysareplaying,patternswillstartovereach timeakeyispressed(therearesomeexceptionstothiswhenusingARPEGGIATORLatchparameters otherthanKeys,thoughanewlytriggeredpatternwillalwaysstartatstep1.)WhentriggeringShift Patternsfrommorethanonekeyatatime,eachconsecutivestepofthepatternshiftsthenote fromadifferentinputtedkey,theorderofwhichisdecidedbytheorderparameteronthe ARPEGGIATORpage.Thismeansthateachkeywillnotbeshiftedbyeverystepofthepattern, causingyoutoonlyhearpartofthepatternfromeachkey,oftenmakingthepattern unrecognizable.ThoughtriggeringaShiftpatternfrommultiplekeyscanbeusedcreatively,it canalsomakeithardtopredictwhattheoutputwillbe. YoucanedittheincludedpatternsbypressingEditwithapatternhighlightedintheShiftPatt field(seeeditscreenbelow.)ShiftPatternscanonlybeeditedfromwithintheSetupEditor(shift patternseditedinthesetupeditorcanbeusedbythearpeggiatorinProgrammode.)Thetoplineofthe EditShiftPattpageshowsthefullnameforapatternwhosenamedoesnotfitonthe ARPEGGIATORpage.Thispagealsodisplaysthepatternstotalnumberofsteps,aswellas patterndirection.PressingStepremovesthelaststepinthelist,pressingStep+insertsanew notestepattheendofthelist(thepatterneditorremembersthevaluesofremovedstepsuntil yousaveorexit.)Usethecursortomovebetweenpatternsteps,usethealphawheel, alphanumericpad,orplus/minusbuttonstoenterthenoteshiftamountforeachstep.Press Moretoseeasecondpageforpatternswithmorethan24steps.Youcaninsertastepwitha valueofnonebyentering127andthenshiftingdownonemorestep.Astepwiththevalue nonecausesthearpeggiatortoplaynothingforthatstep,allowingyoutocreaterhythmic patternsbyusingnonetoleavespaces.Whenthearpeggiatordeterminestherangeofpattern notesplayedwiththeLimitparameter(seebelow,)stepswithavalueofnonewillbe calculatedasastepvalueof0. Usethechanup/downbuttonstochangethedirectioninwhichpatternstepsareplayed (indicatedbyUp,Down,orFlatontherightofthetopline.)WithpatterndirectionsettoUp, thepatternplaysasexpected,startingatsteponeandmovingupthrougheachsteptowards step48.WithpatterndirectionsettoDown,thepatternstartsatstepone,butthenmovestothe laststepandcontinuestomovebackwardsthroughthestepsdowntowardsstep1. Additionally,patternssettoDownbaseallnotesaftersteponeintheoctavebelowthefirstnote played.Thesesettingsaremostusefulforarpeggiatingchordpatternsupwardsordownwards fromtherootnote.PatternssettoFlatwillnotrepeatinotheroctaveslikethosesettoUpor

7-41

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Down(dependingontheLimitparameter.)PatternssettoFlatplaywithouttransposition,the Limitparameterwillnottransposethepatternbutitcanstillrestrictnoterange.

PressDeletetodeletethepatternfrommemory.PressRenametorenamethepatternandsave. PressingSavegivesyoutheoptiontosavethepatternorrenameandsave.Tocreateanew ShiftPatt,editanexistingpatternandchooseRenamewhensaving.PressExittoreturntothe ARPEGGIATORpage.Whenexitingtheeditor,itwillautomaticallygiveyoutheoptiontosave thepatternifchangeshavebeenmade.Formoredetailedinstructionsonthesefunctions,see SavingandNaming on page 53.

The ARPEGGIATOR 2 Page

Parameter Latch Low Key High Key Glissando SyncTo SyncType Num Beats

Range of Values Keys, Overplay, Arpeg, Add, Auto, Pedals, Autohold, 1NoteAuto C -1 to G9 C -1 to G9 Off, On First Avail., Riff1-16, Main Seq., Arp1-16, FirstRiff.Av., FirstArp.Av., None, DownBeat, AnyBeat, DownBeatWait, AnyBeatWait 1-32

Default Keys C -1 G9 Off First Avail. None 4

Latch LatchdetermineshowtheArpeggiatorrespondstonoteswhentheyaretriggered.

7-42

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

KeysmeansthattheArpeggiatorplaysonlywhileyouareholdingoneormorekeysdown(or notetriggerson).Asyouplaydifferentnotes,theygetaddedtotheArpeggiator,andasyou releasenotes,theygettakenout.IfyouplaynotesfasterthantheArpeggiatorscurrenttempo, eachsubsequentnotewillbeaddedtothearpeggiationatthenextdivisionofabeat.Thiscan causealagbetweenthetimeyouplaythenoteandthetimeyouhearitinthearpeggiation. Inthenextthreemodes,theArpeggiatorlatchesnotesonlywhenMIDIController157(Latch) sendsavalueofOn(64orhigher).Aneasywaytoexperimentwiththesemodesistoassignthe ModWheeltosendMIDI157. InOverplaymode,theArpeggiatorlatchesanynotesthatarebeingheldwhenLatchturnson, andcontinuesplayingthem,evenafteryouletthemgo,untilLatchturnsoff.Anynotesthatyou playafterLatchisalreadyondonotgetarpeggiated,eveniftheyreinthearpeggiationrange. Arpegissimilar:anynotesheldwhenLatchgoesonarelatchedandarpeggiated,andkeep goinguntilLatchgoesoff.Anynotesyouplayoutsidethearpeggiationrangeplaynormally. Notesthatyouplayinsidethearpeggiationrangedonotplaynormally;rather,ifyouholdthem on,theybecomepartofthearpeggiation.Theydropoutofthearpeggiationassoonasyou releasethem. LikeOverplayandArpeggiation,AddmeansthatallnotesbeingheldwhenLatchgoesonget latched,andkeepplayinguntilLatchgoesoff(evenifyouvereleasedthenotes).Anynotesyou playafterLatchisalreadyonalsogetlatched. AutoisindependentofLatch;everynoteyouplayisautomaticallylatched,andtheArpeggiator runsaslongasyouholdatleastonearpeggiatednote.Aslongasyoukeepholdingonatleast onenote(itdoesnthavetobethesamenotethewholetime),everynoteyouplayinthe arpeggiationrangegetslatched. PedalsissortofacombinationofKeys,Add,andOverplaymodes.ItreliesonbothLatch(MIDI 157)andLatch2(MIDI158).Ifneitherlatchcontrollerison,noteswillarpeggiateonlywhileyou areholdingdownkeys(similartoKeysmode).IfyouactivateController158,thekeyscurrently helddownwilllatch,andanyadditionalkeysplayedwhileController158isonwillalsolatch (similartoAddmode).WhenController158isoff,anykeysthatarenotcurrentlyhelddown willberemovedfromthearpeggiation.IfyouactivateController157,keyscurrentlyhelddown willlatch,andanyadditionalkeysplayedwhileController157isonwillplaynormally(similar toOverplaymode).ThismodeiscalledPedalsmodebecauseyoumightwanttoassign Footswitch1toLatch(Controller157)andFootswitch2toLatch2(Controller158)tomakethe pedalsfunctionsimilarlytosustainandsostenutopedals.Additionally,youcouldassignone FootswitchtoSusLatch(Controller160)doingthismakestheFootswitchactasasustainpedal whenArpisoff,andasaLatchpedalwhenArpison. AutoholdissimilartoAuto.Holdingatleastonearpeggiatednoteonandplayingothernotes latchesthosenotes.UnlikeinAutomode,ifyoustopholdingatleastonearpeggiatednoteon, thearpeggiationcontinuesplaying(althoughyoucantlatchanymorenotes).Inthiscase,ifyou strikeanotherkeywithinthesetupsarpeggiationrange,youstartanewarpeggiationsequence. Autoholdisusefulforarpeggiatingchords:whenyouplayachord,itgetslatched,and continuesarpeggiatingafteryoureleasethechord.Whenyouplayanotherchord,theprevious chordgetsunlatched,andthenewonegetslatched.YoucanusethePanicsoftbuttontostop arpeggiationatanytime. 1NoteAutoissimilartoAutohold,exceptonlythelastnoteplayedislatched(evenifpreviously playednotesarestillbeingheld.)1NoteAutoisspecificallydesignedforusewithShiftPatterns (seeabove,)becauseShiftPatternsaredesignedtobeplayedfromonenoteatatime(though youcanuse1NoteAutowithoutaShiftPatternaswell.)Using1NoteAutoforzonesthatusea ShiftPatternensuresthatShiftPatternswillsoundcorrectbyonlyallowingonenoteatatimeto triggerthepattern.YoucanusethePanicsoftbuttontostoparpeggiationatanytime. 1NoteAutoLowand1NoteAutoHiarealsodesignedforusewithShiftPatterns.Theywork

7-43

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

similarlyto1NoteAuto,except1NoteAutoLowalwayslatchesthelowestnotewhenholding multiplenotes,and1NoteAutoHialwayslatchesthehighestnotewhenholdingmultiplenotes. YoucanalsousetheselatchtypeswithoutaShiftPatternifdesired. Low Key (LoKey) and High Key (HiKey) TheArpeggiatorprocessesnoteswithintherangeoftheseparameters.Notesoutsidethe specifiedrangeplaynormally,anddonotbecomepartofthearpeggiationsequence.Setthe LoKeyandHiKeyparametersusingthedataentrywheelorbuttons. Glissando WhentheGlissandoparameterisOn,theArpeggiatorchromaticallyfillsbetweenlatchednotes. WhenGlissandoison,theArpeggiatorignorestheShiftAmount,ShiftLimit,andLimitOption parameters. Youmustlatchatleasttwonotestogetaresult.WhenGlissandoison,allnotesplayedinthe arpeggiationrangegetlatched,althoughyouwontnecessarilygetmeaningfulresultsfromall latchednotes.Ingeneral,trytogeteachsubsequentnoteyoulatchtobeachangeindirection. Forexample,trylatchingthefollowingsequenceofnotes:C4,C5,G4,G5,C5,C6,G4,G5.The glissandochangesdirectionaroundeachchangeindirectionofthelatchednotes. SyncTo TheSyncToparameterdetermineswhatanarpeggiatorwillsyncto.Anarpeggiatorcansyncto anotherarpeggiator,ariff,orasongplayingfromSongmode.Youcanchooseaspecific arpeggiatororrifftosynctobysettingSyncTotoArp116orRiff116,andthecurrent arpeggiatorwillalwayssynctothatarpeggiatororriff.Forexample,ifyouhaveanarpeggiator onabasssoundinzone1andanarpeggiatoronaleadsoundinzone2,youmayalwayswant theleadarpeggiationinzone2tosynctothebassarpeggiationinzone1.Inthiscaseyouwould settheSyncToparameterinzone2toArp1. Youmaywanttohavealittlemorefreedomandnotbetiedtothebassarpeggiationinzone1as themaintimekeeper.Maybeyouwanttostartwiththeleadarpeggiationinzone2andhave thebassarpeggiationinzone1startlater.InthiscaseyouwouldsettheSyncToparameterfor zone2toFirstArp.Av.Withthissetting,thearpeggiatorwilllookforthefirstavailable arpeggiatortosyncto.Soifboththebassarpeggiationandtheleadarpeggiationhavethis parametersettoFirstArp.Av.,thearpeggiationthatisstartedfirstwillbethemain timekeeper.Iftheleadarpeggiatorstartsfirst,thebassarpeggiatorwillseethatasthefirst availablearpeggiatortosynctoandwilldoso.Ifthebassarpeggiatorisstartedfirst,thelead arpeggiatorwillseethatasthefirstavailablearpeggiatortosynctoandwilldoso.Thiscanbe veryhandyifyouareusingmultiplearpeggiatorsandwanttodosomeliveimprovisation;you canstartandstopdifferentarpeggiatorsandaslongisthereisonearpeggiatorplaying,any arpeggiatorwithSyncTosettoFirstArp.Av.willsyncbackupwhentriggeredagain. YoucanalsochooseFirstRiff.Av.,whichbehavesthesamewayasFirstArp.Av.,butmakesyour arpeggiatorlookforthefirstavailablerifftosyncto.AsettingofMainSeq.willsyncthe arpeggiatortothesongcurrentlyloadedinSongmode.YoucanselectasonginSongmode, thenplayitfromsetupmodewiththefrontpanelPlay/Pausebutton.(Doingthistemporarily replacestheprogramsinyoursetupszoneswiththeprogramusedforeachchannelinthesong,soits besttomakeasetupthatusesthesameprogramsasyoursongonthesameMIDIchannels.Ifyouplanon syncingriffswithasong,itmaybeeasiertostartbycreatingasetup,thenrecordingthesetupintoa song.SeeRecordingASetupToSongMode on page 767fordetails.)AsettingofFirstAvail.will syncthearpeggiatortothefirstavailablearpeggiator,riff,orsongfromSongmode. Note:IfyouhavemultiplearpeggiatorsorriffsalreadyplayingwhenusingFirstArp.Av.,FirstRiff.Av., orFirstAvail.forthecurrentarpeggiator,thecurrentarpeggiatorwillsynctothearpeggiatororriffof thelowestnumberedzonethathasanarpeggiatororriffplaying.

7-44

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

SyncType TheSyncTypeparameterallowsyoutochoosehowyourarpeggiatorwillsynctoother arpeggiators,riffs,orasongplayingfromSongmode. WithSyncTypesettoNone,yourarpeggiatorwillstartplayingassoonasitistriggered.Itwill notsynctoanything.WithSyncTypesettoDownBeat,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingto syncto,thecurrentarpeggiatorwillwaitforthedownbeatofthenextmeasurebeforestarting; so,youcantriggerthearpeggiatortostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncatthe downbeatofthenextmeasure.IfSyncingtoanarpeggiator,seeNumBeats on page 746fordetails onchangingwhenanarpeggiatorsdownbeatwilloccur.WithSyncTypesettoAnyBeat,ifthereis alreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,thearpeggiatorwillwaitonlyuntilthenextbeat. Dependingonwhenyoutriggerthearpeggiator,itwillsyncup,butitmaybeonanupbeatora downbeat. WithSyncTypesettoDownBeatWait,ifthereissomethingplayingtosyncto,thearpeggiator willwaitforthedownbeatofthenextmeasuretostart.ThedifferencefromDownBeatisthatif thereisnothingtosyncto,thearpeggiatorwillnotstart.Thiscanbeusefulifyouwanttostart multiplearpeggiatorssyncedtosomethingelse.Forexample,youcouldhaveabassarpeggiator settoDownBeatWait,forinstance,andtriggerthearpeggiatorwhilenootherarpeggiatorsare running.Assoonasyoustartsomethingelsetosyncto,thebassarpeggiatorwillstartplayingas well(providedthatitissettosynctosomethingelseorthefirstavailable.)Ifsomethingtosync toisalreadyrunning,DownBeatWaitbehavesjustlikeDownBeat. WithSyncTypesettoAnyBeatWait,ifthereissomethingplayingtosyncto,thearpeggiatorwill waitforthenextbeattostart.ThedifferencefromAnyBeatisthatifthereisnothingtosyncto, thisarpeggiatorwillnotstart.Thiscanbeusefulifyouwanttostartmultiplearpeggiators syncedtosomethingelse.YoucouldhaveabassarpeggiatorsettoAnyBeatWait,forinstance, andtriggerthearpeggiatorwhilenootherarpeggiatorsarerunning.Assoonasyoustart somethingtosyncto,thebassarpeggiatorwillstartplayingaswell(providedthatitissetto synctosomethingelseorthefirstavailable).Ifanotherarpeggiatorisalreadyrunning, AnyBeatWaitbehavesjustlikeAnyBeat. WithSyncTypesettoLoop,ifthereisalreadyarifforsongplayingtosyncto,thecurrent arpeggiatorwillwaitfortheplayingrifforsongtorestartitsloop(ifitislooped)beforestarting (seeLoop on page 752forloopingriffs,andLoop on page 1011forloopingsongs.)Thiswayyou cantriggerthearpeggiatortostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncatthestartofthe playingrifforsongsloop(providedthatitissettosynctoariff,song,orthefirstavailable). WithSyncTypesettoStop,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,thecurrent arpeggiatorwillwaitforwhatisplayingtostopbeforestarting.Thiswayyoucantriggerthe arpeggiatortostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncattherelease(stopping)oftheriff, arpeggiator,orsongthatyouaresyncingto. WithSyncTypesettoStartWait,ifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,thecurrentarpeggiator willwaitforsomethingitcansynctotobeginplayingfirstbeforestarting.Thisissimilarto DownBeatWait,butitwillonlytriggerthearpeggiatorthefirsttimethatwhateveritissyncing tostarts.Thiswayyoucantriggerthearpeggiatortostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsync atthestartoftheriff,arpeggiator,orsongthatyouaresyncingto.Ifyoustopthearpeggiator andtrytostartitagainwhilethethingyouaresyncingtoisalreadyplaying,StartWaitwillnot startthearpeggiator. WithSyncTypesettoLoopWait,ifthereisalreadyarifforsongplayingtosyncto,thecurrent arpeggiatorwillwaitfortheplayingrifforsongtorestartitsloop(ifitislooped)beforestarting (seeLoop on page 752forloopingriffs,andLoop on page 1011forloopingsongs.)Thiswayyou cantriggerthearpeggiatortostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncatthestartofthe playingrifforsongsloop.ThedifferencefromLoopisthatifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto, thearpeggiatorwillnotstart.Iftherifforsongthatyouaresyncingtoisalreadyrunning, LoopWaitbehavesjustlikeLoop.

7-45

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

WithSyncTypesettoStopWait,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,thecurrent arpeggiatorwillwaitforwhatisplayingtostopbeforestarting.Thiswayyoucantriggerthe arpeggiatortostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncattherelease(stopping)oftheriff, arpeggiator,orsongthatyouaresyncingto.ThedifferencefromStopisthatifthereisnothing playingtosyncto,thearpeggiatorwillnotstart.Thiscanbeusefulifyouwanttogetyour arpeggiatorreadytosyncbeforeyoustartwhateveryouaresyncingitto.Iftherifforsongthat youaresyncingtoisalreadyrunning,StopWaitbehavesjustlikeStop. Num Beats Thisaffectsthesyncingofotherarpeggiatororriffzonestothecurrentzone,onlyifthoseother zoneshaveaSyncTypesettingofDownbeatorDownbeatWait.Forzonesbeingsyncedtothe currentzonesarpeggiator,thisdetermineshowmanynotesmustbeplayedbythecurrent zonesarpeggiatorbeforeadownbeatoccurs.BydecreasingorincreasingthevalueoftheNum Beatsparameter,youcanmakezoneswithaSyncTypesettingofDownbeatorDownbeatWait behaveasifdownbeatsareoccurringlessormorefrequently.

Real-time Control of Arpeggiator Parameters

Youcanhaverealtimecontroloverseveralarpeggiatorparameters,byassigningphysical controllerstospecialarpeggiatorControllerDestinations.Anyinput(orentryvalue)froma physicalcontrollerassignedtoanarpeggiatorControllerDestinationoverridestheprogrammed valuesfortheparametersofthearpeggiatoronthatcontrollerszone.Theoverrideremainsin effectuntilyouselectadifferentsetup(oradifferentprograminProgrammode.)Remember, eachofthefollowingControllerDestinationsaffectsonlythearpeggiatorforthezonewhich yourcontrollerisassignedto.

Controller Number
147 148 150

Corresponding ARPEGGIATOR Parameter

ArpOn ArpOff ArpOrder

Operation
Any controller value turns the Arpeggiator On. Any controller value turns the Arpeggiator Off. Arpeggiator Order, each range of values selects one of nine options in order of the parameters list: 0-14 (Played,) 15-28 (Upwards, etc.,) 29-42, 43-56, 57-70, 71-84, 85-98, 99-112, 113-127 (Simultaneous.) Arpeggiator Beats, each range of values selects one of seven options in order of the parameters list: 0-18 (Quarter notes,) 19-36 (8th notes, etc.,) 37-54, 55-72, 73-90, 91-108, 109-127(32nd triplets.) The 88 Arpeggiator Shift steps are scaled over the 128 MIDI controller values, so that 0 = 0 steps and 127 = 88 steps. The 60 Arpeggiator Shift Limit steps are scaled over the 128 MIDI controller values, so that 0 = 0 steps and 127 = 60 steps. Arpeggiator Shift Limit Option, each range of values selects one of seven options in order on parameters list: 0-18 (Stop,) 19-36 (Reset, etc.,) 37-54, 55-72, 73-90, 91-108, 109-127 (FloatBip.)

151

ArpBeats

152

ArpShift

153

ArpLimit

154

ArpLmtOp

7-46

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Controller Number
155

Corresponding ARPEGGIATOR Parameter

ArpVel

Operation
Arpeggiator Velocity, each range of values selects one of twenty-three options in order on parameters list: 0-5 First,) 6-10 (Played, etc.,) 11-15...101-105, 106-110, 111-127 (MissNotes9.) The Arpeggiator Duration % values are scaled over the 128 MIDI controller values, so that 0 = 1% and 127 = 100%. For Arpeggiator Latch Pedals mode, 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. For Arpeggiator Latch Pedals mode, 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. Arpeggiator Gliss, 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. For Arpeggiator Latch Pedals mode, 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. Sets ARPEGGIATOR values for Shift to negative. 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. Selects one of the 128 patterns in the ShiftPatt Bank for the ARPEGGIATOR page of a controllers zone. A controller value selects the corresponding ShiftPatt Bank for the ARPEGGIATOR page of a controllers zone. For example, controller value 2 selects bank 2, controller value 7 selects bank 7. Selects one of the 128 patterns in the VelPatt Bank for the ARPEGGIATOR page of a controllers zone. A controller value selects the corresponding VelPatt Bank for the ARPEGGIATOR page of a controllers zone. For example, controller value 2 selects bank 2, controller value 7 selects bank 7. Sets arpeggiator velocity when velocity is set to Fixed for the ARPEGGIATOR page of a controllers zone.

156

ArpDur

157 158 159 160 170 171 172

Latch Latch2 ArpGliss SusLatch -Arp Shift ShiftPatt ShiftPBank

173 174

VelPatt VelPBank

175

VelFixed

7-47

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Riffs
RiffsarefullsongsorindividualtracksofasongcreatedinthePC3LEsSongmodethatyoucan triggerinsetupmode.StandardMIDIfilesmayalsobeimportedtoSongmodeandthenused asriffsinsetups.Everyzoneinasetupcanhaveitsownriffacompletelyindependent sequence.Youcanuseasetupwithmanyriffstotriggerandstoploopedsequencesofdifferent instrumentparts.Alternatively,asingleriffcanplaymultipleinstrumentparts.Eachriffcould beusedasadifferentsongsectionofabackingtrack.Fortutorialsonhowtoconfigureriffsfor basicuses,seeBasicsOfUsingRiffs on page 1435.Also,seeRiffTroubleshooting on page 1452for solutionstocommonproblems. Touseariff,firstgotoSongmodeandnotetheID#ofthesong,sectionofsongandtrackthat youwilluseforyourriff.NextgotoSetupmodeandcreateasetup.OntheCH/PRGpageofthe SetupEditor,choosetheprogramthatyouwanttousefortheriffonthecurrentzone.Program changesthatarerecordedinsongmodewillbeignoredwhenusingthesongasariffinasetup. YoucanalsosetuptheplaybackeventfilterinSongmodetoignoreothertypesofeventsas well.Onceyouhaveselectedyourprogram,pressthemoresoftbuttonuntilyougettothe RIFF1andRIFF2pages.Thefollowingsectionsdescribethecontentsofthesepages. Note:Bydefault,settingazonetotriggerariffwilldisabletheabilitytoplaynotesofthatzones programfromthekeyboard.Toreenablethisability,seeLocal on page 752.

The RIFF1 Page

ThefirstRiffpageappearsasshownbelow,andhasthefollowingparameters:

Parameter Riff Song (Bar) Start (Beat) (Tick) (Bar) Stop Transpose Root Note SrcTrack (Source Track) Re Channel (Beat) (Tick)

Range of Values Off, On Song List (dependent on sequence) 1 to (dependent on time signature) 0 to 959 (dependent on sequence) 1 to (dependent on time signature) 0 to 959 Off, On C -1 to G9 ALL, 1 to 128 Off, On

Default Off 0 None 1 1 0 2 1 0 Off C4 ALL Off

7-48

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Riff SettingtheRiffparametertoOnwillenabletherifffeatureforthecurrentzoneinsetupmode. SettingthisparametertoOffwilldisabletheriffforthiszone. Song SelectthesongyouwishtouseintheSongparameterbyusingtheAlphaWheel,/+buttons,or thealphanumericpad. Start UsetheStartparametertospecifytheriffstartpoint.ThetimeformatisBar:Beat:Tick.Barcan besettoanybarinthesequence,andBeatcanbesettoanybeatinthatbar(beatrangeis dependentontimesignature.)Tickcanbesetfrom0to959.Sincethereare960possiblestart pointswithinabeat,youcanspecifyyourrifftostartonanycommonbeatsubdivisionmoments (andafewuncommonones).ThefollowingTickvaluescorrespondtothefollowingbeat subdivisionmoments: Beat Subdivision
Quarter note 8th note

Beat Subdivision Moment

1st 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 1st 2nd 0 0 480 0 320 640 0 240 480 720 0 192 384 576 768 0 160 320 480 640 800

Tick Value

8th note triplet

16th note

16th note quintuplet

3rd 4th 5th 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th

16th note triplet (sextuplets)

Table 7-2

Subdivision Values

Stop UsetheStopparametertospecifytheriffstoppoint.LiketheStartparameter,thetimeformat forStopisBar:Beat:Tick.Barcanbesettoanybarinthesequence,andBeatcanbesettoany

7-49

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

beatinthatbar(beatrangeisdependentontimesignature.)Tickcanbesetfrom0to959.Refer toTable 72forTickvalues. ThePC3LErestrictstheselectablevaluesfortheStopparametersuchthatthecurrentriffisat leastonebeatlong. Transpose/Root Note WiththeTransposeparametersettoOn,theriffwilltransposetothevaluesetintheRootNote parameter.So,ifyouhaveariffwhoserootnoteisC4,youcansetanewrootnoteinthesetup sothattheriffwillplayinthecorrectrange.Inthisscenario,ifyouwanttotriggeryourrifffrom C1butitwasrecordedatC4,youwouldsetTransposetoOnandRootNotetoC1.Yourriffwill nowplayinthedesiredrangewhentriggeredfromtheC1key,whichnowcorrespondstothe noteC4. SrcTrack (Source Track) TheSrcTrackparameterdeterminesthesourcetrackoftheriff(fromtheriffsoriginalsequence inSongmode.)AlongwiththeStartandStopparameters,SrcTrackallowsyoutouseasingle sequenceasariffformanyzones,andtoselectadifferentsourcetrackandStart/Stopparameter settingforeachzonetoavoidhavingtocreateaspecialsequenceforeachriff. Tocreateasetupwithmultipleriffseachplayingasingleinstrumentpart,setasingletrackfor theSrcTrackparameter,andthattrackofthesequencewillplaywiththeprogramonthecurrent zone.Repeattheprocessonotherzonesusingthesamesongfortheriff,butusingadifferent SrcTrackforeachzone. Tocreateasetupwithasingleriffthatplaysmultipleinstrumentparts,setSrcTracktoALL. EachtrackofthesequencewillplayitstrackthroughthezoneswhichhavecorrespondingMIDI channels(MIDIchannelsaresetforeachzoneonTheChannel/Program(CH/PROG)Pageofthe SetupEditor,seepage 76.) Re Channel UsetheReChannelparameterwhenthecurrentzonesMIDIchannelandthechannelthatthe riffwasrecordedonarenotthesame.WhenReChannelissettoOn,thetrackselectedforthe SrcTrackparameterwillplaythroughtheMIDIchannelofthecurrentzone.Forexample,ifyou wanttouseariffonzone2/MIDIchannel2andtheriffwasrecordedontrack4/MIDIchannel4, youwillneedtoturnReChannelon.IfyouweretodothisandkeepReChannelsettoOff,the riffwouldplayusingtheprogramfromzone4insteadofzone2. WhenReChannelissettoOnandALLisselectedforSrcTrack,allofthetracksofthesequence willplaythroughtheMIDIchannelofthecurrentzone. Note:TracknumbersdonthavetomatchMIDIchannelnumbersinSongmode(thoughtheydo bydefault.)AsongthatusesnondefaultMIDIchannelsforitstrackscancausesomeconfusion whenusingitasariff.Forexample,usingariffonzone1,youcouldsettheriffsSrcTrack parameterto1,andexpecttherifftoplayonzone1(ifitissettoMIDIchannel1.)ButinSong mode,ifthesongyouareusingfortheriffhastrack1settoaMIDIchannelotherthan1,theriff willplayonthezonethathasthattracksmatchingMIDIchannel.Inthiscase,setReChannelto Oninorderfortherifftoplaythroughtheprogramoftheriffszone.

7-50

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

The RIFF2 Page

ThesecondRiffpageappearsasshownbelow,andhasthefollowingparameters:

Parameter Trigger Release CondRel Local Loop BPM Sync Zone Sync Type Release Sync Zone (RelSynZn) Release Sync Type (RelSynTyp) Duration Velocity Offset (HiKey) (LoKey) (HiKey) (LoKey)

Range of Values C -1 to G9 C -1 to G9 C -1 to G9 C -1 to G9 Off, On Off, On Once, Forever Sequence, Setup, External, 20 to 400 First Avail., Riff 1-16, Main Seq, Arp 1-16, FirstRiff.Av., First Arp.Av None, DownBeat, AnyBeat, DownBeatWait, AnyBeatWait, Loop, Stop, StartWait, LoopWait, StopWait First Avail., Riff 1-16, Main Seq, Arp 1-16, FirstRiff.Av., First Arp.Av None, DownBeat, AnyBeat, DownBeatWait, AnyBeatWait, Loop, Stop, StartWait, LoopWait, StopWait 1 to 1000% 0 to 255% -32768 to 32767

Default C -1 G9 C -1 G9 Off Off Forever Sequence First Avail. None First Avail. None 100% 100% 0

Trigger Thereareafewwaystotriggerriffsinsetupmode.OntheRiff2pageyoucanusetheTrigger fieldtosetakeyboardkeytotriggertheRiff.Also,anyphysicalcontrollercanbeassignedto controllerdestination163RiffOn.Lastly,seeControllers(CTRLS)Page on page 710,Padsection totriggerandreleaseaRifffromapad. Tosetthekeyrangetotriggeryourriff,usethecursorbuttonstoselecttheleftvalueinthe Triggerfield(thiswillbethelowendofthetriggerkeyrange.)Nowyoucanselectthekey numberbyscrollingtheAlphaWheel,oryoucanuseintuitiveentrybypressingandholdingthe Enterbuttononthealphanumericpadandpressingthedesiredkeyonyourkeyboard.Youwill seethisvaluechangeasyoupressakey. Next,moveyourcursortotherighttohighlightthesecondvalueoftheTriggerfield(thiswillbe thehighendofthetriggerkeyrange.)Useoneofthemethodsdescribedabovetoselectakey valueforthistriggerfield.Ifyouwanttohaveonlyonekeystartariff,settheTriggerkeyrange

7-51

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

fromA#0toA#0forexample,andyourriffwillbetriggeredtostartonlybypressingtheA#0 key.Ifyouwantyourtriggerkeyrangetobelarger,setyourTriggerkeyrangetobe,for instance,A#0toA#1.Nowanykeythatispressedwithinthisrangewilltriggeryourrifftostart. Note:theLoKeyandHiKeyvaluesontheKEYVELpagedoaffecttheriff.Ifyourriffstriggerandrelease notesarenotwithintheLoKeyandHiKeyrangeontheKEYVELpage,yourriffwillnotbeabletobe triggeredfromthekeyboard. Release Thewayyoureleaseriffsisanalogoustothewayyoutriggerthem.Youcanassignaphysical controllertodestination164RiffOff,oryoucanselectakeyorkeyrangewiththeRelease parameter.Yousetthisthesamewaythatyousetthetriggerrange.Moveyourcursorsothatthe leftfieldoftheReleaseparameterishighlighted(thiswillbethelowendofthetriggerkey range.)NowselectakeyvaluebyusingtheAlphaWheel,/+buttonsorintuitiveentry.Move yourcursortotherightfieldandrepeattheprocess(thiswillbethehighendofthetriggerkey range.)IfyousetbothoftheReleasevaluestoA0,theRiffwillstopwhenyoureleaseA0. So,ifyouusethesettingsdescribedaboveandintheTriggersectionabove,yoursetupsriffwill startwhenyoupressA#0,anditwillstopwhenyoupressandreleaseA0. Note:theLoKeyandHiKeyvaluesontheKEYVELpagedoaffecttheriff.Ifyourriffstriggerandrelease notesarenotwithintheLoKeyandHiKeyrangeontheKEYVELpage,yourriffwillnotbeabletobe triggeredfromthekeyboard. Conditional Release (CondRel) TheCondRelparameterallowsyoutohaveariffplayonlywhileakeyispressedandheld,and nothingwillstoporrestartthatriffuntilthekeyisreleased.Touseconditionalrelease,setthe samerangefortheTriggerandReleaserangesontheRIFF2page.Anykeythatispressedand heldwithinthisrangewillplaytheselectedriff.Releasethekeyandtheriffwillstop.Playing anyotherkeyinthiszonewhiletriggeringariffwithCondReleveniftheyarewithinthe TriggerandReleaserangeswillnotretriggerorstopthezonesriff. Local Ifyouwanttotriggeryourriffwithoutplayingthecurrentzonesprogram,setLocaltoOff. LocalissettoOffbydefaultsincemostuserswontwanttoplaytheprograminthezonethey areusingforariff,butonlywishhearthatzonesprogramasabackingtrack.WithLocalsetto On,youwillplaythecurrentzonesprogramanytimeakeyispressed.Thiscouldcreate undesiredgracenotesifyoutriggerariffthathasadownbeatatthesametimeyouare playinganote. Loop Ifyouwantyourrifftoloopindefinitely,setthisparametertoForever.Ifyouwanttohaveit playonceandthenstopuntilyouretriggerit,setthisparametertoOnce. BPM Therearefourchoicesherethatwilldeterminewhatcontrolsthetempoofyourriff.WithBPM settoSequence,theoriginaltempoinwhichtheriffwasrecordedwillbeused.WithBPMsetto Setup,thetemposetontheCOMMONorTapTempopageswillbeused.Whensyncing multipleriffsitisconvenienttoseteachriffsBPMparametertoSetup.Doingthis,youcan changethetempoofallriffsatoncewiththeTapTempobuttonorontheTapTempopage(see TapTempoButton on page 74.)AvalueofSetupisalsousefulforsyncingriffstoazones arpeggiator.WithTempoBPMsettoExternal,theriffwillsynctoexternalMIDIclock.Youcan

7-52

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

alsomanuallychooseatempobyselectingavaluefrom20to400forBPM.UsetheAlphaWheel or/+buttonstochoosebetweentheoptionsorsetatempo.Youcanalsousethealphanumeric padfollowedbypressingtheEnterbuttontoenteratempo. SyncZone TheSyncZoneparameterdetermineswhichzoneariffwillsyncto.Youcanchoosetosynctoa rifforarpeggioinaspecificzonebysettingSyncZonetoRiff116orArp116,andthecurrent riffwillalwayssynctotherifforarpeggiointhesetzone.Forexample,ifyouhaveadrumriff inzone1andabassriffinzone2,youmayalwayswantthebassriffinzone2tosynctothe drumriffinzone1.InthiscaseyouwouldsetthebassriffSyncZonetoRiff1. Youmaywanttohavealittlemorefreedomandnotbetiedtothedrumriffasthemain timekeeper.Maybeyouwanttostartwiththebassriffandhavethedrumriffstartlater.In thiscaseyouwouldsetSyncZonetoFirstRiff.Av.Withthissetting,theriffwilllookforthefirst availablerifftosyncto.Soifboththedrumriffandthebassriffhavethisparametersetto FirstRiff.Av.,theriffthatisstartedfirstwillbethemaster.Ifthebassriffstartsfirst,thedrum riffwillseethatasthefirstavailablerifftosynctoandwilldoso.Ifthedrumriffisstartedfirst, thebassriffwillseethatasthefirstavailablerifftosynctoandwilldoso.Thiscanbevery handyifyouhavemultipleriffsandwanttodosomeliveremixing;youcouldhavethedrums dropout,andaslongisthereisariffplayingtheywillsyncbackupwhentriggeredagain. YoucanalsochooseFirstArp.Av.,whichbehavesthesamewayasFirstRiff.Av.,butmakesyour rifflookforthefirstavailablearpeggiatortosyncto.AsettingofMainSeq.willsynctheriffto thesongcurrentlyloadedinSongmode.YoucanselectasonginSongmode,thenplayitfrom setupmodewiththefrontpanelPlay/Pausebutton.(Doingthistemporarilyreplacestheprograms inyoursetupszoneswiththeprogramusedforeachchannelinthesong,soitsbesttomakeasetupthat usesthesameprogramsasyoursongonthesameMIDIchannels.Ifyouplanonsyncingriffswitha song,itmaybeeasiertostartbycreatingasetup,thenrecordingthesetupintoasong.SeeRecordingA SetupToSongMode on page 767fordetails.)AsettingofFirstAvail.willsynctherifftothefirst availableriff,arpeggiator,orsongfromSongmode. Note:IfyouhavemultipleriffsorarpeggiatorsalreadyplayingwhenusingFirstRiff.Av.,FirstArp.Av., orFirstAvail.forthecurrentriff,thecurrentriffwillsynctotherifforarpeggiatorofthelowest numberedzonethathasarifforarpeggiatorplaying. SyncType TheSyncTypeparameterallowsyoutochoosehowyourriffwillsynctootherriffs, arpeggiators,andSongs(dependingonyoursettingsmadefortheSyncZoneparameter.)With SyncTypesettoNone,yourriffwillstartplayingassoonasitistriggered.Itwillnotsyncto anything.WithSyncTypesettoDownBeat,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,the currentriffwillwaitforthedownbeatofthenextmeasurebeforestarting;so,youcantriggerthe rifftostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncatthedownbeatofthenextmeasure.If Syncingtoanarpeggiator,seeNumBeats on page 746fordetailsonchangingwhenanarpeggiators downbeatwilloccur.WithSyncTypesettoAnyBeat,ifthereisalreadyasomethingplayingto syncto,theriffwillwaitonlyuntilthenextbeat.Dependingonwhenyoutriggertheriff,itwill syncup,butitmaybeonanupbeatoradownbeat. WithSyncTypesettoDownBeatWait,theriffwillwaitforthedownbeatofthenextmeasureto start.ThedifferencefromDownBeatisthatifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,theriffwillnot start.Thiscanbeusefulifyouwanttostartmultipleriffssyncedtooneriff.Youcouldhavea bassriffsettoDownBeatWait,forinstance,andtriggertheriffwhilenootherriffsarerunning. Assoonasyoustartanotherriff,thebassriffwillstartplayingaswell(providedthatitissetto synctoanotherriffortothefirstavailableriff.)Ifanotherriffisalreadyrunning, DownBeatWaitbehavesjustlikeDownBeat.

7-53

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

WithSyncTypesettoAnyBeatWait,theriffwillwaitforthenextbeattostart.Thedifference fromAnyBeatisthatifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,thisriffwillnotstart.Thiscanbe usefulifyouwanttostartmultipleriffssyncedtooneriff.Youcouldhaveabassriffsetto AnyBeatWait,forinstance,andtriggertheriffwhilenootherriffsarerunning.Assoonasyou startanotherriff,thebassriffwillstartplayingaswell(providedthatitissettosynctoanother rifforthefirstavailable).Ifsomethingisalreadyplayingtosyncto,AnyBeatWaitbehavesjust likeAnyBeat. WithSyncTypesettoLoop,ifthereisalreadyarifforsongplayingtosyncto,thecurrentriff willwaitfortheplayingrifforsongtorestartitsloop(ifitislooped)beforestarting(see Loop on page 752forloopingriffs,andLoop on page 1011forloopingsongs.)Thiswayyoucan triggertherifftostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncatthestartoftheplayingriffor songsloop. WithSyncTypesettoStop,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,thecurrentriffwill waitforwhatisplayingtostopbeforestarting.Thiswayyoucantriggertherifftostartaheadof time,andhaveitstartinsyncattherelease(stopping)oftheriff,arpeggiator,orsongthatyou aresyncingto. WithSyncTypesettoStartWait,ifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,thecurrentriffwillwait forsomethingitcansynctotobeginplayingfirstbeforestarting.Thisissimilarto DownBeatWait,butitwillonlytriggertheriffthefirsttimethatwhateveritissyncingtostarts. Thiswayyoucantriggertherifftostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncatthestartofthe riff,arpeggiator,orsongthatyouaresyncingto.Ifyoustoptheriffandtrytostartitagainwhile thethingyouaresyncingtoisalreadyplaying,StartWaitwillnotstarttheriff. WithSyncTypesettoLoopWait,ifthereisalreadyarifforsongplayingtosyncto,thecurrent riffwillwaitfortheplayingrifforsongtorestartitsloop(ifitislooped)beforestarting(see Loop on page 752forloopingriffs,andLoop on page 1011forloopingsongs.)Thiswayyoucan triggertherifftostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncatthestartoftheplayingriffor songsloop.ThedifferencefromLoopisthatifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,theriffwill notstart.Iftherifforsongthatyouaresyncingtoisalreadyrunning,LoopWaitbehavesjust likeLoop. WithSyncTypesettoStopWait,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,thecurrentriff willwaitforwhatisplayingtostopbeforestarting.Thiswayyoucantriggertherifftostart aheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncattherelease(stopping)oftheriff,arpeggiator,orsong thatyouaresyncingto.ThedifferencefromStopisthatifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,the riffwillnotstart.Thiscanbeusefulifyouwanttogetyourriffreadytosyncbeforeyoustart whateveryouaresyncingitto.Iftherifforsongthatyouaresyncingtoisalreadyrunning, StopWaitbehavesjustlikeStop. RelSynZn (Release Sync Zone) RelSynZnhasthesamesettingsavailableasSyncZone(seeSyncZone,above,)butRelSynZn determineswhatthereleasing(stopping)ofthecurrentriffwillbesyncedtowhenaparameter otherthanNoneisselectedforRelSynTyp(seebelow.) RelSynTyp (Release Sync Type) RelSynTyphasthesamesettingsavailableasSyncType(seeSyncType,above,)butRelSynTyp determineshowthereleasing(stopping)ofthecurrentriffwillbesyncedtootherriffs, arpeggiators,andSongs(dependingonyoursettingsmadefortheRelSynZnparameter.)With RelSynTypsettoNone,yourriffwillstopplayingassoonasitisreleased.Itwillnotsyncto anything.WithRelSynTypsettoDownBeat,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,the currentriffwillwaitforthedownbeatofthenextmeasurebeforestoppingwhenreleased;so, youcantriggertherifftostopaheadoftime,andhaveitstopinsyncatthedownbeatofthenext measure.IfSyncingtoanarpeggiator,seeNumBeats on page 746fordetailsonchangingwhenan

7-54

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

arpeggiatorsdownbeatwilloccur.WithRelSynTypsettoAnyBeat,ifthereisalreadyasomething playingtosyncto,theriffwillwaitonlyuntilthenextbeatbeforestoppingwhenreleased. Dependingonwhenyoureleasetheriffitwillstopinsyncwithabeat,butitmaybeonan upbeatoradownbeat. WithRelSynTypsettoDownBeatWait,theriffwillwaitforthedownbeatofthenextmeasureto stopwhenreleased.ThedifferencefromDownBeatisthatifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto, theriffwontstopwhenreleased.Ifanotherriffisalreadyrunning,DownBeatWaitbehavesjust likeDownBeat. WithRelSynTypsettoAnyBeatWait,ifthereisalreadyasomethingplayingtosyncto,theriff willwaitforthenextbeatbeforereleasing.ThedifferencefromAnyBeatisthatifthereis nothingplayingtosyncto,thisriffwillnotstopwhenreleased.Thiscanbeusefulifyouwantto stopariffinsynconlywhenanotherriffisplaying.Ifsomethingisalreadyplayingtosyncto, AnyBeatWaitbehavesjustlikeAnyBeat. WithRelSynTypsettoLoop,ifthereisalreadyarifforsongplayingtosyncto,thecurrentriff willwaitfortheplayingrifforsongtorestartitsloop(ifitislooped)beforestoppingwhen released(seeLoop on page 752forloopingriffs,andLoop on page 1011forloopingsongs.)This wayyoucanreleasetherifftostopaheadoftime,andhaveitstopinsyncatthestartofthe playingrifforsongsloop. WithRelSynTypsettoStop,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,thecurrentriffwill waitforwhatisplayingtostopbeforereleasing.Thiswayyoucantriggerthecurrentriffto releaseaheadoftime,andhaveitstopinsyncattherelease(stopping)oftheriff,arpeggiator,or songthatyouaresyncingto. WithRelSynTypsettoStartWait,ifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,thecurrentriffwillwait forsomethingitcansynctotobeginplayingfirstbeforereleasing.Thisissimilarto DownBeatWait,butitwillonlyreleasetheriffthefirsttimethatwhateveritissyncingtostarts. Thiswayyoucantriggertherifftostopaheadoftime,andhaveitstopinsyncatthestartofthe riff,arpeggiator,orsongthatyouaresyncingto.Ifyourestarttheriffandtrytoreleaseitagain whilethethingyouaresyncingtoisalreadyplaying,StartWaitwillnotstoptheriff. WithRelSynTypsettoLoopWait,ifthereisalreadyarifforsongplayingtosyncto,thecurrent riffwillwaitfortheplayingrifforsongtorestartitsloop(ifitislooped)beforestopping(see Loop on page 752forloopingriffs,andLoop on page 1011forloopingsongs.)Thiswayyoucan triggertherifftostopaheadoftime,andhaveitstopinsyncatthestartoftheplayingriffor songsloop.ThedifferencefromLoopisthatifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,theriffwill notstopwhenreleased.Iftherifforsongthatyouaresyncingtoisalreadyrunning,LoopWait behavesjustlikeLoop. WithRelSynTypsettoStopWait,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,thecurrentriff willwaitforwhatisplayingtostopbeforereleasing.Thiswayyoucantriggertherifftostop aheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncattherelease(stopping)oftheriff,arpeggiator,orsong thatyouaresyncingto.ThedifferencefromStopisthatifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,the riffwillnotstopwhenreleased.Iftherifforsongthatyouaresyncingtoisalreadyrunning, StopWaitbehavesjustlikeStop. Note:ForallRelSynTypsettingsexceptStop,StartWaitandStopWait,ariffcansyncitsrelease withitsself.Forexample,youcoulduseriff1andsyncittoitsselfbysettingRiff1forthe RelSynZnparameter.Then,ifyousetDownBeatfortheRelSynTypparameter,whenreleased theriffwouldalwayswaituntilitsnextdownbeattostop. Duration (Dur) DurationchangesthedurationofeachMIDInote.Theoriginaldurationsofthenotesinthe sequencearemultipliedbytheselectedpercentage.100%willcausenochange,valuessmaller

7-55

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

than100%willresultinshorterdurations,valueslargerthan100%willresultinlonger durations. Velocity VelocitychangesthevelocityofeachMIDInote.Theoriginalvelocitiesofthenotesinthe sequencearemultipliedbytheselectedpercentage.100%willcausenochange,valuessmaller than100%willresultinlowervelocities,valueslargerthan100%willresultinhighervelocities. Offset YoucanfinetunethestarttimeofyourriffinticksbyusingtheOffsetparameter.Apositive valuewilldelaythestarttime,whileanegativevaluewillspeedupthestarttime.

Real-time Control of Riff Parameters

YoucanhaverealtimecontroloverseveralRiffparameters,byassigningphysicalcontrollersto specialRiffControllerDestinations.Anyinput(orentryvalue)fromaphysicalcontroller assignedtoaRiffControllerDestinationoverridestheprogrammedvaluesfortheparametersof theriffonthatcontrollerszone.Theoverrideremainsineffectuntilyouselectadifferentsetup. Remember,eachofthefollowingControllerDestinationsaffectsonlytheriffforthezonewhich yourcontrollerisassignedto. Controller Number
163 164 165

Corresponding Riff Parameter

RiffOn RiffOff RiffDur

Operation
Riff On. Any value triggers the zones Riff if Riff is set to On on RIFF1 page. Riff Off. Any value stops playback of zones Riff. Riff Duration, sets the Duration parameter (see above.) The Duration value is calculated by multiplying the received controller value by 1000, and dividing the answer by 128 (any decimal points are taken off the final value.) Here are some example values: 7 = 54%, 13 = 101%,19 = 148%, 32 = 250%, 64 = 500%, 127 = 992% Riff Velocity, sets the Velocity parameter (see above.) The Velocity value is calculated by multiplying the received controller value by 2. For Example, 25 = 50%, 50 = 100%, 100 = 200%, 127 = 254%. Riff Delay, Controls Offset parameter (see above.) Controller value 64 = 0 offset ticks. Each value away from 64 = 512 offset ticks. For example, 63 = -512 offset ticks, 65 = +512 offset ticks, 0 = -32768 offset ticks, 127 = +32256 offset ticks.

166

RiffVel

167

RiffDly

7-56

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

The BEND Page

TheparametersontheBENDpagedefinethebendrangesforpitchbendmessages.

Parameter Bend Range Up (semitones) Bend Range Up (cents) Bend Range Down (semitones) Bend Range Down (cents)

Range of Values Prog, 0 to 127 semitones Prog, 100 cents Prog, 0 to 127 semitones Prog, 100 cents

Default 2 0 2 0

Bend Range (Semitones) and Bend Range (Cents): Up and Down

BendRangeUp(ST)andBendRangeDown(ST)sendsabendrangemessagetoaninternal programoraMIDIdevice,tellingithowtodefinesubsequentpitchbendmessages.Some programsmaybehavestrangelywhenyouchangetheBendRangevalue,becausetheyuseDSP Functionstoaffectthepitchwheel.Inthatcase,youshouldeithersetthevalueofBendRangeto Prog,oredittheprogramitself. NOTE:ThesettingsforBendRangeUpandDownareonlyreflectedinSetupmode.Evenifyouspecify BendRangeUpandDownvaluesforthecontrolsetup(thesetup126InternalVoices,whichdefines controllerassignmentsthatareusedinProgrammode,)bendrangevalueswillnotbereflectedinany modeexceptSetupmode,andpitchbendmessagesinthecurrentprogram(inProgrammode)willresult inbehaviorasspecifiedforthePitchBendRangeparametersontheBASICpageintheProgramEditor. BendRangeUp(ct)andBendRangeDown(ct)letsyoufinetunethevalueforBendRange (semitones).100centsequalsonesemitone,oronehalfstep;youcansetthisparameter anywherebetween0and100cents. BendRangeUp,inbothsemitonesandcents,affectsallcontrollersthataresettoPitchUp(inthe defaultsettingsforthecontrolsetup(Setup126InternalVoices,)thePitchbendupparameter(for thePitchWheel)ontheControllerspageisassignedtoPitchUp).BendRangeDown,inboth semitonesandcents,affectsallcontrollersthataresettoPitchDwn(inthedefaultsettingsfor thecontrolsetup(Setup126InternalVoices,)thePitchbenddnparameter(forthePitchWheel)on theControllerspageisassignedtoPitchDwn).AnyphysicalcontrollerthatusestheControl DestinationlistcanbeassignedtoPitchUporPitchDwn.Tokeepthingssimplethough,you willnormallywanttousePitchUpandPitchDwn(controllerdestinations130and131)asa PitchWheeldestinations(seepage 711fordetails.) KeepinmindthatnotallMIDIdevicesrespondtoBendRangemessages.Withmanyolder MIDIinstruments,youmustsetbendrangesonthedevicesthemselves.

7-57

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

ChangingprogramssendsaBendRangemessagewiththecurrentprogramsvalues.Sodoes pressingPanic,whichisaquickwaytoresetyourPC3LEorMIDIslavesifyouveuseda controllertomodulatethebendrange. ANoteAboutContinuousControllersandTheBENDPage: UnlikethePitchWheel,othercontinuouscontrollerssuchasaknobwillnotautomatically returntotheoriginalcenterpitch.Thiscanmakeithardtoaccuratelyreturnthecontrollertoits centerpositionbyhand.Inthesecases,itisusefultouseaseparatecontrollerforbendingonly upordown.Forexample,tohaveaknobonlybendup,useaknobwithanOffsetvalueof64 andaScalevalueof50%,andCurvesettoLinear.Thebottomoftheknobrangewillnowbethe centerpitch,andthetopoftheknobrangewillbethetopofyourbendrange.Tohaveaknob onlybenddown,useaknobwithanOffsetvalueof127andaScalevalueof150%,andCurve settoLinear.Thetopoftheknobrangewillnowbethecenterpitch,andthebottomoftheknob rangewillbethebottomofyourbendrange.Seepage 711formoreonsettingknobcontroller parameters.

7-58

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

The FX Pages: FX, AUXFX1, AUXFX2

ThePC3LEcontainsaversatileeffectsprocessor,andwhencombinedwithSetupModeitputs thepowerofanentirestudioofaudioeffectsatyourfingertips.Thissectioncontainseverything youllneedtoknowhowtousethePC3LEseffectsinSetupMode,aswellasSongMode. Beforegettingstarted,readtheEffectsOverviewsectionforabasicdescriptionofhoweffects workinthePC3LE.ReadtheFXPagesectiontolearnhowtoallocateprocessingpowerfor effects,andreadtheAUXFXPagesectionstolearnhowtoquicklychangeyourAuxEffects chainsfromtheSetupEditor(orSongMode.)

Effects Overview
ThissectiongivesanoverviewofthebasiceffectstypesinthePC3LE,aswellasdescriptionsof thefundamentalconceptsofeffectsstagesandrouting.ReadtheInsertEffectsandAuxiliary Effectssectionstolearnaboutthetwotypesofeffectsthatcanbeappliedduringdifferentstages inofprogramssignalpath.ReadtheChainssectiontolearnaboutwhereeachtypeofeffectis chosen.
Insert Effects

InsertEffectsareplaceddirectlyinthesignalpathattheoutputofasingleprogram(as describedintheProgrammodechapter.)Eachprogramonazone/trackcanhaveitsownInsert Effect(dependingonavailableprocessingpower,seeTheFXPage on page 761fordetails.)

Aux Effects

AuxEffects,unlikeInsertFX,arenotappliedtothewholeoutputofaprogram,butareblended inwiththeoriginalunprocessedprogramsound.EachsetuphastwostereoAuxSendsthatgo totheAux1andAux2Effects.TheAuxEffectsareglobal(availabletoallzonesortracksatthe sametime,)andtherecanbeonlyonesetofAuxeffects(Aux1andAux2)loadedatatime. EachAuxeffectcanbesettobeappliedeitherpreorpostInsertEffect(seeSignalFlowbelow fordetails.)

Chains

TheobjectusedforInsertandAuxEffectsisreferredtoasaChain.AChainisasequenceof upto8effectboxescascadedinseries.EachprogramcanhaveonemainInsertChainandeach Setup(orsonginSongmode)canuseuptotwoAuxChainsatonetime(whichareavailableto allprogramsinthesetuporsong.) ThePC3LEschainscontainavarietyofeffectsincludingdifferenttypesofreverb,chorus,delay, flanger,phaser,tremolo,panner,leslie,distortion,EQ,compression,filter,envelopefollowing filter,frequencystimulator,ringmodulator,frequencyoffset,pitchLFO,andstereoizer.Chains 1through81containmanyconfigurationsoftheseeffects,whichareusefulforquicklyfindinga suitableeffect.TheremainingchainsareusedbythePC3LEsfactoryprograms,setups,and songs,thoughtheycanbeusedforanyuserprogram,setup,orsongaswell.Ifyoudiscovera factoryprogram,setup,orsongthatusesaneffectthatyoulike,lookatthechainnumberinthe program,setuporsongeditorsothatyoucanuseitlaterinyourownprogram,setup,orsong. AcompletelistofthePC3LEseffectschainscanbefoundatwww.kurzweil.com. Eachprogramonazone(oronatrackinSongMode)isstoredwithsettingsforanAuxEffect chain,aswellasanInserteffectchain(eachcanbechangedbyeditingtheprogram.)Usethe AuxFXChannelparameter(seepage 764)ontheSetupEditorCOMMONpagetosetwhich channelsAuxeffectssettingswillbeusedfortheentiresetup(seeFXTrack on page 1020for settingthetrackinSongmode.)Alternatively,theAuxEffectscanbesetdirectlyontheAUXFX1 andAUXFX2pagesinSetupMode(andSongMode.)ThisiscalledanAuxOverride(see Override on page 762.)Eachzoneortrackcanuseitsowninserteffectsatthesametime(ifthere areenoughDSPunitsavailabletoloadeveryeffect,seeTheFXPage on page 761,below.)

7-59

Setup Mode The Setup Editor Signal Flow

Whenusingeffects,itisimportanttounderstandhowyoursignalisbeingprocessed.Foreach zone(ortrackinSongMode)yoursignalcanbesenttotheAuxeffectsbeforeorafterbeing processedbytheProgramsInserteffects. Thediagrambelowshowsthepossibleroutesthatthesignalofaprogramcanflowthroughto reachthedifferenttypesofeffects.Followtheappropriateroutetohelpvisualizethestagesin whichthesignalisbeingprocessed.Thefirsttwozones(ortracksinSongMode)arediagramed asanexample(representedbydarklines.)The14additionalavailablezones(ortracksinSong mode)arerepresentedbygraylines(labeledasEtc.)Thedottedlinesrepresentyouroptionsfor choosingeitherapreorpostinsertAuxsendforeachzone/track.Acirclewithanarrow throughitshowsapointwherethesignallevelcanbeadjusted.Acircledsigma()shows wheresignalsaremixedtogether. Program
ZONE/TRACK 1 Pre Send Levels

Insert Chain
Post

Program
ZONE/TRACK 2 Pre Send Levels

Insert Chain
Post

Output

Etc.

AUX 1 Chain AUX 2 Chain

Whenusingeffects,thefirstdecisiontomakeiswhetheryouwanttouseanInsertorAuxeffect (seetheInsertEffectsandAuxEffectssectionsabove.)Ifyouareusingbothtypesofeffectsfora zone(ortrackinSongMode,)youcanchoosetohaveyoursignalsenttotheAuxeffectsbefore orafterbeingprocessedbytheInserteffects.WhenyoursignalissenttotheAuxEffectsafter beingprocessedbytheProgramsInsertEffects,thisiscalledapplyingtheAuxEffectpost Insert.WhenyoursignalissenttotheAuxEffectsbeforebeingprocessedbytheProgramsInsert Effects,thisiscalledapplyingtheAuxEffectpreInsert. WhenanAuxEffectisappliedpostInsert,thewet(processed)Auxsignalhasaseriesofeffects appliedtoiti.e.,cascadedeffects.Thismeansthatthesignalthatisblendedbackinfromthe resultoftheAuxEffectwillalsocontaintheresultoftheInsertEffect. WhenanAuxEffectisappliedpreInsert,thewetAuxsignalhasnoInserteffectappliedtoit, andthefinaloutputhasparalleleffectsi.e.,distincteffects.Thismeansthatthesignalthatis blendedbackinfromtheresultoftheAuxEffectwillnotcontaintheresultoftheInsertEffect.

7-60

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

The FX Page
UsetheFXPagetodistributeprocessingpower(DSPunits)fortheeffectsofthezone(s)(or track(s)inSongMode)assignedtoeachMIDIchannel.(SeeChannel on page 77andTrack Channels on page 107fordetailsonsettingtheMIDIchannelforeachzone/trackinSetup/Song moderespectively.)EachEffectChainiscomposedofaneffectboxoraseriesofeffectboxes. EacheffectboxusesacertainamountofthePC3LEseffectsprocessingpower.Theamountof processingpowerusedbyaneffectboxorChainreflectshowcomplextheeffectsalgorithm ismorecomplexeffectsrequiremoreprocessingpower.Accordingly,eachChainandeffect boxusesacertainnumberofDSPunitsyoucanhaveupto10DSPunitsusedatatimeinthe currentsetuporsong.ThenumberofDSPunitsrequiredtoloadeffectsforthecursor highlightedchannelisshownatthetopofthepage,followedbythenumberoftotalDSPunits requiredtoloadalleffectsforthesetuporsong.Ifyouattempttousemorethan10DSPunits, thePC3LEwillindicatethatyouhavegoneoverthelimitbydisplaying(Max10)onthetopline ofthepage. Effectsareloadedforasmanychannelsasispossible,untilalloftheDSPunitsareusedup.In SetupandSongMode,theMIDIchannelofthelowestusedzone/trackwillhavepriorityfor usingDSPunits.Thiszone/trackwilluseasmanyDSPunitsasitneedforitseffects,thenthe MIDIchannelofthenexthighestusedzone/trackwilluseDSPunitstoloaditseffects,andthis continuesuntilalloftheDSPunitsareusedup. IfyourunoutofavailableDSPunits,thereareafewmethodsyoucanuseinordertomanage andfreeupadditionalDSPunits.First,youcansimplydisableeffectsallocationfortheMIDI channelsoflessimportantzones/tracks.ThisisdoneontheFXpage(ineitherSetuporSong mode,)whichprovidesperchannelcontrolovereffectsallocation(seebelow.)

Usethecursorbuttonstoselectachannelnumber(onlythechannelnumbersusedinthecurrent setup/songareshown.)TheselectedchannelwillhaveitsYorNhighlighted.Thechannel numberwithaboxarounditisthespecifiedAuxEffectchannelinSetupandSongmode(see AuxFXChannel on page 764forSetupmodeandFXTrack on page 1020forSongmode.)Each channelcanbesettoYtoallocateeffectsforthezone(s)/track(s)assignedtothatMIDIchannel, ortoNtonotallocateeffectsforthatchannel.UsetheAlphaWheelor/+buttonstochange betweenYandN.SomechannelssettoYmaybedisplayedas(Y).Thismeansthattherearenot enougheffectsresourcesavailableforthatchannel,andthatchannelseffectsarenotloaded.As thecursorismovedfromlefttoright,theID#andnameoftheInsertandAuxEffectschainsfor eachselectedchannelaredisplayedonthebottomhalfofthepage(theAuxchainisshownonly ifthespecifiedAuxEffectschannelisselected.) Alternatively,ifyoudontwanttodisableeffectsforanychannelsinordertofreeupDSPunits, youmaywanttoeditsomeprogramstousedifferenteffectsthatusefewerDSPunits(seeThe EFFECTS(FX)Page on page 613.)YoucanentertheProgramEditorforazonesprogramfrom withintheSetupEditor.Todothis,selecttheProgramfieldontheCH/PROGpageoftheSetup EditorandpresstheEditbuttontotheleftofthedisplay.Whenfinished,exittheProgram EditortoreturntotheSetupEditorofthecurrentsetup.Insongmode,youmaywishtoallocate onlyonechannelatatimewhenrecordingtracksoneatatimetoanexternalmultitrack recorder.Byrecordingeachchannelseparately,eachchannelwillbeabletouse10DSPunitsfor itseffects.

7-61

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

The AUXFX1 and AUXFX2 Pages

PressingtheAUXFX1softbuttonortheAUXFX2softbuttoncallsup,respectively,theAUXFX1 pageortheAUXFX2page.UsethesepagestoprovideoverridesforAuxChainselectionand otherAuxEffectsparameters,whichallowsyoutochangeanAuxEffectanditsparameters withouteditingtheprogramofazone/track(seeOverridebelow.)EachAUXFXpageappearsas shownbelow(thepageshownbelowistheAUXFX1page):

IfOverrideissettoNo,thetoplineofthepagedisplaystheAuxChainthatisloadedduetothe AuxFXChannelparameter(seepage 764).Ontheexamplescreenbelow,theAuxChainofthe zone/trackselectedfortheAuxFXChannelparameteris904SaxChamber2.

Parameter Override Chain Send Level Pre-/Post- Insert

Range of Values No, Yes Chain List [p], -96 to 24 dB [p], pst, pre

Default No 0 None [p] [p]

Override ThisparameterswitchesonorofftheAuxoverride.SetOverridetoYestoselectanoverride AuxChainonthispage.SetOverridetoNotoallowAuxFXchainoftheprogramforthe currentzone(ortrackinSongMode.) Normally,theAuxEffectsChainsarespecifiedbytheprogramonthespecifiedAuxEffects channel(seeAuxFXChannel on page 764forSetupmode,orFXTrack on page 1020forSong mode.)WhenOverrideissettoYes,theChainparameterappears,allowingyoutochoosea differentAuxeffect(whichalsoappliesdifferentsendlevelsandotherparameters.)See Dest on page 713fordetailsoncontrollingparametersofAuxOverrideeffects. Chain WhenOverrideissettoYes,youcanselectanoverrideAuxChainforthepagescorresponding AuxEffect.ThisparameterisnotvisiblewhenOverrideissettoNo.

7-62

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Send Levels and Pre/Post Ins. Therearetwoparametersforeachofthesetuporsongs16availableMIDIchannels:SendLevel (toprow)andPre/PostInsert(bottomrow).ThesettingfortheparameterSendLeveldetermines iftheAuxSendLevelfortheselectedzone/MIDIchannelsprogramisoverridden,andifso,by whatvalue.Thedefaultvalueof[p]meansnooverride(i.e.,usethevaluesspecifiedinthe program.)Tooverridethesendlevelvalue,selectthesendlevelparameter(thetoprow)forthe desiredchannel,andenteranewvaluewiththeAlphaWheel,/+buttons,orenteravaluewith alphanumericpadandpresstheEnterbutton. ThesettingfortheparameterPre/PostInsertdeterminesifthecurrentAuxroutingforthe selectedzone/MIDIchannelsprogramisoverridden,andifso,bywhatrouting.Thedefault valueof[p]meansnooverride(i.e.,usethevaluesspecifiedintheprogram.)Tooverridethe Pre/PostInsertparametersetting,selectthePre/PostInsertparameter(thebottomrow)forthe desiredzone/track,andchangethevaluewiththeAlphaWheelor/+buttons.Premeansthat theAuxSendtakesplacebeforeanyInsertEffectisapplied,whereasasettingofPstmeansthat theAuxSendtakesplacepostInsertEffect.(Ofcourse,iftheprogramonthechannelhasno InsertEffectsloaded,thenthisparameterwillmakenodifference.)SeeSignalFlow on page 760 fordetailsonpreandpostInsertAuxEffects.

The COMMON Page

TheCOMMONpagecontainsparametersthataffecteveryzoneinthecurrentsetup.

Parameter Tempo Clock source ArpGlobal (Arpeggiator Global) Aux FX channel KB3 Channel

Range of Values 20 to 300 Internal, External Off, Arp 1 to 16 1 to 16 1 to 16

Default 120 Internal Off 1 1

Tempo
WhenClockSourceissettoInternal,theTempoparametersetsthePC3LEssystemtempo.The TempoparametervaluesareinunitsofBPM(beatsperminute).Thiscontrolsthetempoofany arpeggiatorsusedinthecurrentsetup,anyriffsthathavetheirBPMparametersettoSetup,any tempobasedeffects,andthecurrentlyselectedsonginSongmode.Youcanalsosetthetempo usingthetaptempobutton(locatedonthefrontpanelbelowtheModebuttons.)TaptheTap Tempobuttononbeatforameasureortwoatthedesiredtempotosetatempo.Thisalsobrings uptheTapTempopage(seeTap Tempo Button on page 74.)

7-63

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Clock Source
WiththeClockSourceparameter,youcansetthePC3LEwithinthecurrentsetuptogenerate itsowntempobysettingClockSourcetoInternal,oryoucansetthePC3LEtosyncupwiththe tempofromanotherdeviceassumingthedeviceissendingMIDIclockdatatothePC3LEvia MIDIorUSBbysettingClockSourcetoExternal.WhenClockSourceissettoExternal,the Tempoparameterdisappearsfromthedisplay.

Arpeggiator Global (ArpGlobal)

WiththeArpGlobalparameter,youcansettheArpeggiatorofasingleZonetoplaynotesonall ZonesintheSetup.Forexample,ifArpGlobalissettoArp3,allzoneswillbeplayedbythe arpeggiatorininZone3(ifthearpeggiatorinZone3isactive.)InadditiontoOFF,thereareas manyArpGlobalsettingsasthereareZonesinthecurrentsetup.Forexample,inasevenzone setup,youcanselectavalueofOFF,orArp17forArpGlobal. ToexcludeaZonefrombeingplayedbytheglobalarpeggiator,settheArpeggiatorparameterto OffontheCH/PROGpageforthatZone(seeArpeggiator on page 79fordetails.) FordetailsonthearpeggiatorforeachZone,seeTheARPEGGIATOR&ARPEGGIATOR2 (ARP1,ARP2)Pages on page 735.

Aux FX Channel
TheAuxFXChanneldeterminestheFXchannelthroughwhichtheauxsendsofallofthezones inthecurrentsetuparesent.Forexample,ifazone2inasetuphasaprogramwith25Basic Delay1/8asanAuxFX,andzone2isassignedtochannel5,thensettingtheAuxFXChannelto 5sendstheprogramsofallofthezonesinthesetupthroughzone2sProgramsAuxFX(i.e., through25BasicDelay1/8).

KB3 Channel
Withthisparameter,youcanspecifytheKB3channelinthecurrentsetup(becauseKB3 programscanplayononlyonechannel/zoneatatime,Seepage 65formoreinformationon KB3mode.)

TRIGGER KEYS (KEYTRG)

TheTRIGGERKEYSpage(seebelow)allowsyoutosetacontrollerdestinationtobetriggered byplayingaspecifickey.

InadditiontogeneratingastandardMIDInoteonmessage,eachkeyofthePC3LEcanbesetto triggeracontrollerdestination.TRIGGERKEYScanbesetindependentlyperZone.Byusing Zoneswithoverlappingkeyranges,asinglekeycantriggermultiplecontrollerdestinations.On theTRIGGERKEYSpage,selecttheKeyfieldandchooseanotebyholdingtheEnterbutton andplayingthedesiredkey(youcanalsousetheAlphaWheel,/+buttonsoralphanumericpad

7-64

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

tochooseanote.)Withthedesirednoteselected,usetheDestfieldtoselectacontroller destination(seeTheControllerDestinationList on page 718fordetails.)Setavaluetosendtothe controllerdestinationwiththeValuefield.Onceadestinationandvalueareset,theplayingthe keywillsendthevaluetothecontrollerdestinationontheZonesMIDIChannel(see Channel on page 77fordetailsonsettingeachZonesMIDIchannel.)Thismayalsosenda continuouscontrollermessagetotheMIDIorUSBoutports,dependingontheZones Destinationparameter(seeDestination on page 76fordetails.)

The Setup Editor Utility Soft Buttons

InadditiontotheSetupEditorspages,therearebasiclibraryandeditingsoftbuttons.Their functionsaredescribedbelow.

Name
Thisenablesyoutorenamethecurrentsetup.Useanydataentrymethodtodothis,including thelettersonthealphanumericpad.

Save
PressingSavecallsupthestandardSaveDialog.WhenchoosinganID#,simultaneously pressingtheand+buttons(belowtheAlphaWheel)togglesbetweensavingthesetuptothe firstavailableemptylocation,orreplacingacurrentlyexistingsetup.Formoredetailed instructionsonsaving,seeSavingandNaming on page 53.

Delete
Thiserasesasetupfrommemory,freeingupspacetostoresetupsinotherlocations.(Youcan checkthefreememoryinthePC3LEatanytime,onthetoplineofthepagesinMastermode.) PressDelete,andyouwillbegivenachoicetoDeleteorCancel.PressDeleteagain,andanAre YouSure?messagewillappear.PressYestodeletethesetup,orNotocancel. FactoryROMsetupscannotbedeleted.

New Zone (NewZn)

PressNewZntocreateanewzonewithdefaultparameters.ThePC3LEimportsthiszonefrom Zone1of128DefaultSetup.Ifthereareparametersorentirepagesyouuseoften,youcan createyourownDefaultSetupandsaveittolocation128;pressingNewZnwillthenimport zonesfromyourcustomDefaultSetup.

Duplicate Zone (DupZn)

Thisaddsanewzonewiththesameparametersasthecurrentzone.

Import Zone (ImpZn)

Youcanimport,orbringin,anyzonefromanysetupinmemory.PressImpZn,anduseany dataentrymethodtochooseasetuptoimportfrom.ThenusetheChan/Zonebuttonstoselect oneofthatsetupszones.NowpressImport,andthezoneyouselectedwillbeaddedtothe currentsetup. Note:Ifyouareusingall16zonesinasetupandyoutrytoadd,duplicate,orimportazone,a NoMoreZonesmessageappears.Youmustdeleteanexistingzonebeforeyoucanadd, duplicate,orimportanynewones.

7-65

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Delete Zone (DelZn)

Thisdeletesthecurrentzonefromthesetup.UseDelZntofreeupzonessoyoucanaddor importnewones.

Set Controls KB3 (KB3CTL)

Pressthisbuttonifyouwanttoassignthesetupsknobsandswitchestocontrolorganfunctions (ifyouhaveaKB3organprograminthecurrentsetup.)OrganfunctionsforKB3programsare labeledonthefrontpanelundertheswitchesandknobs.WhenyoupresstheKB3CTLsoft button,youwillbepromptedtocontinuebypressingOK,ortocancelandreturntothe previousscreenbypressingCANCEL.Caution:Thiswillclearanyexistingknoborswitch assignments. ForsetupswithKB3andV.A.S.T.programs,youcanprogramaswitchtotogglebackandforth betweenhavingtheknobsandassignableswitchesfunctionastheywouldwithKB3programs, orhavingtheswitchesfunctionaszonemutebuttons.Todothis,intheSetupeditor,firstuse theKB3CTLsoftbuttonasexplainedabove.Next,gototheControllerspage(bypressingthe CTRLSsoftbutton.)OntheControllerspage,selecttheControllersfield,holdtheEnterbutton onthealphanumericpadandpresstheArpLatchbutton(abovetheModWheel)tochooseArp. latchswforthecontrollerfield(alternativelytheArpEnablebutton(Arp.switch)canbeused.) OntheControllerspageforArp.latchsw,usethecursorbuttonstoselecttheDestTypefield andsetittoCtrl.Next,selecttheOnControlfieldandsetittoKB3Mutesbyentering169and pressingtheEnterbuttononthealphanumericpad.DothesamefortheOffControlfield.Leave theotherfieldsattheirdefaults:Type=Toggled,OnValue=127,OffValue=0.MaketheseController pagesettingsforallzonesinthesetup.NowwhenyoupressandlighttheArpLatchbuttonthe assignableswitchesworkaszonemutebuttons(seebelow.)Whenyoupressandunlightthe ArpLatchbuttontheassignableswitchesworkasKB3controls.Makesuretosaveyoursetupto keepthesechanges.Caution:Thiswillclearanyexistingknoborswitchassignments.

Set Controls Zone Mutes (MUTES)

Pressthisbuttonifyouwanttoassignthesetupsswitchestocontrolzonemuting.Switches1 through10willmutezones1through10respectively.AswitchwithalitLEDmeansit respectivezoneisactive,aswitchwithanunlitLEDmeansitrespectivezoneismuted.When youpresstheMUTESsoftbutton,youwillbepromptedtocontinuebypressingOK,ortocancel andreturntothepreviousscreenbypressingCANCEL.Caution:Thiswillclearanyexisting switchassignments.

7-66

Setup Mode Recording A Setup To Song Mode

Recording A Setup To Song Mode

TheMIDIoutputofasetupcanberecordedtoasonginSongmode.EachMIDIchannelthatis outputfromasetupisrecordedintoeachtrackofasong(ifthetrackshavecorrespondingMIDI channels.)ProgramsfromeachzoneofyoursetupareautomaticallyassignedtotracksinSong mode.Followthesestepsforproperrecordingofanewsongfromasetup: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. EnterSongmodebypressingtheSongModebutton. OntheSongmodeMAINpage,select0*NewSong*intheCurSngfieldbyentering0on thealphanumericpadandpressingtheEnterbutton.Thisloadsadefaultemptysongfile. OntheSongmodeMAINpage,selectMultintheRecTrkfield. PresstheSetupModebuttontoenterSetupModeandchoosethedesiredsetup. PresstheTapTempobutton(belowtheMODEbuttons)toreachtheTapTempoPage. EnteratempobytappingtheTapTempobuttonorenteratempointheTempofield. Whenyouarefinished,presstheDonesoftbuttontoreturntotheSetupmodemainpage. PresstheRecordbuttonandthenthePlay/Pausebuttontobeginrecording.The metronomewillcountoff1barandthenrecordingwillbegin(youcansetmetronomeand otherrecordingsettingsinSongmode.) PresstheStopbuttontostoprecording.YouwillseetheusualSongmodesavechanges dialogwhereyoucanreview,retry,orsaveyoursong(seeTheSaveChanges Dialog on page 109.) Aftersavingyoursong,youwillbereturnedtotheSongmodeMAINpage,whereyour savedsongwillbeloaded.YoucancontinuetorecordoreditthesonginSongmodejust asyouwouldwithanyothersong(seeSongModeandtheSongEditor on page 101.)Each programfromeachzoneinyoursetupisautomaticallyassignedtoatrack(changethe RecTrkparameterinordertorecordtoasingletrack.)Youcanalsocontinuetorecord fromSetupmodebygoingbacktostep3,above.Remembertosetthetempo(step5 above)beforerecording,asthesongtempowillchangeifyoursetupissavedwitha differenttempo.

6.

7.

8.

Notes About Recording A Setup To Song Mode Tempo:ThetempoofasetupissetontheSetupMode:COMMONpage(see on page 746.)If youplantorecordasongfromthesamesetupseveraltimes,itisconvenienttosetyourdesired tempoontheSetupMode:COMMONpageandsaveitwithyoursetup.Bydoingthis,youwill notneedtoresetyoursetuptempotothedesiredsongtempoeverytimeyouloadyoursetup(as instep5,above.) Riffs:IfyouareusingRiffsinyoursetup,dothefollowingtomakeeachRiffplayatyoursetups tempo(whichalsobecomesyoursongstempo.)Foreachzonethathasariff,gotothe SetupMode:RIFF2page(seeTheRIFF2Page on page 751)andsettheBPMparametertoSetup. RemembertosavechangestoyoursetupwhenexitingtheSetupEditor. Effects:WhenrecordingasetupintoSongmode,thesongwillnotretaintheAuxeffectssettings ofyoursetup.Ifyouwouldlikeyoursongtousethesameeffectsasyoursetup,copythe settingsofyoursetupsFXandAUX1pagestotheFXandAUX1pagesinyoursong. Alternatively,playingyoursongfromsetupmodewillallowyoutoheartheeffects.Todothis, loadyoursong,presstheSetupModebuttontoenterSetupmodeandchooseyoursetup,then pressthePlay/Pausebutton.ThiswillplayyoursongfromSetupmode,andtheeffectswillbe intact.

7-67

Setup Mode Recording A Setup To Song Mode

MonoPressure:WhenrecordingasetuptoSongmodewithMultselectedforRecTrkinSong mode,youmaynoticethateverytrackhasrecordedMonoPressuremessages,evenifthereis nothingelserecordedonatrack.Ifthisbothersyou,youcansettheMonoPressparameterto OffontheSong:EventFilterRecordingpage(seeSongMode:TheFilterPages(RECFLTand PLYFLT) on page 1015.)ThiswillpreventMonoPressuremessagesfrombeingrecordedtoany track.Alternatively,youcaneraseMonoPressuremessagesfromspecifictracksafterrecording. Todothis,gototheEditSong:Trackpage(seeSongEditor:TheTRACKPage on page 1021.)On theEditSong:Trackpage,usetheChan/Zonebuttonstochoosethetracktoedit(visibleinthe Trackfieldatthetoprightcornerofthedisplay.)SettheFunctionparametertoEraseandthe EventsparametertoMonoPress.UsetheFromandTofieldstoselecttheentirelengthofyour song,andpresstheGosoftbuttontoeraseMonoPressuremessagesfromtheselectedtrack. Repeatthisforeachdesiredtrack.YoucanalsochooseALLfortheTrackparametertoerase MonoPressuremessagesfromalltracks. ControllerMessages:WhenrecordingasetuptoSongmodewithMultselectedforRecTrkin Songmode,youmayoftenberecordingmorecontrollermessagesthanyourealize.Thiscan happenbecausemultiplesetupzonesoftenrespondtothesamephysicalcontrollers.Thisis likelytobethecasewhenyouuseasetupcreatedbyduplicatingzonesanddonotchangethe controllerdestinationassignmentsforeachnewzone.Oftenthisisthedesiredbehavior,suchas whenusingzonestocreatelayers.Forexample,ifzoneonesendspitchbendmessagesfromthe pitchwheel,andyouduplicatethiszonetocreatealayeredzonetwo,youwilllikelywantthe zonetwotosendthesamemessagesfromthepitchwheel.Thiswaythepitchoftheselayered zoneswillbendsimultaneouslywhenusingthepitchwheel.Butsayforexamplethatyoualso haveazonethreewithadifferentkeyrangethanzonesoneandtwo,butwhichsendsthesame messagesfromthepitchwheel.Whileplayingandrecordingyoursetup,thefunctionofthe pitchwheelwillbeobvious,butsomeconfusioncanarisewhenyouhaverecordedyoursetup andyouproceedtorecordmoretracksinSongmode.BecauseyouhaverecordedwithMult selectedforRecTrk,thetrackforzonethreewillhavepitchbendmessagesrecordedwherever zonesoneandtwohavebendmessages,evenifzonethreewasnotplayinganynotesatthat time.Forexample,letssayzonesoneandtwowerebendingduringbar1.Ifyouwantto separatelyrecordzonethreeduringbars1and2,youwillprobablywanttodeletetheexisting bendmessagesfromzonethreestrack.YoucandothisfromtheEditSong:Trackpage(seeSong Editor:TheTRACKPage on page 1021,andanexampleofitsuseintheMonoPressuresection,above.) Alternatively,ifthereisnothingtopreserveonthetrackforzonethree,youcanrecorditwith thesongModeparametersettoErase,whichwilleraseanyexistingeventsonthetrackduring thetimethatyourecord.JustremembertochangetheRecTrkparameterinordertorecordtoa singletrack.

7-68

Setup Mode The Control Setup

The Control Setup

Thecontrolsetupisasetupwhichdefinesthecontrollerassignmentsforallprogramsin Programmode(theseassignmentsaretheMIDICCnumbersthatthePC3LEsphysical controllerssendwhileinProgrammode.ParametersontheProgramEditorParameterspagecan thenbeassignedtorespondtotheseCCnumbers.)Thecontrolsetupisstoredinsetupmodeat ID#126andisnamed Internal Voices.Seethediagrambelowforavisualdepictionofthe ControlSetupsrolewhileinProgramMode.DontedittheControlSetupunlessyouarean advancedMIDIuserandknowwhatyouredoing,readbelowfordetails. Examples Of How The Control Setup Defines The PC3LEs Physical Controller Assignments While In Program Mode: Control Setup: PC3LEs Physical Controllers Setup Mode Setup ID#: 126: Internal Voices Setup Editor Controllers Page Controller: Knob 5 Dest: Ctrl C (MIDI CC 18) Controller: SW Pedal 1 Dest: Sustain (MIDI CC 64) Program Mode Program Program Editor Parameters Page Control Sources Knob 5 (Sends MIDI CC 18 to control the selected parameter) Pedal 1 (Sends MIDI CC 64 to control the selected parameter)

(Knob 5) Reverb, 2 2/3 Pedal SW1

(Continues for all controllers except Pads.)

AllfactoryROMprograms(andanyuserprogramsmadebeforeeditingthecontrolsetup)use thecontrollerassignmentsofthedefaultsettingsforthecontrolsetup.Becauseofthis,editing thecontrolsetupcanbreaktheControlSourceassignmentsmadeforprogramsonthe ProgramEditorParameterspage.SincethePC3LEsphysicalcontrollerswillnotbesending theirdefaultMIDICCs,theprogramparametersthathavetheirControlSourcesetasoneofthe defaultMIDICCswillnolongerbecontrolledbythePC3LEsphysicalcontrollers.These programscouldbefixedbyreassigningtheControlSourceforeachparametersothatthey arecontrolledbythenewCCnumberssetforthecontrolsetup. DonteditthecontrolsetupunlessyouareanadvancedMIDIuserwhoneedstosendspecific MIDICCstoexternalequipment.Youcansavemultipleversionsofacontrolsetupbysavinga copyofaneditedcontrolsetuptoanavailableuserID#,andthencopyingthedesiredsetupto ID#126bysavingthesetupatID#126,andoverwritingtheexistingsetupsavedatID#126.You canalwaysrecalltheoriginalcontrolsetupbydeletingthesetupstoredatID#126.Youcan deleteasetupfromwithintheSetupEditorbyusingtheDeletesoftbutton,see Delete on page 765. Wheneditingthecontrolsetup,onlyzone1hasaneffectonprogrammode.(Zones216arenot relevantinProgramMode,becausethePC3LEsphysicalcontrollerscanonlycontroloneMIDI channelatatimeinProgramMode.)Seethetablebelowforwhichpagesandparametersinthe SetupEditoroftheControlSetuphaveanaffectonProgramsinProgramMode.

7-69

Setup Mode The Control Setup

Control Setup: Setup Mode: ID# 126: Internal Voices: Setup Editor Zone 1 Page: Controllers Page (CTRLS)

Parameters Affecting Program Mode All Parameters Except: Entry Value, Exit Value, On Value, Off Value, All Parameters for Drum Pad Pages Destination, BankMode All

CH/PROG KEY/VEL

AsidefromassigningMIDICCdestinationsforthePC3LEsphysicalcontrollers,theControl Setupallowsyoutosetotheravailableparametersforeachphysicalcontroller,suchasScale, Curve,Offset,andSwitchType(seeControllers(CTRLS)Page on page 710.) OntheCH/PROGpage(seepage 76)oftheControlSetupyoucansettheBankMode parameter,whichdetermineshowProgramModewillsendMIDIbankmessages.Hereyoucan alsosetusetheDestinationparametertosettheMIDIdestinationforthecurrentlyselected channelinProgramMode(thoughitisbettertoleavethisatitsdefaultandsetMIDIdestination withtheDesinationparameterontheMasterModeMIDITransmitPage(seepage 912for details.) OntheKEY/VELpageoftheControlSetup,youcansetparametersthatdeterminetheusable keyandvelocityranges,transposition,andvelocityoptions,thoughthesearebestleftattheir defaults.Forprogrammode,itisbesttosettranspositionsettingswithXposeorOctavsoft buttonsontheProgramModemainpage(seeTheProgramModePage on page 62.)Anoverall velocityresponseadjustmentisbestmadewiththeVelMapsettingontheMasterMode1page (seeVelocityMap(VelMap)(Master) on page 93.) Control Setup Default Assignments PC3LE Physical Controller Controllers Page Name (And Front Panel Name)
Mod Wheel Pitchbend up Pitchbend dn SW Pedal 1 SW Pedal 2 CC Pedal 1 Pressure Arp. Switch (Arp Enable) Arp. latch sw (Arp Latch) Knob 1 (Timbre,) Knob 2 (Mod) Knob 3 (Envelope,) Knob 4 (Effect,) Knob 5 (Reverb,) Knob6 (CTL6) Knob 7-15 (CTL7-15) Switch 1-4 (SW1-4) Switch 5-10 (SW5-10)

Continuous Controller Number And Name

1 (MWheel) 130 (PitchUp) 131 (PitchDwn) 64 (Sustain) 66 (Sostenut) 11 (Express) 132 (Pressure) 147 (ArpOn,) 148 (ArpOff) 157 (Latch) 14-15 (MIDI14-15) 16-19 (CtlA-D) 20-28 (MIDI20-28) 80-83 (MIDI80-83) 85-90 (MIDI85-90)

7-70

Quick Access Mode

Chapter 8 Quick Access Mode

InQuickAccessmode,youcanselectprogramsorsetupswithasinglepressofanalphanumeric button(orwithotherdataentrymethods).ThePC3LEoffersanumberofwaystoquicklymake selectionswhileperforming,butonlyQuickAccessmodeletsyoustoreprogramsandsetups togetherforinstantaccess.OnthePC3LE,weincludedseveralfactorypresetQAbanksthatare organizedintousefulgroupingsofsoundsthatwethinkyoullfindconvenient.BelowistheQA page:

ThetoplineofthepagedisplaysthecurrentmodeandthecurrentQAbank. UsingQuickAccessmodeinvolvesselectingQuickAccess(QA)banksfromthelistoffactory presetoruserprogrammedbanks.UsetheChan/ZonebuttonstoscrollthroughtheQAbanks. Youcanalsousethebankselectionshortcut:pressthe+/orClearbuttononthealphanumeric pad,andyoullbepromptedtoenterabanknumber.Typethedesirednumberonthe alphanumericpad,thenpressEnter.Thebankisselected,andyoureturntotheQuickAccess modepage. Eachbankcontainstenmemoryslots,orentries,whereyoucanstoreprogramsorsetupsinany combination.Anyprogramorsetupinthecurrentlyselectedbankcanbeselectedwiththe numericbuttons0through9. Ifthehighlightedentrycontainsaprogram,thebottomrighthandfieldofthepagedisplaysthe channelonwhichtheprogramentriesaretransmitted(thischannelisthecurrentchannelin Programmode).Ifthehighlightedentrycontainsasetup,thebottomrighthandfieldofthepage displaysthewordSetup. TheMIDIProgramChangecommandsthatthePC3LEreceiveswheninQuickAccessmodecan differfromthoseinProgramorSetupmode.Thisdependsonthesettingyouhaveforthe PrgChgModeparameteronMIDIReceivepageinMastermode.IfPrgChgModeissetto ExtendedorK2600,thePC3LErespondstoProgramChangecommandsasitwouldinProgram orSetupmode.IfPrgChgModeissettoQAccess,thePC3LErespondstoProgramChange commandsbycallingupthecorrespondingentryinthecurrentQAbank,nottheactual programnumberoftheentry.

8-1

Quick Access Mode The QA Editor

Soft Buttons In Quick Access Mode

UsetheOctavandOctav+softbuttonstotransposeupordownbyafulloctave.Pressingboth Octavbuttonssimultaneouslyreturnsthetranspositiontoitsoriginalsetting. PresstheInfosoftbuttontoseeallofthecontrollerassignmentsofthecurrentprogram.Scroll downthepageusingtheAlphaWheel,cursororthe/+buttons. TheXpose/Xpose+buttonsareashortcutforquicktranspositioninsemitone(halfstep) increments.YoucanusethemtotransposetheentirePC3LEasmuchasthreeoctavesupor down.Thebottomlineofthedisplayshowsthecurrentamountoftransposition(Xpose). PressingbothXposebuttonssimultaneouslyreturnsthetranspositiontozero.TheXpose buttonstransposethePC3LE,aswellasanyMIDIdevicesconnectedtothePC3LEsMIDIOut port.ChangingthetranspositionwiththesoftbuttonsalsochangestheTransposesettingonthe MastermodeMIDITransmitpage.

The QA Editor
UsetheQAEditortocustomizeexistingQAbanks.EntertheQAeditorfromQAmodeby pressingtheEditbutton.

Thetoplinegivesyoutheusualmodereminder,thecurrentQAbank,andthecurrententry (correspondingnumericbuttonforthehighlightedobject.)Thecursorhighlightstheobject (programorsetup)thatsstoredinthecurrententry. Selecting A Quick Access Entry To Edit PressingtheChan/Zonebuttonsscrollsthroughthetenentriesthenumberofthecurrent entryisdisplayedinthetoprightcorner.Astheentrynumberchanges,thehighlightedobjects atthecenterofthepagechangeaswell,showingyouwhatsstoredineachentry.Onthepage above,forexample,entry0isthecurrententry. Selecting A Program For A Quick Access Entry Above,theTypefieldtellsyouthattheobjectstoredatentry0isaprogram.Thecursor highlightstheprogramsIDandname.UsetheAlphaWheelor/+buttonstoscrollthroughthe listofprograms.PressoneoftheCategorybuttonstoseealistofprogramsinthatcategory,or presstheAllCategorybuttontoseealistofallprograms.

8-2

Quick Access Mode The QA Editor

Selecting A Setup For A Quick Access Entry Ifyouwanttostoreasetupinthecurrententryinsteadofaprogram,presstheTypesoft buttonwhenyoudothis,noticethattheTypefieldchangefromProgramtoSetup(alsonotice thatthechannelindicatordisappears,sincesetupscantransmitoverseveralchannels).Thelist ofobjectschangesfromtheprogramlisttothesetuplist.Justaswithprograms,thecursor highlightsthesetupsIDandname.UsetheAlphaWheelor/+buttonstoscrollthroughthe setups.YoucanalsousethealphanumericpadfollowedbytheEnterbuttontochooseaSetup byID#. KeepinmindthatyoucanhavebothsetupsandprogramsinthesameQAbank. Naming And Saving A Quick Access Bank Whenyouvefilledeachentrywiththeobjectyouwant,presstheNamesoftbuttonifyouwant torenamethebank,orpresstheSavesoftbuttontobeginthesaveprocedure.Or,presstheExit buttontoexittheQAeditor,andtheSaveChanges?dialogcomesup.

8-3

Quick Access Mode The QA Editor

8-4

Master Mode Master Mode Page 1 (MAST 1)

Chapter 9 Master Mode

PresstheMastermodebuttontoenterMastermode,whichcontainsparametersaffectingthe PC3LEsoverallperformanceandsystemsetup.Youcanaccessmastertuning,transposition, andaudiooutputoptions.YoucanalsoaccesssettingsfortransmittingandreceivingMIDI, settingvelocityandpressuremaps,andprogramchangeoptions.YoucanusetheResetfunction todeletealluserobjectsandrestorethePC3LEsmemorytoitsoriginalfactorysettings,orthe DeletefunctiontodeletetheMasterTable,whichresetsMasterModetoitsoriginalfactory settings. WhenyouexitMasterModethePC3LEsavesaMasterTable.TheMasterTableremembersthe settingsoftheMasterpages,aswellasthestateofthePC3LE,suchaswhichprogramsare assignedtoeachchannel.

Master Mode Page 1 (MAST 1)

OnMasterModepage1youllfindparametersforsettingtheoveralltuning,transpositionand intonationofthePC3LE,aswellasvelocityandpressure(aftertouch)response.Youcanalsoset themastertempo.

Parameter Tune Transpose Tempo Velocity Map (VelMap) Pads Velocity Map (PadVelMap) Pressure Map (Press Map) Intonation Intonation Key (Int.Key)

Range of Values 100 cents -128 to 127 semitones 20.00 to 300.00 BPM Velocity Map List Velocity Map List Pressure Map List Intonation Map List C, C#, D, D#, E, F, F#, G, G#, A, A#, B

Default 0 0 120.00 Linear Linear Linear Equal C

9-1

Master Mode Master Mode Page 1 (MAST 1)

Tune
AdjustingthevalueofthisparametertuneseveryprograminthePC3LEbytheamountyou specify.Tuningcanbeadjustedupordown100cents(onesemitone)inonecentincrements. Thisparameterisusefulforgettingintunewithrecordingsandacousticinstruments.Adjusting thetuninginMastermodedoesnotchangethesettingsonthePITCHpageofindividual programs,butwillbeaddedtoanyadjustmentsyoumakethere.Mastermodetuning adjustmentsaffectonlytheaudiooutputofPC3LEprogramnotes,andnotnotessentviaMIDI.

Transpose
LiketheTuneparameterabove,TransposeaffectseveryPC3LEprogram,butnotthosenotes senttotheMIDIOutport.YoucanadjusttheMIDItranspositionsenttotheMIDIOutporton theTRANSMITpageinMIDImode.

Tempo
WhentheClockSourceparameterissettoInternal,theTempoparametersetsthePC3LEs systemtempo.ThesystemtemposetsthetempoforallmodesexceptSetupMode,whichhasits owntemposettings.Also,inSongmode,changingtoanewsongwilloverridethesystem tempo.TheTempoparametervaluesareinunitsofBPM(beatsperminute).Youcanalsousethe TapTempobuttontosetthesystemtempofromothermodes(seeTapTempoButton on page 64.)

9-2

Master Mode Master Mode Page 1 (MAST 1)

Velocity Map (Vel Map) (Master)

ChangetheMasterVelocityMapsettingifyoufindthatthePC3LEisnotproducingthedesired velocities(tooloudortooquiet)basedonyourplayingstyle(howlightorheavythatyouplay thekeys.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidestrangeofvelocityexpression,butyoumaywant tochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnotsuityourplayingstyle. MIDI Sources PC3LEKeyboard MIDIInviaMIDIInportorUSBComputerport

VelMapSettingsonMIDIReceivePage

KEYVELpageforcurrentControlSetup(inProgramMode)orcurrentZone(inSetupMode)

VelMapSettingsonMasterModePage1

PC3LESongMode

VelMapSettingsonMIDITransmitPage

MIDI Destinations PC3LESoundEngine to PC3LEaudiooutputs MIDIOutviaMIDIOutportorUSBComputerport

TheMasterVelocityMapisanoverallcontrolforMIDIvelocitiesusedinthePC3LE.MIDI velocitiesarevaluescreatedforeachnotedependingonhowhardyoustrikeakey.TheMaster VelocityMapaffectsMIDIvelocityvaluesforallMIDIsourcesanddestinationsusedinthe PC3LE(seethecircledboxaboveforitslocationintheMIDIsignalflow.)Differentmapsused fortheMasterVelocityMapgeneratedifferentMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesamephysicalkey strikevelocity.EachmapappliesadifferentcurvetoreceivedMIDIattackvelocitiesandremaps themtonewvelocitiesbeforelettingthempass.Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidestrangeof velocityexpression,butyoumaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnotsuityour playingstyle.SeethediagramabovefortheotherpagesthataffecttheMIDIattackvelocity beforeandafterreachingtheMasterVelocityMap. Thedefaultmap,Linear,allowsMIDIvelocitiestopassunchanged.Light13makeit increasinglyeasiertoproducehighMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesamekeystrikevelocity(with Light3beingtheeasiest,)sothesemapsmayworkbetterforuserswhoplaywithalighter touch.Hard13makeitincreasinglyhardertoproducehighMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesame keystrikevelocity(withHard3beingthehardest,)sothesemapsmayworkbetterforusers whoplaywithahardertouch.PianoTouchsimulatesthegeneralvelocityresponseofan acousticpiano,andisbestsuitedforplayingacousticpianoprograms.EasyTouchissimilarto theLightsettings,makinghighvelocitieseasiertoplay,butitallowsmoresensitivecontrolover playinghighvelocitiesbynotboostingtheMIDIvelocityforfaststrikevelocitiesasmuchasit doesformediumstrikevelocities.GMReceivemimicsthevelocitymapcommonlyusedby keyboardsthatusetheGeneralMIDI(GM)soundset.TheGMReceivemapmakesmedium

9-3

Master Mode Master Mode Page 1 (MAST 1)

strikevelocitiesproducehigherMIDIvelocitiescomparedtotheLinearmap.GMReceiveeffects notesfromthePC3LEskeyboardaswellastheMIDIinport.Thismapisautomaticallyused whenthePC3LEisinGMmode(seeGeneralMIDI on page 99,)thoughusersmaywanttouse theGMReceivemapwhengeneratingMIDIoutsideofGMmodewhichwilllaterbeplayed backbyaGMsystem.

Pads Velocity Map (PadVelMap)

ChangethePadsVelocityMapsettingifyoufindthatthePadsofthePC3LEarenotproducing thedesiredvelocities(tooloudortooquiet)basedonyourplayingstyle(howlightorheavythat youplaythepads.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidestrangeofvelocityexpression,butyou maywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnotsuityourplayingstyle. MIDI Source PC3LEPads

KEYVELpageforcurrentControlSetup(inProgramMode)orcurrentZone(inSetupMode)

PadVelMapSettings

PC3LESongMode

VelMapSettingsonMIDITransmitPage

MIDI Destinations PC3LESoundEngine to PC3LEaudiooutputs MIDIOutviaMIDIOutportorUSBComputerport

ThePadsVelocityMapaffectsMIDIvelocityvaluesforallMIDIsourcesanddestinationsused inthePC3LE(seethecircledboxaboveforitslocationintheMIDIsignalflow.)Differentmaps usedforthePadsVelocityMapgeneratedifferentMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesamephysical padstrikevelocity.EachmapappliesadifferentcurvetoreceivedMIDIattackvelocitiesand remapsthemtonewvelocitiesbeforelettingthempass.Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidest rangeofvelocityexpression,butyoumaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnot suityourplayingstyle.SeethediagramabovefortheotherpagesthataffecttheMIDIattack velocitybeforeandafterreachingthePadsVelocityMap.SeethelastparagraphofPressureMap (PressMap)(Master)aboveforadescriptionofVelocityMaptypes.

9-4

Master Mode Master Mode Page 1 (MAST 1)

Pressure Map (Press Map) (Master)

ChangetheMasterPressMapsettingifyoufindthatthePC3LEisnotproducingthedesired MIDIpressure(aftertouch)values(toohighortoolow)basedonyourplayingstyle(howsoftor hardthatyoupressthekeys.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidestrangeofpressure expression,butyoumaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnotsuityourplaying style. MIDI Sources PC3LEKeyboard MIDIInviaMIDIInportorUSBComputerport

PressureMapSettingsonMIDIReceivePage

PRESSpageforcurrentControlSetup(inProgramMode)orcurrentZone(inSetupMode)

PressMapSettingsonMasterModePage1

PC3LESongMode

PressureMapSettingsonMIDITransmitPage

MIDI Destinations PC3LESoundEngine to PC3LEaudiooutputs MIDIOutviaMIDIOutportorUSBComputerport

TheMasterPressMapisanoverallcontrolforMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesusedinthe PC3LE.MIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesarecreatedforeachnotedependingonhowhardyou pressonakeythatisbeinghelddown.TheMasterPressMapaffectsMIDIpressure(aftertouch) valuesforallMIDIsourcesanddestinationsusedinthePC3LE(seethecircledboxaboveforits locationintheMIDIsignalflow.)DifferentmapsusedfortheMasterPressMapgenerate differentMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesforthesamephysicalkeypressvalue.Eachmap appliesadifferentcurvetoreceivedMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesandremapsthemtonew valuesbeforelettingthempass.Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidestrangeofpressure (aftertouch)expression,butyoumaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnotsuit yourplayingstyle.SeethediagramabovefortheotherpagesthataffectMIDIpressure (aftertouch)valuesbeforeandafterreachingtheMasterPressMap. Thedefaultmap,Linear,allowsMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuestopassunchanged.Maps24 makeitincreasinglyeasiertoproduceMIDIpressurevaluesforthesamephysicalpressure appliedtoakey(with4Easiestbeingtheeasiest.)Maps47makeitincreasinglyharderto produceMIDIpressurevaluesforthesamephysicalpressureappliedtoakey(with7Hardest beingthehardest.)

9-5

Master Mode Master Mode Page 1 (MAST 1)

Intonation
Mostmodernwesternmusicuseswhatisknownasequaltemperament.Thismeansthatthe intervalbetweeneachsemitoneofthe12toneoctaveispreciselythesameaseveryother semitone.However,manydifferentintonationintervalshaveevolvedoverthecenturiesand acrossculturesandinstruments,soequaltemperamentwillnotsoundappropriateforcertain stylesofmusic.ThePC3LEsuppliesyouwith17differentfactoryintonationmapswhichare usefulforarangeofdifferentstyles.Bychangingthevalueforthisparameter,youselectfrom amongtheintonationmapsstoredinthePC3LEsmemory.Eachofthesemapsdefinesdifferent intervalsbetweeneachofthesemitonesinasingleoctave(usedforalloctaves)bysettingpitch offsetsforeachnoteincents. ScrollthroughthelistofIntonationmaps,andlistenforthedifferencesbetweensemitones. Someoftheintervalsbetweensemitonesmaybequitedifferentfromequaltemperament,but youllnoticethatallnotesarepreciselytunedwithnotesthatareanoctaveapart.Thisisbecause theintonationmapssettheintervalswithinasingleoctave,andapplythoseintervalstoeach octave. Likemanyinstrumentsbeforetheadaptationofequaltemperament,mostoftheseintonation mapsweredesignedtosoundbestinonespecifickey.Thoughsomemayhavehistoricallybeen inadifferentkey,allofthePC3LEsfactoryintonationmapsaresettorootnoteCbydefault.You canchangetherootkeyofthecurrentintonationmapbyusingtheInt.Keyparameter(seethe IntonationKey(Int.Key)sectionbelow.)

9-6

Master Mode Master Mode Page 1 (MAST 1)

List and Description of Intonation Maps

0 None 1 Equal 2 Classic Just 3 Just Flat 7th 4 Harmonic 5 Just Harmonic 6 Werkmeister 7 1/5th Comma 8 1/4th Comma 9 Indian Raga 10 Arabic 11 BaliJava1 12 BaliJava2 13 BaliJava3 14 Tibetan 15 CarlosAlpha No intonation map is used, intonation is equal but cannot be edited. No detuning of any intervals. The standard for modern western music. Tunings are defined based on the ratios of the frequencies between intervals. The original tuning of Classical European music. Similar to classic Just, but with the Dominant 7th flatted an additional 15 cents. The perfect 4th, Tritone, and Dominant 7th are heavily flatted. Approximation of a historical intonation. Named for its inventor, Andreas Werkmeister. Its fairly close to equal temperament, and was developed to enable transposition with less dissonance. Approximation of a historical intonation based on the comma system. Approximation of a historical intonation based on the comma system. Based on the tunings for traditional Indian music. Oriented toward the tunings of Mid-Eastern music. Based on the pentatonic scale of Balinese and Javanese music. A variation on 1Bali/Java, slightly more subtle overall. A more extreme variation. Based on the Chinese pentatonic scale. Developed by Wendy Carlos, an innovator in microtonal tunings, this intonation map flats each interval increasingly, resulting in an octave with quarter-tone intervals. This is a Pythagorean tuning, based on the Greek pentatonic scale. The tritone is 12 cents sharp. This is a Pythagorean tuning, based on the Greek pentatonic scale. The tritone is 12 cents flat.

16 Pyth/aug4 17 Pyth/dim5

Ingeneral,youshouldselectanonstandardintonationmapwhenyoureplayingsimple melodies(asopposedtochords)inaparticularmusicalstyle.Whenyouuseintonationmaps basedonpentatonicscales,youllnormallyplaypentatonicscalestomostaccuratelyreproduce thosestyles.

Intonation Key (Int.Key)

Thissetsthetonic,orbasenotefromwhichthecurrentlyselectedintonationmapcalculatesits intervals.IfyouselectGastheintonationkey,forexample,andtheintonationmapyouselect tunestheminor2nddownby50cents,thenG#willbeaquartertoneflatrelativetoequal intonation.IfyouchangetheintonationkeytoD,thenD#willbeaquartertoneflat.Ifyouuse nonstandardintonations,youllwanttosetInt.Keytothekeyyoureplayingin.IftheIntonation parameterissettoEqual,changingInt.Keyhasnoeffect.

9-7

Master Mode Master Mode Page 2 (MAST 2)

Master Mode Page 2 (MAST 2)

OnMasterModepage2youllfindsettingsforthePC3LEsdigitaloutput,FXMode,and defaultsong.YoucanviewtheOSandObjectsversions,remapdrumprograms,aswellas enableordisablingGeneralMIDImodeandprogramdemos.

Parameter Clock Source Digital Output Vol (Dig. out volume) FX Mode OS/Object Version Default Song Output Clock Drum Remap General MIDI Demo Button Buttons Mode

Range of Values Internal, External Variable, Fixed Performance, Multitrack Current OS/Object Version Song List Off, On None, GM Off, On On, Off On, Off

Default Internal Variable Performance Current OS/Object Version 1 New Song Off None Off On Off

Clock Source
WithClockSourcesettoInternal,thePC3LEgeneratesitsowntempo.WithClockSourcesetto External,thePC3LEcansyncupwiththetempofromanotherdeviceassumingthedeviceis sendingMIDIclockdatatothePC3LEviathePC3LEsMIDIinorUSBports.SeeImportantNote AboutExternalSequencers: on page 108forrelatedinformation.

Digital Output Volume (Dig.Out Vol)

TheDigitalOutputVolumeparameterspecifiesthebehaviorofthePC3LEsDigitalOutput. SettingthisparametertoVariablemakestheDigitalOutputrespondtochangesmadeonthe volumeslider.SettingthisparametertoFixedmakestheDigitalOutputoutputasignalwitha fixedvolume.

FX Mode
WithFXModesettoPerformance,thePC3LEminimizesdisruptionofexistingeffectswhen changingprograms,andentryvalueswillnotdisruptsustainednoteswhenchangingprograms inProgramorQuickAccessmodes.WhencontrollingthePC3LEfromanexternalsequencerin ProgramMode,youwillwanttosetFXModetoMultitracktominimizeeffectdisruption.FX

9-8

Master Mode Master Mode Page 2 (MAST 2)

ModeissettoPerformanceasadefault,withsomeexceptions.InSongmode,Multitrackmode isalwaysused,despitehowthisparameterissetinMasterMode.Also,theFXModeparameter doesnotaffectSetupModebecauseitusesitsownFXmode.

OS/Object Ver (Operating System/Object Version)

TheversionnumbersforthecurrentlyinstalledOperatingSystemandObjectsetaredisplayed ontheselines.

Default Song
UsetheDefaultSongparametertochoosethedefaultsongthatisloadedinSongmodeeach timethePC3LEispoweredon.

Output Clock
TosendaMIDIclockpulsetotheMIDIOutport,setthisparametertoOn.Otherwise,setitto Off.

Drum Remap
ThisparameterwillremapallDrumprogramstoconformtotheGeneralMIDI(GM)drummap, astandarddrummapusedinmanykeyboardsandsynthesizers.TheGMdrummapisnt optimallyintuitiveintermsofplayability,sobydefaultthePC3LEusesauniquekeymapthatis moreintuitiveandlendsbettertoperformance.However,theGMdrummapisso commonplacethatmanyplayersfeelmorecomfortableplayingdrumprogramswiththeGM drummap.Becauseofthis,thePC3LEisdesignedsuchthatyoucanremapdrumprogramsto theGMdrummap. WhentheMasterPageDrumRemapissettoNone,noremappingtakesplaceinProgrammode. WhentheMasterPageDrumRemapissettoGM,thePC3LEremapsDrumprogramstotheGM drummap.

General MIDI
ThisparameterenablesordisablesGeneralMIDI(GM)mode.YoucannotaccessSetupModeor QuickAccessModewhileinGMmode.Asidefromwhatisnotedinthissection,allother PC3LEfunctionsoperatenormallywhileinGMmode.InGMmode,thePC3LEcomplies specificallywiththeGeneralMIDI(GM1)specification. An Overview of General MIDI GeneralMIDIisaspecificationcreatedbytheMIDIManufacturersAssociationwhichdefines specificfeaturesthataMIDIinstrumentmusthave(seetheMMAwebsiteatwww.midi.orgfor moreinformation.)Amongotherthings,theGMspecificationsetsastandardbankofprogram namesandnumbers,aswellasastandarddrummappinglayout,sothatsequencescreatedon anyGMinstrumentwillplaybackwiththecorrectinstrumentationonanyotherGM instrument,nomatterthemanufacturer.GMhasmanyuses,forexampleitmakesiteasyfor musicianswhouseMIDIfilestoshareideasandcollaboratewhileusingdifferentsetsof equipment.Alsomanyinstrumentalversionsofpublicdomainsongscanbefoundforfreeon theinternetasGMcompatibleMIDIfiles.These,likeallMIDIfiles,offercertainadvantagesover audiosuchassmallfilesize,theabilitytoedit,orchestrate,orchangetempotoeasilylearnfrom thesequences,orevenconvertnoteinformationtostandardnotationwithathirdparty application.

9-9

Master Mode Master Mode Page 2 (MAST 2)

Overview of General MIDI Mode Onceenabled,Programmodewilldisplaythesetof128standardGMprogramnamesonthe rightsideofthescreen(seebelow.)Asidefromthedifferentlayoutandprogramchoice,Program modeoperatesnormally(seebelowforinfoontheleftsideofthescreen.)AdefaultGMsequencewill beloadedwhichsetsFXsendsforreverbandchorus,whicharepartoftheGMspecification. DrumprogramswillalsoberemappedtotheGMdrummap.ThestandardPC3LEprograms willnotbevisibleuntilGMmodeisturnedoff.

Replacing Default General MIDI Programs ThePC3LEsGMsoundsconsistofPC3LEprogramstailoredtoworkwellinallGMsequences, butyoucanalsoeditorexchangetheseprogramstosuityourtaste.ThePC3LEprovidesyou withaGMsoundseteditorwhichallowsyoutoreplacethePC3LEsdefaultGMprogramswith anyotherPC3LEfactoryorusercreatedprogram.Forexample,youcouldchooseadifferent factoryorusercreatedpianoprogramtoreplacethedefaultGMprogram1,AcGrandPiano. Thisway,anyGMsequencethatusesGMprogram1wouldnowusethenewpianoprogram thatyouselected.Alternatively,youcouldevenchooseadifferentinstrumenttoreplacethe defaultGMprogram1,suchasPC3LEprogram47Harpsichord.Thisway,anyGMsequence thatusesGMprogram1wouldnowusethenewharpsichordprogramthatyouselected.Using aPC3LEprogramthatdoesnotresembletheinstrumentnamedinthecurrentGMprogram wouldtechnicallymakethePC3LEincompatiblewithGM,butsomeusersmaywanttodothis asawaytoremixGMsequences. ItiseasytoreplacedefaultGMprogramsinordertomakeacustomGMsoundset.OnceinGM mode,therightsideofProgramModescreendisplaysalistoftheGMprogramswiththeir standardGMnames.TheleftsideofthescreenshowsyouwhatPC3LEprogramisbeingused fortheselectedGMprogram.Pressingleftonthecursormovesyoutothisfield.Usethecursors up/downbuttons,thealphanumericpad,theplus/minusbuttons,orthealphawheelifyouwish toselectadifferentPC3LEprogramforthecurrentGMprogram.Dontusetheprogramor categorybuttonsbecausethesewillchangethecurrentlyselectedGMprogram.Thenewly selectedPC3LEprogramwillbeusedbythecurrentGMprogram,thoughthenameoftheGM programwillnotchange.TosavethesesettingsyoumustenterandthenexitMasterMode. SavedsettingscanberecalledafterpoweringofforleavingGMmode.TorestoreGMmodes factoryselectedprograms,presstheResetsoftbutton(seebelow.)

Demo Button
TheDemoButtonparameterdetermineswhetherornotpressingthePlay/Pausebuttonplaysa demosongforthecurrentprogramwhileinProgrammode.Setthistooffwhenusingthe transportbuttonstocontrolanexternalsequencerwhileinProgrammode.

9-10

Master Mode Master Mode Page 2 (MAST 2)

Buttons Mode
IfyousettheButtonsModeparametertoOn,pressinganybuttonsonthePC3LEwillgenerate SystemExclusive(SysEx)messagesthataresenttotheMIDIOutport.Thisenablesyoutodo twothings:controlaremotePC3LE,and/orrecordsequencesofprogrammingbuttonpressesto asequencerorSysExsoftwarepackage. IfyouhavetheMIDIInportofanotherPC3LEconnectedtothefirstonesMIDIOutport,the secondinstrumentwillrespondtoeverybuttonpressonthefirstinstrument,justasifyouwere pressingthebuttonsofthesecondone.Keepinmindthatbothdevicesmustbeinexactlythe samestate(thesamepageinthesamemode,withidenticallistsofRAMobjects)whenyoustart. Otherwisethebuttonpressesyoumakeonthefirstinstrumentmayexecuteotherfunctionson thesecondinstrument. Again,itsimportanttokeepinmindthatthestateofyourPC3LEmustbeidenticaltoitsstate whenyourecordedthesequenceofbuttonpresses.Ifyouveaddedordeletedanyobjects storedinRAM,forexample,thesequenceofbuttonpresseswillselectdifferentobjectswhen youplaybackthebuttonpresssequence.

9-11

Master Mode MIDI Transmit (XMIT)

MIDI Transmit (XMIT)

UsetheparametersontheMIDITransmitpagetocontrolhowthePC3LEsendsMIDI informationtoitsUSBorMIDIOutport.ThesesettingstosomeextentaffectthePC3LEs responsetoitsownkeyboardandcontrollers,buttheyprimarilyaffecttheresponsesofother MIDIdevicesthatarereceivingMIDIfromthePC3LEonthechannelspecifiedwiththeChannel parameteronthispage. Whenaprogramisselected,eitherinProgrammodeorinQuickAccessmode,allofthesettings oftheMIDITransmitpageareineffect,exceptforChgSetups,whichonlyapplieswhenloading asetup. Ifasetupisselected,inSetupmodeorinQuickAccessmode,allofthesettingsoftheMIDI TransmitpageareineffectexceptforChannelandProgChang(seebelowfordetails.) WhensendingMIDItotheUSBorMIDIoutportfromSongmode,Songmodeignoresallofthe settingsontheMIDITransmitpage.

Parameter Destination Channel Transposition Velocity Map Pressure Map Program Change Change Setups

Range of Values USB_MIDI, MIDI, Local 1 to 16 60 semitones Velocity Map List Pressure Map List Off, On Immediate, KeyUp

Default USB_MIDI+MIDI+Local 1 0 1 Linear 1 Linear On Immediate

Destination
TheDestinationparametertellsthePC3LEwhichportswillcarryMIDIinformation,and determinesifthePC3LEssoundenginewillreceiveMIDIdata.Selectthedesireddestinationor anycombinationofdestinationsdependingonyourneeds.Forexample,avalueofLocal disablestheUSBandMIDIOutports.UsethissettingwhenyouwanttoplaythePC3LE,but nottosendanyMIDIinformationtootherMIDIinstruments(localcontrolonly.)Alternatively, youwouldsetthisparametertoMIDIorUSB_MIDIifyouonlywantedtosendMIDIdatato otherMIDIinstrumentsfromtheMIDIportorUSBport,andnoMIDIdatawouldbesent locallytothePC3LEssoundengine.AvalueofMIDI+LocalwouldsendMIDIdataonlytothe MIDIoutportandthePC3LEssoundengine. ForSetupmode,thisparameteractsasafinalfilterforwhichportswillsendMIDIinformation. Forexample,ifthisparameterissettoMIDI_USB+MIDI,andasetupzonehasitsDestination parametersettoMIDI+LocalontheSetupMode:CH/PRGpage,MIDIdatawillbesentonly

9-12

Master Mode MIDI Transmit (XMIT)

throughthetraditionalMIDIport.Bothparameters,MIDITransmitDestinationandthesetup DestinationparameterintheSetupMode:CH/PRGpageactasfiltersandbothareactiveinSetup mode. Note:ThisparameterhasnoeffectonSongmode.InSongmodeeachtracksdestinationignoresthis parameter.

Channel
ThisdefineswhichMIDIchannelthePC3LEusestotransmitMIDImessageswhennotusinga setuporSongmode(eachzonedeterminesthisinasetup,eachtrackdeterminesthisinasong.) ThevalueforthisparametermatchesthecurrentMIDIchanneldisplayedonthetoplineofthe Programmodepage.IfyouchangethecurrentMIDIchannelwhileinProgrammode,the settingofthisparameterchangesaccordingly,andviceversa.

Transpose
ThisparameteraffectsthetranspositionthatsappliedtotheMIDIdatastream.Adjustingthis parametertransposesthePC3LEsnotes,aswellasnotesonslavesreceivingfromthePC3LE. ThistranspositionsettingmirrorstranspositionsettingsfromtheProgramandSetupmain pages.Itsvalueisaddedtotranspositionsettingsmadeelsewhere.Thisparameterhasnoeffect onMIDIdatasentfromSongmode.

9-13

Master Mode MIDI Transmit (XMIT)

Velocity Map (Transmit)

ChangetheMIDITransmitVelocityMapsettingifyouaretriggeringexternalMIDIgearwhich isproducingnotesthataretooloudortooquietbasedonyourplayingstyle(howlightorheavy thatyouplaythekeys.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidestrangeofvelocityexpression,but youmaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnotsuityourplayingstyle. MIDI Sources PC3LEKeyboard MIDIInviaMIDIInportorUSBComputerport

VelMapSettingsonMIDIReceivePage

KEYVELpageforcurrentControlSetup(inProgramMode)orcurrentZone(inSetupMode)

VelMapSettingsonMasterModePage1

PC3LESongMode

VelMapSettingsonMIDITransmitPage

MIDI Destinations PC3LESoundEngine to PC3LEaudiooutputs MIDIOutviaMIDIOutportorUSBComputerport

ThetransmitVelocityMapaffectsthewaythePC3LEsendsMIDIvelocityvalues toitsUSBorMIDIOutport(seethecircledboxaboveforitslocationintheMIDIsignalflow.) DifferentmapsoutputdifferentMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesamereceivedMIDIattackvelocity. EachmapappliesadifferentcurvetoreceivedMIDIattackvelocitiesandremapsthemtonew velocitiesbeforetransmittingthemtotheUSBorMIDIOutport(thisparameterhasnoeffecton MIDIdatasentfromSongmodeortothePC3LEssoundengine.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthe widestrangeofvelocityexpression,butyoumaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefault doesnotsuityourplayingstyle.SeethediagramabovefortheotherpagesthataffecttheMIDI attackvelocitybeforereachingthetransmitVelmap. Thedefaultmap,Linear,allowsMIDIvelocitiestopassunchanged.MapsLight13makeit increasinglyeasiertoproducehighMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesamekeystrikevelocity(with Light3beingtheeasiest,)sothesemapsmayworkbetterforuserswhoplaywithalighter touch.Hard13makeitincreasinglyhardertoproducehighMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesame keystrikevelocity(withHard3beingthehardest,)sothesemapsmayworkbetterforusers whoplaywithahardertouch.PianoTouchsimulatesthegeneralvelocityresponseofan acousticpiano,andisbestsuitedforplayingacousticpianosounds.EasyTouchissimilartothe Lightsettings,makinghighvelocitieseasiertoplay,butitallowsmoresensitivecontrolover playinghighvelocitiesbynotboostingtheMIDIvelocityforfaststrikevelocitiesasmuchasit doesformediumstrikevelocities.GMReceivemimicsthevelocitymapcommonlyusedby keyboardsthatusetheGeneralMIDI(GM)soundset.TheGMReceivemapmakesmedium strikevelocitiesproducehigherMIDIvelocitiescomparedtotheLinearmap.

9-14

Master Mode MIDI Transmit (XMIT)

Pressure Map (Transmit)

ChangetheTransmitPressureMapsettingifyouaretriggeringexternalMIDIgearwhichis producingMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesthataretoohighortoolowbasedonyourplaying style(howsoftorhardthatyoupressthekeys.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidestrangeof pressureexpression,butyoumaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnotsuit yourplayingstyle. MIDI Sources PC3LEKeyboard MIDIInviaMIDIInportorUSBComputerport

PressureMapSettingsonMIDIReceivePage

PRESSpageforcurrentControlSetup(inProgramMode)orcurrentZone(inSetupMode)

PressMapSettingsonMasterModePage1

PC3LESongMode

PressureMapSettingsonMIDITransmitPage

MIDI Destinations PC3LESoundEngine to PC3LEaudiooutputs MIDIOutviaMIDIOutportorUSBComputerport

ThetransmitPressureMapaffectsthewaythePC3LEsendsMIDIpressure(aftertouch)values toitsUSBorMIDIOutport(seethecircledboxaboveforitslocationintheMIDIsignalflow.) DifferentmapsoutputdifferentMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesforthesamereceivedMIDI pressure(aftertouch)value.EachmapappliesadifferentcurvetoreceivedMIDIpressure (aftertouch)valuesandremapsthemtonewvaluesbeforetransmittingthemtotheUSBorMIDI Outport(thisparameterhasnoeffectonMIDIdatasentfromSongmodeortothePC3LEs soundengine.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidestrangeofpressure(aftertouch)expression, butyoumaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnotsuityourplayingstyle.See thediagramabovefortheotherpagesthataffectMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesbefore reachingthetransmitPressureMap. Thedefaultmap,Linear,allowsMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuestopassunchanged.Maps24 makeitincreasinglyeasiertoproduceMIDIpressurevaluesforthesamephysicalpressure appliedtoakey(with4Easiestbeingtheeasiest.)Maps47makeitincreasinglyharderto produceMIDIpressurevaluesforthesamephysicalpressureappliedtoakey(with7Hardest beingthehardest.)

9-15

Master Mode MIDI Transmit (XMIT)

Program Change (ProgChange)

WhenProgChangissettoOn,thePC3LEsendsprogramchangecommandstoitsUSBorMIDI OutportwhenyouselectprogramsorsetupsfromthefrontpanelorfromyourMIDIcontroller. SelectavalueofOffwhenyouwanttochangeprogramsonthePC3LEbutdontwanttosend programchangecommandstotheUSBorMIDIOutport.Thisparameterdoesntaffectthetype ofprogramchangecommandthatssent;itjustdetermineswhetheranycommandissentatall. (ThetypeofprogramchangecommandisdeterminedbytheBankModeparameterontheCH/ PROGpageintheSetupEditorofyourcontrolsetup.SeeTheSetupEditor on page 75formore details.) Note:TheProgChangparameterappliestoallmodesexceptSongmodeandSetupmode(orwhenasetup isloadedfromQuickAccessmode.)SetupsdisregardtheProgChangsettingandinsteadusethe EntryProgChgparameterontheSetupMode:CH/PROGpage(SeeTheChannel/Program(CH/PROG) Page on page 76.)SongsdisregardthisProgChangsettingandinsteadusetheProgChangparameteron theSong:EventFilterPlaybackpage,accessedfromthePLYFLTsoftbuttoninSongmode.

Change Setups (ChgSetups)

Thisparameterdeterminestheexacttimingofsetupchangeswhenyouselectadifferent setupeitherbyanormaldataentrymethodorviaMIDIprogramchangecommands.Choose KeyUptoindicatethatyouwantsetupchangestotakeplaceonlywhenyouvereleasedall currentlyheldnotes.ChooseImmediatetoindicatethatyouwantsuchchangestohappen immediatelywhenyouselectthesetup.

9-16

Master Mode MIDI Receive (RECV)

MIDI Receive (RECV)

TheMIDIReceivepageiswhereyoudefinethePC3LEsresponsetoincomingMIDIsignals (withoneexceptionpertainingtoQuickAccessmode,whichwellexplainlater).
Parameter Basic Channel MIDI Mode Velocity Map Pressure Map Program Change Mode (PrgChgMode) System Exclusive ID (SysExID) Bank Select All Notes Off Local Keyboard Channel (LocalKbdCh) Range of Values 1 to 16 Omni, Poly, Multi Velocity Map List Pressure Map List Program Change Type List 0 to 127 Ctl 0, Ctl 32, Ctl 0/32 Normal, Ignore None, 1 to 16 Default 1 Multi 1 Linear 1 Linear Extended 0 Ctl 0/32 Normal None

Basic Channel
ThebasicchanneldetermineswhichchannelwillalwaysbeavailabletoreceiveMIDI information.DependingontheMIDIreceivemode(below),theBasicchannelmaybetheonly receivingchannel,oroneofseveral.

MIDI Receive Mode (MIDI Mode)

TheMIDIModeparameterdeterminestheMIDIreceivingcapabilitiesofthePC3LE.Whenset toOmni,thePC3LErespondstoincomingMIDIeventsonallMIDIchannels,andplaysthem onthecurrentchannel.Thisisnormallyusedfordiagnosticpurposesonly. AtasettingofPoly,thePC3LErespondsonlytoeventsthataresentonthesamechannelasthe PC3LEscurrentMIDIchannel(theonedisplayedonthetoplineoftheProgrammodepage).In Polymode,thecurrentlyselectedchannelisalwaysthebasicchannel,soifyouchangechannels, thebasicchannelchangesaccordingly. WithavalueofMulti(thedefault),thePC3LErespondstoeventsonallactivechannels.Thisis themodeyoullusewhenyouredrivingthePC3LEwithasequencer,sinceyoucanplaya differentprogramoneachchannel.

9-17

Master Mode MIDI Receive (RECV)

Velocity Map (Receive)

ChangethereceiveVelocityMapsettingifyouaretriggeringthePC3LEwithexternalMIDI gearwhichisproducingnotesthataretooloudortooquiet.Thedefaultmapprovidesthe widestrangeofvelocityexpression,butyoumaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefault doesnotsuityourplayingstyle. MIDI Sources PC3LEKeyboard MIDIInviaMIDIInportorUSBComputerport

VelMapSettingsonMIDIReceivePage

KEYVELpageforcurrentControlSetup(inProgramMode)orcurrentZone(inSetupMode)

VelMapSettingsonMasterModePage1

PC3LESongMode

VelMapSettingsonMIDITransmitPage

MIDI Destinations PC3LESoundEngine to PC3LEaudiooutputs MIDIOutviaMIDIOutportorUSBComputerport

ThereceiveVelocityMapaffectsthewaythePC3LEreceivesMIDIvelocityvaluesfromitsUSB orMIDIInport(seethecircledboxaboveforitslocationintheMIDIsignalflow.)Different mapsoutputdifferentMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesamereceivedMIDIattackvelocity.Each mapappliesadifferentcurvetoreceivedMIDIattackvelocitiesandremapsthemtonew velocitiesbeforelettingthempass(thisparameterhasnoeffectonMIDIdatasentfromthe PC3LEskeyboard.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidestrangeofvelocityexpression,butyou maywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnotsuityourplayingstyle.Seethe diagramabovefortheotherpagesthataffecttheMIDIattackvelocitybeforereachingthe receiveVelocityMap. Thedefaultmap,Linear,allowsMIDIvelocitiestopassunchanged.MapsLight13makeit increasinglyeasiertoproducehighMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesamekeystrikevelocity(with Light3beingtheeasiest,)sothesemapsmayworkbetterforuserswhoplaywithalighter touch.Hard13makeitincreasinglyhardertoproducehighMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesame keystrikevelocity(withHard3beingthehardest,)sothesemapsmayworkbetterforusers whoplaywithahardertouch.PianoTouchsimulatesthegeneralvelocityresponseofan acousticpiano,andisbestsuitedforplayingacousticpianosounds.EasyTouchissimilartothe Lightsettings,makinghighvelocitieseasiertoplay,butitallowsmoresensitivecontrolover playinghighvelocitiesbynotboostingtheMIDIvelocityforfaststrikevelocitiesasmuchasit doesformediumstrikevelocities.GMReceivemimicsthevelocitymapcommonlyusedby keyboardsthatusetheGeneralMIDI(GM)soundset.TheGMReceivemapmakesmedium strikevelocitiesproducehigherMIDIvelocitiescomparedtotheLinearmap.

9-18

Master Mode MIDI Receive (RECV)

Pressure Map (Receive)

ChangethereceivePressureMapsettingifyouaretriggeringthePC3LEwithexternalMIDI gearwhichisproducingMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesthataretoohighortoolowbasedon yourplayingstyle(howsoftorhardthatyoupressthekeys.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthe widestrangeofpressure(aftertouch)expression,butyoumaywanttochooseadifferentmapif thedefaultdoesnotsuityourplayingstyle. MIDI Sources MIDIInviaMIDIInportorUSBComputerport PC3LEKeyboard

PressureMapSettingsonMIDIReceivePage

PRESSpageforcurrentControlSetup(inProgramMode)orcurrentZone(inSetupMode)

PressMapSettingsonMasterModePage1

PC3LESongMode

PressureMapSettingsonMIDITransmitPage

MIDI Destinations PC3LESoundEngine to PC3LEaudiooutputs MIDIOutviaMIDIOutportorUSBComputerport

ThereceivePressureMapaffectsthewaythePC3LEreceivesMIDIpressure(aftertouch)values fromitsUSBorMIDIInport(seethecircledboxaboveforitslocationintheMIDIsignalflow.) DifferentmapsoutputdifferentMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesforthesamereceivedMIDI pressure(aftertouch)value.EachmapappliesadifferentcurvetoreceivedMIDIpressure (aftertouch)valuesandremapsthemtonewvaluesbeforelettingthempass(thisparameterhas noeffectonMIDIdatasentfromthePC3LEskeyboard.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidest rangeofpressure(aftertouch)expression,butyoumaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthe defaultdoesnotsuityourplayingstyle.Seethediagramabovefortheotherpagesthataffect MIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesbeforereachingthereceivePressureMap. Thedefaultmap,Linear,allowsMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuestopassunchanged.Maps24 makeitincreasinglyeasiertoproduceMIDIpressurevaluesforthesamephysicalpressure appliedtoakey(with4Easiestbeingtheeasiest.)Maps47makeitincreasinglyharderto produceMIDIpressurevaluesforthesamephysicalpressureappliedtoakey(with7Hardest beingthehardest.)

9-19

Master Mode MIDI Receive (RECV)

All Notes Off

IfthisparametersvalueissettoNormal,thePC3LErespondstoAllNotesOffmessages receivedoverMIDI.Ignorecausesthesemessagestobeignored.IfyoureusingaRoland productasaMIDIcontrollerforyourPC3LE,youllwanttosetthevalueofthisparameterto Ignore.ThisisbecausesomeolderRolandproductsoccasionallysendanAllNotesOffmessage whennokeysarehelddownevenifyouresustainingnoteswithapedal.Youmightfindall yoursustainsmissingfromyoursequence,forexample,ifyouredrivingyourPC3LEfromone ofRolandshardwaresequencers.SettingthisparametertoIgnoretakescareofthisproblem. Regardlessofthesettingforthisparameter,thePC3LEalwaysrespondstoitsownPanicbutton byshuttingoffallactivenotesandcontrollers.

Program Change Mode (PrgChgMode)

ThisdetermineshowthePC3LErespondstoprogramchangecommandsreceivedviaMIDI.See ProgramChangeFormats on page 925foranexplanationofthevariousvaluesavailableforthis parameter.

System Exclusive ID (SysExID)

TheSysExIDparameterdifferentiatesbetweenmorethanoneMIDIdeviceofthesamemodel. Youwontneedtochangethedefaultsettingof0unlessyouhavemultiplePC3LEs(orPC3s, K2600s,K2500s,orK2000s)receivingSysExmessagesfromasinglesource.Inthatcase,make sureeachinstrumenthasadifferentSysExID.ThenyoucandirectSysExmessagestothe appropriatePC3LEwiththeSysExIDbytethatsincludedwitheverySysExmessage.Avalueof 127specifiesOmniReceive.Thatis,atthisvalue,aPC3LErespondstoaSysExmessage regardlessoftheSysExIDofthemessage.

Bank Select
BankSelectallowsyoutochoosebetweenhavingthePC3LErespondtoController0or Controller32orboth.Thereasonforthisisthatvariousmanufacturershavechosenonemethod ortheother.Thethreepossiblevaluesforthisparameterare: Ctl0 Ctl32 Ctl0/32 Respondstocontroller0only. Respondstocontroller32only. Respondsto0or32.

9-20

Master Mode MIDI Receive (RECV)

Local Keyboard Channel (LocalKbdCh)

TheLocalKeyboardChannelenablesanexternalMIDIdevicetofunctionasifitisthePC3LEs keyboardandphysicalcontrollers.ThisallowsoneMIDIchannelofanexternalMIDIdeviceto controlmultipleMIDIchannelsofthePC3LE,eveniftheexternalMIDIdeviceonlytransmitson onechannel. InSetupMode,whentheLocalKbdChparameterissettomatchthechannelonwhichthe externalMIDIdeviceistransmitting,thesetupwillplayontheexternalMIDIdeviceasitdoes onthePC3LEskeyboard.SeetheContinuousControllerMessagesFromExternalMIDI Devices on page 922sectionbelowfordetailsonreceivingcontinuouscontrollermessagesfrom anexternalMIDIdevicewhenaLocalKeyboardChannelisset.Also,inSetupMode,whenthe LocalKbdChparameterissettomatchthechannelonwhichtheexternalMIDIdeviceis transmitting,externalMIDIreceivedbyaZoneissenttothedestinationsetwitheachZones CH/PROGpageDestinationparameter(seeDestination on page 76fordetails.)Inthiscase,ifa ZoneissendingtheexternalMIDItotheUSBorMIDIOutports,theMIDImessageswillbe remappedtothechanneloftheZone,andanynotetranspositionsetfortheZonewillbe applied. InSetupMode,whentheLocalKbdChparameterissettoNone,anexternalMIDIdevicewill playasingleProgram.TheplayedprogramwillbeonaZoneofthecurrentSetupthathasa Channelparameter(ontheSetupEditorCH/PROGpage)whichmatchesthechannelonwhich theexternalMIDIdeviceistransmitting.(IfnoZonesChannelparametermatches,theexternal devicewillplaytheprogramthatwaslastusedbythatchannelinProgramorSetupMode.)Whenthe ProgramofaSetupZoneisplayedfromanexternalMIDIcontrollerwiththeLocalKbdCh parametersettoNone,SetupMIDIparameters(mostnoticeablykeyrangeandtransposition) willnotbeapplied.(SeeInputChannel on page 78fordetailsonapplyingtheseparameters whenplayingasinglezonefromanexternalMIDIdevice.)Also,inSetupMode,whenLocal KeyboardChannelissettoNone,externalMIDIsenttoanychannelisoutputfromtheMIDI Thruport,butnotfromtheMIDIOutportorUSBport. TheLocalKeyboardChannelparameteralsoaffectshowexternalMIDIdevicesinteractwith ProgramMode.InProgramMode,whentheLocalKbdChparameterissettomatchthechannel onwhichtheexternalMIDIdeviceistransmitting,theexternalMIDIdevicewillplaythe ProgramonthechannelcurrentlyselectedontheProgramModemainpage.(TheProgramMode mainpageshowsthecurrentchannelontherightofthetopline.)Also,inthiscase,externalMIDI receivedbyaProgramissenttothedestinationsetbytheDestinationparameterontheMaster ModeMIDITransmitpage(seeDestination on page 912fordetails.) InProgramMode,whentheLocalKbdChparameterissettoNone,anexternalMIDIdevice willtriggertheprogramonthechannelthatitistransmitting,nomatterwhichchannelis currentlyselectedontheProgramModemainpage.Inthiscase,externalMIDIsenttoany channelisoutputfromtheMIDIThruport,butnotfromtheMIDIOutportorUSBport.

9-21

Master Mode MIDI Receive (RECV)

Continuous Controller Messages From External MIDI Devices WhenusinganexternalMIDIdevicewiththePC3LE,youcancontrolmanyofthePC3LEs programparametersbysendingMIDIContinuousControllermessages(CCs)fromtheexternal MIDIdevice.EachparameterthatyouwishtocontrolmusthaveaCCnumberassignedinthe ProgramEditor(seethesectionbelow:AssigningAnExternalCCNumberAsAControlSourceFor AProgramParameter.)SeethesectionsbelowfordetailsonusingexternalCCswiththeavailable settingsinProgramandSetupMode. FordetailsoncontrollableparametersofVASTprograms,seeThePARAMETERS Page on page 69.
Assigning An External CC Number As A Control Source For A Program Parameter

Foreachprogram,theProgramEditorcanbeusedtoassignanexternalMIDIcontrollerCC numbertocontroleachparameteronParameterspage.ToassignaCCnumbertoaparameter, selecttherowforthedesiredparameterontheParameterspage,thenusethealphanumericpad toentertheCCnumberintotherightcolumnofthatrow,thenpressEnter.Withtheright columnselected,youcanalsoassignaCCnumberbyholdingtheEnterbuttonandsendinga CCvaluefromtheexternalMIDIcontroller.WhenassigningaCCnumberontheParameters page,thenumbermaybedisplayedinthesourcefieldasthenameofthatCCsdefaultuse.

Using External CCs In Program Mode, Local Keyboard Channel=None

TocontrolaprogramparameterviaexternalMIDICCinProgramMode,theparametermust firsthaveasourceassignedwithintheProgramEditor,asdescribedintheAssigningAnExternal CCNumberAsAControlSourceForAProgramParametersectionabove.Tocontrolanassigned programparameterwithLocalKeyboardChannelsettoNone,sendtheassignedCCnumber tothechannelwhichcontainstheprogram.

Using External CCs In Program Mode, Local Keyboard Channel Enabled

TocontrolaprogramparameterviaexternalMIDICCinProgramMode,theparametermust firsthaveasourceassignedwithintheProgramEditor,asdescribedintheAssigningAnExternal CCNumberAsAControlSourceForAProgramParametersectionabove.WhenusingLocal KeyboardChannelinProgramMode,itisbesttoassignparameterstobecontrolledbythe ControlSetupdefaultCCs,becausethesematchthedefaultdestinationsforphysicalcontrollers (seethetableControlSetupDefaultAssignments on page 924). TheLocalKeyboardChannelmakesanexternalMIDIcontrollerscontinuouscontrollersbehave asiftheywerethePC3LEsphysicalcontrollers.InProgramMode,whenanexternalMIDI controllerissendingaCConthechannelsetforLocalKeyboardChannel,externalCCscan controlthedestinationssetforeachofthePC3LEsphysicalcontrollers.SendthedefaultCCfor aphysicalcontrollertocontrolitsdestination(seetheExternalMIDICCRemappingForLocal KeyboardChannelandInputChanneltablebelowfordefaults.)InProgramMode,these destinationsaresetintheControlSetup(seeTheControlSetup on page 75fordetails.)Tocontrol anassignedparameter,sendtheassigneddefaultphysicalcontrollerCCtothechannelsetfor LocalKeyboardChannel. IfaLocalKeyboardChannelissetbutyouaresendingCCstoadifferentchannel,theseCCs willbereceivednormallybythePrograminthatchannel.
Using External CCs In Setup Mode, Local Keyboard Channel=None, Input Channel=None

TocontrolaprogramparameterviaexternalMIDICCinSetupMode,theparametermustfirst haveasourceassignedwithintheProgramEditor,asdescribedintheAssigningAnExternalCC NumberAsAControlSourceForAProgramParametersectionabove.Tocontrolanassigned parameter,sendtheassignedCCnumbertothechannelfortheSetupZonewhichcontainsthe program.

9-22

Master Mode MIDI Receive (RECV) Using External CCs In Setup Mode, Local Keyboard Channel Enabled, Input Channel=None

TocontrolaprogramparameterviaexternalMIDICCinSetupMode,theparametermustfirst haveasourceassignedwithintheProgramEditor,asdescribedintheAssigningAnExternalCC NumberAsAControlSourceForAProgramParametersectionabove. TheLocalKeyboardChannelmakesanexternalMIDIcontrollerscontinuouscontrollersbehave asiftheywerethePC3LEsphysicalcontrollers.InSetupMode,whenanexternalMIDI controllerissendingaCConthechannelsetforLocalKeyboardChannel,externalCCscan controlthedestinationssetforeachofthePC3LEsphysicalcontrollers.SendthedefaultCCfor aphysicalcontrollertocontrolitsdestination(seetheExternalMIDICCRemappingForLocal KeyboardChannelandInputChanneltablebelowfordefaults.)TheCCisreceivedinSetupMode andsenttoaProgrambasedonthedestinationsetinSetupMode.IntheSetupEditor,usethe alphanumericpadtoseteachPC3LEphysicalcontrollerDest,OnControlorOffControl fieldto theCCsyouassignedinProgramMode.WhensettingaCCdestination,thenumbermayturn intothenameofthePC3LEphysicalcontrollerwhichusesthatCCbydefault.Ifyoucreatea SetupusingSetup126InternalVoicesasatemplate,thedefaultCCnumberswillalreadybeset foreachphysicalcontrollerdestination.(DontsaveaSetupatID126,setup126InternalVoicesis thePC3LEsdefaultControlSetup,seeTheControlSetup on page 75fordetails.) Note:InSetupMode,whenanexternalMIDIcontrollerissendingaCConthechannelsetfor LocalKeyboardChannel,anyCCsentthatisnotintheExternalMIDICCRemappingForLocal KeyboardChannelandInputChanneltable(seebelow)getssenttoProgramsonallZonesofthe Setup. IfaLocalKeyboardChannelissetbutyouaresendingCCstoadifferentchannel,theseCCs willbereceivednormallybytheProgramintheSetupZoneforthatchannel.
Using External CCs In Setup Mode, Local Keyboard Channel=None, Input Channel Enabled

TocontrolaprogramparameterviaexternalMIDICCinSetupMode,theparametermustfirst haveasourceassignedwithintheProgramEditor,asdescribedintheAssigningAnExternalCC NumberAsAControlSourceForAProgramParametersectionabove. TouseanInputChannel(seepage 78,)LocalKeyboardChannelmustbesettoNone.The InputChannelmakesanexternalMIDIcontrollerscontinuouscontrollersbehaveasifthey werethePC3LEsphysicalcontrollers.WhenanexternalMIDIcontrollerissendingaCConthe channelsetforInputChannel,externalCCscancontrolthedestinationssetforeachofthe PC3LEsphysicalcontrollers.SendthedefaultCCforaphysicalcontrollertocontrolits destination(seetheExternalMIDICCRemappingForLocalKeyboardChannelandInputChannel tablebelowfordefaults.)TheCCisreceivedinSetupModeandsenttoaProgrambasedonthe destinationsetinSetupMode.IntheSetupEditor,usethealphanumericpadtoseteachPC3LE physicalcontrollerDest,OnControlorOffControl fieldtotheCCsyouassignedinProgram Mode.WhensettingaCCdestination,thenumbermayturnintothenameofthePC3LE physicalcontrollerwhichusesthatCCbydefault.IfyoucreateaSetupusingSetup126Internal Voicesasatemplate,thedefaultCCnumberswillalreadybesetforeachphysicalcontroller destination.(DontsaveaSetupatID126,setup126InternalVoicesisthePC3LEsdefaultControl Setup,seeTheControlSetup on page 75fordetails.) Note:InSetupMode,whenanexternalMIDIcontrollerissendingaCConthechannelsetfor InputChannel,anyCCsentthatisnotintheExternalMIDICCRemappingForLocalKeyboard ChannelandInputChanneltable(seebelow)alsogetssenttotheProgramonthatchannel. IfanInputChannelissetbutyouaresendingCCstoadifferentchannel,theseCCswillbe receivednormallybytheprogramintheSetupZoneforthatchannel.

9-23

Master Mode MIDI Receive (RECV)

External MIDI CC Remapping For Local Keyboard Channel and Input Channel PC3LE Physical Controller
Pitch Wheel Mod Wheel Arp Button SW Button CC Pedal (volume) Pressure (key pressure) SW Pedal 1 (sustain) SW Pedal 2 Knob 1 (Timbre) Knob 2 (Mod) Knob 3 (Envelope,) Knob 4 (Effect,) Knob 5 (Reverb,) Knob 6-8 (CTL6-8) Knob 8 (CTL8) Knob 9 (CTL9) Knob 10 (CTL10) Knob 11-15 (CTL11-15) Programmable Switches 1-10 (SW1-10)

Default MIDI CC# Which Controls The Destination Assigned To Each PC3LE Physical Controller In The Setup Editor
NA, responds to MIDI pitch bend messages 1 78 79 11 Not controllable by MIDI CC 64 66 6 13 22-27 85 28 30 102-106 68-77

Control Setup Default Assignments PC3LE Physical Controller Controllers Page Name (And Front Panel Name)
Mod Wheel Pitchbend up Pitchbend dn SW Pedal 1 SW Pedal 2 CC Pedal 1 Pressure Arp. Switch (Arp Enable) Arp. latch sw (Arp Latch) Knob 1 (Timbre,) Knob 2 (Mod) Knob 3 (Envelope,) Knob 4 (Effect,) Knob 5 (Reverb,) Knob6 (CTL6) Knob 7-15 (CTL7-15) Switch 1-4 (SW1-4) Switch 5-10 (SW5-10)

Continuous Controller Number And Name

1 (MWheel) 130 (PitchUp) 131 (PitchDwn) 64 (Sustain) 66 (Sostenut) 11 (Express) 132 (Pressure) 147 (ArpOn,) 148 (ArpOff) 157 (Latch) 14-15 (MIDI14-15) 16-19 (CtlA-D) 20-28 (MIDI20-28) 80-83 (MIDI80-83) 85-90 (MIDI85-90)

9-24

Master Mode Program Change Formats

Program Change Formats

ThePC3LEcanstoremoreprogramsthantheMIDIprogramchangespecificationcanhandle (MIDIletsyousendprogramchangenumbersfrom0to127or1to128only).Sowevedesigned asystemthatmakesprogramselectionmoreflexible.Thisistruewhetheryoureselecting programsfromthePC3LEsfrontpanel,orviaMIDI.

Program Change Type

Extended K2600

For Use With:

Program changes in banks of 128 ID #s. This is for connecting a generic MIDI device as a controller device. Bank changes and Program changes from a K2600.

ThePC3LEgivesyouthousandsofprogramchangenumberstoworkwith.Theseareorganized into16banksof128each,startingatprogram0.Forexample,bank1containsprograms0127, bank2containsprograms128255,bank3containsprograms256383,etc.BecausethePC3LEs programsstartatprogram0,eachprogramsprogramchangenumberisitsobjectIDnumber plus1.ThePC3LEcanuseseveraldifferentformatsforinterpretingprogramchange commands.ThevaluefortheProgChgModeparameterontheRECEIVEpagedetermineswhich formatisused,andtheoneyoushouldselectdependsonyourMIDIsystem. IfyouexpectyoullalwayschangeprogramsfromyourPC3LEsfrontpanel,selectingprograms isassimpleasenteringtheprogramsobjectIDonthealphanumericpad,andpressingEnter. EvenprogramnumbersabovetheusualMIDIlimitof127canbeselectedthisway.

Extended Program Changes

IfyourecontrollingyourPC3LEfromaMIDIdevicethatcanhandletheMIDIController0or32 programchangeformat,youllhavethegreatestflexibilityifyousettheProgChgType parametertoavalueofExtended. Whenyoureusingtheextendedprogramchangeformat,thendependingonthevalueofthe BankSelectparameterontheReceive(RECV)pageinMasterMode,thePC3LEwillrespondto eitherMIDIController0or32programchangecommandsforbankselection,andstandard programchangecommandsforprogramchangeswithinthecurrentbank.Differentvalueshave differentresults,asshowninthefollowingtable:

Program Change Command Type MIDI controller 0 or 32 (MC 0 or MC 32) Standard (PCH)

Value of Message 0 to 16 0 to 127

Result Selects a bank 0-16 Selects corresponding program number (minus 1) in current bank

9-25

Master Mode Soft Buttons In Master Mode

IfyourPC3LEisalreadyinthebankyouwanttouse(groupof128programsstartingfrom0,) youcansenditsinglePCHs(standardprogramchangecommands)from0to127,toselect programswithinthatbank.ThePC3LEsresponsedependsonthesettingfortheBank/Select parameterontheReceive(RECV)pageinMastermode.Ifyouwanttochangethebankof availableprograms,thePC3LEmustreceiveeitheranMC(MIDIcontroller)0or32message withvalue0127.ThenextPCHintherange0127willselectthecorrespondinglynumbered programinthenewlyselectedbank.Thefollowingtableofexamplesshouldhelpmakeitclear.

Bank Change Command Received MC 0 or 32: value 0 MC 0 or 32: value 1 MC 0 or 32: value 2

Program Change Command Received PCH: value 99 PCH: value 41 PCH: value 56

Result Program 98 (bank 1, 98th program) Program 168 (bank 2, 41st program) Program 311 (bank 3, 56th program)

Soft Buttons In Master Mode

Reset
PresstheResetsoftbuttonifyouwanttoreturnyourPC3LEsmemorytothestateitwasin whenyouboughtit. CAUTION:ResettingthePC3LEsystemcausesALLparameterstoberestoredtodefaultvaluesandALL userobjectstobeerased.

Delete
PresstheDeletesoftbuttontodeletethemastertable,whichstoresallsettingsontheMaster Modepages,programsettingsforeachMIDIchannelandprogramcategoryfavoritesfor ProgramMode,andreplacementGeneralMIDIprogramsinProgramModewhenthePC3LEis inGeneralMIDIMode.MasterModeparameterswillbereturnedtotheirfactorydefault settings.

UTILITIES
InMasterMode(oronanypage)pressthePC3LEstwocentersoftbuttons(3and4) simultaneouslytoentertheUTILITIESpage.TheUTILITIESpagegivesyouaccesstoMIDIand voicediagnostictools,systeminformation,theobjectDeleteutility,andthebootloader.The Utilitiespageappearsasshownbelow:

9-26

Master Mode UTILITIES

MIDI
PressingtheMIDIsoftbuttonlaunchesMIDIScope,ausefulsubprogramthatletsyou monitortheMIDImessagesfromthePC3LEandthosereceivedviaMIDI.Thisisagoodwayto makesureyourereceivingMIDIfromMIDImasters.Itsalsogoodformakingsureyour controlsareassignedasyouwantthem,checkingyourattackvelocities,checkingyour controllervalues,etc.

VOICES
PressingtheVoicessoftbuttoncallsuptheVoiceStatuspage,whichshowsthePC3LEsactive voicechannelsasyouplay.TheVoiceStatuspagesdisplayseachactivevoiceasasolid rectangularblockformonovoicesordisplaysstereopairsofvoicesasa>fortheleftchannel voiceanda<fortherightchannelvoice.Whateversymbolthepagedisplays,whenthekeyofa voiceisreleased,thatvoicessymbolontheVoicesStatuspageturnsintoadotduringthe releaseportionofthatvoicesenvelope.Whenthevoicedecaystosilence,itisnolongeractive, andthedotdisappears.TheVoiceStatussymbolsappearsasshownbelow:

TheVoiceStatuspagegivesyouanindicationoftheenvelopelevelofeachvoice,thoughnot necessarilythevolumelevel.Nonetheless,thiscangiveyouavaluableindicationofhowyour voicesarebeingused.Forexample,ifallormostofthevoicesareactive,thentheresagood chancethatwhenvoicestealingtakesplaceanaudiblevoicewillbereallocated. TheVoicesutilityworksabitdifferentlyforKB3programs.ThePC3LEusesonevoiceof polyphonyforeverytwotonewheelsinaKB3program.IntheVoicesutility,thevoicesusedby thetonewheelsappearassolidrectangularblock,meaningthatthevoicesareusedfortheKB3 program.Theydontgetreallocatedatanytime,sincetheyrealwayson,evenifyourenot playinganynotes.AnyvoicesnotdedicatedtoaKB3programbehavenormally.Soifyouhave asetupthatcontainsaKB3programinonezone,andVASTprogramsinoneormoreother zones,youcanmonitorthevoiceallocationofthenonKB3voicesinthesectionofthedisplay thatisntconstantlyfilledwithsolidrectangularblocks. CPUusageisdisplayedinpercentonthebottomofthepage,whichreflectshowmuchofthe PC3LEstotalavailableCPUpowerisbeingusedfrommomenttomoment.Generally,having morevoices,complexProgramsandeffectsinuseatoncewillresultinhigherCPUusage.

About
PressingtheAboutsoftbuttoncallsupthegeneralinfoandcreditspageforthePC3LE.Press anykeytoleavethispage.

9-27

Master Mode UTILITIES

OBJECT
PressingtheOBJECTsoftbuttoncallsuptheObjectspage(seebelow.)Fromhereyoucanaccess theDeleteutilityfunctionfordeletingselectionsofusercreated(oredited)objects.Pressthe DeletesoftbuttontoaccesstheDeletefunction(seebelowfordetails.) TheOBJECTSpagealsodisplaysthenumberofuserobjectssavedtointernalmemory(inthe UserObjectsfield,)themaximumnumberofuserobjectsthatcanbesavedtointernalmemory (intheMaxUserObjectsfield,)andtheamountoffreeinternalmemory(intheIntMemoryFree field.)(TheMaxUserObjectsfieldshowsthemaximumamountofuserobjectsthatcanbeloaded/saved tointernalmemoryforallobjecttypescombined.Keepinmindeachobjecttypeonlyhas2560ID#s availabletosave/loadobjectsto,manyofwhichareusedbyfactoryROMobjects.) Note:ThenumbergivenfortheMaxUserObjectsfieldisbasedonloading/savingthesmallestuser objectstointernalmemory.Whenloading/savinglargeruserobjects(suchasProgramswithmanylayers andSetupswithmanyzones),thePC3LEmayrunoutofinternalmemorybeforethemaximumnumber ofuserobjectshasbeenloaded/saved. TheinformationontheOBJECTSpageishelpfulwhenorganizinguserobjects.Forexample, whenloadingmanyuserobjectsfromanexternalsource,youshouldfirstdetermineifthereis enoughinternalmemoryavailablefortheobjectsbeingloaded.Ifthereisnotenoughinternal memoryavailable,usetheDelete softbuttontodeleteuserobjects.(Tosaveuserobjectsbefore deletion,seeTheSTOREPage on page 116.) TheObjectspagealsodisplaysthecurrentinstalledobjectsversion(factoryobjects,)andthe currentinstalledOSversion.Thisinformationisusefulwheninstallingupdates.

Delete TheobjectDeleteutilityisusefulfordeletingunwantedusercreatedobjectsinordertoincrease freeRAMspaceinyourPC3LE.OntheDeleteadvancedpage,youcanselectasingleobjector multipleobjectstodelete(seebelow.) Therightcolumnshowsyoualistofallusercreatedobjects.Theleftcolumntellsyouwhattype eachobjectis,andobjectsaregroupedbytype.Usethealphawheelorplus/minusbuttonsto selectoneormoreobjectsfromthelist.UsetheSelectsoftbuttontomakeyourselection(s), whichwillbemarkedwithastar.UsetheTypesoftbuttontojumptothelowestnumbered objectofthenextgroupofobjecttypes.Youcanusethealphanumericpadtojumptoanobject oftheselectedtypebynumber,orenter0tojumptothelowestsavedobjectnumberofthe currentlyselectedtype.Toreviewwhichobjectsyouhaveselected,presstheNextsoftbuttonto movetothenextselectedobjectinthelist.PresstheDeletesoftbuttontodeleteyourselection, youwillbegiventhechoicetoDeleteorCancel.TheCancelsoftbuttonontheDeleteadvanced pagewillreturnyoutotheOBJECTSpage.

9-28

Master Mode UTILITIES

Ifanyoftheselectedobjectshavedependentsthatwerenotselected,youwillseethequestion: Deletedependentobjects? IfyouanswerYestothisquestion,alldependentobjectsoftheselectedobjectsaredeleted, unlesstheyarebeingusedasdependentsofotherobjectsthataretoremaininmemory. AnsweringNowilldeleteonlythoseobjectsthatwereselectedandnottheirdependents.

Loader
PressingtheLoadersoftbuttoncallsuptheBootLoader.SeeAppendix Bfordetails.

9-29

Master Mode UTILITIES

9-30

Song Mode and the Song Editor Getting Started with the Sequencer

Chapter 10 Song Mode and the Song Editor

Getting Started with the Sequencer
ThePC3LEssequencerisapowerfulandversatiletoolforsongwriters,composers,andanyone elsewhowantstorecordandplaybacksongs.Aswithanytool,however,itsbesttostartwith thebasics.Ifyouarefamiliarwithothersequencers,youwillhavenoproblemusingSongmode inthePC3LE.Readthroughthissection,however,tolearnaboutthefeaturesthatmakethe PC3LEssequencerunique.

What is a Sequencer?
Asequencerissimilarinsomewaystoamultitracktaperecorder:youcanrecordandplay backallsortsofmusicandsounds,layersoundsontopofothersounds,andchangeor manipulatethingsthatyouvepreviouslyrecorded.Unlikeataperecorder,however,youdo notactuallyrecordsoundswithasequencer.Rather,youarerecordingcommandsthatcause soundstobeplayed.Nonetheless,wewillsometimesexplainsequencerfeaturesbydrawing analogiestofamiliartaperecordingtechniquessuchassplicingandoverdubbing. Thereareseveraladvantagestorecordingasongbysequencing.Foronething,sequencer commandstakeupmuchlessdiskspacethandigitallyrecordedmusicwould,soyoucangeta lotofinformation(thatis,music)permegabyte.Furthermore,youcaneasilymakechangesto yoursequences.Forexample,youcanchangeindividualnotes,transposeparts,orchange instrumentation.Lastly,youcansharethesequencesyoucreatewithothermusicians.

Song Mode: The MAIN Page

TheSongmodeMAINPageallowsrealtimerecordingandplayback,songandtrackselection. Fromthispageyoucanviewandeditthetrackschannel,program,volumeandpansettings,as wellasotherusefulitems.

Parameter Current Song Recording Track Program

Range of Values Song List 1 to 16, None, Mult Program List

Default 0*New Song* 1 Current Program

10-1

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MAIN Page

Parameter Track Status Channel Volume Pan Tempo Mode Location

Range of Values , R, M, P 1 to 16 0 to 127 0 to 127 20.0 to 400.0 BPM, EXT Merge, Erase -9999:9 to 9999:9

Default 1 to 16 left to right 127 64 120.0 BPM Merge 1:1

TheEventsfieldonthetoplinedisplaysthefreeRAMavailableforeventsintheselectedsong. TheSongStatus,alsoonthetoplineofthedisplay,isalwaysoneofthefollowing: STOPPED PLAYING REC.READY Thedefaultsequencerstatus;alsoappearswhenyoupresstheStoporPause button. AppearswhenthePlaybuttonispressed,butonlyifthefollowingconditions aretrue:theRecordwasnotpressedpriortopressingPlay. AppearswhentheRecordbuttonispressedwhileSongStatusisSTOPPED. REC.READYflashes,indicatingthatthesequenceriswaitingtostart recording.

Current Song (CurSong)

ThisshowstheIDand16characternameofthesongcurrentlyselectedforrecording,playback, orediting.Whenasongisselected,ProgramChange,Volume,andPaninformationissenttoall MIDIchannelsassignedtotracksthathavedataonthem,andtheinternalclockissettomatch thesettingoftheTempoparameter.Whenlookingforapreviouslysavedsong,youcanscroll throughsongswhilethesequencerisplayingtoquicklyhearthebeginningofeach.

Tempo
TheTempoparameterdeterminestheinitialtempofortheselectedsong.Thesongwillalways startplaybackattheinitialtempo.Whateverthetempoissettowhenyourecordyourfirsttrack willbethesongsinitialtempo.Duringplayback,thecurrenttempoisshowninthisfield. Duringrecording,temposdialedinheregetrecordedintheTempoTrack.Theinitialtempoand othertempochangescanalsobeeditedintheeventlistfortheTempoTrack.TheTempotrack alsoallowsyoutoprogrammoreprecisefractionaltemposwithtwodecimalplaces. Toquicklychangeasongsinitialtempo,pressRecord(theSongStatuswillchangetoREC READY),setthetempodesired,thenpressStop.Theinitialtempocanalsobechangedwiththe TempoparameterontheCOMMONpageintheSongEditor,oratthetopoftheeventlistforthe TempotrackontheEVENTpageintheSongEditor. Note:YoucanalsosetthetempousingtheTapTempobutton(onthefrontpanel,belowthe Modebuttons.)TaptheTapTempobuttononbeatforameasureortwoatthedesiredtempoto setatempo.ThisalsobringsuptheTapTempopage(seeTapTempoButton on page 64.) Youcanalsosetthetempotobecontrolledbyanexternalsequencer.UsetheAlphanumericPad toenter0inthetempofield,andpressenter.EXTwillappearinthetempofield.AnyMIDI TimeClock(MTC)signalreceivedatthePC3LEsUSBorMIDIinportwillnowsettheSong playbacktempo.

10-2

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MAIN Page

Recording Track (RecTrk)

TheRecTrkparameterdetermineswhichtrackisrecordenabled.Settherecordenabledtrackto Multtorecordmorethanonechannelsimultaneously. WhenRecTrkissettoasingletrack(116),Record(R)isdisplayedforthattrackintheTrack StatusIndicatorregion(abovetheTrackandChannelsregion).Conversely,withoneexception, whenanytracksStatusIndicatorischangedtoRecord(R),thattrackisshownasthevaluefor theRecTrkparameter. TheexceptioniswhenRecTrkisalreadysettoMult,youcanselecttherecordenabledtracksby togglingtheTrackStatusIndicatortoRecord(R),andtheRecTrkwillremainsettoMult. WhenMultisinitiallyselected,alloftheemptytrackswillberecordenabled.Trackscontaining datawillremainsettoplay(P),butyoucanmanuallysetthemtorecord(R). Theparameter(s)belowRecTrkchangeaccordingtothevalueofRecTrk.IfRecTrkissettoa singletrack(116),Progisdisplayedandyoucanselecttheprogramtobeassignedtothattrack. Ifyouswitchthroughthechannels,theprogramalsochanges,showingtheprogramcurrently assignedtothatchannel. IfyouchangeRecTrktoNoneorMulti,thedisplaychangestoshowTrk:#.Thisfieldindicates whichtrackiscurrentlybeingtriggeredbythekeyboard,andyoucanusethisTrk:#fieldto selectatrack.

Program (Prog)
Usethisfieldtoscrollthroughtheprogramsinmemoryandselectaprogrambeforeinitially recordingeachtrackofyoursong.AprogramselectedonthecurrentRecTrkbecomesthe tracksinitialprogramthefirsttimethatthetrackisrecorded.Aninitialprogramistheprogram thatwillbeusedforatrackwhenitisplayedfromthestartofbar1(oranyotherpointifthere arenoprogramchangesandControlChaseisturnedon,seeControlChase on page 1017.) ProgramsselectedinProgramorQuickAccessModeareselectedastheprogramonthecurrent RecTrkwhenyoureturntoSongmode. FollowthesestepstochangethecurrentRecTrksinitialprogramafterrecordinghastakenplace onthattrack.Whilethesequencerisstopped,pressRecord,selecttheprogram,pressStop,and savethesong.Thispreservesallchangesyouhavemadetoanyothertrackparameters:volume, pan,tempo,etc.YoucanalsochangetheinitialprogramatthetopofatracksEVENTlist(see SongEditor:TheEVENTPage on page 1031.) AnyMIDIprogramchangesonthecurrentRecTrkorChancausetheIDandnameofthetracks programtochangeduringplayback.Programchangescanbewrittentotheeventlistofthe currentRecTrkbychangingtheProgparameterwhilerecording.Ifaprogramchangetakes place,theprogramwillonlyreturntotheinitialprogramiftriggeredbyanotherprogram change,orifthesequencerisstoppedandrestartedfromthebeginningofthesequence.One exceptiontothisiswhenusingtheControlChasefeature,youwouldonlyneedtorestartthe sequencebeforethefirstprogramchangeinordertoreturntotheinitialprogram(seeControl Chase on page 1017.) ProgchangestoTrk:#ifRecTrkissettoNoneorMult.Thisfieldindicateswhichtrackis currentlybeingtriggeredbythekeyboard,andyoucanusethisTrk:#fieldtoselectatrack.

Track Number (Trk:#)

ThisparameterisavailableonlywhenRecTrkissettoNoneorMult(replacingtheProg parameter.)Itindicateswhichtrackiscurrentlybeingtriggeredbythekeyboard,andyoucan usethisfieldtoselectatrack.

10-3

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MAIN Page

Volume (Vol)
Youcansetavolumelevelforeachtrackasavaluebetween0and127.Ifthechannelofthe RecTrk(orthecontrolchannel,ifRecTrkissettoMultiorNone)containsanyrecordedvolume change(controller7),thechangewillbereflectedastheVolparametersvalueinrealtime,as wellasontheMIXERpage.Also,changingtheVolvaluewhilerecordingwillwritevolume automation(controller7messages)tothecurrentRecTrkseventlist. Initial Volume Settings Eachsongfiledoesnotautomaticallysaveyourvolumesettingforeachtrack.Tomakeasong saveyourvolumesettingsforeachtrack,youmustwriteaninitialvolumeforeachtrack.Initial volumeisthevolumesettingthatwillbeusedwhenyoursongisplayedbackfromthestartof bar1.Aninitialvolumesettingisessentiallyavolumeautomationmessagethatiswritten beforethefirsttickofatrack.Initialvolumesettingsarenotautomaticallywrittenduring recordingbecausetheymakeithardertotryoutdifferentvolumesettingsforatrack.For example,aninitialvolumewillresetanyvolumeadjustmentsthatyoumakeduringplayback eachtimethesongisstoppedandplayedfromthestartofbar1,orifthesongisstoppedand playedfromanypointiftheControlChaseparametersettoOnontheSong:MISCpage(see SongMode:TheMISCPage on page 1017.)Ifyouplantotryoutdifferentvolumesettings,itis easierifyouwriteaninitialvolumeafteryouhavefoundthedesiredsetting. Setting Initial Volume Per Track FollowthesestepstochangethecurrentRecTrksinitialvolume.Whilethesequenceris stopped,pressRecord,changethevalueofVol,pressStop,andsavethesong(followthesame methodtoquicklysetinitialprogramorpansettings.)Initialprogram,volume,andpancanalso besetatthetopofeachtrackseventlist(seeSongEditor:TheEVENTPage on page 1031.) Setting Initial Values For All Tracks AnimportantlaststepbeforesavingafinishedsongistostoreinitialvaluesofProgram,Volume andPanforalltracks.Thiscanbedoneatanytime,butisbestdoneasalaststepifyouplanto makealotofadjustmentstothesesettings.Towriteinitialsettingsforalltracks,presstheKeep softbuttonontheSong:MIXERpage(seeSongMode:TheMIXERPage on page 1012.)After pressingtheKeepsoftbuttonyoumustsaveyoursongtosavethesesettings(youare automaticallypromptedtosaveuponexitingtheSong:MIXERpage.)PressingtheKeepsoft buttonstoresthecurrentvalueofeachtracksProgram,VolumeandPansettingsasinitial settings.Besurethatthesevaluesoneachtrackaresettothevaluethatyouwishtostore,asthe settingsmayhavechangedifyouhavewrittenanyautomation. Note:DontusetheKeepsoftbuttonifyouwouldlikecertaintrackstonotbestoredwithinitialvalues. Inthiscase,onlysetinitialvaluesforeachdesiredparameterasdescribedabove(seeSettingInitial VolumePerTrack.) Volume Sources When An Initial Volume Is Not Set Ifaninitialvolumeisnotstoredwitheachtrack,thevolumeforeachtrackofyoursongwillbe setdependingonwhatmodeyouwereinprevioustoloadingthesong.IfyouareinSongmode andhaveplayedasong,andthenyouloadasongwithoutinitialvolumes,thevolumeofeach trackofthenewlyloadedsongwillbesetbythepreviouslyplayedsong.Volumesettingsare tiedtoMIDIchannels,sothevolumeofeachtrackwillbedependentonwhichMIDIchannelis assignedtoeachtrackineachsong.IfyouareinSongmodeandyouloadasongthatdoesnot haveinitialvolumeswithoutplayinganothersongfirst,thevolumeoftheMIDIchannelfor eachtrackissetdependingonwhichmodeyouenterSongmodefrom.IfyouenterSongmode fromProgrammodeorQuickAccessmode,thevolumeofeachtrackissetbasedonthevolume foreachMIDIchannelsetinthosemodes.IfyouenterSongmodefromSetupmode,thevolume

10-4

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MAIN Page

ofeachMIDIchannelissetbythevolumeofeachzone,ifazoneusesthesameMIDIchannelon theSetupModeCH/PROGpage(setwiththeChannelparameter.)IfazonedoesuseaMIDI channelthatoneofthetracksinyoursonguses,thevolumeofthattrackwillbesetbythe ExitVolumeparameterofthatzone(ontheSetupMode:PANVOLpage.)Ifmultiplezonesuse thesameMIDIchannel,theExitVolumeofthehighestnumberedzonethatusesthatchannel willsetthevolumefortracksthatusethatchannel.IfExitVolumeissettoNONE,thevaluefor EntryVolumeisused.IfEntryVolumeandExitVolumearesettoNONE,thenthetrackforthat channelusesthevolumesetforthatchannelinProgramorQuickAccessmode.Ifthereisno zonethatusescertainchannelsusedbyyoursong,thenthosechannelsinyoursongwillusethe volumesettingofthosechannelssetinProgramorQuickAccessmode.

Pan
Youcansetaninitialpanposition(thebalancebetweentheLeftandRightaudiochannels)for theplaybackandrecordingofeachtrackasavaluebetween0and127.Avalueof64iscenter.If thechanneloftheRecTrkorthecontrolchannelcontainsanypanningdata(controller10),the changewillbereflectedasthePanparametersvalueinrealtime,aswellasontheMIXERpage. Also,changingthePanvaluewhilerecordingwillwritePanautomation(controller10 messages)tothecurrentRecTrkseventlist. Initial Pan Settings EachsongfiledoesnotautomaticallysaveyourPansettingforeachtrack.Tomakeasongsave yourPansettingsforeachtrack,youmustwriteaninitialPanvalueforeachtrack.InitialPanis thePansettingthatwillbeusedwhenyoursongisplayedbackfromthestartofbar1.Aninitial PansettingisessentiallyaPanautomationmessagethatiswrittenbeforethefirsttickofatrack. InitialPansettingsarenotautomaticallywrittenduringrecordingbecausetheymakeitharder totryoutdifferentPansettingsforatrack.Forexample,aninitialPansettingwillresetanyPan adjustmentsthatyoumakeduringplaybackeachtimethesongisstoppedandplayedfromthe startofbar1,orifthesongisstoppedandplayedfromanypointiftheControlChase parametersettoOnontheSong:MISCpage(seeSongMode:TheMISCPage on page 1017.)If youplantotryoutdifferentpanpositions,itiseasierifyouwriteaninitialPanafteryouhave foundthedesiredsetting. Setting Initial Pan Per Track FollowthesestepstochangethecurrentRecTrksinitialPan.Whilethesequencerisstopped, pressRecord,changethevalueofPan,pressStop,andsavethesong(followthesamemethod toquicklysetinitialprogramorvolumesettings.)Initialprogram,pan,andvolumecanalsobe setatthetopofeachtrackseventlist(seeSongEditor:TheEVENTPage on page 1031.) Setting Initial Values For All Tracks AnimportantlaststepbeforesavingafinishedsongistostoreinitialvaluesofProgram,Volume andPanforalltracks.Thiscanbedoneatanytime,butisbestdoneasalaststepifyouplanto makealotofadjustmentstothesesettings.Towriteinitialsettingsforalltracks,presstheKeep softbuttonontheSong:MIXERpage(seeSongMode:TheMIXERPage on page 1012.)After pressingtheKeepsoftbuttonyoumustsaveyoursongtosavethesesettings(youare automaticallypromptedtosaveuponexitingtheSong:MIXERpage.)PressingtheKeepsoft buttonstoresthecurrentvalueofeachtracksProgram,VolumeandPansettingsasinitial settings.Besurethatthesevaluesoneachtrackaresettothevaluethatyouwishtostore,asthe settingsmayhavechangedifyouhavewrittenanyautomation. Note:DontusetheKeepsoftbuttonifyouwouldlikecertaintrackstonotbestoredwithinitialvalues. Inthiscase,onlysetinitialvaluesforeachdesiredparameterasdescribedabove(seeSettingInitialPan PerTrack.)

10-5

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MAIN Page

Pan Sources When An Initial Pan Is Not Set IfaninitialPanisnotstoredwitheachtrack,thePanforeachtrackofyoursongwillbeset dependingonwhatmodeyouwereinprevioustoloadingthesong.IfyouareinSongmode andhaveplayedasong,andthenyouloadasongwithoutinitialPansettings,thePanofeach trackofthenewlyloadedsongwillbesetbythepreviouslyplayedsong.Pansettingsaretiedto MIDIchannels,sothePanofeachtrackwillbedependentonwhichMIDIchannelisassignedto eachtrackineachsong.IfyouareinSongmodeandyouloadasongthatdoesnothaveinitial Pansettingswithoutplayinganothersongfirst,thePanoftheMIDIchannelforeachtrackisset dependingonwhichmodeyouenterSongmodefrom.IfyouenterSongmodefromProgram modeorQuickAccessmode,thePanofeachMIDIchannelissetbasedonthepanforeach MIDIchannelsetinthosemodes.IfyouenterSongmodefromSetupmode,thePanofeach MIDIchannelissetifazoneusesthesameMIDIchannelontheSetupModeCH/PROGpage(set withtheChannelparameter.)IfazonedoesuseaMIDIchannelthatoneofthetracksinyour songuses,thePanofthattrackwillbesetbytheExitPanparameterofthatzone(onthe SetupMode:PANVOLpage.)IfmultiplezonesusethesameMIDIchannel,theExitPanofthe highestnumberedzonethatusesthatchannelwillsetthePanfortracksthatusethatchannel.If ExitPanissettoNONE,thevalueforEntryPanisused.IfEntryPanandExitPanaresetto NONE,thenthetrackforthatchannelusesthePansettingofthatchannelinProgrammodeor QuickAccessmode.Ifthereisnozonethatusescertainchannelsusedbyyoursong,thenthose channelsinyoursongwillusethePansettingofthosechannelssetinProgrammodeorQuick Accessmode.

Mode
IfModeissettoMergeyouwillbeabletooverdubwhenrecordingonatrackcontaining previouslyrecordeddata.YoullusuallywanttosetModetoMergewhenRecMode(ontheBIG page)issettoLoop.Otherwise,eachtimethroughtheloop,thepreviouslyrecorded informationwillbeerased. IfyousetModetoErase,thepreviouslyrecordeddataontherecordenabledtrackwillbe replacedwiththenewdataonlyduringtheBarsandBeatsyouareactuallyrecording,andthe previouslyrecordeddatabeforeandafterthenewlyrecordedBarsandBeatswillbepreserved.

Location (Locat)
TheBarandBeatdisplayedastheLocatevaluechangesrelativetocurrentlocationofthesong duringplaybackandrecording.YoucansetthistoanegativeBarandBeatlocationtostart playbackasetlengthoftimebeforethebeginningofthesong. WheneveryousettheLocatepoint,thatlocationwillbeusedasthereturnpointwhenStopis pressed.SimplypressStopagaintoresetthesongtothetop(1:1).

Mode Indicators (+ and x):

ModeIndicatorsappearonlyfortracksthatalreadycontaindata. Aplussign(+)appearsabovetheTrackStatusIndicatorofatracksettorecord(R)whenthe ModeparameterissettoMerge. An(x)appearsabovetheTrackStatusIndicatorofatracksettoRecord(R)whentheMode parameterissettoErase.

Activity Indicators
AsmallsquareabovetheTrackStatusIndicatorofatracksettoPlay(P)orMute(M)meansthe trackcontainsdata.

10-6

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MAIN Page

Duringplaybackandrecording,theindicatorsabovetrackscontaininganyMIDIdatawillflash asmall,filledinsquarewhenanyMIDIactivityisdetected.

Track Status Indicators

UsingtheUp,Down,Left,andRightcursorbuttonstopositionthecursorontoaTrackStatus Indicator,youcantoggleanemptytrack()intoRecord(R)withtheAlphaWheelorPlus/ Minusbuttons. Onceatrackcontainsdata,itwillhavea(P)asaTrackStatusIndicator,anditwillbeplayed duringplayback.YounowwillbeabletotogglebetweenPlay(P),Mute(M),andRecord(R). ThetrackselectedastheRecTrkwilldisplayan(R),designatingitastherecordingtrack.Ifthe RecTrkissettoMult,initiallyallemptytrackswillhaveRecord(R)asaTrackStatusIndicator, anyofwhichcanbeswitchedbacktoempty()ifatanytimerecordingonspecifictracksisnot desired. Ifthereisntatrackwithan(R),theRecTrkparametersvaluewillbeNone.(Theexceptionis whentheRecTrkissettoMultandyouhaveswitchedallofthetracksoutofrecordenable.)

Track Channels
EachtrackhasaMIDIChannelthatitusestoreceiveandtransmitdata.Bydefault,tracks116 ofanewsongareassignedtoChannels116respectively,althoughatrackcanplayorrecordon anychannelandthesamechannelcanbeusedformorethanonetrack.Keepinmind,however, thatonlyoneprogramcanbeassignedtoachannelatatime,soifyouhavemorethanonetrack assignedtothesamechannel,theyllplaythesameprogramtheoneonthehighernumbered track,sincethatsthemostrecentProgramChangecommandreceivedonthatchannel.

Soft Buttons on the MAIN Page

Thissectioncontainsdescriptionsofthefunctionsofthefunctionsoftbuttons,thatis,the buttonswithlabelsnotinallcaps.Aswithallothermodes,thesoftbuttonsinSongModethat havelabelsinallcapscallupdifferentpages.Seethefollowingsectionsfordescriptionsonhow thesepageswork. The Rec, Play, and Stop Soft Buttons NOTE:Thesebuttonsaresimilartothetransportcontrolsonatapedeck.Someofthosedecksrequireyou topressPlayandRecordsimultaneouslytobeginrecording.ThePC3LEstransportbuttonsarentlike that,however.Itsimportantthatyoupressonlyoneofthesesoftbuttonsatatimetoinsureproper recordingstartpoints,andtoalwaysbesureofthecurrentsequencerstatus. TheRecsoftbuttonchangestheSongStatustoREC.READYifthecurrentSongStatusis STOPPED.IfthecurrentSongStatusisPLAYING,itwillbeswitchedtoRECORDINGwhenyou pressRec. ThePlaysoftbuttonplaysbackanyrecordeddatawhenpressedwhilethesongstatusis STOPPED.PlaybackwillbeginfromthebarandbeatspecifiedintheLocateparameter.When theSongStatusisRECREADY,pressingthePlaysoftbuttonwillbeginrecording. ThePlaysoftbuttonfunctionsasaPausebutton,butonlywhentheSongStatusisPLAYINGor RECORDING.PressingPlaywhilethesongisplayingwillstoptheplayback,andthelocation remainsatthecurrentbarandbeat,allowingyoutocontinuefromthatlocationbypressing Playagain. PressingPausewhilerecordingwillstoptherecordingprocessasifyouhadpressedStop.

10-7

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MAIN Page

TheStopsoftbuttonhaltstheplaybackorrecording,andresetsthesongslocationtoeitherthe defaultBar 1, Beat1value,ortowhateverlocationyoudefinedwiththeLocateparameter.Ifthe locationisdefinedassomethingotherthanBar1,Beat1,pressStoptwicetoresetto1:1. PressingStopwhentheSongStatusisRECORDINGwillalwaysprompttheSavechangesto thissong?dialog(describedbelow),andprovidesyouwiththeopportunitytolistentothenew songandcompareitwiththeold,previouslysaved,songbeforeansweringYesorNo. ThePC3LEalsohasdedicatedfrontpanelbuttonsforRecord,Play/Pause,andStop.Youllfind themjustbelowthesixmodebuttons.Additionallyyoucancontrolthesefunctionsfromany externalsequencerthatsendsMIDIMachineControl(MMC)messages.ThePC3LEwill automaticallylistentoanyMMCmessagesreceivedattheUSBorMIDIinport.ThePC3LEwill alsoautomaticallysenditsownMMCmessagesfromtheUSBandMIDIoutport,enablingthe PC3LEstransporttocontrolanexternalsequencer.Thisworksfromanymode,thoughin ProgrammodeyouwillwanttomakesurethattheDemoButtonfunctionissettooff.Youcan dothisfromMasterMode,Page2.WhenDemoButtonissettooff,youcanstillhearProgram demosbypressingthecursorupanddownbuttonssimultaneously.
Important Note About External Sequencers:

IfusingthePC3LEtransportcontrolstorecordtoanexternalsequencer,youmustbeinSong modewiththeRecTrksettoNone.Ifthisisnotdone,youwillsimultaneouslyrecordtothe externalsequencerandtheselectedRecTrkifinSongMode,oractivatetheQuickSong Recordingfunctionfromothermodes.Thiswillcauseunwantedsequencestoberecordedinthe PC3LEssequencer. IfyouarealsotriggeringPC3LEsoundsfromtheexternalsequencer,youwillrunintothesame issuewhenusingthetransportontheexternalsequencer(ifitissendingMMC.)Inthiscase, eitherturnoffoutgoingMMContheexternalsequencer,orusethesameprecautionsasabove. The Load, Save, and Export Soft Buttons TheLoadsoftbuttoncallsupascrollinglistfromwhichyoucanquicklylocateandloada sequence.YoucanselectasequenceusingeithertheAlphaWheelor/+buttons,oryoucan enterasequencesIDnumber. TheSavebuttoncallsuptheSaveAsdialog. TheExportbuttonexportsthecurrentsongtoaComputerorUSBdeviceasaStandardMIDI File.SelectStandardMIDIFiletype1(saveswithmultiplechannels,)orStandardMIDIFiletype 0(savesas1channel.) The NewSng and ClrSng, and Delete Soft Buttons TheNewSngsoftbuttoncreatesanewsongusingtheDefaultSequence(specifiedonPage2of MasterMode)asaparametertemplate.Pressingthisbuttonisthesameasselecting0*New Song*. TheClrSngsoftbuttoncreatesanewsongwhoseparametersaresettothedefaultvalueslisted inthetablebeneaththissectionsheader(SongMode:TheMAINPage).Keepinmindthatthe selectedprogramforthenewsongwillbethecurrentlyselectedprogram. UsetheDeletesoftbuttontodeleteausercreatedoreditedsong.PressingtheDeletesoft buttonpromptsyoutocontinuebypressingDeleteortoreturntothepreviousscreenby pressingCancel.

10-8

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MAIN Page

The Save Changes Dialog

ThefollowingdialogappearsafteryouhaverecordedatrackandpressedStop,orifyouhave enteredtheSongEditorandmadechanges,thenpressedExit,orifyoupressSaveintheSong Editor.

ThePlyNewsoftbuttonallowsyoutoplaythesongwithyourlastrecordedperformance.You willlikelywanttohearthisfirst. PressingPlyOldwillplaythecurrentsong,minustheperformancethatyoujustrecorded.You cantogglebetweenPlayOldandPlayNewwithoutrestartingthesongbypressingeither buttonwhilethesongisplaying.Thisisusefultocheckifyourlastperformancewasbetteror worsethanwhatwaspreviouslysaved(ifanythingwaspreviouslysaved.) TheLocatefieldallowsyouchooseastarttimefortheoldornewplayback.Thisisusefulwhen youjustwanttohearacertainpartofthesongwithoutlisteningtothewholething.ThePlaying fielddisplayswhethertoNEWorOLDdataisplaying. StophaltstheplaybackofeithertheOldortheNewversionofthesongyouarecurrently auditioning.ThisalsoresetsthesongsstartlocationtoeitherthedefaultBar1,Beat1value,or towhateverlocationyoudefinedintheLocatefield. PressingRetryrestartsrecordingfromthesamepointyoulaststartedrecordingat. Yessavesthesongwiththeperformanceyoujustrecorded.Whateverwasplayedbackwhen youpressedPlayNewwillbetheversionofthesongsavedwhenyoupressYes.Thesaveas dialogwillbedisplayed:

UsetheAlphaWheel,/+buttons,orAlphanumericPadtochooseafreeID#locationtosavethe song,orchooseausedID#locationtooverwriteapreviouslysavedsongwithyournewversion. Whenoverwritingasongfile,thesaveasdialogdisplaysReplacefollowedbythenameof thefilebeingreplaced.PressRenameifyouwouldliketochangethesongsname.PressSaveto savethesong,orCanceltoreturntothepreviousscreen.

10-9

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The BIG Page

Ifyoudecidenottosaveorrename,NoreturnsyoutotheSongmodepageinwhichyouwere lastrecording.Changestothecurrentsongarenotsaved,thoughthesequencerwillremember changestocertainsettingsfromtheMAINandBIGpages.ThesesettingsareTempo,Merge/ EraseMode,Locate,trackmutestatus,TimeIn,TimeOut,SongEnd,Loop,Punch,andMetron. Topermanentlysavethesechangeswiththesong,makesuretochooseSavefromthesoft buttonmenubeforepoweringofforloadinganewsong.Alternatively,youwillbepromptedto savethesechangesuponloadinganewsongiftheMAINpagesettingswerechangedwhile recordingorwithrecordingarmed,orifanyoftheBIGpagesettingswerechanged. Formoredetailedinstructions,seeSavingandNaming on page 53.

Song Mode: The BIG Page

OntheBIGpage,thePC3LEdisplaysinalargefont,thusthepagesnamethecurrenttime/ locationoftheplayheadofthesequencerinaBar:Beat:Tickformat(liketheRifftime/location display).Alsodisplayedisthecurrentstatusofthesequencer,andtheBIGpagessix parameters.

Parameter (Bar) (Current Position) (Beat) (Tick) (Bar) Time In (Beat) (Tick) (Bar) Time Out (Beat) (Tick) (Bar) Song End Loop RecMode Metron (Beat) (Tick)

Range of Values

Default

Depends on Time Signature 0 to 959 1 to 4 0 to 959 1 to 4 0 to 959 1 to 4 0 to 959 (----), Loop Linear, PunchIn, UnLoop Off, Rec, Always, CountOff 0 (----) Linear Rec 0 0 0

10-10

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The BIG Page

Time In
TheTimeInparameterdeterminesthestarttimeforLooporPunchInrecording(moreonthis below).

Time Out
TheTimeOutparameterdeterminesthestoptimeforLooporPunchInrecording.

Song End
TheSongEndparameterdeterminestheendpointforthesong.NotethatwhenTimeOutand SongEndaresettothesamelocation,changesmadetoSongEndarereflectedinTimeOut. WhenrecordingbeyondyourinitiallyspecifiedSongEndpoint,youllnoticethattheSongEnd locationautomaticallymovesandroundstothenextbar,soastoalwaysbeaheadofthe playhead.ItispossibletomovetheSongEndpointtoalocationbeforeotherMIDIevents(i.e., inthemiddleofthecurrentsong)thesequencerwillignore(butnotdelete)eventsafterthis point.

Loop
WiththeLoopparametersettoLoop,thesequencerwillloopthesegmentofthesongbetween TimeInandTimeOut.

RecMode
WiththeRecModeparametersettoLinear,thesequencerwillrecordnormally,fromwhereever youstart,towhereeveryoustop,oruntiltheSongEndpointisreached.WiththeRecMode parametersettoPunchIn,thesequencerwillrecordeventsonlybetweenthepointssetforTime InandTimeOutparametersontheBIGpage. TousetheUnLoopsetting,theLoopparametermustbesettoLoop,andalooplengthmustbe setwiththeTimeInandTimeOutparametersontheBIGpage.WiththeRecModeparameter settoUnloop,anyexistingtrackswillbeplayedbackasiftheywereloopingfromtheTimeInto theTimeOutpoint,buttheyareactuallybeingrerecordedlinearlyoverabsoluteBarsandBeats untilyoupressStop.UnLoopallowsyoutorecordalineartrackoverashortloopingsection withoutfirsthavingtocopythesectionoverandoveragaintoachieveanewdesiredSong length.TheEndpointoftheSongisextendedtothedownbeatofthe(empty)Barimmediately followingthelastBaryouwererecordingwhenStopwaspressed. Forexample,letssayyouhavearecordedafourbardrumloopandnowwanttorecordan eightbarbassline.ThiswouldbeasituationwhereUnLoopwouldcomeinhandy.Whilethe drumtrackkeepslooping,thebasstrackwillrecordinlinearfashion,andtheendpointwillbe movedtothepointatwhichyoupressStop.Actually,thedrumtrackwillalsochange.Itwill playthroughitslooptwice,butwhiletheinformationisrepeatingintheloop,itwillbe recordedtothetrack.Sonowifyoulookatthedrumtrack,youwillseeinformationinbars58 (aduplicateoftheinformationinbars14).

Metron
TheMetronparameterdeterminestherecordingmodesinwhichthemetronomewillplay.With MetronsettoOff,themetronomedoesntplayatall.WithMetronsettoRec,themetronome onlyplayswhilerecordingisinprogress.WithMetronsettoAlways,themetronomeplays duringplaybackandrecording.WithMetronsettoCountOff,themetronomeplaysonly duringcountoff(iftheCountOffparameterontheMetronomepageissettosomethingother thanOff.)

10-11

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The FX Pages

Song Mode: The FX Pages

ThethreeSongmodeFXpagesFX,AUXFX1,andAUXFX2workthesamewayastheeffects pagesinSetupMode.SeetheSetupmodechaptereffectssection:TheFXPages:FX,AUXFX1, AUXFX2 on page 759forinformationonusingthesepages.

Song Mode: The MIXER Page

TheMIXERpageshowsthecurrentsettingsfortheprogramnumber,panning,andvolumeof eachtrack(ingroupsof8).Theselectedtracknumber,aswellastherangeoftracksdisplayed onthepage,aredisplayedintheupperrighthandcornerofthescreen.UsetheChan/Zone buttonsorthecursorbuttonstochangethecurrentlyselectedtrack.Togettootherpagesof tracks,continuescrollingpastthefirstorlasttrackonthepage.Thebottompartofthescreen displayscurrentsettingsfortheselectedtrackincludingprogramnumberandname,panning, andvolume. Changingthesettingsforatracksprogram,volume,orpanningwhilethesequenceris recordingwillrecordthesechanges,viewableinthecorrespondingtracksEVENTpage.Upon playback,theseautomatedmixerparameterswilldisplaytheirchangingvaluesinrealtimeon theMIXERpage.BelowisanexampleMIXERpage:

Parameter Current Pan Current Volume Current Program Selected Track (Trk) Current Program** For Selected Track Current Volume** Current Pan**

Range of Values 0 to 127 0 to 127 Program List 1 to 16 Program List 0 to 127 0 to 127

Default None None None 1 (Current Program) 127 64

**Uneditable,thesevaluesareanexpandedviewofthemixervaluesforthecurrentlyselectedtrack,which canbeeditedinthefirstthreerowsoftheMIXERpage.

The Rec, Play, and Stop Soft Buttons

ThesesoftbuttonsfunctionasdescribedinTheRec,Play,andStopSoftButtons on page 107.

10-12

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The METRONOME Page

The Keep Soft Button

PressingtheKeepsoftbuttoncapturesthecurrentsettingsforeachtracksprogram,panning, andvolumeastheinitialsettings.Remembertosaveifyouwantthesechangetobepermanent!

The Done Soft Button

IfnochangesweremadeintheMIXERpage,pressingtheDonesoftbuttoncallsuptheMAIN page.Ifchangesweremade,pressingtheDonesoftbuttoncallsuptheSaveChangesdialog.

Song Mode: The METRONOME Page

AlloftheparametersaffectingthesequencermetronomeareontheMETRONOMEpage.Like theotherpagesintheSongEditor,youcansavechangesmadeinthispage.

Parameter Metronome Count Off Program Channel Strong Note Strong Velocity Soft Note Soft Velocity

Range of Values Off, Rec, Always, Countoff Off, 1, 2, 3, 4 (StartOnly, Always) Program List 1 to 16 0 to 127 0 to 127 0 to 127 0 to 127

Default Rec 1 (StartOnly) 998 Click Track 16 102 127 104 100

Metronome
Thisparameterdeterminestherecordingmodesinwhichthemetronomeplays.With MetronomesettoOff,themetronomeneverplays.WithMetronomesettoRec,themetronome onlyplaysduringrecording.WithMetronomesettoAlways,themetronomeplaysduring playbackandrecording.WithMetronomesettoCountOff,themetronomeplaysonlyduring countoff(iftheCountOffparameterissettosomethingotherthanOff.)

CountOff
ThisparameterdeterminesthenumberofmeasuresthePC3LEwillcountoffbeforerecording. WithStartOnlyselected,thePC3LEwillonlycountoffatthebeginningofasequence.With Alwaysselected,thePC3LEwillcountofffromanypointinasequence.

10-13

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The METRONOME Page

Program
Thisparameterdeterminestheprogramwithwhichthemetronomeisplayed.Ifyouwanteda pianoforametronome,forinstance,youcouldsetProgramtoapianoprogram.Thedefault programis998ClickTrack.

Channel
ThisparameterdeterminestheMIDIchanneltowhichthemetronomeprogramandeventsare sent.

Strong Note
ThisparameterdeterminestheMIDInumberofthenoteplayedbythemetronomeforthe downbeats(the1ofeachmeasure).

Strong Vel
Thisparameterdeterminesthevelocityofthenoteplayedbythemetronomeforthedownbeats (the1ofeachmeasure).

Soft Note
ThisparameterdeterminestheMIDInumberofthenoteplayedbythemetronomeforthe upbeats(the2,3,and4ofeachmeasure).

Soft Vel
Thisparameterdeterminesthevelocityofthenoteplayedbythemetronomefortheupbeats (the2,3,and4ofeachmeasure).

The Rec, Play, and Stop Soft Buttons

ThesesoftbuttonsfunctionasdescribedinTheRec,Play,andStopSoftButtons on page 107.

The Done Soft Button

IfnochangesweremadeintheMETRONOMEpage,pressingtheDonesoftbuttoncallsupthe MAINpage.Ifchangesweremade,pressingtheDonesoftbuttoncallsuptheSaveChanges dialog.

10-14

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The Filter Pages (RECFLT and PLYFLT)

Song Mode: The Filter Pages (RECFLT and PLYFLT)

OntheRECFLTandPLYFLTpagesyoucanspecifywhateventsareignoredduring, respectively,recordingandplayback.Bothpageshavethesameparameterswiththesame rangesofvalues,butyouwouldusetheRECFLTpagetoconfigurerecordingeventfiltering, andthePLYFLTpagetoconfigureplaybackeventfiltering. BelowistheRECFLTpage.

Parameter Notes Low Key Note Filter Hi Key Low Velocity Hi Velocity Controllers Controller Filter Controller Low Value Hi Value Pitch Bend Program Change Mono Pressure Poly Pressure

Range of Values On, Off C -1 to G 9 C -1 to G 9 0 to 127 0 to 127 On, Off ALL, MIDI Control Source List 0 to 127 0 to 127 On, Off On, Off On, Off On, Off

Default On C -1 G9 0 127 On ALL 0 127 On On On On

Notes
WithNotessettoOff,allnotesareignoredduringrecording/playback.WithNotessettoOn, onlythenoteswithinthespecifiednoterangewithvelocitieswithinspecifiedvelocityrangeare recorded/played.

LoKey
LoKeydeterminesthelowestkeythatisrecorded/playedbackwhenNotesissettoOn.

Hi
TheHitotherightofLoKeydeterminesthehighestkeythatisrecorded/playedbackwhen NotesissettoOn.

10-15

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The Filter Pages (RECFLT and PLYFLT)

LoVel
LoVeldeterminesthelowestnoteon/offvelocitythatisrecorded/playedbackwhenNotesisset toOn.

Hi
TheHitotherightofLoVeldeterminesthehighestnoteon/offvelocitythatisrecorded/played backwhenNotesissettoOn.

Controllers
WithControllerssettoOff,allcontrollersareignoredduringrecording/playback.With ControllerssettoOn,controllerdataonlyofthespecifiedcontrollerandonlywithinthe specifiedvaluerangearerecorded/played.

Controller
TheControllerparameterdetermineswhichcontroller(s)is/arerecorded/playedbackwhen ControllersissettoOn.

LoVal
LoValdeterminesthelowestvalueforthespecifiedcontrollerthatisrecorded/playedback whenControllersissettoOn.

Hi
TheHitotherightofLoValdeterminesthehighestvalueforthatspecifiedcontrollerthatis recorded/playedbackwhenControllersissettoOn.

PitchBend
Thisparameterenables/disablespitchbendeventstoberecorded/playedback.

ProgChange
Thisparameterenables/disablesprogramchangestoberecorded/playedbackthisincludes Controllers0and32(bankchange).

MonoPress
Thisparameterenables/disablesmonophonickeypressureeventstoberecorded/playedback.

PolyPress
Thisparameterenables/disablespolyphonickeypressureeventstoberecorded/playedback.

The Rec, Play, and Stop Soft Buttons

ThesesoftbuttonsfunctionasdescribedinTheRec,Play,andStopSoftButtons on page 107.

10-16

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MISC Page

The Done Soft Button

IfnochangesweremadeintheRECFLT/PLYFLTpage,pressingtheDonesoftbuttoncallsup theMAINpage.Ifchangesweremade,pressingtheDonesoftbuttoncallsuptheSave Changesdialog.

Song Mode: The MISC Page

TheMISCpagecontainsfivemiscellaneous(butveryimportantanduseful)sequencer parameters.TheMISCpageappearsbelow:

Parameter Control Chase Quantize Grid Resolution Swing Release Quantization Key Wait

Range of Values On, Off Off, 1 to 100% 1/1 to 1/480 -100% to 125% Yes, No Off, On

Default On Off 1/8 0 No Off

Control Chase
Acommonshortcomingofmanyoldersequencersisthatwhenyoustartasequenceatsome pointinthemiddleofsequence,thecontrollersremainattheircurrentlevelsuntilthesequencer comesacrossacontrollerevent.ControlChaseremediesthis(generally)undesiredbehavior. WhenControlChaseisOn,allnonnoteMIDIeventsfromthebeginningofthesonguptothe currenttimearecomputed,andthemostrecentnonnoteMIDIeventissentoutbeforestarting playback.Thisensuresthatthevolume,panning,programchanges,andothercontrollersforthe songarecorrect,regardlessofwhereyoustartthesong.WithControlChasesettoOff,the sequencerbehavesaspreviouslydescribed.

Quant
TheQuantizeparameterdeterminestheamountofrealtimequantization(ifany)appliedtothe sequenceduringrecording.Thepercentagespecifiedforthisparameteristheamountof quantizationthesequencerappliestothegrid(seebelow)foreachNoteeventrecorded. Notethatusingrealtimequantizationhasthesameeffectasrecordingnormally,andthenusing theQuantizeTrackEditingoperation.

10-17

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The STATS Page

Grid
Thegridparameterdeterminestheresolutionofquantizationandthepositionofthegrid points.

Swing
TheSwingparameterdeterminestheamount(inunitsofpercent)ofswingappliedduring quantization.

Release
TheReleaseparameterdetermineswhetherornotnoteoffeventsarequantized.

Key Wait
WithKeyWaitsettoon,akeystrikewilltriggerplaybackofasequence(iftheplay/pause buttonisarmed,)ortriggerrecordingofasequence(iftherecordbuttonisarmed.)

Song Mode: The STATS Page

TheSTATSpageisadisplayonlypagethatshowsthestatusofthePC3LEeventpool.Theevent poolisusedbyallthesequencesloadedatagiventimeinthesystem.Theseinclude:thecurrent song,thecomparesongbuffer,andupto16riffs. TheSTATSpageshownbelowisthestateofthePC3LEeventpoolwith0*NewSong*selected, andnootheruserobjectsloadedinanyothermodes:

TheeventsinthePC3LEaresimilartoeventsofothersequencerswithasinglemajordifference: theNoteeventsarestoredasasinglebigevent,i.e.,onePC3LENoteeventiscomprisedofthe noteonandnoteoffevents.AllothereventsarestoredassingleeventsonthePC3LE. ThefieldsontheSTATSpageare: Maxthemaximumnumberofnotes/eventsinmemory. Usedthetotalnumberofnotes/eventsbeingused. Freethenumberofnotes/eventsthatarefree. Part.thenumberofpartitionedevents,whichareeventsforwhichspaceinmemoryis allocated.Thisistechnicalinformationofimportanceonlytoengineers(andmaybeafew powerusers).

10-18

Song Mode and the Song Editor The Song Editor

Songthetotalnumberofevents(includingnotes)inthecurrentsong. Tempthetotalnumberofeventsinthetempbuffer(thetempbufferisusedwhen grabbingeventsfromadifferentsong). Riffs116thetotalnumberofeventsineachriff.

The Song Editor

Ingeneral,youllgettotheSongeditorpagesbypressingtheEditbuttonanytimeyourein Songmode.Theresoneexception:iftheProgramparameteriscurrentlyhighlightedonthe display,youllentertheProgrameditorwhenyoupressEdit. ThereareafewconventionssharedbyalloftheSongeditorpages.Displayedatthetopofeach Songeditorpageisthenameofthepageandthecurrentlyselectedtrack(116,oralltracks).All ofthevaluesfortheparametersfoundinanyoftheSongeditorpagesaresavedinthesong object.

Song Editor: The COMMON Page

PresstheEditbuttononthefrontpanelofthePC3LEtodisplaytheCOMMONpageandbegin editingasong.Thisiswhereyouwillfindparameterscommontoalltracks,suchastempoand timesignature,controlparametersforeffects,andsoftbuttonsforswitchingtootherSong editorpages.

Parameter Tempo Time Signature FX Track Drum Track MIDI Destination (Numerator) (Denominator)

Range of Values 0 (external), 20.00 to 400.00 BPM 1 to 99 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, and 64 1 to 16 , D , L, M, U

Default 120 4 4 1 L

Thecurrentlyselectedtrackisdisplayedonthetopline,thoughontheCOMMONpagethis onlyappliestotheDrumTrkandMidiDstparameters(seebelow.)Therestoftheparameterson theCOMMONpageareglobalsettingsforthesonganddonotdirectlyaffectindividualtracks.

10-19

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: The COMMON Page

Tempo
Thisisanotherplacewherethesongsinitialtempocanbesetormodified.

TimeSig
Affectstheclick,playbacklooping,andlocatefunctionaswellassomeeditingoperations.Does notchangetherecordeddata,thoughitdoeschangethewaydataisdisplayedonthescreen.

FX Track
ThePC3LEusesthechannelofthetrackspecifiedforFXTrackastheAuxFXchannel.

DrumTrack (DrumTrk)
AnyofthesongstrackscanbedefinedasDrumTrackssothattheirNoteeventsdonotget transposedwhenatranspositionisappliedwhenusingthetrackasariffinasetup(see Riffs on page 748andTranspose/RootNote on page 750.)Withtracksdesignatedasdrumtracks, youcantransposeawholesongthatisbeingusedasariff,butthedrumtrackswillcontinueto playthecorrectsoundsthattheyplayedintheoriginalkey.Otherwise,thedrumsoundswould changewitheachtransposition. Usethecursorbuttonstoselectatracknumber.Youcanaccess8tracksatonce,eithertracks18 or916.UsetheChan/Zonebuttonstotheleftofthedisplaytoselectoneofthetracks18 (viewedinthetoprightcornerofthepage)inordertoaccesstracks18,orselectoneofthe tracks916toaccesstracks916.WiththedesiredtracknumberselectedintheDrumTrkfield, usetheAlphaWheelor/+buttonstotogglebetweenD,todesignatethetrackasadrumtrack, ortodesignatethetrackasanondrumtrack.

TheDrumTrksettingsdonothaveanyeffectoneditsmadeontheTRACKpageintheSong Editor.AnytracksdefinedasDrumTracksaretransposedwhenatranspositionisappliedto thesetracksfromtheTRACKpage.

MIDI Destination (MidiDst)

TheMIDIdataoneachtrackhasadestinationassignmentselectablewiththeMidiDst parameter.Therearefourpossibleindicators: L=Local.ThetracksMIDIdatawillbetransmittedlocallyonly,tothePC3LEsinternalsound generator.NoneofthetracksMIDIdatawillbesenttotheUSBorMIDIOutport. M=MIDI.ThetracksMIDIdatawillbetransmittedonlytotheMIDIOut. U=USBMIDI.ThetracksMIDIdatawillbetransmittedonlytotheUSBport. =None. PairsandgroupsoftheabovelettersindicatethatMIDIisbeingsenttoeachletters correspondingdestination.

10-20

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: The TRACK Page

UsethecursorbuttonstoselectoneoftheMidiDstfields.Youcanaccessfieldsfor8tracksat once,eithertracks18or916,eachofwhichcorrespondtothetracknumbersdisplayedinthe DrumTrkfield,directlyabovetheMidiDstfields.UsetheChan/Zonebuttonstotheleftofthe displaytoselectoneofthetracks18(viewedinthetoprightcornerofthepage)inorderto accesstracks18,orselectoneofthetracks916toaccesstracks916.Withthedesiredtrack numberfieldselected,usetheAlphaWheelor/+buttonstochangeeachMidiDstparameter.

Soft Buttons on the COMMON Page

TRACKcallsuptheTRACKpage.Thispageaccessesusefultrackbasededitfunctions.There isaselectableeditfunctionthatcanbeappliedtotheselectedtrackoralltracksinyoursong. TheTRACKpageisdescribedonpage 1021. EVENTcallsuptheEVENTpage,aneventliststyleeditor.OntheEVENTpageintheSong Editor,youcanscrollthrough,modify,add,ordeleteanyorallofthetracksMIDIevents.The EVENTpageisdescribedonpage 1031. Rec,Play,andStopfunctionasdescribedinTheRec,Play,andStopSoftButtons on page 107. SavecallsuptheSaveasdialog.

Song Editor: The TRACK Page

Thispageallowsyouaccesstousefultrackbasededitfunctions.Thesefunctionsare:
Erase Copy Bounce Shift Transpose Grab Insert Delete Quantize Change Remap

Foreachfunction,thereisasetofparameterstocontrolhowthefunctionoperates,andonwhat regionoftheselectedtrack(s).Asusual,thetoplineofthispagedisplaystheselectedtrackor tracks.Selecttheavailablecurrenttrack(s)foreditingbyusingtheChan/Zonebuttons.Press bothoftheChan/ZonebuttonstogethertoselectAlltracks. BelowisanexampleoftheTRACKpagefortheBouncefunction.

Youwillnoticethatthepageisdividedintotwohalves,withtherighthalfbeingaseparatebox. ThisiscalledtheRegion/Criteriabox.Theparametersinthisboxareusedtoselecttherangeof events(fromastartBarandBeattoanendBarandBeat)formodification,aswellaswhichtypes ofeventsfunctionwillaffect.

10-21

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: The TRACK Page

Theparametersinthisboxwillgenerallybethesameformostfunctions.Forsomefunctions, however,someparametersmaynotapply.Forexample,QuantizeandTransposeapplyonlyto notes,whileRemapappliesonlytoControllers.InadditiontotheRegion/Criteriabox parameters,theLocateparameterisalsofoundoneachfunction. SincetheseparametersarecommontomostTrackfunctions,wewilldefinethemfirst.Then welldescribetheindividualfunctionsalongwiththeparametersspecifictoeach,whichare normallyfoundontheleftsideofthepage.ThefunctionQuantizehasuniqueparameterinits Region/Criteriaboxes.Welldescribethoseparametersalongwiththefunctions. Onceyouvechosenafunctionandsettheparameterstoyourliking,pressGo.Thisexecutesthe editingfunction.Youcanthenplaythesequencetoheartheresultsofyouredit.Ifyoudontlike youredit,simplyexittheeditorandpressNowhenyouareaskedifyouwanttosave.Ifyoudo likeyouredit,youcanpressDoneandthenSave,orjustexittheeditorandsavethechanges. Or,youcangotoanothereditfunction.Keepinmindthough,thatifyouchoosetoperform morethanoneeditwithoutsaving,andyouarenotsatisfiedwithoneofthechangesyoumake, youwillhavetoexittheeditorwithoutsavingandthenredoeachofthechangesyoumade. Thatswhyitsusuallybesttosaveaftereachsuccessfuledit.

Common Parameters for Edit Song: Track Functions

Locate ThisparameterisavailableforeveryfunctionontheTRACKpage.Itappearsatthelowerleft handcornerofthepage. TheLocatebar,beat,andtickwillchangeinrealtimeduringplaybackandrecordingtoreflect thesongscurrentposition.Itcanbesettoanybar,beat,andtick,includingnegativevalues. Playbackbeginsat,andStopresetsthesongtotheLocatebar,beat,andtick.

Region/Criteria Box Parameters

From and To FromandToareavailableinmostTRACKeditfunctionstodefinearangeoftimeonthe selectedtrack(s). TheFromvaluedefinesthefirstbar,beat,andtickinarangeoftimeselectedforediting.TheTo valuedefinesthefinalbar,beat,andtickinarangeoftimeselectedforediting. Events AnyandalltypesofMIDIeventsareavailableforediting,selectableinthisparameter.Some eventswillprovideyouwithsettingsforarangeofvalues,orotherMIDIeventspecificcriteria. AvailableValuesare:All,Notes,Controllers,MonoPress,PitchBend,ProgChange,PolyPress. WhenEventsissettoALL,allMIDIeventsonthetrack(s)youareediting,thatoccurinthe regionoftimebetweentheFromandTosettings,willbeaffectedbytheeditfunction. WhenEventsissettoNotes,notenumberandvelocityrangescanbesetforNoteevents.
LoKey

Determinesthelowestnoteinarangeofnotestobeaffected.ThiscanbesettoanyMIDInote value;thedefaultisC1.

10-22

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: The TRACK Page High Key (Hi)

Determinesthehighestnoteinarangeofnotestobeaffected.ThiscanbesettoanyMIDInote value;thedefaultisG9.
LoVel

AnattackvelocityrangecanbespecifiedascriteriaforselectingNoteeventsforediting.The LoVelparametersetsthelowestvelocityaNoteneedstohaveinordertobeedited.Noteson theselectedtrack(s)withaattackvelocitieslowerthantheLoVelwillnotbeaffectedbythe edit.Theavailablevaluesare1127;thedefaultis1.

High Velocity (Hi)

TheHiparametersetsthehighestattackvelocityaNoteneedstohaveinordertobeedited. Notesontheselectedtrack(s)withattackvelocitieshigherthanthevalueofHiarenot affectedbytheedit.Theavailablevaluesare1127;thedefaultis127. WhenEventsissettoController,theController(s)andaControllervaluerangecanbesetfor Controllerevents.

Controller

TheControllerparameterselectstheController(ifany)orallControllerstobeaffected.
LoVal

Youmayfurtherspecifyaparticularrangeofvaluestoeditbysettingahighandlowvalue. LoValwilldefinethelowestmodifiablevalueintheselectedcontrollersrecordeddata.Value rangesarenotdefinablewhenCtlissettoAll.AvailableValuesare0127.

High Value (Hi)

Hidefinesthehighestmodifiablevalueintheselectedcontrollersrecordeddata.Value rangesarenotdefinablewhenCtlissettoAll.AvailableValuesare0127.

Soft Buttons on the TRACK Page

FromToisaquickwaytodefinetheregionoftimeyouintendtoedit.Thereareacoupleofways tousethisfeaturewhenthesequenceisplayingbackinrealtime,andbothwayswillsetthe temporalboundariesoftheregion. OnewayistofirstpositionthecursorovertheFromparameterintheRegion/Criteriaboxand thenpressthePlaysoftbutton.Duringplayback,everytimeyoupressFromTo,thePC3LE updatesthevalueofFromtomatchthecurrentplaybacklocation.Positionthecursoroverthe ToparametertochangethevalueofToinasimilarfashion. IfyouhaventselectedeithertheFromorToparameter,pressingFromToduringplayback updatesFromorToorbothdependingonthecurrentplaybacklocation(thevalueofthe Locateparameter)atthetimeyoupressFromTo.IfyoupressitwhiletheLocatevalueisearlier inthesongthanthecurrentTovalue,thePC3LEupdatestheFromvalue.IfyoupressFromTo again(withoutstoppingplayback)whiletheLocatevalueislaterthanthecurrentFromvalue, thePC3LEupdatestheTovalue. PlaywillstarttheplaybackofthesongfromtheBarandBeatsetintheLocateparameter.When thesongisplaying,thissoftbuttonfunctionsasaPausebutton.Stopstopstheplaybackofthe songandreturntotheBarandBeatsetastheLocatevalue. GoperformsanyoftheTrackbasededitfunctionsdescribedabove.Donewillreturnyoutothe EditSong:COMMONpage.

10-23

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: Track Functions

Song Editor: Track Functions

Erase
Thisfunctionerasesspecifiedeventsfromaregionoftime,butitdoesntdeletetheregionof time.Theresultislikeerasingasectionofrecordingtape.Ifyouwanttocompletelyremovea segmentandshortenthelengthofthetrack,youcandoitwiththeDeletefunction.

Copy
UsetheCopyfunctiontoduplicatetheselectedeventsfromthecurrenttrackandplacethemin thesametrackoronanothertrack,eithermergingwithoroverwritingexistingdata.

IfyoudonotwanttocopyalloftheMIDIeventsinthedefinedrangeoftimeonthecurrent track,usetheEventsparameterintheRegion/CriteriaboxtoselectaspecificMIDIeventtype youwouldliketheeditfunctiontoaffect.Someeventtypesprovideyoumorecriteriaselection parameters.ItisoftenagoodideatosetEventstoNoteswhencopying,andthenaddany necessarycontrollerorotherdatatothetrackatalatertime. DstTrack:1to16/All SelectadestinationtrackforthecopiedeventswiththeDstTrackparameter.Allselectedevents describedintheRegion/Criteriaboxwillbeplacedinthedestinationtrack(s)atanyBarand Beatyouspecify. IfthecurrentlyselectedtrackisAlltracksthenthedestinationtrackwillbeAlltracksaswell. Nomatterwhatchannelthecurrenttrack(sourcetrack)issettowhenyouusethecopy function,theeventswillbeplayedonthedestinationtrackschannel. Location:Bars:Beats:Ticks

10-24

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: Track Functions

Specifyabar,beat,andticklocationinthedestinationtrackwherethecopieddatawillbe placedwiththeLocationparameter.IfthelengthofthecopiedregionextendsfromtheLocation pointbeyondthesongsexistingEndpoint,anewEndpointisdefined. Mode:Merge/Erase/Slide TheModesettingdetermineswhetherthecopiedeventsmergewith,oreraseexistingeventson thedestinationtrackfromthelocationpointtotheendofthecopiedregion.WithModesetto Slide,thesequencercreatesspaceforthenewevents,andslidestheexistingeventstouniformly latertimesinthesong. Times:1to127 ThevalueselectedfortheTimesparameterdetermineshowmanycopiesoftheselectedregion areplaced,oneafteranother,inthedestinationtrack.

Bounce
UsetheBouncefunctiontomovetheselectedeventsfromthecurrenttracktoanothertrack, eithermergingwithoroverwritingexistingdataonthedestinationtrack.TheBouncefunction differsfromtheCopyfunctioninthattheoriginaldataisnotpreservedintheoriginaltrack.As onamultitracktaperecorder,Bouncewillalwaysputthedatainthesametimelineonthenew trackthatitwasontheoldtrack.

DstTrack:1to16 SelectadestinationtrackfortheeventstobemovedtowiththeDstTrackparameter.Allselected eventsdescribedintheRegion/Criteriaboxwillbeplacedinthedestinationtrackatthedatas originallocation. Nomatterwhatchannelthecurrenttrack(sourcetrack)issettowhenyouusethebounce function,theeventswillbeplayedonthedestinationtrackschannel. Mode:Merge/Erase TheModesettingdetermineswhetherthebouncedeventsmergewith,oreraseexistingevents onthedestinationtrackfromthelocationpointtotheendofthecopiedregion.

10-25

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: Track Functions

Insert
TheInsertfunctionisusedtoaddblanktimetothecurrentsong,modifyingthesongsEnd pointappropriately.TheInsertfunctionwillaffectalltracks.Thisissimilartosplicingapieceof blanktapetoanexistingsegmentofrecordingtape.

Location:Bars:Beats:Ticks TheinsertionpointfortheblanktimebeingaddedisselectedasaBarandBeatLocationvalue. EventsthatoccurredatorafterthisBarandBeat,beforeyouinserttime,arenoterasedwhen youperformthisfunction,rathertheyareoffsetbythelengthoftheblanktimebeingaddedtoa BarandBeatlaterinthesong. Amount:Bars:Beats:Ticks ThelengthoftheblanktimebeingaddedisdefinedasanumberofBarsandBeatsinthe Amountparameter. TherearenoRegion/CriteriaparametersavailablefortheInsertfunction.

Delete
TheDeletefunctionisusedtoremovearegionoftimefromthecurrentsong.Thisfunctionis differentfromtheerasefunctionbecausenotonlydoesitremovetheeventsfromtheselected time,itwilldeletetheentireselectedrangeoftimefromthesong,modifyingthesongsEnd pointappropriately(onalltracks).Thisissimilartocuttingasectionoutofatapeandsplicing theends.

10-26

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: Track Functions

Quantize
UsetheQuantizefunctiontoadjustthetimingofNoteevents.KeepinmindthatonlyNote eventsarequantized;othertypesofevents,suchascontrollers,arenotquantized.

Quant:Off/1to100% TheQuantizeparameterdetermineshowmuchtheselectedNoteeventsaremovedtowards gridlocations.IfsettoOff,noaligningofpreviouslyrecordednotestogridlocationswilloccur. Ifsetto100%,everyrecordedNoteeventwillbealignedtotheclosestgridlocation,definedby theGridsetting.Noteswillbemovedtoapositionhalfwaybetweenthegridlocationandthe originalNoteeventlocationifQuantissetto50%. Grid:1/1to1/480 ThissettingdeterminesthesizeoftheQuantizegrid,expressedasafractionofaBarwitha4/4 meter.SetGridto1/1forwholenotegrid,1/16forsixteenthnotes.Allofthestandardnote durationsandallfractionalBardivisionsinbetweenareavailableasthesizeoftheInput Quantizegrid. Swing:100to125% TheSwingpercentageisappliedtothequantizegrid.0%swingisstraighttime,100%produces aswingfeel(tripletfeel).ApositiveSwingvaluedetermineshowcloseeveryothergridlocation ismovedtoapoint1/3ofthewaytowardsthenextgridpoint.NegativeSwingmovesevery othergridlocationclosertoapoint1/3ofthewaytowardsthepreviousgridpoint. Release:Yes/No SettheReleaseparametertoYesifyouwouldlikeeachquantizedNoteeventsNoteOff messagetobealignedtothegridlocationnearesttothetimethekeywasoriginallyreleased.

10-27

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: Track Functions

Shift
TheShiftfunctionallowsyoutooffsettheexistingMIDIeventsforwardorbackwardintime anynumberofticks(1/480thofaBeat)andbeats.ThisfunctiononlyaffectstheEndpointifany oftheshiftedeventsareaftertheEndpointofthesong. EventscannotbeshiftedbeyondtheEndpointorbeforeBar1:Beat1:Tick0.Theeventscanbe shiftedonlyasfarasthesetemporalboundaries.AlleventsthatcantbeshiftedthefullTicks amountwillbeplacedattheboundarylocation.

Amount:Bars:Beats:Ticks TheTicksparameterspecifiesthenumberofbars,beats,andticksthattheMIDIevents,from withintheselectedregion,aremovedforward(forpositivevalues)orbackward(fornegative values)intimerelativetotheiroriginallocations. Mode:Merge/Erase TheModesettingdetermineswhethertheshiftedeventsmergewith,oreraseexistingeventson thedestinationtrackfromthelocationpointtotheendoftheshiftedregion.

Transpose
UsetheTransposefunctiontochangetheMIDINotenumbersoftheselectedNoteevents.

Semitone:128to127semitones AnincrementofonesemitonerepresentsachangeofoneMIDINotenumber.Youcantranspose NoteeventsonlywithintherangeofMIDINotenumbers0to127.

10-28

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: Track Functions

Grab
GrabissimilartotheCopyfunction,exceptthattheGrabfunctionallowsyoutocopyselected datafromtracksthatexistinothersongsinmemory.

SrcSong:SongList TheSourceSongparameterissettotheIDandnameofthesonginmemorythatcontainsthe desiredtrackdatayouwishtograbinordertouseitinthecurrentsong.Thesourcetrackis determinedbytheTrackparameterdisplayedonupperrighthandsideofthepage,selectable withtheChan/Zonebuttons. DstTrack:1to16/All SelectadestinationtrackforthegrabbedeventswiththeDstTrackparameter.Allselected eventsfromthesourcesongandtrackdescribedintheRegion/Criteriaboxwillbeplacedinthe destinationtrack(s)atanybar,beat,andtickyouspecify. IfthecurrentlyselectedtrackisAlltracksthenthedestinationtrackwillbeAlltracksaswell. Nomatterwhatchannelthecurrenttrack(sourcetrackinthesourcesong)issettowhenyou usethegrabfunction,theeventswillbeplayedonthedestinationtrackschannel. Location:Bars:Beats:Ticks Specifyabar,beat,andticklocationinthedestinationtrackwherethegrabbeddatawillbe placedwiththeLocationparameter.Ifthelengthofthegrabbedregionextendsfromthe LocationpointbeyondthesongsexistingEndpoint,anewEndpointisdefined. Mode:Merge/Erase/Slide TheModesettingdetermineswhetherthegrabbedeventsmergewith,oreraseexistingevents onthedestinationtrackfromthelocationpointtotheendofthegrabbedregion.WithModeset toSlide,thesequencercreatesspaceforthenewevents,andslidestheexistingeventsto uniformlylatertimesinthesong. Times:1to127 ThevalueselectedfortheTimesparameterdetermineshowmanycopiesoftheselectedregion areplaced,oneafteranother,inthedestinationtrack.

10-29

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: Track Functions

Change
TheChangefunctionisusedtomodifyeitherattackandreleasevelocities,orthevaluesofany existingcontrollerdataonthecurrenttrack.Astaticchangeofvaluescanbemadeaswellas havingthechangetakeplaceoveraregionoftime. Changecannotmodifyoradddatathatdoesntexistonthecurrenttrack.IfyouhearNote eventsplayedbackonatrack,thenyouknowthereisanattackandreleasevelocityvaluefor eachone,andtheeffectoftheChangefunctioncanusuallybeeasilydetected.Controllervalues aresometimesmoredifficulttochangesincetherecanbeinconsistentgapsoftimebetweeneach controllerevent.

Scale:0%to20000% Theselectedvelocityorcontrollereventsvaluescanbechangedtoapercentageoftheoriginal valuesdeterminedbytheScaleparameter.Asettingof100%hasnoaffect.Valuesarescaled lowerwithaScalepercentagesetfrom0%to99%.LowvaluescanbesethigherusingaScale percentageabove100%onupto20,000%,althoughthemaximumvalueof127cannotbe exceededforanyvelocityorcontrollertype. Offset:128to127 OffsetcanbeusedaloneorinconjunctionwithScaletoaddorsubtractasetamounttoorfrom theoriginal(orscaled)values.Valuesforvelocitiescannotbelessthan1orgreaterthan127. Valuesforcontrollerscannotbelessthan0orgreaterthan127. Asanexample,tosetallVelocitiestoavalueof55,youwouldsetScaleto0%(multipliesall originalvaluesbyzero)andsetOffsetto55(adds55totheproductoftheScaleparameter). Mode:Constant/PosRamp/NegRamp SetModetoConstanttohavevaluesmodifiedinauniformfashion,asdeterminedbytheScale andOffsetsettings,fortheentireselectedregionoftimeandrangeofvalues. WhentheChangefunctionisappliedwithModesettoPosRamp,theselectedvelocityor controllervalueswillgraduallychangeovertheregionoftime,definedbythelocationssetfor theFromandToparameters,fromtheoriginalvaluetothenewvaluedeterminedbytheScale andOffsetsettings.Thefirsteventsbeingmodifiedwithintheregionwillhavelittleorno changefromtheiroriginalvalues.TheamountofScaleandOffsetappliedwillincreaseasthe songapproachestheBarandBeatdefinedintheToparameter,wherethefullamountof describedchangewilloccur. YoucansetModetoNegRamptoachievetheoppositedynamiceffectofPosRamp.NegRamp worksinthesameway,buttheamountofScaleandOffsetappliedwilldecreasefromthefull amountofchangedescribedbyScaleandOffsettolittleornochangeasthesongapproachesthe bar,beat,andtickdefinedintheToparameter.

10-30

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: The EVENT Page

Remap
UsetheRemapfunctiontoapplythevaluesofanyonetypeofcontrollerdata,alreadyrecorded onatrack,toanothercontrollertype.TheeffecttherealtimechangesoftheOldcontrollerhad willbereplacedbytheeffecttheNewcontrollerhasbyusingtheexactsamecontrollervalues.

Old:ControlSourceList(0to127) TheOldControllerissettotheControllertypethatyouwishtoremap.ThisControllerdata mustalreadyexistonthecurrenttrackinordertoapplyittotheNewControllertype. New:ControlSourceList(0to127) TheNewparameterissettotheControllercodeyouwishtohaveusetheexistingvalues, onceusedbytheOldController,toproduceadifferenteffect.

Song Editor: The EVENT Page

EverytypeofrecordedMIDIeventisvisiblefromthispage.Youcanviewandchangethese eventsifnecessary.Eachtrackdisplaysitsinitialprogram,volume,andpanatthetopofits eventlist.Youcanalsoaccessthetempotrack(instructionsbelow.)

Location Initial Program, Volume, Pan

Bar:Beat:Tick

Event Type and Value

Thetoplineofthepagedisplaysthecurrentsongpositioninthecenter,andthecurrently selectedtrackandcorrespondingchannelontheright.UsetheChan/Zonebuttonstoselectan activetracktoviewandedittheMIDIeventsrecordedonit.

10-31

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: The EVENT Page

Toscrollthroughtheevents,makesurethelocation(BarandBeat,inthefirstcolumn)is highlighted.UsetheAlphaWheel,theUpandDowncursorbuttons,orthePlus/Minus buttons.Asyouscrollthroughtheevents,eacheventisexecutedbythesequencer.Inthecaseof Noteevents,youwillhearthenoteplayed,althoughthedurationwillbeshort.Ifyouhave scrolledthroughaSustain(MIDIController64)messagewithanOnvaluethenyouwillhear thenotesustainasifthesustainpedalwasdepressed.Thenotewillcontinuetosustainuntilyou scrollthroughaSustainmessagewithavalueofOff. Youcanalsojumpdirectlytoaspecificbarandbeatbytypingthebarnumberandbeatnumber, thenpressingEnter.Keepinmindifyouhavecontrollerorprogramdataprevioustothepoint thatyoujumpto,thoseeventsmaynothavebeenexecutedandyoumayhearunexpected results.Forexample,ifyouhaveprogramchangesatbar1andbar8,andyoujumpfrombar1 tobar9,anynotesyouscrollthroughwillbeplayedwiththeprogramchangefrombar1.

Initial Program, Volume, Pan

Atthetopoftheeventlistforeachtrack,youcanviewandchangetheinitialprogram,volume andpansettingsforthecurrenttrack.SeeSongMode:TheMAINPage on page 101fordetailson initialsettingsforprogram,volume,andpan.EachoftheseparameterscanbesettoNONEby entering0onthealphanumericpadandthenpressingtheminusbuttontofindNONE.

Location
ThefirstcolumnrepresentstheBarandBeatLocationsofthedifferenteventsinasong.Scroll throughtheeventsontheselectedtrack(s)withtheAlphaWheelorenterinaspecificBarand BeatonthealphanumericbuttonpadtojumptoeventsoccurringonthatBeat.Aquickwayto jumptotheEndpointinatrackistopress9999andthenEnteronthealphanumericbuttonpad.

Bar, Beat, and Tick

Bar,Beat,andTickareeditableparametersforeachevent.Theydeterminewhenanevent happensrelativetotheothereventswithinthesong.

Event Type and Value

TheEventTypeandValueregiondisplaystheMIDIeventtype(andrelatedinformation)ateach Eventlistlocationinthesong.Differenteventtypesdisplaydifferentkindsofinformation,and havedifferenteditablevalues. Theeventtypeistheleftmostfield.Youcanhighlightthisfieldandchangetheeventtype. MIDInoteeventsaredenotedbya>followedbythenotename.The>iseffectivelythe eventtypefornotes,andtochangetheeventtype,highlightthe>.Tochangethenote, highlightthenotename. Table 101liststherangesoftheeditableeventvalues:

10-32

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: The EVENT Page

Event Type
Program Change (PCHG) Pitch Bend (BEND) Mono Pressure (MPRS) Poly Pressure (PPRS) 0 to 127 -8192 to 8191 0 to 127 0 to 127

Values

C -1 to G 9

Note events have four editable values: Note Name, Attack Velocity (indicated by a v), Release Velocity (indicated by a ^), and Note Duration. MIDI Note Events (>) Note Number Attack Velocity Release Velocity Note Duration C -1 to G 9 v1 to v127 ^1 to ^127 Bar : Beats : Ticks

MIDI Controller Events (CTRL)

Controller events have two editable values: Controller Type and Controller Value. Defined controllers are referred to by their names. See the table Continuous Controller Number And Name on page 7-70 for the names that represent Controller Events sent by each of the PC3LEs physical controllers when using the default Control Setup. Controller Type Controller Value Control Source List (0 to 127) 0 to 127

Tempo Change

20.00 BPM to 400.00 BPM

Table 10-1

MIDI-event Value Ranges

Soft Buttons on the EVENT Page

Cut:RemovesthecurrentlyselectedeventfromtheEventlistandtemporarilystoresitina memorybuffersothatyoucanimmediatelypasteitintoanewlocation. Copy:Makesaduplicateofthecurrentlyselectedeventandtemporarilystoresitinamemory buffersothatyoucanimmediatelypasteitintoanewlocation. Paste:InsertsthemostrecentcutorcopiedeventintotheEventlistatthecurrentlyselected Bar:Beat:Ticklocation.Thepastedeventwillsharethesamelocationwiththeeventthat alreadyexistedatthatlocationintheEventlist,butitwillappearbeforethepreexistingevent. New:Insertsaneweventbyduplicatingthecurrentevent. Done:OntheViewpage,returnstotheEVENTpage.OntheEVENTpage,returnstothe COMMONpage.

Tempo Track
Toaccessthetempotrack,usethechannelup/downbuttonstonavigatetotrack1,thenpress channeldown.Thetempotrackfunctionsthesameastheothertracks,excepttheonlyevent typeavailableistempochange.

10-33

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: The EVENT Page

10-34

Storage Mode Storage Mode Page

Chapter 11 Storage Mode

UseStoragemodetoload,save,backup,andcopyfilesbetweenthePC3LEandtheoutside world.StorageModecanloadandsavewithaUSBdevice(suchasathumbdrive)orwitha computerbyusingtheUSBComputerport.StorageModefeaturesinclude: SaveallPC3LEobjects(Programs,Setups,Songs,etc.)oraselectionofPC3LEobjectstoa.PLE file(seeTheSTOREPage on page 116.) Loadagroupofobjectsorasingleobjectfroma.PLEorcompatiblefile(seeTheLOAD Page on page 118fordetails.)(SeeAppendix Cforfilecompatibilitydetails.) LoadastandardMIDIsequencefile(.MIDfile)whichcanbeplayedinSongModeorused asariffinSetupMode(seeTheLOADPage on page 118fordetails.) ExportasongfromSongmodeasastandardMIDIsequencefile(seeExport on page 1111.) Exportalistofcontrollerassignmentsoralistofobjects(seeExport on page 1111.) OrganizefilesandfoldersonaUSBdevice(seeTheUtilities(UTILS)Page on page 1110.)

Storage Mode Page

ToenterStoragemode,presstheStoragebutton,andtheStoragemodepagewillappear:

Usethispagetoselectthestoragedeviceyouwishtouse.Thecurrentlyselecteddevicewillbe readfromorwrittentowhenyouload,save,rename,ordeletefilesinStoragemode.Youcan loadandsavewithaUSBdevice(suchasathumbdrive)byusingtheUSBStorageportorwith acomputerbyusingtheUSBComputerportontherearofthePC3LE(seeUsingUSBDevices belowfordetails.) Inthecenterofthepagethecurrentlyselectedstoragedeviceishighlighted.Usethecursor buttons,/+buttonsorthealphawheeltoselectoneofthetwostoragedevices.(Youcanalsoselect theUSBdrivebypressingtheUSBDrvsoftbutton.)WhentheUSBdriveisselected,therewillbea prompttellingyouthattheUSBMIDIconnectionwillbedisconnected.Youmustacknowledge thisprompttocontinue. ThestatusoftheselecteddevicewillbedisplayedaseitherreadyoryouwillseeaNo connectionmessage.Thetoprighthandcornerofthepagedisplaysthecurrentlyselected storagedevice.Ifyouarehavingtroubleselectingadevicethatyouhavepluggedin,tryexiting StoragemodeandthenenteringStoragemodeagain.

11-1

Storage Mode Storage Mode Page

Afterselectingastoragedevice,usethesoftbuttonsontheStorageModepagetostartoneofthe availableoperations: STORE LOAD UTILS Format USBDrv Saveobjectsasa.PLEfileonthecurrentdevice. Loadselectedfile(s)orobject(s)fromthecurrentdeviceintoPC3LEmemory. OrganizefilesandfoldersonaUSBdevice. FormattheUSBdevicecurrentlyconnectedtotheUSBStorageport. SelectthevirtualUSBdrivewhentheUSBcomputerportisconnectedtoa computer.

Using USB Devices

ThereisaUSBStorageportonthebackpanelofthePC3LE,butitiseasilyaccessiblefromthe frontoftheinstrument(seebelow.)YoucanplugaUSBmassstoragedevicesuchasathumb driveintothePC3LEforbackingup,archiving,sharingyourwork,andupdatingyour software.AnysizeUSBmassstoragedevicewillwork,thoughthumbdrivesarerecommended fortheirportability,durability,andlowprice.

Note:MostUSBthumbdrivesarecompatiblewiththePC3LE,butsomeolderUSBthumbdrivesand largerUSBbuspowereddriveswillnotworkwiththePC3LEiftheyrequiremorethan500mAof current.WhenattemptingtouseanincompatibleUSBdevice,thePC3LEwilldisplaythemessageUSB devicerequirestoomuchpower.Powerrequirementspecificationsforthumbdrivesarenotalwaysmade clearlyavailablebythemanufacturer,butanewlypurchasedthumbdrivewillmostlikelybecompatible. Ifpossible,checkthepowerrequirementspecificationsofyourUSBdevicebeforepurchase. Caution:AUSBconnectorwillonlyfitintotheportiforientedproperly,sodontforceitintothe port,asthismaydamageyourPC3LEorUSBdevice.Ifyouarehavingtroubleinsertingyour USBconnectorintotheport,tryflippingtheconnectorover. Caution:DonotremoveaUSBdevicewhilethedisplaysaysLoading...orSaving....RemovingaUSB deviceduringafiletransfercancausedatacorruption. Formatting a USB Device SeeFormat on page 1111.

11-2

Storage Mode Storage Mode Page

USB Computer Port YoucanalsotransferfilesdirectlytoacomputerthatisequippedwithaUSBportbyusingthe USBComputerportonthebackpanelofthePC3LE(seeabove.)ConnectaUSBcablefromthe PC3LEsUSBComputerporttoaUSBportonyourcomputer.WhenyouenterStoragemode andselectUSBPCConnection,avirtualdrivenamedPC3LEwillappearonyourcomputers desktop.LoadfilesfromyourcomputertoyourPC3LEbyputtingfilesonthePC3LEvirtual drive,thenselectingUSBPCConnectioninStoragemodetoloadthefiles.Savefilesfromthe PC3LEtoyourcomputerbyusingthisconfigurationwiththeStoragemodesStorefunction. SavedfileswilltemporarilyappearonthePC3LEvirtualdriveonyourcomputersdesktop,and youthenmustcopyyoursavedfilestoanotherlocationonyourcomputer.Youmustcopydata fromthePC3LEvirtualdrivetoyourcomputersdriveorelsethedatawillbelost. WhenyouleaveStorageModeorselecttheUSBdevice,therewillbeaprompttellingyouthat thePC3LEisturningbackintoaUSBMIDIdevice.Youmustacknowledgethispromptto continue.ThePC3LEvirtualdrivewillunmountfromyourcomputer. Dependingonyourcomputersoperatingsystem,youmayseeadeviceremovalwarningon yourdesktopafterusingthePC3LEvirtualdrive.Youmaydisregardsuchamessagewithout worriesofdamagetoyourPC3LEorcomputer. Caution:DonotremoveaUSBdevicewhilethedisplaysaysLoading...orSaving....RemovingaUSB deviceduringafiletransfercancausedatacorruption.

11-3

Storage Mode Storage Mode Common Features

Storage Mode Common Features

Thefollowingfeaturesareusedinstoragemodewhensavingorloadingfiles.

Directories
Adirectoryletsyougroupfilestogetherasyoumightseparatedocumentsusingfoldersinafile cabinet.Bydefaultallstoragedeviceshaveatleastonerootdirectory.Toorganizefilesina USBdeviceyoucancreateadditionaldirectories,aswellassubdirectorieswithindirectories. Directoriesappearinthefilelistwiththeindicator<dir> totherightofthedirectoryname.See TheUtilities(UTILS)Page on page 1110fordetailsoncreating,deleting,andrenaming directories.

Path
ThePathfieldshowsthecurrentdirectoryonthecurrentdevice.Thisfieldisdisplayedwhen loading,saving,orexportingfilesinStoragemode.ThePC3LEalwaysdisplaystheroot(top level)directorywhenyouviewastoragedevice. Therootdirectoryisdisplayedasabackslash: Path:\ WhenviewingapagethathasthePathfield,iftheirareanydirectoriesavailableintheroot directory,youwillbeabletochoosethemfromalistusingthealphawheel,cursorbuttons,or/ +buttons.Then,presstheOpensoftbuttontoopenthatdirectory.Thenameofthedirectory willbedisplayedinthePathfield.Forexample,ifyouhaveadirectorycalledSOUNDSthatis locatedinthecurrentdevicesrootdirectory,thePathfieldwillappearas: Path:\SOUNDS\ Thebackslashcharacterisadirectoryseparator,asinthefollowingPath: Path:\BACKUP\COVERBAND\SONGS\ ThisrepresentsthedirectorySONGS,whichisasubdirectoryoftheCOVERBANDdirectory, whichisasubdirectoryoftheBACKUPdirectoryintherootdirectory.Ifthepathistoolongto fitonthetoplineofthedisplay,itgetsabbreviated.ThemaximumlengthofapathinthePC3LE is64 characters(includingthebackslashcharacters). UsingtheOpensoftbuttoncausesyoutonavigateintodirectoriesandtheirsubdirectories, awayfromtherootdirectory.Tonavigateoutofsubdirectoriesbacktowardstherootdirectory, usetheParentsoftbuttontomoveonelevelbackfromthecurrentdirectory.

11-4

Storage Mode Storage Mode Common Features

Common Dialogs
ThesearedialogsthatthePC3LEcallsupwhenabouttoperformcertainstoragefunctions. The Select Directory Dialog WhenstoringanobjectorgroupofobjectsthePC3LEpromptsyoutoselectadirectoryin whichtosavethatobjectorgroup. Therearethreenavigatingsoftbuttonsontheleftsideofthebottomofthepage: NewDir Open Parent Createnewdirectory.CallsuptheNewDirectorydialog(seethefollowingsection) Opensthehighlighteddirectory. Movesyouuponelevelinthedirectoryhierarchy.Ifthedisplayisalreadyatthe rootdirectory,thisbuttonhasnoeffect.

Whenyouhavechosenyourdirectory,presstheOKsoftbuttontocalluptheFileNamedialog (seethefollowingsection)andcompletethestoringprocess. The File Name/New Directory/Rename Dialog WhenyoucreateanewfileinStoragemode,createanewdirectory,orrenameafileordirectory, thePC3LEpromptsyoutoentertheobjectsname.ThisFileNamedialogappearsasshown below(boththeNewDirectoryandRenamescreensappearandfunctionsimilarlytotheFile Namedialog.)

NewfilenameswilldefaulttoeitherFILENAME(afterapowerup),orthenamewillbethatof themostrecentfilesavedorloaded.NewdirectorynameswilldefaulttoeitherDIRNAME (afterapowerup),orthenamewillbethatofthemostrecentfilesavedorloaded.Youcanedit thenameusingtheLeftandRightcursorbuttons,theDeleteandInsertsoftbuttons,andthe<< and>>softbuttons.SeeKeyboardNaming on page 55foranotherwaytoenterfilenames. PresstheOKsoftbuttontofinishtheoperation.

11-5

Storage Mode The STORE Page

The STORE Page

PressingtheSTOREsoftbuttoncallsuptheStorepage,whereyoucanselectuserobjectsfrom RAMtostoreinthecurrentstoragedevice.Thepageappearsasshownbelow:

Atthetoprightofthepage,thedisplayshowshowmuchmemoryisavailableinthecurrent storagedevice.PressoneoftheStorepagesthreesoftbuttons.Belowisadescriptionofthe functionofeachsoftbutton: Select SvAll Cancel Allowsyoutoselectspecificuserobjectstostore,seeTheStoreAdvancedPagebelow fordetails. Savesalluserobjects. ExitstheStorepageandreturnsyoutotheStoragemodepage.

YoucannotstoreROMobjects.IfyouwishtostoreaROMobject,suchasaprogram,youmust firstsaveitinternallyasauserRAMprogram.ThePC3LEsavesaobjectsinafilewitha(.PLE) extension.Notethatalthough.PLEfilesarecollectionsofobjects,youcanloadindividual objectsifyouwantto.SeeLoadingIndividualObjects on page 119.

The Store Advanced Page

PressingtheSelectsoftbuttoncallsuptheStoreAdvancedpage.Onthispage,youcanselect individualobjectstostore,ratherthanstoringallobjects.TheStoreAdvancedpagelistsevery usereditedobjectinthePC3LE.TheobjectsareorganizedbynumericalIDandobjecttype. TherearefivesoftbuttonsontheStoreAdvancedpage: Select Next Type Store Cancel Selectordeselectthehighlightedobject.Anasterix(*)appearsbetweentheIDand objecttypeofselectedobjects. Scrolltonextentry.Samefunctionaspressingthedowncursorbuttonorthe+ button,orturningtheAlphaWheeloneclickclockwise. Jumptonextobjecttypeinthelist. Storetheselectedobjectstothecurrentstoragedevice.Pressingthissoftbuttoncalls uptheSelectDirectorydialog. ExitstheStoreAdvancedpage.

Shortcuts when Storing Individual Objects Selectingordeselectingalloftheobjectsatoncecanbedonewiththefollowingdoublepresses (twofrontpanelbuttonssimultaneouslypressed):

11-6

Storage Mode The STORE Page

Left/Rightcursordoublepress:SelectAllObjects Up/Downcursordoublepress:ClearAllSelections

Ifyouwanttostoremostbutnotalloftheitemsinafile(forexample,iftherearesomesongsin RAMthatyoudontwanttobestoredinthefile),itmaybefastesttofirstselectallobjectsusing theLeft/Rightdoublepress,andthenmanuallydeselectanyunwanteditems. Saving Master Table Files AmongyourchoicesontheStoreAdvancedpageareMasterTablefiles.MasterTablefiles consistprimarilyoftheitemsontheMastermodepages,aswellassettingsforwhichprogram isoneachMIDIchannel.SavingMasterTablefilesisagoodwaytoconfigureyourPC3LE(or anotherPC3LE)toyourperformanceorsequencingneeds.Forexample,youmightsave differentMasterTablefileswitheverysequenceyoucreateusinganexternalsequencer.Then, whenyouloadtheMasterTablefile,youwouldhaveallthecorrectprogramsassignedtothe appropriateMIDIchannels.

11-7

Storage Mode The LOAD Page

The LOAD Page

PressingtheLOADsoftbuttoncallsuptheLOADpage(seebelow,)whereyoucanloada.PLE orcompatibleKurzweilfile,individualobjectsfromwithinthosefiles,oraMIDIsequencefile (.MID)fromthecurrentstoragedevice.SeeAppendix Cforcompatibilitydetails. Usethecursorbuttons,/+buttonsorthealphawheeltobrowsethefilesinthecurrently selectedstoragedevice.Seebelowfordescriptionsofthesoftbuttonsonthispage,whichhelp youbrowseandselectthefilesinthecurrentlyselectedstoragedevice. Afterselectingthefileorfilestoload,presstheOksoftbutton,andyouwillbepromptedto chooseabanktoloadtheselectedobject(s)orMIDIfile(s)into.SeeLoadingMethods on page 1110 forinstructionsonchoosingabanktoloadtoafterpressingOk. Note:Whenselectingafiletoload,filenamesontheLoadpagethatarelongerthaneight characterswillbeshortenedtoeightcharactersandspaceswillberemoved.(Thishasnoeffecton thenamesofobjectsstoredwithina.PLEorothercompatiblefiletype.)WhenloadingaMIDIfile (.MID)toSongmode,thePC3LEwillattempttousetheMIDIfilesinternalsequencenameas theSongname.Iftheinternalsequencenamecannotbeloaded,thefirsteightcharactersofthe filenamewillbeusedastheSongname.ShortenedsongnamescanberenamedinSongmode

Select

Selectordeselectthehighlightedfile.Anasterix(*)appearstotheleftofselected files.Multiplefilescanonlybeselectediftheyareinthesamedirectory.Enteringa newdirectorywilldeselectallfiles. PresstheSelAllsoftbuttontoselectordeselectallfilesinthecurrentdirectory (directorieswithinthecurrentdirectorywillnotbeselected.)Enteringanew directorywilldeselectallfiles. Movesyouuponelevelinthedirectoryhierarchy.Ifthedisplayisalreadyatthe rootdirectory,thisbuttonhasnoeffect.Enteringanewdirectorywilldeselectall files. Openselecteddirectoryorviewobjectswithina.PLEorcompatibleKurzweilfile forloadingindividualobjects.SeeLoadingIndividualObjectsbelowforinstructions onopeninga.PLEorcompatibleKurzweilfiletoviewandloadindividualobjects (SeeAppendix Cforcompatibilitydetails.)Enteringanewdirectorywilldeselectall files.Viewingobjectswithina.PLEorcompatibleKurzweilfilewilldeselectany otherfilesthathadbeenselected. Loadtheselected.PLEorcompatibleKurzweilfile.SeeLoading Methods on page 1110forinstructionsonusingtheLoaddialoguepresentedafter pressingOk. ExitstheLoadpageandreturnsyoutotheStoragemodepage.

SelAll

Parent

Open

OK

Cancel

11-8

Storage Mode The LOAD Page

Loading Individual Objects

Sincefilescancontainover3000objects,itisoftenusefultoloadonlyasubsetoftheinformation containedina.PLEfile.Sometimes,thiscapabilityisnecessaryeventobeabletoloadcertain files,ifthesizeofthefilesdataisgreaterthanthePC3LEsinternalRAMsize. Youcanselectindividualobjectsorgroupsofobjects(programs,effects,songs)forloadingfrom withinasingle.PLEfile.TheLoadObjectfeatureisaccessiblefromtheLOADpage.Toactivate it,scrollthefilelistuntilyouhavehighlightedthefilethatyouwishtoloadobjectsfrom. PressOpentobegintheLoadObjectdialog.ThePC3LEthenscansthefilecontentsinorderto presentalistofalloftheobjectsinthefile.Sometimesthisprocedurecantakeafewmoments, dependingonhowmanyobjectsareinthefile. Theobjectsinthelistaregroupedbytype(program,setup,etc.).Scrollthroughthelistusingthe alphawheel,cursorbuttons,or/+buttons.Eachlineinthelistrepresentsoneobject,and displaystheobjectsnumberinthelist,aswellastheobjectstype,IDnumber,andname.TheID numbersarethesamenumbersthatwereusedtoreferencetheobjectswhenthefilewaslast savedbythePC3LE. Enteringinanumberfromthealphanumericbuttonpadwilljumptotheindexedentry,and typinginalargenumberlike9999willgototheendofthelist. Thefollowingsoftbuttonsareusedforselectingobjectstoload: Select Next Type OK Cancel Selectordeselectthehighlightedobject. Scrolltonextentry.Samefunctionaspressingthedowncursorbuttonorthe+ button,orturningtheAlphaWheeloneclickclockwise. Jumptonextobjecttypeinthelist. Loadtheselectedobjects. ExitstheStoreAdvancedpage.

Select All/Deselect All Selectingordeselectingalloftheobjectsatoncecanbedonewiththesamedoublepressesas describedforthefilelistdialog,namely: Left/Rightcursordoublepress:SelectAllObjects Up/Downcursordoublepress:ClearAllSelections

Ifyouwanttoloadmostbutnotalloftheitemsfromafile(forexample,iftherehappenstobea Mastertableinthefilethatyoudontwanttoload),itmaybefastesttofirstselectallobjects usingtheLeft/Rightdoublepress,andthenmanuallydeselectanyunwanteditems.

11-9

Storage Mode The Utilities (UTILS) Page

Loading Methods
OnceyouhavepressedOKtoloadtheselectedfile(s)orobject(s),youmustselectaloading method.ThisdeterminesthewhetherornotexistingobjectsinthePC3LEwillbedeletedwhen thenewobjectsareloaded.Youwillseethisdialog:

Caution:Carefullyreadthedescriptionofeachloadingmethodbeforepressingoneofthesoftbuttons. SomeoftheloadingmethodswilldeleteexistingobjectsinthePC3LE. Thesoftbuttonscontrolthemodeforloadingandrenumberingofobjectsfromthefile.Heres howtheywork: Overwrt Append Cancel FirstdeletesallexistinguserRAMobjectsandthenloadsobjectsusingtheobjectID numbersstoredinthefile. TrytousetheobjectIDnumbersstoredinthefilefortheobjectstobeloaded.Ifan IDnumberisalreadyinuse,incrementtheIDnumberuntilafreeslotisfound. Cancelthemodeselection,andgobacktochoosingfiles.

The Utilities (UTILS) Page

PressingtheUTILSsoftbuttoncallsuptheUtilitiespage.UsetheUtilitiespagetocreate directories(folders)onthecurrentUSBdevice,orusetheUtilitiespagetodelete,renameor copyfilesonthecurrentUSBdevice.Seethesoftbuttonsbelowfortheeachavailablefunction:

Soft Buttons on the Utilities Page

NewDir Delete Rename Copy Createanewdirectory(folder)inthecurrentdirectory.Directoriescreatedbythe PC3LEcanhavenamesuptoeightcharacterslong. Deletethehighlightedfilefromthecurrentdevice. Changethenameofafile. Copyafiletoadifferentdirectory.AfterpressingCopy,youmustselectadirectory tocopyto,presstheOpensoftbuttontoopenthedirectorytocopyto,thenpress theOksoftbuttontocopythefile.YoucanalsopresstheNewDirsoftbuttonto createanewdirectorytocopyto. Opensthehighlighteddirectory. Movesyouuponelevelinthedirectoryhierarchy.Ifthedisplayisalreadyatthe rootdirectory,thisbuttonhasnoeffect.

Open Parent

11-10

Storage Mode Export

Export
PresstheEXPORTsoftbuttontogototheExportpage.TheExportpageallowsyoutoexport MIDIfilescreatedinSongmode,listsofcontrollerassignmentinfothatareautomatically createdforeachProgramandeachChain,oralistofallobjectsintextformat.Developerscan alsoexportanobjectinXMLformat,orexportaKPN. ToexportaMIDIfilecreatedinSongmode,thesongmustbecurrentlyloadedinSongmode. GotoSongmodeandloadthedesiredsong,thenreturntotheStoragemodeEXPORTpageand presstheSongsoftbutton.Youwillbepromptedfirsttochooseadirectorytosavethefileinto, andthenyouwillbepromptedtonametheMIDIfile.Whenyounamethefile,youcanusethe TypefieldtochoosetoexporteitheraStandardMIDIFiletype1(saveswithmultiplechannels,) orStandardMIDIFiletype0(savesallchannelsas1channel.) ToexportalistofcontrollerassignmentinfoforallProgramsorforallChains,pressthePrInfo softbuttonortheFXInfosoftbutton.Youwillbepromptedtochooseadirectorytosaveinto, andthenyouwillbepromptedtonametheinfofile.Acommaseparatedvaluefilewillbe exported. Toexportalistofallobjectsintextformat,presstheObjLstsoftbutton.Youwillbepromptedto chooseadirectorytosaveinto,andthenyouwillbepromptedtonamethefile.Acomma separatedvaluetextfilewillbeexported,listingeachobjecttypewithIDnumber,objectname, andwhethertheobjectisinternaloruser. ToexportanobjectinXMLformat,presstheObjFmtsoftbutton.Chooseanobjectfromthelist usingtheAlphaWheel,/+buttons,orthealphanumericpad,thenpresstheOksoftbutton.You willbepromptedtochooseadirectorytosaveinto,andthenyouwillbepromptedtonamethe file. ToexportaKPN,presstheKPNsoftbutton.ChooseaDomainandChannel,thenpresstheOk softbutton.Youwillbepromptedtochooseadirectorytosaveinto,andthenyouwillbe promptedtonamethefile.

Format
USBdevicescomeformattedandreadytousewiththePC3LE.Ifyoueverneedtoformata device,however,youcanuseanycomputerwithUSBdeviceformattingcapability,orformatit usingthePC3LE. ToformataUSBdevicewiththePC3LE,plugtheUSBdeviceintothePC3LEsUSBStorageport, thenpresstheStoragebuttontoenterStoragemode.PressthesoftbuttonlabeledFormat.The PC3LEwillaskyouifyouwanttoformat.PresstheOKsoftbuttontoformatthedevice,orthe CancelsoftbuttontoreturntotheStoragemodemainpage. Caution:FormattingwilleraseallfilesontheUSBdevice,makesureanythingthatyouwish tosaveisbackeduponanotherdevice.

11-11

Storage Mode Format

11-12

Keymap and Sample Editing The Keymap Editor

Chapter 12 Keymap and Sample Editing

The Keymap Editor
TheKeymapEditorletsyoucustomizethePC3LEsfactorypresetkeymapsandsavethemto RAM.Youcanalsobuildyourownkeymapsfromscratch(seeBuildingaKeymap on page 127.) Keymapsareanintegralpartofeverylayerofaprogram.Eachkeymapcontainsasetof parametersdeterminingwhichsample(s)thePC3LEwillplaywhenyoutriggeranote.Each layerhasatleastonekeymap,butitcanhavetwokeymapswhenyoureworkingwithstereo samples.Eachofthesestereokeymapsusestwoofthe128availablevoices. Eachkeymapconsistsofasetofkey(note)rangesC4toG4,forexample.Theentirespanof eachkeymapisfromC0toG10.Eachrangehasasamplerootassignedwithintherange.Each samplerootisadistinctROMsample.Withineachkeyrange,thesamplerootistransposedup anddowntoplayoneachoftherangesnotes.Youcanvieweachrangebychangingthevalueof theKeyRangeparameterontheKeymapeditorpage.Youcanmixsamplesofdifferenttimbres withinasinglekeymap,andeventuneindividualkeystoanypitchbydefiningkeyrangesto singlenotesandassigningsamplestoeachofthosenotes. Whenyoutriggeranote,thePC3LEidentifiesthekeyrangewheretheNoteOneventoccurred. Italsocheckstheattackvelocityvalueofthenote.Itthenaddressesitsmemory,andretrieves thesamplerootthatsassignedtothatkeyrangeandattackvelocityvalue.Ifthenotethats triggeredisnotthenotewherethesamplerootisassigned,thesampleistransposedtoplayat thecorrectpitch.ThePC3LEthengeneratesthedigitalsignalthatrepresentsthesoundofthe note.Atthispointthekeymapsjobisdone,andthesignalproceedsthroughthelayers algorithmandontotheaudiooutputs. Youcanassignasmanykeyrangestoakeymapasyoulike,evencreatingaseparaterangefor eachnote.Thiswouldallowyoutotuneeachkeyindependently,tocreatemicrotonaltunings. Forkeymapsthatuseasingletimbre,liketheGrandPiano,theresakeyrangeforeachsample rootstoredinmemory.Foracousticinstrumentalsounds,themorekeyrangesyouhavefora keymap,themorerealisticthesoundwillbe,sincetherewillbelesspitchshiftingofthesample rootwithinthekeyrange. Ofcourse,youcanassignsamplerootswithdifferenttimbreswithinthesamekeymap.Manyof thedrumkitkeymapsinROM,forexample,haveabout20keyranges,withseveraldifferent timbresassignedasthesampleroots.Youcanalsocreateakeymapwithasinglekeyrangethat spansfromC0toG10,ifyouwanttostretchasinglesamplerootfromC0toG 10.Keepin mind,however,thatsamplescanonlybetransposedupwardbyanoctavefromthesamples originalpitch.Samplescanbetransposeddownwardwithoutlimit. Thinkofakeymapasifitwereasinglepieceofstring,dividedintodifferentsectionsthatadjoin oneanother.Sectionscannotoverlap.IfyouhaveonerangethatgoesfromC4toF4andanother thatgoesfromF#4toC5,thenifyouchangethefirstrangetobeC4toG4,thesecondonewill changetobeG#4toC5. Also,youcanthavenothingassignedtoakeyrange.EvenifitisSilence(#999),therewill alwaysbeasampleassignedtoeveryrangeinthekeymap.Thisissomethingtowatchoutfor whencreatingdrumprograms.Forexample,letssayyouarecreatingaprogramwith20layers. Eachlayerhasitsownkeymap,whichhasjustonesampleassignedtopartofthekeyboardwith therestofthekeyrangeassignedtoSilence.Makesurethatyoulimitthenoterangeofeach

12-1

Keymap and Sample Editing The Keymap Editor

layerusingtheLoKeyandHiKeyparametersontheLAYERpageintheV.A.S.T.ProgramEditor. Ifeachlayercoverstheentirerange,theneachnoteyouplayedwouldtrigger20voices(onefor eachlayer).Youwouldonlyhearonedrumpernotebecausealltheotherlayersaretriggering Silence.BecauseofthevoicestealingalgorithmsinthePC3LE,thevoiceswouldalmost immediatelybecomeavailableagain,sincetheyhavenoamplitude.Butforonebriefinstant,the voicewouldbetriggered,whichcouldcauseothervoicestobecutoff. Youcanalsocreatemultivelocitykeymapsthatis,keymapsthatwillplaydifferenttimbres dependingontheattackvelocitiesofyourNoteOnevents.Program6PopPowerPiano,for example,usesakeymapwiththreevelocityranges.Eachkeyrangeinamultivelocitykeymap containstwoormoredistinctsamplerootsthatthePC3LEchoosesbetween,accordingtothe attackvelocityofthenote.SeeVelocityRanges(VelRng) on page 125fordetails. TheKeymapEditorisnestedwithintheV.A.S.T.ProgramEditor.ToaccesstheKeymapEditor, presstheEditbuttonwhileinProgramMode,thenpresstheV.A.S.T.softbuttontoenterthe V.A.S.T.ProgramEditor.ThefirststepinusingtheKeymapEditoristoselectthekeymapyou wanttoedit.ThisisdoneontheKEYMAPpageintheV.A.S.T.ProgramEditor,usingthe Keymapparameter.Onceyouvedonethis,justpresstheEditbutton,andyoullenterthe KeymapEditor.Ifyouwanttoeditadifferentkeymap,presstheExitbuttontoreturntothe KEYMAPpageintheV.A.S.T.ProgramEditorandselectthedesiredkeymap.Ifyouwantto buildakeymapfromscratch,startwiththekeymap999Silence(seeBuildinga Keymap on page 127).ThiskeymaptemplatecontainsonekeyrangefromC0toG10,andisa convenientstartingpointforaddingkeyrangesandassigningsampleroots.TheKeymapeditor pagelookslikethis:

Parameter Sample Key Range Low Key High Key Velocity Range (VelRange) Low Velocity (Lo) High Velocity (Hi) Coarse Tune Fine Tune Master Transpose Volume Adjust

Range of Values Sample Root list Variable from C0-G10 C 0 to G 10 C 0 to G 10 Variable from ppp-fff ppp-fff ppp-fff 128 to 127 semitones -49 to 50 cents -126 ST to127 semitones 24 dB

12-2

Keymap and Sample Editing The Keymap Editor

Keymap Editor Parameters

Sample Thisiswhereyouassignasampleroottothecurrentkeyrange.Dependingonthenatureofthe samplerootanindividualsampleorablockofsamplerootsthesamplesnamelooksabit differentinthedisplay.Eachsamplesnameconsistsofthreeparts:anumeral,aname,anda notenumberforexample,999SilenceC4.Additionally,thenameofstereosampleswillend withanS.(Touseastereosample,theStereoparametermustbesettoOnintheV.A.S.T. ProgramEditor,andtwokeymapsmustbeselected,seeTheKEYMAPPage on page 619for details.) ThenumeralisthesampleblockID.Ifthesampleobjectisanindividualsample,thesample blockIDisthesameasthesamplesobjectID.Ifthesampleobjectisagroupofsampleroots,the objectIDofthefirstrootinthegroupdeterminesthesampleblockID.Theremainingrootsin theblockhavethesameID,anddifferonlyintheirnotenumbers. Nextcomesthenameofthesample,whichtypicallydescribesthesamplestimbre.Thefinal partofthesamplesnamereferstothepitchatwhichitwasoriginallysampled.Formany timbres,multiplesamplesaremadeatvariouspitches.AsyouscrollthroughtheSamplelist, youllseeonlythepitchofthesamplechangeuntilyoureachthenextsampleblock.The samplesoriginalpitchissetintheSampleEditor(seeRootKey on page 1210.)Thisdetermines whichkeywillplaythesampleatitsoriginalpitchwhenasampleisusedinakeyrange(see KeyRangebelow.) Key Range Akeyrangeisarangeofkeyboardkeysthatplaysonesample(pervelocityrange,seeVelocity Range(VelRange)belowfordetails.)Eachsampleinakeyrange(pervelocityrange)is transposedbasedoneachsamplesRootKeyparametersothatitplaysatthecorrectpitchonthe keyboardrelativetoitsrootkey(seeEditingSamples on page 129fordetailsontheRootKey parameter.)Otherkeyswithinthekeyrangetransposethesamplechromaticallyrelativetothe rootkey.SamplepitchrelativetotherootkeycanalsobeoffsetusingtheCoarseTuneandFine Tuneparameters,seebelow.) TheKeyRangeparametershowsyouwhichkeyrangeyourecurrentlyviewingorediting(key rangesarenamedbytheirlowestandhighestnotes.)ChangingthevalueoftheKeyRange parameterselectsfromtheavailablekeyranges,andallowsyoutovieworeditthesample assignmentandotherparametersoftheselectedkeyrange.WhentheKeyRangeparameteris selected,youcanalsoscrollthroughavailablekeyrangesusingtheAlphaWheelorthe/+ buttons.MultiplekeyrangesareonlyshownifthecurrentKeymapusesmorethanonekey range.IfthetoplineoftheEditKeymappagedisplaysKeyRange,youcanscrollthroughthe availablekeyrangeswithanyparameteronthepageselectedusingtheChan/Layerbuttons. (PresstheTogglesoftbuttontotogglethetoplinebetweendisplayingKeyRangeand VelRange.) WiththeKeyrangeparameterselected,keyrangescanalsobeselectedbyholdingtheEnter buttonandplayingakey.Thekeyrangeassignedtothatkeywillbeselected. Low Key (Lo), High Key (Hi) Withtheseparametersyoucanuseanyofthedataentrymethodstochangethelowandhigh notesofthecurrentkeyrange.YoucanextendakeyrangetothefullcapacityofthePC3LE(C0 toG10).Ifyouextendthecurrentkeyrangeintoanother,theboundariesoftheotherkeyrange willbecomeshortenedtoaccommodatethekeyrangeyouareextending.Ifthekeyrangeyou areextendingcoversanotherkeyrange,theotherkeyrangewillbedeleted. Thesettingforthelowkeycannotbehigherthanthesettingforthehighkey.Similarly,the settingforthehighkeycannotbelowerthanthesettingforthelowkey.

12-3

Keymap and Sample Editing The Keymap Editor

Velocity Range (VelRange) Thisparametershowsthekeyboardvelocityrange(indynamiclevels)thatwilltriggerasample forthecurrentKeyRange.Inakeyrangewithmorethanonevelocityrange,eachvelocityrange canuseadifferentsample,aswellasdifferentCoarseTune,FineTune,andVolumeAdjust settings.Velocityrangesareintendedforusewithinstrumentsamplesrecordedatdifferent velocities.Thishelpstomakeplayingsampledinstrumentssoundmorerealistic.Sample volumesarealsoscaledbasedonkeyboardvelocitywithineachvelocityrange.Velocityranges forthecurrentKeymaparesetusingtheVelRngsoftbutton(seeVelocityRanges (VelRng) on page 125)ortheLowVelocity(Lo),HighVelocity(Hi)parameters(seebelow.)All keyrangesinaKeymapsharethesamesetofvelocityranges.Uptoeightvelocityrangescanbe used. WhentheVelRangeparameterisselected,youcanscrollthroughavailablevelocityrangesusing theAlphaWheelorthe/+buttons.Multiplevelocityrangesareonlyshownifthecurrent Keymapusesmorethanonevelocityrange.IfthetoplineoftheEditKeymappagedisplays VelRange,youcanscrollthroughtheavailablevelocityrangeswithanyparameteronthepage selectedusingtheChan/Layerbuttons.(PresstheTogglesoftbuttontotogglethetopline betweendisplayingVelRangeandKeyRange.) Low Velocity (Lo), High Velocity (Hi) Usetheseparameterstosetthevelocityrangeofthecurrentkeyrange.Ifyouextendthecurrent velocityrangeintoanother,theboundariesoftheothervelocityrangewillbecomeshortenedto accommodatethevelocityrangeyouareextending.Ifthevelocityrangeyouareextending coversanothervelocityrange,theothervelocityrangewillbedeleted. Coarse Tune CoarseTuneallowsyoutotransposeasampleforagivenrange.Thisisextremelyusefulwhen youhavesettheRootkeyofthesampleforonenotebutwanttoassignthesampletoadifferent partofthekeyboardandstillbeabletoplayitwithouttransposition(seeRootKey on page 1210 fordetails.)Forexample,ifyouoriginallysettheRootkeyatC4butwantthesampleassignedto C3,youwouldsetCoarseTuneto12ST,transposingituponeoctave.Nowtheoriginalpitchwill playatC3,oneoctavedown.IfyouexaminethedrumandpercussionkitkeymapsinROM,you willseethatwehavedonethis.MostofourROMdrumsampleshavetheRootkeysetatC4. TheresashortcutforadjustingtheCoarseTuneautomaticallysothatthesampleplayswith minimaltranspositionintheassignedkeyrange.SeeSpecialDoubleButtonPressesintheKeymap Editor on page 126. Fine Tune Thisgivesyoufurtherpitchcontrol.Oncethesamplespitchisclosetothedesirednote,usethe Finetunetosharpenorflattenitasmuchasahalfsemitone. Master Transpose (MasterXpose) Thisparameterdoesnotreallypertaintothekeymapitself.Insteaditisidenticaltothe TransposeparameterfoundontheMIDImodeTRANSMITpage.Ifyouchangethevaluehere, thesamevaluewillbereflectedontheMIDImodeTRANSMITpage,andviceversa.It transposestheentireinstrumentglobally.Thereasonitisplacedonthispageisthatitwillallow youtoassignsamplesacrosstheentirekeyboardeasily,whenyouareusingakeyboardthathas fewerthan88notes. Volume Adjust Hereyoucanadjustthevolumeofthenotesinthecurrentkeyrange.Thisenablesyoutomake eachkeyrangeplayatthesamevolumeevenifthesamplesinthevariousrangeswererecorded atdifferentvolumes.

12-4

Keymap and Sample Editing The Keymap Editor

The Soft Buttons in the Keymap Editor

Toggle PressingtheTogglesoftbuttonswitchesthefunctionthattheChan/Layerbuttonsperform whileontheEditKeymappage.PresstheTogglesoftbuttontotogglethetoplinebetween displayingKeyRangeorVelRange.IfthetoplineofthepagedisplaysKeyRange,thenthe Chan/Layerbuttonswillscrollbetweentheavailablekeyrangesinthekeymap(ifthecurrent keymaphasmorethanonekeyrange.)Thenoterangeforeachkeyrangewillalsobedisplayed onthetopline.IfthetoplineofthepagedisplaysVelRange,thentheChan/Layerbuttonswill scrollbetweentheavailablevelocityrangesinthekeymap(ifthecurrentkeymaphasmore thanonevelocityrange.)Thedynamicrangeforeachvelocityrangewillalsobedisplayedon thetopline. Velocity Ranges (VelRng) PresstheVelRngsoftbuttontoviewtheVELRANGESpage(seebelow.)UsetheVELRANGES pagetoadd,editordeletevelocityrangesforthecurrentkeymap.TheVELRANGESpage showsachartofakeymapsentireavailabledynamicrange,frommostquiet(ppp)tomostloud (fff.)VelocityrangescanalsobeadjustedfromtheEditKeymappage,buttheVELRANGES pageprovidesachartasavisualaid.Eachkeymapcanbesplitintoamaximumofeightvelocity ranges.Eachkeyrangeinakeymapcanuseitsownsampleforeachvelocityrange.Allkey rangesinakeymapsharethesamevelocityranges.

PresstheSplitsoftbuttontosplitthecurrentlyselectedvelocityrangeintotworanges(untilthe maximumofeightvelocityrangeshavebeencreated.)PresstheDeletesoftbuttontodeletethe currentlyselectedvelocityrange.PresstheExitsoftbuttontoreturntotheEditKeymappage. OntheVELRANGESpage,thecurrentlyselectedvelocityrangeishighlightedinthechart,and itsnameisdisplayedintheVelRangefield.WiththeVelRangefieldselected,youcanusethe AlphaWheelor/+buttonstomovebetweentheavailablevelocityranges(ifthereismorethan onevelocityrangeavailable.)YoucanalsousetheChan/Layerbuttonsatanytimetomove betweentheavailablevelocityranges.Ifthereismorethanonevelocityrangeavailable,youcan adjustthedynamicrangeofeachusingLoandHiparameters.TheseHiandLoparametersare thesameastheLowVelocity(Lo)andHighVelocity(Hi)parametersontheEditKeymappage (seeLowVelocity(Lo),HighVelocity(Hi) on page 124fordetails.)Changesmadewitheithersetof parametersareshownonbothpages. New Range (NewRng) TheNewRngbuttonletsyoudefineanewkeyrangetoedit,whetheritstoassignadifferent sample,ortoadjustthepitchorvolume.JustpressNewRng,thenplaythenoteyouwantasthe lownote,thenthehighnote.ThePC3LEwillpromptyouforeachnote.Whenyoutriggerthe highnote,youllreturntotheKeymapeditorpage,andthenewkeyrangeyoudefinedwillbe selected.Thenextchangeyoumakewillaffectonlythateditrange.

12-5

Keymap and Sample Editing The Keymap Editor

Ifyousetanewkeyrangethatscompletelywithinanexistingkeyrange,theexistingkeyrange willbesplitintotwokeyranges,withthenewkeyrangebetweenthetwo.Atthispoint,you mustchangeatleastoneparameterofthenewkeyrangebeforeeditingadifferentkeyrange, otherwisethenewkeyrangewillbemergedwiththeadjacentkeyranges.Ifyousetanew keyrangethatoverlapspartorallofanotherkeyrange,thesampleassignedtothelowerkey rangewillbeappliedtothenewkeyrange.Again,atthispointyoumustchangeatleastone parameterofthenewkeyrangebeforeeditingadifferentkeyrange,otherwisethenewkeyrange willbemergedwiththelowerkeyrangethatitoverlapped. Assign TheAssignsoftbuttonletsyouselectasample,thenspecifythekeyrangetowhichits assigned.Thisenablesyoutoinsertanewkeyrangewithinthecurrentkeymap.Whenyou presstheAssignsoftbutton,adialogappearsthatpromptsyoutoselectasamplefromthe Sampleslist.Scrollthroughthelist,thenpresstheOKsoftbutton.Youllthenbepromptedto definethenewkeyrangebyplayingthenotesyouwanttobethelowestandhighestnotesofthe range.(PresstheCancelsoftbuttonifyouchangeyourmind.)Whenyoutriggerthelowand highnotes,thenewkeyrangeisinserted.Ifthenewkeyrangepartiallyoverlapsanadjacentkey range,theexistingkeyrangewillbeadjustedtoaccommodatethenewrange.Ifthenewkey rangecompletelyoverlapsanexistingkeyrange,theoriginalkeyrangewillbereplaced. Rename Callupthepagethatenablesyoutochangethenameofthecurrentkeymap. Save Starttheprocessofsavingthecurrentkeymap. Delete Deletethecurrentkeymapfrommemory.FactoryROMkeymapscannotbedeleted.

Special Double Button Presses in the Keymap Editor

SupposeyouhaveasamplewhoserootkeyisC4,andyouwanttoassignittoA0,becauseyou dontexpecttoplayitoften.Ifyouwantittoplaybackwithouttransposition,youllhaveto adjusttheCoarseTuneparameter.CalculatingtherightvalueforCoarseTunecangettediousif youreassigningalargenumberofsamples.Fortunately,theresashortcut. 1. Assignasampleroottoakeyrange,eitherusingtheLo,Hi,andSampleparametersor usingtheAssignsoftbutton. 2. HighlightthevalueoftheCoarseTuneparameter. 3. PressthePlus/Minusbuttonsatthesametime.ThevalueofCoarseTunechanges automatically.Ifthesampleisassignedtoonenote,thePC3LEsetsCoarseTunesothat thenoteplaysthesamplewithouttransposition.Ifthesampleisassignedtoarangeof notes,thePC3LEsetsCoarseTunesothatthemiddlenoteoftherangeplaysthesample withouttransposition.

12-6

Keymap and Sample Editing Building a Keymap

Building a Keymap
Readbelowfordetaileddirectionsonmanuallycreatingandeditingakeymap.Tobuilda keymap,firstgototheProgrammodemainpage(thiscanbedonebyrepeatedlypressingthe Exitbutton.)FromtheProgrammodemainpage,usethealphanumericpadtoselectprogram 999DefaultProgram.NextpresstheEditbuttontoentertheProgramEditor,thenpressthe V.A.S.TsoftbuttontoentertheV.A.S.T.ProgramEditor.TheKEYMAPpagewillappear.The Keymapparameterwillbeautomaticallyselected.Press999andEnteronthealphanumericpad toassignthekeymap999Silence.Thisisntabsolutelynecessary,butitmakesiteasierto recognizethekeyrangesthathavesamplesassignedtothemwhenyoustartassigningsamples. Youcanactuallychooseanyprogramorkeymapyouwanttostartwith,butbychoosingthese, youarestartingwithablankslate. WiththeKeymapparameterstillselected,presstheEditbutton,andyoullentertheKeymap Editor.TheKeyRangeparameterwillbeautomaticallyselected,andyouseeitsvalues:C 0to G 10(theentireMIDIkeyboardrange).TheSampleparameterwillhaveavalueof 999 SilenceC 4. Nowyourereadytostartassigningsamplestokeyrangeswithinthekeymap.Wellassume thatyouveloadedsampleswithrootsatC1,C2,C3,etc.andthatyouplantoassignarootto eachoctave.Tobegin,presstheAssignsoftbutton.Thedisplaywillpromptyoutoselecta sample.UsetheAlphaWheeltoscrolltooneofyoursamples,ortypeitsIDonthe alphanumericpadandpressEnter.Whenyouvefoundthesampleyouwanttouse,pressthe OKsoftbutton.ThedisplaywillsayStrikelowkeyTriggerA0(MIDInotenumber21,the lowestAonastandard88notekeyboard).ThedisplaywillchangetosayStrikeHigh KeyNowtriggerF1(MIDInotenumber29).ThedisplaywillreturntotheKeymapeditor page.TheKeyRangeparameterwillshowA0F1,andtheSampleparameterwillshowthe sampleyouselectedwhenyoustartedtherangeassignment. EachsampleinakeyrangeisautomaticallytransposedbasedoneachsamplesRootKey parametersothatitplaysatthecorrectpitchonthekeyboardrelativetoitsrootkey(seeEditing Samples on page 129fordetailsontheRootKeyparameter.)Otherkeyswithinthekeyrange transposethesamplechromaticallyrelativetotherootkey.Automatictranspositionbasedon eachsamplesRootKeyisimportantifyouwantyoursampletoplayintunewithotherPC3LE programsorotherinstruments.ThePC3LEmakesthiseasybecauseeachROMsamplehasthe correctRootKeysettings.GenerallyyoushouldsetakeyrangesothatthesamplesRootKey (displayedattheendofthesamplename)isinthemiddleoftherange.Ifyousetakeyrange thatdoesnotcoverthesamplesRootKey,thesamplewillhavetoautomaticallytransposeby manysemitones,andwilllikelynotsoundcorrect.Samplesarealsolimitedtoanoctaveof upwardtranspositionfromthesamplesoriginalpitch.Ifyousetakeyrangetoohighbasedon theRootKey,somesamplesmaynotbeabletotransposeupwardfarenoughtoplayintune, andmanykeysmayplaythesamenote(thehighestnotethatthesamplecanbetransposedto.) AutomatictranspositionrelativetotherootkeycanbeoffsetusingtheCoarseTuneandFine TuneparametersontheEditKeymappage,(seeCoarseTuneandFineTune on page 124.) Continuingwiththeexample,presstheAssignsoftbuttonagain.Selectanothersamplerootat theprompt,andpresstheOKsoftbutton.NowtriggerF#1fortheLowKeyprompt,andF2for theHighKeyprompt.Atthispointyouvedefinedtwokeyranges,thefirstfromA0toF1,and thesecondfromF#1toF2.Youcanrepeattheprocessasmanytimesasyouwant,creatinga newkeyrangeeachtime. Onceyouhaveyoursamplesassigned,youmayneedtotransposethemsothattheyplayback atthecorrectpitchwithintherangeyouhavechosen.Todothis,highlighttheKeyRange parameter,scrolltotherangeyouneed,thenhighlighttheCoarseTuneparameter.Adjust CoarseTunetobringthesampletotheproperpitchwithinthatkeyrange.Thenscrollbackup totheKeyRangeparameter,selectthenextrange,andcontinueasneeded.

12-7

Keymap and Sample Editing Building a Keymap

Heresafairlyimportantpointthatmayormaynotaffectyourkeymapconstruction.Suppose youwanttobuildakeymapthatusesthesamesampleinseveraladjacentkeyranges,andyou plantoaddabitofdetuningtothesamplesineachrange.Youmightthinkthatyoucouldbuild thekeymapfirst,thengointotheSampleEditorandtweakthesamplesettingsofeachkeyrange whenthekeymapisfinished.Yes,but Supposeyouusedthetechniquewedescribedabovetoassignavocalsamplewhoserootwas C 4toakeyrangefromA3toE4.ThenyouassignedthesamesampletoakeyrangefromF4to B 4.YoumightbesurprisedtofindthatwhenyoufinishedtheF4B4keyrangeandthe Keymapeditorpagereappeared,thecurrentkeyrangewouldnotbeF4toB4,butA3toB4! ThisisbecausethePC3LEautomaticallymergesadjacentkeyrangesthatareidentical(thisis donetosavememory).Therefore,someparametermustbedifferentineachadjacentkeyrange youcreateifyouwanttobuildkeymapsusingthetechniquewejustdescribed.Soifyouwantto usethesamesamplesinadjacentkeyrangeswith,forexample,minorpitchorvolume modification,youshouldmakethosechangestothecurrentsampleontheKeymapeditorpage beforeassigningthenextrange.

12-8

Keymap and Sample Editing Editing Samples

Editing Samples
ToentertheSampleEditor,firstselecttheprogramyouwishtoeditinProgrammode.Withthe programselected,presstheEditbuttontoentertheProgramEditor,thenpresstheV.A.S.T.soft buttontoentertheV.A.S.T.ProgramEditor.IntheV.A.S.T.ProgramEditortheKEYMAPpage willbeselected(ifnotpresstheKEYMAPsoftbutton.)WiththeKeyMapparameterselectedon theKEYMAPpage,presstheEditbuttonagaintoentertheKeymapEditor.OntheEditKeymap page,selecttheKeyRangeparameterandusetheAlphaWheelor/+buttonstochooseoneof theavailablekeyranges(ifthereismorethanonekeyrange.)Youcanedittheexistingsampleof akeyrange,orchooseanewsampleforthekeyrangeandeditthat.WhentheKeymap parameterisselectedyoucanholdtheEnterbuttonandtriggernotestoselectdifferentkey ranges. Ifyouwanttoselectadifferentsample,usethecursorbuttonstoselecttheSampleparameter. UsetheAlphaWheeltoselectasample.PresstheEditbuttononcemore,andyoullenterthe SampleEditor.Thesamplewillplaythroughtheeffectsofthecurrentprogram.Thenameof stereosamplesendwithanS.Touseastereosample,theStereoparametermustbesettoOnin theV.A.S.T.ProgramEditor,andtwokeymapsmustbeselected,seeTheKEYMAP Page on page 619fordetails. TherearetwosampleeditingpagesMISC(Miscellaneous)andTRIM.Thesoftbuttonsfor thesepagesarevisiblewhenyouentertheSampleEditor.Youcantriggernotesatanytime whileyoureediting,tohearyourchangesasyoumakethem.

The Miscellaneous (MISC) Page

OntheMISCpage,youllsetseveralparametersthataffectthebehaviorofthecurrentsample. Theseparametersaffecttheentiresample.Therightsideofthetoplinedisplaystheroot numberandRootKeyofthesample.Forstereosamples,LorRisdisplayedaftertheRoot# parametertoindicatethatyouareviewingparametersfortheleftorrightchannelofthesample. UsetheChan/Layerbuttonstomovebetweenchannelsofstereosamples.Althoughyoucan editparametersfortheleftandrightchannelsofasample,bothchannelscanonlybeheardif theStereoparameterissettoOnintheV.A.S.T.ProgramEditor,andthesamekeymapisselected fortheKeymap1andKeymap2parametersintheV.A.S.T.ProgramEditor.IftheStereo parameterissettoOffintheV.A.S.T.ProgramEditor,onlytheleftchannelofstereosamples willbeheardinmono.Ifthesampleispartofagroupofsampleroots,youcanalsousethe Chan/Layerbuttonstoscrollthrougheachsampleinthegroup.ArepresentativeMISCpageis shownbelow:

Parameter Root Key Number Pitch Adjust

Range of Values C -1 to G 9 Variable (depends on sample rate)

12-9

Keymap and Sample Editing Editing Samples

Parameter Volume Adjust Alternative Volume Adjust Decay Rate Release Rate Loop Switch Playback Mode Alternative Sample Sense Ignore Release

Range of Values -64.0 to 63.5 dB -64.0 to 63.5 dB 0 to 5000 dB per second 0 to 5000 dB per second Off, On Normal, Reverse, Bidirectional Normal, Reverse Off, On

Root Key Therootkeyrepresentsthekeyboardkeyatwhichthesamplewillplaybackwithout transposition(thatis,atthesamepitchasthepitchoftheoriginalsample).Usethe/+buttonsor AlphaWheeltoselectaRootKeynote,orusethealphanumericpadfollowedbytheEnter buttontoenteraRootKeybyMIDInotenumber. Pitch Adjust Usethisparametertochangethepitchofthesamplerelativetothekeyfromwhichitsplayed. Settingavalueof100cts,forexample,willcausethesampletoplaybackonesemitonehigher thannormal.Thisparameterishandyforfinetuningsamplestoeachotheriftheyreslightlyout oftune. Volume Adjust Uniformlyboostorcuttheamplitudeoftheentiresample. Alternative Start Volume Adjust (AltVolAdjust) Thisparametersetstheamplitudeofthesamplewhenthealternativestartisused.Seepage 622 foradiscussionofAltSwitch. Decay Rate Thisparameterdefineshowlongthesampletakestodecay(fade)tozeroamplitude(silence). DecayRatetakeseffectintheloopportionofthesample,afteralltheattackstagesofthe amplitudeenvelopearecomplete.DecayRateaffectseachsampleindividually,andisineffect onlywhentheamplitudeenvelopefortheprogram(theModeparameterontheAMPENVpage intheV.A.S.T.ProgramEditor)issettoNatural.IfModeisUser,thesettingsontheAMPENV pageoverridethesettingforDecayRate. Release Rate Thereleaseratedetermineshowlongthesamplewilltaketodecaytozeroamplitudewhenthe notetriggerisreleased.Thehigherthevalue,thefasterthereleaserate.Thisreleaseaffectseach sampleindividually,andisineffectonlywhentheamplitudeenvelopefortheprogram(the ModeparameterontheAMPENVpageintheV.A.S.T.ProgramEditor)issettoNatural.Inthis case,thereleasebeginsassoonasthenoteisreleased.IfModeisUser,thesettingsonthe AMPENVpageoverridethesettingforReleaseRate. Tocreateanextendedsampleloopthatwillplaydataafterthesampleslooponkeyup,setthe AlternativeStartsamplepointerafterthesampleendpointer,thensetarelativelylowvaluefor thereleaserate.

12-10

Keymap and Sample Editing Editing Samples

Loop Switch Thisparameteractivatesordeactivatestheloopingofthecurrentlyselectedsample.Whensetto On,thesamplewillloopaccordingtothesettingsontheTRIMpage.WhensettoOff,the samplewillplaythroughtoitsEndpointandstop. Playback Mode (Playback) Thisparameterletsyoumodifythedirectioninwhichthesampleisplayed.Setittoavalueof ReverseifyouwantthesampletoplayfromitsEnd(E)pointtoitsStart(S)point.Choosea valueofBidirectionaltocausethesampletoplayfromStarttoEnd,thenreversedirectionand playagainfromEndtoLoopandback,repeatinguntilthenotetriggerisreleased(thisworks onlywhentheLoopSwitchparameterissettoOn). Alternative Sample Sense (AltSense) Thisprovidesaconvenientwaytoactivatethealternativestartofasample.WhensettoNormal, thealternativestartwillbeusedwhentheAltSwitchcontrolisOn(thisissetontheKEYMAP page),orwhenthecontrolsourceassignedtoitisaboveitsmidpoint.WhensettoReverse,the alternativestartwillbeusedwhentheAltSwitchcontrolisOff,orwhenthecontrolsource assignedtoitisbelowitsmidpoint. Ignore Release (IgnRelease) WhensettoavalueofOff,thesamplewillreleasenormallywhenthenotetriggerisreleased. WhensettoOn,thenotewillnotrelease,evenwhenthenotetriggerisreleased.Thissetting shouldbeusedonlywithsamplesthatnormallydecaytosilence;nondecayingsampleswill playforeveratthissetting.ThisparameterisequivalenttotheIgnReleaseparameteronthe LAYERpage,butaffectsonlythecurrentlyselectedsample. SampleRate and NumSamples Theseparameterscannotbeedited,butshowthesamplessamplerateandthesampleslength insamples.Samplesthatarelongerthan1millionsamplesaredisplayeda1Ms. The Soft Buttons on the MISC Page
Rename

Callupthepagethatenablesyoutochangethenameofthecurrentsample.
Save

Starttheprocessofsavingthecurrentsample.
Delete

Starttheprocessofdeletingthecurrentsample.Ifthecurrentsamplehasbeensavedtoauser ID#(above1024,)thisdeletesthesamplesettingsatthatID#(thesampleaudiodatacannotbe deletedandremainsinthefactoryROMunderthesamplesoriginalfactoryID#.)Ifthecurrent samplehasbeensavedtoafactoryROMID#(11024,)thisrestoresthefactorydefaultsettings andaudiodataforthatsampleID#.

12-11

Keymap and Sample Editing Editing Samples

The TRIM Page

TheTRIMpageletsyousettheStart,AlternativeStart,Loop,andEndpointsofthecurrent sample.ThetoplineindicatestheZoomandGainsettings.ThisGainsettingdoesntaffectthe amplitudeofthesample,justtheviewinthedisplay.Therightsideofthetoplinedisplaysthe rootnumberofthesample.Ifthesampleispartofagroupofsampleroots,youcanusethe Chan/Layerbuttonstoscrollthrougheachsampleinthegroup.

ThefourparametersonthispageareStart(S),AlternativeStart(A),Loop(L),andEnd(E). Selectingtheseparametersandadjustingtheirvaluesenablesyoutomodifyhowthesample playsbackwhennotesaretriggered.Eachoftheseparameterpointsareexpressedinindividual samples.Forexample,aonesecondsampleatasamplerateof44,100Hzwouldhave44,100 valuesavailabletoadjustforeachoftheseparameters. Thereisaverticallineinthecenterofthedisplayindicatingtheplacementofthecurrent parameterinthesamplewaveform.Thesamplewaveformwillmoverelativetothelinewhen eachparameterisselectedoradjusted.Thelineremainsinthecenterofthedisplay,andthe waveformshiftstoindicatethenewpositionofthepoint.Eachparametercanbeadjustedwith the/+buttons,theAlphaWheel,orthealphanumericbuttonpadfollowedbytheEnterbutton. TheStart(S)pointdeterminesthebeginningofthecurrentsample.Youcantruncatethe beginningofthesamplebyincreasingthevalueoftheStart(S)parameter.Youmightdothisto removesilenceatthebeginningofasample,ortoremovesomeoralloftheattack.Youcant decreasetheStartpointofsamplesbelowzero. TheAlternativeStart(A)parameterletsyousetasecond,optionalstartorendpointforthe currentsample.TheAlternativeStartwillbeusedwhentheAltSwitchparameteronthe KEYMAPpageissettoOn,orwhenitssettoaspecificcontrolsourceandthatcontrolsourceis generatingavalueofmorethan+.5.(Forexample,ifyouassignMWheelasthecontrolsource fortheAltSwitchparameter,theAlternativeStartwillbeusedwhentheModWheelor whatevercontrolsourceyouhavesettosendMWheelisaboveitshalfwaypoint.)The AlternativeStartcanbesetbefore,after,oratthesamepointastheStartorEnd. IfyousettheAlternativeStartaftertheEnd,youcanextendtheplayofloopedsamples. Normally,loopedsampleswillplaythroughtotheEnd,thenwillloopbacktotheLooppoint, andcontinueloopinglikethisuntilthenoteisreleased,whentheygointotheirnormalrelease. IftheAlternativeStartissetaftertheEnd,loopedsampleswillloopinthesamewaywhilenotes aresustained.Assoonasyoureleasethenotes,however,thesampleswillplaythroughtothe AlternativeStartpointbeforegoingintorelease. TheLoop(L)parametersetsthebeginningoftheloopedportionofthecurrentsample.The LoopcanbesetatanypointbeforetheEnd,includingbeforetheStartandAlternativeStart.If youtrytomoveitaftertheEnd,theEndwillmovewithit.Whenyouresettingaloopsegment forasample,youshouldadjustboththeLoopandEndparameterssothatthetwoendsofthe waveformwouldmeet(orcomeascloseaspossible)whentheloopoccurs.Youcandothis visuallybyzoominginclosetothewaveform(untilitbecomesasingleline,)thenadjustingthe LoopandEndparametersofthewaveformuntilbothendsarethesamedistanceaboveorbelow

12-12

Keymap and Sample Editing Editing Samples

thezeropointofthedisplay(thehorizontallineinthemiddleofthewaveformdisplay.)Though adjustingthesepointsvisuallyishelpful,alwayslistentothesampleandmakethefinalsettings basedonwhatsoundsbest.Youllnoticeanaudibleclickinyoursampleloopiftheendsofthe waveformdonotmeetwheretheloopoccurs.Thecloseryoucangetthetwoendsofthe waveform,thebetterthesoundqualityofyourloopwillbe.UsingzerocrossingsfortheLoop andEndparametersmayalsohelpreduceclicksatthelooppoint,seeZeroandZero+belowfor details. TheEnd(E)parametersetsthepointatwhichthecurrentsamplewillstopplayback.Typically youllusethisparametertotrimunwantedsilenceofftheendofasample,althoughyoucanuse ittoshortenasampleasmuchasyouwant. NoteOnSavingSamples:Trimmedportionsofasamplearenotsaved.Trimmedportionsbeforethe Start(S),orAlternativeStart(A)points(whicheverhasalowervalue)willbelostuponsaving,and whicheverparameterhadalowervaluewillhaveavalueofzerothenexttimeitisloaded(valuesforall othersamplepointparameterswillbeadjustedrelatively.)TrimmedportionsaftertheAlternativeStart (A)orEnd(E)points(whicheverhasahighervalue)willbelostuponsaving.Ifyouwishtosaveacopyof theoriginaluntrimmedsample,savethetrimmedversionunderadifferentID#.Ifyousaveatrimmed sampleatitsoriginalID#,youcanalwaysrestoretheoriginalversionbydeletingthemodifiedversion thatyousaved.Todeleteasample,seeOBJECT on page 928,theDeletefunction. Zoom- and Zoom+ Thesebuttonsincreaseordecreasetheresolutionofthewaveformdisplay,enablingyoutoseea largerorsmallersegmentofthewaveformofthecurrentlyselectedsample.Thetoplineofthe displayindicatesthezoompositionintermsofafractionforexample,1/256whichindicates thenumberofindividualsampleelementsrepresentedbyeachdisplaypixel.Avalueof1/256 meansthateachpixelrepresents256individualsampleelements.Themaximumzoomsetting of1showsyouaverysmallsegmentofthesample.Theminimumsettingof1/16384showsyou thelargestpossiblesegmentofthesample.EachpressofaZoomsoftbuttonincreasesor decreasesthezoombyafactorof4. Gain- and Gain+ Thesebuttonsincreaseordecreasethemagnificationofthecurrentlydisplayedsample waveform,enablingyoutoseethewaveformingreaterorlesserdetail.Attheleftofthedisplay, youllseethemagnificationsetting,whichisexpressedindBunits.Youcanadjustthe magnificationfrom48dB(maximummagnification)to 0 dB.Thisdoesntaffecttheactual amplitudeofthesample,onlythemagnificationofitsdisplay. ThesimplestwaytothinkoftheZoomandGainbuttonsistorememberthattheZoombuttons controltheleft/rightmagnificationofthewaveform,whiletheGainbuttonscontroltheup/ downmagnification.Neitherbuttonhasanyaffectonthesoundofthesample.Youlloftenuse theZoomandGainsoftbuttonstogethertofocusinonaparticularsamplesegment,then magnifyittoseeitinclosedetail. Forexample,youmightwanttozoomouttoviewanentiresamplewaveform,todecidewhich segmentyouwanttoedit.Youcouldthenzoomintofocusonaparticularsegment.Onceyouve zoomedin,youmaywanttoboosttheGaintoenableyoutosetanewStart(S)pointwith greaterprecision,orensurethatyougetasmoothlooptransition. Zero- and Zero+ PressingtheZeroorZero+buttonswillsearchleftorrightrespectivelyforthesamplesnext zerocrossing.Azerocrossingisapointwherethesamplewaveformisneitherpositiveor negative(crossingthehorizontallineinthemiddleofthewaveformdisplay.)Thecurrently selectedparameter(Start(S),AlternativeStart(A),Loop(L),orEnd(E))willbesettothispoint inthesample.Settingtheseparameterstozerocrossingscanhelpminimizeclicksatthestart, end,orlooppointofasample.Itsbesttohaveeachofthesepointssetfirstbyadjustingeach parameterandlisteningtothesample,thenifneededsearchforanearbyzerocrossing.

12-13

Keymap and Sample Editing Editing Samples

12-14

Tutorial: Song Mode

Chapter 13 Tutorial: Song Mode

InSongmode,youcanusethePC3LEssequencertorecordsongsusingmultipleinstrument sounds.Youcaneasilychangeyoursongstempo,fixmistakes,andadjustthevolumeofeach instrument. Thefollowingguideincludesinstructionstochoosespecificinstrumentsoundsandtrack numbers,simplyasexamples.Whenyouarereadytomakeyourownsong,followthesame methodsandchooseanyinstrumentandtrackselectionthatyouwant. Thestepsbelowexplainthesimplestwaytorecord,inalinear,trackbytrackfashion.Thereare manymethodsforrecordingsongs,andtherearerecordingoptionsthatyoumaywishto changeonceyoubecomefamiliarwiththeprocess.SeetheSongmodechapterformoreoptions. Recording Overview Inthisguideyouwillbeinstructedtorecordintotracksinasong.Atrackislikealayerinasong containingtherecordedpartforoneinstrumentprogram.Youcanrecordupto16tracks,and eachcanbeseparatelyeditedoradjustedinvolumelevel(withmanyotheroptionsavailableas well).
About MIDI

InSongmodethePC3LEfunctionsasaMIDIsequencer.MIDI(MusicalInstrumentDigital Interface)isastandardizedsystemthatallowsdifferentelectronicinstrumentstoworktogether, amongothermusicaluses.AMIDIsequencerdoesntrecordthesoundofyourperformance, justmessagesthatcausetheinstrumenttoplaynotes.Whenyouplaybackasong(a.k.a.aMIDI sequence)inSongmode,thePC3LEtriggerseachofthenotesthatyouhaverecorded,sortoflike aplayerpiano.MIDIisveryusefulforrecordingsongswithelectronicinstrumentssuchasthe PC3LE,becauseyoucaneasilymakechangestorecordedsequences.Forexample,youcan changeindividualnotes,transposeparts,orchangetheinstrumentationoftracksthathave alreadybeenrecorded.SinceMIDIsequencesonlyplaybackmessagesthattriggernotes,ifyou startrecordingorplayingbackfromthemiddleofyoursong,youwillnotheartheresultof notesbeforethatpoint(suchasnotessustainingfromthepreviousbar.)Inthesecases,make suretostartplaybackorrecordingbeforethenotesthatyouwanttohear.
About The Time Position Format

Inthisguideyouwillbeinstructedtoselectspecifictimepositionsinasong.InthePC3LEs sequencer,timepositionsaremeasuredfromthebeginningofthesonginBars,Beats,andTicks. Dependentonthetimesignature,theseunitsofmeasurementscanhavedifferentvalues.In theseexampleswewillbeusinga4/4timesignatureinwhichaBarcontains4beats,andabeat contains960ticks(from0to959,seebelowformoreaboutticks.)TheSongmodeMAINpage displayssongtimeintheLocatfieldasBarsandBeats,forexampleaLocatpositionof1:3 wouldcorrespondtoBar1,Beat3.TheSongmodeBigTimepagedisplayssongtimeinlarge numbersonthetophalfofthescreenasBars,Beats,andTicks.ForexampleaBigTimeposition of1:3:480wouldcorrespondtoBar1,Beat3,Tick480(in4/4Tick480wouldbethesecond eighthnoteofthebeat.)

13-1

Tutorial: Song Mode

Barsandbeatsshouldbefamiliartermsformusicians,butticksareatermspecifictoMIDI sequencers.Ticksprovidefineresolutionwhenrecordingandeditingsequences.Forexample,if youweretoplayalongwiththesequencersmetronometorecordonenoteoneachbeatofabar, uponreviewingthesequenceyouwouldmostlikelyfindthateachnotewasnotrecorded exactlyoneachbeat,butthateachwasrecordedadifferentsmallnumberofticksawayfromthe beats.(SeePart7,TheEventList,belowforawaytoviewnotetimeposition.)Ticksallowforthe sequencertorecordthesetinydifferencesintiming,thusretainingtheoriginaltimingnuances oftheperformance.Whenlocatingnotevaluessmallerthan1beat,dividethenumberofticksin abeatbytheappropriatenumber(aquarternoteisalwaysworth960ticks,nomatterthetime signature.)Forexample,ina4/4timesignaturethereare960ticksinabeat(sinceabeatisworth aquarternotein4/4.)Tofindthevalueofan8thnote,divide960by2,sincetherearetwo8th notesinaquarternote.Divide960by4for16thnotes,by6for16thnotetriplets,by8for32nd notes,andsoon.Youcanalsouserecordquantizationwhichautomaticallymovesrecorded notestothenearestsettimedivision,suchas8thor16thnotes.(SeePart7,Quantizing,belowfor details.)

Part 1: Assign Instruments To Tracks

1. Press the Exit button until you reach the ProgramMode page. Next, press the Song mode button, located with the mode buttons to the left of the display. This will bring you to the Song mode MAIN page (see below.) Step2(below)

Step1(above)

2. 3.

On the Song mode MAIN page choose 0*New Song* in the CurSng field (if not already selected). This loads an empty song file (see above.) Use the Chan/Zone buttons (to the left of the display) to Set the RecTrk parameter to 1. This sets the track that you will be recording to (see below.)

4.

Use the cursor buttons to navigate to the Prog field and choose a program with the plus/minus buttons, alpha wheel, or by entering the desired program number with the alphanumeric pad. This sets the instrument sound for the current track. For example, choose program 1 Standard Grand to

13-2

Tutorial: Song Mode

make the first track contain the piano part for this song (see below.) You can do this quickly by entering 1 on the alphanumeric pad and pressing Enter.

Part 2: Set The Tempo

Forthisexample,wewillleavethesongatitsdefaulttimesignature,4/4(seeChapter 10,Song ModeandtheSongEditorfordetailsonsettingthetimesignature.)Followthestepsbelowtoseta tempoforyoursong.Itiseasiesttochooseyourtempobeforerecordinganytracks,butthe tempocanbeadjustedafterrecordingaswell(seeChapter 10,SongModeandtheSongEditorfor detailsonchangingthetempoafterrecording.) 1. On the Song mode MAIN page, use the cursor buttons to navigate to the Tempo field and enter a tempo. Entering the tempo with the alphanumeric pad is the easiest method if you know your desired tempo. The plus/minus buttons and alpha wheel are useful for making smaller adjustments. Tempo is set in beats per minute (BPM.) For this example, lets set a medium tempo of 100 BPM. In the Tempo field use the alphanumeric pad to enter 100 and press Enter (see below.)

Note:YoucanalsosetthetempousingtheTapTempoButton,seeTapTempoButton on page 64for details.

13-3

Tutorial: Song Mode

2.

To hear the metronome play your tempo, use the right more button to find and then press the BIG soft button. This brings you to the Song:Big Time page. On the Song:Big Time page, set the Metron parameter to Always (see below.) Make sure the PC3LEs main volume is set at a moderate level, then press the Play/Pause button to hear the metronome play the selected tempo.

3.

Press the BIG soft button again to return to the Song mode MAIN page (the MAIN soft button also works for this, but using the BIG soft button is quicker.) Now you can adjust the Tempo parameter and press the Play/Pause button to hear the metronome play the tempo. For this example we will leave our previous Tempo setting of 100.0. Once you are happy with the tempo, press the BIG soft button to return to the Song:Big Time page. Set the Metron parameter back to Rec so that you will only hear the metronome during recording (see below.) When finished, press the BIG soft button again to return to the Song mode MAIN page.

4.

Part 3: Record Your First Track, Save The Song

1. On the Song mode MAIN page, usetheChan/Zonebuttons(totheleftofthedisplay)to choosethetrackyouwishtorecordto.ThetracknumberisdisplayedintheRecTrkfield (seebelow.)Lets begin by recording to track 1, to which we have assigned a piano program.

13-4

Tutorial: Song Mode

2.

Press the Record button located on the front panel. This prepares the PC3LE for recording on the current RecTrk. The Record button lights, and on the Song mode MAIN page the right of the top line will display REC. READY, which means that the sequencer will record when the Play/Pause button is pressed (see below.)

3.

Press the Play/Pause button located on the front panel. The metronome will play for 1 bar and then recording will begin (see Chapter 10,SongModeandtheSongEditorfordetailsonsetting metronomecountoffoptions.) Play your part for the current track, when finished, press the Stop button on the front panel to stop recording. The Save Changes screen will be displayed where you can retry the last performance of recording, save the song with the last recorded performance, or compare your new performance with the last saved version of the song. For this example we will name the song My Song under ID# 1025. See below for an explanation of this page:

4.

Soft Button Functions On the Save Changes Page: ThePlyNewsoftbuttonallowsyoutoplaythesongwithyourlatestrecordedperformance.You willlikelywanttohearthisfirst. PressingPlyOldwillplaythecurrentsong,minustheperformancethatyoujustrecorded.You cantogglebetweenPlayOldandPlayNewwithoutrestartingthesongbypressingeither buttonwhilethesongisplaying.Thisisusefultocheckifyourlastperformancewasbetteror worsethanwhatwaspreviouslysaved(ifanythingwaspreviouslysaved.) TheLocatefieldallowsyouchooseastarttimefortheoldornewplayback.Thisisusefulwhen youjustwanttohearacertainpartofthesongwithoutlisteningtothewholething.ThePlaying fielddisplayswhethertoNEWorOLDdataisplaying. StophaltstheplaybackofeithertheOldortheNewversionofthesongyouarecurrently auditioning.ThisalsoresetsthesongsstartlocationtoeitherthedefaultBar1,Beat1value,or towhateverlocationyoudefinedintheLocatefield.

13-5

Tutorial: Song Mode

PressingRetryrestartsrecordingfromthesamepointyoulaststartedrecordingfrom. Yessavesthesongwiththeperformanceyoujustrecorded.Whateverwasplayedbackwhen youpressedPlayNewwillbetheversionofthesongsavedwhenyoupressYes.Thesaveas dialogwillbedisplayed:

UsetheAlphaWheel,/+buttons,orAlphanumericPadtochooseafreeID#locationtosavethe song,orchooseausedID#locationtooverwriteapreviouslysavedsongwithyournewversion. For this example we will save the song under ID# 1025 (seeabove.) Whenoverwritingasongfile,the saveasdialogdisplaysReplacefollowedbythenameofthefilebeingreplaced.PressSave tosavethesongwiththecurrentname,orCanceltoreturntothepreviousscreen. PressRenameifyouwouldliketochangethesongsname.Thisbringsyoutothe SongMode:namepage.For this example we will rename the song My Song (seebelow.)Formore detailedinstructions,seetheEditingConventionschapter,SavingandNamingsection.

IfyoudecidenottosaveorrenameontheSong:SaveChangespage,pressingtheNosoftbutton returnsyoutotheSongmodepageinwhichyouwerelastrecording.Changestothecurrent songarenotsaved,thoughthesequencerwillrememberchangestocertainsettingsfromthe MAINandBIGpages.ThesesettingsareTempo,Merge/EraseMode,Locate,trackmutestatus, TimeIn,TimeOut,SongEnd,Loop,Recmode,andMetron.Topermanentlysavethesechanges withthesong,makesuretochooseSavefromthesoftbuttonmenubeforepoweringoffor loadinganewsong.Alternatively,youwillbepromptedtosavethesechangesuponloadinga newsongiftheMAINpagesettingswerechangedwhilerecordingorwithrecordingarmed,or ifanyoftheBIGpagesettingswerechanged. About ID#s Whensaving,youmustchooseanID#.AnID#givesyouawaytolocateasongasidefromits name(youcanstoreupto2,560uniqueID#sforeachobjecttype:songs,setups,programs,etc., thoughmanyID#sarealreadyusedforfactoryROMobjects.)ID#salsoallowyoutosavesongs withthesamenameunderdifferentID#s,andrenamethematalatertimeifdesired.Choosean unusedID#tosaveanewsong.ThenextavailableunusedID#isautomaticallyselectedwhen

13-6

Tutorial: Song Mode

editingafactoryROMsong.Wheneditingasongthathasbeenstoredinusermemory(any originallyunusedID#,)theeditedsongsID#isautomaticallyselected.Thisassumesthatyou wishtoreplacetheexistingsong,butyoucanchooseanotherID#ifdesiredtosaveanewcopy. ChooseausedID#toreplaceanexistingsavedsong.IfyoureplaceafactoryROMsong,youcan reverttotheoriginalsongbydeletingthesongusingtheSongModeDelete softbutton.

Part 4: Record Additional Tracks

Whenyouarehappywithyourfirsttrackandyouhavesavedyoursongsofar,moveonto addingotherinstrumentpartsonothertracks.Youcanrecordupto16tracks. 1. On the Song mode MAIN page, usetheChan/Zonebuttons(totheleftofthedisplay)toSet theRecTrkparametertoanunusedtracknumber(forexample,track2.)

2.

Set the instrument sound for the current track. Use the cursor buttons to navigate to the Prog field and choose a program with the plus/minus buttons, alpha wheel, or by entering the desired program number with the alphanumeric pad. Thissetstheinstrumentsoundforthecurrenttrack.For example, choose program 105 P-Bass to make the next track contain the bass part for this song (see below.) This would be useful to play a bass part that matches the root notes of your left hand piano part from track 1.

3.

Follow the same steps in Part 3 above (starting on step 2) to start and stop recording, and review, save or discard your performance. When saving the song with your new tracks recorded, press the Save soft button on the SongMode:save as page in order to replace the currently saved song with your new version. Repeat the steps above with different track and program numbers to add additional instrument parts to your song.

4.

13-7

Tutorial: Song Mode

Part 5: Fixing Mistakes

ForeachtrackinSongmode,youcanfixmistakesinyourperformancewithoutrerecordingthe entireperformance.Herewewilldescribethemethodthatiseasiestforfixingspecificpassages inatrack.(Forawaytofixsinglenotes,seeSongEditor:TheEVENTPage on page 1031in Chapter 10,SongModeandtheSongEditor.) 1. On the Song mode MAIN page, usetheChan/Zonebuttons(totheleftofthedisplay)toSet theRecTrkparametertothetrackthatyouwanttofix.Forexample,letsfixtrack1(see below.)

2.

Set the Mode parameter to Erase (see below.) This causes previously recorded notes to be erased when a track is being recorded into.

3. 4.

Press the BIG soft button to go to the Big Time page. On the Big Time page, set the RecMode parameter to PunchIn. This causes recording to only take place between the times set in the Time In and Time Out fields.

13-8

Tutorial: Song Mode

5.

Set times for the Time In and Time Out fields to select the time to fix. For this example we will fix bar 3 (see below.)

Note:Ifyouneedtofixasectionwhichisntexactlywithinonebaroranevendivisionofbeats, usethefollowingmethodtofindyourTime In and Time Out points:Usethebigtimelocation numbersonthetopofthepagetofindatimewherethefirstnotesplayed(whenyoupressplay/ pause)arethenotesthatyouwishtoreplace.EnterthislocationintheTimeInfield.Next,use thebigtimelocationnumbersonthetopofthepagetofindatimewherethefirstnotesplayed (whenyoupressplay/pause)arethefirstnotesthatyouwishtokeepafterthenotesthatyou wishtoreplace.EnterthislocationintheTimeOutfield. 6. Use the big time location numbers on the top of the page and set a time before the area you want to replace. This will be where you start playback of the song in order to re-record the desired section. Leave enough time (usually a bar or two) so that you will have time to prepare before the section you are replacing plays. For this example we will set our start time to 1 :1 :0, because it is two bars before bar 3 (see below.)

7.

Press the Record button, then the Play/Pause button located on the front panel. Play your new part when the song reaches the part you want to replace. This technique is called punching in. You will often get more natural sounding results if you play along with the song before the part that you are fixing. Doing this allows you to match your performance style (loudness, timing, phrasing) with what has already been recorded. Because of your settings in steps 4, 5 and 6, no extra notes will be recorded outside of the time that you want to replace. Press the Stop button when you are done. You will be able to review and save your changes just as in Step 4 of Part 3 (see above.) Remember to set the RecMode parameter back to Linear when you are done if you wish to record in the standard way again (as in Part 3, above.) This is done on the Big Time page (see below.)

8. 9.

13-9

Tutorial: Song Mode

Part 6: Adjusting The Volume Of Each Instrument

Adjustthevolumeofaninstrumentbyadjustingthevolumeofthetrackcontainingthat instrumentprogram.Whileyoursongisplaying,youcanusetheVolparameterontheSong modeMAINpagetoadjustthevolumeforthetrackcurrentlysetintheRecTrkparameter.To permanentlystoreyourvolumesettingswiththesong,youmuststoreaninitialvolumeforeach track.Letsusethesongwecreatedinthepartsaboveasanexample.Letsadjustthevolumeof track1andstorethevalueasaninitialvolumesetting: 1. OntheSongmodeMAINpage,use the Chan/Zone buttons (to the left of the display) to Set the RecTrk parameter to track 1.

2.

Find the desired volume level by adjusting the Vol parameter during playback, then press stop. For this example, lets set the Vol parameter to 80.

3.

Use the left and right more soft buttons at the bottom corners of the display to find the MIXER soft button and press it (see below.) This brings you to the Song:MIXER page.

13-10

Tutorial: Song Mode

4.

On the Song:MIXER page, press the Keep soft button to store initial values for all tracks (see below.)

5.

On the Song:MIXER page, press the Done soft button or the front panel Exit button. You will be asked to save changes to your song, just as in Part 3, step 4 of this guide (see above.) Saving your song completes the process of storing initial volume settings with your song.

PressingtheKeepsoftbuttonontheSong:MIXER page stores initialvaluesofvolume,pan,and programnumberforeachtrack.Initialvaluesarethesettingsthatwillbeusedwhenyoursong isplayedbackfromthebeginning.Volume,pan,andprogramsettingscanchangeautomatically overthecourseofthesongifyouchangethemwhilerecording,butpressingtheKeepbutton storesthecurrentvalueforeachsettingtoberecalledatthesongsbeginning. 6. Follow the above procedure in steps 4 and 5 to store current values as initial values after changing any volume, pan, or program parameters.

Note:Mostuserswillwanttostoreinitialvaluesasdescribedabove.Advancedusersmaynotwantto storeinitialvaluesforeverytrack.Fordetailsonsavinganinitialvalueforasingletrackonly,seethe Program,Volume,andPansectionsintheSongMode:TheMAINPage section on page 101. Part 6 b: Recording Volume Automation Youcanalsorecordvolumeautomation.Volumeautomationisthemethodofrecordingaseries ofvolumeeventmessagesthatchangeatracksVolparameteroverthecourseofthesong.This isusefulforfadinginstrumentsinoroutofasong,oradjustinginstrumentvolumesforonly specificsectionsofasong. 1. On the Song mode MAIN page, make sure the Mode parameter is set to Merge (see below.) (Also make sure the RecMode parameter has been set to Linear, as in Part 5, step 9, above.)

13-11

Tutorial: Song Mode

2. 3.

Press the Record button, then press Play/Pause. Select the Vol parameter and adjust it with the alpha wheel while the sequencer is recording. Any changes to the Vol parameter will be recorded as data in the current track.

4.

When you are finished, press the Stop button. You will be able to review and save your changes just as in Step 4 of Part 3 (see above.)

Part 6 c: Erasing Volume Automation Ifyouvesavedasongwithvolumeautomationandyouwishtochangeorremoveit afterwords,followthestepsbelowtoeraseaselectionofvolumeautomation: 1. In Song mode, press the Edit button with anything except the Prog parameter selected. This brings you to the current songs EditSong:COMMON page.

2.

On the EditSong:COMMON page, press the TRACK soft button (see below.) This brings you to the EditSong:TRACK page.

13-12

Tutorial: Song Mode

3.

On the EditSong:TRACK page, set the Function parameter to Erase (see below.)

4. 5.

Use the Chan/Zone buttons (to the left of the display) to choose the track to erase volume automation from. You can view the selected track number in the upper right corner of the screen. Set the Events parameter to Controllers (see below.)

6.

Set the Controller parameter to Volume. You can do this quickly by selecting the Controller field, entering 7 on the alphanumeric pad, and pressing Enter. Make sure the LoVal parameter is set to 0 and the Hi parameter is set to 127 (see below.)

13-13

Tutorial: Song Mode

7.

Use the From and To parameters to set the range of time from which you want to remove your volume automation. You can play the song and watch the Locate field to determine these times. For this example, lets say that we want to erase volume automation from bar 3 (see below.)

8.

Press the Go soft button to delete the selected volume automation. A screen will appear reading Erase Operation Completed! Press the OK soft button to return to the EditSong:TRACK page (see below.)

9.

Once back on the EditSong:TRACK page, press the Play/Pause button to hear the result. Next, press the Exit button twice to return to the Song mode MAIN page. You will be presented with the Song: Save Changes page, where you can decide whether or not to save the changes you have made.

10. To re-record volume automation, follow the steps in Part 6 b, above.

13-14

Tutorial: Song Mode

Part 7: Learning More About Song Mode

Factory ROM Songs ThePC3LEincludesanumberofprerecordedsongsstoredinthefactoryROM.Investigate thesesongstoseethepossibilitiesofSongmode.Feelfreetoeditoraddtoanyofthesesongsin ordertolearnmoreaboutsongmode.Youcansavethedemosongsyouveexperimentedwith undernewIDnumberssothatyoucancomparebetweenyourversionandtheoriginal.Also,if youreplaceafactoryROMsong,youcanreverttotheoriginalsongbydeletingthesongusing theSongModeDelete softbutton. Quantizing Quantizingisamethodofadjustingthetimingofnotesrecordedintoasequence.Itcanbeused toadjustnotetiminginordertofixmistakesinaperformance,ortomakenotesadheretoa stricttiminggridasastylisticchoice(asinmuchmodernelectronicmusic.)Quantizednotes havetechnicallyperfecttimingbuttendtosoundlesslikeahumanperformance.Quantization canbeappliedautomaticallytoeachtrackasitisrecorded,oritcanbeappliedafterrecordingto onlyspecificselections.FordetailsseetheQuantparameteronpage 1017intheSongMode:The MISCPagesection,andtheQuantizefunctiononpage 1027intheSongEditor:TrackFunctions section. Creating Loops With The Big Time Page OntheBigTimepageyoucansetthesequencertoloopaselectionofbars.SettheLoop parametertoLoop,andsetatimefortheTimeInandTimeOutparameters.Now,pressing Play/Pauseonthefrontpanelwillcauseyourselectiontoplayrepeatedlyandseamlessly.You willmostcommonlywanttosetyourTimeInandTimeOutpointstoequalanevennumberof barssuchas2,4,8,etc.Recordingintoaloopedsectionofbarsisacommontechniquefor recordingsequencebasedmusic.Forexample,withadrumprogramselectedforatrack,you couldrecordadrumpartbyplayingonedrumsoundeachtimethrougha2barloop,untilthe entire2bardrumbeatsoundscomplete. Next,youcouldsettheRecModeparametertoUnloop.(TousetheUnLoopsetting,theLoop parametermustbesettoLoop,andalooplengthmustbesetwiththeTimeInandTimeOutparameters ontheBIGpage.)WiththeRecModeparametersettoUnloop,anyexistingtrackswillbeplayed backasiftheywereloopingfromtheTimeIntotheTimeOutpoint,buttheyareactuallybeing rerecordedlinearlyoverabsoluteBarsandBeatsuntilyoupressStop.UnLoopallowsyouto recordalineartrackoverashortloopingsectionwithoutfirsthavingtocopythesectionover andoveragaintoachieveanewdesiredSonglength.TheEndpointoftheSongisextendedto thedownbeatofthe(empty)BarimmediatelyfollowingthelastBaryouwererecordingwhen Stopwaspressed.SeeRecMode on page 1011fordetails. Youcanalsocopy,paste,duplicate,ordeletesectionsofthesongifyouwanttoreusesectionsor makesectionsshorterorlonger(seeSongEditingAndStructureWithTrackFunctionsbelowfor details.)Keepinmindthatyoucanloopanylengthofasong,andrecordintoaloopwith multiplelayersofinstrumentsondifferenttracks.Thisisalsoacommonmethodforrecording sequencebasedmusic,inwhichyoucreateeachsectionofyoursongfromloopedsequences, andthenarrangetheloopsintothedesiredorderforyoursongsstructure.Afterwardsyoucan makevariationstoeachsectionifyouwantthesongtohavelessofaloopedsound.

13-15

Tutorial: Song Mode

Song Editing And Structure With Track Functions Insongmodeyoucaneasilycopypartofasequencetoanothertimeinthesong,orfromone tracktoanother.Youcanalsocopyasectionofalltracksatonceinordertoduplicateor structureentiresectionsofyoursong,suchasverseandchorussections.Youcanalsochoose groupsofnotestoerase,orentirebarsoftimetodelete.Therearemanybasicandadvanced editingfunctionsavailable.FordetailsseeSongEditor:TrackFunctions on page 1024in Chapter 10,SongModeandtheSongEditor. Program Changes Ifyoursongrequiresmorethan16instrumentparts,onemethodofachievingthisiswith programchanges.Forexample,letssayyouveusedall16tracksbutdesireanewinstrument forthenextsectionofthesong.Ifthereisatrackwhoseinstrumentisnotneededinthenew section,thistracksprogramcouldchangetoanewinstrumentsoundforthesection,andthen changebacktotheoriginalinstrumentsoundafterthesection.Todothis,simplypressRecord andPlay/PauseandthenchangetheProgparameterontheSong mode MAIN page to the new program at the desired time. This can be done most precisely if you know the ID# of the program you wish to change to. Enter the number with the alphanumeric pad and then press Enter when you want to make the change. You wont be able to see the numbers youve entered until you press Enter,butyoucan pressCanceltostartoverifyouvemadeamistakeorifyouareunsurewhatyouveentered. Use the same method if you would like to change the program back to the original after the new section. The Event List Songmodeisapowerfulcompositiontoolbecausejustaboutanythingthatyoudoonthe PC3LEisrecordedintoatrackaseventmessages.Oncerecorded,theseeventscanbealtered, copiedorremoved.Eachtrackhasaneventlist,containingalloftheeventsrecordedintoa track,fromwhichtheycanbeviewedandedited.FordetailsseeSongEditor:TheEVENT Page on page 1031inChapter 10,SongModeandtheSongEditor.

13-16

Tutorials: Setup Mode

Chapter 14 Tutorials: Setup Mode

In This Chapter: TheSetupEditor ............................................................... 143 UsingAndEditingASplitProgramSetup .......................................... 144 UsingSetupModeToPlayLayersOfInstruments .................................... 148 AdjustingTheVolumeAndPanOfZones .......................................... 1410 AssigningMultipleKnobsToControlVolumeInDifferentZones ....................... 1412 AssigningASingleKnobToControlRelativeVolumeInDifferentZones ................. 1416 AssigningASingleKnobtoCrossfadeBetweenTheVolumeOfDifferentZones ............ 1424 SwitchBetweenZonesBasedOnPlayedKeyboardVelocity ............................ 1429 CreatingANewSetup ......................................................... 1432 BasicsOfUsingRiffs .......................................................... 1435 AddingARiff,SyncRiffs .................................................... 1435 TransposingARiffAsItIsTriggered ........................................... 1442 UsingASingleSongForMultipleRiffs......................................... 1446 RiffTroubleshooting ........................................................ 1452 UseSetupmodetoselect,play,edit,andsavesetups.ToenterSetupmodepress the Setup mode button, located with the mode buttons to the left of the display. This brings you to the Setup mode main page:

14-1

Tutorials: Setup Mode

Asetupismadeupof1to16Zones,eachofwhichusesaprogram(instrumentsound)from Programmode.Withasetupyoucanplayupto16differentinstrumentsoundsatonce,either asseparateinstrumentsfromdifferentkeyranges(knownassplitsetups,)aslayersof instrumentsfromthesamekeys(knownaslayeredsetups,)orusingamixofbothmethods. Eachzonecanalsotriggerariff,whichissequencethatcanbesyncedwithotherriffsor transposedasitistriggered. Thefollowingexampleswillexplainhowtouseandediteachtypeofsetup.Theseexamples includeinstructionstochoosespecificprogramsandchoosespecifickeyranges.Youcanfollow thesameguidestomakeyourowncustomsetupsbychoosinganycombinationofprograms andkeyranges.Ineachtutorial,readthetextforeachstepandlookattheexampledisplay screenshotsasaguideforfollowingeachstep.Importantparametersthatarementionedineach stepwillbecircledontheexamplescreenshots. ThepresetsetupsincludedwiththePC3LEincludesplitandlayeredsetups,aswellassome setupsthatusemoreadvancedfeatureslikeriffsorassignableswitchesandknobs.Tolearn moreaboutthesefeaturesseeChapter 7,SetupMode. ANoteAboutPrograms:EachZoneinasetupcontainsaprogramfromthePC3LEsProgram mode.ThePC3LEcomeswithover1000programs,andyoucanalsoedittheseprograms.When choosingaprogramforasetup,manyuserswillbesatisfiedusingoneoftheincludedprograms asis.Someusersmayalsowishtoalterthepropertiesofaprogrambeyondtheoptionsgivenin Setupmode.Inthesecases,itisnecessarytoedittheprogramfromProgrammode.SeeThe ProgramEditor on page 69formoredetails.

14-2

Tutorials: Setup Mode The Setup Editor

The Setup Editor

Ineachofthefollowingguides,youwillbeusingtheSetupEditor to make changes to the currently selected setup.Open the Setup EditorfromSetupmodebypressingtheEdit button on the front panel. Use the soft buttons at the bottom of the display to select the various Setup Editor pages. Use the more soft buttons on the bottom of the display to scroll through pages of soft buttons. Thetoplineofthe displaysaysSetupMode:withthenameofthecurrentSetupEditorpageaswellasthe numberofthecurrentZone.UsetheChan/Zonebuttonstotheleftofthedisplaytoselectthe currentZone.ThecurrentandtotalnumberofZonescanbeviewedintheupperrightcornerof eachscreenintheSetupEditor.

PresstheExit button on the front panel to exit the Setup Editor and return to the Setup mode main page. If you have made any changes to the setup, you will be presented with the message This setup has been edited... (see below.) You are given a choice of soft buttons: Press Rename to rename the setup before saving, press No toreturntotheSetupmodemainpagewithoutsaving,pressYestochoosean ID#andsavethesetup,pressCanceltoreturntotheSetupEditor.

About ID#s Whensaving,youmustchooseanID#.AnID#givesyouawaytolocateasetupasidefromits name(youcanstoreupto2,560uniqueID#sforeachobjecttype:setups,programs,songs,etc., thoughmanyID#sarealreadyusedforfactoryROMobjects.)ID#salsoallowyoutosavesetups withthesamenameunderdifferentID#s,andrenamethematalatertimeifdesired.Choosean unusedID#tosaveanewsetup.ThenextavailableunusedID#isautomaticallyselectedwhen editingafactoryROMsetup.Wheneditingasetupthathasbeenstoredinusermemory(any originallyunusedID#,)theeditedsetupsID#isautomaticallyselected.Thisassumesthatyou wishtoreplacetheexistingsetup,butyoucanchooseanotherID#ifdesiredtosaveanewcopy. ChooseausedID#toreplaceanexistingsavedsetup.IfyoureplaceafactoryROMsetup,you canreverttotheoriginalsetupbyusingtheDeletesoftbuttonintheSetupEditor.See Chapter 5,EditingConventionsformoredetailsonsavingandnaming.

14-3

Tutorials: Setup Mode Using And Editing A Split Program Setup

Using And Editing A Split Program Setup

OneofthesimplestusesofSetupmodeistocreateasplitsetup,inwhichdifferentrangesofthe keyboardareassignedtoplaydifferentinstrumentprograms.ThePC3LEcansplitthekeyboard intoamaximumof16differentinstrumentprograms,thoughoftenasplitoftwoprogramsis mostuseful.Followthesestepstolearnaboutusingsplitprogramsetups: Part 1: Load The Example Setup 1. Press the Exit button until you reach the ProgramMode page. Next, press the Setup mode button, located with the mode buttons to the left of the display. This will bring you to the Setup mode main page. Use the - / + buttons or Alpha Wheel to select the setup 38 Jazz Bass/Piano or use the alphanumeric pad to enter 38 and press Enter (see below.)

2.

Thissetupcontainsapianoprogramontheupperoctavesofthekeyboard,andanuprightbass programontheloweroctavesofthekeyboard.

Note:ThepresetsplitsetupsincludedwiththePC3LEallincludethewordSplitoraslash(/)in theirnames,suchas39FretlessBassSplit,and40ZepKB3/Pianet.

14-4

Tutorials: Setup Mode Using And Editing A Split Program Setup

Part 2: Changing The Split Point (Setting Zone Key Range) YoucanusetheSetupEditortochangethesplitpointonthekeyboard,thepointwhereone Zonestopsandtheotherbegins.Forexample,letschangethesplitpointofthesetup38 Jazz Bass/Piano.38 Jazz Bass/Piano has2Zones(whichwewillseeuponenteringtheSetupEditor.) EachZoneinasetupcontainsaninstrumentprogram.TheprogramsinthissetupareAC BuzzerBassandGrandEvans.Letschangethesplitpointofthissetuptohappenanoctave higher.Wewillhaveanoctavemoreofhighbassnotesandanoctavelessoflowpianonotes. ThisisdonebyadjustingthekeyrangeforeachZone: 1. With the setup 38 Jazz Bass/Piano selected, press the Edit button on the front panel. This will bring you to the CH/PROG page of the setup editor (see below.) Step 2

Step 3 2. On the CH/PROG page use the Chan/ZonebuttonstotheleftofthedisplaytoselectZone1 (seeabove.)You can view the number of the selected Zone in the top right corner of screen. In the Program field you can view the instrument Program for the current Zone. We can see that the program for Zone 1 of this setup is 235ACBuzzerBass. From the CH/PROG page, press the KEYVEL soft button on the bottom of the screen (see above.) This brings you to the KEY-VEL page where you can view the key range for the current Zone. On the KEY-VEL page we will adjust the key range for Zone 1. You can see that Zone 1 is still selected, displayed in the top right corner of screen (see below.)

3.

4.

On the KEY-VEL page for Zone 1, use the cursor buttons to highlight the HiKeyfield. This field sets the upper limit of the key range for Zone 1, which contains the bass program. Lets make the upper range of this Zone end an octave higher by changing the HiKeyfield from D#3 to D#4. To do this, selecttheHiKeyfield, hold the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad andplayD#4

14-5

Tutorials: Setup Mode Using And Editing A Split Program Setup

(threehalfstepsabovemiddleC,whichisC4)onthePC3LEskeyboard(seebelow.) You can also set the desired key name in the HiKey field by using the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons.

5.

Next, use the Chan/ZonebuttonstoselectZone2,viewablein the top right corner of screen. ThiswillbringyoutotheKEY-VEL page for Zone 2(seebelow.)

6.

On the KEY-VEL page for Zone 2, use the cursor buttons to highlight the LoKeyfield. This field sets the lower limit of the key range for Zone 2, which contains the piano program. Lets make the lower end of this Zone end an octave higher by changing the LoKeyfield from E3 to E4. To do this, select theLoKeyfield, hold the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad andplayE4(theE twowholestepsabovemiddleC)onthePC3LEskeyboard(seebelow.)You can also set the desired key name in the LoKey field by using the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons. Usingthepiano keyboardtosethighandlownoterangesisanexampleofintuitiveentry.Youcanread moreaboutintuitiveentryinChapter 3,UserInterfaceBasics.

UsethesamemethodstosetthekeyrangeforanyZone.To finish, press the Exit button to the right of the display to exit the Setup Editor and save your changes to this setup under a new ID#. SeeTheSetup EditorsectionatthebeginningofthischapterfordetailsonsavingwhenyouexittheSetup Editor.

14-6

Tutorials: Setup Mode Using And Editing A Split Program Setup

Part 3: Creating A New Split Setup From An Existing Split Setup Itisconvenienttouseanexistingsplitsetupasatemplateforanewsplitsetup.Thisallowsyou toeasilycreateanewsplitsetupbyusingthesplitpointfromanexistingsetupandusing differentprogramsforeachZone.Forexample,letsusethesetup38 Jazz Bass/Piano,whichuses acousticbassandacousticpianoprograms,tocreateasplitsetupwhichuseselectricbassand electricpianoprograms: 1. If you are not already in Setup mode, press the Exit button until you reach the ProgramMode page, then press the Setup mode button, located with the mode buttons to the left of the display. This will bring you to the Setup mode main page. Use the - / + buttons or Alpha Wheel to select the setup 38 Jazz Bass/Piano or use the alphanumeric pad to enter 38 and press Enter. With the setup 38 Jazz Bass/Piano selected, press the Edit button on the front panel. This will bring you to the CH/PROG page of the setup editor. Use the Chan/Zone buttons to the left of the display to select Zone 1. You can view the number of the selected Zone in the top right corner of screen. On the CH/PROG page for Zone 1, select the Program field. Select the program 105 P-Bass by entering 105 and pressing the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad (see below.) You can also set the desired program in the Program field by using the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons.

2. 3. 4. 5.

6. 7.

Next, use the Chan/Zone buttons to the left of the display to select Zone 2. On the CH/PROG page for Zone 2, select the Program field. Select the program 22 Sweet Loretta EP by entering 22 and pressing the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad (see below.) You can also set the desired program in the Program field by using the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons.

Nowtheplayingthelowerhalfofthekeyboardwillproduceelectricbass,andplayingthe upperhalfofthekeyboardwillproduceelectricpiano.To finish, press the Exit button to the right of the display to exit the Setup Editor and save your changes to this setup under a new ID#. SeeTheSetup EditorsectionatthebeginningofthischapterfordetailsonsavingwhenyouexittheSetup Editor.

14-7

Tutorials: Setup Mode Using Setup Mode To Play Layers Of Instruments

Using Setup Mode To Play Layers Of Instruments

InasetupyoucansetZonekeyrangesthatoverlap.Thiscreateslayersofinstrumentprograms thatareplayedfromthesamekeyrange.Asanexample,letsusethesetup 38 Jazz Bass/Piano, a splitsetupofbassandpiano,andaddalayerofstringstothepianosection: 1. Press the Exit button until you reach the ProgramMode page. Next, press the Setup mode button, located with the mode buttons to the left of the display. This will bring you to the Setup mode main page. Use the - / + buttons or Alpha Wheel to select the setup 38 Jazz Bass/Piano or use the alphanumeric pad to enter 38 and press Enter (see below.)

2.

3.

With the setup 38 Jazz Bass/Piano selected, press the Edit button on the front panel. This will bring you to the CH/PROG page of the setup editor (see below.)

4.

On the CH/PROG page use the Chan/ZonebuttonstotheleftofthedisplaytoselectZone2. You can view the number of the selected Zone in the top right corner of screen. In the Program field you can view the instrument Program for the current Zone. We can see that the program for Zone 2 of this setup is the piano program 8GrandEvans (see below.)

14-8

Tutorials: Setup Mode Using Setup Mode To Play Layers Of Instruments

5.

Press the more soft button (see A below) on the bottom left of the display twice to scroll left two pages of soft buttons and find the DupZn (duplicate Zone) button. Press the DupZn button to duplicate Zone 2 and create Zone 3 (see B below.) You will see the message Zone duplicated, and you will be brought to the CH/PROG page for Zone 3 (see C below.)

A C:

6.

On the CH/PROG page for Zone 3, select the Program field. Select the program 198 Studio Strings by entering 198 and pressing the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad (see below.)

Nowplayingtheupperhalfofthekeyboardwillproducepianoandstrings.To finish, press the Exit button to the right of the display to exit the Setup Editor and save your changes to this setup under a new ID#. SeeTheSetupEditorsectionatthebeginningofthischapterfordetailsonsavingwhen youexittheSetupEditor. AlternativelyyoucancreatealayerbyadjustingthekeyrangeofexistingZonestomatch anotherZone.YoucanalsocreateapartiallayerbyadjustingaZoneskeyrangetoonlycoincide withsomeofanotherZoneskeyrange.TherearemanyadvancedusesofSetupmodeto manipulatelayeredZones.YoucanmakeaZoneonlyrespondtocertainvelocityranges,sothat forexamplealayeredZoneisonlyheardwhenplayingloudly(seepage 1429.)Youcanalso adjustthevolumeofalayeredZonewithaKnoborexpressionpedal(seepage 1412,)ormute andunmutealayeredZonewithaassignableswitchorfootswitch(SeeSWPedal1&2,Arp. switch,Arp.latchsw,Switch110 on page 714and149onTheControllerDestination List on page 718.)

14-9

Tutorials: Setup Mode Adjusting The Volume And Pan Of Zones

Adjusting The Volume And Pan Of Zones

YouwilllikelywanttoadjustthevolumeofZonesinasetup.Youcanalsoadjustthepan(left/ rightspeakerposition)ofeachZone.Eachsettingiseasilycontrolledinthesetupeditor.For moredetailsofthesettingsonthispageseeThePan/Volume(PAN/VOL)Page on page 726in Chapter 7,SetupMode. Letslookatthesetup38 Jazz Bass/Piano andadjustthevolumeandpanofZone2which containsthepianoprogram8GrandEvans: 1. If you are not already in Setup mode, press the Exit button until you reach the ProgramMode page, then press the Setup mode button, located with the mode buttons to the left of the display. This will bring you to the Setup mode main page. Next, with the setup 38 Jazz Bass/Piano selected in setup mode, press the Edit button on the front panel. This will bring you to the CH/PROG page of the setup editor (see below.)

Step 2 2. From the CH/PROG page, press the PANVOL soft button on the bottom of the screen (see above.) This brings you to the PAN-VOL page where you can view key and velocity ranges for the current Zone (see below.)

3.

On the PAN-VOL page, use the Chan/Zone buttons to the left of the display to select Zone 2. You can view the number of the selected Zone in the top right corner of screen (see below.)

14-10

Tutorials: Setup Mode Adjusting The Volume And Pan Of Zones

4.

Use the cursor buttons to select the EntryVolume field. The volume for this Zone is already at its maximum value 127. Lets use the Alpha Wheel to turn this parameter down to 90 (see below.) Now the Zone will play the piano program 8GrandEvansat a lower volume than Zone 1.

Next,letsadjustthePan(left/rightspeakerposition)ofZone2: 5. On the PAN-VOL page of Zone 2, use the cursor buttons to select the EntryPan field. Use the Alpha Wheel to turn this parameter to 127 (see below.) Now the Zone will play the piano program fromonlytherightspeaker. (For the EntryPan parameter, a value of 64 plays the program at equal volume from left and right speakers. A value of 0 plays the program from only the left speaker, and a value of 127 plays the program from only the right speaker. Values in between make the sound appear to come from a position between the left and right speakers.)

UsethesamemethodstoadjustvolumeandpanforanyZone.To finish, press the Exit button to the right of the display to exit the Setup Editor and save your changes to this setup under a new ID#. See TheSetupEditorsectionatthebeginningofthischapterfordetailsonsavingwhenyouexitthe SetupEditor.

14-11

Tutorials: Setup Mode Assigning Multiple Knobs To Control Volume In Different Zones

Assigning Multiple Knobs To Control Volume In Different Zones

YoucanassignadifferentKnobtoeachZoneinaSetupsothatyoucaneasilyadjustthevolume ofeachZone.Forexample,letseditthesetup38 Jazz Bass/Piano, which has a bass program on Zone 1 and a piano program on Zone 2. 1. If you are not already in Setup mode, press the Exit button until you reach the ProgramMode page, then press the Setup mode button, located with the mode buttons to the left of the display. This will bring you to the Setup mode main page. Next, press 38 and then Enter on the alphanumeric pad to select the setup 38 Jazz Bass/Piano (see below.) You can also select setups by using the - / + buttons or Alpha Wheel.

2.

Next, with the setup 38 Jazz Bass/Piano selected in setup mode, press the Edit button on the front panel. This will bring you to the CH/PROG page of the setup editor (see below.)

Step 3 3. From the CH/PROG page, press the CTRLS soft button on the bottom of the screen (see above.) This brings you to the Controllers page where you can view and assign physical controllers to destinations for the current Zone.

14-12

Tutorials: Setup Mode Assigning Multiple Knobs To Control Volume In Different Zones

4.

On the Controllers page, Zone 1 will be selected. You can view the number of the selected Zone in the top right corner of screen (see below.) If you are not on Zone 1, use the Chan/Zone buttons to the left of the display to select Zone 1.

5.

On the Controllers page, the Controller field will be highlighted (if not, select the Controller field with the cursor buttons.) Make sure the LED to the left of Timbre Knob is lit, if it is not, press the Shift button to the left of the Knobs until that LED is lit. Next, hold the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad and move the Knob labeled Timbre. This will select Knob 1 for the Controller field (see below.) You can also set the desired controller in the Controller field by using the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons.

6.

With Knob 1 selected in the Controller field, use the cursor buttons to select the DestType field and then use the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons to select Ctrl (see below.)

14-13

Tutorials: Setup Mode Assigning Multiple Knobs To Control Volume In Different Zones

7.

With Ctrl selected in the DestType field, use the cursor buttons to select the Dest field. In the Dest field, press 7 and then the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad to choose Volume (see below.) You can also use the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons to select a destination in the Dest field.

Knob1(labeledTimbreonthefrontpanel)shouldnowcontrolthevolumeofthebass,whichis onthelowerhalfofthekeyboard(ifnot,reviewtheprevioussteps.)Allothersettingsonthe ControllerspageforZone1,Knob1,shouldbeleftattheirdefaultvalues(seeabove.) 8. Next, lets repeat the steps above for Zone 2, using Knob 2. On the Controllers page, use the Chan/ Zone buttons to the left of the display to select Zone 2. You can view the number of the selected Zone in the top right corner of screen (see below.)

9.

On the Controllers page, use the cursor buttons to select the Controller field. Make sure the LED to the left of Timbre Knob is lit, if it is not, press the Shift button to the left of the Knobs until that LED is lit. Next, hold the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad and move the Knob labeled Mod. This will select Knob 2 for the Controller field (see below.) You can also set the desired controller in the Controller field by using the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons.

14-14

Tutorials: Setup Mode Assigning Multiple Knobs To Control Volume In Different Zones

10. With Knob 2 selected in the Controller field, use the cursor buttons to select the DestType field and then use the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons to select Ctrl (see below.)

11. With Ctrl selected in the DestType field, use the cursor buttons to select the Dest field. In the Dest field, press 7 and then the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad to choose Volume (see below.) You can also use the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons to select a destination in the Dest field.

Knob2(labeledModonthefrontpanel)shouldnowcontrolthevolumeofthepiano,whichis ontheupperhalfofthekeyboard(ifnot,reviewtheprevioussteps.)Allothersettingsonthe ControllerspageforZone2,Knob2,shouldbeleftattheirdefaultvalues. 12. To finish, press the Exit button to the right of the display to exit the Setup Editor and save your changes to this setup under a new ID#. SeeTheSetupEditorsectionatthebeginningofthis chapterfordetailsonsavingwhenyouexittheSetupEditor. IfyouhaveasetupwithmoreZones,youcanrepeatthesamestepsforeachadditionalZone, usingadditionalKnobs.

14-15

Tutorials: Setup Mode Assigning A Single Knob To Control Relative Volume In Different Zones

Assigning A Single Knob To Control Relative Volume In Different Zones

YoucanassignasingleKnobtoadjusttherelativevolumeofmultipleZonesinaSetup.For example,letseditthesetup58 Piano & Pad. The setup 58 Piano & Pad is a layered setup that uses piano on Zone 1 and pad type synth sounds on Zones 2 and 3. Lets assign a single Knob to control the volumes of Zones 2 and 3, but well setup our assignment so that Zone 3 is always quieter than Zone 2. There are two methods of achieving this relative volume assignment, each sounds and behaves differently. Try both methods because one may sound better than the other depending on the situation. Lets go over both methods and look at the advantages of each.

Offset Method
UsingtheOffsetmethodallowsyoutosetanexactvaluethatthevolumeofyourZoneswillbe changedby.SinceMIDIcontrollervaluesonlyrangefrom0127,volumesthatarechangedbyan offsetgettruncatedto0or127iftheadditionoftheoffsettoyourcurrentvolumeresultsina valuebelow0orabove127.Usinganoffsetgivesyoutheadvantageofbeingabletosetanexact differenceinvolume,butcanbetroublesomeincertainsituationsifyoudontwantyourvalues tobetruncated. 1. If you are not already in Setup mode, press the Exit button until you reach the ProgramMode page, then press the Setup mode button, located with the mode buttons to the left of the display. This will bring you to the Setup mode main page. Next, press 58 and then Enter on the alphanumeric pad to select the setup 58 Piano & Pad (see below.) You can also select setups by using the - / + buttons or Alpha Wheel.

2.

Next, with the setup 58 Piano & Pad selected in setup mode, press the Edit button on the front panel. This will bring you to the CH/PROG page of the setup editor (see below.)

Step 3 3. From the CH/PROG page, press the CTRLS soft button on the bottom of the screen (see above.) This brings you to the Controllers page where you can view and assign physical controllers to destinations for the current Zone.

14-16

Tutorials: Setup Mode Assigning A Single Knob To Control Relative Volume In Different Zones

4.

On the Controllers page, use the Chan/Zone buttons to the left of the display to select Zone 2. You can view the number of the selected Zone in the top right corner of screen.

5.

On the Controllers page for Zone 2, the Controller field will be highlighted (if not, select the Controller field with the cursor buttons.) Make sure the LED to the left of the Timbre Knob is lit, if it is not, press the Shift button to the left of the Knobs until that LED is lit. Next, hold the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad and move the Knob labeled Timbre. This will select Knob 1 for the Controller field (see below.) You can also set the desired controller in the Controller field by using the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons.

6.

With Knob 1 selected in the Controller field, use the cursor buttons to select the DestType field and then use the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons to select Ctrl (see below.)

14-17

Tutorials: Setup Mode Assigning A Single Knob To Control Relative Volume In Different Zones

7.

With Ctrl selected in the DestType field, use the cursor buttons to select the Dest field. In the Dest field, press 7 and then the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad to choose Volume (see below.) You can also use the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons to select a destination in the Dest field.

Knob1(labeledTimbreonthefrontpanel)shouldnowcontrolthevolumeofthepadonZone2, 222ClassPad(ifnot,reviewtheprevioussteps.) 8. Next, lets repeat the steps above for Zone 3, except this time we will set an offset so that Zone 3 is always quieter than Zone 2. On the Controllers page, use the Chan/Zone buttons to the left of the display to select Zone 3 (see below.) You can view the number of the selected Zone in the top right corner of screen.

9.

On the Controllers page for Zone 3, Knob 1 will still be selected in the Controller field. If not, follow these steps: Use the cursor buttons to select the Controller field. Make sure the LED to the left of Timbre Knob is lit, if it is not, press the Shift button to the left of the Knobs until that LED is lit. Next, hold the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad and move the Knob labeled Timbre. This will select Knob 1 for the Controller field. You can also set the desired controller in the Controller field by using the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons.

10. With Knob 1 selected in the Controller field, use the cursor buttons to select the DestType field and then use the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons to select Ctrl (see below.)

14-18

Tutorials: Setup Mode Assigning A Single Knob To Control Relative Volume In Different Zones

11. With Ctrl selected in the DestType field, use the cursor buttons to select the Dest field. In the Dest field, press 7 and then the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad to choose Volume. You can also use the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons to select a destination in the Dest field.

12. Now we will set an offset for Zone 3. On the Controllers page for Knob 1, Zone 3, use the cursor buttons to select the Offset field. On the alphanumeric pad press the +/- button, then 14, then the Enter button to enter -14 as an offset value.

Knob1(labeledModonthefrontpanel)shouldnowcontrolthevolumeofthepadsonZones2 and3(ifnot,reviewtheprevioussteps.)Zone3willalwaysbe14MIDIvolumestepsbelow Zone2becauseoftheOffsetparameter. 13. To finish, press the Exit button to the right of the display to exit the Setup Editor and save your changes to this setup under a new ID#. SeeTheSetupEditorsectionatthebeginningofthis chapterfordetailsonsavingwhenyouexittheSetupEditor. Insetupexampleabove,ifweturnKnob1sothatitissendingaMIDIcontrollervalueof10,the MIDIvolumeofZone2wouldbesetto10,andtheoffsetonZone3wouldmeanthatZone3s volumeissupposedtobe4.SinceMIDIcontrollervaluesdontgobelow0,theMIDIvolumeof Zone3wouldbesetto0,andtheZonewouldnotbeheard.Inthiscase,Zone3svolumewould besetto0foranyKnob1valueof14orless.ThisisadisadvantageofusingtheOffsetmethod, butitcanalsobeusedcreativelyasawaytomute(setvolumeto0)aZonebelowacertain volume.

14-19

Tutorials: Setup Mode Assigning A Single Knob To Control Relative Volume In Different Zones

Scale Method
TheScalemethodmultipliesthevolumeofoneyourZonesbyapercentage.Thismeansthatthe scaledZonesvolumewillalwaysbeacertainpercentdifferentthanthenonscaledZone.Unlike theOffsetmethodwhichalwayssetsaspecificvalueofvolumedifference,theScalemethod changesthevolumedifferencebetweenZonesforeachnewvolumesetting.Usingascalevalue ofmorethan%100canresultinvaluestruncatedto127iftheresultofscalingisgreaterthan127. 1. If you are not already in Setup mode, press the Exit button until you reach the ProgramMode page, then press the Setup mode button, located with the mode buttons to the left of the display. This will bring you to the Setup mode main page. Next, press 58 and then Enter on the alphanumeric pad to select the setup 58 Piano & Pad (see below.) You can also select setups by using the - / + buttons or Alpha Wheel.

2.

With the setup 58 Piano & Pad selected in setup mode, press the Edit button on the front panel. This will bring you to the CH/PROG page of the setup editor (see below.)

Step 3 3. From the CH/PROG page, press the CTRLS soft button on the bottom of the screen (see above.) This brings you to the Controllers page where you can view and assign physical controllers to destinations for the current Zone. On the Controllers page, use the Chan/Zone buttons to the left of the display to select Zone 2 (see below.) You can view the number of the selected Zone in the top right corner of screen.

4.

14-20

Tutorials: Setup Mode Assigning A Single Knob To Control Relative Volume In Different Zones

5.

On the Controllers page for Zone 2, the Controller field will be highlighted (if not, select the Controller field with the cursor buttons.) Make sure the LED to the left of the Timbre Knob is lit, if it is not, press the Shift button to the left of the Knobs until that LED is lit. Next, hold the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad and move the Knob labeled Timbre. This will select Knob 1 for the Controller field (see below.) You can also set the desired controller in the Controller field by using the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons.

6.

With Knob 1 selected in the Controller field, use the cursor buttons to select the DestType field and then use the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons to select Ctrl (see below.)

7.

With Ctrl selected in the DestType field, use the cursor buttons to select the Dest field. In the Dest field, press 7 and then the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad to choose Volume (see below.) You can also use the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons to select a destination in the Dest field.

Knob1(labeledTimbreonthefrontpanel)shouldnowcontrolthevolumeofthepadonZone2, 222ClassPad(ifnot,reviewtheprevioussteps.) 8. Next, lets repeat the steps above for Zone 3, except this time we will set a Scale value so that Zone 3 is always quieter than Zone 2. On the Controllers page, use the Chan/Zone buttons to the left of

14-21

Tutorials: Setup Mode Assigning A Single Knob To Control Relative Volume In Different Zones

the display to select Zone 3 (see below.) You can view the number of the selected Zone in the top right corner of screen.

9.

On the Controllers page for Zone 3, Knob 1 will still be selected in the Controller field. If not, follow these steps: Use the cursor buttons to select the Controller field. Make sure the LED to the left of the Timbre Knob is lit, if it is not, press the Shift button to the left of the Knobs until that LED is lit. Next, hold the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad and move the Knob labeled Timbre. This will select Knob 1 for the Controller field. You can also set the desired controller in the Controller field by using the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons.

10. With Knob 1 selected in the Controller field, use the cursor buttons to select the DestType field and then use the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons to select Ctrl (see below.)

11. With Ctrl selected in the DestType field, use the cursor buttons to select the Dest field. In the Dest field, press 7 and then the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad to choose Volume (see below.) You can also use the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons to select a destination in the Dest field.

14-22

Tutorials: Setup Mode Assigning A Single Knob To Control Relative Volume In Different Zones

12. Now we will set a Scale value for Zone 3. On the Controllers page for Knob 1, Zone 3, use the cursor buttons to select the Scale field. On the alphanumeric pad press 90 and then the Enter button to enter 90% as a Scale value (see below.)

Knob1(labeledModonthefrontpanel)shouldnowcontrolthevolumeofthepadsonZones2 and3(ifnot,reviewtheprevioussteps.)Zone3willalwaysbeat90%thevolumeofZone2 becauseoftheScalevaluesetforZone3.Forexample,ifKnob1issendingavalueof127,Zone 2willbeatMIDIvolume127,whileZone3willbeatMIDIvolume114.Thevalue114isaresult ofthevaluesentbyKnob1(127)multipliedbytheScalevalueforZone3(90%or.90.)This equation,Knob1valuex.90,iscalculatedforeverynewKnob1valuereceived.BecauseMIDI onlysendsintegervalues,numberstotherightofthedecimalpointaredropped,soeven though127x.90=114.3,only114issent. 13. To finish, press the Exit button to the right of the display to exit the Setup Editor and save your changes to this setup under a new ID#. SeeTheSetupEditorsectionatthebeginningofthis chapterfordetailsonsavingwhenyouexittheSetupEditor.

14-23

Tutorials: Setup Mode Assigning A Single Knob to Crossfade Between The Volume Of Different Zones

Assigning A Single Knob to Crossfade Between The Volume Of Different Zones

YoucanassignaKnobtocrossfadebetweensoundsondifferentZones.Crossfadingallowsyou tosmoothlyblendbetweentwosoundsbyincreasingthevolumeofoneZoneasthevolumeof theotherZoneisdecreased.Forexample,letseditthesetup58 Piano & Pad. The setup 58 Piano & Pad is a layered setup that uses piano on Zone 1 and pad type synth sounds on Zones 2 and 3. Lets assign a single Knob to crossfade between Zones 2 and 3. This will allow us to hear either the piano and one of the pads, or the piano and a blend of both pads. 1. If you are not already in Setup mode, press the Exit button until you reach the ProgramMode page, then press the Setup mode button, located with the mode buttons to the left of the display. This will bring you to the Setup mode main page. Next, press 58 and then Enter on the alphanumeric pad to select the setup 58 Piano & Pad (see below.) You can also select setups by using the - / + buttons or Alpha Wheel.

2.

With the setup 58 Piano & Pad selected in setup mode, press the Edit button on the front panel. This will bring you to the CH/PROG page of the setup editor (see below.)

Step 3 3. From the CH/PROG page, press the CTRLS soft button on the bottom of the screen (see above.) This brings you to the Controllers page where you can view and assign physical controllers to destinations for the current Zone.

14-24

Tutorials: Setup Mode Assigning A Single Knob to Crossfade Between The Volume Of Different Zones

4.

On the Controllers page, use the Chan/Zone buttons to the left of the display to select Zone 2 (see below.) You can view the number of the selected Zone in the top right corner of screen.

5.

On the Controllers page for Zone 2, the Controller field will be highlighted (if not, select the Controller field with the cursor buttons.) Make sure the LED to the left of the Timbre Knob is lit, if it is not, press the Shift button to the left of the Knobs until that LED is lit. Next, hold the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad and move the Knob labeled Timbre. This will select Knob 1 for the Controller field (see below.) You can also set the desired controller in the Controller field by using the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons.

6.

With Knob 1 selected in the Controller field, use the cursor buttons to select the DestType field and then use the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons to select Ctrl (see below.)

14-25

Tutorials: Setup Mode Assigning A Single Knob to Crossfade Between The Volume Of Different Zones

7.

With Ctrl selected in the DestType field, use the cursor buttons to select the Dest field. In the Dest field, press 7 and then the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad to choose Volume (see below.) You can also use the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons to select a destination in the Dest field.

Knob1(labeledTimbreonthefrontpanel)shouldnowcontrolthevolumeofthepadonZone2, 222ClassPad(ifnot,reviewtheprevioussteps.) 8. With Knob 1 selected in the Controller field, use the cursor buttons to select the Curve field and then use the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons to select Compress (see below.) This makes Zone 2 louder when Knob 1 is half way up than it would be with the standard Linear curve. This allows for the pad sound to be closer to its full volume when Knob 1 is half way up (which will give us an equal blend of both pad sounds when we are done.)

9.

Next, lets repeat the steps above for Zone 3, except this time we will set an Offset and a negative Scale value to get a crossfading effect. On the Controllers page, use the Chan/Zone buttons to the left of the display to select Zone 3 (see below.) You can view the number of the selected Zone in the top right corner of screen.

10. On the Controllers page for Zone 3, Knob 1 will still be selected in the Controller field. If not, follow these steps: Use the cursor buttons to select the Controller field. Make sure the LED to the left of the Timbre Knob is lit, if it is not, press the Shift button to the left of the Knobs until that LED is lit. Next, hold the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad and move the Knob labeled

14-26

Tutorials: Setup Mode Assigning A Single Knob to Crossfade Between The Volume Of Different Zones

Timbre. This will select Knob 1 for the Controller field. You can also set the desired controller in the Controller field by using the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons. 11. With Knob 1 selected in the Controller field, use the cursor buttons to select the DestType field and then use the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons to select Ctrl (see below.)

12. With Ctrl selected in the DestType field, use the cursor buttons to select the Dest field. In the Dest field, press 7 and then the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad to choose Volume (see below.) You can also use the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons to select a destination in the Dest field.

13. Now we will set an Offset value for Zone 3. On the Controllers page for Knob 1, Zone 3, use the cursor buttons to select the Offset field. On the alphanumeric pad press 127, then the Enter button to enter 127 as an offset value (see below.)

14-27

Tutorials: Setup Mode Assigning A Single Knob to Crossfade Between The Volume Of Different Zones

14. Next we will set a negative Scale value for Zone 3. On the Controllers page for Knob 1, Zone 3, use the cursor buttons to select the Scale field. On the alphanumeric pad press the +/- button, then 100, then the Enter button to enter -100% as a Scale value (see below.)

15. Use the cursor buttons to select the Curve field and then use the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons to select Expand (see below.) This makes Zone 3 louder when Knob 1 is half way up than it would be with the standard Linear curve. This allows for the pad sound to be closer to its full volume when Knob 1 is half way up (which will give us an equal blend of both pad sounds when we are done.) We are using the Expand curve here instead of the Compress curve as in step 8 (above.) This is because we used the -100% Scale value for Zone 3, which makes the Expand curve boost middle values (like the Compress curve usually does,) instead of decreasing middle values as Expand usually does.

Knob1(labeledTimbreonthefrontpanel)shouldnowcrossfadebetweenthepadsoundson Zones2and3(ifnot,reviewtheprevioussteps.)Zone2sendsincreasingvolumevaluesfrom0 127asyouturnKnob1up.Zone3sendsdecreasingvolumevaluesfrom1270asyouturnKnob 1up.ThisisbecausetheOffsetof127forZone3makestheZoneset127asavolumewhenKnob 1isdown(sendingavalueof0,whichgetsaddedtotheOffsetof127,0+127=127.)Zone3then decreasesinvolumeasKnob1isturnedup,becauseofthe100%ScalesetforZone3. 16. To finish, press the Exit button to the right of the display to exit the Setup Editor and save your changes to this setup under a new ID#. See The Setup Editor section at the beginning of this chapter for details on saving when you exit the Setup Editor.

14-28

Tutorials: Setup Mode Switch Between Zones Based On Played Keyboard Velocity

Switch Between Zones Based On Played Keyboard Velocity

YoucansetasetupZonetoonlybeheardwhenthekeyboardisplayedwithinacertainvelocity range.Thistechniquecanbeusedindifferentwaysdependingonthesituation.Herewewillgo overoneofitsmostbasicuses.Wewilleditthesetup58 Piano & Pad. The setup 58 Piano & Pad is a layered setup that uses piano on Zone 1 and pad type synth sounds on Zones 2 and 3. Lets edit this setup so that the pad sounds on Zones 2 and 3 are only heard when the keyboard is played with a high velocity (struck hard.) Using Zone velocity ranges in this way allows you to emphasize the dynamics of your playing, by having more sounds come in as you play louder, and having sounds drop out when you play more quietly. 1. If you are not already in Setup mode, press the Exit button until you reach the ProgramMode page, then press the Setup mode button, located with the mode buttons to the left of the display. This will bring you to the Setup mode main page. Next, press 58 and then Enter on the alphanumeric pad to select the setup 58 Piano & Pad (see below.) You can also select setups by using the - / + buttons or Alpha Wheel.

2.

With the setup 58 Piano & Pad selected in setup mode, press the Edit button on the front panel. This will bring you to the CH/PROG page of the setup editor (see below.)

Step 3 3. From the CH/PROG page press the KEYVEL soft button (see above.) This will bring you to the KEYVEL page for the current Zone.

14-29

Tutorials: Setup Mode Switch Between Zones Based On Played Keyboard Velocity

4.

On the KEYVEL page, use the Chan/Zone buttons to the left of the display to select Zone 2 (see below.) You can view the number of the selected Zone in the top right corner of screen.

5.

On the KEYVEL page for Zone 2, use the cursor buttons to select the LoVel field. Then press 80 on the alphanumeric pad and press the Enter button to enter 80 for the LoVel field (see below.) This means that 80 is the lowest keyboard velocity that Zone 2 will respond to, anything lower will not cause Zone 2 to be heard. Any velocity of 80 or more will cause Zone 2 to be heard because Zone 2s HiVel field is set to 127, which is the maximum MIDI velocity.

6.

Next, lets set the same velocity range for Zone 3. Use the Chan/Zone buttons to the left of the display to select Zone 3 (see below.) You can view the number of the selected Zone in the top right corner of screen. Step 6

Step 7 7. On the KEYVEL page for Zone 3, the LoVel field will still be selected if you havent moved the cursor. If the LoVel field is not selected, use the cursor buttons to select the LoVel field. Then press 80 and press the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad to enter 80 for the LoVel field (see above.)

NowbothZones2and3willonlyrespondtovelocitiesof80ormore.Tryplayingsomesoft quietnotes,youshouldhearonlypiano.Next,playsomehardloudnotes,andyoushouldhear thepianoandpads(ifnot,reviewtheprevioussteps.)Dependingonyourplayingstyle,you maywishtosettheLoVelvalueforZones2and3lowerorhighersothatZones2and3canbe triggeredbylowervelocitiesoronlyveryhighvelocities.

14-30

Tutorials: Setup Mode Switch Between Zones Based On Played Keyboard Velocity

8.

To finish, press the Exit button to the right of the display to exit the Setup Editor and save your changes to this setup under a new ID#. SeeTheSetupEditorsectionatthebeginningofthis chapterfordetailsonsavingwhenyouexittheSetupEditor.

Velocityrangescanbeusedindifferentwaydependingonyourneedsandthesoundsbeing used.Youcouldrepeattheabovetutorial,butinsteadmakeZones2and3onlybeheardwhen lowvelocitiesareplayed,foramoresubtleeffect.Or,youcouldrepeattheabovetutorialand additionallychangethevelocityrangeofthepianoonZone1sothatitisnotheardforvelocities above80.Thisway,youonlyhearonesoundatatime,pianoforlowvelocities,andpadsfor highvelocities.Thistechniqueisoftenreferredtoasvelocityswitching.Velocityswitchingcan beausedtoswitchbetweenZonesofsimilarsoundsinordertoaddabitofextra expressiveness,ortoswitchbetweendrasticallydifferentsoundsforamoredramaticeffect. Additionally,youcouldtakeasetupthatusesnormalvelocitysettingsforitsZonesandadd somevelocityswitchingZonesjustforspecificbackgroundinstruments.Thisallowsyoutoadd morelayersofsoundtoyourplaying,whilekeepingyoursoundunclutteredbyonlyhaving soundsenterwhentheappropriatevelocityisplayed.

14-31

Tutorials: Setup Mode Creating A New Setup

Creating A New Setup

Followthesestepsifyouwouldliketocreateanewsetupfromablanktemplate. 1. If you are not already in Setup mode, press the Exit button until you reach the ProgramMode page, then press the Setup mode button, located with the mode buttons to the left of the display. This will bring you to the Setup mode main page (see below.)

2.

Use the - / + buttons or Alpha Wheel to select the setup 128DefaultSetup or use the alphanumeric pad to enter 128 and press Enter (see below.)

3.

With the setup 128DefaultSetup selected, press the Edit button on the front panel. This will bring you to the CH/PROG page of the setup editor (see below.)

4.

On the CH/PROG page, select the Program field (see above.) Select a program for Zone 1 using the Category buttons, - / + buttons, the Alpha Wheel or the alphanumeric pad.

14-32

Tutorials: Setup Mode Creating A New Setup

5.

If you would like to add a new Zone, use the more soft button on the bottom left of the display to scroll to the next page of soft buttons and find the NewZn (new Zone) button. Press the NewZn button to create a new Zone (see below.) You will see the message New Zone created, and you will be brought to the CH/PROG page for the new Zone. You can view the number of the selected Zone in the top right corner of screen.

6.

On the CH/PROG page for the new Zone, select the Program field (see below.) Select a program for the new Zone using the Category buttons, - / + buttons, the Alpha Wheel or the alphanumeric pad.

Repeatsteps5and6tocreateupto16Zones,eachofwhichcanhaveitsowninstrument programandkeyrange,aswellasmanyotheroptions.FormoreinformationseeChapter 7, SetupMode.

14-33

Tutorials: Setup Mode Creating A New Setup

7.

If you would like to adjust the keyrange of each Zone, use the more soft buttons on the bottom of the display to scroll to through pages of soft buttons and find and press the KEYVEL button. This brings you to the KEY-VEL page where you can view the key range for the current Zone (see below.) You can view the number of the selected Zone in the top right corner of screen. Usethe Chan/ZonebuttonstotheleftofthedisplaytoselectthecurrentZone. On the KEY-VEL page, the LoKey and HiKey fields set the lowest and highest keys that will trigger the current Zone. All keys in between the LoKey and HiKey will trigger the current Zone, while those outside of this range will not trigger the current Zone. To set a key value for the LoKey or HiKey field, select the field, hold the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad and press the desired keyboard key.

8.

When you are finished creating your setup, presstheExit button on the front panel to exit the Setup Editor and return to the Setup mode main page. You will be presented with the message This setup has been edited... Press Rename to save and name your setup, press No toreturnto theSetupmodemainpagewithoutsaving,orpressCanceltoreturntotheSetupEditor.

Whensaving,youmustchooseanID#.AnID#givesyouawaytolocateasetupasidefromits name(youcanstoreupto2,560uniqueID#sforeachobjecttype:setups,programs,songs,etc., thoughmanyID#sarealreadyusedforfactoryROMobjects.)ID#salsoallowyoutosavesetups withthesamenameunderdifferentID#s,andrenamethematalatertimeifdesired.Choosean unusedID#tosaveanewsetup.ThenextavailableunusedID#isautomaticallyselectedwhen editingafactoryROMsetup.Wheneditingasetupthathasbeenstoredinusermemory(any originallyunusedID#,)theeditedsetupsID#isautomaticallyselected.Thisassumesthatyou wishtoreplacetheexistingsetup,butyoucanchooseanotherID#ifdesiredtosaveanewcopy. ChooseausedID#toreplaceanexistingsavedsetup.IfyoureplaceafactoryROMsetup,you canreverttotheoriginalsetupbyusingtheDeletesoftbuttonintheSetupEditor.See Chapter 5,EditingConventionsformoredetailsonsavingandnaming.

14-34

Tutorials: Setup Mode Basics Of Using Riffs

Basics Of Using Riffs

RiffsarefullsongsorindividualtracksofasongcreatedinthePC3LEsequencerthatyoucan triggerinsetupmode.Everyzoneinasetupcanhaveitsownriffacompletelyindependent sequence.Riffscanbeusedtoaccompanyyourplayinglikeabackingtrack,butriffsgiveyou moreoptionssuchasendlesslooping,stoppingorstartingdifferentinstrumentparts,theability totransposeinstrumentsorchangetempoduringplayback,andmanyotheroptions. Readthissectiontolearnthebasicconceptsandsettingsneededforusingriffs.Herewewill lookatsomeofthefactorysetupsthatuseriffsincommonways.

Adding A Riff, Sync Riffs

Theeasiestwaytoaddarifftoasetupistocreateanewzonewhichwillbededicatedtoplaying ariff.Forthistutorial,wewilllookatasetupthatcontainsadrumriff,andaddahornriffthat willplayinsyncwiththedrums. 1. Press the Exit button until you reach the ProgramMode page. Next, press the Setup mode button, located with the mode buttons to the left of the display. This will bring you to the Setup mode main page. Use the - / + buttons or Alpha Wheel to select the setup 54 Acoustic Split or use the alphanumeric pad to enter 54 and press Enter (see below.) This setup splits the keyboard between an upright bass program on the lower notes of the keyboard and piano layered with strings on the higher notes of the keyboard. There is also a drum riff the plays from pad 1.

2.

3.

With the setup 54 Acoustic Split selected, press the Edit button on the front panel. This will bring you to the CH/PROG page of the setup editor (see below.)

14-35

Tutorials: Setup Mode Basics Of Using Riffs

4.

From the CH/PROG page of the setup editor, press the left hand more soft button to cycle through the soft buttons at the bottom of the display and find the NewZn soft button. Press the NewZn soft button. This will create a new zone (zone 6) and bring you to the CH/PROG page for the new zone (see below.) You can see the number of the currently selected zone in the top right corner of the display. (If needed, change the selected zone by using the Chan/Zone buttons to the left of the display.)

5.

We will use the new zone (zone 6) to play a horn riff. On the CH/PROG page for zone 6, choose program 59 BigBand/AMradio for the zones program (see below.) To do this, enter 59 into the Program field by pressing and lighting the Category Shift button, then use the alphanumeric pad to enter 59 followed by the Enter button. You can also use the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons to select the program. (You can always go back and change the program later.)

6.

Next, use one of the more soft buttons in the bottom corners of the display to cycle through the soft buttons at the bottom of the display and find the RIFF1 soft button. Press the RIFF1 soft button. This will bring you to the RIFF1 page for zone 6 (see below.)

14-36

Tutorials: Setup Mode Basics Of Using Riffs

7.

On the RIFF1 page, the Riff field will be selected. Press the + button below the Alpha Wheel to turn on the riff for the current zone (zone 6.) When the riff has been turned on, you will see the riff options appear on the riff 1 page. (see below.)

8.

Use the cursor buttons to highlight the Song field. Here you can pick one of the songs saved on your PC3LE to use as a riff for this zone. Use the alphanumeric pad to enter 115, then press the Enter button. This will select the song 115 Jazz (see below.)

9.

At this point, playing any of the keyboard keys will trigger the riff, and the riff doesnt sound good because it is playing multiple tracks and triggering multiple zones, not just the horn program on zone 6. First lets make the riff trigger only zone 6, and later we will make the riff trigger only from a pad. Use the cursor buttons to select the SrcTrack field, then use the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons to select 2 for the source track (see below.) Then set the Re Channel parameter to On. Now playing any key should trigger a horn riff.

Whydidwesetthesourcetracktotrack2?Ifyouweretolookatthesong115Jazzinthe PC3LEsSongmode,youwouldseeatwotracksongthathasdrumsonchannel1,andbasson channel2.Forthistutorial,weareusingtheMIDIdatafromtrack2ofthatsongtoplaythe notesofourhornriff.Whenaddingriffstoyourownsetupslater,youcanuseanysong(factory orusercreated)andanytrackfromthatsongtouseasariff,thoughusuallyitworksbestifthe trackinyoursongoriginallyusedthesameorsimilarinstrumentprogramastheoneyouwill usefortheriff.FormoreontheReChannelparameter,seeReChannel on page 750.

14-37

Tutorials: Setup Mode Basics Of Using Riffs

10. Next, we will stop the riff from being triggered by the keyboard, so that we can play the setup again as it originally was. Press the RIFF2 soft button at the bottom of the page to move to the RIFF2 page. 11. On the RIFF2 page for zone 6 we will change key ranges for the Trigger and Release fields. By default when you create a new zone its riff is set to be triggered and released by every key on the keyboard. Lets change the Trigger and Release key ranges so that the riff is only triggered and released by the key C -1 (a very low key that likely wont be used anyway.) To do this, use the cursor buttons to select G9 in the right most Trigger field, and change it to C -1 by pressing 0 and then pressing the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad. Next, use the cursor buttons to select G9 in the right most Release field, and change it to C -1 by pressing 0 and then pressing the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad (see below.) You can also use the Alpha Wheel and scroll all the way counter-clockwise to reach C -1.

WhydidwesettherifftriggerandreleasekeyrangestoC1?C1isthelowestnotepossibleon thePC3LE,whichyouwillprobablyneverplayunlessyoupresstheOctavesoftbuttonafew times(fromtheSetupmodemainpage,)andeventhenyouwouldlikelynotwanttoplaythat notesincemostprogramsdonotsoundgoodatsuchalowoctave.Similarly,wecouldhaveset bothrangestoonlyG9,thePC3LEshighestnote,whichisnotlikelytobeusedeither.

12. Next we will set a pad to trigger the horn riff. Press the more soft button in the bottom left corner of the display to find the CTRLS soft button. Press the CTRLS soft button. This will bring you to the Controllers page for zone 6 (see below.)

14-38

Tutorials: Setup Mode Basics Of Using Riffs

13. On the controllers page, make sure you are still on zone 6 (the currently selected zone is shown in the top right corner of the display.) If you are not on zone 6, use the Chan/Zone buttons to the left of the display to select zone 6. Next, with the Controller field selected on the Controllers page, hold the Enter button (located with the Category buttons) and press pad 2 (below the display.) This will select Drum Pad 2 for the Controller field (see below.)

14. With Drum Pad 2 selected for the Controller field on the Controllers page, use the cursor buttons to select the Type field. With the Type field selected, press the + button (below the Alpha Wheel) to select Riff (see below.) Now pressing pad 2 should play the horn riff on zone 6.

15. If you press pads 1 and two at the same time, you will notice that the horn riff on pad 2 does not play at the same tempo as the drum riff on pad 1. The drum riff is playing at the tempo of the setup, while the horn riff is playing at the tempo of its original sequence, the song 115 Jazz. Lets make the horn riff play at the tempo of the setup as well. To do this, press the more soft button in the bottom right corner of the display to find the RIFF2 soft button. Press the RIFF2 soft button to move to the RIFF2 page. On the RIFF2 page, use the cursor buttons to select the BPM field (in the left column, bottom of the display.) With the BPM field selected, press the + button (below the Alpha Wheel) to select Setup (see below.) Now if you press pads 1 and 2 to start the riffs at the same time, their tempos should be in sync. Now you can also use the Tap Tempo button (to the left of the display, below the mode buttons) to set a tempo for the riffs by tapping the button at the desired tempo, or press the button once to view the Tap Tempo page (see Tap Tempo Button on page 6-4 for details.)

14-39

Tutorials: Setup Mode Basics Of Using Riffs

16. We can make the riffs both play in perfect sync by always starting them at the exact same time. One way to do this is by making the horn riff start only when the drum riff plays a down beat. To do this, go to the RIFF2 page for zone 6 and use the cursor buttons to select the SyncZone field in the top right of the page. Select Riff 4 by pressing 4 then the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad (see below.) You can also use the - / + buttons or the Alpha Wheel to select Riff 4.

17. Next, use the cursor buttons to select the field below SyncZone, SyncType. Use the - / + buttons or the Alpha Wheel to select DownBeatWait for the SyncType field (see below.) Now if you press pad 2, the PC3LE will wait until you press pad 1 to start both the horn and drum riffs.

Whydidwechoosethesesettings?WehaveselectedRiff4forSyncZone,becausewewantthe hornrifftosyncwiththedrumriff(Riff4,whichisonzone4.)WechoseDownBeatWaitasthe SyncType,whichmakesthehornriff(riff6)waittostartuntilthereisadownbeatofriff4.You couldalsochoosethesamesettingsforRelSynZnandRelSynTyptomakethehornriffwaitto stopplayinguntilthedrumriffplaysadownbeat.SeeTheRIFF2Page on page 751formoreon thenumeroussettingsavailableonthispage.

14-40

Tutorials: Setup Mode Basics Of Using Riffs

18. Lastly, lets change the Stop point for the horn riff so that it loops with no gaps. Press the RIFF1 soft button at the bottom of the page to move to the RIFF1 page for zone 6. On the RIFF1 page, use the cursor buttons to select the left most Stop field. The Stop field sets the bar number (within the riffs original sequence) that the riff should stop at. The Stop field also sets the loop point when Loop parameter is set to Forever on the RIFF2 page. Our horn riff is set to loop forever (the default setting.) With the left most Stop field selected, press 9 and then the Enter button on the alphanumeric pad to select 9 for the Stop field bars value (see below.) Now the horn riff should loop with no gaps.

AtthispointyoumaywanttoadjustthevolumeofthehornsprogramonthePANVOLpage (anEntryVolumeof100maybeamorecomfortablevolumeforthehornsriff.)Youcanalsosee howtheriffsoundswithdifferentprogramsbyselectingdifferentprogramsontheCH/PROG page. 19. To finish, press the Exit button to the right of the display to exit the Setup Editor and save your changes to this setup under a new ID#. SeeTheSetupEditorsectionatthebeginningofthis chapterfordetailsonsavingwhenyouexittheSetupEditor. Youmaywishtodisablesomecontrolsforzonesthatplayriffs.Forexample,thezonewithour hornriffrespondstothesustainpedal,butthisdoesntsoundgoodwhenweareusingthe sustainpedalforthezonewiththepianoprogram.Todisablethesustainpedalforzone6,goto theControllerspageforzone6,selectSWPedal1fortheControllerfieldandselectNoneforthe OnControlandOffControlfields. Therearemanypossiblewaystouseriffsinasetup.Forexampleinsteadoftriggeringriffsfrom thePC3LEspadsyoucouldtriggerriffsfromtheassignableswitches.Thiswouldleavethepads availabletoplaydrumprograms.Totriggerriffsfromtheassignableswitches,gototheSetup EditorControllerspageforthezonecontainingtheriffyouwishtotrigger.Next,selectaswitch, suchasswitch2fortheControllerfield(thiscanbedonebyselectingtheControllerfield, holdingtheEnterbuttonandpressingthedesiredswitch.)Then,withDestTypesettoCtrl,set theOnControlandOffControlfieldsto163and164,RiffOnandRiffOff.Lastly,insomecases youwouldneedtodisableanyswitchesthatyouareusingthatarealreadyassignedtoother functionsinotherzones.Forexample,bydefaultwhenazoneiscreateditassignsswitch1to mutethatzone(forexample,whenyoucreatedzone6inthistutorial,switch1wassettomute keyboardplaybackofzone6automaticallyonzone6sControllerspage.)Also,manyfactory setupsusethesetupMUTESsoftbuttonwhichautomaticallyassignseachswitchtomuteits correspondingzone(seeSetControlsZoneMutes(MUTES) on page 766.)Sousingswitches1 and2totriggerriffsonzones4and5wouldrequiresettingtheOnControlandOffControlfields toOFFforswitch1onzone1andswitch2onzone2(dothisbyentering0thenpressingEnter onthealphanumericpadforeachofthesefields.)Doingthiswouldensurethatzones1and2 wontbemutedwhenusingswitches1and2.Youcouldtryrepeatingthistutorialandchanging alltheriffstobetriggeredbytheassignableswitches.

14-41

Tutorials: Setup Mode Basics Of Using Riffs

Riffscanalsobetriggeredbythekeyboardkeys.Sincekeyscantstayon(toggled)likeswitches andpadscan,itiscommontohaveanotherkey(usuallyrightnexttothetriggerkey)torelease theriff.SetthetriggerandreleasekeysforariffbysettingtheTriggerandReleaserangesonthe RIFF2pagetoarangeofonekeyeach.Youcanalsotransposeriffswhentriggeringthemfrom thekeys.Seethenexttutorialfordetails.

Transposing A Riff As It Is Triggered

RiffstriggeredfromthePC3LEskeyboardcanbetransposedastheyaretriggered.One commonuseforthisfeatureistocreateabassriffthatcanbetriggeredbythelefthand.Inthis tutorialwewilllookatasetupthatisconfiguredthisway,andlookatsomesettingswecan changetotriggerthetransposingriffindifferentways. 1. Press the Exit button until you reach the ProgramMode page. Next, press the Setup mode button, located with the mode buttons to the left of the display. This will bring you to the Setup mode main page. Use the - / + buttons or Alpha Wheel to select the setup 64OldSchoolJam or use the alphanumeric pad to enter 64 and press Enter (see below.) This setup splits the keyboard between an electric bass riff on the lower notes of the keyboard and an electric piano on the higher notes of the keyboard. There are also drum riffs that play from pads 1 and 2.

2.

Playanoteonthelefthandendofthekeyboardtoheartheelectricbassriffthatisloadedwith thissetup.Ifyouletthebassriffplaywithoutpressinganyotherkeys,youwillhearthattheriff isafourbarloop.Whenyoupressanotherkeyonthelefthandendofthekeyboard,thebassriff waitsuntilitsnextdownbeatandthentransposestheriffandrestartstheloop.Tostoptheriff, presstheStopbuttontotheleftofthedisplay. 3. Next, lets edit this setup to see how this riff is being transposed and triggered. With the setup 64 OldSchoolJam selected, press the Edit button on the front panel. This will bring you to the CH/ PROG page of the setup editor (see below.)

14-42

Tutorials: Setup Mode Basics Of Using Riffs

4.

From the CH/PROG page of the setup editor, press the top Chan/Zone button to the left of the display to move up one zone to zone 2. The currently selected zone number can be viewed in the top right corner of the display. On the CH/PROG page for zone 2, we can see the program used for the electric bass riff is 236 Motown Bass (see below.)

5.

Press the right hand more soft button at the bottom of the display to find the RIFF1 soft button, then press the RIFF1 soft button. This brings you to the RIFF1 page for zone 2. Here we can see that a riff is turned on for zone two. Zone 2s riff is using track 2 of the song 95 Old School Jam as the source track for this setups bass riff (see below.) (See the previous tutorial Adding A Riff, Sync Riffs on page 14-35 for details on these settings.)

6.

Next, press the RIFF2 soft button at the bottom of the display to move to the RIFF2 page. On the RIFF2 page, we can see in the Trigger field that the riff is set to be triggered by the keys C -1 through C 3 (see below.)

14-43

Tutorials: Setup Mode Basics Of Using Riffs

7.

Press the RIFF1 soft button at the bottom of the display to move to the RIFF1 page once again. On the RIFF1 page, the Transpose parameter is set to on. This is what makes the riff transpose. If you set the Transpose parameter to Off, any key played between C -1 and C 3 will trigger the riff to play at its original pitch. When the Transpose parameter is set to On, the riff will transpose based on the key set for the Root Note parameter. Since this bass part was originally played starting on a G in the song 95 Old School Jam, the Root Note parameter has been set to G1. When you play a G within the trigger range, this riff will play in the correct key. Ifyouhavechangedsettingson thispage,makesureTransposeissettoOnandRootNotetoG1beforecontinuingthis tutorial(seebelow.)

Whenusingyourownriff,settingtheRootNoteparametertomatchtherootnoteoftheriffin itsoriginalsongwillallowyoutotransposetheriffwhilekeepingitintunewithprogramson otherzones.WhentheRootNoteparameterisselected,youcansetarootnotebyholdingthe Entercategorybuttonandthenplayingthedesiredkeyboardkey.

14-44

Tutorials: Setup Mode Basics Of Using Riffs

8.

Next, press the RIFF2 soft button at the bottom of the display to move to the RIFF2 page once again. On the RIFF2 page, We can see that the bass riff on zone 2 is set to sync with the first riff, arpeggiator, or song available, because the SyncZone parameter is set to First Avail. The riff waits to trigger until the next down beat of whatever it is syncing with because the SyncType parameter is set to DownBeat (see below.) This is why the riff waits for a downbeat before transposing and restarting its loop when triggered.

Ifyouwouldrathernotbetiedtodownbeatsforsyncingthisriff,youcansettheSyncTypeto None.WithSyncTypesettoNone,theriffwillnotsynctoanything,whichallowsyoutotrigger itmorefreely.Thiscanbehelpfulifyouneedtotransposetheriffmorequicklytomatchchord changes.Ifyouwouldliketotransposetheriffquickly,butstillwantittobeabletosyncwith otherthings,aSyncTypesettingofAnyBeatwillsynctheriffatthenextavailablebeat,instead ofwaitingforadownbeat. Anothersyncoptionistohavethebassriffsynconlywhenthedrumriffonzone1isplaying. Forexample,settheSyncTypeparameterforzone2toAnyBeat,andsettheSyncZone parametertoRiff1.Presspad1totriggerthedrumriff,andnoticethatthebassriffsyncswith thenextbeatofthedrumriffwhenthedrumriffisplaying.Ifyoupresspad1againtostopthe drumriff,youwillbeabletotriggerthebassriffoutofsynconceagain. Youmayalsowanttoassignapadtostopthebassriff,insteadofusingthefrontpanelStop buttonwhichstopsallriffs.PresstheCTRLSbuttontogototheControllerspageforzone2. WiththeControllerfieldselected,holdthecategoryEnterbuttonandpresspad3toselect DrumPad3fortheControllerfield.Thispadisalreadyassignedtotriggerthebassriff,but sincewecantriggeritfromthekeyboard,letschangethispadsassignmenttostopthebassriff. UsethecursorbuttonstoselecttheTypefieldandusethe/+buttonstoselectSwitch.With SwitchselectedfortheTypefield,settheDestTypefieldtoCtrlandtheSWTypefieldto Momentary.Finally,usethecursorbuttonstoselecttheOnControlfield,thenusethe alphanumericpadtoenter164followedbythecategoryEnterbuttontoselectRiffOffforthe OnControlfield.DothesametoselectRiffOfffortheOffControlfield.Theotherfieldsshould beleftattheirdefaultvalues:OnValue:0,OffValue:0,EntryState:Off,ExitState:Off.Now, whenyoutriggerthebassrifffromthekeyboard,youcanstoptheriffbypressingpad3(though itwillstillfollowanyRelSynZnandRelSynTypsettingsmadeontheRIFF2page.)

9.

To finish, press the Exit button to the right of the display to exit the Setup Editor and save your changes to this setup under a new ID# if desired. SeeTheSetupEditorsectionatthebeginning ofthischapterfordetailsonsavingwhenyouexittheSetupEditor.

14-45

Tutorials: Setup Mode Basics Of Using Riffs

Using A Single Song For Multiple Riffs

Asdiscussedinthepreviousrifftutorials,riffsgettheirsequenceinformation(whichnotesto play,velocity,etc.)fromsongsrecordedinthePC3LEsSongmode.Asingleriffcanplaybacka singletrackofasongononezone,ormultipletracksofasongonmultiplezones.Inthistutorial, wewilllookatasetupthatusesasinglesongformultipleriffs,andthenchangethesetupto makeoneriffplaymultipletracksofthesong. 1. First lets look at the song that our setup will be using for riffs. Press the Exit button until you reach the ProgramMode page. Next, press the Song mode button, located with the mode buttons to the left of the display. This will bring you to the Song mode MAIN page (see below.)

2.

On the Song mode MAIN page, use the cursor to select the CurSng field (if not already selected.) In the CurSng field, use the alphanumeric pad to enter 428 followed by the Enter button to select the song 428 H-Fact Sng (see below.) Press the Play/Pause button to the left of the display to hear the song, which is a four bar loop. Press the Stop button to the left of the display when you are finished listening. The Track field shows that four tracks have been recorded. You can use the Chan/Zone buttons to the left of the display to view the programs used for tracks 1-4 in the Prog field. The currently selected track number is shown in the RecTrk field. The setup that we will look at uses the same programs for zones 1-4 that this song uses for its tracks 1-4, as well as sequence information from tracks 1-4 for riffs 1-4.

14-46

Tutorials: Setup Mode Basics Of Using Riffs

3.

Next, press the Setup mode button, located with the mode buttons to the left of the display. This will bring you to the Setup mode main page. Use the alphanumeric pad to enter 253 and press the Enter button to select the setup 2534ZoneRiff+Pno, or use the - / + buttons or Alpha Wheel to select the setup (see below.) This setup has five zones. The first four zones play riffs triggered from pads 1-4, while zone 5 contains a piano program playable from the keyboard.

Theriffsonpads24areallsettosynctothedownbeatoftheriffonpad1(seethepreviousriff tutorialsformoreonsyncingriffs.)Tostartalltheriffsatonce,pressandlightpads24,thenpress andlightpad1.Whenyoupresspad1,alloftheriffswillstartplayinginsync.

4.

Next, lets edit this setup to see the settings for these riffs. With the setup 2534ZoneRiff+Pno selected, press the Edit button on the front panel. This will bring you to the CH/PROG page of the setup editor (see below.)

14-47

Tutorials: Setup Mode Basics Of Using Riffs

5.

From the CH/PROG page, press the right hand more soft button at the bottom of the display to find the RIFF1 soft button, then press the RIFF1 soft button. This brings you to the RIFF1 page for zone 1. The currently selected zone number can be viewed in the top right corner of the display. Here we can see that a riff is turned on for zone 1. Zone 1s riff is using track 1 of the song 428 HFact Sng as its source track for this riff. The source track number is displayed in the SrcTrack field (see below.)

6.

Next, press the top Chan/Zone button (to the left of the display) to move to the RIFF1 page for zone 2. The currently selected zone number can be viewed in the top right corner of the display. A riff is turned on for zone 2, and the riff is using track 2 of the song 428 H-Fact Sng as its source track (see below.) If you continue to press the top Chan/Zone button to view the RIFF1 pages for zones 3 and 4, you will see that they also use the same song 428 H-Fact Sng for their riffs, though they use track 3 and 4 for their source tracks, respectively.

Thissetup,alongwiththesong428 H-Fact Sng which we viewed in Song mode, showagood exampleofhowtosplitupasongintoriffsinsetupmode.Onethingthatmakesthisexample simpleisthateachtrackofthesong428 H-Fact Sng uses its corresponding MIDI channel number. If you were to go back to the song in Song mode, you would see at the bottom of the display that track 1 uses channel 1, track 2 uses channel 2, etc. In the Setup Editor for the setup 2534ZoneRiff+Pno,youcan seeontheCH/PROGpageforeachzonethateachzoneusesitscorrespondingMIDIchannel numberaswell.Bothoftheseconditionsareimportant,becauseotherwisesettingtheSrcTrack parameterontheRIFF1pageforeachzonewouldnotbeassimpleassettingittocorrespond withthezonenumber.SeeSrcTrack(SourceTrack)andReChannel on page 750formoredetails onthesesettings. TheMIDIchannelsettingsdiscussedaboveareimportantinordertodirectthesequence informationcomingfromtheoriginalsongtoeachdesiredzoneinsetupmode.Oncethisis done,youcanselectaprogramforeachzonethatisplayingariff.Ifyouwanteachrifftosound thesameaseachtrackoftheoriginalsong,usethesameprogramforeachzonethateachtrack used.Youcanusedifferentprogramsifyouwanttheriffstosounddifferentfromtheoriginal song.Inthissetup,zones 1-4 use the same programs that the song 428 H-Fact Sng uses for its tracks 14. You can view the program used for each zone in the Program field of each zones CH/PROG page.

14-48

Tutorials: Setup Mode Basics Of Using Riffs

7.

Next, lets change the setup to make riff 1 play not only track 1, but tracks 1-4 of the original song. Using this method, you could have riff 1 play all the instruments for one part of a song, such as a verse section, and then use riff 2 to play all the instruments for another part of a song, such as a chorus section. Use the Chan/Zone button (to the left of the display) to move to zone 1. The currently selected zone number can be viewed in the top right corner of the display. Use one of the more soft buttons at the bottom of the display to find the RIFF1 soft button, then press the RIFF1 soft button. This brings you to the RIFF1 page for zone 1. Use the cursor buttons to select the Src Track field, then press the minus button (below the Alpha Wheel) to select ALL (see below.) This setting makes zone 1s riff (riff 1) play all of the tracks from the song 428 H-Fact Sng. Try pressing pad 1 to play riff 1, and you will hear the entire song 428 H-Fact Sng play. Press pad 1 again to stop the riff before continuing.

Howdoesriff1playtheentiresong?SinceeachtrackofthesongisassignedtoMIDIchannels 14(inSongmode,)eachtrackisstillplayedbythezoneassignedtothatMIDIchannel.Soeven thoughzone1sriffisnowplayingsequenceinformationfromalltracksoftheoriginalsong, eachtrackisstillplayedbyaseparateinstrumentprogramonzones14.

8.

Lastly, lets make riff two play all tracks of the same song, but we will have it play the song from a different point than riff 1. This is meant to demonstrate how you would set up riffs to play different sections of a song, though the song 428 H-Fact Sng is only 4 bars long, so it is only useful as an example in this setup. First, lets change the Stop time for riff 1 so that it doesnt play the song section that we will use for riff 2. On the RIFF1 page for zone 1, use the cursor buttons to select the left most Stop field (this is the Stop bars field,) then press the minus button twice (below the Alpha Wheel) to change this field to 3 (see below.) Now when you press and light pad 1, riff 1 will play all tracks of the song 428 H-Fact Sng, but now it is only a loop of the first 2 bars.

14-49

Tutorials: Setup Mode Basics Of Using Riffs

9.

Next, press the top Chan/Zone button (to the left of the display) to move to the RIFF1 page for zone 2. The currently selected zone number can be viewed in the top right corner of the display. Use the cursor buttons to select the Src Track field, then press the minus button twice (below the Alpha Wheel) to select ALL (see below.) Next, use the cursor buttons to select the left most Start field (this is the Start bars field,) then press the plus button twice (below the Alpha Wheel) to change this field to 3 (see below.) This will make riff 2 play a two bar loop of the song 428 H-Fact Sng, but unlike riff 1 it will play bars 3 and 4 instead of bars 1 and 2.

10. Before this riff can be triggered, press the RIFF2 soft button to move to the RIFF2 page for zone 2. On the RIFF2 page for zone 2, use the cursor buttons to select the SyncType field and use the Alpha Wheel to set this field to None (see below.) This turns off the riff sync settings that had been saved with this setup. Now pad 1 and 2 will each play a different section of the song 428 H-Fact Sng. Try starting and stopping each pad separately to hear each two bar loop.

11. Since each riff is now playing a different section of the song, lets use some riff sync settings to sync the timing when switching between the two riffs. On the RIFF2 page for zone 2, use the cursor buttons to select the SyncType field and use the Alpha Wheel to set this field to Loop (see below.) Leave the SyncZone field set to Riff 1 (see below.) These settings make riff 2 wait to start until the loop point of riff 1 occurs. Next, use the cursor buttons to select the RelSynTyp field and use the Alpha Wheel to set this field to StartWait (see below.) Next, use the cursor buttons to select the RelSynZn field and use the Alpha Wheel to set this field to Riff 1 (see below.) These settings make riff 2 wait to release (stop) until riff 1 starts.

14-50

Tutorials: Setup Mode Basics Of Using Riffs

12. Press the bottom Chan/Zone button (to the left of the display) to move to the RIFF2 page for zone 1. On the RIFF2 page for zone 1, use the cursor buttons to select the SyncType field and use the Alpha Wheel to set this field to Loop (see below.) Next, use the cursor buttons to select the SyncZone field and use the Alpha Wheel to set this field to Riff 2 (see below.) These settings make riff 1 wait to start until the loop point of riff 2 occurs. Next, use the cursor buttons to select the RelSynTyp field and use the Alpha Wheel to set this field to StartWait (see below.) Next, use the cursor buttons to select the RelSynZn field and use the Alpha Wheel to set this field to Riff 2 (see below.) These settings make riff 1 wait to release (stop) until riff 2 starts.

Withthesettingsdescribedinsteps11and12completed,riffs1and2shouldsyncwitheach otherwhentriggeringorreleasingeach.Followthesestepstoseehowtheriffssync.First,make surenothingisplayingbypressingthefrontpanelStopbutton(totheleftofthedisplay,)and pressingandunlightinganylitpads.Next,pressandlightpad1tostartriff1,then,pressand unlightpad1toreleaseriff1.Sinceriff1hasitsRelSynTyp set to StartWait and RelSynZn set to Riff 2, riff 1 is now waiting for riff 2 to start before releasing (stopping.) Next, press and light pad 2 to start riff 2. Sinceriff2hasitsSyncType set to Loop and SyncZone set to Riff 1, riff 2 waits to start until riff 1 reaches its loop point. When riff 1 reaches its loop point, riff 2 starts, and riff 1 stops (because it has been waiting for riff 2 to start.) In short, light and then unlight (a.k.a. trigger and release) pad 1 or 2 to start riff 1 or 2. When you press the other pad, it will start the other riff when the playing riff reaches its loop point, and stop that playing riff. This way, you can switch between the two riffs playing each song section, and the transition will always be in sync. When finished, press thefrontpanelStopbuttontostopany playingriffs. 13. To finish, press the Exit button to the right of the display to exit the Setup Editor and save your changes to this setup under a new ID# if desired. SeeTheSetupEditorsectionatthebeginning ofthischapterfordetailsonsavingwhenyouexittheSetupEditor.

14-51

Tutorials: Setup Mode Basics Of Using Riffs

Riff Troubleshooting Whenusingriffs,youmayrunintoasituationinwhichtheriffisntworkingthewayyouthink itshould.Belowaresomecommonproblemsandsolutions. Problem

The riff wont trigger from anywhere.

Solution
In the Setup Editor for the riffs zone, make sure the SrcTrack parameter on the RIFF1 page is set to a track that contains recorded MIDI data (from the song selected for the Song field.) In the Setup Editor for the riffs zone, if the BPM parameter on the RIFF2 page is set to External, make sure an external MIDI clock is being received by the PC3LE.

The riff wont trigger from the keyboard.

In the Setup Editor for the riffs zone, make sure its Trigger range (on the RIFF2 page) is within LoKey and HiKey range on the KEY-VEL page. In the Setup Editor for the riffs zone, make sure the Status parameter on the CH/PROG page isnt set to Muted. In the Setup Editor for the riffs zone, make sure the Notemap parameter is set to Linear (some factory setups that trigger riffs from the pads have Notemap set to Off.)

The riff wont stop playing when released.

In the Setup Editor for the riffs zone, check the RelSynZn and RelSynTyp parameters, see RelSynTyp (Release Sync Type) on page 7-54 for details. It is possible to make settings which dont allow the riff to stop in all situations. In this case you can still use the front panel Stop button (to the left of the display) to stop all riffs. In the Setup Editor for the riffs zone, if the SyncZone or RelSynZn parameters are set to First Avail or FirstRiff.Av., some SyncType and RelSynTyp settings may not work as expected when triggering or releasing riffs. In these cases set the SyncZone or RelSynZn parameters to a specific riff, arpeggiator or sequence to sync to. In the Setup Editor for the riffs zone, set the Local parameter to On on the RIFF2 page. Local is set to Off by default, see Local on page 7-52 for details.

The riff doesnt sync its triggering or releasing as expected.

Cant play a zone from the keyboard when its riff is turned on.

14-52

Power User Tips

Chapter 15 Power User Tips

ThischapterwilldiscussthePC3LEsshortcutsandotherfeatureswhicharedesignedtomake theoperationandeditingofeachmodemoreconvenient.Thougheachofthesefeaturesis explainedelsewhereinthisguide,thischaptercanbeusedasareferenceaswellasaquick overviewforpoweruserswhowishtooperatethePC3LEmoreefficiently.Generaltipsand shortcutswillbediscussedfirst,followedbymoreadvancedtipsthatdealwitheditingand operatingeachmode. In This Chapter:
General Tips:

SetTheStartupProgramAndMIDIChannel .......................................... 152 PickingFavoriteProgramsForEachCategory .......................................... 152 EasyAudition(PlayADemoSongForEachProgram) ................................... 153 SaveTheCurrentKnobAndSwitchSettingsFromTheProgramModeMainPage ............. 153
Advanced Tips

IntuitiveControllerSelection/DataEntry .............................................. 154 SearchFunction(FindAProgramOrSetupByName) ................................... 154 QuickSongRecordingAndPlayback(RecordAnIdeaFromAnyMode)..................... 155

Program Mode

ChangeTheEffectsChain ..................................................... 156 ChangeKnob,Switches,andOtherControllerAssignmentsandControlNonDefault Parameters ................................................................. 157

Setup Mode

AssignAZoneToUsePadsOnly............................................... 158 AssignPadsToPlayNotes,Chords,Riffs,OrToToggleOtherFunctionsLikeArpeggiators 159 CreateAUserShiftOrVelocityPatternForCustomArpeggiations ................... 1510 RecordAShortSongForUseAsARiff,RecordASetupToSongMode ............... 1510

15-1

Power User Tips General Tips

General Tips
Set The Start-up Program And MIDI Channel
WhenthePC3LEisturnedon,Programmodeisautomaticallyselected.YoucansetaMIDI channelandprogramtobeautomaticallyselectedinProgrammodewhenthePC3LEisturned on.FollowthesestepstosetthestartupMIDIchannelandprogram: 1. 2. 3. First enter Program mode (if you are not in Program mode, press the Exit button to the right of the display until you see ProgramMode in the top left of the display.) Once in program mode, use the Chan/Zone buttons (to the left of the display) to select the start-up MIDI channel. The current MIDI channel is displayed in the top right of the display. Next, select the start up program by using the Alpha Wheel, cursor buttons, - / + buttons, Category buttons, or press the Category Shift button to use the Category buttons as an alphanumeric pad and enter a program ID#. Next, press the Master Mode button (grouped with the Mode buttons to the left of the display) to enter Master mode. Once in Master Mode, press the Exit button (to the left of the display) to return to Program mode. The next time you turn on the PC3LE, the MIDI channel and program you chose will be selected.

4. 5.

Note:ThePC3LEsetsthecurrentlyselectedMIDIchannelandprogramasthestartupchannel andprogramwheneveryouexitMastermode.Becauseofthis,youmayaccidentallyoverwrite thesesettingswhenusingmastermode.Ifthishappens,justrepeattheabovesteps. Note:Whenyousetthestartupchannelandprogram,thePC3LEsother15MIDIchannelsalso remembertheircurrentlyselectedprogram.Beforefollowingthestepsabove,youcouldseta programoneachchannel,sothateachchannelwillhaveaspecificprogramuponstartup.This couldbeusefulifyouaretriggeringthePC3LEfromanexternalsequencerandwanttousea defaultprogramforeachchannel.Asdescribedintheabovenote,usecautionbecausethese settingscanbeaccidentallyoverwrittenwhenusingMastermode.Youcanalsosavethese settingsasanexternalfile(calledaMasterTablefile,)whichcanbeusedasabackupofyour settings,oryoucouldloadadifferentMasterTablefileforeachsong.SeeSavingMasterTable Files on page 117fordetails.IfyouuseMasterTablefilesforstoringsongsetups,youmaywant toreadaboutSongMode,whichcanalsobetriggeredfromanexternalsequencerandhassome advantagesoverProgramMode(seeChapter 10,SongModeandtheSongEditor.)

Picking Favorite Programs For Each Category

Youcanselectafavoriteprogramwithineachcategorythatwillbeautomaticallyrecalledwhen youpressthatcategorysCategorybutton.Followthesestepstosetafavoriteprogram: 1. 2. First enter Program mode (if you are not in Program mode, press the Exit button to the right of the display until you see ProgramMode in the top left of the display.) In Program mode, select a category by pressing one of the Category buttons to the right of the Alpha Wheel. (First make sure the category Shift button is not lit, if it is, press it to unlight it before selecting a category.) Next, find your favorite program in the current category by using the Alpha wheel, - / + buttons, or up/down cursor buttons. (Alternatively, you can find the program by pressing the category Shift button and using the numbered category buttons to enter the programs ID number, then press the

3.

15-2

Power User Tips General Tips

category Enter button. If you use this method, make sure to unlight the category shift button by pressing it again after making your selection.) 4. Lastly, hold the Category button that you wish to save a favorite for (the Category button that is currently lit.) The next time you choose that category, your favorite program will be selected.

Easy Audition (Play A Demo Song For Each Program)

Anytimeyouwanttohearwhataprogramsoundslike,highlighttheprogramsname(whilein Programmode)thenpressthePlay/Pausebuttontoplayabriefsample.TheDemoButton parameterontheMasterMode2pagemustbeonforEasyAuditiontowork;theparameteris onbydefault.SeeDemoButton on page 910fordetails.

Program Mode General Tips

Save The Current Knob And Switch Settings From The Program Mode Main Page OntheProgrammodemainpage,ifyouchangethesettingsofanycontrols(knobposition, assignableswitchon/off,ModWheelposition,aswellasArpSettings,)theLEDontheSave buttonwilllight.WhentheLEDontheSavebuttonislit,presstheSavebuttontobringupthe savedialogandsaveyoureditstothecurrentprogram.(Ifyouswitchtoadifferentprogram, thealterationsthatyoumadetothepreviousprogramwillbelostwithoutwarning.)
Saving A Newly Edited Program

Ifyouaresavingchangestoaprogramthatyouhavenotpreviouslyedited,thesavedialogwill choosethefirstavailable(lowest)userID#asasavelocation(sothatyoudontreplacethe originalprogram.)YoucanalsochooseadifferentID#tosavetheprogramtoandrenamethe programifdesired.IfyouhaveeditedafactoryROMprogramandwishtosaveoverthe originalprogramattheoriginalID#,simultaneouslypressthe/+buttons(belowtheAlpha Wheel)tojumpbetweenselectingtheprogramsoriginalID#andthefirstavailableUser categoryID#.SavingattheprogramsoriginalfactoryID#willreplacethefactoryprogram,but youcanalwaysreturnafactoryROMprogramtoitsoriginalsettingsbydeletingtheprogramat thatID#(seeDelete on page 615.)
Updating A Previously Edited Program

Ifyouaresavingchangestoaprogramthatyouhavepreviouslyedited,thesameID#thatthe editedprogramwassavedwithwillautomaticallybeselected,andyoucansimultaneously pressthe/+buttons(belowtheAlphaWheel)tojumpbetweenselectingtheprogramssame ID#andthefirstavailableUsercategoryID#.Ifyouwishtomakeanupdatededittoa previouslyeditedprogramandreplacetheoldversionatthesameID#,pressingtheSavebutton twicewillhavethesameresultaspressingtheSavebuttonandthenthesavesoftbutton.

15-3

Power User Tips Advanced Tips

Advanced Tips
Intuitive Controller Selection/Data Entry
Forcertainparametersyoucanselectvaluesintuitively,ratherthanhavingtoscrollthrougha list.Dothisbyselectingthedesiredparameter,thenholdingtheEnterbuttonwhilemovingthe desiredphysicalcontrol. Forexample,ontheProgramModePARAMETERSpage(seepage 611)youcanassigna physicalcontrollerforaparameterbyselectingtheControlSourcecolumnforaparameter, holdingtheEnterbuttonandmovingthedesiredcontroller. OntheSetupModeControllerspage(seepage 710,)youcanchoosethecontrollerthatyou wishtomakeanassignmentforbyselectingtheControllerfield,holdingtheEnterbuttonand movingthedesiredcontroller. Asimilartechniquecanbeusedwhensettingkeyranges.Forexample,ontheKEYVELpagein theSetupEditor,youcansettherangeofthecurrentlyselectedzoneasfollows:usethecursor buttonstomovethecursortothevaluefortheLoKeyparameter,press(andhold)theEnter button,thenpressthenoteyouwishtobethelowestnoteforthecurrentlydisplayedzone.The noteyoutriggeredwillappearasthevaluefortheLoKeyparameter.Repeattheprocessforthe HiKeyparameter.

Search Function (Find A Program Or Setup By Name)

YoucanfindprogramsorsetupsbysearchingforastringofcharactersfromtheProgramor Setupmodemainpages(orwhenselectingprogramsfromwiththeSetupEditor.)Onthese pages,holdtheEnterbuttonandpressanyofthenumericCategorybuttonstodisplaythe Searchdialog. Typeinthestringofcharactersyouwanttofindusingthealphanumericpad.Forexample,if yourelookingattheprogramlistandyouwanttofindallprogramscontainingtheword Horn,youwouldtypehorn.Thisfunctionisnotcasesensitive;itwillfindupperandlower casecharactersregardlessofwhatyoutype. Whenyouvetypedthestringofcharactersyouwanttofind,pressEnter.ThePC3LEsearches throughthecurrentlistofobjectsorvalues,findsallitemsthatmatchthestringofcharacters youtyped,anddisplaysthefirstoneitfinds.HoldEnterandpressoneofthe/+buttons (belowtheAlphaWheel)tomovetothenexthigherorlowernumberedobjectthatcontainsthe stringofcharacters. ThestringyousearchforremainsinmemoryuntilthePC3LEisturnedoff.Youcanstoreand selectastringofcharacterswitheachofthenumericbuttons.HoldEnterandpressoneofthe numericbuttonsatanytimetoselectthatstringforasearch.Whenthestringappears,youcan changeit,orjustpressEntertofindthatstring.

15-4

Power User Tips Advanced Tips

Quick Song Recording And Playback (Record An Idea From Any Mode)
TherearethreebuttonslabeledRecord,Play/Pause,andStopbelowthemodeselection buttons.Theycontroltherecordingandplaybackofsongsfromanymode;youdonthavetobe inSongmodetorecordorplayback.However,youllneedtomakesurethattheDemoButton parameteronMasterModePage2issettoOff.OtherwisethesebuttonsareusedforEasy Audition(seeEasyAudition,aboveonpage 3.)SeeDemoButton on page 910fordetails.

Record

Play/Pause

Stop

Usingthesebuttonsaffectsthecurrenttrackofthecurrentsongthatis,thesongandtrackthat wereselectedthelasttimeyouwereinSongmode.Whenyourecord,therecordingtrackand recordingmodearedeterminedbythecurrentsettingsinSongmode;likewisefortheplayback modewhenyoureplayingasong. WhenthesequencerstatusisSTOPPED(neithertheRecordbuttonLEDnorthePlay/Pause buttonLEDislitorflashing),pressRecordtoputthesequencerinRECREADYstatus.The RecordbuttonLEDlights(red).ThenpressPlay/Pausetostartrecording.ThePlay/Pause buttonflashes(green)toindicatethetempo.AnycountoffisdeterminedbythecurrentSong modesettingfortheCountOffparameter.PressPlay/PauseorStoptoendrecordingandgoto theSavedialog,whereyoucansavethesong,ordiscardit. WhenthesequencerstatusisSTOPPED,pressPlay/Pausetobeginplayingthecurrentsong. PressPlay/Pauseagaintopauseplayback,andagaintoresume.PressStoptoendplayback. SeeChapter 10,SongModeandtheSongEditorformoreinformationonSongMode.

15-5

Power User Tips Advanced Tips

Program Mode
Change The Effects Chain InProgrammodeyoucaneasilychangeaprogramseffectschainbyeditingtheprogram.An effectschaincancauseeitheradramaticorasubtlechangetothesoundofaprogram dependingonhowitisused.Followthesestepstochangetheeffectschainofthecurrently selectedprogram. 1. 2. In Program mode, choose the program you would like to edit, then press the Edit button to the left of the display. This will bring you to the EditProg:PARAMETERS page. From the EditProg:PARAMETERS page, press the FX soft button at the bottom right of the display. This will bring you to the EditProg:FX page, where you can change the programs two effects chains. Each program can use up to two effects chains at once: an insert effect and an aux effect (see The EFFECTS (FX) Page on page 6-13 for more details.) Almost all of the PC3LEs factory programs use a reverb or delay effects chain as the Aux effect, and the level of the effect can be controlled by knob 5 (labeled Reverb) by default. The PC3LEs factory programs use a variety of effects chain types for the insert effect, ranging from subtle effects to those that drastically change the programs sound. On the EditProg:FX page, the Insert field will be selected. Use the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons to change the insert effects chain and play some notes to hear the effect. You can also select an effects chain by entering its ID# with the alphanumeric pad and pressing the Enter button, or choose no effects chain by entering 0 with the alphanumeric pad and pressing the Enter button. Some insert effects chains may require you to turn up a parameter in order to hear the effect. Most effect parameters are automatically assigned to knobs. You can view and change parameter assignments and values on the PARAMETERS page by pressing the PARAMS soft button at the bottom of the display (see The PARAMETERS Page on page 6-9 for details.) If changing the insert effects chain changes the programs sound too drastically, try returning it to the programs original chain and change the aux effect instead. To change the aux effects chain, on the EditProg:FX page use the cursor buttons to select the Aux field. Use the Alpha Wheel or - / + buttons to change the aux effects chain and play some notes to hear the effect. You can also select an effects chain by entering its ID# with the alphanumeric pad and pressing the Enter button, or choose no effects chain by entering 0 with the alphanumeric pad and pressing the Enter button. Change the level of the aux effects chain by using knob 5 (labeled Reverb.) With knob 5 turned low, only a little of the sound processed by the effects chain will be blended in with the program. If you turn knob 5 more than half way up, the majority of the programs sound will be processed by the aux effects chain. When you are satisfied with the selected effects chains and parameter settings, press the Exit button to save the edited program and return to the Program mode main page. When prompted to save the program, press the Yes soft button, followed by the Save soft button to save the program with the same name under the lowest available user ID#. To learn how to rename the program or save it under a different ID#, see Saving and Naming on page 5-3.

3.

4.

5.

15-6

Power User Tips Advanced Tips

Change Knob, Switches, and Other Controller Assignments and Control Non-Default Parameters InProgrammode,thePC3LEsfactoryprogramshavesynthesisandeffectsparametersassigned tothePC3LEsknobs,switchesandothercontrolsbydefault(fromtheProgrammodemain page,presstheInfosoftbuttonatthebottomofthedisplaytoseealistofcontrolsandassigned parametersforthecurrentprogram.)Youcanusetheprogrameditortochangeparameter controllerassignments.Forexample,youcouldassignthreeparametersthatyouoftenusetobe controlledfromonerowofknobs,orassignapreviouslyunusedeffectparametertoabe controlledbyaknob.Toeditthecontrollerassignmentsforaprogram,followthesesteps: 1. 2. In Program mode, choose the program you would like to edit, then press the Edit button to the left of the display. This will bring you to the EditProg:PARAMETERS page. On the EditProg:PARAMETERS page, there is a list of all the available parameters that you can assign to controllers such as knobs and switches. With the left column highlighted, you can scroll through the list with the Alpha Wheel, cursor up/down buttons or - / + buttons. As you scroll through the list, the top right corner of the display will show each parameters type. Prog indicates that its either one of the 5 parameters common to all programs (Pan,Expression(program volume,)AuxFX1Wet/Dry,Sustain,andSostenuto,)oraprogramspecificparameter. FXInsert1indicatesthatitisaparameterfromthecurrentinserteffectschain,while FXAux1indicatesthatitisaparameterfromthecurrentauxeffectschain.Selectthe parameterforwhichyouwouldliketoaddorchangeacontrollerassignment. With the desired parameter selected, use the cursor buttons to select the right column in the row of the desired parameter. The right column is the control source column, where you choose a controller to assign to the parameter for that row. With the right column selected, hold the Enter button (at the bottom right of the Category buttons) and move the controller (knob, switch, pedal, etc.,) that you wish to assign to the parameter (pads cant control parameters in Program mode, only in Setup mode.) The name of the moved controller will appear in the right column, indicating that it now controls the parameter for that row. Controllers can be assigned to multiple parameters at once, so you will probably want make sure that the controller you just assigned is not assigned to another parameter. To do this, use the up/ down cursor buttons to scroll through the parameters list (while remaining in the control source column.) If you see the controller that you just assigned in the control source column of another parameter, you can change the assignment to None by entering -1. To do this, use the alphanumeric pad to press +/-, 1, and Enter. The center column in each row on the PARAMETERS page sets a default MIDI value for the parameters controller. See The PARAMETERS Page on page 6-9 for more about setting a MIDI value on the PARAMETERS page. Read the notes in this section to understand the behavior of parameters when their MIDI values are set to None, and how to solve issues that may arise when making controller assignments, like loss of program volume. When you are finished making controller assignments, press the Exit button to save the edited program and return to the Program mode main page. When prompted to save the program, press the Yes soft button, followed by the Save soft button to save the program with the same name under the lowest available user ID#. To learn how to rename the program or save it under a different ID#, see Saving and Naming on page 5-3.

3.

4.

5.

6.

15-7

Power User Tips Advanced Tips

Setup Mode
Assign A Zone To Use Pads Only InSetupmodeitscommontohaveazonethatcanbeplayedfromthepads,butnotfromthe keyboard.Todothis,followthesesteps: 1. 2. From the Setup mode main page, choose the setup that you wish to edit and press the Edit button to the left of the display. This will display the Setup Editor. In the Setup Editor, select the zone that you have assigned to be played from the pads by using the Chan/Zone buttons to the left of the display. The currently selected zone can be viewed in the top right corner of the display. (For details on assigning pads to a zone, see Pads on page 7-16.) With the desired zone selected, press the KEYVEL soft button at the bottom of the display. This will bring you to the KEY-VEL page. On the KEY-VEL page, select the LoKey field, then use the Alpha Wheel to turn this value all the way up to G9. Do the same for the HiKey field if G9 is not already selected. Now this zone should only play from the pads which you have assigned, and not from the keyboard. Press the Exit button to save the edited setup and return to the Setup mode main page. When prompted to save the setup, press the Yes soft button. Next you will be given the choice of choosing an ID# and renaming the setup if desired. For details see Saving and Naming on page 5-3.

3. 4.

5.

15-8

Power User Tips Advanced Tips

Assign Pads To Play Notes, Chords, Riffs, Or To Toggle Other Functions Like Arpeggiators InSetupmodeyoucanassignthePC3LEspadstoplaynotes,chordsorriffs.Youcanalso assigneachpadtofunctionasaswitchthatcancontrolprogramparametersorsendMIDI continuouscontrollervalues(internallyortoexternalequipment.)SeePads on page 716for detailsoneachfunction. SeeChapter 14,Tutorials:SetupModeforexamplesofassigningthePC3LEspadsandother physicalcontrollerstoparametersandcontrollerdestinations.SeeTheControllerDestination List on page 718foralistofparametersthatcanbecontrolledwithphysicalcontrollersvia controldestinationnumbers.Controllerdestinations147andabovecontrolarpeggiatorandriff parameters. Tosetapadtotoggleazonesarpeggiatoronandoff,selectthesetuptoeditandpresstheEdit buttontotheleftofthedisplaytoentertheSetupEditor.IntheSetupEditor,selectthezoneof thearpeggiatoryouwanttocontrolbyusingtheChan/Zonebuttonstotheleftofthedisplay (thecurrentlyselectedzonenumbercanbeviewedinthetoprightcornerofthedisplay.)Toset apadtotoggleazonesarpeggiator,thearpeggiatorsActiveparametermustbesettoOnonthe ARPEGGIATORpageforthatzone.Next,presstheCTRLSsoftbuttonstomovetothe Controllerspageforthesamezone,andchoosethedesiredpadintheControllerfield.Todo this,selecttheControllerfieldwiththecursorbuttons,holdtheEnterbutton(locatedwiththe Categorybuttons)andpressthedesiredpad.Youcanalsoselectthedesiredpadinthe ControllerfieldbyusingtheAlphaWheelor/+buttons.Withthedesiredpadselected,usethe cursorbuttonstoselecttheTypefield,thenusethe/+buttonstoselectSwitch.Next,usethe cursorbuttonstoselecttheDestTypefieldandsetittoCtrlbyusingthe/+buttons.Finally, usethecursorbuttonstoselecttheOnControlfieldandsetittoArpOnbypressing147onthe alphanumericpad,followedbytheEnterbutton.Usethecursorbuttonstoselectthe OffControlfieldandsetittoArpOffbypressing148onthealphanumericpad,followedbythe Enterbutton.Theotherparametersshouldstayattheirdefaults(SWType:Toggled,OnValue: 0,OffValue:0,EntryState:Off,ExitState:Off.)Nowpressingandlightingthecurrentpadwill enablethearpeggiatorforthecurrentzone.Unlightingthecurrentpadwilldisablethe arpeggiatorforthecurrentzone.Repeatthesestepsforeachzonewithadifferentpadtohave separateon/offcontrolsforeachzonesarpeggiator.Youcanalsousethesamepadfordifferent zonesifyouwanttocontrolmultiplearpeggiatorsfromthesamepad.

15-9

Power User Tips Advanced Tips

Create A User Shift Or Velocity Pattern For Custom Arpeggiations ThePC3LEsarpeggiatorcantriggermelodicsequencescalledshiftpatterns,andvelocity sequencescalledvelocitypatterns.Shiftpatternsallowyoutotriggercomplexarpeggiationsby playingasinglekey,andvelocitypatternsallowyoutoaddcomplexvelocitychangesto arpeggiations.ThePC3LEcomeswithanumberoffactoryshiftandvelocitypatterns,butyou canalsoprogramyourowninSetupmodeforcustomarpeggiationsandvelocitypatterns. Fordetailsonusingandcreatingshiftpatterns,seeShiftPattern(ShiftPatt) on page 741.For detailsonusingandcreatingvelocitypatterns,seethePatternsettingunder Velocity on page 737. Record A Short Song For Use As A Riff, Record A Setup To Song Mode RiffsarefullsongsorindividualtracksofasongcreatedinthePC3LEsequencerthatyoucan triggerinsetupmode.Everyzoneinasetupcanhaveitsownriffacompletelyindependent sequence.Riffscanbeusedtoaccompanyyourplayinglikeabackingtrack,butriffsgiveyou moreoptionssuchasendlesslooping,stoppingorstartingdifferentinstrumentparts,theability totransposeinstrumentsorchangetempoduringplayback,andmanyotheroptions. Tocreateyourownriffs,firstrecordandsaveasequenceinSongmode.Ariffcanplaysingleor multipletracksofasongatonce.TogetstartedwithSongmode,seeChapter 13,Tutorial:Song Mode.Ifyouhaveasetupthatyouwanttoaddnewlyrecordedriffsto,itmaybeeasiertorecord thesetupintoSongmode.Todothis,seeRecordingASetupToSongMode on page 767.Lastly, seeBasicsOfUsingRiffs on page 1435fortutorialsonusingandaddingriffstosetups.

15-10

Specifications MIDI Implementation Chart

Appendix A Specifications
MIDI Implementation Chart
Model: PC3LE
Manufacturer: Young Chang Digital Synthesizers Function
Basic Channel Default Changed Default Mode Messages Altered Note Number Velocity After Touch Pitch Bender O Control Change O True # Song Pos. System Common Song Sel. Tune System Real Time Clock Messages Local Control Aux Messages All Notes Off Active Sense Reset Notes 0 - 127 True Voice Note ON Note OFF Keys Channels 0 - 127 O O X O O 0 - 31 32 - 63 (LSB) 64 - 127 1 - 999 0 - 127 O O O X O O O O X X *Manufacturers ID = 07 Device ID: default = 0; programmable 0127 O 0 - 127 O O O O O 0 - 31 32 - 63 (LSB) 64 - 127 1 - 999 0 - 127 O* O O X O O O O X X Controller assignments are programmable Standard and custom formats

Date: 12/01/07 Version 1.0

Transmitted
1 1 - 16 Mode 3

Recognized
1 1 - 16 Mode 3

Remarks
Memorized Use Multi mode for multitimbral applications

Program Change System Exclusive

Mode 1: Omni On, Poly Mode 3: Omni Off, Poly

Mode 2: Omni On, Mono Mode 4: Omni Off, Mono

O = yes X =no

A-1

Specifications Specifications

Specifications
PC3LE6 Height: (5") (12.7 cm) Depth: (14.5") (36.83 cm) Length: (41.5") (105.41 cm) Weight: (31 lb.) (14.06 kg) PC3LE7 Height: (5") (12.7 cm) Depth: (14.5") (36.83 cm) Length: (49.9") (126.7 cm) Weight: (37.5 lb.) (17 kg) PC3LE8 Height: (5") (12.7 cm) Depth: (14.5") (36.83 cm) Length: (56.48") (143.41 cm) Weight: (54.15 lb.) (24.56 kg) Power (PC3LE6, PC3LE7, PC3LE8) Internal AC power supply Automatic selection 90-250V AC operation, 50-60 Hz Fuse: 0.25A slow blow Measured AC input current: 130 mA at 120 VAC, 65 mA at 240 VAC Audio Outputs (PC3LE6, PC3LE7, PC3LE8) Main: Balanced 1/4 TRS jack +21DBu maximum output 400 ohms balanced source impedance 24-bit A-to-D converters >120dB dynamic range, balanced Headphones: 8Vrms maximum output, 47 ohms source impedance

A-2

Appendix B PC3LE Bootloader

TheBootloaderistheprogramthatrunswhenthePC3LEisfirstturnedon.Itsjobistocheck thathardwareisfunctional,initializethedigitalsystems,andloadthemainsynthesizer program.UndernormalcircumstancesyoumightnotevennoticethattheBootloaderisthereat all,sincethePC3LEwillstartuponitsownwithoutanyproblem.However,ifyouwantto updateyourunit,orperformmaintenanceonit,youmayneedtointeractwiththeBootloader programitself.ThisappendixdescribeswhattheBootloadercandoandhowyoucanuseits functions. ThefirstthingtounderstandisthatPC3LEexecutableprogramsandallobjectdataresideona filesystemcontainedinsidetheinstrument.Thisfilesystemisbasedonflashmemory technologyandwillpersistacrosspowercycles.WhenthePC3LEstartsup,theBootloader copiesthesynthesizerprogramintomemoryandexecutesitjustlikeaPCbootsupwhen youturniton.ThePC3LEalsostoresitsfactorydefinedobjects,andallofyourowncustomized userobjectsonthefilesystem.TheBootloaderprogramitselfisnotfoundonthefilesystem. Instead,itresidesinaROMchipthatcannotbeerased,andthereforeispermanentlyinstalledin yourPC3LE.

Using the Bootloader Menu

NormallytheBootloaderprogramwilldoitstasksandhandovercontroltothesynthesizer programautomatically.IfyouwanttointeractwiththeBootloaderitself,holddowntheExit button(totherightofthedisplay)whileturningthepoweron(whilethemessageLoading... isdisplayedonthefrontpanel).Insteadofcompletingthebootprocess,theBootloaderwill displayitsmainmenupageonthescreen:

Usethesoftbuttonsunderneaththedisplaytochooseanaction. RUN PC3LE UPDATE IMAGE RUN DIAGS SYSTEM RESET FILE UTILITIES Thiswillbootthesysteminitsusualway.Thisisusefulifyouveupdated thesynthesizerprogramandwanttotryitout. Thisoffersamenuofchoicestoyouforsystemupdate. ThiswillrunthePC3LEdiagnosticswhichcanhelpdetermineiftheresa hardwareerroronyourunit,andifsowhatitis. ThiswillclearoutalluserdefinedobjectsandreturnthePC3LEtoits defaultFactorystate. Thisoffersamenuoffilesystemfunctionsthatcanbeusefulin maintainingyoursystemordiagnosingsoftwareproblems.

B--1

Updating PC3LE Software and Objects

ThemostcommonuseoftheBootloadermenuistoupdateyourPC3LEusingnewversionsof softwareandobjectssuppliedbyKurzweil.Newversionswillbemadeperiodicallyasweadd newfeaturesorimproveperformance;downloadthesefreeupgradesfromourwebsiteat www.kurzweil.com. TherearetwowaystosendfilestothePC3LE:usingaUSBdevicesuchasathumbdrive,orvia aUSBcableconnectedtoacomputer.TheBootloaderrecognizesbothmethods,andwillchoose theonethatisactivewhenrequested,i.e.aUSBdevicepluggedintotheUSBStorageportonthe rearpaneloraUSBcablepluggedintotheUSBComputerportandanactivecomputer supportingUSBcommunications. TouseaUSBdeviceyoullneedavalidUSBdeviceandacomputerwithaUSBtypeAport. MostmodernWindowsandMacOScomputerssupportUSBdevicesinaverystraightforward way.YoushouldbeabletodraganddropthePC3LEfilesrightontotheUSBdevicedirectory. Afterthefilesarecopied,removethedevicefromthecomputerandplaceitintheUSBstorage portontherearpanelofthePC3LE.AUSBconnectorwillonlyfitintotheportiforiented properly,sodontforceitintotheport,asthismaydamageyourPC3LEorUSBdevice.Ifyou arehavingtroubleinsertingyourUSBconnectorintotheport,tryflippingtheconnectorover. TotransferfileswithoutaUSBdevice,plugaUSBcableintothePC3LEComputerportandthe computer.Afteryouenterthebootloadermenu,thecomputershouldrecognizethatanew deviceisavailablehavingthenameKurzweilPC3LE.Filescanbedraggedanddropped directlytothisdeviceiconandwillbeimmediatelyavailableonthePC3LE. TheUPDATEIMAGEmenulookslikethis:

Usethesoftbuttonsbelowthedisplaytochoosetheappropriatemoduletoupdate.Mostofthe timeyoullwanttochooseMAINIMAGEorMAINOBJECT.Theexecutableimagefilewill beafilewithanamelike:PC3LESY150.BIN.Theobjectlibraryfilewillhaveanamelike: OBJ120.PLE. Afterchoosingamoduletypetoload,thePC3LEwillofferyouachoiceforwhichstoragetype toloadyourfilesfrom(seebelow.)MakesureyourUSBdeviceisconnectedandchoosethe appropriatetypetoseealistoffiles,orpresstheBacksoftbuttontoreturntotheprevious screen.

B--2

Usethe/+buttons,upanddowncursorbuttonsortheAlphaWheeltochooseafilefromthe filelistdisplayedonthescreen.Theasteriskontheleftsidepointstothefileselected.Ifthereare subdirectoriesonthedevice,youcanusethesoftbuttonslabeledDOWNandUPtonavigate throughthem.Whenyouveselectedthefileyouwanttoinstall,pressthesoftbuttonlabeled OKtoperformtheinstallation.PresstheCANCELsoftbuttontoreturntothepreviousscreen. Ifyouhaveupdatedanimagebutwishtoreturntotheearlierversion,youcanusethe RESTOREOLDERfeatureintheUPDATEIMAGEmenu.Youwillagainbeaskedtochoosethe imagetorestore.Notethatonlyoneversionofthepreviouslyinstalledimageisavailabletobe restored.Ifyouverestoredonce,anotherrestorewillbringbackthemostrecentlyupdated version.

Run Diags
ThisprogramrunsspecifichardwarechecksonPC3LEsystems.Mostofthetimeyouwont needtorunthediagnostics,butifyourehavingsomeproblemswiththeinstrumentitmaybe helpfultoperformtheseinteractivetestswhencontactingKurzweilsupport. Toexitthediagnosticprogram,presstheEXITbutton.YouwillreturntothemainBootloader menu.

System Reset
Ifyouvemademanycomplexupdatestoyourobjectsandhavesavedanumberoffilesoffto externalstorage,youmightwanttorestoretheinstrumenttoitsdefaultstate.Thisisespecially helpfulifyourehavingproblemsgettingsoundprogramsorsetupstoworkproperly,orthink theremaybesomekindofunderlyinghardwareproblem.(Remembertofirstsaveyourwork intheStoragemenu.Oncedeleted,thefilesarecompletelyremovedfromthePC3LEand thereisnowaytoretrievethem.)Toclearalluserobjectsandrestorethefactorydefaultstate, pressthesoftbuttonlabeledSystemResetontheBootloadermenu.ThePC3LEwillaskyouto confirmthisaction.PressOKtocompletetheclearfunction,orCANCELtostopwithout alteringanything.

File Utilities
UsethismenutoformatthePC3LEsinternalflashmemory,whichdeletesallofthePC3LEs internallystoredobjectsandtheOS.InrarecasesKurzweilsupportmayinstructyoutoformat theinternalflashifyouarehavingissuesthatcannotbesolvedotherwise.Itispossible(though notlikely)thatthePC3LEfilesystemcanbecomecorruptedduetohardwarefailureorpower outageduringcertainoperations.ThiswillresultintheBootloaderbeingunabletobringupthe synthesizersystemcorrectly.Insuchacircumstance,theBootloaderwilltakeovercontroland presentitsusualmenu.Ifthefilesystemiscompletelycorrupted,itwillnotbepossibleto reconfigurewithoutfirstformattingtheinternalflashmemory. (Ifpossible,remembertofirstsaveyourworkintheStoragemenu.Oncedeleted,thefilesare completelyremovedfromthePC3LEandthereisnowaytoretrievethem.)Pressthesoft

B--3

buttonlabeledFormatFlashtoreinitializetheinternalfilesystem.Thiswilldeleteeverything thatwasstoredinternallyonthePC3LE,andleaveaclean,emptyfilesystemreadyforuse. Aftertheformatiscomplete,youwillneedtoinstallanOS,andobjects(seeUpdatingPC3LE SoftwareandObjects on page B2,above.)

B--4

PC3LE Legacy File Conversion Object Types and Conversion Details

Appendix C PC3LE Legacy File Conversion

ThePC3LEcanloadobjectsfromolderKurzweilK2seriesproducts.Loadedobjectsare convertedtoobjecttypesnativetothePC3LE(seebelowforobjecttypesthatcanbeconverted.) Someobjectparameterscannotbeconvertedandmustbeadjustedbytheuserafterconversion (seeobjecttypesbelowfordetails.)ThePC3LEdoesnotloadsamples,soduringkeymap conversionthePC3LEwilltrytofindsimilarsamplestouseinthePC3LEROM.Thisprocess mayormaynotbesuccessful.ThePC3LEisunabletoconvertthesampleskippingparameter (SmpSkp,)soPC3LEROMsamplesusedforconvertedK2serieskeymapscanonlybe transposedupwardbyoneoctave. Onlylegacyobjectsendingwiththefileextension.K26,.K25,or.KRZcanbeloadedand converted. PC3 and PC3K Objects ThePC3LEcanalsoloadobjectscreatedwiththePC3orPC3K(.PC3or.P3Kfiles.)ThePC3LE doesnotloadsamples,sosampleobjectsfromthePC3Kwhichrefertosamplesinusersample RAMcannotbeloaded.UsersampleobjectswhichrefertothePC3orPC3KsfactoryROM samplescanbeloaded.SomeobjectscannotbeeditedwiththePC3LE(FXChainsand IntonationTables)butcanstillbeloaded.ThePC3LEhasfewerFXunitsavailablethanthePC3 andPC3K,sosomeFXmaynotbeloadedifachainusesmoreunitsthanavailableinthePC3LE. ThePC3LEalsohasfewervoicesavailablethanthePC3andPC3K,soPrograms,Setupsand SongswillnotbeabletouseallLayers,ZonesorTracksiftheyrequiremorevoicesthanare available.

Object Types and Conversion Details

Keymap Objects
AllKseriesKeymapobjectscanbeloaded,allparameterswillbeusedorconvertedtoPC3LE specificparameters.ThePC3LEisunabletoconvertthesampleskippingparameter(SmpSkp,) soPC3LEROMsamplesusedforconvertedK2serieskeymapscanonlybetransposedupward byoneoctave.

Program Objects
MostKseriesProgramobjectscanbeloaded,butFXarenotconvertedandmustbesetbythe user.AreverbeffectissetbydefaultforconvertedPrograms.SomeDSPALGSandDSPobjects (somefilters,oscillators,etc.)cannotbeconverted,sousermayhavetoadjustsomeProgram layerstousenewALGsorDSPobjects.ThePC3LEdoesnotloadsamples,soduringkeymap conversionthePC3LEwilltrytofindsimilarsamplestouseinthePC3LEROM.Thisprocess mayormaynotbesuccessful.ThePC3LEisunabletoconvertthesampleskippingparameter (SmpSkp,)soPC3LEROMsamplesusedforconvertedK2serieskeymapscanonlybe transposedupwardbyoneoctave.KB3programscreatedwithaK2500orK2600cannotbe loadedtothePC3LE,howeverthePC3LEcontainsavarietyofKB3programswhichcaneasily bemodifiedandedited.Also,TripleModeprogramscreatedwiththeK26seriescannotbe loadedtothePC3LE,howeverPC3LEprogramscanuseCascadeMode.CascadeModeallowsa programsignaltoberoutedthroughupto32layersofDSPalgorithms(seeAltInputfor Algorithms(CascadeMode) on page 631fordetails.)

C-1

PC3LE Legacy File Conversion Object Types and Conversion Details

Setup Objects
AllKseriesSetupobjectscanbeloaded,butFXarenotconvertedandtheusersetProgram effectsareusedbydefault(ProgramFXarenotconvertedandmustbesetbytheuser.)Also,any controllersettingsforathirdorfourthswitchpedalwillnotbeconverted(becausethePC3LE onlyhastwoswitchpedals.)

C-2

Index
A
About927 Addinglayers652 Adjustparameter(EnvCtl)650 Adjustingsamplevolumes124 Algorithms Editing632 AllControllersOff920 AllNotesOff920 AlphaWheel39 Alphabeticentry39,53 Alphanumericpad39 AltInputforAlgorithms631 AlternativeAttackparameter(Keymap)Parameters Keymap622 AlternativeStart SampleEditor1212 AMPENVpage(ProgramEditor)646 Amplitudeenvelope Decaysegment647 Natural646 User646 Amplitudeenvelopeparameters647648 Amplitudeenvelopes646 Appendsoftbutton1110 ArpActive736 ArpEnablebutton35 ArpLatchbutton35 Arpeggiator Active736 Beats736 Duration736 Glissando744 InProgramMode615 InSetupMode735 Latch742 Limit739 LimitOption739 LowKey(LoKey)andHighKey(HiKey)744 Order736 Shift739 shiftingnotes739 Velocity737 ASCIIcharacters53 ASRpage(ProgramEditor)643 ASRparameters644645 Assignsample126 AssignableKnobs InSetupMode711 AssignablePads InProgramMode612 InSetupMode716 AssignableSwitches InSetupMode714 Assigningsamplestokeymaps123 Attackparameter(ASR)644

AttackPortamentoparameter(Common)640 AttackTimeandLevelparameters(AmpEnv)647 Audiocables22

B
BankSelect MIDIReceivepage920 Basicediting51 BasicMIDIchannel917 BootLoader13 BootloaderB1 Bottomlineofdisplay36 Bounce SongModeTRACKPage1025 Buildingakeymap127 Buttons Panic63 ButtonsMode911

C
Cancelsoftbutton1110 CascadeMode631 ChainInfo Export1111 Chan/Zonebuttons38 Change SongModeTRACKPage1030 Changingintonationkey97 Channel/Program(CH/PROG)Page76 SetupMode769 Characters53 Clickingduringportamento640,641 COMMONPage SongMode1019 Commonparameters639660 Compatibility KSeriesObjectsC1 ConnectingMIDI23 continuouspedals14 Contrast24 ControlSetup SetupEditor769 Controlsources FUNs645 Keytracking630 Source1andSource2630 Velocitytracking630 Controllers entryvaluesinProgramMode63 ControllingLFOrate643 conventionsforeditingobjects51 Copy SongEditorTRACKPage1024 Copyinglayers652 Creatinglayers652 Crossfadeparameter(Output)638 CrossfadeSenseparameter(Output)638 Cursorbuttons37

D
Dataentry39 Decaysegment647 DecayTimeandLevelparameters(AmpEnv)647 Delayparameter(ASR)644 Delete onObjectUtilitiespage928 DeleteLayersoftbutton652 Deletinglayers652 Deletingobjects56 DemoSongs1315 Destination MIDITransmitPage912 Dialogs Save53 diamondicon54 Digitalaudiooutput22 DigitalOutputVolume98 Directories114 Display36 Doublebuttonpresses311 DRAWBRpage(ProgramEditor)661 DrumPads InSetupMode716 ProgramMode612 DrumPadsColor blue717 red717 DrumRemap638,99 DrumTracks Songmode1020 DuplicateLayersoftbutton652 Duplicatinglayers652 DynamicVAST632

EQpage(ProgramEditor)669 Erase SongModeTRACKPage1024 EVENTPage SongMode1031 EXITbutton38 Exitvalues713 Export MIDIfile,ProgramInfo,ChainInfo1111 Extendedsampleloop1210 Externalsequencer102 ExternalTempoSource764

F
Files Everything117 Loading56 Master117 Saving56 FillMode1110 Findingobjects312,154 Fineadjust630 FormattingaUSBDevice112,1111 FreezePedalparameter(Layer)626 Frontpanelnavigation36 FUNpage(ProgramEditor)645 Functionsoftbuttons652 FX ProgramMode613 FXModeonMasterpage98

G
GeneralMIDI99 DrumRemap638,99 Globalsparameter(Commonpage)641 Globalsparameter(Common)660 Grab SongModeTRACKPage1029 Grounding22

E
EasyAudition26,62,153 EDITbutton38 EditSong COMMONPage1019 EVENTPage1031 Editing51 EditingAlgorithms632 editingconventions51 EditingKB3programs659 EditingSamples129 EditingVASTprograms69 EditProgExitpage53 EditProgSavepage53 Effects ProgramMode613 Electricalgrounding22 Enableparameter(Layer)624 EnableSenseparameter(Layer)624 ENV2andENV3pages(ProgramEditor)648 ENVCTLpage(ProgramEditor)649 Envelopecontrol649 Envelopecontrolparameters650 Envelopes646,648

H
Hardreset926 HighKeyparameter(Layer)623 HighVelocityparameter(Layer)623 HoldThroughAttackparameter(Layer)626 HoldUntilDecayparameter(Layer)626

I
ID#s136 Ignorerelease626 Impactparameter(EnvCtl)651 ImportLayersoftbutton652 Importinglayers652 Info Export1111 INFOEditor651 INFOsoftbutton

ii

ProgramEditor651 Infosoftbutton27,63,82 Insert SongModeTRACKPage1026 Intonationkey97 Intonationtables96,97 Introductiontoediting51 Intuitivedataentry312,154 intuitiveentry146

LoopSwitch SampleEditor1211 LoopTypeparameter(AmpEnv)648 Loopingsamples621 Loops1315 LowKeyparameter(Layer)623 LowVelocityparameter(Layer)623

M
Masterfiles117 Mastermode43 Mastermodepage91 MasterTranspose92 Maximumdelayparameter(Layer)624 MaximumRateparameter(LFO)643 Memoryobjects54 metronome134 countoffoptions135 MIDI AboutMIDI131 AllNotesOff920 Basicchannel917 Programchangeformats925 Receivemode917 Transmitparameters912 Utilities926 MIDIchannel913 MIDIconnections23 MIDIdisconnected111 MIDIfile export1111 Load111 MIDIImplementationChartA1 MIDIMachineControl108 MIDIprogramchanges916 MIDIReceivepage920 MIDIsequenceLoad,Save,Export108 MIDITimeClock102 Minimumdelayparameter(Layer)624 MinimumRateparameter(LFO)642 MISCpage(ProgramEditor)666 Miscellaneous(MISC)129 MMC108 ModWheel35 Modebuttons32 Modeparameter(ASR)644 Modeselection31,41 Modes41 Program61 Modes,using42 Monosoundsystems22 Monophonicparameter(Common)639 Monophonicprograms639 MTC102 Multivelocitykeymaps124 MuteZn721

K
KseriesobjectconversionC1 K2600 bankmode79 KB3659 Polyphony660 KB3channel65 KB3programs27 KeyRange145 Keyrange123 Keytracking630 Keytrackingparameter(EnvCtl)650 KeyTrackingparameter(Keymap)620 Key/Velocity(KEY/VEL)Page727 Keyboardnaming55 KEYCLKpage(ProgramEditor)665 Keymap127 KeymapEditor121 Assignsample126 Newrange125 KeymapEditorParameters123 KEYMAPpage(ProgramEditor)619 Keymapparameter(Keymappage)620 Keymapparameters622 Keymaps616 Keymaps,stereo620 Knobs InSetupMode711 KVAOscillators653

L
Layerdelaycontrol624 LAYERpage(ProgramEditor)622 Layerparameters623626 Layers Adding652 Deleting652 Duplicating652 Importing652 LayersOfInstruments148 LCD36 LegacyobjectconversionC1 Legatoplayparameter(Common)640 LFOpage(ProgramEditor)642 LFOparameters642643 LFOs642,643 Linecord22 Loadingfiles56 LoadingIndividualObjects119

N
Naming136

iii

Namingobjectsusingthekeyboard55 Naturalamplitudeenvelope646 Navigation36 NewLayersoftbutton652 Noisegenerator621 Notetriggering624 Numberofloopsparameter(AmpEnv)648 Numericentry39

O
ObjecttypeandID52 Objects51 Deleting56 loadingindividually119 MasterModeDelete928 Naming53 RAM52,54 Renaming53 ROM52,54 Octav63,82 Opaqueparameter(Layer)625 OSVersion927 Oscillators653 OUTPUTpage(ProgramEditor:KB3)669 Overwrtsoftbutton1110

P
Pads InSetupMode716 ProgramMode612 PadsColor blue717 red717 Pages36 AMP(KB3)662 AMPENV(Amplitudeenvelope)646 ASR(Attack,Sustain,Release)643 DRAWBR661 ENV2andENV3(Envelopes)648 ENVCTL(Envelopecontrol)649 EQ669 FUN(Attack,Sustain,Release)645 KEYCLK665 KEYMAP619 LAYER622 LFO642 Mastermode91 MIDIXMIT912 MISC666 OUTPUT(KB3)669 PERC663 PERC2664 PITCH(KB3)662 TONEWL659 PanModeparameter(Output)637 Panparameter(Output)637 Panicbutton27,63 Parameters AmpEnv647648

ASR644645 Common639660 Envelopecontrol650 Layer623626 LFO642643 Path114 PC3andPC3KObjectsC1 PC3LE611,A2 PC3LE711,A2 PC3LE811,A2 PCH926 Pedals23 pedals14 PERCpage(ProgramEditor:KB3)662 PERCpage(ProgramEditor)663 PERC2page(ProgramEditor)664 Phaseparameter(LFO)643 PitchBendModeparameter(Layer)624 PitchBendRangeparameter(Common)639 PITCHpage(ProgramEditor:KB3)662 PitchWheel35 Play/Pausebutton withEasyAudition26,62,153 Playbackloops621 PlaybackModeparameter(Keymap)621 Polyphony616,927 KB3660 Portamentoclick640,641 Portamentoparameter(Common)640 PortamentoRateparameter(Common)640 Powercable22 PressureMap Master95 MIDIReceive919 MIDITransmit915 PrgChgMode920 Programchangeformats925 Programchangemode920 Programchanges Extended925 MIDI916 QuickAccessmode81 ProgramEditor AMPpage(KB3)662 AMPENVpage646 ASRpage643 DRAWBRpage661 ENV2andENV3pages648 ENVCTLpage649 EQpage669 FUNpage645 KEYCLKpage665 KEYMAPpage619 LAYERpage622 LFOpage642 MISCpage666 OUTPUTpage(KB3)669 PERCpage663 PERC2page664 PITCHpage(KB3)662 Softbuttons618

iv

TONEWLpage659 ProgramInfo Export1111 Programmode26,42,61,62 Softbuttons63 Programmodepage62 Programs Addinglayers652 Deletinglayers652 Duplicatinglayers652 Editing(KB3)659 Editing(VAST)69 Importinglayers652 KB327 selecting26 VAST27,616 punchingin139 Punctuation53

Q
Quantize SongModeTRACKPage1027 Quantizing1315 QuickAccessEditor81 QuickAccessmode28,43

R
RAMobjects52,54 RateControlparameter(LFO)643 RealtimeControlofArpeggiatorParameters746 RecordingOverview131 Recordingsongs313,155 Region/Criteriawindow Songmode1021 Releaseparameter(ASR)645 ReleaseTimeandLevelparameters(AmpEnv)647 ReleasingASRs644 Remap SongModeTRACKPage1031 Rename136 Renamingobjects53 RepeatingASRs644 Reset hard926 Reversingsamples621 RiffTroubleshooting1452 Riffs Setupmode764 ROMobjects54 ROMobjects,saving52 RootKey SampleEditor1210

S
S/PDIF22 SampleEditor127,129 samplerate22 Samples

Adjustingvolume124 Assigningtokeymaps123 Playbackmode621 Tuning124 Savedialog53 Saving Naming136 Rename136 SetupMode143 SongMode135 SavingandnamingObjects Saving53 Savingfiles56 SavingMasterandEverythingFiles117 Savingobjects RAM54 ROM54 SavingRAMobjects52 SavingROMobjects52 Searchfunction312,154 Selectsoftbutton1110 Selectingmodes31,41 Selectingparameters36 Selectingprogramsandsetups26 Sequencer tutorial101 sequencer131 Setdrawbars662 Setup CompareEditor75 SetupEditor75,143 ControlSetup769 DeleteSoftButton765 DeleteZone(DelZn)SoftButton766 DuplicateZone(DupZn)SoftButton765 ImportZone(ImpZn)SoftButton765 LocalProgram(LocalPrg)76 NameSoftButton765 NewZone(NewZn)SoftButton765 Softbuttons765 SetupMode141 Channel/Program(CH/PROG)Page769 CreatingANewSetup1412,1416 LayersOfInstruments148 Saving143 SplitProgramSetup144 VolumeAndPanOfZones1410 Setupmode42,71 Setups28 BENDPage757 BendRange757 COMMONPage763 Curve(Curv)712 Destination76 Destination(Dest)712 Entry(Ent)andExitStates715,717 EntryPan,ExitPan726 Entryvalues713 EntryVolume,ExitVolume726 Lowandhighkey727 LowVelocity(LoVel),HighVelocity(HiVel)734

MIDIBank77 MIDIBankMode79 MIDIchannel77 MIDIControllerDestinationList718 NoteMaps728 OffValue715 OnValue715 Pan/Volume(PAN/VOL)Page726 SaveSoftButton765 Scale712 selecting26 Status78 Transpose728 Transposing71 VelocityCurve732 VelocityOffset730 VelocityScale(VelScale)729 Shapeparameterparameter(LFO)643 Shift SongModeTRACKPage1028 ShiftKeyNumber,ShiftKey(ShKeyNum,ShiftKey)723 ShiftPattern(ShiftPatt)741 Shiftingnotes intheArpeggiator739 Signaltonoiseratio24 Softbuttons37 KeymapEditor125 inProgramEditor618 SampleEditor1211 SetupEditor765 Specialfunctions652 SoftwareUpgrades29 Soloingazone75 Song Export1111 SongEditor1019 TRACKPage1021 SongMode101,131 DemoSongs1315 Loops1315 ProgramChanges1316 SongStructure1316 TheEventList1316 Songmode43 Songs Recording313,155 Sostenuto719 SostenutoPedalparameter(Layer)626 Source1630 SourceandDepthparameters(EnvCtl)650 Specialfunctionsoftbuttons652 SpecificationsA2 SplitPoint145 SplitProgramSetup144 StartPoint SampleEditor1212 Startup21 Stereoparameter(Keymap)620 StorageMode56,111 Storagemode43 Sustain719

Sustainnotworking920 SustainPedalparameter(Layer)626 SustainingASRs644 switchpedals14 Switches InSetupMode714 SystemExclusiveID920

T
TapTempo133 Tempo133 Master92 SongmodeTempoTrack1033 TapTempofunction133 TimbreShiftparameter(Keymap)621 timesignature133 TONEWLpage(ProgramEditor)659 Toplineofdisplay36 TRACKPage SongEditor1021 Transpose Master92 MIDI913 SongModeTRACKPage1028 Transposeparameter(Keymap)620 Transposingsetups71 Trigparameter(Layer)624 Triggerparameter(ASR)644 Triggeringnotesonstartup624 TRIM1212 Tuningsamples124 Tuningtootherinstruments92

U
USBDevice formatting112,1111 USBMIDIdisabled23 USBMIDIdisconnected111 USBPort25 Useramplitudeenvelope646 Usingthemodes42

V
VariableArchitectureSynthesis12 VAST12 VASTprogramstructure616 VASTprograms27,616 VelocityMap MIDIReceive918 MIDITransmit914 VelocityRange124 Velocitytracking630 Velocitytrackingparameter(EnvCtl)650 Velocitytrackingparameter(Keymap)620 virtualdrive USBStorageMode25 Voiceallocation927 Voicechannels616

vi

W
Waveformdisplay1212

X
Xpose27,63,82

Z
Zerocrossings1213 Zones Soloing75 zones142

vii